# PAMS Fresh Generation # Activity purpose Activity purpose is the reference list that supplies the names shown in the Activity purposes list. Use this page when you need to review or maintain those names. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Find and open Activity purposes](#find-and-open-activity-purposes) | | Understand the list and its fields | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add or change a purpose | [Add or edit an Activity purpose](#add-or-edit-an-activity-purpose) | | Remove a purpose | [Remove an Activity purpose](#remove-an-activity-purpose) | | Resolve a message | [When an action goes wrong](#when-an-action-goes-wrong) | | Maintain related reference lists | Reference-list data | ![Identify the Activity purposes page in Configuration.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5087264d4430fc6be3da4297c15e7918.png) ## Before you start The Activity purposes page is a protected configuration route. What you can see and do depends on your permissions and on how your company has set up this list. **Prerequisites** | Check | What must be true | |---|---| | Route | Select **Configuration**, then **Activity Purpose**. | | Access | You have access to the protected configuration route. | | Subscription | The configuration subscription is included. | | List setup | The columns and fields shown for this list may vary with your organisation’s setup. | ## Find and open Activity purposes Use this procedure to reach the list and open a new or existing purpose. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the configuration route. - The configuration subscription is included. **Steps** 1. Select **Configuration**, then **Activity Purpose**. 2. Confirm that the page heading reads `Activity purposes`. 3. Confirm that the list contains the **Name** column. 4. Choose what you want to open: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open a new purpose | **New** | | Open an existing purpose | The row edit action | ![Locate the Activity purposes list and its Name column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f59b07c68fe2835c21ba8a5b51e82c3b.png) **Result:** The Activity purposes list is open, or the new/edit dialog is open for the purpose you selected. ## Understand the list and form The list shows the configured fields for each Activity purpose. The form uses the same configuration to decide which fields are available and which requirements apply. | Area | What you use it for | Rule | |---|---|---| | List columns | Read each purpose in the list | The visible header is **Name**; the list showed 8 entries. | | Text field | Enter text values | Required only where your company configures it. | | Select field | Choose from available values | Required only where your company configures it. | | Date field | Enter a date | Required only where your company configures it. | | Percentage field | Enter a percentage | Required only where your company configures it; the value is from `0` through `100`. | | Amount field | Enter an amount with its currency | Required only where your company configures it; the value cannot be below `0`. | | Survey answer details | Enter the answer text and answer rate when that list type is in use | Both fields are required; the answer rate is from `0` through `100`. | | Reference-list question | Enter the question text when that list type is in use | The question text is required. | | Reference-list question unit | Enter the unit name when that list type is in use | The unit name is required. | In the new-purpose dialog, the available field is **Name** and the dialog provides **OK** and **Cancel** actions. The list uses **Name** as its visible column. Other fields depend on the configured list type. The list also exposes controls titled `Refresh` and `Settings`. ![Review the Name field and dialog actions before saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b16458aad566969c405dddcad30111fd.png) ## Add or edit an Activity purpose Use this procedure to add a new purpose or change an existing one. **Prerequisites** - The Activity purposes list is open. - For a new purpose, **New** is available. - For an existing purpose, the row edit action is available. **Steps** 1. Choose one route: | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Add a purpose | Select **New**. | | Change a purpose | Select the row edit action for the purpose. | 2. In **Name**, enter the purpose name. 3. Complete any additional fields that your configured list presents. 4. Choose the result you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the purpose | **OK** | | Close without saving | **Cancel** | If the form is valid, an edit displays `Data updated Successfully`; a new entry displays `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The dialog closes after a successful save and the list reloads with the updated or added purpose. Selecting **Cancel** closes the dialog without saving. ## Remove an Activity purpose Use this procedure to remove a purpose after confirming that it is no longer needed. **Prerequisites** - The Activity purposes list is open. - Delete access is available for the row. - More than one item remains in the list. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete action menu. 2. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose the result you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the purpose | **Cancel** | | Remove the purpose | **Delete** | **Result:** **Cancel** closes the confirmation without removing the purpose. A successful deletion displays `Data Deleted Successfully` and refreshes the list. ## When an action goes wrong Use the message text to choose the next action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters and apply the filter again. | | `Default item` | The selected item is a default item. | Do not delete that item. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The delete confirmation is open. | Select **Cancel** to keep the item. Select **Delete** to continue. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The deletion completed. | Return to the list and review the remaining rows. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Saved data is related to the item. | Keep the item and review the related saved data. | | `Failed to Delete` | The deletion failed. | Leave the item in place and try again after checking the row and access. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list cannot be reduced below one item. | Keep at least one item in the list. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The edit completed. | Review the updated row in the list. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The new item completed. | Review the new row in the list. | | `Data Importing completed` | The import completed. | Review the imported rows in the list. | ## What to do next The Activity purposes page is one list in a shared configuration surface. Its visible navigation includes related reference lists such as Lost Reasons, Regret Reasons, Cancellation Reasons, Order Cancellation Reasons, Units, Delivery Terms, Payment Methods, Guarantee Types, Account Types, Offer Status, Order Status, Inquiry Status, and Order Activation Conditions. Open the related list when you need to maintain one of those reference values. # Banks ## Banks Banks is the reference screen for maintaining the bank entries available in your configuration. Open the Banks page from the configuration area. This page covers the **Banks** entity tab only; [Bank accounts](doc:configuration-finance-banks-accounts) has its own fields and maintenance actions. | Task | Go to | |---|---| | Confirm what this page manages | [Banks](#banks) | | Check access and company setup | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Reach the list and recognise its state | [Find the Banks list](#find-the-banks-list) | | Read the fields and list columns | [Understand the Banks screen](#understand-the-banks-screen) | | Add, change, remove, or export bank entries | [Maintain bank entries](#maintain-bank-entries) | | Handle unavailable actions or restricted access | [Handle availability branches](#handle-availability-branches) | | Respond to a message | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue to related finance work | [Continue from Banks](#continue-from-banks) | ## Before you start You need access to the configuration area. Your company setup determines which Banks fields and actions are available. **Prerequisites** - Sign in before opening the page. - Have the bank details ready for the three fields listed in the next section. - Use the headers and actions visible in your list. The page requires signed-in access. Read the labels currently shown rather than assuming that another configuration page has the same layout. ## Find the Banks list The Banks list is the starting point for reviewing or maintaining bank reference entries. **Prerequisites** - You have signed in. - You know whether you are reviewing the list or maintaining an existing entry. **Steps** 1. Open the Banks page from the configuration area. 2. Check the list headers for **Bank short name**, **Bank full name**, and **SWIFT code**. 3. Check whether the list contains rows or displays **No data** and `Count: 0`. ![Check the Banks list headers and list state.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) **Result:** The Banks list is open, and its visible headers and row count identify the list state. ## Understand the Banks screen The Banks screen presents three bank-identification fields in the list and in the new or edit form. ### Fields | Field | Type | Required | |---|---|---| | **Bank short name** | Text | Yes | | **Bank full name** | Text | Yes | | **SWIFT code** | Text | Yes | The first field to receive focus is **Bank short name**. The list shows the same three headers: **Bank short name**, **Bank full name**, and **SWIFT code**. The form applies a restricted-character pattern to its text boxes. The list also carries hidden ordering, record-identifier, and company-association values. You work with the three fields above; those hidden values are not form fields. This list has no filtering controls in its column headings or rows, and it shows all entries on one page in this configuration. No dialog is open when the main list is first displayed. You can now choose the maintenance action that matches your task. ![Identify the Banks list headers before opening a row.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Maintain bank entries Maintaining a bank entry means creating a new entry, changing an existing entry, removing an entry when deletion is allowed, or exporting the list. ### Add or update a bank entry Add a new bank or correct an existing bank entry here. **Prerequisites** - The Banks list is open. - **New** is available for a new entry, or an existing row has its edit control for an update. - You have the values for **Bank short name**, **Bank full name**, and **SWIFT code**. **Steps** 1. Choose the entry you want to maintain. | Task | Select | |---|---| | Create a bank entry | **New** | | Change an existing bank entry | The edit control in that row | 2. Enter the short name in **Bank short name**. 3. Enter the full name in **Bank full name**. 4. Enter the bank identifier in **SWIFT code**. 5. Select **OK** to submit the entry. **Result:** The new or updated bank entry is submitted and the list refreshes after the save completes. ### Remove a bank entry Remove a bank entry when the row is no longer needed and deletion is available. **Prerequisites** - The Banks list contains the row to remove. - The row's delete control is available. - More than one row exists when the deletion request is sent. **Steps** 1. Select the row's delete control. 2. Read the confirmation prompt, `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose the outcome. | Task | Select | |---|---| | Keep the bank entry | **Cancel** | | Remove the bank entry | **Delete** | **Result:** The confirmation closes. The row remains after **Cancel**, or is removed after **Delete** when the request is accepted. ### Export the Banks list Export the Banks list when you need a copy of it. **Prerequisites** - The Banks list is open. - **Export** is available. **Steps** 1. Select **Export**. 2. Read the `Exporting List:` dialog title. 3. Choose the export outcome. | Task | Select | |---|---| | Export the list to Excel | **Export to Excel** | | Leave the list unchanged | **Cancel** | 4. If you selected **Export to Excel**, select **Export**. **Result:** The list is exported after you select **Export**, or the dialog closes without confirming the export after you select **Cancel**. ## Handle availability branches The actions on the Banks screen depend on access, subscription, permissions, button visibility, and the number of rows in the list. | Situation | Then | |---|---| | The subscription-upgrade surface instead of the list | Use the subscription path provided for your company before maintaining Banks. | | **New** is unavailable | Continue with an existing row only if its edit control is available. | | The row's edit control is unavailable | Review the entry without changing it. | | The row's delete control is unavailable | Keep the row and use the available maintenance action. | | One remaining row | Do not expect deletion to proceed; the page requires at least one item. | The **New** action is available when the page is not replaced by the subscription surface and the new action is not hidden. The row's edit control depends on edit permission. The delete menu depends on delete permission, and the delete request is sent only when more than one row exists. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text to identify the point at which the action stopped, then correct the related field or choose the appropriate list action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Bank short name is required` | **Bank short name** has no value. | Enter a value in **Bank short name**. | | `Bank full name is required` | **Bank full name** has no value. | Enter a value in **Bank full name**. | | `SWIFT code is required` | **SWIFT code** has no value. | Enter a value in **SWIFT code**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | A text value contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Correct the affected text field. | | `Data saved Successfully` | A new bank entry was saved. | Return to the list and review the new row. | | `Data updated Successfully` | An edited bank entry was saved. | Return to the list and review the changed row. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The confirmation is open. | Select **Cancel** to keep the row or **Delete** to continue. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The deletion completed. | Review the remaining Banks rows. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Related saved data prevents deletion. | Keep the bank entry and continue with the related configuration. | | `Failed to Delete` | The deletion did not complete. | Keep the row and retry after checking the row's related data. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list cannot lose its final item. | Keep at least one Banks entry. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character before applying the filter. | | `Exporting List:` | The export dialog is open. | Choose the required export action. | | `Export to Excel` | The Excel export option is available. | Select **Export to Excel**. | | `Export` | The export confirmation action is available. | Select it to confirm the export. | | `Cancel` | The current dialog can be closed without confirming the action. | Select **Cancel** to close it. | The main list can also show the sign-in surface with **Email**, **Password**, and **Login**. Sign in before continuing to the Banks list. ## Continue from Banks After maintaining the Banks reference list, continue with the finance configuration or workflow that uses the related information. | Task | Go to | |---|---| | Maintain bank account details | [Bank accounts](doc:configuration-finance-banks-accounts) | | Configure L/G facility settings | [L/G facilities](doc:configuration-finance-letters-of-guarantees-facilities) | | Follow invoice work after configuration | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | The Banks page ends at the reference-list maintenance task. Its list, form, delete menu, and export dialog are the surfaces used to maintain this entity. # Branches ## Branches A branch is a company location record maintained from the **Branches** configuration list. Use this page to find a branch, review its information, and continue to the page for creating or editing it. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a branch or review the list headers | [Find and open a branch](#find-and-open-a-branch) | | Review the information on a branch form | [Understand the branch information](#understand-the-branch-information) | | Enter branch information or add contacts | [Enter and save branch information](#enter-and-save-branch-information) | | Work with a saved branch's additional tabs | [Handle new and existing branch variations](#handle-new-and-existing-branch-variations) | | Create a branch | [New branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-new) | | Edit a saved branch | [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record) | | Maintain a branch logo | [Edit branch logo](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record-2) | | Maintain company currency choices | [Company currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | ## Before you start The Branches list and form are available when the Branches subscription is included for your company. Your permissions and whether the branch is new or already saved determine which actions you can use. **Prerequisites** | Before you begin | Why it matters | |---|---| | Have access to the Branches configuration feature. | Without the feature, the subscription-upgrade surface appears instead of the list or form. | | Have permission to create or edit branches. | **New**, **Save**, and **Save and Close** are permission-dependent. | | Know whether you are creating a branch or changing a saved branch. | **Default** and **Last Modifications** appear only for a saved branch. | | Have the branch's company, financial, address, and contact information ready. | These are the information groups the form presents. | The form checks its required fields before saving. **Display Name** and both parts of **Financial Year Start** are required only where your company configures them; **Reference Currency** and **Local currency** have required rules. ## Find and open a branch The Branches list is the place to select a branch record or start a new one. Its headers come from the list layout available to your company, so use the headers visible in your list. **Prerequisites** - You have reached the company configuration area. - Your account has the permission required for the action you want to use. **Steps** 1. Open **Branches** from the company configuration menu. 2. Read the headers **Branch Name**, **Country**, and **Mail** when they are displayed. 3. Use the list buttons at the top of the grid as needed: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Refresh the list | **Refresh** | | Change the list layout | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | 4. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Create a branch | **New** | | Open a saved branch | Select the branch row. | The list contained five records and displayed `Count: 5` when it was opened. Selecting a branch row opens that branch's form. > **Important:** The list layout available to your company determines which headers you see. Use > the visible headers when locating a branch. ![The Branches list with its visible headers and list buttons](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b20994f8848f77bac8e2836fd2935cf7.png) **Result:** You are on the Branches list, the new-branch form, or the saved branch form you chose. ### List tools and branch actions The list can also provide search, filter, layout, import, and export tools. The available branch columns are configured for your company; the active list can include a logo image column, a main-branch indicator, and a row route for editing the branch logo. Use **Export** to open the export dialog. The dialog provides **Cancel** and **Export**. If the list has no data, the message `NO Data to Export` appears. The **New** action opens the new-branch form when the new-branch permission and subscription count allow it. At the branch-count limit, **New** invokes the upgrade check instead of opening the form. When a non-main branch is selected for the main-branch action, the confirmation asks `Are you sure you want to make this Main branch?`. Select **Cancel** to leave it unchanged, or select **Yes** to make it the main branch. The list then returns `Data Saved Successfully`. ## Understand the branch information The branch form groups the information used to identify a company location, set its financial values, record its address, and add contact values. | Information group | Fields | Type and rule | |---|---|---| | Company | **Display Name**, **Full Name**, **Statement**, **Managing Director**, **Company Registration No.**, **VAT ID Number** | Text fields. **Display Name** is required only where your company configures it. | | Financial | **VatRate** | Number from `0` through `100`. | | Financial | **Financial Year Start** | Day and month selectors. Each carries a configurable required rule. | | Financial | **Reference Currency** | Select field with a required rule. It is disabled when the branch has jobs. | | Financial | **Local currency** | Select field with a required rule. | | Address | **Street**, **Zip Code**, **Country**, **State**, **City** | Text, number, select, text, and text fields. The address group appears when an address exists. | | Contacts | Contact value | A text field appears after you add a contact type. Phone, fax, and mobile values accept up to 20 characters and apply numeric-key filtering. | The form displayed the fields listed above, along with **Save** and **Save and Close**. ![The branch form's company, financial, and address fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) The form shows **Reference Currency** and **Local currency** as choice fields. A contact value is the detail associated with a contact type, such as a phone number or email address. ![The Reference Currency choice field on the branch form](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) ## Enter and save branch information Create or change a branch by entering the values below. **Prerequisites** - The Branches feature is included for your company. - You have create permission for a new branch or edit permission for a saved branch. - You have the branch information ready. **Steps** 1. Enter the branch name in **Display Name**. 2. Enter the value in **Full Name** as needed. 3. Enter the value in **Statement** as needed. 4. Enter the value in **Managing Director** as needed. 5. Enter the value in **Company Registration No.** as needed. 6. Enter the value in **VAT ID Number** as needed. 7. Enter a percentage from `0` through `100` in **VatRate** when a VAT rate applies. 8. Select a day in the **Financial Year Start** day field. 9. Select a month in the **Financial Year Start** month field. 10. Select a value in **Reference Currency**. 11. Select a value in **Local currency**. 12. Enter the address in **Street** as needed. 13. Enter the postal number in **Zip Code** as needed. 14. Select a value in **Country** as needed. 15. Enter the value in **State** as needed. 16. Enter the value in **City** as needed. 17. Select **Contact Information**. 18. Select one contact type from the menu: | If you need to add… | Select | |---|---| | A telephone number | **Phone** | | A fax number | **Fax** | | A mobile number | **Mobile** | | An email address | **Email** | | A website | **Website** | | Online support details | **Online Support** | 19. Enter the contact detail in the new contact field. 20. Choose one save option: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and continue working on the branch | **Save** | | Save and leave the form | **Save and Close** | The form checks the required entries before saving. A successful save displays `Branch saved Successfully`. A new branch opens its saved branch form after **Save**; **Save and Close** leaves the form. ![The Contact Information menu after Phone has been selected](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3f7bed0b8a440cf2ff749f5c1d43cc81.png) **Result:** The branch information is submitted through the selected save option, or the form remains open for further work after **Save**. ## Handle new and existing branch variations A new branch carries the main information form. A saved branch adds the **Default** and **Last Modifications** tabs for branch-specific settings and history. **Prerequisites** - You have opened a saved branch record. - You have edit permission for changes that require saving. **Steps** 1. Select **Default** to open the default-margin settings. 2. Choose the applicable margin type from the available margin choices. 3. Enter the fixed default margin when the fixed-margin choice displays its number field. 4. Complete the degressive margin list when a degressive margin choice displays it. 5. Select **Save** in the Default area to save the margin values. 6. Select **Last Modifications** to open the branch's log-history surface. The Default settings change with the margin choice: | If the branch uses… | The form provides… | |---|---| | A fixed margin | A fixed-margin number field. | | A decreasing absolute margin | A degressive-margin list. | | A decreasing accumulative margin | A degressive-margin list. | The **Default** and **Last Modifications** tabs appear when the branch has been saved. The Reference Commission, Reference Margin, Finance currency, and Registrations surfaces are not part of the available branch form. The row-delete action is also unavailable. **Reference Currency** is disabled when the branch has jobs. **Result:** You are viewing the saved branch's default-margin settings or its Last Modifications history. ## When validation or saving goes wrong Use the message text on screen to choose the correction below. | Message | When it appears | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Name is required` | **Display Name** is empty when validation runs. | Enter a display name. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | A restricted display-name pattern is not met. | Use only the accepted characters in **Display Name**. | | `required` | A required financial choice has no value. | Select the missing day, month, reference currency, or local currency. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A list filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters and apply the filter again. | | `Branch saved Successfully` | Branch saving completes. | Continue working, or leave through the chosen save option. | | `Logo Deleted Successfully` | Branch logo deletion completes. | Continue with the branch record. | | `Please insert degressive margin list` | A degressive margin type has no degressive margin list. | Add the list before saving the Default settings. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Default-margin saving completes. | Continue with the saved margin settings. | | `Error while saving data ` | Default-margin saving returns an error. | Review the margin values and try again. | | `Branch does not exist` | The requested branch record returns no record. | Return to the **Branches** list. | | `Data Saved Successfully` | Making another branch the main branch completes. | Continue from the refreshed Branches list. | | `NO Data to Export` | Export is selected when there is no data to export. | Return to the list. | | `Are you sure you want to make this Main branch?` | The main-branch action opens its confirmation. | Confirm only when the selected branch must become the main branch. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | You are removing a branch logo. | Confirm only when the branch logo should be removed. | The form also has an unsaved-change flow when you leave with changed information. Use the close control and choose the option that matches whether you want to save the changes. ## Continue from the branch record After you identify the next branch task, continue with the page that owns it. | Next task | Page | |---|---| | Create a new branch | [New branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-new) | | Edit the saved branch information | [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record) | | Change or remove the branch logo | [Edit branch logo](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record-2) | | Maintain the currency choices used by the form | [Company currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | From the company configuration menu, select **Branches** to open the branch list. Select **New** to open the new-branch form, or select a saved branch row to open that branch's form. After returning to the list for `NO Data to Export`, select **Export** when data is available. After returning to the list for `Branch does not exist`, select an available branch. ## Out of scope on this page The row-delete action is unavailable on the Branches list. The `Data Deleted Successfully` message belongs to that unavailable action and is not a branch-list task. **Result:** You know which page owns the next branch-maintenance action. # Configuration dashboard ## Configuration dashboard The Configuration dashboard is the entry surface for choosing a settings area. It presents five areas for account, company, branch, data, and security settings. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the settings entry surface | [Open the configuration dashboard](#open-the-configuration-dashboard) | | Understand what is on the screen | [Read the dashboard](#read-the-dashboard) | | Choose an area to continue | [Select a settings area](#select-a-settings-area) | | Check whether this surface maintains records | [Understand the dashboard's limits](#understand-the-dashboards-limits) | The dashboard route is `/configuration/home`. ![Identify the five settings areas before choosing one.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/eafd8a142dd92601d1491ab062370f2b.png) ## Before you start You do not enter form data on the dashboard before choosing a settings area. The screen has no form fields. Have the settings area you need in mind so you can choose it after the screen loads. ## Open the configuration dashboard Use this procedure to reach the dashboard and recognize its starting area. Prerequisites - You know the route `/configuration/home`. Steps 1. Open `/configuration/home`. 2. Check that **Account settings** is the selected area. ![Check the starting area and the dashboard route.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0d6309e21e5b362c7ee84a7069b5c06b.png) **Result:** The dashboard is open at `/configuration/home` with **Account settings** selected and the `#1` content marker visible. Review each settings area and its content marker before choosing one. ## Read the dashboard Each settings area is a choice for continuing to a different kind of configuration work. The dashboard itself shows the choices and the content marker for the selected choice. | Settings area | What appears when selected | |---|---| | **Account settings** | `#1` | | **Company settings** | `#2` | | **Branches settings** | `#3` | | **Data management** | `#4` | | **Security** | `#5` | Only the selected area's content marker appears. The dashboard has no form fields and no grid columns. It also has no page-specific validation, confirmation, success, or error messages. The five areas are the controls available on this surface. The content under each area is limited to its marker on this screen. Choose an area when you are ready to continue. ## Select a settings area Select one settings area to identify the configuration work you want to continue with. Prerequisites - The dashboard is open. Steps 1. Select the area that matches what you need to do. | If you need to… | Select | The screen shows | |---|---|---| | Work with account settings | **Account settings** | `#1` | | Work with company settings | **Company settings** | `#2` | | Work with branch settings | **Branches settings** | `#3` | | Work with data management settings | **Data management** | `#4` | | Work with security settings | **Security** | `#5` | 2. Check the content marker for the area you selected. ![Check the selected account settings area and its content marker.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0d6309e21e5b362c7ee84a7069b5c06b.png) Use the security image to inspect the content marker after selecting a different settings area. ![Check the selected security area and its content marker.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7a73f14adb319d85e0d4d5521e0bb80d.png) **Result:** The selected area remains on `/configuration/home`, and its corresponding content marker is visible. Use the selected area as the starting point for the configuration work you need to do. ## Understand the dashboard's limits Use this dashboard to choose a settings area, not to maintain records. Do not look here for controls that create, update, delete, export, or confirm a record. | What you need to do | Where to act | |---|---| | Choose a configuration area | Use one of the five settings controls on this dashboard. | | Maintain configuration records | Continue from the selected area to its detailed settings surface. | | Respond to a validation or confirmation message | No page-specific message is provided on this dashboard. | Record maintenance belongs to the detailed settings surface that follows the selection. # Contacts ## What Contacts is for Contacts is the shared contact database for the people and relationship details your teams need to find together. Use the list when you need to locate shared contact history instead of keeping names and contact details in personal phones, inboxes, or separate files. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Recognize the list and its columns | [Understand the Contacts list](#understand-the-contacts-list) | | Open the list | [Find the Contacts list](#find-the-contacts-list) | | Create a contact | [Create a contact](doc:create-contact) | | Review a saved contact | [Contact record](doc:contact-record) | | Check why an action is unavailable | [When a Contacts action is unavailable](#when-a-contacts-action-is-unavailable) | ## Before you start Actions appear only when your account and the contact meet the required access and branch conditions. Before you begin, make sure you are signed in with access to Contacts and know whether the contact belongs to the branch you are working with. The list is available when the Contacts subscription is included. **New** is available when your account has permission to create a contact. A row's edit action is available when the row belongs to the same branch. The row's delete action requires both the same-branch condition and delete permission. ## Find the Contacts list Open the Contacts list when you need to review shared relationship information or choose a contact action. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - Contacts is included in your subscription. Steps 1. Open the Contacts area. 2. Confirm that the Contacts list is open. 3. Confirm that the page heading reads **Contacts**. ![Identify the Contacts list before choosing an action](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5cab153d71876cb7cfc612e636db7a36.png) **Result:** The Contacts list is open. ## Understand the Contacts list A contact row brings together the visible identity, role, department, account, and branch information that helps you recognize the right person. The list currently shows these headers: | Header | What you use it to recognize | |---|---| | **Title** | The person's title or salutation | | **Name** | The contact's name | | **Position** | The person's position | | **Department** | The person's department | | **Account** | The related account | | **Branch** | The related branch | The list also includes an identifier and avatar area for each row. The headers you see come from your saved list layout, so work from the headers visible in your list rather than expecting every list to have the same columns. ![Read the six visible Contacts list headers and row layout](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/97f6da7ea65f40d7c8449511d5ab7b0c.png) The list toolbar includes **New**, **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. **New** is the labelled action; the other toolbar actions are identified by their displayed titles. ## Choose the next Contacts action From the list, you can start a contact, open a saved contact, export the list, or delete a contact. | If you need to… | Select or use | |---|---| | Start a new contact | **New** | | Open a saved contact | Select the row's edit action | | Prepare a list export | **Export** | | Remove a contact | Select the row's delete action, then confirm **Delete** | Prerequisites - For **New**, your account has create permission. - For a row edit or delete action, the contact belongs to the same branch. - For deletion, your account also has delete permission. Steps 1. Select the action that matches your task in the table above. 2. Complete the selected action: | Task | Action | |---|---| | Start a new contact | Select **New**. | | Open a saved contact | Select the row's edit action. | | Prepare a list export | Select **Export**. | | Remove a contact | Select the row's delete action. | | Confirm removal | After `Are you sure you want to delete this contact?` appears, select **Delete**. | ![Start a contact from the Contacts list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) The export choice is headed `Exporting List:`. Select **Cancel** to leave the export choices, or select **Export** to continue with the export action. **Result:** The selected list action is open, or the contact deletion has been confirmed. ## When a Contacts action is unavailable If an expected action is absent, compare the list and contact conditions below. | What you check | What you see | |---|---| | Contacts subscription | The Contacts list is replaced by the subscription upgrade surface when Contacts is not included. | | Create permission | **New** appears only when Contacts is included and your account has create permission. | | Contact branch | The row edit or delete action is available when the contact belongs to the same branch. | | Delete permission | The row delete action also requires delete permission. | | Saved list layout | The headers currently visible on your list identify the columns available to you. | **Result:** You know whether the missing surface is controlled by subscription, permission, branch access, or the saved list layout. ## When a list action goes wrong Use the message text to choose the next response. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Are you sure you want to delete this contact?` | Check the contact, then select **Delete** only when the deletion is intended. | | `Exporting List:` | Choose **Cancel** to leave the export choices or **Export** to continue. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the value you entered, then try the action again. | **Result:** You can match the message on screen to the applicable list action and continue from the correct page. ## What to do next Choose the page that owns the work you need to continue: - Open [Create a contact](doc:create-contact) when you need to enter and save a new contact. - Open [Contact record](doc:contact-record) when you need to review or maintain a saved contact. **Result:** You are directed to the page for the next contact task. # Custom fields ## Custom fields Configured custom fields appear only when they are available. Use this page to manage the fields that your company makes available in its sales-page sections. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Identify the sales sections and fields available to configure | [Understand the preview and field tables](#understand-the-preview-and-field-tables) | | Add and save a field | [Add and save a field](#add-and-save-a-field) | | Review changes made to the configuration | [Review Last Modifications](#review-last-modifications) | | Set requirement rules for configured fields | [Dynamic validation](configuration-dynamic-validation.md) | | Use configured fields in sales work | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Custom fields configuration page. - Your subscription includes custom-field configuration. When it does not, the page uses the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the configuration surface. - You have permission to edit the configuration if you need to add, change, save, or remove a field. Without edit access, the page uses its non-editing close action. - You can choose a page in **Choose page you want to customize**. After you choose one, its **Preview** is available. - You are adding or editing a field before using the field editor. The editor is shown for the add and edit states; the delete controls are available in edit state. The page you choose determines which sections and **Add custom field** actions you see in **Preview**. A field's **Data type** and **Label** are required in the field editor. ## Open Custom fields Use this page to choose a sales page and work with the fields shown in **Preview**. **Steps** 1. Open `configuration/custom-fields`. 2. Confirm that **Choose page you want to customize** appears. ![Check **Choose page you want to customize**, **Preview**, and the sales sections before choosing a field.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b4cb35427abae3bd930f6834ebfa0903.png) **Result:** The browser lands on `/configuration/custom-fields` and shows **Choose page you want to customize**, **Preview**, and the available configuration surface. ## Understand the preview and field tables After you choose a page in **Choose page you want to customize**, **Preview** shows the fields currently available for its sales sections. Use the section name to decide where a field belongs before you add it. | Area | Controls or fields shown | |---|---| | Page selection | **Choose page you want to customize** | | Sales preview | **Branch**, **Sales Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **Time Frame**, **End User**, **Estimated Value**, **In Branch Currency**, **File No.** | | Inquiry | **Client**, **Vendor**, **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, **Bid Due Date**, **Requested Offer Type** | | Offer | **Client**, **Vendor**, **Offer No.**, **Offer Type**, **Bid Due Date**, **Offer Date**, **Validity Period**, **Delivery Time**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, **Payment Period** | | Order | **Client**, **Vendor**, **Client Order No.**, **Vendor Order No.**, **Order Date**, **Order Activation Date**, **Delivery Time**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, **L/C Number**, **Payment Period** | The field editor has two required fields: | Field | Type | Requirement | |---|---|---| | **Data type** | Select box | Required | | **Label** | Text box | Required | **Product Type** is a select box in the sales preview. The page also includes the **Last Modifications** area for reviewing configuration changes. ![Use the section headings and visible field labels to locate the field you want to configure.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6b58d6f1adcc6c24734f3642a3b910ec.png) ## Add and save a field Adding a field makes new information available in the section shown in **Preview**. Choose the section carefully: the field appears in the section from which you add it. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Custom fields page. - You have edit access to add and save a field. - You have chosen the page in **Choose page you want to customize** and can see the section where the field belongs. **Steps** 1. In the relevant section of **Preview**, select **Add custom field**. 2. In the field editor, select a value in **Data type**. 3. Enter the field name in **Label**. 4. Select **Add custom field** in the field editor. 5. Select one of these save actions: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep working on this configuration page | **Save** | | Save the field and leave the page | **Save and Close** | In edit mode, the field editor also shows **Ultimate delete this field**, **Cancel**, and **Delete** for field removal. ![Fill Data type and Label in the add-field dialog before saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5cae310f90a5959517b30804096fb5d7.png) **Result:** The **Preview** section where you used **Add custom field** contains the field you added. After a successful save, the page can show `Saved`. ## Review Last Modifications **Last Modifications** is the audit-log area for reviewing recorded configuration changes. **Prerequisites** - The audit-log area is available on the page. **Steps** 1. Select **Last Modifications**. ![Review the audit-log explanation and the recorded change entries.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/dbf0d821d758e598195253276f9408ca.png) **Result:** The audit-log area opens and shows its explanation and recorded entries. ## When field maintenance does not work Use the message on screen to choose the correction: | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `This field is required` | Enter a value in the required field before submitting the field editor. | | `repeated field` | Use a different field combination in the same section. | | `Saved` | Continue working or leave the page after the save completes. | | `Error occurred while saving field` | Check the field information and try the save action again. | | `Field updated successfully` | Continue with the updated field or review **Last Modifications**. | | `Error occurred while updating field` | Check the field information and try the update again. | | `Field removed successfully` | Confirm that the field no longer appears in its preview section. | | `Error occurred while removing field` | Check that you are editing the intended field and try the removal again. | The required-field message is attached to **Data type** and **Label**. A duplicate is checked by the selected section, data type, and label combination, so changing the label or data type gives the new field a different combination. ## Continue after maintaining fields Configured fields are used in the sales panels where your company makes them available. Their appearance and requirement depend on the field configuration, so review the target sales surface after saving when the field is meant to support sales entry. The page refreshes the audit log after a successful save or update when **Last Modifications** is the selected area. Continue with [Dynamic validation](configuration-dynamic-validation.md) when you need to set requirement rules, or with [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) when you need to work with the configured fields in a sales job. # Dashboard ## What the Dashboard is The Dashboard is a set of role-based tabs that presents the cards and charts chosen for your work. Use it to review operational measures such as sales, backlog, pipeline and status, or to review finance and management measures without opening each underlying record. The widget gallery contains 109 dashboard components. A component can present a card, chart, ranking, status, trend or management measure. The tabs divide those measures into separate views; the available tabs depend on your role and saved dashboard setup. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the measures on your role's dashboard | [Open the Dashboard](#open-the-dashboard) | | Read cards, charts and sorting controls | [Read dashboard content](#read-dashboard-content) | | Find a card or chart already on a tab | [Find widgets and continue to customization](#find-widgets-and-continue-to-customization) | | Review the principal report variant | [Use the dashboard variants](#use-the-dashboard-variants) | | Understand an empty dashboard | [When the Dashboard is unavailable](#when-the-dashboard-is-unavailable) | | Build or customize tabs and widgets | [Dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings) | | Review the widget gallery by business question | [Dashboard widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog) | | Review operational sales and backlog measures | [Sales and backlog widgets](doc:sales-and-backlog-widgets) | | Review pipeline and status measures | [Pipeline and status widgets](doc:pipeline-and-status-widgets) | | Review finance and management-report cards | [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets) | The principal-dashboard role variant can include **Principals Report**. The dashboard library also defines **Eagle View** as a separate dashboard tab. The names and available surfaces come from the dashboard assigned to your role. ![Dashboard tabs and dashboard cards on arrival](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6722250dcce2ac8b27311d82c3901e68.png) ## Before you start The Dashboard opens the saved dashboard assigned to your role. Your role and subscription determine which tabs and widget surfaces are available, so the view can differ between roles. | Before you start | Why it matters | |---|---| | Sign in with a role that has a dashboard assigned | The shell loads the role's saved tabs and widgets. | | Confirm that the required dashboard feature is available to your role | A widget checks the feature subscription before showing its report surface. | | Know whether you are reviewing or changing the dashboard | Reviewing the Dashboard does not require a data change; building or customizing it belongs in [Dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings). | | Have the business question you want to answer | The widget title helps you choose the card or chart that matches that question. | The role dashboard controls the tab names, widget titles and report columns that you see. The principal report's six report grids use column lists from the dashboard setup, so use the headers shown in your own report when you interpret those grids. ## Open the Dashboard Open the Dashboard to review the dashboard assigned to your role. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - Your role has a dashboard assigned. **Steps** 1. Open the Dashboard. 2. Choose the view you need from the visible tab strip: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Review the assigned dashboard | Confirm that the page contains **Dashboard**. | | Review the principal report | Select **Principals Report**. | ![Dashboard and Principals Report tabs above the dashboard cards](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/45aa5ceb77c1af925be210e13537079d.png) **Result:** The Dashboard opens. The active tab shows its cards and charts; the principal report is available when your role includes **Principals Report**. ## Read dashboard content The active tab is the view whose cards and charts you are reading. The dashboard grid appears for an active user or management-report tab. The main Dashboard can show measures including **Sales Pipeline**, **Booking This Year**, **Accounts in Sales Pipeline**, **Teams Booking vs. Target**, **Backlog**, **Teams Running Offer**, **Firm Offers**, **Budget Offers**, **Branch Tendency to Target**, **Principals Tendency to Target**, **Branch Booking vs. Target This Year**, **Principals Booking vs. Target This Year**, **Branch Running Offers**, and **Principals Running Offers**. The booking comparison view provides three sorting choices: | If you want to compare by… | Select | |---|---| | Booking amount | `Sort by Booking` | | Target amount | `Sort by Target` | | Achievement | `Sort by Achievement` | These three sorting controls arrive without a required marker. The principal report can also show report columns selected by your dashboard setup. Use the visible report headers when you read those grids. ![Principals Report settings and report choices](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/da06ae53b205752f06a8c2641be440e5.png) ## Find widgets and continue to customization To locate a widget already placed on the active tab, use **Search for widget** in the active tab’s options menu. Adding, arranging, renaming, deleting and saving dashboard content is maintained in [Dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings). **Prerequisites** - The active tab contains the widget you want to locate. - Dashboard editing is available when you need to add or change widgets. **Steps** 1. Enter the widget title in the search field. 2. Select the matching widget title. The active tab scrolls to the matching widget. When you are maintaining the dashboard, the widget selection flow uses these controls: | If you need to… | Use | |---|---| | Add a widget to the active tab | **Widget**, then **Select widget** | | Select every available widget | **Select all** | | Narrow the available widget list | **Keyword to search...** | | Confirm the selected widgets | **OK** | | Change the active tab name | **Rename tab** | | Remove the active tab | **Delete tab** | The add and edit tab dialogs use the required **New Tab** field. Continue with [Dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings) for the edit-mode controls, including **Widget** and **Save**, and for the complete tab-maintenance procedure. **Result:** The active tab is positioned on the widget title you searched for, or you have the exact Dashboard settings task to add, arrange or save dashboard content. ## Use the dashboard variants Dashboard variants are separate views for different questions. **Principals Report** is the principal-report view; **Eagle View** is the custom dashboard view. The role's saved dashboard also determines whether a Business Analysis view is available. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. Select **Principals Report**, **Eagle View**, **Settings**, **Introduction & Outline**, **All**, or **Top 50**, according to the task in the table. | If you need to… | Use this view or control | |---|---| | Review the principal report | **Principals Report** | | Configure which report charts are enabled | **Settings** | | Read a report outline | **Introduction & Outline** | | Review the custom analysis controls | `Analyze`, **Over**, **Highlight**, and **Interval** | | Show all custom analysis results | **All** | | Limit custom analysis results | **Top 50** | When **Settings** is open in **Principals Report**, the panel can show the required **Report** field. Its report choices include: | Report choice | Display option | |---|---| | **Running jobs** | **Bar** or **Pie** | | **Status of running firm offers** | **Bar** or **Pie** | | **Status of running orders** | **Bar** or **Pie** | | **Reasons for lost jobs** | **Bar** or **Pie** | | **Bookings over time** | **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, or **Yearly** | | **Deliveries over time** | **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, or **Yearly** | | **Status of submitted offers** | **Bar** or **Pie** | | **Sales Overview + Overall Analysis** | **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, or **Yearly** | | **Show Lists** | List display | | **Client** | Client selection | | **Product Type** | Product type selection | | **Tickets** | Ticket selection | The report settings panel includes **Generate Report**, **Download as PDF**, and **OK**. The custom analysis controls are available only when **Eagle View** is the active tab. The **Introduction & Outline** view provides these report sections: | Report section | Use it for | |---|---| | **Introduction :** | The report introduction | | **Sales Analysis :** | Sales analysis | | **Lost Opportunities and Competition :** | Lost opportunities and competition | | **Client Complaints and Difficulties :** | Client complaints and difficulties | | **Suggestions for Business Improvement :** | Suggested business improvements | | **Booking Forecast :** | Booking forecast | | **Conclusion :** | The report conclusion | ![Custom analysis controls on the dashboard variant](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6722250dcce2ac8b27311d82c3901e68.png) **Result:** The selected dashboard variant or settings panel is displayed with its available controls. ## When the Dashboard is unavailable An empty role dashboard is the branch to use when no dashboard has been defined for your role. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Your role has no dashboard` | Contact your administrator to define a dashboard for your role. | | `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard` | Ask your administrator to define the role dashboard. | | **Eagle View** is not available | Use the tabs available to your role, or ask your administrator about the role's dashboard setup. | When a principal report request cannot be processed, the page can display these exact messages: | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the report choices and try the report action again. | | `Please choose one or more principals` | Choose one or more principals before generating the report. | ## Continue to Dashboard settings Use [Dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings) when you build or customize role dashboards. That page owns the dashboard-maintenance tasks for tabs, widgets, saved arrangements and role-specific dashboard setup. The Dashboard settings task uses the success message `Your request was completed successfully` after a completed settings request. # Dashboard settings ## Dashboard settings at a glance Dashboard settings is the configuration list for role dashboards. A role dashboard is the set of tabs and widgets assigned to a role. A dashboard setting is the configuration entry you maintain for that role dashboard. Use the list to review its users and last modification time, or open **Forecast settings**, the surface for reviewing forecast rules. The page leads to the dashboard-setting creation and editing pages. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the role dashboards and their columns | [Understand the dashboard settings list](#understand-the-dashboard-settings-list) | | Find a role dashboard and open its setting | [Find and open a dashboard setting](#find-and-open-a-dashboard-setting) | | Review forecast-rule fields | [Open forecast settings](#open-forecast-settings) | | Create a dashboard setting | [New dashboard setting](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings-new) | | Edit and save an existing dashboard setting | [Edit dashboard setting](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings-edit-record) | | Use a configured dashboard | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | ## Before you begin **Prerequisites** - You can open the authenticated configuration routes for the list, new setting, and edit setting. - Your subscription includes the dashboard-setting feature. When it does not, the page takes the subscription-upgrade branch instead of showing the dashboard list. - The dashboard list is available before you open **Forecast settings**. Use the list, new-setting page, and edit page for these three configuration tasks. ## Find and open a dashboard setting Use a dashboard setting when you need to review or hand off maintenance for one role dashboard. **Prerequisites** - You can open the configuration area. - The dashboard-setting list is available. **Steps** 1. Open the configuration menu. 2. Select **Dashboard settings**. 3. Use the list headers to identify the role dashboard you need. 4. Select the dashboard row to open its setting. **Result:** The selected dashboard setting opens on the edit page. ![Check the Dashboard settings list, its five headers, and its available list actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f776828496da6ef6468c8da4e9d0a568.png) ## Understand the dashboard settings list The dashboard settings list summarizes each role dashboard in one row. Read the headers from left to right when you compare role dashboards. | Header | What the list gives you | Type | |---|---|---| | **Role** | The role dashboard name | Text | | **Tabs** | The number of tabs | Number | | **Widgets** | The number of widgets | Number | | **Users** | The users associated with the role dashboard | Text | | **Last modified** | The last modification time | Date | The list actions include **Apply filter**, **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. Use the grid and its five headers to compare role dashboards. Selecting a data row opens the dashboard-setting editor. To review forecast rules, select **Forecast settings**. ## Open forecast settings Use **Forecast settings** to review the calculation basis, tolerated deviation, average-booking basis, or the two payment-period values. **Prerequisites** - The dashboard settings list is visible. - The dashboard-setting feature is included in your subscription. **Steps** 1. Select **Forecast settings**. 2. Review the forecast-rule fields in the popup. | Field | Type | Required rule | Limits or condition | |---|---|---|---| | **Forecast calculation type** | Text/radio choice | Not required by the extracted rule | The popup must be open | | **Forecast calculation method** | Text/radio choice | Not required by the extracted rule | The popup must be open | | **Tolerated deviation between forecasted and achieved monthly booking** | Number | Not required by the extracted rule | From `0` to `100` | | **Listing of the average monthly booking** | Text/radio choice | Required | Minimum `0` | | **Average Period For Goods Delivery Till Receiving The Commission Payment** | Number | Required | Minimum `0` | | **Average Period For Goods Delivery Till Receiving The Clients Payment** | Number | Required | Minimum `0` | The forecast-settings action is available when the dashboard-setting subscription is included. If the fields do not appear, return to the list before continuing. **Result:** The forecast-rule fields are ready for review when the popup opens. ![Review the forecast-settings surface before entering forecast values.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e16a468a11bd78d7746d28eb54313a03.png) ## When a dashboard setting is unavailable Use the message and condition that matches what you see. The dashboard settings page has separate branches for subscription access, popup access, runtime report content, and actions owned by the dashboard-setting editor. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | The dashboard list is replaced by the subscription-upgrade surface | The dashboard-setting feature is not included in the subscription branch | Ask your administrator about the subscription or use the available upgrade route. | | Forecast fields do not appear after selecting **Forecast settings** | The forecast settings surface is unavailable | Return to the list before continuing. | | No import choices appear after **Import From** | — | Return to the list. | | Runtime report columns differ from one setup to another | The principal-report column sets come from the dashboard setup | Work from the headers visible in your report rather than assuming a fixed column list. | | An icon-only action has no reader-facing label | The action label is not available on this surface | Use the labelled dashboard-setting procedures linked below. | The following messages are the exact strings associated with this page's actions: | Situation | Message | |---|---| | A successful request message | `Your request was completed successfully` | | A common error message | `An error occurred while processing your request` | | A duplicate tab message | `You already have this tab in this dashboard` | | A principal-selection message | `Please choose one or more principals` | If this message appears, return to the list and use the relevant maintenance page. ## Continue to dashboard maintenance Dashboard maintenance changes the tabs, widgets, and report surfaces associated with a role dashboard. This page hands those jobs to their dedicated procedures. | If you need to… | Continue with… | |---|---| | Create a dashboard setting and add its tabs | [New dashboard setting](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings-new) | | Edit and save an existing dashboard setting | [Edit dashboard setting](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings-edit-record) | | Use the configured dashboard | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | The details surface showed **Widget**, **Tab**, **Save**, and **Save and Close**. It also exposed these controls: | Control | Surface | |---|---| | **Blank Tab** | Tab menu | | **Principals Report** | Tab menu | | **Eagle View** | Tab menu | | **Highlight** | Eagle View | | **Interval** | Eagle View | | **New Tab** | Tab popup | Use the linked maintenance pages for the procedures these controls begin. 1. Select **Eagle View**. **Result:** The surface shows vendor-analysis settings with **Over**, **Highlight**, and **Interval**. ![Review the vendor-analysis settings and the displayed selectors.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e30af0b5f48dbe4cd8080b48b1b40c84.png) # FAQ ## FAQ overview This page answers recurring questions about the home surface, its visible controls, and the **Principals Report** view. You start on the home surface after navigation. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Check where the home surface opens | [Find the home surface and report](#find-the-home-surface-and-report) | | Understand the controls on the home surface | [Understand the visible controls](#understand-the-visible-controls) | | Choose a comparison view | [Choose the comparison view](#choose-the-comparison-view) | | Check the report controls | [Check the report result](#check-the-report-result) | | Resolve a message or an unanswered home-surface question | [When the answer is not available](#when-the-answer-is-not-available) | | Get general troubleshooting guidance | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) | ![Controls and content on the home screen](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Before you check the home surface The home surface is the signed-in starting surface. The controls that appear depend on your current view and subscription condition. **Prerequisites** - Sign in before opening the home surface. - Use a view with the required subscription condition. - If you need **Widget** or **Save**, enter edit mode first. - If a prepared view is available, its switch appears outside edit mode. The home screen requires a signed-in user. **Widget** and **Save** appear only in edit mode. The prepared-view switch appears outside edit mode when the prepared-view condition holds. ## Find the home surface and report The home surface is where you review information and open the visible report tab. **Prerequisites** - Sign in. - Know that the home surface opens after navigation. **Steps** 1. Open the home surface. 2. Select **Principals Report**. 3. Confirm that you remain on the home surface. ![Principals Report selected on the home surface](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d8c7163bcd2419ea80ecb5c0c6be2c96.png) **Result:** The **Principals Report** view is open on the home surface. ## Understand the visible controls The home surface combines sorting controls, report controls, editing controls, and comparison-view fields. The live home screen displays **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement**. | Control or field | Type or use | Options or condition | | --- | --- | --- | | **Report** | Required text field | Visible on **Principals Report** | | **Interval** | Select field | `Last 12 Months`; `All Years` | | **Over** | Select field | `Clients`; `Sales Responsibles`; `Projects`; `Market Segments` | | **Highlight** | Select field | Values depend on the selected records | | **Widget** | Edit action | Appears in edit mode | | **Save** | Edit action | Appears in edit mode | | **Eagle View** | View action | Appears with the report-tab controls | | **Rename tab** | Tab action | Appears in edit mode under its tab conditions | | **Delete tab** | Tab action | Appears in edit mode under its tab conditions | | **Select all** | Widget-picker action | Appears in the widget picker | | **Remove widget from tab** | Widget action | Appears when widgets are available; the edit action also requires edit mode | | **All** | Comparison-view action | The comparison view offers this action | | **Top 50** | Comparison-view action | The comparison view offers this action | The live report view also displays report readouts and a settings area. **Time Frame** is not displayed as an active control in the report view. **Prerequisites** - Open the home surface. **Steps** 1. Locate **Sort by Booking** on the home surface. 2. Locate **Sort by Target** on the home surface. 3. Locate **Sort by Achievement** on the home surface. 4. Review **Interval**, **Over**, and **Highlight** in the comparison view when that view is available. **Result:** The home's sorting controls and comparison-view fields are identified by their displayed labels. ## Choose the comparison view The **Over** field selects the comparison category for the comparison view. Its fixed choices are `Clients`, `Sales Responsibles`, `Projects`, and `Market Segments`. The **Highlight** field uses account records for the available client or vendor lists. **All Clients** and **All Vendors** are added to those lists. For **Sales Responsibles**, **Projects**, and **Market Segments**, **Highlight** has no available values. The available **Highlight** values can vary with the accounts available to you. **Prerequisites** - Open the home surface. - Open the comparison view. **Steps** 1. Open **Over**. 2. Choose one fixed comparison category. | If you need to compare… | Choose | | --- | --- | | Clients | `Clients` | | Sales responsibles | `Sales Responsibles` | | Projects | `Projects` | | Market segments | `Market Segments` | 3. Review the values available in **Highlight**. The tab controls depend on tab visibility, active state, tab type, subscription condition, and edit mode. The six principal-report column selections can vary. **Result:** The comparison view shows the selected fixed comparison category and the available **Highlight** values. Return to **Principals Report** to check the report view. ## Edit the home surface Use edit mode when you need to add, rename, remove, or save tab content. **Prerequisites** - Sign in. - Open the home surface. - Have a view with the required subscription condition. **Steps** 1. Enter edit mode. 2. Select the control that matches the task. | Task | Control | Sequence | | --- | --- | --- | | Open the widget-selection flow | **Widget** | Select **Widget** first. | | Select all widgets | **Select all** | Select **Select all** after the widget picker opens. | | Remove a chosen widget | **Remove widget from tab** | Choose a widget, then select **Remove widget from tab**. | | Rename the tab | **Rename tab**, then **New Tab** | When the tab conditions allow renaming, use the tab action. Enter a value in **New Tab** when the dialog opens. | | Delete the tab | **Delete tab** | When the tab conditions allow deletion, select **Delete tab**. | 3. Select **Save** after making any listed edit. **Result:** The selected editing controls are used while the home surface is in edit mode. ## Check the report result The **Principals Report** view provides a required **Report** field and the report actions **Generate Report** and **Download as PDF**. **Prerequisites** - Open the home surface. - Select **Principals Report**. **Steps** 1. Check that the **Report** field is displayed with a required marker. 2. Locate **Generate Report**. 3. Locate **Download as PDF**. No dialog or message appeared while you checked the report view. ![Required Report field and report actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d8c7163bcd2419ea80ecb5c0c6be2c96.png) **Result:** The **Principals Report** view shows the required **Report** field and both report actions. If the report view does not answer your question, use the message guidance in the next section. ## When the answer is not available Use the message text to identify the kind of response you need. The home area carries these messages: | Message | When this message appears | | --- | --- | | `Your request was completed successfully` | A home-surface request completes successfully | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | A home-surface request encounters a general error | For detailed report controls, continue to [Principal report](doc:principal-report). For reusable messages, continue to [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages). For broader issue resolution, continue to [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions). ## Out of scope The login message `Incorrect username or password` belongs to the Login page, not this home-surface FAQ. Continue to [Your first day](doc:your-first-day) for sign-in help. The message `Please choose one or more principals` belongs to the **Principals Report** validation flow. Continue to [Principal report](doc:principal-report) for that report-specific message. The available **Highlight** list and report columns can vary. Use the labels and values shown in your home surface when working with those lists. ## Know where to continue The home path remains the home surface after selecting **Principals Report**. Continue to [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) for general screen orientation. Use [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) when you need help moving between pages. # Invoice lifecycle ## Invoice lifecycle at a glance An invoice records an amount owed, its approval position, and its payment position. Invoices move from preparation through approval and then into **Due**, **Overdue**, or **Paid**. ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 Draft --> "Awaiting Approval": Request approval Draft --> Approved: Approve "Released for Invoicing" --> "Awaiting Approval": Request approval "Released for Invoicing" --> Approved: Approve "Awaiting Approval" --> Approved: Approve "Awaiting Approval" --> Draft: Cancel request for approval "Awaiting Approval" --> "Rejected Approval": Reject approval request Approved --> Draft: Consider as not approved Approved --> Due: Consider as sent Due --> Overdue: payment period passes Due --> Paid: due amount is zero or less Overdue --> Paid: due amount is zero or less ``` The status list includes **Draft**, **Released for Invoicing**, **Awaiting Approval**, **Rejected Approval**, **Approved**, **Due**, **Overdue**, and **Paid**. An invoice is **Paid** when its due amount is zero or less. It is **Overdue** when its payment period has passed and the due amount remains; otherwise, it is **Due**. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Locate an invoice | [Find and open an invoice](#find-and-open-an-invoice) | | Read fields, totals, or related areas | [Read the invoice workspace](#read-the-invoice-workspace) | | Choose an invoice creation route | [Choose an invoice creation route](#choose-an-invoice-creation-route) | | Request or complete approval | [Request and complete approval](#request-and-complete-approval) | | Follow payment status | [Follow Due, Overdue, and Paid branches](#follow-due-overdue-and-paid-branches) | | Create an invoice | [Create an Account Invoice](create-invoice.md) | | Record a payment | [Record a payment](record-payment.md) | | Review principal invoices | [Principal invoices](principal-invoices.md) | | Review purchase invoices or outgoing payments | [Payables](payables.md) | ## Before you start The invoice workspace is the finance area where you locate an invoice, review its status, and continue the action available for that status. An approval process determines whether approval actions apply, and approval permission determines which permitted action you can use. Prerequisites - Your account includes the invoice feature. - You have a saved invoice for approval actions and saved-record areas. - You have no unsaved invoice changes before requesting or completing approval. - An approval process applies before **Approve** or **Request approval** appears. - You have the approval permission required for the action. - You have the invoice information needed for the form, including **Invoicing Address** and **Issued By**. After these checks, open **Financial** and choose **All Invoices** to locate the invoice. ## Find and open an invoice The invoice list is the starting point for locating a saved invoice by invoice type or status. Open **Financial** and choose **All Invoices**. Prerequisites - You can open the finance invoice workspace. Steps 1. Open **Financial** and choose **All Invoices**. 2. Choose the list that matches your work. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Review all invoice records | **All** | | Review sales invoices | **Sales Invoices** | | Review commission invoices | **Commission Invoices** | | Review incoming payments | **Incoming Payments** | | Track principal invoices | **Tracking Principal Invoices** | The invoice workspace can also include **Payment List** and **Principals Invoices**. **Account Invoices** is not an active list tab; use the invoice creation route instead. 3. Choose the status view that matches the invoice position. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Review upcoming invoices | **Upcoming** | | Review drafts | **Draft** | | Review approved invoices | **Approved** | | Review receivables | **Receivable** | | Review paid invoices | **Paid** | For commission invoices, **Awaiting Principal Payoff** is available as an additional status view. The **Due/Overdue** filter opens the Due list; read the row status to distinguish **Due** from **Overdue**. 4. Use the invoice number and status in a row to identify the record. 5. Choose the list tool that matches your purpose. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Review list-layout choices | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | 6. Open a row action menu when you need a different destination. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open the invoice | **Open** | | Open the related sales job | **Open job page** | | Open the invoice in another browser tab | **Open in new tab** | 7. In **Settings**, select **Export** when you need a file of the current list. 8. In the export dialog, choose **Export to Excel** or **Export to PDF**. 9. Select **Export**. If there are no rows to export, the list reports `NO Data to Export`. ![The invoice workspace route and finance list area](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a8e960a345e172dae66bda37ab0b37b1.png) ![The All invoice list choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ![The Sales Invoices list choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/915269b562a6270f369389e5604b9841.png) ![The Commission Invoices list choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e41618ec9a362498d344d8dfc3e5434c.png) ![The Draft status choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/87a7745ef7a6a7dac6caa243447b7fea.png) ![The Paid status choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/45aa5ceb77c1af925be210e13537079d.png) **Result:** The invoice list is open at the selected invoice type and status position. ## Read the invoice workspace An invoice record brings together account and date information, invoice amounts, approval actions, payment areas, and history for one invoice. The header fields are **Account**, **Invoice Date**, **Invoicing Address**, **Payment Period**, **Issued By**, **Vendor Order No.**, **External invoice no.**, **Client**, **Client Order No.**, **Order Date**, **Delivery Date**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, **L/C Number**, **Freight No.**, and **Invoice Note**. **Invoicing Address** and **Issued By** are required by the form rules. The amount area includes **Invoice amount**, **Total taxes**, **Total incl. tax**, **Paid Amount**, **Deductions**, and **Due amount**. For sales, additional, commission-additional, and account invoices, due amount is total after taxes minus paid and deducted amounts. | Area | Use it to… | |---|---| | **Attachment** | Review attached files | | **Tasks** | Review invoice tasks | | **Activities** | Review invoice activities | | **(principal Invoice)** | Continue to the related principal invoice | | **Last Modifications** | Review invoice history | The status marker identifies **Draft**, **Awaiting Approval**, **Approved**, **Due**, **Overdue**, or **Paid**. The list can use the available list setup, so use the headers visible in your list. The saved-invoice action area provides **Save** and **Save and Close** when editing is allowed. They are disabled when there are no changes or while saving. When you need a new invoice rather than an existing record, continue to [Choose an invoice creation route](#choose-an-invoice-creation-route). ## Choose an invoice creation route The finance invoice area provides separate entry points for account invoices and additional invoices. Field-by-field entry belongs in [Create an Account Invoice](create-invoice.md). Prerequisites - You know whether you are creating an account invoice or an additional invoice. - You have the invoice information required by the selected form. Steps 1. Open the invoice creation choices. 2. Choose the route that matches the document you need. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Create an account invoice | **Account Invoices** | | Create an additional invoice | **Additional Invoices** | 3. Continue the detailed entry in [Create an Account Invoice](create-invoice.md). ![The account-invoice entry surface](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ![The additional-invoice entry surface](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/99d708dfd73e3bd11aa2ae69755f8a4c.png) The account-invoice item grid uses **Item**, **Unit**, **Quantity**, **Unit Price**, **Discount**, **Item Price**, **Tax**, and **Currency Code**. Quantity accepts 1 through 999,999; unit price, sales price, and tax must be greater than 0; and discount ranges from 0 through 100. For a new account invoice, the application starts the invoice in **Draft**, uses the signed-in user's currency, and creates one initial item row. Changing the invoice currency applies the new currency code and symbol to every item and recalculates the items. **Result:** The selected invoice creation route is open for detailed invoice entry. After entering the invoice, continue with [Request and complete approval](#request-and-complete-approval) when the invoice is ready for approval. ## Request and complete approval Approval is the handoff from an invoice prepared for approval to an invoice ready for the next finance action. Prerequisites - The invoice is **Draft**, **Released for Invoicing**, or **Awaiting Approval**, as applicable. - An approval process applies. - You have the permission required for the action. Steps 1. Open the saved invoice and read its status marker. 2. Choose the action that matches your permission and the current status. | If… | Select | |---|---| | The invoice is **Draft** or **Released for Invoicing** and you cannot approve it | **Request approval** | | The invoice is **Draft**, **Released for Invoicing**, or **Awaiting Approval** and you can approve it | **Approve** | | The invoice is **Awaiting Approval** and you need to withdraw the request | **Cancel request for approval** | | The invoice is **Awaiting Approval** and you can reject it | **Reject approval request** | | The invoice is **Approved** and must return to draft | **Consider as not approved** | 3. Read the status marker after the action completes. A successful status update reports `Invoice updated successfully`. If the approval limit does not allow approval, the application reports `This invoice exceeds your approval limit`. ![The approval-related invoice status choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/45aa5ceb77c1af925be210e13537079d.png) **Result:** The invoice status marker shows the status produced by the selected approval action. ## Follow Due, Overdue, and Paid branches Payment status tells you whether an invoice is still due, has passed its payment period, or has no remaining amount due. Steps 1. Open the invoice and read **Due amount**. 2. Read the payment period associated with the invoice. 3. Read the paid amount and deductions shown in the amount area. 4. Choose the status that matches the due amount and payment period. | If… | Choose | |---|---| | The due amount is zero or less | **Paid** | | The payment period has passed and the due amount remains | **Overdue** | | The payment period has not passed and the due amount remains | **Due** | 5. Select the sent action that matches the invoice type and approval state. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Record that the invoice was sent to the principal | **Consider as sent to principal** | | Record that the invoice was sent to the client | **Consider as sent to client** | | Record that it was not sent to the principal | **Consider as not sent to principal** | | Record that it was not sent to the client | **Consider as not sent to client** | 6. Choose **Due**, **Overdue**, or **Paid** in the invoice list. **Result:** The invoice appears under the status that matches its due amount and payment timing; if the status or action differs, open [When an invoice action does not work](#when-an-invoice-action-does-not-work). ## When an invoice action does not work Use this table when a save, approval, validation, permission, or route result differs from the expected invoice action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Check validation` | Invoice validation stopped the action. | Review required fields and item values before saving again. | | `This field is required` | A required value is empty. | Complete the field marked as required. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | A numeric value is outside the permitted range. | Enter a value greater than 0 and no greater than 999,999.00. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | A numeric value is negative. | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `Invoicing Address is required.` | **Invoicing Address** is empty. | Enter the invoicing address. | | `Issued By is required.` | **Issued By** is empty. | Select the person who issued the invoice. | | `Quantity must be between 1 and 999,999.` | Quantity is outside the permitted range. | Enter a quantity from 1 through 999,999. | | `Unit price must be greater than 0.` | Unit price is invalid. | Enter a positive unit price. | | `Sales price must be greater than 0.` | Sales price is invalid. | Enter a positive sales price. | | `Tax must be greater than 0.` | Tax is invalid. | Enter a positive tax value. | | `Discount must be between 0 and 100.` | Discount is outside the permitted range. | Enter a discount from 0 through 100. | | `Invoice failed to save` | The save did not complete. | Review the values and select **Save** again. | | `Invoice saved successfully` | The invoice save completed. | Continue with the saved invoice status and related areas. | | `Invoice updated successfully` | The invoice status update completed. | Read the new status marker before continuing. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | A shared request completed successfully. | Continue from the updated invoice area. | | `This invoice exceeds your approval limit` | Your approval limit does not allow the action. | Use the approval route available to your role. | | `Action not allowed` | The selected action is not permitted. | Use the action available for the status and your permission. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The operation returned an error. | Return to the invoice and retry the permitted action. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A value contains forbidden characters. | Remove them and retry. | | `Upgrade needed` | The required subscription feature is not available. | Ask an administrator to review the subscription before using the feature. | | `Please enter at least one email` | The email action has no recipient. | Enter at least one recipient before saving the email action. | | `Freight typies failed to load` | Freight types could not be loaded. | Return to the invoice and retry after the freight types are available. | If the selected creation route returns you to the finance workspace, return to **Financial** and open the invoice area again before continuing. ### Out of scope: messages from related areas These messages belong to embedded activity, contact, file, or other related areas rather than the invoice lifecycle: | Message | Related area | |---|---| | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Activity | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Activity | | `There is no topic to print` | Activity | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contact | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Shared input | ## Continue with the next finance task The saved invoice hands work to payment, principal-invoice, purchase-invoice, and related-record areas. **Prerequisites** - You have a saved invoice. - You can open the applicable finance workspace. 1. Choose the related area that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Open or use | |---|---| | Review the related principal invoice | **(principal Invoice)**, then [Principal invoices](principal-invoices.md) | | Work with purchase invoices or outgoing payments | [Payables](payables.md) | | Review related saved-record information when the area is available | **Attachment**, **Tasks**, **Activities**, or **Last Modifications** | **Result:** You know which finance page or saved-record area owns the next action. # Job Profitability ## Job Profitability at a glance Job Profitability is the place to compare a sales job's sales price, direct cost, gross profit, and gross margin. Use it after a job exists and you need to understand its cost position before you continue with detailed cost or payment work. The Job Costing area connects the job list to a profitability record, purchasing costs, and direct-cost transactions. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the list and review its headers | [Review the Job Profitability list](#review-the-job-profitability-list) | | Find a job and choose its list stage | [Find a job and open its profitability view](#find-a-job-and-open-its-profitability-view) | | Compare the job's price, cost, and margin | [Review profitability and cost summaries](#review-profitability-and-cost-summaries) | | Inspect purchasing or direct-cost detail | [Handle conditional tabs and detail rows](#handle-conditional-tabs-and-detail-rows) | | Review the focused profitability record | [Job Profitability record](doc:job-profitability-record) | | Create or edit a cost transaction | [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) | | Continue with payments | [Payables](doc:payables) | The list begins with **Running Jobs** and a completed-job list. Opening a row takes you to a Job Profitability record, the summary for one job, where values are shown in **Reference Currency** or **Local currency**. The record groups purchasing costs and additional direct costs. Direct-cost transactions are the detailed entries behind the additional-cost area. ## Before you start Job Profitability is available only when your subscription includes the area and the list can load a saved list layout. A profitability record must already exist before its saved cost transaction can expose payment work. Prerequisites - Have access to the Job Profitability area. - Have a saved job to review. - Have a saved list layout available for the list columns. - For payment work, have a saved cost transaction with an identifier. - For a new payment, use a transaction that is not fully paid. - Have permission to edit the cost transaction before using its edit controls. The list headers come from your saved list layout, so work from the headers visible in your list. The initial currency choice belongs to the record you open; use the currency labels shown on that record rather than assuming which one opens first. ## Review the Job Profitability list The Job Profitability list is a row-based view of jobs and their cost measures. The headers shown in your list come from your saved list layout. The list presents **Job No.**, Gross Margin (€), Gross Margin (ج.م.‏), Total Direct Cost (€), Purchase Cost (€), Purchase Cost (ج.م.‏), Other Direct Cost (€), Sales price (€), and **Client**, with the rows available to you. Prerequisites - Have access to the Job Profitability area. - Have a saved list layout available for the list columns. Steps 1. Open the Job Profitability list. 2. Read **Job No.** and **Client** to identify the job row. see which cost area contributes to the total. 5. Use the list tools for the purpose you need. | Purpose | Select | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Work with the saved list layout | **Table Layout** | | Open the available list settings | **Settings** | ![Review the Job Profitability headers and list tools](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f0a6f13811fe1159b5f3bcfe8c1701b.png) **Result:** The Job Profitability list is open and ready for selection. ## Find a job and open its profitability view **Running Jobs** is the list for jobs currently in progress. The completed-job list also provides the **All**, the payment-status filter, and the **Paid** filter. Prerequisites - Have access to Job Profitability. - Know whether you are looking for a running or completed job. Steps 1. Select the completed-job list when the job has reached delivery. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every job in the completed-job list | **All** | | Review jobs awaiting payment | the payment-status filter | | Review paid jobs | **Paid** | 2. Select the job row you want to review. 3. Confirm that the Job Profitability record opens. ![Identify a job from the Running Jobs list and its visible headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6529acdab67576449ec0726a171a339a.png) ![Choose a filter before reviewing a completed job](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/044bca52d6c4f9a9a6b36508faf6e5f5.png) **Result:** The selected job's profitability record is open. ## Review profitability and cost summaries The record places the job identity beside its currency-based sales, direct-cost, gross-profit, and gross-margin values. Purchasing Cost groups purchase-order items, while Additional Direct Cost groups cost transactions by type. Prerequisites - Have a job profitability record open. - Have the job's purchasing and direct-cost information available for review. Steps 1. Read **Client** and **Job Title** to confirm that the record is the job you selected. 2. Read **Reference Currency** and **Local currency** to identify the two available summary presentations. 3. Read **Sales Price**, **Actual Direct Cost**, **Gross profit**, and **Gross margin** in the currency presentation shown on the record. The summary does not include an **Actual Revenue** field. The profitability record has no active **Save** or **Save and Close** control; use the transaction form for transaction saving. 4. Select **POs** to expand the purchasing area. 5. Read **PO No.**, the cost column, and **Package Title** in the purchasing rows. 6. Read **Transaction No.** and **Transaction Title** in the additional direct-cost rows. 7. Select **Direct Cost** when you need to inspect a detailed direct-cost transaction. ![Review the profitability summary and purchasing rows](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6047b3404670ada3f5744997fc60f81d.png) ![Compare the gross-margin summary with the other profitability measures](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/97f62a88e49127790c6d676c85b1bbed.png) **Result:** You have identified the job's summary measures and selected the cost area that needs further review. ## Handle conditional tabs and detail rows The profitability record shows different detail areas according to the currency selected, the group you expand, the number of allocated details, the orders selected, and the payment state. The **Direct Cost** panel is the detailed surface for an additional direct-cost transaction. Prerequisites - Have a job profitability record open. - Expand the relevant cost group before reviewing its child rows. - Use a saved transaction before selecting **Payments**. Steps 1. Read the summary values in the currency presentation currently shown. 2. Select **POs** to show the purchasing rows. 3. Select **Direct Cost** to open the direct-cost panel. 4. Read **Cost Type**, the classification field, **Transaction Title**, **Amount**, and **Invoice Date**. **Invoice Date** carries a required marker and cannot be later than today. Read **Invoice No.**, **Provider**, and **Comment** next. 5. Read the available cost classification in the panel. 6. Read the allocation columns shown in the allocation table. 7. Select **Items** when the transaction has a selected order with items available. 8. Select **Payments** when the transaction is saved. 9. In the Payments area, select the control for adding a payment when the saved transaction is not fully paid. The direct-cost panel also showed **Sales Order** as a readout and **OK** as the panel control. The allocation method becomes available when more than one allocated detail exists. ![Review the direct-cost fields and allocation area](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/62a2437781f6fe654daa9e67172eaba4.png) **Result:** The appropriate cost group, direct-cost panel, allocation area, or payment tab is on screen for the record state. ## When validation or access goes wrong The direct-cost form checks its fields and allocation before it saves. Use the exact message to choose the correction. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | Review the validation messages listed with it. | | `Please select at least one order.` | Select an order before continuing. | | `Please select at least one item/product.` | Select at least one item or product. | | `Please enter the percentage value or delete unused items.` | Enter the allocation percentage or remove the unused row. | | `Please adjust cost allocation.` | Adjust the allocations until the total is correct. | | `Please enter valid amount.` | Enter an amount greater than zero. | | `Please choose cost type.` | Choose a value in **Cost Type**. | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the field marked as required. | | `The total must equal 100%` | Adjust the allocation-percentage column until the total is 100%. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Review the item before confirming its deletion. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the next action for the saved transaction. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the transaction details and try the operation again. | ### Out of scope | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Please choose provider.`; `Please enter Transaction Title.`; `Please choose payment due date.`; `Just '-' '_' and '.' are the only characters that are accepted.` | [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) | The account, contact, and shared files messages belong to their focused panels. Use [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) for direct-cost validation and [Payables](doc:payables) for payment work. ## Continue with the detailed work Use the focused page that matches the work you selected. The overview helps you choose the next surface; each focused page carries its own detailed procedure. | Your next task | Continue with | |---|---| | Review the complete profitability record | [Job Profitability record](doc:job-profitability-record) | | Create, update, allocate, or validate a direct-cost transaction | [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) | | Review or record a payment for a saved transaction | [Payables](doc:payables) | | Return to the job list | [Find a job and open its profitability view](#find-a-job-and-open-its-profitability-view) | **Result:** You have selected the detailed page that owns the next part of the work. # L/G lifecycle ## L/G lifecycle at a glance An L/G lifecycle follows a letter of guarantee from its opening stage through approval, active use, return, and closure. Use the stage shown in the **Stage** column to choose the next permitted action. ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 state "Awaiting Approval" as AwaitingApproval state "Due for Return" as DueForReturn Draft --> AwaitingApproval: Request approval AwaitingApproval --> Approved: Approve Draft --> Active: Active Approved --> Active: Active Active --> DueForReturn: Due for Return DueForReturn --> Returned: Returned Expired --> Returned: Returned Returned --> Closed: Closed Active --> Liquidated: Liquidated Expired --> Liquidated: Liquidated DueForReturn --> Liquidated: Liquidated Draft --> Cancelled: Cancel Approved --> Cancelled: Cancel ``` The product uses the following stages. | Stage | |---| | **Draft** | | **Awaiting Approval** | | **Rejected Approval** | | **Approved** | | **Active** | | **Due for Return** | | **Returned** | | **Cancelled** | | **Liquidated** | | **Expired** | | **Closed** | **Rejected Approval** is a record stage, but it is not a filter in the list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find an L/G or choose a stage list | [Find an L/G](#find-an-lg) | | Check fields, tabs, and available controls | [Understand the L/G screen](#understand-the-lg-screen) | | Submit or approve an L/G | [Submit and approve an L/G](#submit-and-approve-an-lg) | | Return, close, liquidate, or cancel an L/G | [Return, close, liquidate, or cancel an L/G](#return-close-liquidate-or-cancel-an-lg) | | Extend an eligible Performance Bond or edit an active record | [Handle extensions and editing branches](#handle-extensions-and-editing-branches) | | Fix a validation or permission message | [Fix errors and continue](#fix-errors-and-continue) | | Create a new L/G | [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) | | Work from the finance list and record view | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | | Review L/G information attached to a sales job | [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](doc:sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history) | ## Before you start An L/G stage action works on a saved record with no unsaved changes, and the available actions depend on your permissions and the approval process. **Prerequisites** - You have an existing L/G when you are moving a record through its stages. - The record has no unsaved changes before you select a stage action. - You can edit the record to use **Save** or **Save and Close**. - You can create a new record to save a new L/G. - You know whether an approval process applies and whether you can approve the L/G. - You have the information needed for the fields shown on your screen. Requiredness for the basic L/G fields can be configured by your company. The approval process and your approval permission determine whether **Request approval** or **Approve** appears. ## Find an L/G The L/G list is the finance worklist for finding records by view and stage. Use it when you need to open an existing L/G before taking a lifecycle action. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the finance L/G list. **Steps** 1. In the finance navigation, select **Bank Guaranties**. 2. Select the list view that matches the records you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | See all L/G records | **All** | | See company L/G records | **Company LGs** | 3. Select the stage filter that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to review… | Select | |---|---| | Records in any stage | **All** | | Records being prepared | **Draft** | | Records waiting for approval | **Awaiting Approval** | | Approved records | **Approved** | | Records in use | **Active** | | Records approaching return | **Due for Return** | | Expired records | **Expired** | | Returned records | **Returned** | | Closed records | **Closed** | | Cancelled records | **Cancelled** | | Liquidated records | **Liquidated** | ![The All list with its stage filters and L/G rows](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/219831210ee182a57307b2374abaeb1d.png) 4. Select a data cell in the row you want to inspect. **Result:** The selected filter refreshes the list, and selecting a finance-list data cell opens the selected L/G record. ## Understand the L/G screen The list identifies each L/G by its number, parties, values, dates, job, stage, type, and increase amount. The record screen carries the L/G information, recommendation areas, stage dialogs, and follow-up areas. The list contains these columns: | Column | Use it to… | |---|---| | **L/G no.** | identify the guarantee | | **Benificiary** | identify the beneficiary | | **L/G issuer** | identify the issuer | | **Bank** | identify the bank | | **Requested value** | review the requested amount | | **Issued value** | review the issued amount | | **Current value** | review the current amount | | **Issue date** | review when it was issued | | **Expiry date** | review when it expires | | **JobNo** | locate the related job | | **Stage** | identify the current lifecycle stage | | **L/G type** | identify the guarantee type | | **Increase amount** | review the increase amount | The list also has buttons titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ![The L/G list headers and list controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/750145a8e2bca3ea987540074da982e2.png) On the record screen, the basic L/G information includes **Beneficiary**, **LG Issuer**, **On Behalf of**, **LG Type**, **Requested LG Value**, **Bank**, **LG Number**, **Activation Date**, **Issue Value**, **Cash Cover**, and **Expiry Date**. Requiredness for these fields is controlled through the company’s L/G configuration, so a field is required only where your company configures it. Recommendation areas can include **Confirmation Of The LG Requirement**, **Comment**, and **Confirmation Of The Financial Viability**. The extension, deduction, increase, return, and editing dialogs have their own fields, including **Extension Period**, **Expiration date**, **Reason**, **LG Deduction Date**, **LG Deduction Percentage**, **LG Increase Date**, **LG Increase Percentage**, **LG Increase Reason**, **Return Reason**, and **Returned On**. Use the record areas **Comments**, **Attachment**, and **LG Extensions** to move to the corresponding follow-up area. Save changes with **Save** or save and leave the page with **Save and Close**. ## Submit and approve an L/G Submitting an L/G places it into the approval path when approval is configured; approving it records the approval decision. Activating it moves it into active use after the required checks pass. **Prerequisites** - You have a saved L/G with no unsaved changes. - For approval actions, you know whether approval applies and whether you can approve. - For **Active**, the L/G is Draft when no approval process applies, or Approved when one does apply. **Steps** 1. Select the action that matches the L/G’s approval and current stage. | Action | Select it when… | |---|---| | **Request approval** | the L/G is Draft, approval applies, and you cannot approve it | | **Approve** | approval applies, you can approve, and the stage is before **Approved** | | **Active** | the L/G is Draft without approval or Approved with approval | 2. Select the save action that matches where you need to go next. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the record open after saving changes | **Save** | | Save the changes and leave the page | **Save and Close** | **Result:** A successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. A failed save displays `An error occurred while processing your request`. A successful approval moves the L/G to **Approved**, and a successful activation moves it to **Active**. ## Return, close, liquidate, or cancel an L/G These actions close or end an L/G’s current business path. Choose the action that matches the stage shown in **Stage**; the action opens its validation dialog where the transition requires additional information. **Prerequisites** - You have a saved L/G with no unsaved changes. - The L/G is in a stage listed for the action you need. - You can provide the information requested by the action’s dialog. **Steps** 1. Select the action that matches the L/G stage. | Action | Use it when the L/G is… | |---|---| | **Due for Return** | **Active** | | **Returned** | **Due for Return** or **Expired** | | **Closed** | **Returned** | | **Liquidated** | **Active**, **Expired**, or **Due for Return** | | **Cancel** | **Draft** or **Approved** | **Result:** The L/G moves to **Due for Return**, **Returned**, **Closed**, **Liquidated**, or **Cancelled** after the selected action’s validation checks pass. ## Handle extensions and editing branches An extension changes the usable period of an eligible guarantee, while editing lets you correct or complete information on an active or later record. **Prerequisites** - For **Extend As Warranty Bond**, the L/G is an Active or Expired Performance Bond that has not already been upgraded. - For **Enable Editing**, the L/G is Active or later. - You have no unsaved changes before opening the branch. **Steps** 1. Select the branch that matches the L/G and complete the listed follow-up. | Branch | Use it when… | Follow-up | |---|---|---| | **Extend As Warranty Bond** | the L/G is an Active or Expired Performance Bond that has not already been upgraded | Enter the extension information, including **Expiry Date** when it is shown. | | **Enable Editing** | the L/G is Active or later | Update the fields shown, such as **Bank**, **LG Number**, **Activation Date**, and **Expiry Date**. | | **LG Extensions**, **LG Deductions**, or **LG Increase** | the corresponding follow-up action is available | Open the selected follow-up area. | **Result:** The applicable extension or editing dialog is open, or the selected follow-up area is active. ## Fix errors and continue Use the exact message on screen to decide whether to correct a value, obtain permission, complete confirmation, or edit a pending increase. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | The save or stage update completed | Continue with the resulting stage or next task. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save or stage update failed | Review the fields and stage conditions, then try again. | | `You don’t have permission` | Your access does not allow the action | Ask for the permission required for the action. | | `LG still needs confirmation` | The approval action still needs confirmation | Complete the required confirmation before continuing. | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | An extension or deduction blocks the reversal | Continue from the permitted stage instead of reverting it. | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | The extension date does not follow the current expiry date | Choose a later date. | | `There is a pending increase you can edit` | An increase is pending and available for editing | Open the pending increase and edit it. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A list file or folder operation contains a forbidden character | Remove the forbidden character from the file or folder name, then try the operation again. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | An attachment-library file or folder name uses a character outside the accepted set | Use only the characters named in the message for the attachment-library name. | ## Continue after the lifecycle action After a lifecycle action, the **Stage** column and the record stage show where the L/G now stands. Use that result to choose the next piece of work rather than repeating the previous action. | After you… | Continue with… | |---|---| | Need to create a new guarantee | [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) | | Need to review finance records | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | | Need to review guarantee information on a sales job | [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](doc:sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history) | | Need to work with attached files | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | The follow-up areas **Comments**, **Attachment**, and **LG Extensions** remain available on the record when their conditions apply. **Result:** You can confirm the resulting L/G stage and continue with the page that owns the next task. # My Desk workspace My Desk is a personal workspace for focusing grouped work, choosing a way to review it, and opening linked records without leaving the workspace. | If you need to… | Go to… | | --- | --- | | Narrow the workspace to a client, vendor, project, responsible salesperson, contact, or team | [Focus work and choose a list group](#focus-work-and-choose-a-list-group) | | Review graphs or scheduled work | [Choose a work mode](#choose-a-work-mode) | | Work with standalone tasks or activities | [Manage tasks from My Desk](my-desk-tasks.md) or [Record activities from My Desk](my-desk-activities.md) | | Open a linked sales, invoice, account, project, contact, user, team, or L/G record | [Open and hand off a linked record](#open-and-hand-off-a-linked-record) | | Continue detailed work on a linked record | [Sales job record](sales-job-record.md), [Invoice lifecycle](invoice-lifecycle.md), or the relevant hand-off in [Open and hand off a linked record](#open-and-hand-off-a-linked-record) | ## Before you start Open **My Desk** from the application navigation. Principal users open the principal workspace from their principal workspace entry. The available workspace areas depend on the subscriptions included for your organisation and on whether you use the standard or principal workspace. ### Prerequisites - Know whether you use the standard or principal workspace. - Ask your administrator whether the My Desk, Tasks, Activities, and **Calendar** subscriptions are included when one of those areas is unavailable. The standard workspace provides a filter control and the list groups. A principal workspace provides a client list at the top and displays the principal workspace title. **Tasks**, **Activities**, and the scheduler can be unavailable when their subscriptions are not included, and principal users see those work tabs as disabled links. **Result:** You know which workspace route and work areas are available to you. ## Focus work and choose a list group Use the workspace filter when the work you need to review belongs to a particular client, vendor, project, responsible salesperson, contact, or team. Lists organises the grouped work into **Current** and **Archived**. ### Prerequisites - Open the standard My Desk workspace. - Know the business context you want to review. ### Steps 1. Select Filter. 2. Select the row that matches the context you need. | If you are focusing on… | Select… | | --- | --- | | A client | **Client** | | A vendor | **Vendor** | | A project | **Project** | | A responsible salesperson | **Sales Responsible** | | A contact | **Contact** | | A team | Team | 3. Select Filter by on a row that supports row filtering. 4. Select Lists. 5. Choose the group you need. | If you need to review… | Select… | | --- | --- | | Current work | **Current** | | Archived work | **Archived** | 6. Select **View** or Close view when you need to open or close a row view in the filter panel. 7. Select **Clear filter** when a row filter no longer applies. ![The My Desk filter control and workspace scope choices](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) The standard screen showed the available filter, list, graph, task, activity, scheduler, current, and archived choices. Selecting **Filter** returned the browser to the application home screen. **Result:** The workspace is focused on the selected context, and its list groups are ready for review. While the list columns load, My Desk displays three placeholder groups with four placeholder rows in each group. When saved workspace state is enabled, My Desk restores the previously selected list group. The list request carries the selected client, principal, project, responsible person, contact, and team scope values. ## Choose a work mode Each work mode answers a different review question: the list mode groups work, the graph mode presents the chart view, the task mode presents standalone tasks, the activity mode presents visits, emails, meetings, and calls, and the scheduler presents scheduled work. ### Prerequisites - Open My Desk. - Use a standard user account for an enabled task, activity, or **Calendar** tab. ### Steps 1. Select the mode that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Select… | | --- | --- | | Review grouped work | the list mode | | Review chart summaries | the graph mode | | Work with standalone tasks | the task mode | | Review or add visits, emails, meetings, or calls | the activity mode | | Review scheduled work | **Calendar** | 2. In **Calendar**, select Timeline when you need the timeline view. 3. In **Calendar**, select Tasks, Activities, Visit, Meeting, Call, BDD, or Delivery dates to choose the work shown. 4. Select Submit to apply the scheduler filters. When the scheduler is in Day or Week view, Timeline changes its presentation. The control is disabled in Month view. Selecting **Today** returns the scheduler to today after you move away from the current date. Selecting an appointment opens its source record. Task appointments open the task record, bid-due and delivery appointments open the sales record, receivables open the procurement record, and other appointments open the activity record. The visible Calendar filter choices are **Tasks**, **Activities**, **Visit**, **Meeting**, **Call**, **BDD**, and Delivery dates. Calendar opens task appointments at the task edit page, bid-due and delivery appointments at the sales edit page, receivables at the procurement edit page, and other appointment types at the activity edit page. ![The Graphs work mode in My Desk](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) The screen provides the scheduler when its subscription is included. The groups and list columns depend on the workspace setup. Selecting the graph mode returned the browser to the home screen. > **Note:** Work groups and list columns depend on the workspace setup available to your account. **Result:** The selected work mode is open, with its available filters and work areas on screen. ## Add a task or activity from My Desk Use the task and activity work modes to create standalone work without opening a particular sales job. The task mode starts with the personal task view and also provides an all-work view. ### Add a task ### Prerequisites - Use a standard user account. - Have the Tasks subscription included. ### Steps 1. Select the task mode. 2. Select **My Tasks** for the personal task view, or select **All** for the wider task view. 3. Select **View completed tasks** when you need completed work included. 4. Select the plus action on the task tab. 5. Complete the task form. 6. Select **Save**. The task form requires **Priority**, a task title, **Start Date**, and **Due Date**. A new task starts with today's **Start Date**, a **Due Date** one day later, and **Task Progress** at `0%`. The **Due Date** cannot precede the **Start Date**. A successful save displays `Data saved Successfully`; My Desk reloads the task list and closes the popup. **Result:** The saved task is available in the task list after the save event completes. ### Act on a task row The task-row action menu provides **Open**, **Complete**, **Un complete**, and **Delete**. Only the task owner can change completion or delete the task. **Complete** opens a confirmation with `Are you sure that you want to mark this task as completed?`; **Un complete** opens a confirmation with `Are you sure that you want to un-complete this task?`. ### Steps 1. Open the action menu for the task row. 2. Select **Open**, **Complete**, **Un complete**, or **Delete**. 3. Confirm the completion or deletion action when the confirmation appears. After completion changes, My Desk refreshes the task grid. A successful deletion displays `Task deleted successfully`; a deletion failure displays `Error while deleting task`. **Result:** The selected task action is applied, or the task remains unchanged. ### Add an activity ### Prerequisites - Use a standard user account. - Have the Activities subscription included. ### Steps 1. Select the activity mode. 2. Select the plus action on the activity tab. 3. Select **Visit**, **Meeting**, or **Call**. 4. Complete the activity form. 5. Select **Save**. The activity form validates its own entries before saving. After a successful save, My Desk reloads the activity list and closes the popup. **Email** is an activity-list type, but it is not an available My Desk add-menu choice. In the activity list, the available type choices are **All**, **Visits**, **Email**, **Meetings**, and **Call**. **Show Archived Activities** includes archived activities when selected. Activity status Activity status choices also include Not Reported, **Done**, and **Cancelled**. ![The My Desk work tabs and the task or activity add action](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1282b268d2cd49e9cf8219d455b16599.png) **Result:** The saved activity is available in the activity list after the save event completes. ## Open and hand off a linked record An opened-record tab lets you inspect a linked record inside My Desk. The available record views include sales jobs, accounts, projects, users, contacts, teams, invoices, principal invoices, and L/Gs. ### Prerequisites - Open a row that has a linked-record view. - For the normal record page, use a standard user account and a linked record with an available link. ### Steps 1. Select the linked row. 2. Select the dynamically titled tab to return to the opened record. 3. Select the control in the opened-record tab's options area that opens the record's normal page. 4. Select the X icon in the same options area when you finish reviewing the record. The standard view-mode notice says `To make changes, click the pen icon on the tab bar.` The principal view-mode notice says `View Mode Only`. **Result:** The linked record opens in My Desk, and closing its tab returns the workspace to **Lists**. ![My Desk with the linked-record work area](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1282b268d2cd49e9cf8219d455b16599.png) Continue detailed work in [Sales job record](sales-job-record.md), [Invoice lifecycle](invoice-lifecycle.md), [Principal invoices](principal-invoices.md), [L/G lifecycle](l-g-lifecycle.md), [Accounts](accounts.md), [Projects](projects.md), [Contacts](contacts-overview.md), [Users](users-overview.md), or [Teams](teams.md), according to the record you opened. ## Handle principal-user and subscription variations The principal workspace is the principal-user version of My Desk. It uses a client list at the top of the workspace and keeps the grouped work and work-mode tabs in the same overall surface. ### Prerequisites - Use the principal-user route when your account is a principal user. - Have client records available in the client list. ### Steps 1. Open the principal workspace from the principal workspace entry. 2. Select the client list at the top of the workspace. 3. Select the client whose workspace you need to review. 4. Select an available work mode. ![Principal Desk with the client list open](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e51907e7b0bb2555b3bab237b8fd72b6.png) The principal screen showed the principal workspace title, work-mode choices, **Current**, and **Archived**. The client list opened a list of client records. Principal users see **Tasks**, **Activities**, and the scheduler as disabled links. When the My Desk subscription is unavailable, the subscription-upgrade surface replaces the workspace. **Result:** The workspace is scoped to the selected principal client, or you know that an unavailable subscription or disabled work mode requires an administrator's help. ## When workspace behaviour does not match Use this table when a control or workspace area does not behave as expected. ### Steps 1. Choose the recovery path that matches what you see. | If the application… | Continue with… | | --- | --- | | Returns to its home screen after **Filter** | Step 2 | | Returns to the home screen after the graph mode | Step 4 | 2. Return to My Desk after the home-screen outcome. 3. Select the list mode. 4. Return to My Desk after the home-screen outcome. 5. Select an available task, activity, or **Calendar** mode. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | **Tasks**, **Activities**, or the scheduler is disabled | Principal users cannot select those work tabs | Use the available workspace tabs or ask your administrator about access. | | The workspace is replaced by a subscription-upgrade surface | The My Desk subscription is unavailable | Ask your administrator whether the subscription is included. | | A task or activity save reports `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save was refused by the form or service | Check the form and try the save again. | | My Desk reports `Can not open.. belong to other branch` | The linked activity belongs to another branch | Open work belonging to your permitted branch. | | An activity save returns `error.Message` | The service supplies the activity error text | Follow the instruction in the returned message. | | An activity reports `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | The activity action is restricted to the permitted branch | Use an activity in your permitted branch. | | An activity reports `One topic and at least one note is required` | The activity does not have the required topic and note | Add a topic and at least one note before completing the activity. | | An activity reports `There is no topic to print` | There is no topic available for printing | Add a topic before printing the activity. | | An activity reports `Action not allowed` | The requested activity action is not allowed | Check the activity and try an allowed action. | | An activity reports `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The entered text contains forbidden characters | Remove those characters and try again. | | A successful activity request reports `Your request was completed successfully` | The activity request completed successfully | Continue reviewing the activity or return to the workspace. | | A saved task or activity reports `Data saved Successfully` | The save completed successfully | Continue with the task or activity. | **Result:** You know how to recover when a workspace area is unavailable, disabled, or returns to another application screen. ### Messages from linked panels The opened-record area can carry messages owned by the page for the linked record. Use the owning page when one of these messages appears. | Message | Owning page | | --- | --- | | `Required Receiving Date` | Material requisition | | `This field is required` | Contact edit | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Sales job and invoice item panels | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Sales job and invoice item panels | | `An account with this name already exists` | Accounts | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Accounts | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Accounts | | `This Field Is Required` | Accounts | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contacts | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job updated successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job deleted successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job regretted successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job missed successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Sales job record | | `Converted to offer successfully` | Sales job record | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Sales job record | | `Error saving custom fields` | Sales job record | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Sales job record | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Sales job record | | `A project with this name already exists` | Sales job record | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Sales job record | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Sales job record | | `Please enter action for each milstone` | Pricing quotation | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Pricing quotation | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Sales job BOM | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Sales job BOM | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Sales job BOM | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Sales job BOM | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Products | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Products | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Products | | `Please select one product` | Products | | `Required Receiving After` | Material requisition | | `Package must have at least one item` | Material requisition | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Material requisition | | `Please enter at least one email` | Purchasing | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Purchasing | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Purchasing | | `Order must have at least one item` | Purchasing | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Purchasing | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchasing | | `Required Offer Type` | Procurement | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Procurement | | `Error loading accounts` | Delivery notes | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Item references | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Item references | | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Item references | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | L/G record | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | L/G record | The header add actions `Task`, `Email`, `Visit`, `Meeting`, and `Call` in the old header menu are not available. The task **Following** option, task priority/status/creator/owner filters, and the task `filterString` control are also not available in those guarded paths. # Plans ## Plans Plans are the subscription options you review in the configuration area. Open a plan from the list when you need to inspect its details. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the list and its columns | [Understand the plan list](#understand-the-plan-list) | | Narrow the list | [Filter the plan list](#filter-the-plan-list) | | Open a saved plan | [Find and open a plan](#find-and-open-a-plan) | | Resolve a loading problem | [When the list cannot load](#when-the-list-cannot-load) | | Continue with the selected plan | [Continue to plan details](#continue-to-plan-details) | | Work with the selected plan's details | [Plan details](doc:configuration-plans-record) | ## Before you start The Plans page loads the list when you open it. Use the column values to recognise the plan you need before opening it. | Check | What to look for | |---|---| | Plan | The plan name in the **Plan** column | | Price | The amount in the **Price** column | | Dates | The values in `Created at` and `Modified at` | | Availability | The value in the **Active** column | ## Understand the plan list The Plans page is a grid for reviewing subscription plans. The page starts with the `All plans` and `Plans` breadcrumbs, followed by these columns: | Column | Use it to… | |---|---| | **Plan** | Identify the plan. | | **Price** | Compare the plan price. | | `Created at` | See when the plan was created. | | `Modified at` | See when the plan was last modified. | | **Active** | Check whether the plan is active. | When no plan rows are available, the page shows `No data` and `Count: 0`. ![Review the plan list by its breadcrumbs, column headers, and empty-list readouts.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6bc05d9c960b43d21c87413b6115abdd.png) ## Filter the plan list The **Filter row** and **Header filter** narrow the plan rows by the values in their columns. **Prerequisites** - The Plans list is open. - The column you want to use is visible. **Steps** 1. In the **Filter row**, enter the value you want to use for the selected column. 2. Press `Enter` to apply the filter. 3. If you need a column-specific filter, select the **Header filter** for that column. **Result:** The grid applies the selected filter to the plan list. ## Find and open a plan A plan record is the detailed page for a subscription option identified by its name, price, dates, and active state. **Prerequisites** - The Plans list is open. - The plan appears in the list. **Steps** 1. Use one of these alternatives: | If you are selecting… | Do this | |---|---| | A plan row | Select a cell in the row other than the edit cell. | | The edit link | Select the **Edit-cell link** in the row. | **Result:** The selected plan opens at `/configuration/plans/`. ## When the list cannot load The list-load error is the message shown when the request for plans fails. | What you see | What it means | |---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request for the plan list failed. | ## Continue to plan details After the selected plan opens, continue with its detailed work. **Prerequisites** - The selected plan record is open. **Steps** 1. On the plan record, continue with [Plan details](doc:configuration-plans-record). **Result:** The selected plan's detailed record is open. # Pricing Quotation ## What Pricing Quotation is Pricing Quotation is the own-company costing work you use to support a sales offer. It connects the sales job to the work of requesting supplier information, preparing a quotation, and handing the resulting work to procurement, project management, or the warehouse. An RFQ (request for quotation) is the request for supplier information. A quotation is the supplier's costing response. The work starts from the sales context and moves through these records before procurement, project management, or warehouse work takes over. The same purchasing record can link back to its sales job, so you can keep the costing work with the offer it supports. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | See all Pricing Quotation work | [Pricing Quotation active lists](doc:pricing-quotation-active-lists) | | Prepare or send an RFQ | [Pricing Quotation RFQs](doc:pricing-quotation-rfqs) | | Work with a supplier quotation | [Pricing Quotation quotations](doc:pricing-quotation-quotations) | | Find cancelled, unquoted, rejected, or deleted work | [Pricing Quotation exception lists](doc:pricing-quotation-exception-lists) | | Continue purchasing work | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Work from procurement lists | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Continue project work | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Continue warehouse work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | The sales job's Purchasing tab is a cross-link to this work area. Use [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) for the sales record itself. ```mermaid flowchart LR S[Sales job] --> P[Pricing Quotation] P --> R[RFQ] R --> Q[Quotation] Q --> PR[Procurement] Q --> PM[Project management] Q --> W[Warehouse] ``` ## Before you start Before you open a record, know which sales job and package you are costing and which supplier information belongs to the request. The record carries the job items into the RFQ and quotation work, so selecting the right items and supplier keeps the downstream request aligned with the sales offer. Prerequisites | Before you start | What must be true | | --- | --- | | Access | You can access the **Pricing Quotation** menu item and the Buyout Job Module. | | Record stage | RFQ panels appear after the initial stage and before Offer; quotation panels appear from Offer until before Order. | | New RFQ | The saved record has package items, and you select one or more of them. | | Quotation action | The quotation is saved when the action requires a saved record, has no unsaved changes when the action requires an unchanged record, and is not Ordered. | | Editing | You have permission to edit the record when you need to save or change it. | | Company configuration | Some RFQ and quotation fields are mandatory only where your company configures them. | The detailed RFQ and quotation field rules appear with the corresponding panels below. With that context in place, confirm the conditions below before opening the work list. ## Find Pricing Quotation work Use the list tab that matches the work you are looking for rather than opening a record first and searching its panels. ### Open a list or an existing record Prerequisites - You know whether you need active RFQ work, quotation work, all records, or an archived exception list. Steps 1. In the Sales menu, select **Pricing Quotation**. 2. Select the list that matches your purpose. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review the complete list | **All** | | Work with requests for quotation | **RFQs** | | Work with supplier quotations | **Quotations** | | Find exception records | **Archived** | 3. In **Archived**, select the filter that matches the record state. | If you need to find… | Select | | --- | --- | | RFQs without a quotation | **Unquoted RFQs** | | Cancelled RFQs | **Cancelled RFQs** | | Rejected quotations | **Rejected Quotations** | | Deleted records | **Deleted** | 4. Select a data row to open its Pricing Quotation record. ![The Pricing Quotation list with its tabs and visible column headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2dfbdd15c2b9ed42fadc84c349c4bb2e.png) **Result:** The selected list or record opens, ready for you to identify its columns or record panels. ## Understand the list and record surfaces The list answers which costing records need attention. A record then groups the RFQ or quotation panels belonging to the purchasing job. The information shown in the list comes from the list layout used by your company, so work from the headers visible in your list. ### List columns and actions The RFQ list can show these nine headers: | Header | What it identifies | | --- | --- | | **Package no.** | The package reference | | **Sales job No.** | The linked sales-job reference | | **Purchaser** | The person responsible for the purchase work | | **Offer type** | The offer classification | | **Bid due date** | The date requested for the bid | | **Sub-supplier** | The supplier receiving or providing the request | | **Client** | The client connected to the work | | RFQ stage | The current RFQ state | | **Package title** | The package description | The quotation list can add **Offer price** and Offer price in € to the list information. The list also provides the titled buttons **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and Settings. The list can also provide a header filter and a **Filter Row** for narrowing the displayed records. Paging displays 30 records at a time, and the selected layout controls the columns; column reordering and resizing are enabled. **Export** is available only when the purchase/list Export permission allows it. The export dialog offers Excel and PDF icon choices. ![The quotation list with quotation price columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5dbf07cade72cd7c2e039ffb83c6468e.png) ### RFQ and quotation panels An RFQ panel can show **Sub-supplier**, its RFQ state, and **Bid Due Date** when a date is present. The RFQ editor carries **Required Offer Type**, **RFQ Date**, **Required Bid Due Date**, and the selected **Items**. A quotation panel can show **Sub-supplier**, an alternative or revision marker, its state, **Offer No.**, **Offer Price**, **Offer Expiry Date**, **Expired Since**, and **Bid Due Date**. The quotation editor carries the quotation fields and item rows. **Sub-supplier** is a required single-choice field. **Offer No.**, **Offer Type**, **Offer Date**, **Validity Period**, **Delivery Time**, and **Delivery Term** are mandatory only when the corresponding company configuration requires them. **Offer Date** cannot be later than today. **Validity Period** and **Delivery Time** must be within the configured period range. If entered, **Payment Period** must be a whole number within that range. Each retained quotation item needs a description, a quantity greater than zero and no more than six digits, and a non-negative **Unit Price**. The quotation also requires at least one item with a nonblank description. For a saved standalone record, **Attachment** loads the attached documents and **Last Modifications** loads the record's audit history. ![The RFQ list and its visible RFQ-stage columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7755a3f67260be49d382d3a00d84c217.png) ### Order area The quotation panel's active controls do not include **Convert To Order**. Use [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) when the next work belongs to an existing purchasing-order process. ### Quotation actions and recovery On a saved, unchanged quotation that is not Ordered, the available action depends on its state. **Valid Offer** moves a saved Draft quotation to the valid state. **Alternative Offer** and **Revision** are available for a persisted quotation when they are shown. **Rejected Offer**, **Cancel RFQ**, and **Regretted To Offer** open their corresponding flows. **Back to RFQ** returns a persisted, unchanged, non-Ordered quotation to the RFQ flow. The recovery actions **Consider Offer as Not Rejected**, **Consider RFQ As Not Cancelled**, and **Consider As Not Regretted** restore the matching exception state when they are shown. When a quotation is cancelled, regretted, or rejected, its popup requires the applicable date and reason or comment fields. Cancellation requires **Cancellation Reason**, **Cancellation Date**, and **Comment**. Regret requires **Regret Reason**, **Regret Date**, and **Comment**. Rejection requires **Reject Date** and **Comment**. ## Follow RFQ and quotation hand-offs Use the selected job items to prepare the RFQ, then continue with the supplier quotation and the downstream hand-off. The focused RFQ and quotation pages own the complete editing procedures. ### Move from selected items to the next record surface Prerequisites - The Pricing Quotation record is saved. - The record has package items. - You have selected one or more items for a new RFQ. Steps 1. Select the job items that belong in the request. 2. Select **+ RFQ**. 3. In the Add New RFQ dialog, complete the RFQ fields and select **Save**. 4. Choose the submission route that applies to your access. | If you can send mail | If you cannot send mail | | --- | --- | | Select **Send RFQ To Sub-supplier**. | Select **Consider RFQ As Submitted To Sub-supplier**. | | The mail flow prepares the RFQ content and attachment before **Send To Principal**. | The RFQ is treated as submitted without the mail route. | 5. When the submitted RFQ is ready to become a quotation, select **Receive Offer**. 6. On the quotation panel, select **Save** after entering the quotation information and item values. **Result:** The selected job items are represented in the RFQ, and a submitted RFQ can move to the quotation surface. A saved quotation reports `Saved Successfully`. ### Continue the work after the quotation Prerequisites - The quotation work is complete and you know which downstream area receives the next task. Steps 1. Open the downstream area that matches the next task. | If the next task is… | Open | | --- | --- | | Procurement work | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Project work | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Warehouse fulfillment | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | **Result:** You are at the downstream work area that matches the next part of the job. ## Handle stage and availability branches The available action depends on the record's stage and whether it is saved without unsaved changes. Read the stage shown on the RFQ or quotation panel before selecting an action. | What you see | What it means for your next action | | --- | --- | | A Draft RFQ | Use **Send RFQ To Sub-supplier** or **Consider RFQ As Submitted To Sub-supplier** when the RFQ is saved and unchanged. | | A submitted RFQ | Use **Receive Offer** to move into quotation work, or **Enable Editing** where the editing route is available. | | A valid quotation | **Alternative Offer**, **Revision**, **Rejected Offer**, **Cancel RFQ**, and **Regretted To Offer** follow the saved, unchanged, non-Ordered conditions. | | A cancelled, regretted, or rejected quotation | Use the corresponding recovery action when it is shown: **Consider RFQ As Not Cancelled**, **Consider As Not Regretted**, or **Consider Offer as Not Rejected**. | | A record opened read-only | Review the fields and use the focused page for a role with edit access. | | The Buyout Job Module is unavailable | The list or record area is replaced by **Upgrade needed**. | The active list has no Orders tab. If the available action differs from the expected stage or access, use the branch table above before continuing. ![The rejected-quotation filter selected under Archived](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/eaf9ed18af174b8074bb884d61023979.png) ## When list or record work goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to identify the correction. The shared messages below are listed only where this Pricing Quotation work can raise them; shared attachment, mail, order, milestone, package, and contact messages belong to their owning pages. | Message | What to check or do | | --- | --- | | `This field is required` | Complete the field marked as required before saving. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a positive value within the displayed limit. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Select one or more job items before selecting **+ RFQ**. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the RFQ. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the quotation. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields shown on the RFQ or quotation panel. | | `Saved Successfully` | The RFQ or quotation save completed. | | `Saving Error` | Review the fields and try **Save** again. | | `Inquiry cancelled` | The RFQ cancellation completed. | | `Inquiry regretted` | The RFQ regret action completed. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this request for quotation?` | Confirm that the Draft RFQ is the one you want to remove before selecting **OK**. | | `Purchasing job must have at least one RFQ` | Keep at least one RFQ on the purchasing job. | | `Purchasing offer cancelled` | The quotation cancellation completed. | | `Purchasing offer regretted` | The quotation regret action completed. | | `Offer rejected` | The quotation rejection completed. | | `Upgrade needed` | The required Buyout Job Module subscription is unavailable for this work. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove forbidden characters from the list filter and apply the filter again. | | `Required Offer Type` | Treat the field as part of the RFQ information when it is shown. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Treat the field as part of the RFQ information when it is shown. | ### Out of scope The shared message `An error occurred while processing your request` belongs to general request-error handling rather than a Pricing Quotation-specific correction. ## Know what happens next After you select a destination, continue in the page that owns the next job. | After you reach… | Continue with… | | --- | --- | | The active Pricing Quotation tabs | [Pricing Quotation active lists](doc:pricing-quotation-active-lists) | | An Archived filter | [Pricing Quotation exception lists](doc:pricing-quotation-exception-lists) | | A new or editable RFQ | [Pricing Quotation RFQs](doc:pricing-quotation-rfqs) | | A quotation panel | [Pricing Quotation quotations](doc:pricing-quotation-quotations) | | Procurement work | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | A procurement work list | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Project-management work | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Warehouse fulfillment | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | The list and record surfaces use company setup for some fields and list columns. The quotation and RFQ procedures explain those fields where you enter or change them. The record-level order area remains a separate gated path. ![The RFQ list ready for a record to be selected](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7755a3f67260be49d382d3a00d84c217.png) # Principals Report ## Principals Report overview The Principals Report is a reporting view for reviewing principal-related sales activity over a chosen period. Use it when you need a consolidated view of jobs, offers, orders, deliveries, lost jobs, and cancellations for selected accounts. It sits on the reporting path and opens at `/principalReport`. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the fields and actions available when the report opens | [Open the report and identify its controls](#open-the-report-and-identify-its-controls) | | Choose the period, charts, lists, clients, or product types | [Set the reporting period and report options](#set-the-reporting-period-and-report-options) | | Generate and read the report sections | [Generate and read the report](#generate-and-read-the-report) | | Resolve a missing selection or invalid period | [When report generation fails](#when-report-generation-fails) | | Continue with reporting | [Reporting overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Use the general Reports area | [Reports hub](doc:reports-hub) | | Maintain report availability and sections | [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings) | The report supports the sales path from inquiry and pricing through offer, sales order, delivery, and the related principal-side financial flow. Use the report to review that activity rather than to change a sales job's stage. ## Before you start The Principals Report is ready to configure when the required account and report information is entered. **Prerequisites** | Before you begin | Why it matters | |---|---| | Choose at least one entry in **Accounts** | Report generation requires a selected principal or client entry. | | Have a report name ready for **Report** | **Report** has a required validation rule. | | Have the reporting period ready | **From** and **To** are required when you use a date range. | | Use a role and subscription that expose the report on the active Sales Report reporting tab | The report surface appears only when the subscription and active tab conditions are met. | **Steps** 1. Select an entry in **Accounts**. 2. Enter the report name in **Report**. **Result:** The required account and report name are entered, and the report is ready to open. ## Open the report and identify its controls The report screen brings together account selection, report naming, period selection, report settings, report introduction text, generation, and PDF download. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the reporting tab. **Steps** 1. Open the Principals Report screen. 2. Locate **Accounts**, **Report**, and **Time Frame** on the screen. 3. Locate **Settings** and **Introduction & Outline** for report configuration and explanatory text. 4. Locate **Generate Report** to create the report. 5. Locate **Download as PDF** to create a PDF download. 6. Read the current time-frame text shown beneath **Time Frame**. ![Identify Accounts, Report, Time Frame, and the report actions on arrival.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9e36b0a64aa0666d8feeaa7062ddcb65.png) The screen also displays **Tickets**. The visible time-frame text is `last 12 months`. **Result:** You can distinguish the account and report fields from the controls that configure, generate, and download the report, so you are ready to set the reporting period. ## Set the reporting period and report options The reporting period determines which activity the report evaluates. The report offers preset periods, a definite year, or a date range, and its settings determine which analyses and lists are included. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the Principals Report screen. - You know the period and the report areas you need to review. **Steps** 1. Select **Time Frame**. 2. Choose and complete one period according to the question you need to answer. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Review the current calendar year | **This Year** | | Review one named year | **Definite Year**, then enter a year from 1990 through the current year | | Review the most recent rolling period | **last 12 months** | | Set your own start and end dates | **From / To**, then enter both required dates and keep **From** on or before **To** | 3. Select **Settings**. 4. Choose **All** or select the report sections you want to include. 5. Set **Show Lists** according to whether the report must include its detail lists. 6. Select the clients in **Client** when the report must be limited to particular clients. 7. Select the product types in **Product Type** when the report must be limited to particular product types. 8. Choose the chart type and period options for the enabled report sections. **All** enables or disables the seven selectable chart settings: **Status of running firm offers**, **Status of running orders**, **Reasons for lost jobs**, **Bookings over time**, **Deliveries over time**, **Status of submitted offers**, and **Sales Overview + Overall Analysis**. **Running jobs** is displayed in the settings but its checkbox cannot be changed. When you select **Show Lists**, the settings expose the multi-choice selectors **Inquiries list columns**, **Offers list columns**, **Orders list columns**, the delivery list columns, **Lost offers list columns**, and **Cancelled jobs list columns**. **Client** and **Product Type** are searchable multi-select filters. The **Status** filter is not available. ![Set the reporting period from the Time Frame choices.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9e36b0a64aa0666d8feeaa7062ddcb65.png) Changing valid values in **Time Frame** or **Settings** can require you to generate the report again before the displayed analysis reflects the changes. **Result:** The report has a selected period and the chart, section, list, client, and product options needed for the analysis, so you are ready to generate it. ### Add introduction and outline content Use this optional procedure when the report needs explanatory text. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the Principals Report screen. **Steps** 1. Select **Introduction & Outline**. 2. Edit the available temporary report content. 3. Select **OK**. Saving copies the temporary introduction, sales analysis, lost opportunities, client complaints, suggested requirements, booking forecast, and conclusion values to the report fields. **Result:** The available introduction and outline content is saved with the report. ## Generate and read the report The generated report presents principal sales activity as charts and conditional detail lists. Each section appears when its report setting is enabled and report data is available. **Prerequisites** - You have selected at least one principal or client entry. - You have entered the required report name and period values. - You have selected the report sections and options you need. **Steps** 1. Select **Generate Report**. 2. Select a report-section entry to move to the corresponding analysis. | If you need to review… | Go to | |---|---| | Jobs currently in progress | **Running Jobs** | | Running firm offers | **Status of running firm offers** | | Running orders | **Status of running orders** | | The sales overview | **Sales Overview** | | Lost-job reasons | **Reasons for lost jobs** | | Submitted-offer performance | **Status of submitted offers** | | Bookings over time | **Bookings over time** | | Deliveries over time | **Deliveries over time** | | The combined analysis | **Overall Analysis** | 3. Review the generated content according to the analysis you need. | If you need to… | Review or choose | |---|---| | Compare chart presentations | **Bar** or **Pie** | | Compare booking or delivery periods | **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, or **Yearly** | | Compare job totals | **Jobs (Count)** and **Jobs (Value)** | | Review submitted-offer performance | **Hit Rate (count)** and **Hit Rate (value)** in **Status of submitted offers** | | Review submitted offers and received orders by perspective | The time and client views in **Overall Analysis** | | Review detail records | **Current inquiries**, **Current offers**, **Current orders**, **Delivered jobs**, **Lost jobs**, and **Cancelled jobs** | 4. Read the visible list headers, including **Job no.**, **Client**, and **Cancellation reason**. 5. Select **Download as PDF** when you need a PDF copy of the report. The report charts use **Jobs (Count)** and **Jobs (Value)**. Running Jobs, Status of running firm offers, Status of running orders, Sales Overview, and Reasons for lost jobs offer Bar and Pie views. Status of submitted offers also shows Hit Rate (count) and Hit Rate (value) when submitted-offer data exists. Bookings over time and Deliveries over time offer Monthly, Quarterly, and Yearly choices. Overall Analysis compares submitted offers with received orders in time and client views; its time view offers the same three period choices, while the client view has count and value displays. Each available detail list has a filter row and header filter. The lists use virtual scrolling, do not provide enabled paging in this report surface, and do not allow editing. Lists appear only when their data is available. The lists and columns shown depend on the report setup and the data available for the selected period. Work from the headers and sections that appear on your screen. **Result:** The report displays the enabled analyses and available detail lists, or a PDF download is requested from **Download as PDF**. If the request stops, use the troubleshooting table below. ## When report generation fails Report generation stops when a required selection or value is missing. Use the message on screen to correct the input before selecting **Generate Report** again. | What you see | Correct alternative | |---|---|---| | `Please choose one or more principals` | Select an entry in **Accounts**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the required report fields and selections. | | **From** or **To** requires a value | Enter both required dates. | | The **From** date is later than the **To** date | Change the dates so **From** is on or before **To**. | **Steps** 1. Select an entry in **Accounts** when the message requires a principal selection. 2. Apply the correction in the table to **Accounts**, **From**, **To**, or **Report**, according to the message. | If you see… | Take this action | |---|---| | **From** or **To** requires a value | Enter both required dates in **From** and **To**. | | The required report field is empty | Enter the report name in **Report**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` remains after checking the required fields | Review **Accounts**, **Report**, **From**, and **To**. | 3. Select **Generate Report** to retry the report request. **Result:** The required selection or value is corrected and the report request is submitted again; return to [Generate and read the report](#generate-and-read-the-report) when it opens. ## Continue from the report The Principals Report is one of the reporting destinations in the reporting area. After reviewing the analysis, continue with the area that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Return to the reporting view | [Reporting overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Work with the general reporting area | [Reports hub](doc:reports-hub) | | Change which report sections are available | [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings) | | Continue the sales process behind the analysis | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | **Result:** You have a route from the Principals Report to the reporting view, the general Reports area, report configuration, or the sales process documentation. # Products ## Products at a glance A product record describes an item that your organisation sells, purchases, stores, or uses as a component. Use the Products list when you need to find an existing product or start a new product record. An assembled product is a product record that includes component products. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find an existing product or start a product record | [Find a product](#find-a-product) | | Read the columns and list controls | [Read the Products list](#read-the-products-list) | | Enter or change the main product information | [Create or update a product](#create-or-update-a-product) | | Work with variants, stock details, or sub-suppliers | [Manage product details](#manage-product-details) | | Add a component to an assembled product | [Add components to an assembled product](#add-components-to-an-assembled-product) | | Resolve a validation or action message | [When a product action fails](#when-a-product-action-fails) | | Continue product-related work | [What to do next](#what-to-do-next) | | Add a product to a sales-job item | [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items) | | Use a product in procurement | [Purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | Continue into fulfilment | [Warehouse fulfilment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | ## Before you start Before you work with a product, have access to the Products area and know whether you are opening an existing record or starting a new one. The available actions depend on your access, the record state, the current branch, and whether the relevant feature is included in your subscription. A configuration-dependent field is required only where your company configures it. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are maintaining an existing product or creating a new one. - Have the product name, description, group, sales unit, and purchase unit ready. - Check the required-field setting for each configuration-dependent field in the live product or sub-supplier form. - Use a saved product record before opening its detail tabs. ## Find a product The Products list is the starting point for opening a saved product or beginning a new product record. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Products area. **Steps** 1. In the product area, select **Products**. 2. Choose the route that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select or open | |---|---| | Start a record | **New product** | | Maintain a saved record | A product row in the list | **Result:** The Products list opens, and the selected new or existing product record opens when you choose it. ![Identify the Products list by its seven column headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/347852090760f9bd4944536055de3ff2.png) ## Read the Products list The Products list is the table you use to find a product and compare its identifying and classification details. Its headers show the product name, description, category, group, withdrawal method, valuation method, and internal product number. The selected list displays these columns: | Column | What to use it for | |---|---| | **Product** | Identify the product. | | **Description** | Read the product description. | | **Category** | Read the product category. | | **Group** | Read the product group. | | **Withdrawal** | Read the withdrawal method. | | **Valuation** | Read the valuation method. | | **Internal product no.** | Read the internal product number. | The list also exposes three titled controls: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Refresh the list | **Refresh** | | Change the visible table layout | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | Select **New product** or a product row when you are ready to enter or change product information. ![Read the seven Products list columns and the three titled list controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/76491e6be70399489d7d1916f84e12f3.png) ## Create or update a product Use the product form to identify a product, assign its group and units, record its description and physical details, and save the record. **Prerequisites** - You are on a new product form or an existing product record. - Check which configuration-dependent fields are required in your form before saving. **Steps** 1. In the product form, enter the product name in **Name**. 2. Enter the internal identifier in **Internal Product No.** when your company requires that field. 3. Select the product group in **Group**. 4. Select the selling unit in **Sales Unit**. 5. Select the purchasing unit in **Purchase Unit Of Measure**. 6. Enter the product's physical, identification, and descriptive information in the fields below. | Field | Type | Requirement | |---|---|---| | **Weight (kg)** | Number | Required only where your company configures it; minimum `0`. | | **Volume (m3)** | Number | Required only where your company configures it; minimum `0`. | | **Barecode** | Text | Required only where your company configures it. | | **External product id** | Text | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Description** | Text | Required. | | **Product Withdrawal** | Select | Required. | | **Product Valuation** | Select | Required. | 7. Save the record using the action that matches your next move. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep working on the product record | **Save** | | Save the product and leave the form | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The product form remains open after **Save**, or the form closes after **Save and Close**. ![Identify the record entry controls before editing a product.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/17a8df5ba6a105e7094e346e4404d2d9.png) ## Manage product details Saved product records provide detail surfaces for product variants, stock information, sub-suppliers, comments, and modification history. **Prerequisites** - You have opened a saved product record. **Steps** 1. Select the detail surface that matches the information you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Read or add comments | **Comments** | | Review or maintain sub-supplier information | **Sub-suppliers** | | Review stock information | **Stock Details** | | Review changes to the record | **Last Modifications** | 2. Complete the fields for the selected detail surface. | Detail surface | Fields | |---|---| | Product variant | **Name**, **Description**; both are required. | | Stock details | **Inventory**, **Branch**, **Min. Stock Qty.**, and **Min. Requisition Qty.**; all are required, and the two quantity fields have a minimum of `0`. | | Sub-supplier | **Sub-supplier** and **Identification No.** are required. **Country**, **Weight (kg)**, **Short Description**, **Material Description**, and **Description** are required only where your company configures them. | 3. Select **Save** in the detail form. **Result:** The selected detail surface remains available with the information you entered. The saved product record is ready for the assembled-product component task when its group is assembled. The sub-supplier form does not offer a Variant field. The main product form also does not offer a Product Type field; use **Group** for the product grouping shown on the form. ## Add components to an assembled product The component action is available when the open product is an assembled product. **Prerequisites** - Open the product record whose group is assembled. - The product record is saved. **Steps** 1. In the assembled product record, select **Product**. 2. Select one component product. 3. Enter a BOM Qty of at least `1`. **Result:** The component entry is shown with its product and quantity in the assembled product area. ## When a product action fails Use the message text on screen to choose the corrective action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the characters that the field rejects, then select **Save** again. | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Select a product that is not already included in the assembled product. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the values on the current form, then select **Save** again. | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Keep the first variant and select a different variant for deletion. | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Check the CRM connection before repeating the CRM action. | | `Please select one product` | Select one product before continuing. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Treat the request as completed and continue with the next product task. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Use only the characters named in the message. | The list and record actions also depend on your access, current branch, saved-record state, and the conditions described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). If an action is not available, use those conditions to choose the appropriate starting surface. After resolving the message, continue with [What to do next](#what-to-do-next). ## What to do next After you maintain a product record, use it in the work area that needs the product. | Continue with… | Go to | |---|---| | Sales-job line items | [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items) | | Procurement product information | [Purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | Warehouse fulfilment | [Warehouse fulfilment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Stock by shipment | [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment) | | Product groups and units | [Reference list data](doc:reference-list-data) | | Shared files and comments | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Product categories | [Company product categories](doc:configuration-company-product-categories) | # Product serial combinations ## Product serial combinations A product serial combination is the ordered set of components used to form a product serial. Use this configuration when you need to review or adjust the component order, digit count, or default value used for new products. The change applies only to new products; existing products are not affected. The page displays: `Note : Serial combination changes will be applied only on new product, Old products will not be effected.` | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the fields and column headings | [Understand the screen](#understand-the-screen) | | Add or adjust a serial component | [Add and adjust serial components](#add-and-adjust-serial-components) | | Save the combination or leave the page | [Save or leave changes](#save-or-leave-changes) | | Find a related serial-combination list | [Serial combinations](doc:configuration-serial-combinations-view) | | Review serial-status reference data | [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) | | Work with products affected by this setting | Products | ## Before you start The screen shows the main configuration surface when your subscription includes the feature. Editing controls are available when you have edit access, and the subscription-upgrade surface appears when the feature is not included. **Prerequisites** - Your subscription includes the feature, so the main configuration surface is available. - You have edit access when you need to add, change, or save a combination. - The page is not currently saving when you select **Save**. - The serial-component list is available when you select **Component**. - If the subscription-upgrade surface is shown outside a popup, **Back** is available. The normal **Save** action requires the feature, edit access, and a page that is not saving. The **Component** action also requires the serial-component list. The subscription-upgrade surface uses **Back** when it is not inside a popup. ## Find the configuration screen Open the configuration screen to review or change the combination. **Prerequisites** - You know that you need the product serial combination configuration. **Steps** 1. Open **Product serial combination** from the configuration menu. ![The Product serial combination screen with its grid headers and action buttons.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0c81ac29dec1c2c2a0dc6b3970ba0ae1.png) **Result:** The Product serial combination screen opens. ## Understand the screen The screen uses a grid to show the ordered parts of a product serial combination. The visible headers are **Serial Component**, **Digits**, and **Default Value**. A narrow position marker shows each row's place, and a row-action area has no visible delete control. | Area | What you use it for | When it appears | |---|---|---| | **Serial Component** | Choose an entry from the available serial-component list for a row. | When the serial-component list is available. | | **Digits** | Choose the number of digits for the row. | After you select a component that supports a digit count. | | **Default Value** | Enter a text value. | After you select a component that uses a text value. | | **Default Value** | Choose a separator value. | After you select a component that uses a separator. | | Row position | See where the row appears in the combination. | In the first narrow column. | After you select a component, the row shows the editors that apply to it. **Digits** is required when the row has no existing digit count; otherwise it is optional. **Default Value** is required when it appears as a separator selector and optional when it appears as a text editor. The grid supports single-row selection, row editing, and no sorting. The visible screen has the three headers above, and the action buttons **Save** and **Component**. ![The Serial Component column and its row editor.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ![The Digits column and its row editor.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/55cdb0c22bd90f748615f622c8d13ca8.png) ![The Default Value column and its value editor.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Add and adjust serial components Use the component rows to build the ordered serial combination. Changing a row updates the serial preview represented by the grid, while row order determines the order of the combination. **Prerequisites** - The main configuration surface is available. - You have edit access and the serial-component list is available. **Steps** 1. Select **Component** to append a blank combination row. 2. In **Serial Component**, choose an entry from the available serial-component list. After you select an entry, the row can show a **Digits** editor, a text **Default Value** editor, or a **Default Value** separator selector. **Digits** is required when the row has no existing digit count; otherwise it is optional. The separator selector is required; the text editor is optional. 3. In **Digits**, choose the number of digits when that editor appears. 4. Use the alternatives in the table below to complete **Digits** or **Default Value**. 5. Drag a row to a new position when the component order needs to change. The editors change with the selected component: | If the selected component shows… | Complete **Digits** | Complete **Default Value** | |---|---|---| | A digit-count editor | Choose the available digit count. | — | | A text editor | — | Enter the text value. | | A separator selector | — | Choose the separator value. | **Result:** The grid contains the component rows in the order you set, with each row showing its component, digit setting, and default value. ## Save or leave changes Save commits the configured combination through the screen's save action. Closing the page uses a different close path depending on whether the page is in edit mode. **Prerequisites** - You have completed the row changes you want to keep. - The feature is included and you have edit access to use **Save**. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches your goal. | If you want to… | Select or do | |---|---| | Save the current combination and remain on the page | **Save** | | Leave while you are editing | The close control in the top action bar | | Leave when you are not editing | The close control in the top action bar | 2. If you selected the close control in the top action bar while editing, choose one exit-confirmation option. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the changes before leaving | **Save** | | Leave without keeping the changes | **Don't Save** | ![The Save action on the configuration screen.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4976afdebcc183a42f61947fa2e9e5c8.png) **Result:** The combination is saved, and a successful save displays `Your combination number saved successfully`. A failed save displays `Saving Failed In product serial`. ## Handle unavailable and conditional surfaces The page changes between the main configuration surface and the subscription-upgrade surface according to feature availability. The audit-log area is not part of the page's available path. | If you see… | Use or expect… | |---|---| | The feature is not included | The subscription-upgrade surface and **Back** when it is outside a popup. | | The feature is included but you do not have edit access | The page uses the non-edit close path instead of the edit close action. | | The audit-log area is absent | Continue with the product serial combination grid. | | You look for a column chooser | Work with the visible grid headers; the column chooser is disabled. | | You look for row deletion | Use row changes and ordering instead; no delete control is available on this screen. | The page does not show **Last Modifications**. Continue with the product serial combination grid. ## When validation or saving goes wrong Use the exact message text to identify the correction. The page validates the selected component, digit count, and separator value before saving. | Message | What to correct | |---|---| | `Component is required.` | Choose a component in **Serial Component**. | | `Invalid component.` | Choose a valid component in **Serial Component**. | | `Quantity is required.` | Choose a digit count in **Digits**. | | `Invalid quantity.` | Choose a valid digit count in **Digits**. | | `this is required.` | Choose the required separator value in **Default Value**. | | `Auto Serial must be the last item In product serial` | Move the Auto Serial row to the end of the combination. | | `Please add serial components In product serial` | Add a row with **Component**. | | `Serial type is required In product serial` | Select the required serial type. | | `Please Note that you can't add serial combination larger than 12 characters In product serial` | Reduce the combination to 12 characters or fewer. | | `Please select a serial type In product serial` | Select a serial type. | | `Cannot have multiple Auto Serials In product serial` | Keep one Auto Serial in the combination. | | `Must have one Auto Serial In product serial` | Add one Auto Serial to the combination. | | `Cannot have Multiple AutoSerials` | Remove the additional Auto Serial. | | `Please Note that you can't add serial combination larger than 12 characters` | Reduce the combination to 12 characters or fewer. | | `Auto Serial Must Be a Number` | Enter a number for the Auto Serial value. | | `Saving Failed In product serial` | Review the combination and select **Save** again. | The successful save message is `Your combination number saved successfully`. ## What happens next After you review or change the combination, the setting remains a configuration for new products. Use the related serial-combination and serial-status pages when your next task concerns those lists rather than this product-combination screen. # Product stages ## Product stages Product stages is the reference list for the stage names used by purchasing and procurement records. Maintain the names here so the purchasing workflow can use the same stage vocabulary. | If you need | Go to | |---|---| | Review the fields and list layout | [Understand the Product stages screen](#understand-the-product-stages-screen) | | Open the list | [Find the Product stages list](#find-the-product-stages-list) | | Add or change a stage | [Maintain Product stages](#maintain-product-stages) | | Choose a path when an action is unavailable | [Choose the available maintenance path](#choose-the-available-maintenance-path) | | Continue with purchasing workflow records | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Continue with Warehouse configuration | [Warehouses](doc:configuration-warehouse-view) | Start with [Before you start](#before-you-start). ## Before you start Product stages maintenance is available only when the page's access and subscription conditions allow the list or its maintenance actions to appear. Prerequisites - Know the stage name you want to maintain. - Have access to the Warehouse configuration area. - If the subscription does not include this feature, the page shows a subscription option instead of the list. - Edit and delete actions depend on their access conditions. - Import and export actions depend on their separate access checks. The list contents, initial rows, and applicable access permissions are specific to the account using the application. Work from the headers and controls that appear after the page opens. When these conditions are in place, find the Product stages list. ## Find the Product stages list Open the Product stages page to review its list and maintenance actions. Prerequisites - Have access to the Warehouse configuration area. Steps 1. Open the Product stages page. 2. Check where you landed and follow the matching instruction. | If you see | Then | |---|---| | The Product stages list | Continue to the next section. | | A different page | Open the Product stages page again. | | A page without controls | Open the Product stages page again. | ![Check that the Product stages list and its controls are visible.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) **Result:** The Product stages page is open. Continue with [Understand the Product stages screen](#understand-the-product-stages-screen). ## Understand the Product stages screen The Product stages screen is a list with one configured reader-facing field, **Stage**, and a popup form for maintaining that field. ### Fields | Field | List | Form | Required | Type | |---|---|---|---|---| | **Stage** | Shown | Editable in popup | Yes | Text | | DisplayOrder | Hidden | Not shown | No | Not specified | | Id | Hidden | Not shown | No | Not specified | | CompanyId | Hidden | Not shown | No | Not specified | The list is configured with one visible column, **Stage**. The other three fields support the record but do not belong in the reader-facing form. The list configuration does not declare row filtering, header filtering, or paging. The grid does not provide inline add, edit, or delete operations; use the popup actions described in [Maintain Product stages](#maintain-product-stages). The columns used by the shared list come from the page's saved configuration. Work from the headers visible on your list rather than expecting hidden system fields to appear as editable columns. The list appears only when the subscription includes the feature. The **New** action also depends on the page's new-entry setting. The edit icon appears only with edit access, and the delete menu appears only with delete access. ## Maintain Product stages ### Add or edit a stage Create a new stage or change an existing stage name from the Product stages list. Prerequisites - The Product stages list is open. - The list shows **New**, or an edit or delete icon beside the relevant row. - For a new entry, have the stage name ready. Steps 1. Choose the entry you want to maintain. | Entry | Action | |---|---| | New entry | Select **New** to open the new-item popup. | | Existing entry | Select the control beside the relevant row that opens the edit popup. | 2. In the popup, enter the stage name in **Stage**. 3. Select **OK** to submit the popup. 4. Check the entry type and follow the matching outcome. | Entry type | Look for | |---|---| | New | `Data saved Successfully` | | Edited | `Data updated Successfully` | ![Identify the Product stages list before opening a maintenance action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) To close the new-item or edit popup without submitting it, use its close icon. **Result:** The application saves the new or edited stage and displays the corresponding success message. ### Remove a stage Remove a stage when it is no longer needed and the list contains more than one item. Prerequisites - The Product stages list is open. - The delete action is available. - The list contains more than one item. Steps 1. Open the row's delete menu from the delete icon. 2. Select **Delete** in the confirmation menu. 3. Confirm that the item is removed and look for `Data Deleted Successfully`. The delete menu also provides **Cancel**. Select **Cancel** to close the menu without deleting the item. **Result:** The list no longer shows the selected stage and displays the remaining entries. ### Import or export list data Import or export list data from the toolbar above the list when the corresponding access-controlled control is available. Prerequisites - The Product stages list is open. - Import or export access is available for your account. Steps 1. Choose the action you need. | If you need | Then | |---|---| | Import list data | In the toolbar above the list, select the import control, complete the displayed import options, and look for `Data Importing completed`. | | Export list data | Select **Export**. | **Result:** The selected import or export flow is open, and a completed import displays `Data Importing completed`. If you need another maintenance action, continue with [Choose the available maintenance path](#choose-the-available-maintenance-path). ## Choose the available maintenance path The available path depends on whether the list is included, which access checks succeed, and how many entries it contains. | If you need | Use this path | |---|---| | View the list | Continue when the subscription includes the feature. | | Add an entry | Select **New** when it is shown. | | Change an entry | Select the control beside the relevant row that opens the edit popup when edit access is available. | | Remove an entry | Select the delete icon beside the relevant row when delete access is available and more than one item exists. | | Import data | Use the import control when it is visible in the toolbar. | | Export data | Select **Export** when it is visible in the toolbar. | Prerequisites - The Product stages page is open. Steps 1. Select the control named in the row for the action you need. 2. Follow the result shown in that row. **Result:** You are on the maintenance path supported by the surface and list conditions shown on screen. If a message stops the action, continue with [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong). ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text below to choose the next action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty. | Enter a value in **Stage** and submit the popup again. | | `Stage is required` | **Stage** is empty when validation runs. | Enter a value in **Stage** and submit the popup again. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | The stage name contains a character rejected by the field rule. | Edit **Stage** and use only the accepted characters. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The item cannot be deleted because saved data is related to it. | Keep the item and use the related saved data path instead. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete request failed. | Leave the item in place and retry the delete action after checking access. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains only one item. | Keep the remaining item; deletion requires more than one item. | | Product stages list not visible | The list did not open. | Open the Product stages page again. | | Page without controls | The list controls did not open. | Open the Product stages page again. | When you see `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`: The delete confirmation menu is open. Select **Delete** to remove the item. Select **Cancel** to close the menu. After resolving a message, continue with [Know what is next](#know-whats-next). ## Out of scope The following message and flows belong to shared configuration components rather than to the Product stages entity itself. | Message or flow | What it belongs to | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Shared input handling. | | `Export to Excel` | Shared generic export flow. | | Importing options | Shared import flow for configuration pages. | ## Know what is next After maintaining the list, continue with the [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) to work with those records. For related Warehouse configuration, open [Warehouses](doc:configuration-warehouse-view). The list values and downstream use depend on the configuration available to your account. # Product types Use this page to find, review, and maintain the product-type reference entries in company configuration. A product type is a reference entry maintained for the company. ## Product types Open the **Product types** list from the company configuration menu. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the reference list | [Find a product type](#find-a-product-type) | | Read the list and its available data | [Understand the product-type list](#understand-the-product-type-list) | | Add, change, delete, or export entries | [Add, change, delete, and export product types](#add-change-delete-and-export-product-types) | | Respond to an unavailable action or empty save | [When an action is unavailable](#when-an-action-is-unavailable) | | Match a message to the action that produced it | [When something goes wrong](#when-something-goes-wrong) | | Continue with product records | [Products](products.md) | The list opens in the company configuration view and loads its entries when the page initializes. ## Before you start Sign in to PAMS before opening the configuration route. The actions available on the list depend on your permissions. ![The sign-in form to complete before opening configuration](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) | Permission or condition | Action it controls | |---|---| | New permission | **New** is available. | | Edit permission | The row edit action and value-click editing are available. | | Delete permission | The row delete action is available. | | Editable product-type column | Clicking a value opens the edit popup; the identifier column does not. | With access in place, find the list and search for an entry. ## Find a product type Use the product-type list to locate an existing entry by its name. Prerequisites - You are signed in to PAMS. - You have opened the Product types list. Steps 1. In the list toolbar, enter a search term in **Keyword to Search...**. 2. Review the filtered product-type rows. 3. Clear **Keyword to Search...** when you want to return to the main list. **Result:** The list shows the rows matching the search term, or the main list after the search is cleared. After you locate an entry, read the list layout before maintaining it. ## Understand the product-type list The list lets you identify product types by name and select an entry for editing or deletion. It does not display column headings. | Area | What it contains | |---|---| | Name column | The visible product-type name. | | Identifier column | A hidden product-type identifier used by the list. | | Row controls | Select a product-type name to edit it, or use the available delete option. | | Search area | **Keyword to Search...** in the list toolbar. | | Headings | None are displayed above the list columns. | | Import | No import action is available on this product-type list. | The popup contains **Type** and a hidden, disabled identifier. The active form does not show a required marker. Saving still requires a non-empty name. When you know which entry to maintain, use the maintenance procedures. ## Add, change, delete, and export product types Use these procedures when you need to maintain the reference entries or prepare a list export. ### Add a product type Add a new named reference entry when the product type does not already appear in the list. Prerequisites - You have permission to use **New**. - You have the product-type name ready. Steps 1. Select **New**. 2. In the popup, enter the product-type name in **Type**. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** The new entry is saved, the list refreshes, and the message `Data saved Successfully` appears. ### Change a product type Change the name of an existing entry from its editable product-type value or row edit action. Prerequisites - You have edit permission. - The product-type row is present in the list. Steps 1. Select the product-type name in the row to open the edit popup. 2. Replace the value in **Type**. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** The edited name is saved and the list refreshes with the changed value. ### Delete a product type Delete an entry when it is no longer needed in the reference list. Prerequisites - You have delete permission. - The product-type row is present in the list. Steps 1. Open the row delete menu. 2. Read the confirmation message `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Select **Delete** to confirm the removal. **Result:** The row is removed, the list refreshes, and the message `Data Deleted Successfully` appears. ### Export the product-type list Open the export choices when you need a file representation of the list. Steps 1. Select **Export**. **Result:** The available export options are displayed; if an action is unavailable, use the permission and input guidance in the next section. ## When an action is unavailable The list shows maintenance actions according to the permissions returned for your account. | Situation | What to do | |---|---| | **New** is unavailable | Ask an administrator for permission to create product types. | | The edit action is unavailable | Ask an administrator for edit permission. | | The delete action is unavailable | Ask an administrator for delete permission. | | **Save** is selected with an empty **Type** | Enter a product-type name, then select **Save**. The message `Can't save empty items` appears. | | A save or delete request returns an error | Follow the displayed message. The page can display the request's returned error text. | If an action produces a message, use the matching guidance in the next section. ## When something goes wrong Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | Message | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The delete menu is asking you to confirm the row removal. | Select **Delete** to remove the row, or **Cancel** to close the menu. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The save request completed. | Review the refreshed list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The delete request completed. | Review the refreshed list. | | `Can't save empty items` | **Save** was selected without a product-type name. | Enter a value in **Type**, then select **Save**. | | `Error: Please Refresh the Page and Try Again.` | The page returned its request-error fallback. | Refresh the page and try the action again. | After correcting the issue, return to the relevant maintenance procedure. ## After managing product types After a successful save or delete, the list refreshes. Continue to [Products](products.md) when you need to use product-type reference data in product records. # Project management statuses ## Project management statuses Project management statuses are the named values used to identify the current position of project-management work. Maintain them from the **PM statuses** list in the Project management configuration area. The **PM statuses** page contains nine rows. Use the status list when you need to review the available names or maintain a status value. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach the list | [Find the status list](#find-the-status-list) | | Understand the visible field and form | [Understand the status screen](#understand-the-status-screen) | | Add, edit, or remove a status | [Maintain statuses](#maintain-statuses) | | Handle access or sibling-list choices | [Handle access and navigation branches](#handle-access-and-navigation-branches) | | Correct a blocked operation | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue with related configuration | [Confirm the result and continue](#confirm-the-result-and-continue) | When you know which status-list task you need, check the access conditions before opening the list. ## Before you start The **PM statuses** page is available through a shared configuration surface. The list and its actions depend on the configuration feature and the access available to your account. Prerequisites | Check | What to have ready | | --- | --- | | Page | Access to the **PM statuses** page | | Feature | The project-management configuration feature included in your subscription | | Create access | Permission to create a status before using **New** | | Edit access | Permission to edit a status before using the row edit action | | Delete access | Permission to delete a status before using the row delete action | When the configuration feature is included, the list and configuration controls are available. When it is not included, the subscription-upgrade surface replaces the list. Subscription access and permissions depend on the current account configuration. With the feature and access conditions checked, find the **PM statuses** list. ## Find the status list Use this procedure to reach the status list and identify the row or field you need. Prerequisites You have access to the configuration area and know whether you are reviewing an existing status or adding a new one. Steps 1. Open the **PM statuses** page. 2. Confirm that the page heading reads **PM statuses**. 3. Identify the visible **Type** column in the list. 4. Select the row whose status you need to review, or continue with **New** to add a status. ![Locate the PM statuses heading, toolbar, and sibling configuration entries.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2c11dcff7e65bd58ac5f52c034ad0bac.png) The list also exposes **Refresh** and **Settings**. Paging and header filtering are disabled for this list, so work from the rows and the visible **Type** header. **Result:** The **PM statuses** list is open, with nine rows and the **Type** column visible. Use the field and form reference next, before choosing a maintenance action. ## Understand the status screen Each status row is identified by its **Type** value. The same value is the editable field in the new and edit form. | Area | What you see | Rule | | --- | --- | --- | | List | **Type** | The list shows one visible status column. | | New or edit form | **Type** | The field is required. | | List shape | Visible headers | The columns shown depend on the configured column set; use the headers displayed on your screen. | | List controls | Paging and header filtering | These list options are disabled. | The shared form opens as New PM statuses when you start a new entry. It shows the required **Type** field and an **OK** button. The dialog does not show **Save** or **Cancel**; use **OK** to submit the dialog's form action. ![Read the Type column and the nine visible status rows.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/375e7cdf1a67920ae024b32d08a75eca.png) ![Identify the required Type field and OK in the New PM statuses dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/66e58ffdf4e014ccb5a02cebb53dd06f.png) Choose a maintenance route after identifying the visible field and dialog control. ## Maintain statuses Use the list to add a status, open an existing status for editing, or remove a status when the applicable action is available. Prerequisites The list is open. For a new or edited value, you have the status name ready and can identify the **Type** field. Steps 1. Choose the applicable maintenance route: | If you need to… | Use | | --- | --- | | Add a status | Select **New**. | | Edit a status | Select the row edit action for the status. | | Remove a status | Open the row delete action for the status. | 2. Enter or change the value in **Type**. 3. Complete the applicable action: | If you are… | Complete the action | | --- | --- | | Adding a status | Select **OK** in the New PM statuses dialog. | | Editing a status | Follow the dialog control shown for the edit action. | | Removing a status | Open the row delete action for the status. | | Leaving without saving | Select **Don't Save** in the exit confirmation. | Select **Cancel** to close the delete menu without deleting the row. The dialog opens with the required **Type** field and **OK**. **Result:** The selected maintenance route is open, or the status list is visible again after the operation. Use the access and navigation branch that matches the controls on screen. ## Handle access and navigation branches The shared configuration surface changes what you can do according to feature and permission settings. Use the branch that matches what is on your screen. | What you see | What it means | Next action | | --- | --- | --- | | The status list and **New** | The feature and create action are available. | Use [Maintain statuses](#maintain-statuses). | | The list without the edit action | Editing is not available from the current access settings. | Review the list or ask an administrator about edit access. | | The list without the delete action | Deletion is not available from the current access settings. | Review the list or ask an administrator about delete access. | | The subscription-upgrade surface | The configuration feature is not included. | Use the subscription route shown on screen. | | **Product Categories** | A sibling reference list is available. | Open [Product categories](doc:configuration-company-product-categories). | | **Product Serial Combination** | A sibling reference list is available. | Open [Serial combinations](doc:configuration-serial-combinations-view). | After choosing a branch, use the message guidance if the operation stops; the shared list controls may also expose **Export**. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text to identify which part of the status operation needs attention. | Message | When it applies | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Type is required` | **Type** is empty when the form validates. | Enter a value in **Type**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | The value does not meet the field's character rule. | Correct the value in **Type**. | | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty. | Complete the required field and retry the form action. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A list filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters and apply the filter again. | | “Are you sure you want to delete this item?” | Removal-request message. | — | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The item is related to saved data. | Keep the item and review the related saved data. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete request fails for another reason. | Keep the item and retry after checking access. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains one item and deletion is attempted. | Keep the remaining item. | | `Data saved Successfully` | A new status is saved. | Return to the list and review the new row. | | `Data updated Successfully` | An existing status is updated. | Return to the list and review the changed row. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | A status is deleted. | Review the remaining rows. | After correcting the issue, confirm the list result and choose the next configuration task. ## Confirm the result and continue After reviewing or attempting a status operation, confirm the list that remains on screen before moving to related configuration. Prerequisites The **PM statuses** list or one of its sibling reference lists is open. Steps 1. Confirm that the current page is **PM statuses** when you are reviewing project-management statuses. 2. Confirm that the **Type** column identifies the status rows. 3. Select **Product Categories** to continue with product-category configuration. 4. Select **Product Serial Combination** to continue with serial-combination configuration. **Result:** You have either returned to the **PM statuses** list or selected a sibling reference list for the next configuration task. # Project management workspace ## Project management workspace Project management is the area where you follow a project's bill of materials, ordering, stock, and delivery work. A bill of materials (BOM) is the product structure checked before PAMS permits direct order delivery. An MRQ is a material requisition record for a request title, receiving date, requested products, and additional requirements. PAMS places this work in one connected project flow: BOMs and MRQs lead into purchasing and warehouse work, which continues through stock and delivery. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Choose the project-management work list | [Find project work](#find-project-work) | | Read the columns and toolbar on the list | [Read the project-management list](#read-the-project-management-list) | | Understand the fields on a project record | [Open and orient a project record](#open-and-orient-a-project-record) | | Create or locate a shipping order | [Shipping orders](doc:shipping-orders) | | Create or locate an assembly order | [Assembly orders](doc:assembly-orders) | | Follow purchasing, stock, or delivery work | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) or [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Follow the sales-job stages that feed project work | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - Know which project work you need to locate: BOM preparation, purchasing, stock, completed work, or running and completed jobs. - Have the project record's current stage in mind. The page changes its fields and actions by stage. - Have the information needed for the record in front of you. The record can require a salesperson, product type, job title, client, vendor, or inquiry deadline depending on its stage. - Expect the list columns and some record fields to follow your company's saved setup. The project record can include configurable fields. The list columns follow the selected list layout, so work from the headers visible on your screen. ## Find project work Project-management work is grouped into lists by where the work is in the project flow. Use the list that matches the work you need to inspect rather than opening a record from an unrelated stage. Steps 1. Open **Projects Management** from the application menu. 2. Select the tab that matches the work you need to inspect. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review all project-management work | **All** | | Prepare a bill of materials | **BOM Preparation** | | Review current material requisitions | **Current MRQs** | | Review purchasing work | **In Purchasing** | | Review stock work | **In Stock** | | Review completed work | **Delivered** | | Review running jobs | **Running Jobs** | | Review completed jobs | **Delivered Jobs** | 3. Select the project row to open its project-management record. 4. Select a linked number when you need the related record instead of the project record. When **In Purchasing** is selected, use the available purchasing-list filters. | Number on the list | Opens | |---|---| | Sales job number | The related sales job | | MRQ request number | The related material requisition | | MRQ job number | The related purchasing job | | Received shipment number | The related receipt | | Inspection number | The related inspection | **Result:** The selected project-management list or related record opens. Orders and completed orders open the project-management record with the Comments view selected. ![Project-management list with the work tabs and visible columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/084147fbaaead618acd8f0b5c347c8b0.png) ## Read the project-management list The project-management list is a work table: each row combines product and quantity information with the sales and project-management references needed to follow the work. Steps 1. Read **Product** to identify the product on the row. 2. Read **Description** to distinguish the row's product details. 3. Read the product amount shown on the row. 4. Read the sales reference column to identify the related sales item. 5. Read **PM responsible** to identify the project-management person responsible. 6. Read **Odoo order no.** to identify the connected Odoo order number when one is shown. 7. Select the toolbar command that matches what you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Work with the list layout | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | The list shown here includes product, description, sales-reference, responsibility, and order-number columns. The columns shown in your list follow the selected layout, so use the headers visible on your screen when reading a row. **Result:** The project-management rows and their visible references are on screen, with the list toolbar available above them. ![Project-management list rows and toolbar](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7375ee1fdbce215bda475ede2ef32462.png) ## Open and orient a project record A project record brings the project's stage, responsibility, product information, dates, and item details together so you can follow the work beyond the list. Steps 1. Select a project row from the project-management list. 2. Read **Status** to identify the record's current status. 3. Read **Branch** to identify the branch associated with the record. 4. Read **Salesperson Responsible** to identify the responsible salesperson. 5. Read **Product Type** to identify the product type. 6. Read **Job Title** to identify the job's title. 7. Read **End User** when the field is shown. 8. Read **Estimated Value** when the field is shown. 9. Read **File Number** when the field is shown. 10. Read **Expected Order Date** when the field is shown. 11. Read **Client** and **Vendor**, together with the inquiry due-date field, when the record is an inquiry. 12. Read the item grid's available description, unit, and quantity values. 13. In the stage controls row, select the control for the action you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open potential work | **Potentials** | | Open inquiry work | **Inquiry** | | Open offer work | **Offer** | | Convert to an order | **Convert To Order** | | Return to inquiry | **Back to Inquiry** | | Open order work | **Order** | | Return to offer | **Back to Offer** | | Open project-management work | **Project management** | | Open completed work | **Delivered** | When **Save** or **Delete** appears on the record, use the dedicated record pages for detailed saving, conversion, delivery, or deletion instructions. **Result:** The project record is open, its current stage is visible, and the fields and item columns available at that stage are on screen. ## Handle stage and setup differences The project record changes what you see as the work moves through its stages. **Status** has three stage-dependent placements: potential through cancelled potential, later offer stages, and later order stages. **Salesperson Responsible** is required for a new record or when no salesperson is assigned. **Estimated Value** appears while the job is at potential or earlier, and **Expected Order Date** appears before Order except for unknown and `-1` stages. Inquiry information such as **Client** and **Vendor**, together with the inquiry due-date field, appears for opened inquiries and the specified potential-to-cancelled-potential ranges. **End User**, **Estimated Value**, and **File Number** can be configurable fields, so their required behavior follows company configuration. Steps 1. Select **Status**. 2. Choose an option from the list beneath the field. 3. Select **Product Type**. 4. Choose an option from the list beneath the field. **Result:** The record displays the selected **Status** and **Product Type**. The project record validates before save. A field with a required marker must be completed before the relevant save action can continue. ## When the work does not proceed Use the exact message on screen to decide whether to correct a field, complete a required item, or move to the page that owns an embedded panel. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Check mandatory field(s)` | A required value is missing. | Return to the field carrying the required marker and complete it. | | `This field is required` | The selected field has no value. | Enter or select the required value. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | The number is outside the accepted range. | Enter a value greater than 0 and no greater than `999,999.00`. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | The number is negative. | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | An item row has zero quantity. | Correct the item quantity before saving. | | `One or more items has no unit` | An item row has no unit. | Select a unit before saving. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The requested save or update completed. | Continue with the next project-management action. | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Configured custom fields were saved. | Continue with the record. | | `Job updated successfully` | The job update completed. | Continue with the updated record. | | `Job deleted successfully` | The job deletion completed. | Return to the relevant list. | | `Job regretted successfully` | The job was regretted successfully. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `Job cancelled successfully` | The job cancellation completed. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `Job missed successfully` | The job was marked missed. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `Job reactivated successfully` | The job was reactivated. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | The job moved to offer. | Continue the offer work. | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | The job moved to inquiry. | Continue the inquiry work. | | `Converted To Regretted` | The job moved to regretted. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `Converted to cancelled` | The job moved to cancelled. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `Converted to lost` | The job moved to lost. | Continue from the resulting job status. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The requested operation did not complete. | Review the fields and conditions for the action, then try again. | | `Error saving custom fields` | Configured custom fields were not saved. | Review the custom fields and try again. | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | An existing due invoice prevents undoing delivery. | Continue from the invoice and delivery work. | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | At least one offer is not in draft status. | Return the offers to draft before reverting to inquiry. | | `An account with this name already exists` | The account name is already in use. | Use the existing account or choose another name. | | `A project with this name already exists` | The project name is already in use. | Use the existing project or choose another name. | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | An opened inquiry has unsaved work. | Save the opened inquiry before continuing. | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | An inquiry is not in draft stage. | Return all relevant inquiries to draft before reverting to potential. | The following messages belong to embedded pages rather than this workspace: `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.`, `Error loading accounts`, `Error {{errorMsg}}`, `Please enter action for each milstone`, `Please save opened cost sheet first`, `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.`, `Error: Vendor not saved yet`, `Error: Client not saved yet`, `This Field Is Required`, `You already have a contact with this name`, `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`, `Sales order is archived`, `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity`, `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created`, `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing`, `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created`, `This product is already included in BOM`, `The first variant cannot be deleted`, `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.`, `Please select one product`, `Package must have at least one item`, `You cannot save without adding at least one product`, `One of products has no quantity`, `Action not allowed`, `Check validation`, `No remaining items. All items have been selected`, `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch`, `Please enter at least one email`, `Inquiry must have at least one item`, `Offer must have at least one item`, `Order must have at least one item`, `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.`, `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer`, `There is error in serial you have entered`, `Minimum: At least one serial`, `You don’t have permission`, `LG still needs confirmation`, `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage`, `Please choose a date after the current expiry date`, ` There is a pending increase you can edit`, `Required Receiving Date`, `Required Receiving After`, `Required Offer Type`, `Required Bid Due Date`, `One topic and at least one note is required`, and `There is no topic to print`. | Class | Message | Owning page | Source | |---|---|---|---| | Error | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Project list | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:124` | | Error | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Project record | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:167` | | Error | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contacts | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:135` | | Error | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Bill of materials | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1616` | | Error | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Bill of materials | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1620` | | Error | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Bill of materials | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1619` | | Error | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Products | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:259` | | Error | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Material requisition | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:2251` | | Error | `Check validation` | Principal invoice | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:147` | | Error | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Purchasing details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:205` | | Error | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Purchasing details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:178` | | Error | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Purchasing details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:184` | | Error | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchasing details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:2143` | | Error | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Reference list | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:265` | | Error | `LG still needs confirmation` | Letters of guarantees | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:199` | | Error | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Letters of guarantees | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:198` | | Error | ` There is a pending increase you can edit` | Letters of guarantees | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:926` | | Validation | `Required Offer Type` | Purchasing details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1130` | | Error | `There is no topic to print` | Activities | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:208` | ## Out of scope on this workspace The following message belongs to the purchasing details page rather than this workspace: | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Purchasing details | ## Create a shipping order Use this procedure when you need to record selected items for shipment. Prerequisites - Have a sales job number and at least one item to ship. Steps 1. Open **Shipping Order** from the Projects Management new-record menu. 2. Enter or select **Sales Job Number**. 3. Select the items in the item-selection dialog. 4. Select **OK**. 5. Select **Save and Close**. **Result:** The shipping order is saved in **Requested shipments**, and PAMS displays `Your request was completed successfully`. ![Shipping order with the item-selection dialog and save action](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Create an assembly order Use this procedure when you need to record an assembly order and its products. Prerequisites - Have a warehouse, sales order, sales item, and at least one product. Steps 1. Open **Assembly Order** from the Projects Management new-record menu. 2. Select the required warehouse, sales order, and sales item values. 3. Select **Product** on the unsaved order. 4. Select products in the **Products** popup. 5. Select **OK**. 6. Select **Save and Close**. **Result:** The assembly order is saved. If no product is selected, PAMS displays `You cannot save without adding at least one product`. ## Continue the project flow Project-management work continues through dedicated pages according to the work you need to do. | After you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Follow the sales-job stage flow | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Locate sales-job work | [Find sales-job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | | Work with purchasing lists | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Create or locate a shipping order | [Shipping orders](doc:shipping-orders) | | Create or locate an assembly order | [Assembly orders](doc:assembly-orders) | | Follow stock and delivery fulfillment | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | The project-management list links sales jobs, material requisitions, purchasing jobs, receipts, and inspections to their related records. Use those links when the next activity belongs to one of those records rather than the project-management record. # Purchase job workflow ## Understand the purchase job workflow A purchase job tracks procurement work from a material requisition (MRQ) through an RFQ, quotation, and purchase order. An MRQ records the material request, an RFQ asks a supplier for an offer, a quotation records the supplier's response, and a purchase order commits the purchase. The purchase-work lists are the starting point; detailed work on each record continues on the focused MRQ, RFQ, quotation, or purchase-order page. The route continues into receiving and warehouse fulfilment. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find an MRQ or open the purchase-work entry list | [Find the MRQ and purchase work](#find-the-mrq-and-purchase-work) | | Move an MRQ into RFQ and quotation work | [Move an MRQ through RFQ and quotation](#move-an-mrq-through-rfq-and-quotation) | | Continue from a quotation to approval and activation | [Hand the quotation to purchase-order approval and activation](#hand-the-quotation-to-purchase-order-approval-and-activation) | | Find active RFQ, quotation, or PO work | [Find active purchase job work](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Find archived or exception work | [Find archived and exception purchase job work](doc:purchase-job-exception-lists) | | Complete the detailed record task | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs), [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations), or [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | After purchase-order approval and activation, continue with receiving and warehouse fulfilment. Before you follow the hand-offs, prepare your session, list access, and starting record. ## Before you start An authenticated session lets you open the MRQ and Purchase Jobs routes. The list content is available when the purchasing feature is included, and the purchase-work list appears after a list layout is available. Your access also controls whether the new-entry links appear. Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | An authenticated PAMS session | You are signed in and can open the purchase-work list. | | The MRQ or package you need to continue | The list row identifies the package, supplier, offer, and order information used to choose the next stage. | | The relevant work stage | Choose the list that matches the stage you need to continue. | | The access needed for new work | The RFQ and **Direct P.O.** links appear only when new-entry access allows them. | | A saved list layout | The purchase-work list appears when a selected layout is available. | Do not treat the list as the record editor. Record fields, approval panels, activation panels, quotation details, purchase-order details, and direct-order fields belong to their focused pages. ## Find the MRQ and purchase work Use the MRQ entry when you are starting the procurement route. Purchase Jobs lists the RFQ, quotation, purchase-order, and archived work that follows it. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - You know whether you are starting from the MRQ list or continuing an existing purchase job. Steps 1. Open the MRQ list when you are starting from the purchase-work entry. 2. Select the work list that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every purchase job | **All** | | Work on RFQs | **RFQs** | | Work on supplier quotations | **Quotations** | | Work on purchase orders | **POs** | | Review archived work | **Archived** | 3. Select an MRQ row to open its MRQ record. 4. Select a purchasing row to open its purchasing record with the selected stage, account, and product context. ![Identify the purchase-work entry and the list tabs before opening a row.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/869e8e2b6d797f16f2fe6587902221f4.png) **Result:** The list for the selected work stage is on screen, or the related MRQ or purchasing record opens for the next focused task. Open the MRQ list. **All**, **Quotations**, **POs**, **Archived**, and **MRQs** can appear on the purchase-work entry. Select the list that is actually available on your screen. When the list remains open, read its row headers before moving to the next focused task. ## Read the purchase work list A purchase-work row brings together the package identity, purchasing responsibility, supplier, offer progress, and order progress so you can choose the next record task. | Reader-facing label | What it helps you identify | |---|---| | **MRQ no.** | Find the requisition row to continue. | | **MRQ type** | Distinguish the kind of material request. | | **Title** | Identify the requested package. | | **Required receiving date** | Check when the requested material is needed. | | **Sales** | Relate the request to its sales work. | | **Short vendor list** | Review the supplier information shown for the request. | The columns on the MRQ list come from your selected list layout, so work from the headers you actually see rather than expecting a fixed set of columns. The purchase-work list appears when a selected layout is available. **Result:** You can use the visible row headers to identify the package and decide which focused record page to open next. ## Move an MRQ through RFQ and quotation The RFQ and quotation hand-off moves the supplier request into response and purchase-order work. Prerequisites - You have opened the relevant MRQ or package row. - You have the RFQ and supplier information needed by the focused record page. Steps 1. Select **RFQ** to open the new RFQ form when you need to start RFQ work from the list. 2. Complete the RFQ on [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs). 3. Continue to the quotation page after the RFQ is converted to offer work. 4. Complete quotation validation and conversion on [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations). When an RFQ has no required purchase item, the page can display `Please insert at least one RFQ` or `Please insert at least one product`. Follow the focused RFQ or quotation page for the correction. **Result:** The work is handed from the MRQ entry to RFQ work and then to the quotation procedure. ## Hand the quotation to purchase-order approval and activation Use the purchase-order page for approval and activation. Prerequisites - You have completed the quotation work. - You are on the purchase-order page for the package. Steps 1. Select **Convert To PO** from the quotation procedure when the quotation is ready for a purchase order. 2. Select **Request Approval** on the purchase-order page to send the order into approval work. 3. Select **Approved** when the purchase-order approval action is available. 4. Select **Activate PO** after approval to hand the order to activation. 5. Open [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) when the order reaches `Awaiting activation` or the valid purchase-order stage. The separate direct-order branch starts with **Direct P.O.** when new-entry access allows that link. Its form belongs to [Create a direct purchase order](doc:create-direct-purchase-order). **Result:** The quotation has been handed to purchase-order approval and activation, or you have opened the separate direct-order task. ## Recover from a blocked list action List feedback tells you whether to correct a filter, review the list state, or move to archived and exception work. Record-stage messages belong to the focused record pages. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter. | | `You are about to archive this product. This action cannot be undone. Are you sure?` | Review the row before confirming an archive action. | | `NO Data to Export` | Return to the list. | | `Data Importing completed` | Continue working with the refreshed list. | | If **RFQs** is unavailable | Use the visible work list, then open [Find active purchase job work](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) for the active list routes. | | Archived or exception work needs recovery | Open [Find archived and exception purchase job work](doc:purchase-job-exception-lists). | | If **Log in to Pams** appears | Sign in again before opening the list. | | The page is empty and has no controls or buttons | Return to the route after authentication. | Steps for the empty export result: 1. Return to the purchase-work list after `NO Data to Export`. 2. Select a list containing data. 3. Select **Export**. The list displays the export options after **Export** is selected. The focused record pages handle these additional messages: | Message | Continue with | |---|---| | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) | | `Product package deleted from all inquiries` | [Purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | `Product package deleted from all offers` | [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) | | `Product package deleted from all orders` | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `Order updated successfully. Undelivered. A draft invoice was deleted` | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `Job reactivated successfully` | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Converted to offer successfully` | [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) | | `Please insert at least one PO` | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `Please insert at least one RFQ` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Please insert at least one product` | [Purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | `Package products cannot be empty` | [Purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | `Required Offer Type` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Required Bid Due Date` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Your request was completed successfully` | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Offer must have at least one item` | [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) | | `Order must have at least one item` | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `Please enter action for each milstone` | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `You already have a contact with this name` | [Contact record](doc:contact-record) | **Result:** You know whether to correct the list action, sign in again, or continue in the archived and exception work page. ## Continue after the purchase order hand-off After purchase-order approval and activation, the procurement chain continues into receiving and warehouse fulfilment. The purchase-work page remains the place to locate the package stage; the focused purchase-order and warehouse pages carry the detailed actions. | Next need | Go to | |---|---| | Review purchase-order approval or activation details | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Review the purchase-job workspace around the hand-off | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | Maintain shared purchase-job information | [Prepare purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | Continue with receiving and warehouse work | [Warehouse fulfilment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Review archived or exception outcomes | [Find archived and exception purchase job work](doc:purchase-job-exception-lists) | The purchasing row opens the purchasing record with stage, account, and product context. Use that record route when the next task needs record-level information or a panel action. **Result:** The purchase-order hand-off is complete in this process map, and you know which focused page continues the work. # Rating types ## Rating types A rating type is a named set of answer descriptions paired with numeric rating values. Use this reference list when you need to define the choices available to a customer satisfaction survey. It is in the ISO settings area. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | See the configured rating types | [Find a rating type](#find-a-rating-type) | | Understand the list and form fields | [Understand the rating type screen](#understand-the-rating-type-screen) | | Add or change a rating type | [Create and maintain rating types](#create-and-maintain-rating-types) | | Resolve a validation or maintenance message | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Configure survey questions | [Questions](configuration-iso-survey-questions.md) | | Configure the customer satisfaction survey model | [Customer satisfaction survey](configuration-iso-survey-model.md) | ## Before you start The Rating types page requires a signed-in account. The fields and available actions on the page depend on your access and company configuration. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Have access to the Rating types configuration page. - Know the answer descriptions and numeric values you want to enter. - Use the headers and fields that appear in your list and form. If the required subscription feature is included, the list and its controls appear. If it is not included, the page displays the subscription-upgrade surface instead. ## Find a rating type The Rating types list is the starting point for viewing the configured rows, opening a new form, or opening an existing row. **Prerequisites** - Have access to ISO settings. **Steps** 1. Open **ISO settings**. 2. Select **Rating types**. ![Check the Rating types heading, list headers, and list actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a3a3f900541940b883d7fe7955772df9.png) 3. Read the `Type name` and `Rating` headers to identify the two list columns. 4. Read the rows in the list. The list contains six rows and the readout `Count: 6`. 5. Select **New** to open a new rating type form. 6. Select the edit action in a row to open an existing rating type. **Result:** The Rating types list is open, or a new or existing rating type form is open. ## Understand the rating type screen The list identifies each rating type by its type name and rating text. The form records the type name and a repeating set of rating descriptions and values. | Area | Reader-facing field or value | Type and rule | |---|---|---| | List | `Type name` | Text; visible in the list and form; required in the form | | List | `Rating` | Text; visible and filterable in the list; not shown in the form | | Form | `Rating description` | Repeating text entry; required | | Form | `Rating value` | Repeating number entry; required; from `0` through `100` | | Stored value | Display order | Hidden list value | | Stored value | Identifier | Hidden identifier value | | Stored value | Survey answer identifier | Hidden repeating value | | Stored value | Company identifier | Hidden list value | The form displays a required marker on **Type name**, **Rating description**, and **Rating value**. Each additional rating entry has its own **Rating description** and **Rating value** controls. The fields and list columns follow the page's configuration, so work from the headers and controls visible on your screen. ![Use the required markers and the repeating rating fields as your guide.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5fcb1ce072c039f30e1e62025a33d0bb.png) ## Create and maintain rating types Use this procedure to create a named rating type, add or remove its repeating entries, or edit an existing row. Each entry contains answer text and a numeric rating value. **Prerequisites** - Open the Rating types list. - Have the answer descriptions and values ready. **Steps** 1. Choose the maintenance path. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Create a rating type | **New**; when you select it, the form is titled `New Rating types`. | | Edit an existing rating type | The edit action in its row | The form opens. 2. Enter or change the rating type name in **Type name**. 3. Enter or change an answer description in **Rating description**. 4. Enter or change a number from `0` through `100` in **Rating value**. 5. Select **Add more** for each additional answer description and rating value. ![Check the second repeating Rating description and Rating value pair.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/141b99f8e3e8edf8211111b7deb34db8.png) 6. Select the remove action beside an entry to remove that entry. 7. Select **OK**. The form validates the required fields, assigns display order to the rating entries, saves the item, reloads the list, and closes the form. **Result:** The form contains the entered rating type and its repeating rating entries; after **OK**, the list reloads with the saved item. ## When maintenance goes wrong When a field or maintenance action produces one of these messages, match it to the corresponding action in the table. **Prerequisites** - Have the Rating types form or list open. **Steps** 1. Match the message on screen to one row in this table and follow the action in that row. | Message | Action | |---|---| | `Type name is required` | Enter a value in **Type name**. | | `Required` beside an answer description | Enter the answer description in **Rating description**. | | `Required` beside a rating value | Enter a value from `0` through `100` in **Rating value**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden character and select **OK** again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Review the row before choosing the delete action. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Return to the list and review the rows. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the item and review the related saved data. | | `Failed to Delete` | Review the item and try the deletion again. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the list. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Review the new row in the list. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Review the updated row in the list. | **Result:** The message has a matching corrective action, and the relevant field or list is ready for review. ## After maintaining rating types After you select **OK**, the configuration page remains the place to review the rating type list. The form action leaves the item on the Rating types page; it does not move the item to another workflow stage. **Result:** You are at the Rating types page and can review the list after the form action. # Reference categories ## Reference categories Reference categories are configuration entries that appear in the reference list with the questions associated with them. Use this screen when you need to review the category list or maintain a category and its questions. The screen is part of the shared reference-list configuration area. Open the **Reference list** area from **Configuration**. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the categories and questions already listed | [Find and review the reference-category list](#find-and-review-the-reference-category-list) | | Understand which fields appear when you open the form | [Understand the fields and screen rules](#understand-the-fields-and-screen-rules) | | Add or review a question entry | [Add or review categories and questions](#add-or-review-categories-and-questions) | | Resolve a validation or permission-related problem | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue with category question units | Reference category question units | | Continue with serial-status configuration | [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) | | Review broader reference-list data | [Reference list data](doc:reference-list-data) | ## Before you start Reference-list maintenance depends on the options your company has configured for this shared screen and on the permissions available to your account. **Prerequisites** | Check | What to have ready | |---|---| | Access | Access to the configuration area and the reference-category route. | | Editing | Permission that allows the edit control to appear for a row. | | Subscription | A subscription state that includes the configuration surface. | | Category information | The category to review and the category-question entries to maintain. | The list appears when the subscription includes it. **New** appears when creation is enabled. The edit and delete controls depend on your permissions. The edit form opens only when the new/edit dialog is open and a selected item is available. ## Find and review the reference-category list With access and category information ready, open the reference-category list before reviewing or creating an entry. **Prerequisites** You have the access and category information described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). **Steps** 1. Open the **Reference list** area from **Configuration**. 2. Read the **Name** and **Questions** columns. 3. Select **New** when you need to open the creation dialog. 4. Select **Export** when you need to open the export operation. ![Identify the **Name** and **Questions** columns and the **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls on the reference-category list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4e0b19a4a6485e786ff0b02a411ad226.png) **Result:** The reference-category list is on screen with the **Name** and **Questions** columns and the visible **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls. Use the list to identify which fields you need before opening the form. ## Understand the fields and screen rules The list identifies each entry by **Name** and **Questions**; the form uses **Category** and **Category questions** when those fields are included. | Field or column | Type or display | Required | Where it appears | |---|---|---|---| | **Name** | Visible list column | — | The list. | | **Questions** | Visible list column | — | The list. | | **Category** | Searchable select box | Yes | The new/edit form when the configured column is visible in the form. | | **Category questions** | Repeated question entry | Yes | The new/edit form when the category-question resource is selected. | | **Question** | Text box for a repeated category-question entry | Yes | The repeated-entry form for the category-question resource. | The list has no column headings or paging controls, and it does not provide filtering. The **Category** and **Category questions** fields do not appear as list columns; they are available in the form. | When… | The screen does this | |---|---| | The field is configured to appear in the form | Includes that field in the form. | | The edit form is open and a selected item is available | Shows the configured form fields. | | The category-question resource is selected | Uses the category-question select and repeated question controls. | | The configured field is required | Shows the required field rule for that field. | The new-record view showed **Category** and **Category questions** with required markers and an **OK** button. Use these field rules before opening the maintenance dialog. ## Add or review categories and questions A category question is a question entry associated with a reference category. Use the dialog to review the category field and maintain its repeated question entries. **Prerequisites** You are on the reference-category list and know which category information you need to review. **Steps** 1. Select **New** to open the new-record dialog. 2. Review the required **Category** field. 3. Review the required **Category questions** field. 4. Select **Add more** to add another category-question entry. 5. Select the remove icon beside a repeated entry to remove that entry. 6. Select **OK** to use the dialog's available confirmation control. ![Review the required **Category** and **Category questions** controls and the **Add more** and **OK** controls in the dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1f812f520ae1af9b81e64c12bd17ea63.png) **Result:** The new-record dialog is on screen with **Category**, **Category questions**, **Add more**, and **OK**. If the available fields or actions differ, use the list-specific rules in the next section. ## Handle reference-list variations This screen is shared by several reference lists, so the fields and actions change with the list you open. Work from the labels and columns visible in the current list rather than assuming that another reference list uses the same form. The shared screen presents different fields for different reference lists: | Reader need | The shared screen can show | |---|---| | Maintain category questions | **Category** and repeated question entries. | | Maintain category question units | A category-question selection and unit entries. | | Maintain rating types | Rating text and rating value controls. | | Maintain currencies, banks, or bank accounts | The corresponding selection controls. | | Maintain color markers | A color selection control. | | Maintain survey questions or models | The corresponding survey selections. | | Maintain cost and margin items or product withdrawal strategies | The corresponding configuration selections. | The list and form also depend on subscription access, whether **New** is available, edit and delete permissions, and the columns configured for the list. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text shown by the form or export dialog to choose the corrective action. The following table names the message first and then the action to take. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the required field before continuing. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters outside the accepted set from the affected text value. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and try again. | | `{{col.caption}} is required` | Complete the text field identified by the displayed caption. | | `Required` | Complete the repeated question field. | | `Cancel` | Use the dialog's **Cancel** action to close the export modal. | | `Export` | Use the export dialog's **Export** action to start the export operation. | The delete menu includes the confirmation text `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` and a `Delete` action when the delete permission allows that menu to appear. **Result:** You have the exact messages and the corrective action associated with each message that the form and dialogs provide. ## After maintaining reference categories After reviewing categories, continue in the shared reference-list configuration area when your work concerns related reference data. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Maintain category questions and units | Reference category question units | | Maintain serial statuses | [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) | | Review broader reference-list data | [Reference list data](doc:reference-list-data) | # Reports settings Use **Reports settings** to review report-setting roles, their tabs and widgets, the users assigned to them, and their last modification dates. ## Reports settings Reports settings is the reference list for report settings. A row contains **Role**, **Tabs**, **Widgets**, **Users**, and **Last modified**. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Read the role, tab, widget, user, and modification information | [Read the Reports settings list](#read-the-reports-settings-list) | | Review invoice-delay settings | [Review forecast settings](#review-forecast-settings) | | Open a saved report setting | [Open a report setting for maintenance](#open-a-report-setting-for-maintenance) | | Create a report setting | [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) | | Change a saved report setting | [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Work with the reports that use these settings | [Reports hub](reports-hub.md) | The list is a reference surface rather than a business-process stage. Use the new-setting or maintenance page for changes. ![The Reports settings list with its five columns and toolbar](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fe2caba6520353f6565151471405867f.png) ## Before you start You need signed-in access to the configuration area. The Reports settings route uses the product's authentication guard. Prerequisites - Have access to `/configuration/reports-settings`. - Know whether you are reviewing the list or opening a saved row for maintenance. - Select a saved report-setting row before opening its maintenance page. The list depends on the account's subscription configuration. When that configuration does not include the feature, the page follows its subscription alternative instead of showing the report-setting list. ## Open Reports settings Use this procedure to reach the report-setting list from the configuration area. Prerequisites - Have signed in to PAMS. Steps 1. Open `/configuration/reports-settings`. 2. Confirm that the page shows **Configuration Reports** and the **Forecast settings** entry. 3. Confirm that the list shows the **Role**, **Tabs**, **Widgets**, **Users**, and **Last modified** headers. ![The Configuration Reports page with Forecast settings above the five list headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fe2caba6520353f6565151471405867f.png) **Result:** The Reports settings list is open. ## Read the Reports settings list Each row summarises one report setting. Read the headers from left to right as follows: | Header | What to read | |---|---| | **Role** | The role associated with the report setting. | | **Tabs** | The number of tabs in the setting. | | **Widgets** | The number of widgets in the setting. | | **Users** | The users associated with the setting. | | **Last modified** | The date shown for the latest modification. | When **Filter Row** is available, select it to filter a column. The toolbar shows **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. After you open **Settings**, **Export** and **Filter Row** are visible. ![The list after opening Settings, with Export and Filter Row visible](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/37d990b910566ee0ed41507739e60198.png) Use the headers and row values to choose the report setting you need. The list does not provide a create or delete route; use [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) to create one and [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) to change an existing one. > [!NOTE] > A saved row is the starting point for its maintenance page. The list search panel is hidden, and the column chooser is disabled. Work from the headers that are visible in your list. ## Review forecast settings Forecast settings contain the average payment-delay values used for purchase, sales, and commission invoices. The three invoice groups each use a number and one of the unit choices **Days**, **Weeks**, or **Months**. Prerequisites - Have the Reports settings list open. - Have access to **Forecast settings**. Steps 1. Select **Forecast settings**. 2. Open the applicable forecast branch. 3. Review **for purchase invoices**, **for sales invoices**, and **for commission invoices**. 4. Review the available unit choices **Days**, **Weeks**, and **Months** for each invoice group. The invoice fields appear inside the forecast popup when its branch is open. **Result:** The forecast popup displays the applicable invoice-delay fields and their available unit choices. ## Open a report setting for maintenance Opening a report setting transfers you from the reference list to the existing setting's maintenance page. Prerequisites - Have the Reports settings list open. - Have a saved report-setting row available. Steps 1. Choose the way you want to open the saved setting: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open the setting in the current page | A data-row cell other than the row's edit cell | | Open the setting in another browser tab | **Open in new tab** in the row context menu | **Result:** The selected report setting opens on its maintenance page. ## Handle availability and request outcomes Reports settings availability follows the account's subscription configuration. The list has no additional data-load message. When you maintain a report setting on the related new-setting or maintenance page, the request messages are: | Message | Use | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | The maintenance request completed successfully. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The maintenance request returned an error. | The list page does not provide a create or delete action. Use the list as the review and hand-off point, then continue to [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) or [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) for those tasks. ## Continue with report settings After reviewing the list, choose the maintenance page that matches your task: | If you need to… | Continue to | |---|---| | Create a new report setting | [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) | | Change an existing report setting | [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Add a tab | Select **Blank Tab** on [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) or [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Import tabs | Select **Import From** on [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) or [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Set editable previous months | Use **Editable prev. months** on [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) or [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Set the time frame | Use **Time Frame** on [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) or [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Save and close the setting | Select **Save and Close** on [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) or [Edit report setting](configuration-reports-settings-edit-record.md) | | Work with the reports that use report settings | [Reports hub](reports-hub.md) | | Return to the configuration entry point | [Configuration dashboard](configuration-home.md) | Reports settings does not move a business record from one lifecycle stage to another. It is the reference list and hand-off point for report-setting work. # Sales job lifecycle ## Sales job lifecycle at a glance A sales job carries commercial work from an early opportunity through inquiry, offer, order, and delivery. A Potential is an early sales opportunity you record before Inquiry work. ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 [*] --> Potentials Potentials --> Inquiries: Inquiry Inquiries --> Offers: Offer Offers --> Orders: Convert To Order Orders --> Delivered: Deliver Order Potentials --> Missed: Missed Opportunity Inquiries --> Regretted: Regret To Offer Offers --> Regretted: Regret To Offer Inquiries --> Cancelled: Inquiry Cancelled By Client Offers --> Lost: Lost job Orders --> Rejected: Reject Order Acceptance Orders --> CancelledOrder: Order Cancelled By Client ``` | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a saved job | [Find sales job work](find-sales-job-work.md) | | Create the opening record | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md) | | Work in Potentials | [Potentials](potentials.md) | | Complete an Inquiry | [Inquiries](inquiries.md) | | Prepare an Offer | [Offers](offers.md) | | Move an Order toward delivery | [Orders](orders.md) and [From orders to delivered](from-orders-to-delivered.md) | | Handle an exit | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | Read the record | [Sales job record](sales-job-record.md) | | Maintain related work | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md), [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md), [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md), or [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history.md) | The normal path is **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Offers**, **Orders**, then **Delivered**. The lifecycle exits are **Missed Opportunity**, **Regret To Offer**, **Inquiry Cancelled By Client**, **Lost job**, **Reject Order Acceptance**, **Order Cancelled By Client**, and the archived outcomes for rejected and deleted work. ## Before you follow a sales job Before you follow a sales job, make sure you can open the sales area and work with the record. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - The record is saved before you use an existing-job stage action. - You have edit access when an action changes the stage. - Company setup determines whether **Order chance** is required. - Your saved list layout determines the columns shown. | Starting situation | How to begin | |---|---| | General new job | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md) | | New Potential | [Potentials](potentials.md) | | New direct order | [Sales job variants](sales-job-variants.md) | | New instant job | [Sales job variants](sales-job-variants.md) | Direct-order and instant-job records do not follow the same Potential-to-Inquiry route as a target job. **Result:** You know which access, record, job-type, and setup conditions affect the route. ## Find the job and its current work list The sales-job list groups work by the stage or outcome you need to review. The Inquiry list shows **Inquiry date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage**. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - You know whether you need Potential, Inquiry, Offer, Order, or archived work. **Steps** 1. Open **Sales jobs**. 2. Select **Inquiries**. 3. Select the list tab for the work you need. 4. Read **Inquiry date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage**. 5. Select a job row to open its record. 6. Select the list tool you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Adjust the saved list layout | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | ![The Inquiry list with stage tabs, list headers, and toolbar buttons](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7517274068c93ed726e006d8e98f20b8.png) **Result:** The selected list remains on screen, or the selected row opens the sales-job record. ## Read the job's lifecycle position A sales-job record is the workspace for one job as it moves between commercial stages. The available controls depend on the job type, current stage, edit access, and related records. | Reader task | Control or field | Availability | |---|---|---| | Open early opportunity work | **Potentials** | Target jobs that are not direct orders or instant jobs | | Open inquiry work | **Inquiry** | Not direct-order, instant-job, or missed-potential work | | Move toward an offer | **Offer** | Applicable job type, readiness for offer, and permission to edit | | Read offer scoring | **Order chance** | From Offer until before Order; required only where configured | | Read the stage | **Status** | Active stage range with stage-specific conditions | | Move toward an order | **Convert To Order** | A valid offer | | Return to inquiry work | **Back to Inquiry** | Applicable Offer branch with edit access | | Read order work | **Order** | Active Order-to-Delivered range | | Reject an order | **Reject Order Acceptance** | Applicable Order branch with edit access | | Cancel an order | **Order Cancelled By Client** | Applicable Order branch with edit access | | Prepare shipment | **Ready For Shipment Job** | Applicable Order branch with edit access | | Deliver an order | **Deliver Order** | Applicable Order branch with edit access | | Return to offer work | **Back to Offer** | Applicable Order branch with edit access | | Open project work | **Project management** | Principal access and project-management edit permission | The item area uses **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. **Item Description** is required. **Qty** must be greater than 0 and no greater than 999,999.00. **Unit** is unavailable for package items or products. On an active record, **Offer** and **Order** may be available. **Status** and **Regret To Offer** may not appear. Availability varies by record; **Project management** and **Delivered** may not appear on an active record. ![The offer-stage view reached from the lifecycle controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/420ccaabe5b7987c5c6d91a5113df44f.png) ![The order-stage view reached from the lifecycle controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9c762d297041d5c7fd45bd59a8549125.png) ## Follow the happy path The happy path moves one sales job from early opportunity work to delivery. Use the focused page for the fields and committing action at each handover. **Prerequisites** - You can open the saved sales-job record. - The current stage and job type meet the next action's condition. - You have edit access for a stage-changing action. **Steps** 1. Select the stage you need: | If you need to… | Select | When | |---|---|---| | Work with early opportunity information | **Potentials** | The job is a target job, not a direct order or instant job. | | Open inquiry work | **Inquiry** | The job is not a direct order, instant job, or missed potential. | | Open offer work | **Offer** | The job type and readiness conditions allow offer work. | 2. Select **Convert To Order** after a valid offer is available. 3. Select **Order** to review order work. 4. Select **Deliver Order** when the order conditions allow delivery. ![The Potentials work surface reached from the lifecycle route](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5f2ae8ff6ceacfdf3d50c5a75add93a5.png) **Result:** The job is in the next work area when the handover completes. Continue with [Potentials](potentials.md), [Inquiries](inquiries.md), [Offers](offers.md), [Orders](orders.md), and [From orders to delivered](from-orders-to-delivered.md). ## Handle exits and alternate branches An exit records why a job no longer follows the normal route. Choose the outcome that matches the job's current stage. **Prerequisites** - You know the current stage from the available stage controls. - You have edit access for the outcome action. **Steps** 1. Select the applicable outcome: | Current work | Control | |---|---| | Potential work that will not continue | **Missed Opportunity** | | Inquiry or Offer work that is regretted | **Regret To Offer** | | Inquiry work cancelled by the client | **Inquiry Cancelled By Client** | | Offer work that is lost | **Lost job** | | Order work rejected by the client | **Reject Order Acceptance** | | Order work cancelled by the client | **Order Cancelled By Client** | 2. Open [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md). **Result:** The outcome branch is identified and its focused procedure is available. ## When the route goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to choose the next focused page. | Message | Next action | |---|---| | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Continue with the saved custom fields. | | `Job updated successfully` | Continue with the updated job. | | `Job deleted successfully` | Continue with archived outcome work. | | `Job regretted successfully` | Continue with the regretted branch. | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Continue with the cancelled branch. | | `Job missed successfully` | Continue with the missed branch. | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Continue with the reactivated job. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | Continue in Offer work. | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Continue in Inquiry work. | | `Converted To Regretted` | Continue with the regretted branch. | | `Converted to cancelled` | Continue with the cancelled branch. | | `Converted to lost` | Continue with the lost branch. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Check the list or record area for the completed request. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the current stage and focused action page. | | `Error saving custom fields` | Reopen custom-field work on the record. | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Follow the specific text shown in place of `{{errorMsg}}`. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Review the fields in the current work area. | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Review the invoice state before attempting to change delivery. | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Review the offer statuses before returning to Inquiry. | | `An account with this name already exists` | Review the account name before saving the account-related work. | | `A project with this name already exists` | Review the project name before saving the project-related work. | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Save the open Inquiry before continuing. | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Return only when the inquiries are in Draft. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Review each item quantity and enter a value greater than 0. | | `One or more items has no unit` | Review each item and select its applicable unit. | These messages belong to focused pages: | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Required Receiving Date`; `Required Receiving After` | Purchase jobs — MRQ details | | `This field is required `; `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00`; `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Sales-job item, offer, order, purchasing, inquiry, and invoice panels | | `Please enter action for each milstone `; `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Sales-job offer cost calculation | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet`; `Error: Client not saved yet`; `You already have a contact with this name`; `This Field Is Required` | Sales-job account editing | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity`; `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created`; `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing`; `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created`; `Sales order is archived` | Sales job items — BOM | | `This product is already included in BOM`; `The first variant cannot be deleted`; `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.`; `Please select one product` | Product selection or details | | `Package must have at least one item`; `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Purchase-job package or MRQ details | | `Action not allowed`; `One topic and at least one note is required`; `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Sales activities or related record work | | `Please enter at least one email`; `Inquiry must have at least one item`; `Offer must have at least one item`; `Order must have at least one item`; `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted`; `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchase jobs — purchasing details | | `Required Offer Type`; `Required Bid Due Date` | Purchase jobs — purchasing inquiry | | `Error loading accounts` | Sales-job delivery orders | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer`; `There is error in serial you have entered`; `Minimum: At least one serial` | Sales-job reference list | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage`; `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | L/G details | ## Continue the work This page maps the route. Use the focused destination for the next action. | Continue with… | Open | |---|---| | List search and row opening | [Find sales job work](find-sales-job-work.md) | | Creation route | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md) or [Sales job variants](sales-job-variants.md) | | Record information | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | | Items | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | | Comments and tasks | [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md) | | Activities and files | [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md) | | Contacts, guarantees, and history | [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history.md) | | Potential, inquiry, offer, or order work | [Potentials](potentials.md), [Inquiries](inquiries.md), [Offers](offers.md), or [Orders](orders.md) | | Delivery work | [From orders to delivered](from-orders-to-delivered.md) | | Exit work | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | **Result:** You have a destination for the next sales-job action. # Sales job record ## Sales job record overview A sales job record brings the commercial work for one opportunity together as it moves from early opportunity work through proposal, order, and completion. Use this page to recognize the record's work areas and choose the focused page for the work you need to complete. The saved record also has a workflow chevron bar, shared job information, stage panels, an item area, assessment fields, and companion tabs. A new record shows `New` in the job-number breadcrumb; after saving, the breadcrumb shows the job number. > **Note:** A collapsed stage panel shows a summary bar with the client, vendor, stage, primary > action, and three-dot menu. Select the summary bar to expand it. ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 [*] --> Potentials Potentials --> Inquiries: Inquiry Inquiries --> Offers: Offer Offers --> Orders: Convert To Order Orders --> Completion: Complete the order ``` | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a saved job | [Find sales job work](find-sales-job-work.md) | | Create a new job | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md) | | Understand the record's lifecycle | [Sales job lifecycle](sales-jobs-lifecycle.md) | | Read this record's work areas | [Read the lifecycle work area](#read-the-lifecycle-work-area) | | Review shared information and assessment | [Review shared information and assessment](#review-shared-information-and-assessment) | | Work with item rows | [Read the item area](#read-the-item-area) and [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | | Manage comments and tasks | [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md) | | Record activities or manage files | [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md) | | Manage contacts, guarantees, or history | [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history.md) | ## Before you open the record Before you open a sales job record, know whether you are opening saved work from a list or starting a new record. Existing-record actions are subject to the current stage, edit access, subscription access, page availability, and unsaved-record checks. Prerequisites - You are signed in to PAMS. - For an existing record, you know which sales-job list contains the work. - For a new record, you know which work type you are starting. - You have the access needed for the action you intend to take. - You know whether the record is saved; stage actions on an unsaved record are not the same as actions on an existing record. Steps 1. Open **Sales**. 2. Select **Inquiries**. 3. Select **Add new**. 4. Select **Inquiry**. Selecting **Add new** opens the new-record flow. Selecting **Inquiry** opens the new inquiry record. | Starting situation | Follow | |---|---| | Open saved inquiry work | Steps 1–2 | | Start a new general sales job | Steps 1–4 | | Start a new Potential | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md), Potential variant | | Start a new direct order | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md), direct-order variant | | Start a new instant job | [Create a sales job](create-sales-job.md), instant-job variant | If the record is unavailable, a subscription condition, page condition, current stage, edit permission, or unsaved-record condition controls which work area and actions appear. **Result:** You know whether to open a saved record or start a new one, and which conditions can change the work available on the record. ## Find and open a sales job record The sales-job list is where you choose the work stage before opening a record. The list displays the columns **Inquiry date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage**. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - You know whether you are looking for **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Offers**, **Orders**, or archived work. Steps 1. Open **Sales**. ![The Sales Inquiries list with its stage tabs and three visible columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/96026c87bdca3fcc48d361cf43de599b.png) 2. Select **Inquiries**. 3. Select the list tab that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every listed job | **All** | | Review early opportunities | **Potentials** | | Review inquiries | **Inquiries** | | Review offers | **Offers** | | Review orders | **Orders** | | Review archived work | **Archived** | | Review jobs missing a customer survey | **Job Missing Customer Survey** | 4. Read **Inquiry date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage** for the row you want. 5. Select the row to open its sales job record. 6. Confirm that the saved record opens with its workspace and companion tabs. **Result:** The selected sales job record is open, and the record's lifecycle tabs are available for inspection. The columns in the list depend on the saved list layout. Work from the headers visible in your list rather than expecting every account to display the same columns. ## Read the lifecycle work area The lifecycle work area is the part of the record that lets you inspect the commercial stage and the stage-specific record panel. Selecting a lifecycle tab changes the displayed panel; it does not, by itself, change the job's stage. Steps 1. Select the lifecycle panel that matches the work you need to inspect. | If you need to inspect… | Select | |---|---| | Inquiry work | **Inquiry** | | Offer work | **Offer** | | Order work | **Order** | | Order-completion work | the order-completion area | ![The record with the Inquiry lifecycle panel selected.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/baf844c87ef67a91bb7f2f9d75ff5120.png) ![The saved record as it opens, with its summary panels and workspace controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e5869e5582b7217f252dec521d5cca03.png) 2. Read the stage readout shown with the record, such as `Offer/Expired`. 3. Read the workflow chevron bar to orient yourself in the record's current stage. 4. Save a record change owned by the focused page. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the change and continue working | **Save** | | Save the change and close the record | **Save and Close** | The header **Save** remains disabled until job-level changes exist. A panel-level **Save** appears for edits inside the open stage panel. Successful panel saves can show `Inquiry updated successfully` or `Offer updated successfully`. **Result:** The selected lifecycle panel is displayed, and the record remains in the same stage until a stage action is completed on its owning page. The record also exposes **Extend Offer Validity** and a command menu. The command menu can show **Order**, **Revision**, **Alternative Offer**, **Enable Editing**, **Print**, **Cover letter template**, **Commercial offer template**, **Technical offer template**, **Inquiry Cancelled By Client**, and **Lost**. Use [Offers](offers.md), [Orders](orders.md), and [Order completion](from-orders-to-delivered.md) for the procedures behind those stage actions. ### When a lifecycle action stops The record's action area can return these messages. Read the exact message, then continue on the focused page for the stage or work area that raised it. | Message | Continue with | |---|---| | `Custom fields saved successfully` | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | | `Job updated successfully` | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | | `Job deleted successfully` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Job regretted successfully` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Job cancelled successfully` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Job missed successfully` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Job reactivated successfully` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Converted to offer successfully` | [Offers](offers.md) | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | [Inquiries](inquiries.md) | | `Converted To Regretted` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Converted to cancelled` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `Converted to lost` | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs.md) | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | [General error messages](general-error-messages.md) | | `Error saving custom fields` | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | [Order completion](from-orders-to-delivered.md) | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | [Inquiries](inquiries.md) | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | [General error messages](general-error-messages.md) | | `An account with this name already exists` | [Accounts](accounts.md) | | `A project with this name already exists` | [Projects](projects.md) | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | [Inquiries](inquiries.md) | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | [Potentials](potentials.md) | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | | `One or more items has no unit` | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | [Offers](offers.md) | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | [Offers](offers.md) | | `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.` | [Offers](offers.md) | | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) | If a save fails, the validation summary can show `Please Solve the Following Issues :` followed by field-specific lines. Item validation remains with [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md). If you submit an offer with a zero price, the confirmation asks: `Offer price zero | Your Offer Price Is Zero! | Are you sure you want to deliver free of charge?` Choose **No** to close the confirmation or **Yes** to continue the selected action. ### Out of scope messages The following item-level messages belong to [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md), not to the record map: | Message | Continue with | |---|---| | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | ## Review shared information and assessment Shared information identifies the job and its parties; assessment records how the opportunity is currently judged. Review these areas before moving to item or stage-specific work. Steps 1. Read the fields in the shared-information area. | Field | Area | |---|---| | **Branch** | Shared information | | **Salesperson Responsible** | Shared information | | **Product Type** | Shared information | | **Job Title** | Shared information | | **End User** | Shared information | | **Estimated Value** | Shared information | | **File Number** | Shared information | | **Expected Order Date** | Shared information | 2. Read **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, and **Order chance** in the assessment area. 3. On an existing record, read the end-user account value, the **Reset** link beside the salesperson value, and **Time Frame** when those values appear. After saving, **Salesperson Responsible** is shown as text with a **Reset** link. 4. On a new record, select **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **Client**, **Vendor**, and **Bid Due Date** when the required marker appears beside the field. 5. Use [Sales job information and assessment](sales-job-information-and-assessment.md) for field-level entry, conditional requirements, and validation handling. **Result:** You can distinguish shared information from assessment and know which visible fields need attention before detailed work continues. On the inquiry surface, **Inquiry Date** fills with today, **Expected Order Date** is calculated from **Time Frame**, and **Time Frame** displays as a calculated period. The end-user field defaults to the chosen **Client**, and **Requested Offer Type** defaults to `Firm`. The offer panel can show a computed expiry date for **Validity Period** and an **Equivalent Booking** aggregate. The assessment cluster combines **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, and **Chance in Competition** with the calculated rating and **Order chance**. The new-record surface also shows **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, and **Requested Offer Type**. The existing record can show **Client**, **Vendor**, **Bid Due Date**, **Expiry Date**, and **Offer Price**. The exact visible field set depends on the record route and the available setup. ## Read the item area The item area lists the products or services that make up the sales job. Each row is identified by its description, unit, and quantity; pricing and delivery details belong to the focused item page. Steps 1. Read the item description, unit, and quantity in the new-record item grid. ![The new inquiry with the item grid below the inquiry fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5ce84428101bdf92bb4336509d3ad240.png) 2. In an existing record, read the item description and unit, plus **Qty**, **Unit Price**, Discount (%), **Item Price**, and **Currency** when those columns appear. 3. If the quantity is rejected, match the message exactly: `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00`. 4. If a non-negative value is rejected, match the message exactly: `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value`. 5. Open [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) for item entry, pricing, quantity, unit, invoice, and delivery rules. **Result:** You can recognize the item grid and route item-level work to its focused page. On a new item row, **Unit** defaults to `Pieces` and **Qty** defaults to `1.00`. ## Hand off companion work Companion work is the information maintained around the sales job after the main commercial record is identified. Use the tab that answers the question you are working on, then continue on the focused page rather than repeating its detailed controls here. Steps 1. Open the companion-tab area on the sales job record. 2. Choose the work area that matches your next action. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Review written discussion | [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md) | | Manage follow-up tasks | [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md) | | Record a visit, meeting, or call | [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md) | | Manage supporting files | [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md) | | Review contacts, guarantees, or history | [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history.md) | | Track principal invoices | [Principal invoices](principal-invoices.md) | | Review sales or commission invoices | [Invoice lifecycle](invoice-lifecycle.md) | | Record a payment | [Record payment](record-payment.md) | | Review pricing quotations | [Pricing quotation overview](pricing-quotation-overview.md) | | Review job costing | [Job profitability overview](job-profitability-overview.md) | | Review order completion | [Order completion](from-orders-to-delivered.md) and [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) | | Review reference data | [Reference list data](reference-list-data.md) | 3. Select the available companion tab for discussion, tasks, activities, attachments, contacts, guarantees, or history. 4. Select the available area for principal invoices, pricing quotations, job costing, order completion, or reference data. 5. If the discussion or task area is not available, continue with the work area that is visible and use [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md) when the feature is available. **Result:** You know which companion work area to open and which focused page owns the next task. The discussion area includes a rich-text editor, **Post**, and comment search. The available companion tabs depend on the saved record, subscription, and current setup. The record's shared child components can raise messages owned by their focused pages. Those messages stay with the relevant page so that the response matches the action that produced them. # Serial combinations ## What serial combinations are Serial combinations are configuration reference data for the company. Use this configuration reference when you need to review the patterns used for company records. The list is the starting point; selecting a row opens its configuration record. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the available patterns | [Find and open a serial combination](#find-and-open-a-serial-combination) | | Read the columns and configuration fields | [Understand the list and configuration fields](#understand-the-list-and-configuration-fields) | | Add or change component rows | [Maintain a serial combination](#maintain-a-serial-combination) | | Diagnose an unavailable list or control | [When the screen does not behave as expected](#when-the-screen-does-not-behave-as-expected) | | Continue with the selected record | [Serial combination details](doc:configuration-serial-combinations-record) | | Review related serial-status settings | [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) | | Review product serial-combination settings | [Product serial combinations](doc:configuration-product-combination-view) | ## Before you start Sign in before opening the **Configuration** area. Your account needs editing access to change a serial combination. The configuration area also depends on the serial-combination feature being included in your subscription. The record must be available before you can maintain its rows. Open a saved record from its row in the serial-combination list. ## Find and open a serial combination A serial-combination list is the place to identify an existing pattern before you review or change its component rows. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - You know which serial pattern you need to review. Steps 1. In **Configuration**, open **Serial combinations**. ![Review the empty serial-combination list and its **Name** and **Serial Combination** headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2968434f2f2d24a310749f39b53f6808.png) 2. Read the **Name** column to identify the serial type. 3. Read the **Serial Combination** column to review the displayed pattern. 4. Use the available search field when it is shown. ![Locate the list search area above the serial-combination grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/72c22ff4a515ddda93727813238a4b70.png) 5. Select the row or its edit control to open the configuration record. **Result:** The selected serial-combination record opens. ## Understand the list and configuration fields The list summarizes each pattern, while the configuration record arranges its component rows in the order used by the pattern. The list contains these columns: | Column | What it contains | |---|---| | **Name** | The serial type name from the lookup list. | | **Serial Combination** | The generated pattern readout. | The configuration grid contains these fields: | Field | Control and rule | |---|---| | **Serial Component** | Select the component for the row. A component is required when the row is not empty. | | **Digits** | Select the available digit count for the selected component. The field is shown only for components that use a digit count. | | **Default Value** | Enter the default value for the selected component when **Default Value** is available. | When the record has audit history, select **Last Modifications** to read the change history. ![Review the **Serial Component**, **Digits**, and **Default Value** columns in the configuration grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b3aabdc349ab3ed15e326a6288893e91.png) The configuration record also contains an ordering area and an action area without text labels. The list provides edit and reset actions as icons. ## Maintain a serial combination Maintaining a serial combination means arranging its component rows so the displayed pattern uses the intended order, component, digit count, and default value. Prerequisites - You have opened the serial-combination record. - Your account has editing access. Steps 1. Select **Component** to add a component row. 2. In **Serial Component**, select the component for the row. 3. In **Digits**, select the applicable digit count. 4. In **Default Value**, enter the value used by that component when the field is available. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each component row in the required order. 6. To remove an empty row, select its delete icon. 7. To remove a populated row, open the row's actions. 8. In the confirmation, read `Are you sure you want to delete this row?`. 9. Select **Cancel** to keep the row. 10. Select **Delete** to remove the populated row. 11. Select **Save**. **Result:** The configuration record remains open with the component rows and pattern readout on screen. ## Handle access branches and failures Use this procedure to choose the available branch before changing a serial combination. Prerequisites - You have opened a serial-combination record. Steps 1. Choose the action that matches what is on screen. | If you see… | Select… | |---|---| | The subscription-upgrade area | **Back** to return. | | **Save** and **Component** | [Maintain a serial combination](#maintain-a-serial-combination). | | The leave-page close action | The close action to leave without editing. | | When audit history is available | Select **Last Modifications** to read the change history. | | Condition | What you see or use | |---|---| | The serial-combination feature is not included in the subscription | The subscription-upgrade area replaces the configuration area. | | The feature is included | The configuration area is shown. | | Editing access is available | **Save**, the close action, **Component**, and row edit or reset actions are available. | | Editing access is unavailable | The leave-page close action is shown instead of the editable close action. | | The selected component uses a digit count | **Digits** is available. | | The selected component does not use a digit count | Continue with the fields that are shown for that component. | | The selected component uses a default value | **Default Value** is available. | | When audit history is available | **Last Modifications** and its history area are shown. | | An exit popup appears | `` `Don't Save`, `Save`, `Cancel` `` | | An import popup appears | `` `Cancel`, `Upload` `` | | A confirmation popup appears | `` `No`, `Yes` `` | | An alert popup appears | `Ok` is available. | | The subscription-upgrade popup appears | `Back` is available. | When the form validates a row, it can display these exact messages: | Message | Reader action | |---|---| | `Component is required.` | Select a component in **Serial Component**. | | `Invalid component.` | Choose a valid **Serial Component** value. | | `Quantity is required.` | Select a value in **Digits** when the row requires it. | | `Invalid quantity.` | Select a **Digits** value from the available range. | **Result:** The applicable configuration area, editing option, or history view is open. ## When the screen does not behave as expected The list can show its headers while no rows or named controls are available. The configuration record can also stop at a validation or confirmation message. | What you see | What to check | |---|---| | The list shows **Name** and **Serial Combination** with no rows | Review the list state before choosing a row. | | No list buttons are visible | The list currently exposes no button control to select. | | `Component is required.` | Select a component in **Serial Component**. | | `Invalid component.` | Select a valid component option. | | `Quantity is required.` | Select **Digits** where the row requires a value. | | `Invalid quantity.` | Select a valid **Digits** option. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this row?` | Select **Cancel** to retain the row or **Delete** to remove it. | | `Serial Combination Changes will be Applied Only on New Jobs, Old Jobs will not be Effected.` | Treat the change as applying to new jobs. | | `Registration` | Review the audit-log entry type under **Last Modifications**. | The empty list state included `No data` and the **Tickets** link. ## What to do next After reviewing the list, continue with the configuration record when you need to inspect or maintain its component rows. 1. Select the row or its edit affordance in the list. 2. Use [Serial combination details](doc:configuration-serial-combinations-record) for the record configuration surface. 3. Use [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) for related serial-status reference data. 4. Use [Product serial combinations](doc:configuration-product-combination-view) for product serial-combination configuration. **Result:** You are on the configuration page that matches the next serial-combination task. # Targets and budgets ## Targets and budgets Targets and budgets is the configuration area for reviewing booking targets, sales targets, and financial budgets for a selected year. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review booking values by organisational group | [Find the target or budget area](#find-the-target-or-budget-area), then choose a booking tab. | | Review sales values | [Find the target or budget area](#find-the-target-or-budget-area), then choose **Sales Target**. | | Review financial budget values | [Find the target or budget area](#find-the-target-or-budget-area), then choose **Financial Budget**. | | Understand the fields and limits | [Understand the target and budget tables](#understand-the-target-and-budget-tables). | | Maintain a value | [Maintain targets and budgets](#maintain-targets-and-budgets). | | Resolve a blocked or unloaded screen | [When validation or loading fails](#when-validation-or-loading-fails). | ![Identify the year, target tabs, and page actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c93c3bd4117fc6281cc57f5198ffb46f.png) ## Before you start The selected year determines the period you are reviewing, while subscription and access conditions determine which target areas and edit actions appear. Prerequisites - Know the year you need to review. - Have access to booking target settings for booking sections. - Have access to financial budget settings for budget sections. - Have permission to edit values when you need to maintain them. - Identify the branch whose rows you need to review before opening its details. The screen can obtain rows from branch data for principals, booking, account managers, product types, finance budgets, and net profit. The rows available to you therefore depend on the branch data in your configuration. ## Find the target or budget area Use the tabs to move from the broad area to the group of values you need to review. Prerequisites - Open Targets and budgets. - Know whether you need booking, sales, or financial budget values. Steps 1. From the Configuration area, open Targets and budgets. 2. In **Year**, select the year you need to review. 3. Select the main area that matches what you need to review: | If you need to review… | Select | |---|---| | Booking values | **Booking Target** | | Sales values | **Sales Target** | | Financial budgets | **Financial Budget** | 4. If you selected **Booking Target**, choose the booking group: | If you need to review… | Select | |---|---| | Team values | **Teams** | | Vendor values | **Vendors** | | Account-manager values | **Account Managers** | | Product-type values | **Product Types** | 5. If you selected **Financial Budget**, choose the budget group: | If you need to review… | Select | |---|---| | COGS values | **COGS** | | SG&A values | **SG&A** | | Depreciation values | **Depreciation** | | FORX values | **FORX** | | Net profit values | **Net profit** | ![Use the booking tabs to choose the group of values to review.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/16bf83cb16cef0c18a57a0ca10b70f9a.png) 6. If the required area is not available, check that the relevant subscription is active. **Result:** The selected target or budget area is on screen. ## Understand the target and budget tables Each target or budget area presents its own fields in an edit popup. The available rows come from your configured branches, so work from the names and columns visible in the selected area. | Field shown in an edit area | Type | Requirement or limit | Area | |---|---|---|---| | **Reference Margin** | Number | From 0 through 100 | Nominal-margin area | | **Set target** | Number | Required; minimum 0 | Product-type target and sales-target areas | | **Set budget** | Number | Required; minimum 0 | SG&A, depreciation, and FORX budget areas | | **Set margin (%)** | Number | Required; from 0 through 100 | Product-type margin area | | **Name** | Text | Required for a new group; optional when editing a group | Product-group areas | | **Product types** | Text | Optional | Group edit area | | Unlabelled target value | Number | Required in the account-manager area; minimum 0 in target areas | Account-manager and principal-target areas | | Unlabelled target amount | Number | Minimum 0 | Team-target area | | Unlabelled total target | Number | Minimum 0 | Team-target area for the applicable distribution rules | The screen also contains the **Year** select box and the first-view actions titled **Apply filter**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**, together with **Next Year**. The first view does not show table columns, and two controls have no text label. Use the field or column names that appear after you open a target area rather than assuming that every branch produces a row. The page has no reader-facing Reference Commission field. The available group fields are **Name** and **Product types**. The target and budget values use non-negative numbers, while percentage fields use the range 0 through 100. > [!NOTE] > The fields shown in an edit area depend on the target or budget group you selected. When you can identify a field and its limit, continue to [Maintain targets and budgets](#maintain-targets-and-budgets). ## Maintain targets and budgets Use these steps when you have edit access and the target or budget row you need is available. Prerequisites - Complete [Find the target or budget area](#find-the-target-or-budget-area). - Open the branch containing the value you need to maintain. - Have the target, budget, or percentage value ready. - Confirm that your access allows editing. Steps 1. Choose the target or budget group that contains the value. 2. Open the available edit action for the row. 3. Enter a non-negative value in the target or budget field. 4. Enter a percentage from 0 through 100 when the field is **Reference Margin** or `Set margin (%)`. 5. Complete every field marked required in the edit area. 6. Select the available save action. 7. Check the edit area for the value you entered. Use **Next Year** when you need to start the next available year rather than change a value in the current year. Before continuing, check that the value remains visible in the area you selected. **Result:** The selected target or budget area remains on screen with the value you entered when the available edit path accepts it. For a branch or product-group variation, continue to [Handle branch and product-group variations](#handle-branch-and-product-group-variations). ## Handle branch and product-group variations Branch-backed areas organise values by the branch data available to your configuration. Opening a branch exposes the actions for that branch; edit actions additionally depend on edit permission. Prerequisites - Open a booking, sales, or budget group with branch rows. - Know whether you are maintaining a row or a product group. Steps 1. Open the branch containing the row you need. 2. Choose the available edit action for the row. 3. For product-group work, select **Manage groups**. 4. For a new group, select **Group**. 5. Enter the group name in **Name**. 6. Choose the product types for the group in **Product types**. 7. Select the available save action. 8. Open **Last Modifications** when you need to review the available modification history. Actions represented only by an icon appear only when their branch and access conditions allow them. **Result:** The selected branch or group area is open, with its available maintenance actions on screen. ## When validation or loading fails Use the message text as your starting point, then correct the value or return to a usable configuration area. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The value contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character, then select the available save action again. | | `Check validation` | The edit area did not pass validation. | Review the fields marked required and the numeric limits, then select the available save action again. | | `Group must have at least one product type` | The group has no product type. | Add at least one product type in **Product types**. | | `Error in get teams list for 2025` | The teams list did not load for the selected year. | Use the available navigation controls to return to a usable target area. | | The sign-in form appears after you choose **Product Types**. | The configuration screen is no longer available in the current session. | Sign in again, then reopen Targets and budgets. | ## Confirm the result and continue After reviewing a value, use the controls that are available on the selected area. **Export** is the page action for taking the available table data outside the screen; **Last Modifications** is the available history action for a branch area. The header also provides **Apply filter**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**. Steps 1. Check the selected area for the value you reviewed or changed. 2. Choose the action that matches your next task: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review the available history for an open branch | **Last Modifications** | | Take the available table data outside the screen | **Export** | | Reload the current area | **Refresh** | | Open the available table settings | **Settings** | 3. Return to [Configuration home](doc:configuration-home) to choose another configuration area. 4. Open [Default layouts](doc:configuration-default-layouts) when the table layout needs separate maintenance. **Result:** The selected target or budget area remains available for review, history, export, refresh, settings, or the next configuration task. # Tasks and activities ## Tasks and activities at a glance A task is a piece of follow-up work with an owner, dates, a status, and an importance value. An activity is a Visit, Meeting, Call, or Mail record used to keep follow-up work visible. . Use the lists after the main work that creates the follow-up: use Tasks for work that needs an owner and a due date, and use Activities for contact or communication work that needs to remain visible. . | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review assigned or shared follow-up work | [Work with tasks](#work-with-tasks) | | Review a Visit, Email, Meeting, or Call | [Work with activities](#work-with-activities) | | Understand the list headers and row information | [Understand the lists](#understand-the-lists) | | Create a task | [Create a task](doc:create-task) | | Create an activity | [Create an activity](doc:create-activity) | | Understand activity statuses | [Activity status](doc:activity-status) | | Use the broader task workspace | [My Desk tasks](doc:my-desk-tasks) | | Use the broader activity workspace | [My Desk activities](doc:my-desk-activities) | Before opening a list, check the conditions in [Before you start](#before-you-start). ## Before you start **Prerequisites** | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | Access to the Tasks or Activities feature | The list and its actions are gated by the feature subscription. | | A list with its columns visible | Actions in a row menu require the list to have a usable layout. | | The correct branch and ownership context | Task and activity actions check branch membership and ownership before they are offered. | | A row in the appropriate state | **Complete** applies to a task that is not complete; **Un complete** applies to a completed task. | List filters and actions in a row menu appear only when the applicable list, layout, branch, and ownership conditions are met. Activity deletion also requires a non-Mail activity. . With those conditions in place, continue to [Find the task or activity list](#find-the-task-or-activity-list). ## Find the task or activity list Tasks and Activities are lists of follow-up records. Open the list that matches the work you need to review. . ### Open and filter a list Open the appropriate list to locate existing follow-up work. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are looking for a task or an activity. **Steps** 1. Open the Tasks list when you need task follow-up work. 2. Select one task-list option from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every task in the list | **All** | | Review tasks assigned to you | **My Tasks** | | Review completed task work | **View completed tasks** | 3. Open the Activities list when you need activity follow-up work. 4. Select one activity-list option from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every activity type | **All** | | Review visits | **Visits** | | Review email activities | **Email** | | Review meetings | **Meetings** | | Review calls | **Call** | | Include archived activities | **Show archived activities** | ![The Tasks list with its filters and task rows](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ![The Activities list after selecting All](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8a7219a7471178cf416e7ce903a0db40.png) **Result:** The selected list displays the follow-up records for the option you chose. Read the headers and row values next in [Understand the lists](#understand-the-lists). ## Understand the lists The Tasks list shows task work in rows. The Activities list groups activity work by type and status. The headers tell you which part of a follow-up record each value represents. . ### Tasks list The Tasks list currently shows these headers: | Header | What it identifies | |---|---| | Title | The task's purpose. | | Owner | The person responsible for the task. | | Start date | When the task starts. | | Due date | When the task is due. | | Status | The task's current status. | | Importance | The task's importance value. | The list also shows the buttons **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. . The completed-task view can contain rows with `Completed` status. . ### Activities list Activity status values are `Planned`, `Overdue`, `Done`, `Due`, and `Cancelled`. Use the status value in a row to understand whether the activity is upcoming, due, late, finished, or cancelled. . Activity types include All, Visits, Email, Meetings, and Call. . The list layout can determine which activity columns appear. Work from the headers visible in your list rather than expecting a fixed set of activity columns. . The list screens do not present a form for entering task or activity details. Use [Create a task](doc:create-task) or [Create an activity](doc:create-activity) when you need to enter a new record. . ![The Tasks list headers, rows, and list controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/472bc48b1c44ffcfbe09785961234c2d.png) ## Work with tasks For task work, choose a filter before opening an action in a task row. . ### Filter tasks and review completed work **Prerequisites** - Open the Tasks list. - Open a task list with its columns visible. **Steps** 1. Select one task filter. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review all task rows available to the list | **All** | | Review task rows assigned to you | **My Tasks** | | Review completed task work | **View completed tasks** | 2. Read Status and Importance in the row before choosing an action. ![The Tasks list after choosing My Tasks](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d501c3bd60c6c719c576f35b7262a120.png) **Result:** The Tasks list shows the task set selected by the filter, with Status and Importance available in the row. When you are ready to act, continue with [Use an action in a task row](#use-an-action-in-a-task-row). ### Use an action in a task row **Prerequisites** - Open the action menu in a task row. - Belong to the same branch as the task when the action requires it. - Be the task owner when the action requires ownership. **Steps** 1. Select one action in the task row menu. | If the task is… | Select | |---|---| | Not complete | **Complete** | | Complete | **Un complete** | | Owned by you and in your branch | **Delete** | | Ready for list export and the action is displayed | **Export** | **Result:** The selected task-list action is applied when its row and workspace conditions allow it. . For contact follow-up, continue with [Work with activities](#work-with-activities). ## Work with activities For activity work, filter by type before reviewing status or taking an action in a row. . ### Filter activities and include archived work **Prerequisites** - Open the Activities list. **Steps** 1. Select one activity type from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every activity type | **All** | | Review visits | **Visits** | | Review email activities | **Email** | | Review meetings | **Meetings** | | Review calls | **Call** | 2. Select **Show archived activities** when archived activity records belong in the list. 3. Read the activity's Status value after the list refreshes. **Result:** The Activities list shows the chosen activity type and includes archived records when **Show archived activities** is selected. . To remove an eligible activity, continue with [Delete an activity](#delete-an-activity). ### Delete an activity **Prerequisites** - Open the action menu in an activity row. - Belong to the same branch as the activity. - Own the activity. - Confirm that the activity is not a Mail activity. **Steps** 1. Select **Delete** for an activity in your branch that you own and that is not a Mail activity. **Result:** The activity deletion action starts when the row satisfies the branch, type, and ownership conditions. . If the action is unavailable, use [When list work goes wrong](#when-list-work-goes-wrong). ## When list work goes wrong Use the message text below to identify the condition that stopped an action. The task list can also fail silently when its action path does not provide a success or error message. . | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Only task owner can take that action` | The task action requires the task owner. | Open the task as its owner or use an action available to your role. | | `Task deleted successfully` | The task deletion completed. | Return to the list and locate the remaining task rows. | | `Error while deleting task` | The task deletion did not complete. | Check the task's ownership and branch conditions before trying again. | | `Action not allowed` | The activity action is not permitted. | Check the activity's branch, type, and ownership conditions. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The activity action received forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters and submit the action again. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The activity request completed. | Continue with the updated Activities list. | | `NO Data to Export` | The export action found no data to export. | Apply a list filter that returns rows, then select **Export** when it appears. | The following messages belong to the linked creation and mail procedures: | Owning page | Message | |---|---| | New activity | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | | New activity | `One topic and at least one note is required` | | New activity | `There is no topic to print` | | New activity | `Data saved Successfully` | | Mail activity | `Email Sent successfully` | ## What to do next When you need a new follow-up record, use [Create a task](doc:create-task) or [Create an activity](doc:create-activity). When you need to interpret an activity's lifecycle value, use [Activity status](doc:activity-status). . For the wider work area, continue to [My Desk tasks](doc:my-desk-tasks) or [My Desk activities](doc:my-desk-activities). . # Units ## What Units are for A Unit is a reusable measurement name that you maintain for selection on a sales item line. Use this page when you need to review, add, change, or remove the names available in that list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check which unit names are available | [Understand the Units list](#understand-the-units-list) | | Add, change, or remove a unit name | [Add, edit, and remove a unit](#add-edit-and-remove-a-unit) | | Check why an action is unavailable | [Handle access and list variations](#handle-access-and-list-variations) | | Resolve a save, delete, refresh, or export message | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Use a maintained unit on a sales item line | [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) | ## Before you start Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | Access to the Units settings | **New**, row editing, row deletion, importing, and exporting can each be controlled separately. | | The name you want to maintain | The form stores the name in **Name**. A blank or whitespace-only name is rejected. | The list loads all available units when you open it. Keep the name you want to enter in front of you before you start the maintenance procedure. ## Find the Units list Units is listed under the configuration area for sales settings. Prerequisites - You have access to the configuration area. Steps 1. Select **Configuration**. 2. Select **Sales**. 3. Select **Units**. 4. Confirm that the list contains the **Name** column. ![Check the Units list, its navigation context, and its three page controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d87de5b4676e13562f1957d8f9af2c07.png) **Result:** The Units list is open, with **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** available on the page. ## Understand the Units list The Units list is a single-column list of names. Each visible row also offers an edit action when your access allows it. | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | **Name** | Read and filter the unit name shown in each row. | | Edit action | Open a unit for editing when your access allows it. | | **Refresh** | Refresh the list and update its refresh time. | | **Table Layout** | Open the table-layout menu. | | **Settings** | Open the available list settings. | The list has no visible column headings, paging, inline adding, inline editing, inline deleting, column chooser, or visible search panel. Use the visible name list and the available settings instead. When you point to **Refresh**, the page can show `Updated around a minute ago` after one minute, or `Updated [minutes] minutes ago` after more than one minute. When you are ready to change a name, continue to the maintenance procedure below. ## Add, edit, and remove a unit Use the procedure that matches the maintenance action you need. A new unit starts with an empty **Name** field. An existing unit opens with its current name. ### Add a unit Prerequisites - You are on the Units list. - You have access to **New**. - You have the name to enter in **Name**. Steps 1. Select **New**. 2. Enter the name in **Name**. 3. Select **OK**. ![Check the unit form before selecting OK.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/23d4d0c7a20cafc8748189662d1483db.png) **Result:** The Units list shows the new name and the message `Data saved Successfully`. ### Edit a unit Prerequisites - You are on the Units list. - You have access to the visible edit action. - You have the replacement name for **Name**. Steps 1. Select the visible edit action for the unit. 2. Replace the current value in **Name**. 3. Select **OK**. **Result:** The Units list shows the edited name and the message `Data saved Successfully`. ### Remove a unit Prerequisites - You are on the Units list. - You have permission to delete units. Steps 1. Open the row’s menu. 2. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The row is removed and the list shows `Data Deleted Successfully`. ### Cancel an open unit form Prerequisites - The unit form is open. Steps 1. Select **Cancel**. **Result:** The unit form closes without saving the change. ## Handle access and list variations The page can show different actions according to your access. Use the action you need only when it is present. | If you can see… | Use it to… | |---|---| | **New** | Add a unit. | | The visible edit action | Change a unit. | | **Export** | Open the export choices. | | **Filter Row** | Show or hide the grid filter row. | If **Filter Row** is available, select it to show the grid filter row. Use the row's filtering controls on the **Name** column. **Result:** You use only the actions available to your access, and the list displays the filter row when you select **Filter Row**. If a maintenance action produces a message, use the message table below to choose your next action. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message you see to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `please enter a proper unit name` | Enter a non-blank value in **Name**, then select **OK** again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Delete** to remove the row, or **Cancel** to keep it. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Continue with the refreshed list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Confirm that the row no longer appears in the list. | | `Updated around a minute ago` | The refresh control has been unused for about one minute. | | `Updated [minutes] minutes ago` | The refresh control has been unused for the displayed number of minutes. | | `Exporting List:` | Choose the export format shown in the export modal. | | `Export to Excel` | Continue with the Excel export action. | | `Export to PDF` | Continue with the PDF export action. | ## Use the units in sales items Sales item lines provide a **Unit** field for the measurement name associated with the item. After you maintain the available names here, continue to [Sales job items](sales-job-items.md) when you need to select one on a sales item line. This reference list does not move a sales job to another stage. It keeps the available unit names ready for the sales-item workflow. # Users ## Users overview Users is the administration area for finding a company user and reviewing or updating that user's administration details. The Users list helps you identify the record; the company-user screen provides the available user information, role, branch, approval, history, and attachment areas. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a saved company user | [Find and open a user](#find-and-open-a-user) | | Review the user screen | [Understand the user screen](#understand-the-user-screen) | | Review or update user information | [Review or update user information](#review-or-update-user-information) | | Create a user | [Create a user](doc:create-user) | | Administer principal users | [Principal users](doc:principal-users) | | Work with the shared file library | [Libraries](doc:libraries-files) | ## Before you start The list can show actions for creating a company user or a principal user only when the relevant access and subscription conditions allow them. Prerequisites - You are on the Users list. - You have the access required for the action you want to use. The Users list displays **Full name**, Display name, **Active**, Account owner, and Principal user. ## Find and open a user Use the Users list to recognise a record from its visible columns, then open the relevant user surface. The list also provides **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings** controls. Prerequisites - You are on the Users list. - You know whether you are looking for an existing company user or a creation route. Steps 1. Select the row whose **Full name** or **Display name** identifies the company user you need. 2. Check the **Active**, Account owner, and Principal user values on that row. 3. Select one of the available actions: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Refresh the list | **Refresh** | | Change list layout settings | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | | Start company-user creation | **New company user** | | Start principal-user creation | **New principal user** | 4. Select the existing user record to open its administration screen. **Result:** The Users list remains open, or the selected user screen opens. ![Identify a user from the five visible list columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d6d95e2f017e40236525f61be7a84d31.png) ## Understand the user screen The company-user screen is the place to review the user's information and available administration areas. The company-user screen includes user-information fields, role and branch areas, approval areas, history, two-factor content, and attachment surfaces. The rendered user-information controls are **Login Email**, **Password**, **Position**, **Title**, and **Mobile**. Rendered attachment controls include **Category**, **Library name**, **File Name**, **Links**, and **Comment**. The available actions include **Save**, **Save and Close**, **Last Modifications**, Attach File, **Try Again**, and **Export**. ### Review the administration areas The company-user surface includes **User Information**, **User Roles**, Branches / Inventory, and **Approval Limit**. The user-information area contains the fields listed above. **Prerequisites** - You have opened a company-user record. **Steps** 1. Select **User Information** to review the user-information fields. 2. Select **User Roles** to review the role area. 3. Select Branches / Inventory to review accessible branches. 4. Select **Approval Limit** to review the approval area. **Result:** You can reach the user-information, role, branch, and approval areas. ![Open the saved-user route and review the user-information area or the 404 result](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/67fa06439588694ce8e64a455d21ba96.png) ## Review or update user information Review the rendered user-information controls before using a save action. The controls are grouped as follows: | Rule | Fields | |---|---| | Required | **Password**, **Mobile** | | Optional | **Position**, **Title** | Prerequisites - You are on the Users list. - You have opened a saved company-user record. Steps 1. Review **Password** and **Mobile**. 2. Review the optional fields that apply to the record, including **Position** and **Title**. 3. Select **Save** to save the record. 4. Select **Save and Close** when you want to save and leave the screen. **Result:** The user screen shows the available save actions. ## Handle user-screen variations What appears in Users can vary by your access, subscription allowance, record mode, editing permission, and the company's list setup. Prerequisites - You are on the Users list or have opened a company-user record. Steps 1. Review the distinction that applies to the current user record: | What you are doing | What changes the available surface | |---|---| | Starting a new user | Your access and subscription allowance control the two new-user actions. | | Working with attachments | The **Attach File** action is available on an editable screen. | | Selecting a branch | Branch selection can behave differently for a new record and an existing record. | | Opening the user screen | Select the user record from the Users list. | **Result:** You know which controls and panels apply to the current user record. ## When user administration goes wrong Use the exact text on screen to identify the problem before choosing the next action. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Treat the request as completed. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Open [Libraries](doc:libraries-files) to address this message. | | `404 Page Not Found` | Select **Go Back to Home Page** to return. | | `Go Back to Home Page` | Select the available return control. | The message `Registration` labels the history entry, and `Last Modifications` labels the history area. ![Review the result when navigation does not reach the Users list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) ![Review the diagnostic result when list actions are not visible](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/032026de71d6c47d8839969b5d3d67b1.png) ![Review the 404 page when the saved-user route cannot be reached](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/67fa06439588694ce8e64a455d21ba96.png) ## After reviewing a user Keep the next action aligned with the page that owns the work: | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Create a company user | [Create a user](doc:create-user) | | Administer principal users | [Principal users](doc:principal-users) | | Work with the shared file library | [Libraries](doc:libraries-files) | | Save or close the current user screen | **Save** or **Save and Close** | | Review history | **Last Modifications** | | Export available data | **Export**, when it is available on screen | # Warehouse fulfillment flow ## Warehouse fulfillment flow Warehouse list surfaces help you review goods received, inspection work, and stock held in a warehouse. The purchase flow places a Goods Receipt Note before Warehouse and Delivery Note work; this page connects the list views without treating list membership as a confirmed lifecycle change. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review received goods | [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes) | | Review inspection work | [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes) | | Review stock by shipment | [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment) | | Find the list routes and headings | [Find the receiving, inspection, or stock list](#find-the-receiving-inspection-or-stock-list) | | Read the columns and toolbar | [Read the list columns](#read-the-list-columns) | | Change the list view | [Adjust the list view](#adjust-the-list-view) | ## Before you start The list you see depends on subscription access, the selected list layout, the available warehouse responsibility entries, and the settings enabled for your account. Prerequisites - Know which list you need: receiving, inspection, or stock. - Have access to the warehouse area. - Use a list with a selected layout. A list layout is the saved arrangement that supplies the grid headers. - If the warehouse tab menu is available, its entries depend on warehouse responsibility. The list can show a subscription-upgrade surface instead of the grid when the feature is not included. The tab menu can also be hidden when the page opens without breadcrumbs. Layout, row-filter, group-filter, import, and export choices can depend on the current setup. ## Find the receiving, inspection, or stock list Use the route that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Review goods receipt rows | `/warehouse/list/received/view` | | Review inspection rows | `/warehouse/list/inspection/view` | | Review warehouse stock | `/warehouse/list/stock/view` | | Identify the receiving list | **Receiving** and **Goods Receipt Notes** | | Identify the stock list | **Stock By Shipment** | | Identify the related product view | **Stock By Products** | The receiving list opens under **Inventory** and displays the receiving list heading. The stock list shows **Stock By Shipment** and **Stock By Products**. The inspection route is `/warehouse/list/inspection/view`. The warehouse list tree also includes **Inspection**, **Unallocated products**, **Assembly products**, **On hold products**, and **Packages**. **Stock By Products** and **Assembly products** are feature-gated; they appear only where the relevant subscription condition is met. ### Open a warehouse list Prerequisites - Know whether you need the receiving, inspection, or stock route. - Have access to the warehouse area. Steps 1. Open the route that matches your work from the table above. 2. Check the page heading and list tabs. **Result:** The selected warehouse list is open at its route, ready for column review. ![Check the receiving list heading and column headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8a3402b0994eef5251e4739c5485da90.png) ## Read the list columns The receiving and stock lists show the headers for the current list layout. Use the headers visible on your screen rather than assuming that every list uses the same columns. | List | Columns | |---|---| | Receiving | **GRN**, **Warehouse**, **Shipment no.**, **Supplier**, **Received on**, **Received by**, **P. O. no.** | | Stock | **Product**, **Description**, **Qty**, **Qty (available)**, **Unit**, **Area**, **Inspection no.**, **GRN**, **Location**, **Stage** | The receiving list contains rows under its seven headers. The stock list contains rows under its ten headers. The receiving list also provides the icon controls **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. The columns come from the selected list layout. ## Adjust the list view Use the toolbar to inspect the available layout and settings choices. The choices shown below are the ones available on the receiving and stock lists. ### Choose a list layout Prerequisites - Have a receiving or stock list open. - The list must show **Table Layout**. Steps 1. Select **Table Layout**. 2. Select one option from the table. | If you need to… | |---| | Use the standard arrangement — __Standard Layout__ | | Create a named arrangement — **Save New Layout** | | Change the current arrangement — **Update Current** | | Remove the current arrangement — **Delete Current** | | Choose visible columns — **Columns Chooser** | | Widen columns automatically — **Expand column width** | **Result:** The receiving or stock list displays the layout option you selected. ![Check the receiving layout choices.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9b02c97c703fdb71e420dea87c35aa25.png) ### Choose a list setting Prerequisites - Have a receiving or stock list open. - The list must show **Settings**. Steps 1. Select **Settings**. 2. Select one setting from the table. | If you need to… | |---| | Prepare an export — **Export** | | Show row-filter controls — **Filter Row** | | Show the grouping area — **Group Panel** | **Result:** The receiving or stock list displays the setting you selected. ![Check the stock settings choices.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/389cb575201f155b87d8e18d0287ada2.png) ## When export or layout choices are unavailable Use the exact message text to identify the result of a list action. | Message | Use it when… | |---|---| | `Data Importing completed` | The import finishes successfully. | | `NO Data to Export` | An export is requested when there is no data to export. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | A deletion finishes successfully. | The stock export surface displays **Cancel** and **Export**. Steps 1. Choose one action. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Leave without exporting | **Cancel** | | Start the export | **Export** | **Result:** You leave the export surface or start the export according to the action you chose. ![Check the stock export surface before choosing an action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5e32f85499c45217e7f68a1ba98287b1.png) ## Out of scope For record-level work, open the dedicated record pages for goods receipt notes, incoming inspection notes, or stock by shipment. ## Know what to do next The list views are review points. Use the dedicated record pages when you need record-level work: [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes), [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes), and [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment). These list views do not confirm that receiving becomes inspection and then stock; use the dedicated record pages for the work associated with each list. **Result:** You know which dedicated page to open next without treating a list row as proof of a receiving-to-inspection-to-stock lifecycle. # Warehouse product types ## Warehouse product types Warehouse product types are the names maintained in the purchasing reference list for classifying warehouse products. Use this page when you need to review the list or maintain its entries. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the list and review its rows | [Find the Warehouse product types list](#find-the-warehouse-product-types-list) | | Understand the visible field and list controls | [Understand the list and entry fields](#understand-the-list-and-entry-fields) | | Add, edit, delete, or export an entry | [Maintain the list](#maintain-the-list) | | Choose a related warehouse reference list | [Continue with related configuration](#continue-with-related-configuration) | | Maintain inspection bases | [Inspection bases](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base) | | Maintain inspection checklists | [Inspection checklists](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Maintain inspection documents | [Inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents) | | Maintain transfer reasons | [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | Maintain service types | [Service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | | Maintain stock withdrawal and valuation | [Stock withdrawal and valuation](doc:configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal) | The page belongs to the configuration area and uses the shared reference-list surface used by related warehouse configuration lists. ## Before you start Before you maintain the list, have access to the configuration page and the product-type name you want to enter. The actions available to you depend on the access granted to your account and on the list setup. | Check before you begin | Why it matters | |---|---| | Access to the configuration page | You need access to open and maintain the list. | | The product-type name | Have the name you want to add or change. | | The available list actions | **New**, row editing, **Delete**, and **Export** can be controlled separately. | | The visible list columns | The list uses the columns configured for this reference list. | ## Find the Warehouse product types list Open the list to review the product-type entries used for warehouse purchasing work. Prerequisites - Have access to the configuration area. Steps 1. Open the Warehouse product types list. 2. Review the **Type** column. 3. Review the rows in the list. ![Check the route, the **Type** column, and the list controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d64d58a0e948c086f2dbe153d6da5ff0.png) **Result:** The list remains open and shows the **Type** column with 45 rows. The page has no visible loading spinner. ## Understand the list and entry fields The list shows the product-type name in **Type**. The entry form uses that same field for the name you maintain, while other values support the list without appearing as entry fields. | Area | What you use it for | What appears | |---|---|---| | List | Review existing entries | **Type** | | Entry form | Enter or change a product-type name | **Type**, a text box, required | | List actions | Start or manage list work | **New**, **Refresh**, Settings | | Hidden values | Support ordering, identification, and company association | Display order, ID, Company ID | The list uses the configured column set. The current page shows **Type** as its list column, and the entry configuration marks **Type** as required. The configuration does not provide a target-specific select, date, number, currency, or multi-value field for this list. ## Maintain the list Use these procedures to maintain an entry or prepare the list for export. ### Add an entry Add a new warehouse product type to the reference list. Prerequisites - The **New** action is available. - You have the name to enter in **Type**. Steps 1. Select **New**. ![Look at the **Type** field in the new-entry window.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4f276f6b6314b572519ea256928f21f6.png) 2. Enter the product-type name in **Type**. 3. Select **Save**. If **Type** is empty, the form displays `Type is required` and does not commit the entry. **Result:** The new entry is added to the list and the list refreshes. When the save succeeds, the page displays `Data saved Successfully`. ### Edit an entry Correct an existing product-type name in the reference list. Prerequisites - The row edit action is available. - The entry you need to change is visible in the **Type** column. Steps 1. Select the row edit action for the entry. 2. Replace the value in **Type**. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** The edited entry remains in the list with its updated **Type** value. When the update succeeds, the page displays `Data updated Successfully`. ### Delete an entry Remove an entry that no longer belongs in the reference list. Prerequisites - The delete action is available. - More than one item remains in the list. Steps 1. Open the row's delete action. 2. Select **Delete** in the delete prompt. **Result:** The entry is removed and the page displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. ### Export the list Export the reference list without changing its entries. Prerequisites - **Export** is available. Steps 1. Select **Export**. **Result:** The export window opens for the list. ## Handle action and setup variations The actions and fields available on this page depend on your list setup and account access. | If you see… | Use this path | |---|---| | **New** | Start the add procedure in [Maintain the list](#maintain-the-list). | | A row edit action | Start the edit procedure for that row. | | **Delete** | Check the number of remaining rows before deleting. | | **Export** | Use the export procedure without changing a row. | | A different set of list columns | Work from the headers shown in your list. | The delete rule is based on the number of items in the list. The page does not delete the final remaining item; it displays `Must have at least one item` instead. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message text on screen to choose the corrective action. | Message | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Type is required` | The form has no value in **Type**. | Enter a product-type name in **Type**, then select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The list filter contains characters the page does not accept. | Remove the unsupported characters from the filter and try again. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The selected entry is related to saved data. | Keep the entry and review the saved data that uses it. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete request did not complete. | Review the list and try the delete action again when the entry is available. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains only one item. | Keep the remaining item in the list. | ## Continue with related configuration After maintenance, the list remains the place to review the current **Type** entries. Saving an entry refreshes the list, editing replaces the selected row, and deleting removes the selected row when the list has more than one item. Use the related warehouse configuration pages when the work concerns another reference list: | If you need to maintain… | Continue with | |---|---| | Inspection bases | [Inspection bases](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base) | | Inspection checklists | [Inspection checklists](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Inspection documents | [Inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents) | | Transfer reasons | [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | Service types | [Service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | | Stock withdrawal and valuation | [Stock withdrawal and valuation](doc:configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal) | # What is PAMS This page explains how PAMS connects B2B sales work from first inquiry through delivery and how to reach the dashboard view available to your role. ## What PAMS is PAMS is an agent-centric customer relationship management (CRM) system for sales representatives and agencies that need to manage more than contacts or isolated deals. It covers the sales process from first inquiry to final delivery, while keeping follow-ups, documents, reports, and operations together. Use PAMS when your work includes several connected parties and hand-offs. The product also acts as a partner relationship management (PRM) system for represented companies and manufacturers, with visibility into offers, orders, targets, and commissions. Its supplier relationship management (SRM) features support BOMs, MRQs, RFQs, and procurement coordination, while selected enterprise resource planning (ERP) features cover warehousing, invoicing, and internal workflow execution. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand who uses PAMS | [Who uses PAMS](doc:who-uses-pams) | | Review the capabilities described for PAMS | [What can you do with PAMS](doc:what-can-you-do-with-pams) | | Open the Home dashboard | [Open the Home screen](#open-the-home-screen) | | Understand the visible dashboard surface | [Read the Home dashboard](#read-the-home-dashboard) | | Choose a role-based dashboard view | [Choose the dashboard view available to your role](#choose-the-dashboard-view-available-to-your-role) | | Personalize dashboard tabs and widgets | [Personalize the Home dashboard](#personalize-the-home-dashboard) | | Learn the wider interface | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) | | Learn navigation basics | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) | ## Before you open PAMS **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - Your role has a dashboard configuration, or you are prepared to work with the dashboard variation that your role provides. - You know that dashboard tabs, widgets, role choices, and report content depend on your saved setup. The **Home** screen is available from the application root, which redirects to **Home**, and the Home content is shown for a signed-in reader. Dashboard content appears when the custom dashboard is selected and dashboard tabs are available. ## Open the Home screen Home is the starting surface for the dashboard views available to your role. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. Open **Home**. 2. Confirm that **Home** remains on screen after it loads. ![The Home dashboard with its business views and active controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) **Result:** The **Home** dashboard is on screen. ## Read the Home dashboard The Home dashboard brings together business views such as **Sales Pipeline**, **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Budget offers**, **Firm offers**, **Orders**, **Booking This Year**, **Accounts in Sales Pipeline**, **Backlog**, and running-offer views. The visible figures describe the current dashboard contents; use the labels and headings on your screen rather than treating the displayed record values as fixed product values. When dashboard tabs are available, the tab choices can include a configured tab title, **Principals Report**, and **Eagle View**. The configured title comes from the title saved for that tab. The **Home** screen has no record-entry fields. The **Home** screen includes three labelled input controls. They do not carry required markers. | Control | What it changes | |---|---| | **Sort by Booking** | The visible ordering for that dashboard view | | **Sort by Target** | The visible ordering for that dashboard view | | **Sort by Achievement** | The visible ordering for that dashboard view | ![The three labelled sorting controls on the Home dashboard](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/45aa5ceb77c1af925be210e13537079d.png) ## Choose the dashboard view available to your role A role dashboard is the dashboard configuration prepared for a role. Choosing one changes which dashboard setup Home loads. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - Your role has one or more configured dashboard choices. **Steps** 1. Open the dashboard choices menu on Home. 2. Select the configured dashboard name shown beside its radio option. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Use a dashboard prepared for your role | The configured dashboard name shown beside its radio option | | Work with the custom dashboard surface | The configured dashboard whose Home view opens the custom dashboard | | Review a report tab when it is available | **Principals Report** | | Review the Eagle View when it is available | **Eagle View** | 3. Confirm that the selected dashboard view appears on **Home**. After the dashboard switch, the application can display `Your request was completed successfully` when the switch succeeds or `An error occurred while processing your request` when it fails. **Result:** **Home** shows the dashboard view selected for your role. ## Personalize the Home dashboard Dashboard personalization changes the tabs and widgets shown in the custom dashboard. The controls below are available while Home is in edit mode. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - Home is in edit mode. - The custom dashboard has tabs available to edit. **Steps** 1. Select **Widget** to add a widget to the dashboard. 2. Select **Restore the Standard Tabs** to open the restore menu. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Close the restore menu without restoring tabs | **Cancel** | | Replace the current tabs with standard tabs | **Restore** | 3. Select one option from the restore menu. 4. Read the confirmation message `Are you sure you want to replace your tabs with standard tabs?`. 5. Select **Save** to save the dashboard changes. **Result:** The Home dashboard remains available with the tab and widget arrangement shown after the operation. ## When Home does not look as expected Home can show different content when the role or saved dashboard setup differs. The custom dashboard appears when the custom dashboard view is selected and dashboard tabs are available. When no dashboard is available, Home shows the no-dashboard messages; when you are not signed in, it shows the login screen. | What you see or hear | What to do | |---|---| | `Your role has no dashboard` | Contact your administrator to define a dashboard for your role. | | `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard` | Contact your administrator to define a dashboard for your role. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the current dashboard choice and try the dashboard switch again. | | No success message after saving dashboard changes | Check whether the dashboard arrangement changed on screen before leaving Home. | After selecting **Save**, check whether the dashboard arrangement changes on screen. `No error message is emitted in the empty error callback.` The dashboard contents and report columns follow your saved role and report setup. ## Continue from Home After you understand the Home surface, use the page that matches your next goal: | Next goal | Continue with | |---|---| | Understand the people and roles around PAMS | [Who uses PAMS](doc:who-uses-pams) | | Review what PAMS can support | [What can you do with PAMS](doc:what-can-you-do-with-pams) | | Recognize the wider application interface | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) | | Move through the application | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) | | Review dashboard details | [Dashboard](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Personalize your workspace | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) | | Check deployment requirements | [System requirements](doc:system-requirements) | | Get help with a problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | **Result:** You have a route from the Home overview to the page for your next task. # Your first day ## Your first day in PAMS Your first day in PAMS starts with signing in, then orienting yourself on the profile surface before you begin your regular work. Access to PAMS comes first; the profile surface lets you recognise your account information, approval readouts, branch, and trusted-device list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Sign in to PAMS | [Sign in](#sign-in) | | Complete an identity or device check | [Complete an additional sign-in check](#complete-an-additional-sign-in-check) | | Recognise the profile fields and device list | [Orient yourself on the profile surface](#orient-yourself-on-the-profile-surface) | | Solve a sign-in or profile problem | [When sign-in or profile access goes wrong](#when-sign-in-or-profile-access-goes-wrong) | | Learn the main interface | [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) | | Move between areas of PAMS | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) | | Adjust your working area | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - You have access to PAMS. - You are signed in before opening the authenticated profile surface. - A profile record is loaded before its fields appear. - Leave the profile without unsaved changes when you are finished. The profile route checks for changes before allowing you to leave. When these conditions are in place, reach the sign-in or profile surface. ## Reach the sign-in and profile surfaces Sign-in is the public entry surface. The profile surface is an authenticated view of your own profile information. Steps 1. Open the sign-in page. 2. After signing in, open your profile surface. **Result:** You are either at the sign-in surface or at the authenticated profile surface. ## Sign in The standard sign-in state is the form you use when PAMS does not require an identity or device check. Prerequisites - You are at the sign-in page. - You have your PAMS sign-in details. Steps 1. In **Email**, enter your sign-in email. 2. In **Password**, enter your password. 3. Select **Remember Me** if you want PAMS to retain the sign-in choice. 4. Select **Login**. 5. If a required field is empty, complete it when the form displays `User Name is Required` or `Password Required`. **Result:** PAMS accepts the sign-in details and displays `Logged in successfully`, or opens [Complete an additional sign-in check](#complete-an-additional-sign-in-check) when an additional check is required. ## Complete an additional sign-in check An additional sign-in check confirms your identity or handles a device that PAMS does not recognise. Steps 1. Complete the action in the row that matches the check on screen. | Check on screen | Action | |---|---| | **Enter code** | Enter the code sent to you. | | **Verify** | Select **Verify**. | | **Resend agian** or **Resend agian?** | Select **Resend agian** or **Resend agian?** when it is available. | | **Trust this device for further login** | Select **Not now** to continue without trusting the device. | | **Trust this device for further login** | Select **Go** to continue after choosing to trust the device. | The identity-check screen can display `For your security, Pams requires 2-factor authentication.` It displays `We’ve sent a 6-digit verification code to your email address.` It also says, `If you don’t see it in your inbox, please check your Spam or Junk folder.` It displays `Verification code not correct or expired` when the code is rejected. If the code is empty, it displays `code is required`. The trusted-device screen displays `Your are trying to log-in to pams from a nonrecognized device.` **Result:** The displayed identity or device check is complete, and PAMS continues the sign-in flow. ## Orient yourself on the profile surface Use the profile surface to recognise the personal and access information attached to your PAMS account. The main profile fields are arranged as follows: | Area | Fields or readouts | |---|---| | Account identity | **User Name**, **Position**, **Title**, **First Name**, **Middle Name**, **Last Name**, **Display Name**, **Login Email**, **Cloud Account**, and **Mobile** | | Roles and approvals | **User Roles** and **Approval Limit** readouts | | Branch | **Branch belong to (user can be member in one branch)** and the selected branch | | Trusted devices | **Device name**, **Trusted machine**, and **First login at** | On the profile surface, **User Name**, **Display Name**, **Login Email**, and **Mobile** carry required markers. **Position**, **Title**, **First Name**, **Middle Name**, **Last Name**, and **Cloud Account** do not carry required markers in the displayed profile. The approval readouts cover four areas: Sales, LGs, Purchasing, and Invoicing. The profile explains that the Sales limit covers validating offers and accepting orders, the LGs limit covers issuing bank guarantees, the Purchasing limit covers purchasing orders, and the Invoicing limit covers issuing invoices. The profile surface shows **Save** and **Save and Close**. These controls are enabled only when profile data has changed. Use the profile surface for orientation without changing profile data during your first-day tour. ![The profile identity fields, approval readouts, and trusted-device columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fa83586d0abbc502adeb8bd9f9dc2362.png) ## When sign-in or profile access goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `User Name is required` | **User Name** is empty. | Enter a user name. | | `No spaces are allowed` | **User Name** contains a space. | Remove the spaces from **User Name**. | | `Display name is required` | **Display Name** is empty. | Enter a display name. | | `Email is required` | **Login Email** is empty. | Enter a login email. | | `Email is invalid` | **Login Email** is not in an accepted email format. | Correct **Login Email**. | | `Mobile is required` | **Mobile** is empty. | Enter a mobile number. | | `Error: This Email or User Name Already Exists` | The email or user name conflicts with an existing account. | Use a different value or contact the person who manages your account. | | `Error: Server Error` | PAMS could not complete the profile request. | Try the request again later or [get help](doc:getting-help). | | `Incorrect username or password` | The sign-in details were rejected. | Check **Email** and **Password**, then select Login again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | A profile-photo deletion needs confirmation. | Select **Cancel** to keep the photo or **Delete** to remove it. | | `Data saved Successfully` | A profile save completed. | Continue from the profile surface. | | `Data saved Successfully .. This User Password has been Changed .. Please check E-Mail` | A password-change save completed. | Check the email associated with the account. | | The sign-in page opens an authenticated area | The session is already signed in. | Continue with [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface). | ![The authenticated area reached when an already signed-in session opens the sign-in page](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Continue after your first-day orientation Once you recognise the sign-in and profile surfaces, continue with the part of PAMS you need for your work. - Open [Understanding the interface](doc:understanding-the-interface) to recognise the main areas of PAMS. - Open [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) to move between areas. - Open [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) to continue workspace orientation. - Open [Getting help](doc:getting-help) or [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) when an access or profile problem needs further assistance. # Accounts ## Accounts at a glance An account is a record for the identity, classification, registrations, contacts, and related details you maintain together. Use **Accounts** to find an account category, open an account record, and understand which related details belong to that record. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find an account or choose an account category | [Find an account](#find-an-account) | | Understand the fields and tabs on a record | [Understand the account record](#understand-the-account-record) | | Maintain registrations, contacts, projects, or contract details | [Maintain related account details](#maintain-related-account-details) | | Create or edit an account | [Create an account](doc:create-account) | | Work with registrations as reference data | [Registration data](doc:vl-registrations) | | Work with contacts | [Contacts](doc:contacts-overview) | | Work with projects | [Projects](doc:projects) | | Work with attached files | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Maintain account managers | [Account managers](doc:configuration-account-managers-view) | ## Before you start The Accounts surface changes with your subscription, saved-record state, account classification, permissions, company configuration, and enabled features. **Prerequisites** - Have access to the Accounts list and the account record you need to review. - If you are reviewing contract details, open an existing principal account. - Have permission to view contract data when you need the **Contract Key Data** tab. - Use a saved account when you need contract details or related record surfaces. - Expect **Display name** and **Full Name** to be required only where your company configures those fields as mandatory. The list is replaced by the subscription-upgrade surface when the Accounts feature is not included. The grid appears only when a list layout is selected. On a principal account, the registration form uses **Client**; on a non-principal account, it uses **Principal**. The **Account Manager** field appears for client accounts. Contract fields require an existing account, the **Contract Key Data** tab, principal status, permission to view contract data, and the contract feature. ## Find an account The Accounts list is the starting point for choosing an account category and opening a record. The list currently draws **Display name**, **Full name**, **Type**, **Market segment**, and **Active** from the selected list layout. **Prerequisites** - Have access to the Accounts list. - Know whether you need all accounts, clients, principals, sub-suppliers, providers, or account managers. **Steps** 1. Open the Accounts list. ![Read the account-category tabs and the five list columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c2c32ba6568d43dedef42e9927f7f350.png) 2. Select the list that matches the work you need to do. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review every account | **All** | | Review client accounts | **Clients** | | Review principal accounts | **Principals** | | Review sub-supplier accounts | **Sub-suppliers** | | Review provider accounts | **Providers** | | Review account managers | **Account Managers** | Each choice opens its corresponding account list. 3. Read the visible headers **Display name**, **Full name**, **Type**, **Market segment**, and **Active** to identify the row you need. The headers come from your selected list layout, so use the headers visible in your list when the layout changes. The list displays a count. 4. Select an account row to open its record. 5. Use **Refresh** or **Settings** when you need the corresponding list control. The **Account Managers** view instead displays the **Account manager** column and exposes **Settings**. ![Choose an account category and read the list headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8fc24688f054358adc5deb4113ec8fe8.png) **Result:** The selected account category is open, and the account record is available for review when you select a row. ## Understand the account record The record groups the account's identity, classification, registrations, contact persons, projects, contract data, comments, and modification history. The main account fields are **Display name**, **Full Name**, **Market Segment**, **Account Type**, **VAT ID Number**, and **Account Manager**. **Account Manager** appears for a client account. The account classification controls are **Client**, **Principals**, **Sup-supplier**, and **Other Account**. | Record area | Fields or tabs | Use it to… | | --- | --- | --- | | Main account details | **Display name**, **Full Name**, **Market Segment**, **Account Type**, **VAT ID Number**, **Account Manager** | Identify and classify the account | | Contract data | **Contract Key Data**; **Expiry Date**, **Cancellation Period** | Review contract dates and cancellation information for an eligible principal account | | Registrations | **Registrations**; **Client**, **Principal**, **Status**, **Registration Number**, **Registration date** | Add or review a registration | | Contact persons | **Contact Persons**; **Name**, **Position**, **Department** | Add or review people associated with the account | | Related work | **Own projects**, **Comments**, **Last Modifications** | Open related projects, comments, or modification history | The **Client** registration field appears for principals, while **Principal** appears for non-principals. **Registration date** cannot be later than today. A new account form includes **Display name**, **Full Name**, **Market Segment**, **Account Type**, **VAT ID Number**, **Account Manager**, **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code**. Required markers appear on **Display name**, **Full Name**, and **Destination Title**. The form also displays **Client**, **Principals**, **Active**, **Sup-supplier**, **Other Account**, **Save**, and **Save and Close**. The form also includes **Main Address**, **Shipping Address**, **Billing Address**, and **Contact Information**. **Tickets** is also displayed. ![Identify the account type and main account fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2d9af441af459c737b4530c59edfbee9.png) ![Check the Full Name field and its required marker](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2d9af441af459c737b4530c59edfbee9.png) ![Identify the account record entry surface](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/bc1bcb2baf22fc0df1c7b29985039c8e.png) When you open a new account, **Display name** is visible. Use the visible field labels and the record area to orient yourself before entering data. ## Maintain related account details Related account details are the registrations, contact persons, contract information, comments, projects, and history that support the main account record. Use these surfaces after the account is saved and choose the tab that matches the detail you need. **Prerequisites** - Open the account record. - Use an existing account for contract details. - Use a principal account for **Client** registration details. - Use a non-principal account for **Principal** registration details. **Steps** 1. Select the related account surface you need. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review or add comments | **Comments** | | Review or add people | **Contact Persons** | | Add or edit a registration | **Registrations** | | Review the account's projects | **Own projects** | | Review eligible contract information | **Contract Key Data** | | Review account changes | **Last Modifications** | 2. In **Registrations**, enter the required relationship and status fields. Use **Client** for a principal account and **Principal** for a non-principal account. **Status** is required when you add a registration. **Registration Number** is optional, and **Registration date** is optional but cannot be later than today. 3. Select **Ok** to add or edit the registration. 4. In **Contact Persons**, enter **Name**, **Position**, and **Department** when you add or edit a person. 5. Select **Name** to add or edit the contact person. 6. In **Contract Key Data**, review **Expiry Date** and **Cancellation Period** when the account meets the contract conditions. **Expiry Date** cannot be earlier than today. **Cancellation Period** must be at least `1`. **Result:** The selected account-related surface is open, and its available registration, contact-person, or contract fields are on screen. ## Save an account and handle validation Saving commits the account details after the mandatory-field and validation checks pass. Use **Save** to remain in the record flow, or **Save and Close** to save and leave it. **Prerequisites** - Complete the account fields that your company marks as mandatory. - Use values that satisfy the visible validation rules. - Confirm that the account classification matches the related registration details. **Steps** 1. Select **Save** after completing the account fields. If a required field or another validation check fails, the account is not saved. If the address has a destination, enter a destination title. 2. If the save reports a validation message, correct the named field and select **Save** again. | Message | What to correct | | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the required field. | | `Display Name field is mandatory` | Complete **Display name**. | | `Full Name field is mandatory` | Complete **Full Name**. | | `Destination Title field is mandatory` | Complete the destination title. | | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | Correct each listed validation issue. | | `Display Name contains invalid characters. Only letters, numbers, "-", "_", and "." are allowed` | Correct **Display name**. | | `Full Name contains invalid characters. Only letters, numbers, "-", "_", and "." are allowed` | Correct **Full Name**. | 3. If the account name already exists, review the duplicate-name message before choosing a different name. The message is `An account with this name already exists`. 4. If saving returns a general error, review the message and correct the account data before selecting **Save** again. | Message | Reader-facing response | | --- | --- | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The save completed successfully. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the account data and try **Save** again. | | `Error: This Client Name Already Exists` | Choose a different client name. | | `Error: saving error` | Review the account data and try **Save** again. | | `Please save account first..!!` | Save the account before using the related action. | 5. Select **Save and Close** when you want to save the account and leave the record. ![Review the account field before saving](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/612db7dad4b9f74f353be2428b64d6ab.png) **Result:** The account save action has completed its validation path. A successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully` or `Data saved Successfully`. ### Out of scope The following messages belong to related flows rather than the Accounts save path: | Message | Owning flow | | --- | --- | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Vendor/account relation flow | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Client/account relation flow | | `Error loading accounts` | Sales job entry | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | File library | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contact persons | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | File library | ## Continue from Accounts After you locate an account, continue with the page that owns the next job. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Create or edit the account | [Create an account](doc:create-account) | | Work with contacts | [Contacts](doc:contacts-overview) or [Contact record](doc:contact-record) | | Work with projects | [Projects](doc:projects) | | Work with registrations | [Registration data](doc:vl-registrations) | | Work with attached files | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Maintain account managers | [Account managers](doc:configuration-account-managers-view) | # Bank accounts ## Bank accounts A bank-account entry records the bank, account number, currency, and IBAN that belong together in finance configuration. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find the bank-account list or open a saved entry | [Find and review a bank-account entry](#find-and-review-a-bank-account-entry) | | Know which values belong in the entry | [Understand the bank-account fields](#understand-the-bank-account-fields) | | Add or change an entry | [Enter and validate bank-account values](#enter-and-validate-bank-account-values) | | Remove a row or prepare an export | [Delete or export bank-account data](#delete-or-export-bank-account-data) | | Prepare a bank before choosing it | [Banks](doc:configuration-finance-banks) | | Prepare currency configuration | [Frequent currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | ## Before you start Before you maintain a bank-account entry, have the bank and account information ready and confirm that your access includes the action you need. | Check | What to have or expect | | --- | --- | | Bank choices | The **Bank** list is filled with the available banks for the current branch. | | Currency choices | The **currency** list uses the available currency data for the form. | | Create access | **New** appears when the create action is available. | | Edit access | The edit action at the end of a row appears when editing is available. | | Delete access | The actions menu at the end of a row appears when deletion is available. | | Subscription | If the applicable subscription feature is unavailable, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the list. | ## Find and review a bank-account entry Reach the bank-account list and open an existing entry for review or editing. **Prerequisites** - Have access to the configuration area. - Know whether you are opening an existing row or starting a new entry. **Steps** 1. In the configuration menu, select **Financial settings** > **Bank accounts**. 2. Read the available bank-account values in the list: **Bank short name**, **Account no.**, **currency**, and **IBAN**. 3. At the end of the bank-account row, select the edit action for the entry you want to review. ![Inspect the bank-account values and the actions at the end of each row](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0c1b3e9a5701a97b577ec63bd6731e92.png) **Result:** The selected bank-account entry is open for review or editing. ## Understand the bank-account fields The bank-account form combines one bank choice with account-identifying information and an optional currency and IBAN. | Field | Where it appears | Required | | --- | --- | --- | | **Bank** | Form | Yes | | **Account no.** | List and form | Yes | | **currency** | List and form | No | | **IBAN** | List and form | No | The **Bank** list contains every bank available for the current branch. The individual choices depend on the available bank data. The form does not show **Bank short name**. System-maintained values are not shown in the reader-facing form. Column headers are disabled for this configuration, so use the visible row values and the field table above to identify the data. ## Enter and validate bank-account values Enter values for a new bank-account entry or validate values in an existing one. **Prerequisites** - Have a bank and account number ready. - Confirm that the **Bank** and **Account no.** values are correct before saving. **Steps** 1. Choose how to begin. | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Enter a new entry | Select **New**. | | Validate an existing entry | At the end of the row, select the edit action. | 2. In **Bank**, select the bank for the account. 3. In **Account no.**, enter the account number. 4. In **currency**, select the applicable currency when one is available. 5. In **IBAN**, enter the account's IBAN when one is available. The form checks required values before accepting the entry. If **Bank** is empty, the message `Bank is required` appears. If **Account no.** is empty, the message `Account no. is required` appears. ![Inspect the **Bank**, **Account no.**, **currency**, and **IBAN** fields before leaving the form](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/83089b20cc02ac6516aaf3e14fcf2037.png) **Result:** The bank-account values are entered in the form, and required-field messages appear when a required value is empty. ## Delete or export bank-account data Remove an eligible row or open the list-export choices. **Prerequisites** - For deletion, have a saved list with more than one row and delete access. - For export, have the bank-account list open. **Steps** 1. At the end of the bank-account row, open the actions menu. 2. Choose the operation. | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Keep the row | Select **Cancel**. | | Start removal | Select **Delete**. | | Confirm the removal request | Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. | | Complete the removal | Select **Delete** again. | | Open export choices | Select **Export**. | | Close export choices | Select **Cancel**. | ![Review the bank-account list before choosing an operation](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) **Result:** A successful deletion produces `Data Deleted Successfully`; the export choices are open or closed according to your last selection. ## Handle unavailable actions and validation messages Use the message or visible action to choose the next move rather than repeating an unavailable action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | The subscription-upgrade surface | The applicable subscription feature is unavailable for this page. | Use the available upgrade route or contact your administrator. | | **New** is not available | Create access is unavailable. | Ask an administrator for create access. | | The edit action at the end of the row is not available | Edit access is unavailable. | Ask an administrator for edit access. | | The actions menu at the end of the row is not available | Delete access is unavailable. | Ask an administrator for delete access. | | `Bank is required` | The form has no bank value. | Choose a value in **Bank**. | | `Account no. is required` | The form has no account number. | Enter a value in **Account no.**. | | `Data saved Successfully` | A new entry was accepted. | Return to the list and review the new row. | | `Data updated Successfully` | An edited entry was accepted. | Return to the list and review the changed row. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The deletion confirmation is open. | Select **Cancel** to keep the row or **Delete** to remove it. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The row is related to saved data and deletion was refused. | Keep the row and review the related saved data. | | `Failed to Delete` | The deletion did not complete. | Review the row and try the deletion again when the cause is corrected. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains only one item, so deletion was refused. | Keep the remaining item. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The list filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter and apply it again. | | The login page shows **Email**, **Password**, and **Login** | You are at the sign-in page rather than the configuration screen. | Sign in, then reopen the bank-account route. | ## Continue with finance configuration After you finish with bank accounts, continue with the related finance setup when the bank or currency choices need maintenance. | If you need to… | Continue with | | --- | --- | | Add or change a bank used by the **Bank** choice | [Banks](doc:configuration-finance-banks) | | Maintain currency choices used by the **currency** choice | [Frequent currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | | Return to bank-account maintenance | [Bank accounts](#bank-accounts) | # Cost items ## Cost items A cost item is a name maintained for the additional-cost list in sales configuration. Use this page when you need to review or maintain the names available in that list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the field and list layout | [Understand the Cost items screen](#understand-the-cost-items-screen) | | Open the configuration page | [Find Cost items](#find-cost-items) | | Add or maintain a name | [Add and maintain a cost item](#add-and-maintain-a-cost-item) | | Reorder or remove a name | [Handle ordering and removal](#handle-ordering-and-removal) | | Respond to a message | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | ## Before you start The page's list and maintenance actions depend on the configuration and access available to your account. **Prerequisites** | Check | What to have in place | |---|---| | Subscription | The configuration feature is included so the list can load. | | Access | The access available to your account determines whether **New**, edit, delete, import, and export actions are available. | | Page setup | The page uses the Cost items configuration for its field and list. | | List layout | Work from the column headings shown on your page. The page can supply its columns from your configuration. | ## Find Cost items Cost items is the sales-configuration page where you reach the additional-cost list. **Prerequisites** - Have access to the configuration area. **Steps** 1. Open the Cost items page. 2. In the configuration side menu, select **Additional Costs**. 3. Check that the page heading is Additional cost items. 4. Check that the breadcrumbs include **General settings** and **Configuration**. ![Look for the Additional cost items heading, the breadcrumbs, the Additional Costs entry, and the Item Description column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a6ecf1b5eff7d7456a145a29b77623cb.png) **Result:** The Additional cost items page is open. ## Understand the Cost items screen The Cost items screen presents the names in a grid and uses the same field when you open the new-item form. **Prerequisites** - Open the Cost items page. **Steps** 1. In the grid, read the **Item Description** column heading. 2. In the form, enter the name in the **Item Description** text box. 3. Check the required marker beside **Item Description** before submitting the form. The page-specific field is: | Field | Type | Required | Where it appears | |---|---|---|---| | **Item Description** | Text box | Yes | Grid and new/edit form | The page does not present `DisplayOrder`, `Id`, or `CompanyID` as fields in the form. Rows can also be reordered directly in the list. The list currently shows **Item Description** as its column. The page also shows **New**, and the icon-only controls titled **Refresh** and **Settings**. ![Look for the Item Description column and the New, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/195b26eeb3b1e1a85b1fd73ecf510193.png) **Result:** You can identify the list column, the form field, its required marker, and the controls used to maintain the list. ## Add and maintain a cost item Adding or maintaining a cost item changes the names available in the additional-cost list. **Prerequisites** - Open the Additional cost items page. - Have the name you want to maintain ready. **Steps** 1. Choose the action for the name you want to maintain: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Add a name | Select **New** to open the new-item dialog. | | Change an existing name | Select the row to open the edit form. | ![Look for the new-item dialog opened from New.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/01793914506964c6e3570a59fac68dbd.png) 2. Enter the name in **Item Description**. 3. Choose how to finish: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Submit the name | Select **OK**. | | Close without saving | Select **Cancel**. | The new-item dialog is titled New Additional cost items. It contains **Item Description** with a required marker and the **OK** control. Selecting **Cancel** closes the dialog. ![Look for the New Additional cost items dialog, the required Item Description field, and the OK control.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/81a9b0327a4acc11e7db7574b610d899.png) The page also supports import and export when those actions are available to your account. **Result:** The dialog is closed after **Cancel**. After **OK**, the item is submitted for saving. ## Handle ordering and removal Rows can be reordered, and you can remove a row when **Delete** is available. **Prerequisites** - Open the **Additional cost items** page. - Have delete access when you need to remove a row. **Steps** 1. Drag a row to its new position to reorder the list. 2. Select **Delete** to open the confirmation menu. 3. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 4. Select **Cancel** to keep the row. 5. Select **Delete** to remove the row. **Result:** The row remains when you select **Cancel**; selecting **Delete** submits the removal. ## When maintenance does not work The page reports the following messages when validation or a maintenance operation stops. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Item Description is required` | The form needs a value in **Item Description**. | Enter the value in **Item Description** and select **OK** again. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | The entered name contains a character the field does not accept. | Enter the corrected value in **Item Description** and select **OK** again. | | `Must have at least one item` | The removal would leave no item. | Keep at least one item in the list. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Saved data is related to the item. | Keep the related item instead of deleting it. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete operation failed. | Return to the list and review the item before trying again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter input contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters and try again. | | `Data saved Successfully` | A new item was saved. | Continue from the list. | | `Data updated Successfully` | An existing item was updated. | Continue from the list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | An item was deleted. | Continue from the list. | | `Data Importing completed` | The import completed. | Continue from the list. | | `Export to Excel` | The export dialog is offering the Excel option. | Select the export action available in that dialog. | ## After maintaining cost items This page ends at configuration maintenance. It does not move a record through a sales lifecycle stage. **Result:** You remain in the configuration area after maintaining or cancelling a cost-item change. # Create a contact Create a contact, add communication details, or find an existing contact. ## Create and locate a contact A contact is a person's identity, account relationship, communication channels, attached files, and change history kept together in PAMS's shared contact database. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Start a new contact | [Find a contact](#find-a-contact) | | Review the fields before entering information | [Understand the contact information](#understand-the-contact-information) | | Add phone, email, or other channels | [Enter contact details](#enter-contact-details) | | Save the contact | [Save the contact](#save-the-contact) | | Open a saved contact | [Contact record](doc:contact-record) | | Review the Contacts list | [Contacts](doc:contacts-overview) | | Create the related account | [Create an account](doc:create-account) | | Work with attached files | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | ## Before you start Choose an entry point: | Entry point | Use it to… | |---|---| | Contacts list | View contacts, start a new contact, or select an existing contact. | | New-contact form | Enter a new contact. | | Saved contact | Open an existing contact. | The Contacts list shows **New** only when your account has permission to add contacts and the Contacts feature is available to your subscription. The contact form shows **Save** and **Save and Close** only when you have permission to create or edit the contact, the form is not read-only, and it contains a change. The new-contact and edit-contact pages require you to be signed in. Leaving either page with unsaved changes can trigger an unsaved-change warning. Have the following information ready: | Have ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | The person's name | **Name** is required. | | The related account | **Account** is required before the contact can be saved. | | Any phone, fax, mobile, email, website, online-support, or comment information | These values become optional communication rows. | > **Note:** Enter the related account before you save the contact because **Account** is required. ## Find a contact The Contacts list is the place to start a new contact or open a saved contact from its row. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Contacts feature. - You know whether you are creating a contact or opening one that already exists. **Steps** 1. Open the Contacts list. 2. Choose the path that matches your task: | If you need to… | Action and next screen | |---|---| | Create a contact | Select **New**. The contact form opens in the **Add New Contact** popup. | | Open a saved contact | Select the contact's row. Continue in the contact record. | ![The Contacts list and the **Add New Contact** form opened from **New**](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0a3104f8f114139168b98a8824b8031e.png) The Contacts list shows these columns: | Column | Use it to… | |---|---| | **Title** | Read the person's title. | | **Name** | Identify the contact. | | **Position** | Read the person's position. | | **Department** | Read the person's department. | | **Account** | Identify the related account. | | **Branch** | Identify the branch. | **Result:** The new-contact form or the selected saved contact is open. ## Understand the contact information The contact form records the person's identity, the account relationship, and optional ways to communicate with the person. | Field | What to enter | Required | |---|---|---:| | **Title** | The person's title. | No | | **Name** | The person's name. | Yes | | **Position** | The person's position. | No | | **Department** | The person's department. | No | | **Account** | The related account. | Yes | For a new contact, **Name** uses an autocomplete control. For an existing contact, **Name** uses a text control. Choose the related account in **Account**. The form also contains **Contact Details**. Selecting a detail type adds a row for that channel; the row is not present before a detail type is selected. ## Enter contact details Enter the contact’s identity and communication details. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the contact form. - You have the person's name and related account ready. **Steps** 1. Enter the person's name in **Name**. 2. Select the related account in **Account**. 3. Enter any available values in **Title** and **Position**. 4. Select **Contact Details**. ![The contact-detail choices available after selecting **Contact Details**](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/dda089885e1315fc4f7f815905910fcc.png) 5. Select the detail type that you want to add: | If you need to add… | Select | |---|---| | A telephone number | **Phone** | | A fax number | **Fax** | | A mobile number | **Mobile** | | An email address | **Email** | | A website | **Website** | | Online support information | **Online Support** | | A note about the person | **Comments** | 6. Enter the value in the new row. - **Phone**, **Fax**, and **Mobile** accept a maximum of 20 characters and filter key input. - If the email value is invalid, the field displays `Email is invalid`. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each additional contact channel. ![The **Phone** row added to the contact form](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ba030341e14f5238e2d214cb6e3d1a81.png) **Result:** The contact form contains the person's identity, related account, and the contact-detail rows you selected. ## Save the contact Save after entering the required identity and account information. The form checks its required and pattern rules before saving. **Prerequisites** - **Name** contains a value. - **Account** contains a related account. - The form is editable and has a change. **Steps** 1. Choose the save action that matches what you want to do: | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and continue working in the contact form | **Save** | | Save and leave the contact form | **Save and Close** | 2. Check for the success message `Contact saved successfully` after a successful non-popup save. ![The **Save** and **Save and Close** actions on the contact form](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0790e0e97ff8f139545a7f2c270320ea.png) **Result:** After a successful non-popup save, `Contact saved successfully` appears. ## Handle contact variations The contact form can be opened as a full page, in a popup, or in read-only mode. The available actions change with that context. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the contact form. - You know which contact variation applies to your work. **Steps** 1. Choose the situation that matches your work: | If you… | Do this | |---|---| | Need a related account | Choose the related account in **Account**. | | Need a vendor relationship | Enter the vendor name in **Vendor Name**. | | Are working in a read-only form | Review the contact without changing its fields. | | Need attached files | Select **Attachment**. | | Need change history | Select **Last Modifications**. | | Need the person's name in a contact popup | Enter it in **Name**. | | Need the related account in a contact popup | Choose it in **Account**. | | Need a communication row in a contact popup | Select **Contact Details**. | 2. In a popup, select **Ok** after the required values are present. The account popup displays `Name is required` when its required name field is empty. The vendor popup displays `This field is required` when **Vendor Name** is empty. **Result:** The applicable contact variation is complete, or the existing contact's **Attachment** or **Last Modifications** screen is open. When you save from a popup, the popup form is cleared after the saved contact is returned. ## When contact saving goes wrong Use the message you see to locate the correction. | Message | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | **Name** is empty. | Enter a name in **Name**. | | `Account is Required` | **Account** is empty. | Select the related account in **Account**. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | The name contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Edit **Name** and remove the unsupported character. | | `Email is invalid` | The email value does not pass email validation. | Correct the value in the **Email** row. | | `You already have a contact with this name` | A matching contact name was found during name checking. | Change **Name** or select the matching existing contact instead. | | `Error: This Contact Name Already Exists` | The save response reports a duplicate contact name. | Change **Name** and save again. | | `Error: Server Error` | The save response reports a server error. | Check the values, then select **Save** again. | The complete application message catalogue is maintained in [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages). ## After saving After a successful save, continue with the saved contact in the Contacts list or open its contact record. Use [Contacts](doc:contacts-overview) to locate contacts and [Contact record](doc:contact-record) to inspect the saved record. For an existing contact, **Attachment** opens attached-file work and **Last Modifications** opens the change-history work. Use [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) for file operations. # Create an Account Invoice ## Create an account invoice Use this task to create an account invoice or an additional invoice before you continue with the invoice lifecycle. An account invoice starts from **Account Invoices**. An additional invoice starts from **Additional Invoices**. The invoice status flow includes Draft, Ready for approval, Approved, Due, Overdue, and Paid. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Create an account invoice | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Open the invoice form](#open-the-invoice-form) | | Create an additional invoice | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Open the invoice form](#open-the-invoice-form) | | Enter invoice details and items | [Complete and save the invoice](#complete-and-save-the-invoice) | | Correct a validation message | [When validation fails](#when-validation-fails) | | Continue with a saved invoice | [Continue with the saved invoice](#continue-with-the-saved-invoice) | | Follow invoice statuses and the saved workspace | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | Record a payment after invoicing | [Record a payment](doc:record-payment) | ## Before you start An account invoice or additional invoice is a new finance record that you prepare from its own creation route. Before you open the form, have the invoice information ready and know which route matches the record you need. **Prerequisites** | Check before you start | What to have ready | |---|---| | Invoice type | Know whether you are creating an account invoice or an additional invoice. | | Access | The page is available only when the subscription and page guards allow the invoice surface. | | Editing | Editing access allows a new invoice before you use **Save** or **Save and Close**. | | Required information | Prepare the value for **Invoicing Address** and the person to select in **Issued By**. | | Account invoice | For an account invoice, select an account in **Account**. | The form marks **Invoicing Address** and **Issued By** as required. The invoice record is available only when the invoice subscription is included. If it is not included, the invoice surface offers an upgrade instead. The **Account Invoices** route is available only under the product's Shotec-company condition. The account invoice requires an account selection in addition to **Invoicing Address** and **Issued By**. Review the value shown in each field before saving. ## Open the invoice form The invoice form is the shared screen used by both creation routes. Select the route for the invoice type you need. **Prerequisites** - You have the invoice type and the information listed in [Before you start](#before-you-start). **Steps** 1. Open **Financial**. 2. Open **Receivables**. 3. Select the invoice type you need. | If you need to create… | Select | |---|---| | An account invoice | **Account Invoices** | | An additional invoice | **Additional Invoices** | 4. Confirm that the invoice form opens before entering information. The selected route opens the corresponding invoice form. ![Invoice form reached from the invoice menu, before entering invoice information.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) **Result:** The selected invoice route is open and ready for you to enter invoice information. ## Understand the invoice form The invoice form combines invoice information, an item grid, a note, and actions for saving or continuing with an existing invoice. The fields shown depend on the invoice type and the current invoice state. The main invoice information includes the fields in the following table. | Information | Control | |---|---| | Account selection | **Account** | | Date | **Invoice Date** | | Address destination | **Billing address destination** | | Invoice address | **Invoicing Address** | | Payment term | **Payment Period** | | Issuer | **Issued By** | | Note | **Invoice Note** | The item area uses the columns in the following table when they are available on the form. | Item information | Column | |---|---| | Description | item column | | Unit | **Unit** | | Quantity | **Qty** | | Unit price | **Unit Price** | | Commission amount | **Commission Amount** | | Amount | **Amount** | | Currency | **Currency** | | Discount | discount column | | Installment | **Installment (%)** | | Tax | tax percentage column | | Area | What to use it for | Conditions | |---|---|---| | Account | For an account invoice, select an account in **Account**. | The account choice applies to the account-invoice type. | | Invoice information | Enter dates, address information, payment terms, issuer, and note. | **Invoicing Address** and **Issued By** are required fields. | | Item grid | Enter the invoice rows and review the calculated item values. | The available columns and the initial row depend on the information available to the form. | | Existing-invoice actions | Approve, request approval, edit, print, download the invoice template, or open tabs. | These actions require an existing invoice and their own status or permission conditions. | The form also contains four selects without their own field label used for account, payment period, payment method, and freight type. Use the surrounding field label and the selected value to identify the relevant choice. The item grid can use the invoice items collection or the after-delivery milestone items collection. The available item columns can therefore vary with the form setup. Review the headers shown before entering a row, then continue to [Complete and save the invoice](#complete-and-save-the-invoice). ## Add a billing address Selecting an account loads the billing-address choices for that account. You can add a destination when the account edit permission and branch conditions allow it. **Prerequisites** - You have chosen the invoice type and opened its route. **Steps** 1. In **Account**, select the account. 2. If billing-address creation is available, open the address-creation form. 3. Enter the destination information in the popup. | Information | Field | |---|---| | Destination name | **Destination Title** | | Country | **Country** | | State | **State** | | City | **City** | | Street | **Street** | | Postal code | **Zip-code** | **Result:** The new destination is saved, selected, and used to update **Invoicing Address**. The address-creation form provides **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code**. **Destination Title** is required; the other required markers depend on configuration. The grid can display these product labels: the item column, **Unit**, **Qty**, **Unit Price**, the discount column, **Item Price**, and **Currency**. The tax column is shown when present. ## Complete and save the invoice Complete the invoice information and item rows, then use the save action that matches whether you want to remain on the form. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the correct invoice route. - You have the invoice information and item values ready. - You know the value for **Invoicing Address** and the person to select in **Issued By**. **Steps** 1. Complete the invoice information. | Enter or select… | In… | |---|---| | The account for an account invoice | **Account** | | The invoice date | **Invoice Date** | | The billing destination | **Billing address destination** | | The invoicing address | **Invoicing Address** | | The payment-period count and time period | **Payment Period** | | The invoice issuer | **Issued By** | | The invoice note, when needed | **Invoice Note** | 2. Complete an item row using the headers available on your form. | Check… | Enter… | |---|---| | Quantity | A value from `0` to `999999` in **Qty** | | Non-negative amounts | Values in **Unit Price** and the tax percentage column that are not negative | | Discount | A value from `0` to `100` in the discount column | 3. Select the save action you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and remain on the form | **Save** | | Save and close the form | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The invoice is ready for the selected save action. If a validation message appears, use [When validation fails](#when-validation-fails). When the save succeeds, the form displays `Invoice saved successfully`. **Save and Close** leaves the page after a successful save. If saving fails, the form displays `Invoice failed to save`. **Save and Close** is enabled only when editing is allowed and changes exist. ## When validation fails Use the message on screen to identify which value needs attention. The messages below are the validation and request messages associated with the invoice form and its item rules. The validation heading is `Validation errors:`. | Message | What to check | |---|---| | `This field is required` | Check **Invoicing Address**, **Issued By**, or the item field that is marked required. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Check **Qty** and enter a value within the permitted quantity range. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Check **Unit Price** or the tax percentage column and remove the negative value. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the invoice information and try the applicable save action again. | | `Check validation` | Review the fields and item rules before selecting **Save** or **Save and Close** again. | If the route opens **Dashboard** instead of the invoice form, return to [Open the invoice form](#open-the-invoice-form) and open the route for the invoice type you need. After you correct the value, repeat the applicable save step in [Complete and save the invoice](#complete-and-save-the-invoice). ## Review currency and totals Changing the invoice currency updates the invoice symbol, code, and rate, applies the symbol and code to each item, and recalculates the items. Updating an item recalculates its amount and the invoice totals. For an account invoice, the saved workspace can show invoice amount, total taxes, total including tax, paid amount, deductions, and due amount. The due amount is the total including tax less the paid amount and deductions. A branch-currency due amount appears when the currencies differ and a rate is available. ## Out of scope Sales- and commission-only fields and grids belong to [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle), not this account or additional invoice creation task. ## Continue with the saved invoice The saved invoice continues through the invoice lifecycle. Its status path includes Draft, Ready for approval, Approved, Due, Overdue, and Paid. Use [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) for the saved invoice workspace, status actions, and related tabs. When the invoice reaches the payment stage, use [Record a payment](doc:record-payment) for the separate payment task. The saved-invoice workspace owns the following actions for an existing invoice. Their availability depends on its status, permissions, or user role. Leaving an invoice with unsaved changes opens a confirmation before the page closes or the route changes. | Area | Controls | |---|---| | Related tabs | Comments, Attachment, Tasks, Activities, Deductions, Payments | # Create an L/G ## What an L/G is An L/G is a letter-of-guarantee request that you record, save, and continue as a saved L/G record. Use this page to start a request or open one that already exists. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Start a new request | [Find a new or saved L/G](#find-a-new-or-saved-lg) | | Understand the basic fields | [Understand the create form](#understand-the-create-form) | | Save the request | [Enter and save the basic request](#enter-and-save-the-basic-request) | | Resolve a problem | [When saving or locating goes wrong](#when-saving-or-locating-goes-wrong) | | Continue after saving | [After the L/G is saved](#after-the-lg-is-saved) | | Move an L/G through its stages | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Review finance-route lists and records | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | ## Before you start You need an authenticated PAMS session and access to the L/G feature. The create route uses authentication and a leave-page guard. The page also needs the L/G details record to load, and your company configuration determines which basic fields carry a required marker. | Have or know… | Why it matters | | --- | --- | | A signed-in PAMS session with L/G access | The create and edit routes require authentication and feature access. | | The request's beneficiary and issuer | These are the first two account choices on the form. | | The L/G type and requested value | These complete the request's basic description. | | Whether the beneficiary may extend the guarantee | This controls **Beneficiary Permitted To Extend**. | | Your company's required-field settings | Required markers can differ between companies. | ## Find a new or saved L/G The finance **Bank Guaranties** entry opens the company L/G list. The list includes the **Company LGs** view for company records. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and have L/G access. - To create a request, you can open the new L/G route. - To open an existing record, the company L/G list contains its row. **Steps** 1. Open **Bank Guaranties** to reach the company L/G list. 2. Select **Company LGs** when the company list is not already selected. 3. Choose the route for your task: | If you need to… | Open… | | --- | --- | | Start a new request | `/letters-of-guaranties/new` or `/finance/letters-of-guaranties/new` | | Open a saved company record | `/letters-of-guaranties/edit/:id` | | Open a saved finance-route record | `/finance/letters-of-guaranties/edit/:id` | The headers and row values available for locating a record come from the list layout. Work from the headers visible in your list. **Result:** You are on the basic create form or on the saved L/G record you selected. ![The finance create form with its basic fields and save actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5180853f6ab48762379b14649426d753.png) ## Understand the create form The create form collects the basic information that identifies the request before later record work becomes available. | Field | Control and entry | | --- | --- | | **Beneficiary** | Select the company that receives the guarantee. | | **LG Issuer** | Select the issuer for the request. | | **On Behalf of** | Select the principal represented by the issuer when enabled. | | **LG Type** | Select the type of guarantee request. | | **Requested LG Value** | Enter the requested currency amount. | | **Beneficiary Permitted To Extend** | Select the checkbox when the beneficiary may extend the guarantee. | The form displayed **Beneficiary**, **LG Issuer**, **On Behalf of**, **LG Type**, and **Requested LG Value**. **Beneficiary** and **LG Issuer** accepted account selections, and **Requested LG Value** accepted a number. The form also displayed **Beneficiary Permitted To Extend**. In the displayed form, **Beneficiary**, **LG Issuer**, and **Requested LG Value** carried required markers. **On Behalf of** and **LG Type** did not. Your company's mandatory-field configuration controls these markers, so complete every field marked as required on your screen. Select the appropriate value shown in each list. After the first save, the record can carry **Bank**, **LG Number**, **Activation Date**, **Issue Value**, **Cash Cover**, and **Expiry Date** in its later data area. Its record tabs become available after the record has an ID. ![The six basic request fields and their required markers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Enter and save the basic request Use this procedure to record the initial request and choose whether to remain on the saved record. **Prerequisites** - You are on the editable create form. - You have the beneficiary, issuer, L/G type, requested value, and extension decision. - You know which fields your company configuration marks as required. **Steps** 1. In **Beneficiary**, select the company that receives the guarantee. 2. In **LG Issuer**, select the issuer for the request. 3. If **On Behalf of** is enabled, select the principal represented by the issuer. 4. In **LG Type**, select the type of guarantee request. 5. In **Requested LG Value**, enter the requested currency amount. 6. Select **Beneficiary Permitted To Extend** when the beneficiary may extend the guarantee. 7. Complete every field carrying a required marker on your form. 8. Choose how to save the request: | If you need to… | Select… | | --- | --- | | Save the request and remain on its record | **Save** | | Save the request and leave the page | **Save and Close** | 9. If the form displays `This Field Is Required`, complete the field beside that message. 10. Select **Save** or **Save and Close** again. 11. After the save completes, read `Your request was completed successfully`. **Save** validates the basic-data group before calling the save action. For a new record, the requested amount is copied into the issued and current amounts. **Save and Close** leaves the page after a successful save; **Save** keeps the record page open. **Result:** The basic request is saved, and you either remain on the saved L/G record or leave the page according to your selection. ## Handle route and configuration differences The details form serves a new request, a saved record, and embedded views. The available fields and actions change with the route, company settings, issuer role, subscription, and whether the record already has an ID. **Prerequisites** - You know which route opened the form. - You can see whether the form is editable and which fields carry required markers. **Steps** 1. Check that the L/G feature is available before entering data. 2. Check the required markers on the six basic fields before selecting **Save**. 3. Check whether **On Behalf of** is enabled before choosing a principal. 4. If you are working on a saved record, use its record ID to continue with the record tabs and later data areas. 5. If the form is embedded in another screen, continue with the controls available in that form rather than expecting the standalone save area. The standalone save area shows **Save** and **Save and Close** when the feature is included and editing is allowed. **On Behalf of** is available for selection only when the issuer role permits it and the basic data is editable. **Result:** You use the fields and actions available for the current route, role, company configuration, subscription, and saved-record state. ## When saving or locating goes wrong Use the message or page state you see to choose the next action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A configured required field is empty. | Complete the field carrying the required marker, then select **Save** or **Save and Close**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save request returned an error. | Check the form values and select the save action again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A list filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters from the list filter and run the search again. | | `You don’t have permission` | A stage action is not available to your account. | Open [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) for the stage action's access conditions. | | `LG still needs confirmation` | The approval action still needs the required confirmation. | Open [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) and complete the confirmation step there. | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | The record has extension or deduction work that prevents the requested reversal. | Open [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) for the stage rule. | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | An extension date does not follow the current expiry date. | Open [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) and enter a later extension date. | | `There is a pending increase you can edit` | A pending increase already exists. | Open [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) and edit the pending increase. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | A library name or file name contains an unsupported character. | Open [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) and correct the name. | | The requested create route lands on `/` | The requested route did not open the form in that session. | Open **Bank Guaranties** and use the available create entry. | | **Beneficiary** is not on screen | The create form has not opened. | Return to the create route before entering the basic request. | | No controls or buttons are visible | The page is not the L/G form. | Return to the L/G entry and open the form again. | The list filter can show `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` when the filter contains forbidden characters. The save action displays `An error occurred while processing your request` when its request returns an error. ## After the L/G is saved Saving turns the new request into a saved L/G record. Continue stage work from that record, where later record areas and stage actions are available. **Prerequisites** - The basic request has been saved, or you have opened an existing L/G record. **Steps** 1. Choose the next work area: | If you need to… | Open… | | --- | --- | | Move the L/G through its stages | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Review finance-route lists or records | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | ### Use the saved-record tabs **Prerequisites** - The L/G has an ID. - You are on the saved L/G record. **Steps** 1. Select the tab for the work you need: | If you need to… | Select… | | --- | --- | | Work with comments | **Comments** | | Work with attached files | **Attachment** | | Work with extensions | **LG Extensions** | | Work with deductions | **LG Deductions** | | Work with increases | **LG Increase** | | Review modification history | **Last Modifications** | **Result:** You remain on the saved L/G record with the selected comments, attachment, extension, deduction, increase, or modification-history area available. # Create a task ## What a task is A task is a piece of follow-up work that you assign, schedule, and track separately from the business record it supports. Create one when someone needs a dated action, an owner, or a clear completion status. Tasks sit with activities as cross-cutting follow-up work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Create a new follow-up task | Open the task-creation page, then follow [Before you start](#before-you-start) and [Enter task details](#enter-task-details) | | Find a task you already created | [Find a task](#find-a-task) | | Add a meeting, visit, or call to a saved task | [Handle saved-task options](#handle-saved-task-options) | | Work with tasks from the wider workspace | [My Desk workspace](doc:my-desk-workspace) or [Manage tasks from My Desk](doc:my-desk-tasks) | | Record an activity linked to the task | [Record activities from My Desk](doc:my-desk-activities) or [Create an activity](doc:create-activity) | Tasks use statuses such as Upcoming, Due, Overdue, In Progress, and Completed. The status controls available on a saved task depend on its current status and on whether you own it. ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. The new-task route requires authentication. - The Tasks subscription is included for your account. - You have the task title, its priority, a start date, and a due date. - You know who to assign the task to, if someone other than you owns it. - You have the description ready if the task needs more context. - You are creating a new task, or you own an existing task that you have accepted. The form requires **Priority**, the task title, **Start Date**, and **Due Date**. **Description** and **Assign To** are available when you need them. The page protects unsaved changes when you leave it. > [!NOTE] > A task owner can save a new task. An existing task can be saved by its owner after the task is > accepted. ## Find a task Open the task-creation page when you are creating a task. Use the task list when you are locating work that already exists. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and the Tasks subscription is included. **Steps** 1. Choose the page that matches your job. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Create a task | The task-creation page | | Locate an existing task | [Manage tasks from My Desk](doc:my-desk-tasks) | 2. If you opened the task list, choose the list that answers your question. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | View all available task work | **All** | | View your task work | **My Tasks** | | Include completed task work | **View completed tasks** | 3. Read the visible headers to identify the task you need. The task list can show Title, Owner, Start date, **Due date**, **Status**, and Importance. The list also provides icon buttons titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ![Use the task-list headers and filters to locate a task](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca64b0f67135a13617f6d0e934f05edc.png) **Result:** The new-task form is open and ready for [Enter task details](#enter-task-details). If you located an existing task, open it and continue with [Handle saved-task options](#handle-saved-task-options). ## Enter task details The new-task form records the task's purpose, priority, description, dates, and assignment. Enter the dates carefully: the **Due Date** starts at the **Start Date**, so a task cannot be scheduled to finish before it starts. **Prerequisites** - The new-task form is open. - You have the task title, priority, start date, and due date ready. **Steps** 1. Open **Priority**. ![Open Priority before choosing the task priority](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca620b585a251ff3d20fe48975c2faf6.png) 2. Select a priority value. 3. Enter the task title in the large text area below **Task Purpose**. 4. Enter additional context in **Description** when the title alone does not explain the work. ![Enter the task context in Description](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca620b585a251ff3d20fe48975c2faf6.png) 5. Enter the date on which the task starts in **Start Date**. ![Enter the task start date before setting the due date](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca620b585a251ff3d20fe48975c2faf6.png) 6. Enter a date on or after **Start Date** in **Due Date**. ![Set Due Date on or after Start Date](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca620b585a251ff3d20fe48975c2faf6.png) 7. Choose the person responsible for the task in **Assign To** when the task belongs to someone else. ![Choose the person responsible for the task](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca620b585a251ff3d20fe48975c2faf6.png) The new-task form shows **Owner** and Tags as readouts on arrival. **Task Progress** is not shown on the live create surface. The task title, **Priority**, **Start Date**, and **Due Date** are required by the form. The validation messages are `Priority is required`, `Title is required`, `Start Date is required`, and `Due Date is required`. **Follow** is not available on the live create form. After the task is saved, **Reminder** becomes available on the saved task. **Result:** The task details are entered, with **Start Date** and **Due Date** set in the correct order and **Assign To** set when another person owns the work. ## Save the task **Save** keeps you in the task flow after creating the task. **Save and Close** saves the task and leaves the form. Both controls are available for a new task owner; on an existing task, they are available to the owner after the task is accepted. **Prerequisites** - The task form contains valid values for its required fields. - You are the task owner, or you are saving an existing task that you have accepted. **Steps** 1. Choose the save action that matches what you want to do next. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Continue working with the saved task | **Save** | | Save the task and leave the form | **Save and Close** | 2. Check for the success message `Data saved Successfully`. 3. Continue from the page that matches your save choice. | If you selected… | Then | |---|---| | **Save** | Open the saved task. | | **Save and Close** | Return to the page that opened the task form. | **Result:** The task is saved. **Save** takes you to the saved task; **Save and Close** leaves the form. ## Handle saved-task options A saved task exposes follow-up actions according to its owner, status, branch, and task level. These options let you respond to an assignment, change completion status, and keep related work with the task. **Prerequisites** - The task is saved and open. - You know whether you own the task and whether it is accepted, **Overdue**, **Due**, **Completed**, or still active. - For sub-tasks and activities, you belong to the same branch as the task. **Steps** 1. Choose the saved-task action that matches the task state. | If the task is… | Control | Resulting message | |---|---|---| | Assigned to you but not accepted | **Accept** | `You accepted the assigned task` | | Assigned to you but not accepted | **Decline** | `You declined the assigned task` | | **Overdue** or **Due** | **Consider As Complete** | | **Completed** | **Consider As Not Completed** | | A top-level task and you need a child task | **Sub-tasks**, then the add action | | An active task and you need a related activity | **Activities**, then the add action | 2. Use the saved-task tabs to open the related work you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review child tasks | **Sub-tasks** | | Review or add activities | **Activities** | | Read or add discussion | **Comments** | | Review attached files | **Attachment** | | Review recorded changes | **Last Modifications** | 3. In **Activities**, select the plus icon to open the activity menu. 4. Choose an activity. | Activity control | |---| | **Meeting** | | **Visit** | | **Call** | **Result:** The selected saved-task panel or follow-up action is open for the task. Accepting or declining changes the assignment response; the activity choices open the corresponding activity form. ## Fix task-entry problems Use the message on screen to choose the correction. Required-field messages appear when a required value is missing. Ownership and save messages appear when the selected action is not allowed or the save cannot complete. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Priority is required` | **Priority** has no value. | Select a value in **Priority**. | | `Title is required` | The task title is empty. | Enter the task title below **Task Purpose**. | | `Start Date is required` | **Start Date** has no value. | Enter a start date in **Start Date**. | | `Due Date is required` | **Due Date** has no value. | Enter a due date in **Due Date**. | | `Error Saving Registration` | The save did not complete. | Review the required fields and select **Save** again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | An assignment response could not complete. | Reopen the task and retry the action when you are its owner. | | `Only task owner can take that action` | The selected status action is restricted to the task owner. | Ask the task owner to make the status change. | Keep **Due Date** on or after **Start Date**. The form defines **Start Date** as the minimum for **Due Date**. The available values in Priority and **Assign To** depend on the lists shown when you open those controls. **Result:** The task form is ready for a valid save, or the task owner has the information needed to complete the restricted action. ## Continue after saving After a non-closing save, continue with the saved task. The saved task is where its status, child tasks, activities, comments, attachments, and modification history can be continued. **Prerequisites** - You selected **Save**, or you located the task from [Manage tasks from My Desk](doc:my-desk-tasks). **Steps** 1. Open the saved task after selecting **Save**. 2. Select the saved-task tab that matches the next piece of work: **Sub-tasks**, **Activities**, Comments, **Attachment**, or **Last Modifications**. 3. For broader workspace task work, open [Manage tasks from My Desk](doc:my-desk-tasks). 4. For task-related activity work, open [Record activities from My Desk](doc:my-desk-activities) or [Create an activity](doc:create-activity). **Result:** You are at the saved task or at the sibling page that owns the next follow-up job. # Create a user ## Create and locate users A user record gives a person access to PAMS as a company user. Use this page when you need to create a user from the Security area or find an existing user in the Users list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Create a user | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Enter user information and save](#enter-user-information-and-save) | | Find a user | [Find a user](#find-a-user) | | Review the fields and tabs | [Understand the user screen](#understand-the-user-screen) | | Set branch access or maximum approval amounts | [Set branches and approval limits](#set-branches-and-approval-limits) | | Resolve a save error | [When saving goes wrong](#when-saving-goes-wrong) | | Continue with roles or files | Roles; Libraries and files | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Sign in with an account that can access the security area. - To create a company user, your account must have permission to create users, and the available user allowance must not be exceeded. - Have the person's login email, first name, last name, display name, and mobile number ready. These fields are required on this screen. - Decide whether to use **Save** or **Save and Close**. Creating a user sends a create-password email to the address entered in **Login Email**. The screen requires sign-in. If you leave with unsaved changes, it can intervene before you leave. ## Find a user The user list is the place to locate an existing company user or begin creating one. Each row is identified by the person's full name and display name, with the account's active state and user type shown in the list. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and can open the security user list. **Steps** 1. Open the Users list from the Security area. 2. Read the **Full name** and **Display name** columns to identify the person. 3. Read **Active** to check the user's active state. 4. Read **Account owner** and **Principal user** when you need to distinguish the account type. 5. Choose the user type you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Create a company user | **New company user** | | Create a principal user | **New principal user** | ![Identify a user from the list headers and choose **New company user**.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/944344f6003f8d3cb1f45870284a2f6f.png) **Result:** The user list remains open for an existing user, or the new-user screen opens after you select **New company user**. ## Understand the user screen The new-user screen groups identity details under **User Information** and provides tabs for **User Roles**, **Branches / Inventory**, and **Approval Limit**. The screen shows **Save** and **Save and Close** at the top. The visible information fields are: | Field | Required marker on this screen | |---|---| | **Login Email** | Yes | | **Position** | No | | **Title** | No | | **First Name** | Yes | | **Middle Name** | No | | **Last Name** | Yes | | **Display Name** | Yes | | **Cloud Account** | No | | **Mobile** | Yes | The new-user screen does not show a password field. The **Branches / Inventory** tab contains branch choices, and **Approval Limit** contains the approval amount controls described later. The new-user screen also does not show sales-responsible or finance-responsible fields, and it does not show the two-factor tab. ![Review the visible identity fields and save controls before entering data.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ce39a80bcf98ea8a28d3a4f528126f4a.png) **Result:** You know which identity fields are visible, which carry required markers, and which tab contains each additional user setting. ## Enter user information and save Enter the person's identity and contact details on **User Information**. The required fields are **Login Email**, **First Name**, **Last Name**, **Display Name**, and **Mobile**. **Prerequisites** - You are on the new-user screen. - You have the person's login email, first name, last name, display name, and mobile number. **Steps** 1. Enter the person's address in **Login Email**. 2. Enter the person's position in **Position**, if one is available. 3. Enter the person's title in **Title**, if one is available. 4. Enter the person's given name in **First Name**. 5. Enter any middle name in **Middle Name**. 6. Enter the person's family name in **Last Name**. 7. Enter the name colleagues use for the person in **Display Name**. 8. Enter the person's cloud account address in **Cloud Account**, if one is available. 9. Enter the person's mobile number in **Mobile**. 10. Choose one save action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep working on the user screen | **Save** | | Save the user and leave the screen | **Save and Close** | The form validates the main user information and contact information before it calls the save operation. If validation succeeds, creation sends a create-password email to the address in **Login Email**. ![Complete the required identity fields and choose the save action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/803088ea27aea7264efc1e433e824541.png) **Result:** The user is saved, or the screen displays a validation or save error that you can resolve in [When saving goes wrong](#when-saving-goes-wrong). ## Set branches and approval limits Branch access determines which company branches the user can work with. An approval limit is the maximum amount the user can approve in a particular area. **Prerequisites** - You are on the new-user screen. - You know which branches the user needs and which approval limits apply. **Steps** 1. Select **Branches / Inventory**. 2. Review the available branch choices. 3. Select the branches the user can access. 4. Review the **Accessible branches** readout after selecting branches. 5. Select **Approval Limit**. 6. Enter each applicable amount in its **Up to** field. 7. Select **Unlimited** for an area only when the approval policy allows unlimited approval. The branch panel shows five branch choices. The approval amount controls accept values from `0` upward. The approval panel contains one **Up to** control for each area: | Area | What to do | |---|---| | Sales | Enter the amount or select **Unlimited**. | | LGs | Enter the amount or select **Unlimited**. | | Purchasing | Enter the amount or select **Unlimited**. | | Invoicing | Enter the amount or select **Unlimited**. | Each amount is shown with **EUR**. ![Choose the branches available to the user.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7f78968a77827a35709e01764a992a07.png) ![Review the four approval-limit areas and their **Up to** controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d50c946e3f2dc399adada35ff564c48e.png) **Result:** The user screen shows the selected branch options and the applicable approval-limit values ready for saving. ## When saving goes wrong Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Error: Please check the required fields and try again.` | Required information did not pass validation. | Return to the fields marked required and correct them. | | `Error: This Email or User Name Already Exists` | The email or user name is already in use. | Enter a different **Login Email**. | | `Error: Please fill in all required fields (e.g., Department)` | The submitted user information is incomplete. | Complete the required information and select **Save** again. | | `Error: Server Error` | The save returned a server error. | Correct any visible input issue and retry **Save**. | After a password-mail request succeeds, the screen shows: `An e-mail was sent to `. The post-save message also includes `New user created` and `A activation mail with instruction sent to user`. ### Out of scope These file-library messages belong to Libraries and files, not to creating a user: | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Libraries and files | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Libraries and files | ## After saving When a new user is saved, PAMS sends a create-password email to the address entered in Login Email. **Save and Close** leaves the user screen after the save path completes; **Save** keeps the user screen available for continued work. An existing user's ordinary save displays `Data saved Successfully`. New-user creation displays `Data saved Successfully .. An E-Mail was sent to this User`. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Manage the user's role setup | Roles | | Work with files connected to the user | Libraries and files | **Result:** The new user has been saved, the password email has been sent, and you know whether to continue on the user screen or move to role or file work. # Dashboard widget catalog ## Dashboard widget catalogs A Dashboard widget catalog groups related cards and charts so you can choose the view that answers your business question. This page covers top widgets, backlog widgets, and management-report widgets. Sibling widgets stay together by family; the catalog does not create a separate page for each widget. The active tab is the dashboard tab currently selected for review or editing. A widget family is a group of sibling cards and charts that answer related business questions. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Open the dashboard | [Open the Dashboard](#open-the-dashboard) | | Match a question to a widget family | [Choose a widget catalog](#choose-a-widget-catalog) | | Find a widget already on the active tab | [Find and inspect a widget](#find-and-inspect-a-widget) | | Add a widget to the active tab | [Add a widget and save the tab](#add-a-widget-and-save-the-tab) | | Understand the wider dashboard | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Review sales, booking, or backlog widgets | [Sales and backlog widgets](doc:sales-and-backlog-widgets) | | Review pipeline and status widgets | [Pipeline and status widgets](doc:pipeline-and-status-widgets) | | Review management-report widgets | [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets) | ## Before you start The Dashboard requires signed-in access. Your available widgets also depend on your subscription, the active tab, and whether the dashboard is in edit mode. | Before you start… | Why it matters | | --- | --- | | Sign in | Sign in before opening the Dashboard. | | Choose the active tab | A widget already on that tab is removed from the available choices. | | Check your subscription | Widget availability checks whether the feature is included. | | Enter edit mode to arrange widgets | Dragging and resizing depend on edit mode. | The dashboard library can be replaced by a subscription-upgrade surface when the dashboard feature is not included. The widget area can also appear only when its conditions are met, so use the surface currently shown on your Dashboard. ## Open the Dashboard The Dashboard is the signed-in workspace where your configured cards and charts appear. Open it when you want to review the current tab before choosing, finding, or adding a widget. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. Open the Dashboard. 2. Check whether the dashboard library appears. 3. If the library does not appear, check for **Your role has no dashboard**. 4. Read **Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard** when that instruction appears. **Result:** The Dashboard opens with the dashboard library or the no-dashboard message visible. ![Identify the Dashboard role label, active widget titles, and visible sort controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/420ccaabe5b7987c5c6d91a5113df44f.png) ## Choose a widget catalog Choose a widget catalog according to the information you need to review. The three catalogs cover different families while sharing the same dashboard-tab surface. | If you need to review… | Choose this catalog | It groups… | | --- | --- | --- | | Top-ranked or comparative views | Top widgets | Sibling top widgets and their dashboard-tab consumers | | Sales activity, booking, or backlog views | Backlog widgets | Sibling backlog widgets and their dashboard-tab consumers | | Cash, ranking, aging, bonus, or other management views | Management-report widgets | Sibling management-report widgets and their dashboard-tab consumers | The active dashboard displayed the role label Sales Manager and the widget titles **Sales Pipeline**, **Booking This Year**, **Accounts in Sales Pipeline**, **Teams Booking vs. Target**, and **Backlog**. The catalog has no fields for you to enter. After choosing a family, use [Find and inspect a widget](#find-and-inspect-a-widget) to locate a widget on the active tab. ## Find and inspect a widget Finding a widget means locating it on the active tab and checking its displayed title before you work with it. Use the active tab's search when it is available; use the visible widget controls when you are reviewing the current tab. **Prerequisites** - The Dashboard is open. - The active tab contains the widgets you want to review. **Steps** 1. Review the widget titles on the active tab. 2. Use **Search for widget** to search the widgets already on the active tab. 3. In edit mode, select **Remove widget from tab** when you need to remove the selected widget. 4. Review **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement** when those inputs appear. **Result:** You can identify the widget you need on the active tab and use the available search, sort, or edit control. To change the tab, continue to [Add a widget and save the tab](#add-a-widget-and-save-the-tab). ![Review the active Dashboard tab and its visible controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/45aa5ceb77c1af925be210e13537079d.png) ## Add a widget and save the tab Adding a widget places another available card or chart on the active tab. Save the arrangement when the tab contains the widgets you want to keep. **Prerequisites** - The Dashboard is open on the tab that should receive the widget. - You are in edit mode. - The widget is available to your subscription and is not already selected on the active tab. **Steps** 1. Select **Add new widget**. 2. Select the widgets to add: | If you need to… | Do this | | --- | --- | | Add every available row | Select **Select all**. | | Add only chosen widgets | Select the widgets you want. | 3. Select **OK** to add the selected widgets and close the dialog. 4. Drag the widgets into the order you want on the active tab. 5. Select **Save**. After a successful save, PAMS displays `Your request was completed successfully`. **Result:** The active tab contains the selected widget arrangement. ## Handle catalog availability branches The available catalog actions change with the dashboard's subscription, active-tab, edit-mode, and empty-dashboard conditions. Use the visible branch to decide what to do next. **Prerequisites** - The Dashboard is open. **Steps** 1. Compare the surface you see with the branch that applies: | If you see… | Continue by… | | --- | --- | | A subscription-upgrade surface | Confirm that the dashboard feature is included before using the widget library. | | **Your role has no dashboard** | Follow **Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard**. | | A widget picker with already-selected widgets omitted | Choose from the remaining available widgets. | | A dashboard in edit mode | Use the available arrangement and widget controls. | 2. Return to [Choose a widget catalog](#choose-a-widget-catalog) when the dashboard library is available. **Result:** You know which dashboard surface and catalog actions are available for the current configuration. If **Search for widget** does not appear on the active tab or **Add new widget** does not appear in the edit-mode picker, use [When the catalog does not show what you need](#when-the-catalog-does-not-show-what-you-need). ## When the catalog does not show what you need Use the message on screen to identify the branch that stopped the action. The available-widget picker and widget search are separate actions: a widget can be unavailable because it is already on the active tab or because the subscription does not include it. | Message | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The dashboard request returned an error. | Review the active tab and try the action again. | | `You’ve exceeded the number of tabs` | The tab limit was reached. | Continue with an existing tab. | | `You already have a tab with the same name` | The tab name is already in use. | Use a different tab name. | | `You already have this widget in this tab` | The widget is already selected on the active tab. | Review the active tab instead of adding another copy. | Use the widget titles visible on your current tab, then continue to the page that matches your next task. ## Continue from the catalog The catalog helps you select a widget family and locate a widget; the linked pages own the next focused review or the wider dashboard explanation. **Prerequisites** - You have identified the widget family or the broader dashboard task you want to continue. **Steps** 1. Choose the next destination: | If you need to… | Open… | | --- | --- | | Understand the wider dashboard surface | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Review sales, booking, or backlog widget maps | [Sales and backlog widgets](doc:sales-and-backlog-widgets) | | Review pipeline and status widget maps | [Pipeline and status widgets](doc:pipeline-and-status-widgets) | | Review management-report widget maps | [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets) | | Configure dashboard settings | [Dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings) | **Result:** You are on the page that owns the next dashboard review or configuration task. # Default layouts ## Default layouts Default layouts is the configuration screen for reviewing and maintaining the layout assigned to a list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Identify the fields and buttons on the screen | [Understand the screen](#understand-the-screen) | | Load, normalize, reset, or save a layout | [Maintain a default layout](#maintain-a-default-layout) | | Respond to a required-field or request message | [Handle validation and request outcomes](#handle-validation-and-request-outcomes) | | Work with user-specific layouts | [Users layouts](doc:configuration-users-layouts-view) | ## Before you start Prerequisites | Item | What to have ready | |---|---| | **List num** | The list whose layout you are maintaining | | **Layout** | The layout text you are replacing or restoring | Plan to provide both **List num** and **Layout** before selecting **Save**. Both **List num** and **Layout** are required before you save. ## Open Default layouts Prerequisites - Have access to the Configuration area. Steps 1. Open **Configuration**. 2. Select **Default layouts**. ![The Default layouts screen with its fields and action buttons](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/47eecf324e01647eee396e03b267dbe4.png) **Result:** The **Default layouts** screen is open, with **List num**, **Layout**, and the layout actions visible. ## Understand the screen The screen provides the **List num** field, the **Layout** text area, and five actions for working with the selected layout. ### Fields | Field | Type and behaviour | Required | |---|---|---| | **List num** | Searchable select box | Yes | | **Layout** | Text area, 350 pixels high, with automatic resizing disabled | Yes | Both fields show a required marker. The page has no grid, configurable field, or additional conditional field surface. ### Actions | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the current layout | **Save** | | Save the current layout and leave the screen | **Save and Close** | | Remove line breaks and unnecessary whitespace from the layout text | **Stringfy** | | Restore the layout | **Reset** | | Load the layout for the selected list | **Get layout** | Four other visible controls do not have a label. Select the control that matches the layout task. ## Maintain a default layout Follow these steps to load a list's layout, adjust its text, restore the layout, or save the result. Prerequisites - Have the Default layouts screen open. - Know the list represented by **List num**. Steps 1. In **List num**, select the list whose layout you want to work with. 2. Select **Get layout**. 3. In **Layout**, review or enter the layout text. 4. Select one of the following actions: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Remove line breaks and unnecessary whitespace from the layout text | **Stringfy** | | Restore the layout | **Reset** | | Save the layout and remain on the screen | **Save** | | Save the layout and leave the screen | **Save and Close** | The **Get layout** action is disabled until **List num** has a value. Saving first validates the two required fields. A successful request displays `Your request was completed successfully`. An unsuccessful request displays `An error occurred while processing your request`. Note: Select a list in **List num** before using **Get layout**. **Result:** The selected layout is loaded, normalized, reset, or submitted according to the action you selected. ## Handle validation and request outcomes When a layout action stops or reports an outcome, match the displayed message to the appropriate response. Prerequisites - Have the Default layouts screen open. Steps 1. Select the matching row's recommended control. | What you see | What it means | Recommended control | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty. | **Save** | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The layout request completed successfully. | **Save and Close** | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The layout request returned an error. | **Save** | | **Get layout** is unavailable before a list is selected | **List num** has no value. | **Get layout** | **Result:** You have the next action for the message or control state shown on screen. ## Know what’s next User-specific layouts are maintained from **Users layouts**. Select **Users layouts** to continue there. # Dynamic validation Dynamic validation lets you choose a configuration area and decide which of its fields are mandatory. Use it when the information required from users must differ between configuration areas. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the settings area | [Open Dynamic validation](#open-dynamic-validation) | | Identify the selectors and field list | [Understand the screen](#understand-the-screen) | | Change a field's mandatory setting | [Set mandatory fields](#set-mandatory-fields) | | Leave after changing a setting | [Handle configuration branches](#handle-configuration-branches) | | Return to the configuration area | [Configuration](configuration-home.md) | | Review general error messages | [General error messages](general-error-messages.md) | | Resolve an unavailable or failed action | [Common issues and solutions](common-issues-and-solutions.md) | ## Before you start Before changing a mandatory setting, check that the feature and editing permission are available. The field list depends on the module and sub-module you select. **Prerequisites** - The mandatory-fields configuration feature is included in your subscription. - You have edit permission for the configuration area if you need to change or save settings. - You know which module and sub-module you want to configure. - You have no unsaved changes from an earlier selection when you start a new configuration task. If the feature is unavailable, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the configuration controls. If you can view the page but cannot edit it, the editor controls are not available. With these conditions in place, open Dynamic validation. ## Open Dynamic validation Open this page to select a module and review its mandatory-field settings. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in to PAMS. - The Dynamic validation route is available to you. **Steps** 1. In the **Configuration** menu, select **Dynamic validation**. 2. Confirm that the page shows the **Configuration** breadcrumb and the **Dynamic Validation** page label. ![The configuration page with **Choose Module** and save controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/42a007d927ead25a2511140e988eeb98.png) **Result:** The Dynamic validation screen is open with **Choose Module** visible. ## Understand the screen The screen uses **Choose Module** for the module choice. A property grid lists the fields returned for the selected module and sub-module. After you choose a module, choose its available sub-module and review the returned fields. | Area | What it contains | When it appears | |---|---|---| | **Choose Module** | The module choices control | When the configuration feature is available | | **Which Sub-Module** | Radio choices from the selected module's sub-module list | When that list contains entries | | **Field** | The field-name column in the property grid | When the selected sub-module returns property rows | | **IsMandatory** | The boolean column for each property row | When the selected sub-module returns property rows | | **Last Modifications** | The audit-history area | When the selected configuration has a company record | The **IsMandatory** value is changed from the property-grid row. It is not a separate checkbox. On the initial screen, **Choose Module** is present; the property rows, **IsMandatory** values, and **Last Modifications** area appear after the relevant configuration is loaded. The initial module choices shown under **Choose Module** are Tickets, Account, LG, Purchase, and Sales. ![The open **Choose Module** control and its module choices](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/597ff3505fe727563b5f2d86591602dd.png) ## Set mandatory fields Change a field’s mandatory setting and save the configuration. **Prerequisites** - The configuration screen is open. - You can edit the configuration. - You know the module and sub-module to change. **Steps** 1. Select **Choose Module**. 2. Select the module you want to configure from the available choices. 3. If **Which Sub-Module** appears, select the sub-module you want to configure. 4. In the property grid, select the row whose **Field** value you want to change. 5. Select the row again for each field whose **IsMandatory** value you want to change. 6. Choose the save route: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep working on the configuration page | **Save** | | Save the configuration and leave the page | **Save and Close** | 7. Read the save result. The save controls are available to editors after the selected configuration changes. They are disabled when there are no changes. **Result:** The selected mandatory-field configuration is saved, or **Save and Close** leaves the page after saving. ## Handle configuration branches The available path changes according to subscription access, edit permission, returned sub-modules, and whether you have changed the selected settings. **Prerequisites** - The Dynamic validation screen is open. - You know whether you are reviewing, changing, or leaving the selected configuration. **Steps** 1. Select **Which Sub-Module**, a property row, **Last Modifications**, the close control, or the applicable popup action named in the matching row. | Situation | What appears or happens | Reader action | |---|---|---| | The feature is unavailable | The subscription-upgrade surface replaces the configuration controls | Use the subscription route available to you | | The sub-module list contains entries | **Which Sub-Module** appears | Select the applicable sub-module option | | The selected sub-module returns property rows | The property grid appears | Select a property row to change its mandatory setting | | The selected configuration has a company record | **Last Modifications** appears | Select the tab to review the audit history | | You have edit permission and no changes | The editor close action leaves the page | Select the close control in the editor header | | You have edit permission and unsaved changes | A save-changes popup opens | Choose the applicable popup action | | You do not have edit permission | The non-editor close action leaves the page | Select the close control in the editor header | 2. When unsaved changes trigger the popup, read the title `Leaving Page` and the message `Do you want to save your changes?` Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the changes | **Save** | | Leave without saving | **Don't Save** | | Return to the configuration page | **Cancel** | **Result:** You remain on the page, save before leaving, or leave without saving according to the action you selected. ## When configuration goes wrong Use the message text to identify whether the problem occurred while loading a module, loading a sub-module or property list, or saving the configuration. **Prerequisites** - A message is displayed after you select a module, select a sub-module, or save the configuration. **Steps** 1. Read the message text. 2. Locate the message and operation in the matching table row. | Message | Where it appears | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Server Error` | Module-list, sub-module-list, or property-list loading | Repeat the affected selection from the corresponding procedure | | `Server Error` | Saving the mandatory-field configuration | Repeat the save action after reviewing the selected field row | | `Your Company Mandatory Fields has been Saved Successfully` | After a successful save | Continue on the page or use **Save and Close** when you are finished | | `Leaving Page` | Save-changes popup title | Choose **Save**, **Don't Save**, or **Cancel** according to your intended result | | `Do you want to save your changes?` | Save-changes popup message | Choose the popup action that matches your intended result | 3. Repeat the affected selection or save action, continue after a successful save, or choose **Save**, **Don't Save**, or **Cancel**, as the matching row directs. **Result:** You have identified the message and taken the corresponding loading, save, or save-changes action. ## After saving The saved configuration remains associated with the selected module and sub-module. When the selected configuration has a company record, **Last Modifications** provides the place to review its audit history. **Prerequisites** - The selected configuration has a company record if you want to review **Last Modifications**. **Steps** 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Review the audit-history area. 3. Return to [Configuration](configuration-home.md) when you need another settings area. **Result:** The configuration history area is open, or the configuration area is available for the next settings task. # Find active purchase job work ## Find purchase job work A Purchase Jobs work list helps you locate procurement work by its current purchasing stage. Use it to move from the request-for-quotation list to quotations and purchase orders, or to find work that has reached the archived lists. The procurement flow runs from potential work through an offer and an order to archived outcomes. An MRQ, or material requisition, is the request that starts purchasing. An RFQ is a request for supplier pricing; a quotation is the supplier's offer; and a PO is a purchase order. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find work before a supplier quotation exists | [Find active work by list](#find-active-work-by-list) and select **RFQs** | | Find supplier quotation work | [Find active work by list](#find-active-work-by-list) and select **Quotations** | | Find purchase-order work | [Find active work by list](#find-active-work-by-list) and select **POs** | | Read the columns and list tools | [Read the work list](#read-the-work-list) | | Find received, cancelled, unquoted, or rejected work | [Find archived work](#find-archived-work) | | Follow the procurement hand-offs | [Purchase job workflow](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Open the detailed purchase-job record | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | Work with archived and exception lists in detail | [Find archived and exception purchase job work](doc:purchase-job-exception-lists) | | Create or manage the request that feeds purchasing | [Create an MRQ](doc:create-mrq) | ## Before you start You need a signed-in PAMS session and access to the Purchase Jobs list. The list can be replaced by a subscription-upgrade surface, and the tabs appear on the normal breadcrumb-based list surface. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Know whether you are looking for an RFQ, a quotation, a PO, or archived work. - Open the Purchase Jobs list. You are ready to choose a Purchase Jobs tab. ## Find active work by list Use the Purchase Jobs list tabs to choose the part of the procurement flow you need. **All** is the broad list; **RFQs**, **Quotations**, and **POs** focus the list on their respective work. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - You know which kind of work you need to locate. **Steps** 1. In the Purchase Jobs list, select the option that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review all purchase work | **All** | | Find request-for-quotation work | **RFQs** | | Find quotation work | **Quotations** | | Find purchase-order work | **POs** | | Open the separate material-requisition list | **MRQs** | ![Check the active Purchase Jobs tabs and the list headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d2902cd9d56a18f8921c9ceaad681fbb.png) **Result:** You selected the requested Purchase Jobs tab or selected **MRQs** as the separate list link. ## Read the work list Each list shows the information available for that work stage. The headers can differ between lists, so use the headers currently visible rather than expecting one fixed column order. **Prerequisites** - The Purchase Jobs list is open. - You know whether you are looking for all work, an RFQ, a quotation, a PO, or archived work. - The list has finished loading its headers. | List | Headers you can use to identify a row | | --- | --- | | **All** | **Package no.**, **MRQ no.**, **Purchaser**, **Job stage**, **Package title**, **Required receiving date**, **Supplier**, **Sub-supplier order no.** | | **RFQs** | **Purchasing no.**, **MRQ no.**, **Purchaser**, **Job stage**, **Package title**, **Required receiving date**, **Supplier** | | **Quotations** | **Purchasing no.**, **MRQ no.**, **Purchaser**, **Job stage**, **Package title**, **Required receiving date**, **Offer date**, **Offer total price**, **Offer total price in main currency €**, **Offer total price (incl. tax)**, **Supplier(s)** | | **POs** | **Purchasing no.**, **MRQ no.**, **P.O. no.**, **Purchaser**, **Job stage**, **Package title**, **Forecasted receiving date**, **Order total price (incl. tax)**, **Supplier**, **Sub-supplier order no.** | | **Archived** | **Product**, **Variant**, **Package no.**, **Purchaser**, **Sub-supplier**, **Package title**, **Price**, **Price in €**, **P.O. no.**, **Stage**, **Delivery Date**, **Sales job no.** | The visible headers come from your selected list layout. The list shown for **All** also provides **Table Layout**. ![Compare the visible headers used to identify work.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1d6bc559465478e2181e2aa4de110620.png) **Steps** 1. In the Purchase Jobs list, select the tab for the work you need. 2. In the selected list, read the identifying headers in the matching row of the table above. 3. When **Filter Row** appears, use the filter cells beneath the headers to narrow the list. 4. When **Group Panel** appears, use the grouping area to group the list. 5. When **Export** appears, select **Export** to open the available export options. 6. If **Table Layout** is available, select **Table Layout** to review the list-layout tools. **Result:** The relevant list is on screen, its identifying headers are clear, and any available filter or grouping area is ready to use. Continue to [Find archived work](#find-archived-work) for archived outcomes. ## Find archived work Archived work is procurement work grouped by its received, cancelled, unquoted, rejected, or non-extended outcome. Use this branch when the work is no longer in the active RFQ, quotation, or PO list. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Purchase Jobs list surface. - You are looking for work in an archived outcome. **Steps** 1. Select **Archived**. ![Review the Archived list and its outcome choices.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/31ec5a5ea2692cb8b03d302d7f952485.png) 2. Select the outcome list that matches the work you need. | If you need to find… | Select | | --- | --- | | Received purchase orders | **Received POs** | | RFQs cancelled during purchasing | **Cancelled RFQs** | | Rejected quotations | **Rejected Quotations** | | Cancelled purchase orders | **Cancelled POs** | | RFQs without a quotation | **Unquoted RFQs** | | Quotations that were not extended | **Non-Extented Quotations** | | Rejected PO acceptance | **Rejected PO acceptance** | 3. Read the row using the headers for the archived list. ![Use the Archived headers to identify the matching work row.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/31ec5a5ea2692cb8b03d302d7f952485.png) **Result:** The selected archived outcome list is on screen with its matching rows. ### Troubleshooting > `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` # Find sales job work Sales jobs is the working list for locating sales work as it moves from **Potentials** through **Inquiries**, **Offers**, and **Orders**. Use this page to find an existing record, narrow a list, or move to an archived outcome list. Stage actions belong on the focused pages for each stage. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find early opportunity work | [Potentials](doc:potentials) | | Find a customer request | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Find offer work | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Find order work | [Orders](doc:orders) | | Find an archived outcome | [Use Archived to find outcome work](#use-archived-to-find-outcome-work) | | Continue with the full sales flow | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Work on the record after opening it | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | ## Before you start The Sales jobs list appears when your account includes the Sales jobs subscription and a saved layout is selected. Open a row only when it belongs to a branch you can access. The list has no required form fields or validation groups. Its columns come from the saved list layout, so work from the headers visible in your own list. Prerequisites - You have access to the Sales jobs subscription. - A saved list layout is selected. - The record you want belongs to the branch available to your account when you open it. ## Choose the list that contains the work Each active list groups work by its place in the sales flow. Select **Archived** for recorded outcome work. Prerequisites - You know whether you are looking for active work or an outcome. Steps 1. Open the Sales jobs list. 2. Select the list that matches the work you need: | If you need to find… | Select | | --- | --- | | All sales jobs | **All** | | Early opportunity work | **Potentials** | | Customer requests | **Inquiries** | | Offer work | **Offers** | | Order work | **Orders** | | Ended work | **Archived** | **Result:** The selected Sales jobs list is displayed. The Inquiries list also shows **Job Missing Customer Survey**. ![Identify the active Sales jobs tabs and the three visible Inquiries columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7517274068c93ed726e006d8e98f20b8.png) ## Understand the Sales jobs list The list is a grid of sales-job rows. In the Inquiries view, the grid displays **Inquiry date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage**. It displays **Opportunity** under **Inquiry type**, and **Draft** or **Sent to principal** under **Inquiry stage**. The grid also provides per-column search boxes, a date-calendar filter, colored row-edge indicators, and pagination. Open **Table Layout** to work with the list layout. It provides **Save New Layout**, **Update Current**, **Delete Current**, **Columns Chooser**, and **Expand column width**. ![Open **Table Layout** to see the product controls it provides.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8d9debb78d17f7761d951cd7c06c6b1.png) Open **Settings**. Select **Filter Row** or **Group Panel** from its menu. The archived-outcome grid does not provide the column chooser. **Incl. archived Jobs** is available in **All**; use **Archived** for the named outcome lists. The list controls are **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, **Settings**, and **Export**. ![Select Settings to see Export, Filter Row, and Group Panel.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/35fe64a414b5cdb6455f18df1a1ee8ae.png) The columns depend on the saved list layout. Use the headers currently shown in your list when you read or filter rows. ## Filter and narrow the list Use the list settings to display a filter row or a group panel. Row filtering is applied when you apply the filter; grouping is controlled through the list settings. In **All**, **Incl. archived Jobs** adds archived rows and refreshes the grid. Prerequisites - You have opened a Sales jobs list. Steps 1. Select **Settings**. 2. Choose one list option: | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Filter rows | **Filter Row** | | Group rows | **Group Panel** | | Include archived rows in **All** | **Incl. archived Jobs** | 3. Enter or select the filter values in the grid when **Filter Row** is displayed. 4. Apply the filter from the grid. If the filter contains forbidden characters, the list displays `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` Remove those characters and apply the filter again. **Result:** The grid displays the filtered or grouped list. When **Incl. archived Jobs** is selected in **All**, the grid refreshes with archived rows included. ## Use Archived to find outcome work **Archived** is the list branch for work that has finished or left the normal active route. It provides links to the outcome lists. Prerequisites - You are looking for completed or ended work rather than active Potentials, Inquiries, Offers, or Orders. Steps 1. Select **Archived**. 2. Select the outcome list that matches the work you need: | If you need to find… | Select | | --- | --- | | Lost work | **Lost** | | Regretted offer work | **Regretted to Offer** | | Cancelled inquiry work | **Cancelled Inquiries** | | Cancelled order work | **Cancelled Orders** | | Rejected order work | **Rejected Orders** | | Missed work | **Missed** | | Deleted inquiry work | **Deleted Inquiries** | **Result:** The selected archived outcome list is displayed. Outcome procedures continue on [Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs). ## Open an existing sales job record A sales-job row is the entry point to the existing record. Selecting a data row opens the record; the context menu also provides **Open in new tab**. After the record opens, its work areas include **Comments**, **Tasks**, **Activities**, **Attachment**, **Contacts**, **LGs**, and **Last Modifications**. ![Review the record companion tabs after opening a sales job.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e5869e5582b7217f252dec521d5cca03.png) Prerequisites - The target row is visible in the selected list. - The record belongs to the branch available to your account. Steps 1. Open the record using one of these options: | If you want to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Open it in the current tab | Select the row. | | Keep the list open | Select **Open in new tab** from the row context menu. | **Result:** The selected sales job record opens. ![Use the row context menu when you want a new tab.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d8e4aa2ddb9d20b20a053ff24c56788b.png) ## When a list option is unavailable Use the condition that matches what you see before retrying the list action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | The Sales jobs list, tabs, or list controls do not appear | The Sales jobs subscription is not included. | Contact your administrator about Sales jobs access. | | The grid does not appear | A saved layout is not selected. | Select a saved list layout. | | A command is missing | The action is not available in this list. | Use another visible action or contact your administrator. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the characters and apply the filter again. | | `Error loading accounts` | The account lookup used by the list could not load. | Retry the list action. | ### Messages after a row action | Message | What it tells you | | --- | --- | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The request completed successfully. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request could not be completed. | | `Job Deleted Successfully` | The sales job was deleted successfully. | ## Continue with the record Opening a record ends the locating task on this page. The focused stage pages own the actions that change the work from one stage to another. Prerequisites - You have opened the sales job record. - You know its stage. Steps 1. Select the focused page for the stage of the record you opened: | If the record is in… | Continue with | | --- | --- | | Potentials | [Potentials](doc:potentials) | | Inquiries | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Offers | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Orders | [Order completion](doc:from-orders-to-delivered) | | An archived outcome | [Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs) | **Result:** The record remains open for the next focused task. # Frequent currencies Frequent Currencies is the company list of currencies that can be made available for later company and branch work. Add a currency here before a branch uses it. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list | [Find Frequent currencies](#find-frequent-currencies) | | Understand the list and entry fields | [Understand the currency list and form](#understand-the-currency-list-and-form) | | Add or change an entry | [Add or edit a currency](#add-or-edit-a-currency) | | Remove an entry or prepare an export | [Delete or export currency data](#delete-or-export-currency-data) | | Resolve a message | [When currency maintenance goes wrong](#when-currency-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue with company configuration | [Continue with currency configuration](#continue-with-currency-configuration) | | Open another company setting | [Configuration dashboard](doc:configuration-home) | | Continue with branch settings | [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record) | ## Before you start Sign in before maintaining an entry on this list. When you open **Code**, the list contains the currencies available for this setting. The page is associated with the MultiCurrency configuration feature. **Prerequisites** - Sign in before opening the Frequent currencies route. - Confirm that your subscription includes the MultiCurrency configuration feature. - Have the currency you need ready to choose in **Code**. - Have the name available for review in **Name**. The list actions depend on the access and subscription conditions in force for your configuration: | What you need to do | What must be available | |---|---| | Add an entry | **New** is available and the subscription includes the feature. | | Change an entry | A pencil control is available at the end of the row. | | Remove an entry | A trash-can control is available at the end of the row. | | Export the list | **Export** is available in the configuration tools. | ## Find Frequent currencies Use this route to review and maintain the company's supported currency entries. **Prerequisites** - Sign in before opening the configuration route. **Steps** 1. Open the [Configuration dashboard](doc:configuration-home). 2. Select **Frequent Currencies**. If the page opens a dashboard instead of the currency list, select **Frequent Currencies** again. The dashboard screen has no currency columns. ![The Frequent Currencies entry in the company settings list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f1d0362c91df92d88332e8626efae107.png) **Result:** The Frequent Currencies list is on screen with its available list actions. ![The currency list with its available actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Understand the currency list and form The list shows the currency entries available to the company. When you open a new or existing entry, the form shows the fields used to maintain it. ![The Frequent Currencies list view](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) ### List columns and entry fields | Area | Name | Use | |---|---|---| | List and form | **Code** | Choose the currency code. This field is required. | | List and form | **Name** | Review or enter the currency name. This field is required. | | List only | Symbol | Read the currency symbol in the list. | | Saved data | Company currency identifier, company identifier, and display order | These values support the saved entry and list ordering. | The form displays the fields provided for entry maintenance. In **Code**, choose from the available currencies; the selected code can be paired with its name. ### Actions on the screen | Action | Where to find it | What it does | |---|---|---| | **New** | Above the list | Opens a new-entry form. | | Pencil control | At the end of a row | Opens the selected entry for editing. | | Trash-can control | At the end of a row | Opens the row's delete choices. | | **Export** | In the configuration tools | Opens the export choices. | The list can show an upgrade page instead of the currency list when the required subscription is not included. The form's fields and list columns depend on the settings used for your company, so work from the headers and labels that are actually on your screen. ## Add or edit a currency Adding a currency creates a company entry; editing changes the selected entry's currency details. Choose the route that matches the work you need to do. **Prerequisites** - Open the Frequent Currencies list. - Have the required **Code** and **Name** information ready. - Use this procedure only when the corresponding action is available. | If you need to… | Start with | |---|---| | Add a new company currency | Select **New** above the list. | | Change a saved currency | Select the pencil control at the end of its row. | **Steps** 1. Select the applicable action in the table. 2. In **Code**, choose the currency code. 3. Review **Name**. 4. Select **OK** to submit the entry. For a new entry, the form starts with a new item. For an existing entry, the form loads the values from the selected row. A successful new entry reports `Data saved Successfully`; a successful edit reports `Data updated Successfully`. ![The new currency form with **Code**, **Name**, and **OK**](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ae75406dae5f76a2b63c0c8ec8e146b4.png) **Result:** The currency entry is submitted and the list refreshes with the saved or updated entry. ## Delete or export currency data Deletion removes a saved currency entry; export prepares the list for an output format. These are separate list actions, so choose the path that matches your purpose. **Prerequisites** - Open the Frequent Currencies list. - Select a saved row for deletion, or confirm that **Export** is available for the list. **Steps** 1. Select the action for your goal in the table: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Remove a saved currency | Select the trash-can control at the end of the row. | | Prepare a list export | Select **Export** in the configuration tools. | 2. If you selected the trash-can control, read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. If the delete menu is open, select **Delete**. 4. If you opened the export choices, select **Cancel** to close them without continuing. Deleting reports `Data Deleted Successfully` when it completes. A related saved record reports `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted`, and another deletion failure reports `Failed to Delete`. **Result:** The export choices are closed, or the deletion path has reached its confirmation or completion message. ## When currency maintenance goes wrong Use the message on screen to choose the corrective action. The message identifies whether the problem is an incomplete entry, an invalid value, a duplicate, or a blocked list action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Code is required` | Return to **Code** and choose a currency code. | | `Name is required` | Return to **Name** and enter the currency name. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters outside the accepted set from the value being validated. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The new entry was saved. Continue reviewing the list. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The edited entry was updated. Continue reviewing the list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The deletion completed. Continue reviewing the list. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the entry and review the saved data that depends on it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Do not repeat the deletion blindly; review the row and access before trying again. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one currency entry in the list. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter value and apply the filter again. | **Result:** You have a message-specific correction for the currency action that stopped. ## Continue with currency configuration After you maintain an entry, continue with the company or branch configuration task that needs that currency. The business use is direct: before a branch uses a newly supported currency, add it to Frequent Currencies. For branch-specific settings, continue to [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record). For another company setting, return to the [Configuration dashboard](doc:configuration-home). **Result:** The supported currency is available for the next configuration task. # General error messages ## General error messages Check the Notifications screen for error-message behaviour. The Notifications screen is the place where notification requests, reminders, and assignment actions appear. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach the notification list and identify its visible tabs | [Open Notifications and identify the visible message](#open-notifications-and-identify-the-visible-message) | | Distinguish notification content from an error message | [Inspect the notification state](#inspect-the-notification-state) | | Check what is known about a failed notification operation | [When a notification operation fails](#when-a-notification-operation-fails) | | Continue after checking the result | [Continue from the result](#continue-from-the-result) | | Get help with a failure that still needs investigation | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | The screen has no success or error message entries. Switching notification tabs does not show an error, validation, confirmation, or success message. ## Before you start The Notifications screen shows notification activity and provides controls for notification requests, marking notifications as read, and accepting or declining assignments. Prerequisites - Know whether you are checking notification loading, **Mark all as read**, or an assignment action. - Open the notification route `/notifications`. - Treat the response to a failed request as unconfirmed. The screen loads notifications when it is opened outside the popup. The notification-list, mark-all-as-read, and accept-or-decline failure cases remain `UNVERIFIED`. There are no notification form fields, and the screen has no validation groups or inline validation message text. ## Open Notifications and identify the visible message Check the notification screen to identify the message or notification category currently visible. Prerequisites - You know the notification route `/notifications`. Steps 1. Open `/notifications`. 2. Confirm that the route is `/notifications`. ![Look at the Notifications screen, its tabs, and the visible notification list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/04ca7f9d9511bd3cf921c054e76e95bf.png) 3. Select one notification category. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | See all notification categories | **All** | | See requests | **Requests** | | See feedback | **Feedback** | | See reminders | **Reminders** | | See followed notifications | **Following** | 4. Check the period label and the notification message area. ![Look at the Following view and its empty-state message.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a34d31406f4d84966b0448505e336795.png) 5. Check the selected view. | If you see… | Then… | | --- | --- | | An empty list | Read `No New Notifications`. | | Notification activity | Use the visible notification content to identify the category and period. | **Result:** The Notifications screen remains at `/notifications`, with the selected category visible and the current notification content or `No New Notifications` on screen. ## Inspect the notification state Notification content tells you what activity needs attention; it is separate from an error message about the notification operation itself. Prerequisites - You are on `/notifications`. Steps 1. Check the notification tabs **All**, **Requests**, **Feedback**, **Reminders**, and **Following**. 2. Check for **Mark all as read** when you need to change the read state of the notification list. 3. For an unseen task or activity assignment, check for **Decline** and **Accept**. 4. When the selected view has no notifications, read `No New Notifications`. ![Look at the Requests view and its visible notification content.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/80c9b432b65060e37f87e017fbbac4c2.png) The notification request and reminder text belongs to Notifications. In the Notification row, an Assignment result is `Accepted` or `Declined`. The screen has no field labels or dialogs. Switching notification tabs does not show an error, validation, confirmation, or success message. **Result:** You can distinguish notification content, assignment controls, and the empty-state message `No New Notifications` from an error message. ## When a notification operation fails Compare a failed operation with the cases below when notification loading, marking all notifications as read, or accepting or declining an assignment does not produce the expected result. | What you are checking | What to look for | Status | | --- | --- | --- | | Notification list request fails | Check whether an error message appears after the operation fails. | `UNVERIFIED` | | Mark-all-as-read request fails | Check whether an error message appears after the operation fails. | `UNVERIFIED` | | Accept or decline request fails | Check whether an error message appears after the operation fails. | `UNVERIFIED` | **Result:** The failed-operation outcome is `UNVERIFIED`. ## Continue from the result Notification content questions belong to Notifications rather than to the general error-message list. Steps 1. Confirm that the route remains `/notifications`. 2. Choose where to continue. | If you are checking… | Continue at… | | --- | --- | | Notification content | [Open Notifications and identify the visible message](#open-notifications-and-identify-the-visible-message) | | A failed operation | [When a notification operation fails](#when-a-notification-operation-fails) | | A failed-request response that still needs investigation | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | **Result:** You remain on `/notifications` after the check. # Goods receipt notes ## Goods receipt notes A goods receipt note records products received against an incoming order before the goods move through warehouse handling. In PAMS, the purchase flow places the goods receipt note after a purchase order and before warehouse work. The receipt form also accepts assembly, transfer, and delivery orders as related orders. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the record and its place in the flow | This section | | Check what must be ready first | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open a new note or find one already saved | [Find a goods receipt note](#find-a-goods-receipt-note) | | Identify fields, panels, and history | [Understand the receipt screen](#understand-the-receipt-screen) | | Record quantities and save the note | [Create and save a goods receipt note](#create-and-save-a-goods-receipt-note) | | Work with different incoming-order types | [Handle order types and receipt branches](#handle-order-types-and-receipt-branches) | | Resolve a blocked save | [When saving or validating goes wrong](#when-saving-or-validating-goes-wrong) | | Continue with warehouse work | [After the receipt is saved](#after-the-receipt-is-saved) | | Understand the complete warehouse sequence | Warehouse fulfillment flow | | Record the next inspection step | Incoming inspection notes | | Locate stock by receipt | Stock by shipment | ## Before you start Before creating or changing a goods receipt note, have the incoming order ready and make sure your account can create or edit the record. The selected order determines which receipt branch and product quantities you work with. **Prerequisites** - Know the incoming order you are receiving. The **Related order no.** field groups orders as **P.O.s**, **Assmbly orders**, **Transfer orders**, and **Delivery note**. - Use the Warehouse area with permission to create a new record when you are creating a note. - Use an existing receipt with editing permission when you are changing a saved note. - The Warehouse subscription must include the receipt feature, and the page must be available. - Keep the order in a state where the relevant action is available. Order-level **Save** requires an existing receipt with a new or changed order, while **Consider PO As Not Received** requires an existing unchanged order that is not read-only. - Open the Warehouse receiving list to start a new note or open a saved note for editing. ## Find a goods receipt note The receiving list brings together goods receipt notes. Start a note from the receiving-list toolbar, or open a saved note from its row's action area. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Warehouse receiving list. **Steps** 1. Open the Warehouse receiving list. 2. Choose the task you need: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Start a note | Select the plus icon in the receiving-list toolbar | | Open a saved note | Open the saved note for editing from the receiving list. | 3. For a new note, select **Goods Receipt Note**. The receiving list may show different columns. Identify a row by the headers currently shown. ![The new goods receipt form after selecting **Goods Receipt Note**.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/93599784cf947d25c36b0cda8b1d9272.png) **Result:** A new goods receipt form opens, or the selected saved note opens for editing. ## Understand the receipt screen A goods receipt screen has a header for the related order and receipt information, an order panel for the received products, and a history tab on an existing receipt. ### Header fields | Field | What it contains | When it appears | Required marker | |---|---|---|---| | **Related order no.** | The incoming order selected for the receipt | On a new receipt as a field; after selection, the order number is shown in the order panel header | Yes | | **Recieved by** | The responsible person | On the receipt form; the control is disabled | Yes | | **Recieved on** | The receipt date | On the receipt form; the control is disabled and cannot be later than today | No | | **Sub-supplier** | The supplier associated with the incoming order | For a purchase order; for a delivery order it is displayed as a disabled text field | No | | **Sub-supplier shipment no.** | The shipment reference from the sub-supplier | For a purchase order | No | The form does not provide a Warehouse field. The received-order panel carries the product receipt information instead of a separate warehouse field. The screen also does not provide a P.O. is totally received checkbox. ### Received-products grid Open the order panel to work with its products. The panel body appears when the order is opened. Its columns are: | Column | Use | |---|---| | **Product** | Identify the received product | | **Ordered Qty.** | Read the ordered quantity; the label changes with the order type | | **Unit** | Read the product's unit | | **Received Qty.** | Enter the quantity received while the receipt is editable | | **Returned Qty.** | Read the returned quantity on an existing purchase, assembly, or transfer order | | **Stocking location** | Enter the stocking location while the receipt is editable | | **Comment** | Add a comment while the receipt is editable | The quantity labels vary by order type. The corresponding labels include **Ordered Qty.**, **Issued Qty.**, **Transferred Qty.**, **Received Qty.**, and **Returned Qty.**; the delivery-order label is also order-type specific. Use the rows already displayed in the received-products area. The screen does not provide an add control, delete controls, or an action dropdown for these rows. ![The open **Related order no.** order list with its order groups.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/57f4d9d1c6cc8a26dcdf0d702c403c86.png) The order list displays these groups: | If the incoming work is a… | Select from | |---|---| | Purchase order | **P.O.s** | | Assembly order | **Assmbly orders** | | Transfer order | **Transfer orders** | | Delivery order | **Delivery note** | On an existing receipt, use **Last Modifications** to review the record history. ![The receipt header with **Recieved by** and **Recieved on** visible.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/57f4d9d1c6cc8a26dcdf0d702c403c86.png) ![The disabled **Recieved on** field beside the receipt header fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/57f4d9d1c6cc8a26dcdf0d702c403c86.png) ## Create and save a goods receipt note To create one, enter the received quantity for each product against the selected incoming order. The saved receipt then provides the record for the next warehouse step. **Prerequisites** - You are on the new goods receipt form. - The incoming order appears in **Related order no.**. - You know the quantity received for each product. **Steps** 1. Select **Related order no.**. 2. Select the applicable order from the group that matches your incoming work. 3. Review **Recieved by**. 4. Review **Recieved on**. 5. Open the order panel by selecting its **Order Number** header. 6. Enter the quantity received in **Received Qty.** for each product. 7. Enter a stocking destination in **Stocking location** when the editable receipt requires it. 8. Enter a note in **Comment** when the receipt needs additional context. 9. Choose the save action that matches where you want to continue: | Action | Result | |---|---| | **Save** | Remain on the saved record | | **Save and Close** | Leave the page | After a successful save, PAMS displays `Your request was completed successfully`. **Save** opens the saved receipt edit page; **Save and Close** leaves the page. **Result:** The receipt is saved, the success message appears, and the selected save choice either opens the saved receipt or leaves the page. ## Handle order types and receipt branches The receipt branch follows the type of incoming order. Choose the group that describes the order; the form then presents the corresponding supplier and quantity fields. **Prerequisites** - The receipt has an incoming order or an existing order panel. - For order-level actions, the receipt is saved and editable. **Steps** 1. Choose one order type in **Related order no.**: | If you are receiving a… | Use the group | |---|---| | Purchase order | **P.O.s** | | Assembly order | **Assmbly orders** | | Transfer order | **Transfer orders** | | Delivery order | **Delivery note** | 2. For a purchase order, review **Sub-supplier** and **Sub-supplier shipment no.**. 3. For a delivery order, review the disabled **Sub-supplier** field. 4. Use the quantity labels shown for the selected order type: **Ordered Qty.**, **Issued Qty.**, **Transferred Qty.**, **Received Qty.**, or **Returned Qty.**; the delivery-order label is order-type specific. 5. On a new receipt with a selected order, select **Reset** to remove that order selection. 6. On an existing receipt with a new or changed order, select the order-level **Save**. 7. On an existing unchanged order that is not read-only, select **Consider PO As Not Received**. 8. When the action is available, select **Request Approval** on the receipt. **Result:** The receipt uses the fields and quantity labels for the selected order type, or the selected order-level action is applied. ## When saving or validating goes wrong Use the message on screen to identify what to correct before trying the save again. | Message | Condition | Action | |---|---|---| | `Shipment is empty. Please enter received quantity` | The order has no received product or no received quantity | Enter a value in **Received Qty.** for the product received, then save again | | `Received quantity is greater than order quantity` | The received quantity exceeds the order quantity | Correct **Received Qty.** so it does not exceed the ordered quantity | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | A mandatory field has not passed validation | Return to the required field, complete it, and save again | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save request returns a general error | Check the receipt values and try the save again | After a successful save, the message is `Your request was completed successfully`. ## After the receipt is saved A saved goods receipt note remains available as a receipt record for warehouse follow-up. Use **Last Modifications** on an existing receipt to review its history. The wider warehouse flow places receiving before inspection and stock handling; continue with **Incoming inspection notes** or **Stock by shipment** for those tasks. **Result:** You have a saved receipt to reopen from the receiving list, review through **Last Modifications**, or continue through the next warehouse task. ## Out of scope messages The following messages belong to other record surfaces and are not goods receipt note messages. | Message | Owning surface | |---|---| | `Amendment order deleted successfully` | Amendment-order page | # Job Profitability record ## Job Profitability records Job Profitability is the reference surface for comparing a sales job's revenue, direct cost, gross profit, and gross margin. Use it when you need to understand the financial position of one job before reviewing its purchase-order or direct-cost detail. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the job and open its reference surface | [Find and open a Job Profitability record](#find-and-open-a-job-profitability-record) | | Read the financial values and currency display | [Read the financial summary](#read-the-financial-summary) | | Inspect purchase-order or direct-cost detail | [Inspect purchasing and direct-cost detail](#inspect-purchasing-and-direct-cost-detail) | | Understand why a detail control appears | [Handle conditional detail](#handle-conditional-detail) | | Match a message to the action that produced it | [When validation or access goes wrong](#when-validation-or-access-goes-wrong) | | Continue with allocation or payment work | [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) | | Return to the list that locates the record | [Job Profitability overview](doc:job-profitability-overview) | The record groups purchasing cost and additional direct cost with the sales-job values used to review profitability. A purchase cost groups purchase-order items, while an additional cost groups cost transactions by cost type. ## Before you start Prerequisites - Have a saved sales job to review. - Have access to the Job Profitability surface. - Use a subscription that includes the surface. - Know which currency you want to read first: **Reference Currency** or **Local currency**. - Work from the columns visible in your saved list layout. - Keep the record free of unsaved edits before leaving it. Start with the Job Profitability list open and a saved job ready to review. The surface is available when your subscription includes it and the record exists. A record opened as an embedded sales-job panel can show a different set of identity fields from a record opened through the main record surface. ## Find and open a Job Profitability record Job Profitability records are opened from the Job Profitability list. Prerequisites - Have the Job Profitability list open. - Know which saved job you need to review. Steps 1. Open the saved job's row in the Job Profitability list. 2. Confirm that the Job Profitability record opens. 3. Read **Client** and **Job Title** to confirm that the opened record is the one you need. ![Check the identity fields and financial summary before reviewing detail rows.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ae071eca167e51d5b08ef6f83243e7a3.png) **Result:** The Job Profitability record surface is open with **Client** and **Job Title** visible. ## Read the financial summary The financial summary is the set of sales and cost values you use to compare the job's commercial result in the selected currency. The record shows **Client**, **Job Title**, **Sales Price**, **Actual Direct Cost**, **Gross profit**, and **Gross margin**. The live surface showed required markers on **Client**, **Job Title**, **Sales Price**, **Actual Direct Cost**, **Gross profit**, and **Gross margin**. | If you want to read… | Select or read… | |---|---| | Values in the branch's reference currency | **Reference Currency** | | Values in the local currency | **Local currency** | | The price used in the summary | **Sales Price** | | The direct cost recorded against the job | **Actual Direct Cost** | | The difference between price and direct cost | **Gross profit** | | The percentage result | **Gross margin** | Prerequisites - Have the record open. - Know which currency answers your current question. Steps 1. Read **Client** and **Job Title** to identify the record. 2. Choose the currency view that answers your question. | If you need to… | Choose… | |---|---| | Compare values in the branch's reference currency | **Reference Currency** | | Compare values in the local currency | **Local currency** | 3. Read **Sales Price**, **Actual Direct Cost**, **Gross profit**, and **Gross margin** in the selected currency. 4. Read the purchasing and additional-cost headers before opening their detail rows. The summary area also shows **Purchasing Cost**, **PO No.**, a cost column, **Package Title**, **Additional Direct Cost**, **Transaction No.**, and **Transaction Title**. ![Read the required identity fields, calculated values, and summary headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ae071eca167e51d5b08ef6f83243e7a3.png) **Result:** The record's financial values and cost-summary headers are visible in the currency view you selected. ## Inspect purchasing and direct-cost detail Use **POs** to inspect purchase-order cost detail. Use **Direct Cost** to open the **New Direct Cost** popup and review a direct-cost transaction before committing any change. Prerequisites - Have the financial summary open. - Know whether you are reviewing purchase-order cost or additional direct cost. Steps 1. Choose one detail route. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Review purchase-order cost rows | **POs** | | Review a direct-cost transaction form | **Direct Cost** | 2. If you selected **POs**, expand the purchase-order detail and read **Purchasing Cost**, **PO No.**, the cost column, and **Package Title**. 3. If you selected **Direct Cost**, read the **New Direct Cost** popup and its **OK** control. 4. Review the direct-cost fields in the popup. | Field | Type | Required | |---|---|---:| | **Cost Type** | Select list | Yes | | **Cost Classification** | Radio option | No | | **Transaction Title** | Text | Yes | | **Amount** | Number | Yes | | **Invoice Date** | Date, no later than today | Yes | | **Invoice No.** | Text | No | | **Provider** | Selectable account | Yes | | **Comment** | Text | No | 5. Read **Additional Landed Cost** and **Delivery Costs** when the classification choices are shown. 6. Read **Item No.**, **Vendor Order No.**, **Job No.**, and **Job Title** when allocation detail is shown. Use the item-price column, allocation-percentage column, and allocation-amount column for the corresponding values. ![Review the purchase-order cost rows and their column headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6047b3404670ada3f5744997fc60f81d.png) ![Review the New Direct Cost popup and its labelled fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f38bdcd178d3bdf915e5bbbcbe8edb09.png) **Result:** The purchase-order rows or the New Direct Cost form is open, with the applicable fields and detail columns visible. ## Handle conditional detail The record changes its detail choices according to the saved transaction, the number of allocated details, and the orders associated with the transaction. Read **Sales Order** as a value, not as a selectable control. Steps 1. Read the currency values for the selected currency. 2. When more than one allocated detail exists, read **Allocation Method**, the allocation- percentage column, and the allocation-amount column. 3. When order ids are present, select **Items** to open item selection. 4. When a transaction has been saved, select **Payments** to open payment details. 5. When deletion is available for an allocated item, select its delete control. 6. Choose one confirmation option. | If you want to… | Choose… | |---|---| | Keep the allocated item | **No** | | Confirm the deletion | **Yes** | The Job No. input and Actual Revenue values are not part of the visible record surface. The record header does not provide Save or Save and Close controls; direct-cost saving is handled inside the detailed transaction surface. ![Check the direct-cost choices, visible allocation columns, and the Sales Order readout.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/62a2437781f6fe654daa9e67172eaba4.png) **Result:** You can distinguish an available allocation, item, payment, or deletion control from a conditional readout or a surface that is not available in the current record view, and you can choose the applicable deletion confirmation. ## When validation or access goes wrong Use the message text to identify the action that needs attention. Messages for account, contact, MRQ, purchasing, product, CRM, letters-of-guarantee, and activity work belong to those pages. ### Direct-cost messages | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | Review the validation rows listed with the message. | | `Please select at least one order.` | Select an order before continuing. | | `Please select at least one item/product.` | Select an item or product before continuing. | | `Please enter the percentage value or delete unused items.` | Enter an allocation percentage or remove the unused item. | | `Please adjust cost allocation.` | Adjust the allocation until the total is correct. | | `Please enter valid amount.` | Enter a valid positive amount. | | `Please choose cost type.` | Choose a cost type. | | `Please choose provider.` | Choose a provider. | | `Please enter Transaction Title.` | Enter a transaction title. | | `Please choose payment due date.` | Choose the payment due date. | | `Just '-' '_' and '.' are the only characters that are accepted.` | Remove other characters from the transaction title. | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the required field marked on the form. | | `This field is required ` | Complete the required field marked on the related form. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a value within the stated range. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `The total must equal 100% ` | Adjust the allocation percentages until the total equals 100%. | | `Are you sure deleting this item?` | Choose **No** to keep the item or **Yes** to confirm deletion. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue after the saved operation completes. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the form and try the operation again. | ### Messages owned by other pages | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Required Receiving Date` | MRQ details | | `Required Receiving After` | MRQ details | | `Package must have at least one item` | Purchasing package | | `Required Offer Type` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Purchasing inquiry | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Sales offer | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Sales inquiry | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Sales inquiry | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Sales job | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Cost sheet | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Product or BOM | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Product or BOM | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Product | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Product | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Product or BOM | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Product variants | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | CRM integration | | `Please select one product` | Product selection | | `Package must have at least one item` | Purchasing package | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Product package | | `Action not allowed` | Restricted action | | `Please enter at least one email` | Email activity | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Inquiry | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Offer | | `Order must have at least one item` | Order | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Sales items | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchasing RFQ | | `Error loading accounts` | Accounts | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Serial management | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Serial management | | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Serial management | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Letters of guarantee | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | Letters of guarantee | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Notes or activities | | `An account with this name already exists` | Account details | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Account details | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Account details | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contact editor | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Account or contact editor | | `Error saving custom fields` | Custom fields | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Sales order | | `Sales order is archived` | Sales order | | `A project with this name already exists` | Projects | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Custom fields | | `Job updated successfully` | Sales job | | `Job deleted successfully` | Sales job | | `Job regretted successfully` | Sales job | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Sales job | | `Job missed successfully` | Sales job | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Sales job | | `Converted to offer successfully` | Sales job | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Sales job | | `Converted To Regretted` | Sales job | | `Converted to cancelled` | Sales job | | `Converted to lost` | Sales job | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Product or BOM | | `You don’t have permission` | Permission or access | | `LG still needs confirmation` | Letters of guarantee | | `There is no topic to print` | Notes or activities | **Result:** You can match a direct-cost message to the action that needs attention and use the owning page for work outside this record. ## Continue with the detailed work Continue to the page that owns the next operation rather than treating the summary surface as the place to complete that operation. | Your next task | Page | |---|---| | Locate another job or return to the Job Profitability list | [Job Profitability overview](doc:job-profitability-overview) | | Allocate or edit a direct-cost transaction | [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) | | Work with payments | [Payables](doc:payables) | | Review the linked sales-job context | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | | Review the record's created, modified, or deleted cost-transaction events | [Cost transactions](doc:cost-transactions) | **Result:** You know which page owns the next task and which record detail to review there. # Manage tasks from My Desk ## Manage tasks from My Desk A My Desk task is a follow-up item you manage independently of a sales job. Use the standalone task list for work you want to find by **All** or **My Tasks**. Use the sales-job task surface when the task must stay with a saved sales job. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Choose between all tasks and your tasks | [Filter and act on tasks](#filter-and-act-on-tasks) | | See completed work | [Filter and act on tasks](#filter-and-act-on-tasks) | | Create a task from My Desk | [Open My Desk task work](#open-my-desk-task-work) | | Fill in and save a new task | [Create and complete a task](#create-and-complete-a-task) | | Handle a required-field, save, delete, or loading message | [Resolve errors and continue](#resolve-errors-and-continue) | | Keep the task with a saved sales job | [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md) | ## Before you start The Tasks subscription and your user type determine whether My Desk task work is available. A new task uses the task form; an existing task can show additional task tabs and controls. The owner rule determines whether you can save or delete. Prerequisites - Sign in as a non-principal user with the Tasks subscription available. - For a new task, open the in-workspace new-task form. - For an existing task, open a saved task with a task ID. - To save or delete an existing task, be its owner and meet the control's owner condition. ## Open My Desk task work Select **Tasks** to open My Desk task work. The task list appears under **Tasks** in the My Desk workspace. Prerequisites - Sign in as a non-principal user with the Tasks subscription available. Steps 1. Open the My Desk workspace. 2. Select **Tasks**. 3. Choose the task surface you need. | If you need to… | Select or open… | |---|---| | Review the standalone list | The task list that appears under **Tasks** | | Start a task from My Desk | The plus control shown beside the **Tasks** tab | | Open a task already in the list | The task row's **Open** action | ![My Desk with the Tasks tab selected](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) **Result:** The standalone task list is open, or the in-workspace new-task surface is open for the task you want to create. ## Understand the task screen The task list lets you choose a task view and act on a row. The new-task surface collects the task's priority, title, description, dates, progress, and assignee. The main task list displays these headers: | What you use it for | Header or control | |---|---| | Choose all available task rows | **All** | | Choose your task rows | **My Tasks** | | Include completed work | **View completed tasks** | | Read the task row | **Title**, **Owner**, **Start date**, **Due date**, **Status**, **Importance** | | Refresh or change the list presentation | **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, **Settings** | The columns visible in the list follow the selected list layout. Work from the headers you see in your list. The new-task surface contains these fields: | Field | Rule or condition | |---|---| | **Task Purpose** | Required task title field | | **Priority** | Required | | **Owner** | Task owner shown on the form | | **Tags** | Available task relationship field | | **Description** | Optional | | **Start Date** | Required | | **Due Date** | Required; it cannot be earlier than **Start Date** | | **Task Progress** | Optional progress value | | **Assign To** | Optional single assignee | | **Reminder** | Available for an existing task with a task ID | The **Following** option, **Follow** control, and priority, status, creator, and owner filters are not part of this task surface. Existing tasks can also show **Sub-tasks**, **Activities**, **Comments**, **Attachment**, and **Last Modifications**. Use **Sub-tasks** for work under a parent task, **Activities** for related activity work, **Attachment** for saved-task files, and **Last Modifications** for the task history. ![Task list with the visible headers and task-view controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/472bc48b1c44ffcfbe09785961234c2d.png) **Result:** You can identify the list view, the row information, the available row menu, and the fields used to create or update a task. ## Filter and act on tasks Use the task list when you need to choose a working set or act on a task row. **All** shows the all-task view, while **My Tasks** shows your task view. Prerequisites - Open the standalone task list. - Know whether you need the all-task view, your task view, or completed work. Steps 1. Select the task view that answers your question. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Work across the all-task view | **All** | | Work with your assigned task view | **My Tasks** | | Include completed work | **View completed tasks** | 2. Select the row completion checkbox to change the task's completion state. 3. Open the task-row menu. 4. Select one of the following options. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Open the task | **Open** | | Complete an incomplete task | **Complete** | | Return a completed task to an incomplete state | **Un complete** | | Remove a task you own | **Delete** | ![Task-row menu with **Open**, **Complete**, **Un complete**, and **Delete** options](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5667c786de839d4d8e80432a1d049179.png) **Result:** The selected task view is displayed, or the task opens, changes completion state, or is prepared for deletion. ## Create and complete a task Create a standalone task from My Desk when the follow-up work does not belong with a saved sales job. The form requires a priority, task title, start date, and due date before it can save. Prerequisites - Open the new-task surface from the My Desk **Tasks** tab. - Have the task title, priority, start date, and due date ready. Steps 1. Enter the task title in **Task Purpose**. 2. Select a value in **Priority**. 3. Enter tags in **Tags**. 4. Enter optional detail in **Description**. 5. Set **Start Date**. 6. Set **Due Date** to the start date or a later date. 7. Set **Task Progress** when the task is already partly complete. 8. Select an optional person in **Assign To**. 9. Choose how to save the task. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Save and continue working on the task | **Save** | | Save and leave the task surface | **Save and Close** | 10. Open the saved task when **Save** keeps it on screen. 11. Select **Consider As Complete** when the task is overdue or due to start and you are marking it complete. 12. Select **Consider As Not Completed** when a completed task needs its date-based status recalculated. The new-task defaults set **Task Progress** to `0`, **Start Date** to the current date, and **Due Date** to the next date. Saving a valid task displays `Data saved Successfully`. **Save** keeps a newly saved task open; **Save and Close** leaves the page. ![New-task surface with its initial fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2ccbd7ee0c3c44939f1d1d13d685e3ea.png) ![New-task date fields with Due Date set after Start Date](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2ccbd7ee0c3c44939f1d1d13d685e3ea.png) **Result:** The task is saved, remains open for further work or leaves the page according to the save choice, and can be marked complete from its task controls. ## Handle task branches Task controls change with the task's owner, assignment, completion state, and whether the task already has an ID. The Tasks subscription and user type also determine whether the standalone surface is available. Prerequisites - Open a task or the new-task surface. - Check the task state shown on the task surface before selecting an action. Steps 1. Accept or decline an assigned task that you own and have not accepted. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Take the assigned task | **Accept** | | Return the assignment to the creator | **Decline** | 2. Choose the save action that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Save and continue working on the task | **Save** | | Save and leave the task surface | **Save and Close** | 3. Open **Reminder** on an existing task with a task ID. 4. Select the existing-task surface that matches the related work you need. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Work under a parent task | **Sub-tasks** | | Work with related activities | **Activities** | | Read or add task discussion | **Comments** | | Work with saved-task files | **Attachment** | | Review task history | **Last Modifications** | 5. Use the standalone task surface only when the Tasks subscription is available and you are not a principal user. **Result:** The controls shown for the task's assignment, ownership, saved state, and subscription state determine the next available action. ## Resolve errors and continue Use the message on screen to correct the immediate task problem before trying the action again. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Priority is required` | Select a value in **Priority**. | | `Title is required` | Enter a task title in **Task Purpose**. | | `Start Date is required` | Set **Start Date**. | | `Due Date is required` | Set **Due Date**. | | `Error Saving Registration` | Check the required fields and select **Save** again. | | `Only task owner can take that action` | Continue with an action available to the task owner. | | `You accepted the assigned task` | Continue working with the accepted task. | | `You declined the assigned task` | Continue with the task returned to its creator. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this task?` | Confirm the deletion only when the task is the one you intend to remove. | | `Task deleted successfully` | Continue with the task list. | | `Error while deleting task` | Remain on the task list and retry the delete action when the task is available. | | `Data Loading Error` | Use **Refresh** and check the task list again. | **Result:** You have a correction for the message shown and a next task surface to use. ## What happens next After saving, continue with the saved task or leave the page with **Save and Close**. Change its status with **Consider As Complete** or **Consider As Not Completed** according to the task's current dates and completion state. For job-filtered work, use [Sales job comments and tasks](sales-job-comments-and-tasks.md), which keeps related follow-up tasks with a saved sales job. **Result:** You know whether to continue in the standalone task surface or move to the sales-job task surface. # New branch ## New branch A branch record stores company, financial, address, and contact information for one company branch. Use this screen when you add a branch from company configuration. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review fields and choices | [Understand the branch information](#understand-the-branch-information) | | Enter and save a branch | [Complete and save branch information](#complete-and-save-branch-information) | | Review saved-branch areas | [Handle new and existing branch variations](#handle-new-and-existing-branch-variations) | | Return to the branch list | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | | Maintain a saved branch | [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record) | ## Before you start The form appears when the Branches subscription is included and the branch is loaded. Address fields appear when the branch has an address. **Default** and **Last Modifications** require a saved branch ID. **Prerequisites** - Have access to company configuration. - Have the branch name, financial-year start, reference currency, and local currency ready. - Have the address and contact values ready when you need to enter them. - Save the branch before using **Default** or **Last Modifications**. **Result:** You know what to prepare before opening or saving the form. ## Find and open the branch screen The branch list is the entry point for creating a branch or opening an existing one. **Prerequisites** - You are in company configuration. **Steps** 1. Open the branch list. 2. Choose the new-branch page to enter a branch. 3. Choose an existing branch to open its saved branch record. **Result:** The new route opens the branch form; an existing row opens its saved record. ![Identify the new branch form and save actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3c73b03785f15843d9cac884daf2ad82.png) ## Understand the branch information The form presents company, financial, address, and contact information. | Area | Fields and controls | |---|---| | Company | **Display Name**, **Full Name**, **Statement**, **Managing Director**, **Company Registration No.**, **VAT ID Number** | | Financial | **VatRate**, **Financial Year Start**, **Reference Currency**, **Local currency** | | Address | **Street**, **Zip Code**, **Country**, **State**, **City** | | Contacts | **Contact Information**, **Phone**, **Fax**, **Mobile**, **Email**, **Website**, **Online Support** | | Save | **Save**, **Save and Close** | | Field | Type and rule | |---|---| | **Display Name** | Text; required only where your company configures it | | **Full Name**, **Statement**, **Managing Director**, **Company Registration No.**, **VAT ID Number** | Text; optional | | **VatRate** | Number from `0` through `100` | | **Financial Year Start** | Day `1`, `2`, `3`, `4`, `5`, `6`, `7`, `8`, `9`, `10`, `11`, `12`, `13`, `14`, `15`, `16`, `17`, `18`, `19`, `20`, `21`, `22`, `23`, `24`, `25`, `26`, `27`, `28`, `29`, `30`, or `31`; month `January`, `February`, `March`, `April`, `May`, `June`, `July`, `August`, `September`, `October`, `November`, or `December`; required only where your company configures it | | **Reference Currency**, **Local currency** | Selectors; required | | **Street**, **State**, **City** | Text; shown when the address is present | | **Zip Code** | Number; shown when the address is present | | **Country** | List of choices; shown when the address is present | The **Financial Year Start** control offers day values `1` through `31` and month values `January` through `December`. The day choices are `1` through `31`. The month choices are `January`, `February`, `March`, `April`, `May`, `June`, `July`, `August`, `September`, `October`, `November`, and `December`. The live currency choices are `United Arab Emirates Dirham`, `Kwait Dinar`, `Euro Member Countries`, `United Kingdom Pound`, `China Yuan Renminbi`, `United States Dollar`, `Egypt Pound`, `Qatari Riyal`, and `Saudi Arabian Rial` for both currency selectors. The live **Country** list contains 244 labels, including `Angola`, `Anguilla`, `Åland Islands`, `Albania`, `Andorra`, `United Arab Emirates`, `Australia`, `Canada`, `China`, `Egypt`, `France`, `Germany`, `India`, `Italy`, `Japan`, `Kuwait`, `Mexico`, `Netherlands`, `Norway`, `Poland`, `Qatar`, `Saudi Arabia`, `Singapore`, `Spain`, `Sweden`, `Switzerland`, `Thailand`, `Turkey`, `United Kingdom`, `United States of America`, and `Zimbabwe`. ![Review the open Country list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2ce83e8c8b4ef9dbd430ecbfa161a52f.png) Phone, fax, and mobile contact values accept up to 20 characters. After you select a contact type, a field bearing that contact type's label appears for you to enter its value. **Result:** You can identify each branch field, its rule, and the choices available before entering information. ## Complete and save branch information Use this procedure to enter the branch details and submit the form. **Prerequisites** - You are on the new-branch page. - You have the information in the field tables. **Steps** 1. Enter the branch name in **Display Name**. 2. Enter the full company name in **Full Name**. 3. Enter the statement in **Statement**. 4. Enter the managing director in **Managing Director**. 5. Enter the registration number in **Company Registration No.**. 6. Enter the VAT number in **VAT ID Number**. 7. Enter a value from `0` through `100` in **VatRate**, when applicable. 8. In **Financial Year Start**, choose a day from `1`, `2`, `3`, `4`, `5`, `6`, `7`, `8`, `9`, `10`, `11`, `12`, `13`, `14`, `15`, `16`, `17`, `18`, `19`, `20`, `21`, `22`, `23`, `24`, `25`, `26`, `27`, `28`, `29`, `30`, or `31`. 9. In **Financial Year Start**, choose a month from `January`, `February`, `March`, `April`, `May`, `June`, `July`, `August`, `September`, `October`, `November`, or `December`. 10. Choose a value in **Reference Currency**. 11. Choose a value in **Local currency**. 12. Enter the street in **Street**. 13. Enter the postal number in **Zip Code**. 14. Choose the country in **Country**. 15. Enter the state or province in **State**. 16. Enter the city in **City**. 17. Select **Contact Information**. 18. Select one contact type: | Contact type | Select | |---|---| | Phone | **Phone** | | Fax | **Fax** | | Mobile | **Mobile** | | Email | **Email** | | Website | **Website** | | Online Support | **Online Support** | 19. Enter the contact value in the field that appears. For each additional contact type, repeat the contact-selection and entry actions above. Choose one save action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and remain on the record | **Save** | | Save and leave the form | **Save and Close** | | Correct a validation message | Select the field named in the message, enter a corrected value, and select **Save** again | **Result:** A successful save displays `Branch saved Successfully`; a new branch then uses its saved branch record. ![Review the form before choosing a save action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) ## Handle new and existing branch variations A new branch has the entry fields. A saved branch has an ID and can show follow-up areas. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review default-margin choices | **Default** after the branch is saved | | Review modification history | **Last Modifications** after the branch is saved | | Maintain the logo | Use the logo controls on [Edit branch logo](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record-2) | The Registration tab, Reference Commission, Reference Margin, and margin currency list are not part of the new-branch surface. Icon-only close, logo, contact-delete, and popup controls are separate maintenance actions. **Result:** You know which follow-up areas require a saved branch and where logo maintenance lives. ## When validation or saving goes wrong | Message | Corrective action | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter **Display Name**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Correct the restricted name characters. | | `required` | Choose the missing day, month, or currency value. | | `Branch does not exist` | Return to the branch list and open an available branch. | | `Logo Deleted Successfully` | Continue editing or add a logo from the saved branch form. | | `Error: Server Error` | Retry the logo action from the saved branch form. | | `Please insert degressive margin list` | Enter the required list in the saved branch margin area. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Continue from the saved branch margin area. | | `Error while saving data ` | Review the margin values and try the save action again. | | `Branch saved Successfully` | Continue to the saved branch or return to the branch list. | **Result:** Match the message on screen to the corrective action in the table. ## Continue from the branch record After a successful save, continue on the saved branch record or return to the branch list. **Prerequisites** - The branch save has completed successfully. **Steps** 1. Select **Default** for the default-margin area. 2. Select **Last Modifications** for the branch history. 3. Return to the branch list when you need another branch. **Result:** You are maintaining the saved branch or choosing another branch from the list. # New dashboard setting ## What a new dashboard setting is A dashboard setting is the saved arrangement of dashboard tabs and widgets that you create for a dashboard. Use this page when you need to create that arrangement rather than change an existing setting. The editor records the tabs and widgets, then records the changes under **Last Modifications** after a successful save. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the list of saved dashboard settings | Dashboard settings | | Create a setting | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Open a new dashboard setting](#open-a-new-dashboard-setting) | | Change a saved setting | Edit dashboard setting | | Use the finished dashboard | Dashboard overview | ## Before you start The editor protects unsaved changes when you leave it. Prerequisites - You are signed in to PAMS. - You have the dashboard-setting route available in Configuration. - You know the tabs and widgets that the dashboard needs. The editor starts in editing mode. The available editor controls are **Widget**, **Tab**, **Save**, and **Save and Close**. The saved-record history area appears after the dashboard has been saved. ## Open a new dashboard setting Use the **Dashboard settings** entry in Configuration when you want to create a new dashboard-setting record. Prerequisites - You are signed in to PAMS. Steps 1. Open **Dashboard settings** from the Configuration menu. 2. Open the new-setting route at `/configuration/dashboard-settings/new`. ![Look at the editor controls available on the new dashboard-setting screen.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/bec5e08092ff44e073ddd9a2f6236541.png) **Result:** The dashboard-setting editor opens at `/configuration/dashboard-settings/new` with **Widget**, **Tab**, **Save**, and **Save and Close** available. ## Understand the editor The editor combines the dashboard tabs, the active tab, and the controls for saving the setting. It also provides a **Last Modifications** area for a saved dashboard. **Widget** is available for the active user-dashboard tab. It is disabled when there are no dashboard tabs or when the active tab is not a user dashboard. The tab options menu is available for the active tab when its tab settings allow the menu. The top controls are: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a widget to the active user-dashboard tab | **Widget** | | Add or choose a dashboard tab | **Tab** | | Store the setting and remain in the editor | **Save** | | Store the setting and leave the editor | **Save and Close** | | Rename the active tab | **Rename tab** | | Remove the active tab | **Delete tab** | The active tab area changes with the tab you select. When the active tab contains widgets and is a user dashboard or MRM report, its tab menu provides a **Content:** area and **Search for widget**. The **Last Modifications** tab and its history appear after the dashboard has been saved. ## Add a tab and its widgets A blank tab is a user-dashboard tab that you name before adding its widgets. Prerequisites - The new dashboard-setting editor is open. - The **Tab** menu is available. Steps 1. Select **Tab**. 2. Select **Blank Tab**. ![Look at the choices in the open tab menu.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/946b27c58c1cca82714bc95a7cabc9c9.png) 3. Enter a name in **New Tab**. 4. Select **OK**. 5. Select **Widget**. The widget selection applies to the active user-dashboard tab. When the tab contains widgets, use **Search for widget** in its **Content:** menu to find a widget by title. If you leave **New Tab** empty, the form displays `This Field Is Required`. ![Look at the required marker on **New Tab** and the **OK** button in the blank-tab dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5b694392a35487a925caa022a07ace44.png) **Result:** A named dashboard tab is available for widget selection, or the blank-tab dialog remains open until **New Tab** contains a value. ## Choose the tab variation The **Tab** menu offers a blank tab, two special dashboard tabs, and an import path. Choose the path that matches the dashboard you are building. Prerequisites - The new dashboard-setting editor is open. - The **Tab** menu is available. Steps 1. Select **Tab**. 2. Choose one option from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Create a user-dashboard tab that you name yourself | **Blank Tab** | | Add the principals report tab | **Principals Report** | | Add the Eagle View tab | **Eagle View** | | Bring tabs from another dashboard role | **Import From** | 3. If you selected **Import From**, choose a dashboard in **Another role dashboards**. 4. Select the tabs to bring across in **Select tab(s)**. 5. Select **All (Replace existing tabs)** when you want the imported tabs to replace the current tabs. After the selected source dashboard has tabs, the tab-selection checkboxes appear. **Result:** The selected tab variation is added to the dashboard editor when that path completes. ## Save the dashboard setting Saving stores the dashboard tabs and widgets as one dashboard setting and records the changes in its modification history. Prerequisites - You have added the tabs and widgets that the setting needs. - The editor is open and **Save** is available. Steps 1. Select the control shown in the table for the outcome you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Remain in the editor | **Save** | | Leave the editor | **Save and Close** | The save operation counts the dashboard tabs and widgets, stores the dashboard arrangement, saves the dashboard, and then saves the modification log. A successful modification-log save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. **Save and Close** then leaves the page. **Result:** The dashboard setting is stored; **Save** leaves you in the editor, while **Save and Close** leaves the page after the modification log is saved. ## When the task does not complete Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in **New Tab**, then select **OK** again. | | `You already have this tab in this dashboard` | Return to the tab choices and keep one instance of the special tab. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Return to the action you were taking and retry it from the editor. | | `Are you sure you want to ultimately delete this tab and all it's content ?` | Select **Delete** to remove the tab and its content, or **Cancel** to close the confirmation menu. | ## Out of scope | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Please choose one or more principals` | Principals report | ## After saving Use the Dashboard settings list to review the saved record and open the edit surface when you need to change it. Use Dashboard overview for the dashboard itself and its widgets. **Result:** You know where to review or edit the setting and where to continue using its tabs and widgets. # New report setting ## New report setting A new report setting is the configuration surface where you arrange report tabs, widgets, and report-view options. A report tab groups related widgets in that view. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check fields, values, and actions | [Understand the report-setting screen](#understand-the-report-setting-screen) | | Add tabs or widgets and set options | [Configure report tabs and options](#configure-report-tabs-and-options) | | Import tabs | [Handle import and conditional report-setting branches](#handle-import-and-conditional-report-setting-branches) | | Save or review history | [Save and review the report setting](#save-and-review-the-report-setting) | | Find an existing setting | [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings) | | Maintain an existing setting | [Edit report setting](doc:configuration-reports-settings-edit-record) | This page covers the fields, workflow uses, and save-related outcomes for the new-setting surface. ## Prerequisites Before you start, make sure you can open `/configuration/reports-settings/new` and that the page is in edit mode. When the page is editable, **Widget**, **Tab**, **Save**, and **Save and Close** are available. No field is marked as required on the page. After you change the page, leaving may open a confirmation prompt. ## Find the new report-setting page The new report-setting page is `/configuration/reports-settings/new`. Use the Reports settings list to find a saved setting, and use the edit page to maintain one that already exists. ## Understand the report-setting screen The screen combines report-content controls with two option readouts. | Field or readout | Type and rule | When it appears | |---|---|---| | **Editable prev. months** | Clickable value; no required rule | Edit mode | | **Time Frame** | Clickable value; no required rule | Edit mode | | **Another role dashboards** | Each option is the name of a saved report view available from another role. | Import popup | | **Select tab(s)** | Checkbox group; no required rule | Import popup after a source report has selectable tabs | | **All (Replace existing tabs)** | Checkbox; no required rule | A selected source report has one or more tabs | | **number of editable Prev. months** | Number; no required rule; minimum `1`, maximum `11` | Previous-months popup | The available options are the names assigned to saved report views from other roles. The page displays the current values for **Editable prev. months** and **Time Frame**. The page showed **Widget**, **Tab**, **Save**, and **Save and Close**. The page does not mark these controls as required. The tab choices also include inactive entries for Principals Report and Eagle View; they are not available actions. ![Check **Editable prev. months**, **Time Frame**, and the four available buttons.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e6941896f46cc65126cde07f3603b93a.png) | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a report widget | **Widget** | | Open tab choices | **Tab** | | Save and remain on the page | **Save** | | Save and leave the page | **Save and Close** | | Review saved changes | **Last Modifications**, when available | ## Configure report tabs and options Use **Widget**, **Tab**, and **Time Frame** to arrange the report view. Prerequisites - You are on `/configuration/reports-settings/new`. - The page is in edit mode. - You know whether you are adding a widget, adding a tab, importing tabs, or changing an option. Steps 1. Select **Widget** to open the widget-adding flow when the setting has a report tab. 2. Select **Tab** to open the tab choices. 3. Choose one route from the tab choices. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Create a blank tab | **Blank Tab** | | Import tabs from another report setting | **Import From** | 4. Select **Editable prev. months** to open the previous-months option. 5. Enter a number from `1` through `11` in **number of editable Prev. months**. 6. Select **Time Frame** to open the time-frame choices. ![Review **number of editable Prev. months** before entering its value.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/26b03aa4e55863050056ba4f2be94b51.png) ![Review the time-frame readout before choosing a time frame.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/26b03aa4e55863050056ba4f2be94b51.png) **Result:** The selected tab or widget change and its options are ready to save. ## Handle import and conditional report-setting branches The import route copies report tabs from another saved source. **Another role dashboards** contains saved sources for other roles, and each choice is shown by its name. The current source and sources without saved report content are filtered out. | Surface | Appears when | |---|---| | **Another role dashboards** | The import popup is open | | **Select tab(s)** | A source report has one or more selectable tabs | | **All (Replace existing tabs)** | A source report has one or more selectable tabs | | **number of editable Prev. months** | The previous-months popup is open | Prerequisites - You are in edit mode. - You have a source report available for the import route. Steps 1. Select **Import From**. 2. Select an option in **Another role dashboards**. Each option is the name assigned to a saved report view from another role. 3. Choose how to select the imported tabs. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Replace the existing tabs with all tabs | **All (Replace existing tabs)** | | Choose specific tabs | Individual checkboxes under **Select tab(s)** | ![Open the import action from the tab choices.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/dc7c996cf982d1bd1966abb776a635de.png) ![Review the source-report and tab-selection area.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/dc7c996cf982d1bd1966abb776a635de.png) **Result:** The selected report tabs are prepared for the report setting. ## Save and review the report setting After a successful save, the page refreshes modification history. Use **Save** to remain on the page, or **Save and Close** to leave after saving. Prerequisites - You have completed the tab, widget, and option changes you want to keep. - You are on the report-setting page in edit mode. Steps 1. Select one save action. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and remain on the page | **Save** | | Save and leave the page | **Save and Close** | 2. Read the result message. 3. Select **Last Modifications** when the history area is available. ![Review the save controls before committing the setting.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/23c2b5301146c37365a9f9dfa1a7347b.png) ![Review **Save and Close** before leaving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/23c2b5301146c37365a9f9dfa1a7347b.png) **Result:** A successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`, and the page refreshes modification history. ## When saving or navigation goes wrong Use the exact message to identify the branch you are in, then apply the corresponding action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | The save sequence completed | Continue on the page or select **Save and Close** | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | A save request returned an error | Review the setting values and select **Save** again | | `You already have this tab in this dashboard` | The selected tab already exists | Choose a different tab or review existing tabs | | The import choices are not shown | The import area does not currently show its selectable source or tab area | Open **Import From** again | | **Last Modifications** is not available | The history area is unavailable in the current page state | Continue with the report-setting work and review history when available | ## Continue after saving After saving, use [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings) to locate the saved setting. When it needs maintenance, open [Edit report setting](doc:configuration-reports-settings-edit-record). # Plan details ## Overview A plan is a configuration record that names a plan, sets its price and capacity limits, marks it active, and assigns features. Use this page to review or maintain those values. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Check the values held by a plan | [Understand the plan details screen](#understand-the-plan-details-screen) | | Open a saved plan | [Find and open a plan](#find-and-open-a-plan) | | Change plan values or feature assignments | [Maintain a plan](#maintain-a-plan) | | Resolve a validation or request error | [When loading, saving, or validating goes wrong](#when-loading-saving-or-validating-goes-wrong) | | Return to the list of plans | [Plans](doc:configuration-plans) | | Maintain company features | [Company features](doc:configuration-features-record) | The record contains the plan name, price, counts for users, branches, teams, and roles, an **Active** checkbox, and a feature list with **Selected** and **Feature** columns. Start with the prerequisites when you need to open a record, or use the screen reference when you are checking fields. ## Prerequisites Open an existing plan to load its details, or open a new plan record to enter new values. The form appears when the plan record is available. The feature list appears when the list contains at least one feature. **Save** is enabled when the current plan differs from its original values and disabled when there are no unsaved changes. | Before you start | What to check | | --- | --- | | Existing plan | Open the plan from the plans list. | | New plan | Open a new plan record. | | Record form | Confirm that the plan details form is visible. | | Feature list | Confirm that the feature grid is present before selecting a feature. | | Save state | Change a value before selecting **Save**. | When these checks are complete, find and open the plan. ## Find and open a plan Select a plan in the plans list to open its details. Prerequisites - You are on the plans list. - The plan you want to open appears as a row. Steps 1. Select the plan row in the list. ![Review the plans list headers before opening a plan](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6bc05d9c960b43d21c87413b6115abdd.png) **Result:** The selected plan opens on its plan details form. Continue to Understand the plan details screen to identify its fields and feature grid. ## Understand the plan details screen The plan details screen is the form where you review the plan's identity, pricing, capacity limits, activity, and feature assignments before you maintain it. The form displays these fields: | Field | Type | Required | Rule or format | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Plan name** | Text box | Yes | Required; the name uses the no-special-character pattern validation. | | **Plan Price** | Number box with a currency picker | No | Minimum `0`; format `#,##0.00`. | | **Users count** | Number box | Yes | Minimum `0`; maximum `99`; format `#,##0.00`. | | **Branches count** | Number box | Yes | Minimum `0`; maximum `99`; format `#,##0.00`. | | **Teams count** | Number box | Yes | Minimum `0`; maximum `99`; format `#,##0.00`. | | **Roles count** | Number box | Yes | Minimum `0`; maximum `99`; format `#,##0.00`. | | **Active** | Checkbox | No | Select it to mark the plan active. | The feature grid appears when the feature list contains rows. Its visible columns are: | Column | What it represents | | --- | --- | | **Selected** | Whether the feature is selected for the plan. | | **Feature** | The feature name. | After identifying the fields and grid, maintain the plan values. ## Maintain a plan Use this procedure to change plan values and feature assignments, then save the changes. Prerequisites - The plan details form is visible. - You know the plan name, price, and capacity limits to enter. - The feature grid is visible if you need to change feature assignments. Steps 1. Enter the applicable values in the plan fields. | Field | Value to enter | | --- | --- | | **Plan name** | Enter a value that meets the required and pattern rules. | | **Plan Price** | Enter a value from `0` upward. | | **Users count** | Enter a value from `0` through `99`. | | **Branches count** | Enter a value from `0` through `99`. | | **Teams count** | Enter a value from `0` through `99`. | | **Roles count** | Enter a value from `0` through `99`. | 2. Select **Active** when the plan must be active. 3. Select a feature row in the feature grid to change its selection. 4. Select **Save**. The numeric fields accept values from `0` through `99` where the field defines both bounds. **Plan Price** accepts values from `0` upward. A change makes **Save** available; restoring the original values makes **Save** unavailable again. **Result:** The plan is saved with the entered values, and the returned plan replaces the values currently held on the screen. ## When loading, saving, or validating goes wrong Use the message text to identify the condition and the corrective action. | Message | When it appears | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty when validation runs. | Enter a value in **Plan name**, **Users count**, **Branches count**, **Teams count**, or **Roles count**. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | **Plan name** contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Replace the unsupported character in **Plan name**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Loading the plan, saving the plan, or loading the feature list returns an error. | Check the request and retry the operation. | ## After maintaining a plan After **Save** completes, the returned plan replaces the values held on the screen. Use [Plans](doc:configuration-plans) to return to the plans list, or use [Company features](doc:configuration-features-record) when the feature definitions themselves need maintenance. Continue with the plans list after saving, or remain on the record to review the returned values. # Pricing Quotation RFQs An RFQ is a purchasing request that collects supplier information before you prepare a quotation. Use it to record the shared Pricing Quotation information, requested items, supplier requirements, and the route you use to submit the request or move it into quotation work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand how Pricing Quotations fit into the wider work list | [Pricing Quotation](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) | | Create or work an RFQ | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Complete and save the RFQ](#complete-and-save-the-rfq) | | Send the request or mark it submitted | [Send the RFQ or mark it submitted](#send-the-rfq-or-mark-it-submitted) | | Continue with quotation details | [Pricing Quotation quotations](doc:pricing-quotation-quotations) | | Work from the active Pricing Quotation lists | [Pricing Quotation active lists](doc:pricing-quotation-active-lists) | | Handle an RFQ in an exception list | [Pricing Quotation exception lists](doc:pricing-quotation-exception-lists) | ## Before you start Have the purchasing information and the requested items ready before you create the record. The RFQ panel is the part of the record where you enter supplier and deadline information. It is available when an inquiry exists and the purchasing job is after Unknown and before Offer, or when the job is Deleted. The panel body opens while its inquiry is open. **Prerequisites** | You need | Why it matters here | |---|---| | A saved or new Pricing Quotation record | **Save** is available for an editable saved record when the inquiry is new or changed. | | The purchaser and product type | These are required record-information fields. | | The package title | This identifies the shared record. | | The supplier, RFQ date, and requested bid information | These complete the RFQ panel; **Required Offer Type** and **Required Bid Due Date** are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. | | The item description, unit, and quantity | The RFQ item grid uses these columns; quantity accepts values from `1` through `999999`. | | Permission to edit the record | An embedded record or a record without edit permission is read-only. A sent RFQ item grid remains locked until **Enable Editing** is used. | ## Find or start an RFQ The RFQs list is the work list for existing requests. It shows the request number, sales-job number, purchaser, offer type, bid due date, supplier, client, RFQ stage, and package title. **Prerequisites** You need access to the Pricing Quotations work list and, for an existing record, its saved record address. **Steps** 1. Open **Pricing Quotations**. 2. Select **RFQs** to view the RFQs list. 3. Choose the route that matches your task: | If you need to… | Open or select | |---|---| | Start a new record | **Pricing Quotations** > **RFQs** > new-record entry point | | Work an existing RFQ | **Pricing Quotations** > **RFQs** > saved record | 4. Use the list tabs **All**, **RFQs**, **Quotations**, and **Archived** to move between the available Pricing Quotation lists. ![The RFQs list headers, tabs, and list controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2dfbdd15c2b9ed42fadc84c349c4bb2e.png) **Result:** The RFQs list is on screen, or the selected new or saved record is open for entering record information and items. ## Enter record information and items The shared record information identifies the purchasing request, and the item rows state what the supplier must address. Start with the shared fields, then review the requested items. **Prerequisites** Open **Pricing Quotations**. Select **RFQs**. Use the new-record entry point to create the shared record, or select a saved RFQ record to review its information and items. **Steps** 1. Review **Branch**. It is read-only in the shared record information. 2. Select the responsible person in **Purchaser**. 3. Select the applicable value in **Product Type**. 4. Enter the record name in **Package Title**. 5. Enter the value and unit in **Shipment Time Frame** when the field is present. 6. In **Job items**, enter or select the requested item values: | Field | What to enter | |---|---| | **Item Description** | The requested product or item. | | **Unit** | The unit for the item. | | **Qty** | A quantity from `1` through `999999`. | 7. Review the item grid before saving. The RFQ grid shows **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. ![The new-record fields and RFQ item grid](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9a01e3cbd17b0fb622f53b0e66bdc9df.png) **Result:** The shared record information and requested item rows are on screen and ready for the RFQ panel or the record save. Continue to [Complete and save the RFQ](#complete-and-save-the-rfq). ## Complete and save the RFQ The RFQ panel adds supplier and deadline information to the shared record. Complete it before you submit the request so the supplier receives the information needed for the quotation. **Prerequisites** The record must contain at least one inquiry. The record must be editable, and the inquiry must be new or changed before **Save** is available for the RFQ panel. **Steps** 1. Select or review the supplier in **Vendor**. 2. Select **Required Offer Type** when your company requires it. 3. Enter **RFQ Date**. The date cannot be later than today. 4. Enter **Required Bid Due Date** when your company requires it. The date cannot be earlier than **RFQ Date**. 5. Save the work using the action that matches your change: | If you are… | Select | |---|---| | Saving RFQ panel changes | **Save** in the RFQ panel header | | Creating the shared record rather than saving an inquiry change | **Save** or **Save and Close** in the record header | ![The new Pricing Quotation record with Save and Save and Close](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7c87116128b0a7487790bb2a2eff3ad5.png) **Result:** The RFQ changes are saved and ready for submission, or the form identifies the required correction. Continue to [When the RFQ cannot be completed](#when-the-rfq-cannot-be-completed). ## Send the RFQ or mark it submitted Submission has two routes. Use **Send RFQ To Sub-supplier** when your access and subscription include email sending. Without the send permission, use **Consider RFQ As Submitted To Sub-supplier** instead. **Prerequisites** The RFQ must be saved and unchanged. For the external-send route, email sending permission and the Send Email subscription must be present. **Steps** 1. Open the RFQ panel's three-dots menu. 2. Choose the route that matches your access: | If your route is… | Select | |---|---| | Email sending is available | **Send RFQ To Sub-supplier** | | Email sending is not available | **Consider RFQ As Submitted To Sub-supplier** | | The RFQ is already at SentToPrincipal and must be sent again | **Re-send RFQ To Sub-supplier** | 3. Read the confirmation after the consider-submitted route. The product message is `Inquiry submitted to client`. **Result:** The RFQ is sent through the available email route or is marked as submitted without email sending, ready for the applicable quotation action. ## Convert the RFQ to a quotation Conversion moves eligible RFQ work into quotation work. The RFQ action menu also provides state-specific ways to return, edit, regret, or cancel the request. **Prerequisites** The RFQ must be at the stage required by the action. **Convert to offer**, **Consider RFQ As Not Submitted**, **Enable Editing**, **Regretted To Offer**, and **Cancel RFQ** are available when the RFQ is at SentToPrincipal or ConsederAsSentToPrincipal. **Re-send RFQ To Sub-supplier** is available at SentToPrincipal. **Steps** 1. Open the saved RFQ panel's three-dots menu. 2. Select **Convert to offer** when the RFQ is ready to become quotation work. 3. Read the confirmation `Purchasing job converted to offer successfully`. 4. For a different RFQ outcome, select the action that matches the work you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Return the RFQ to an unsubmitted state | **Consider RFQ As Not Submitted** | | Change a sent RFQ | **Enable Editing** | | Regret the RFQ back toward offer work | **Regretted To Offer** | | Cancel the RFQ | **Cancel RFQ** | **Result:** After **Convert to offer**, the purchasing job is in quotation work. The other menu choices keep the work in the RFQ branch described by the selected action. ## When the RFQ cannot be completed Use the exact message on screen to identify whether a field, quantity, or item selection needs attention. Required fields can also depend on your company's mandatory-field settings. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `This field is required` | Complete the field carrying the required marker. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a positive quantity from `1` through `999999`. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Review the fields marked as required and select **Save** again. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add an item to the inquiry. | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Select one or more items before creating the RFQ. | **Required Offer Type** and **Required Bid Due Date** are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. **Required Bid Due Date** must not be earlier than **RFQ Date**. The RFQ item grid uses **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. Work from those visible headers when entering the request. **Result:** You have a message-specific correction to make, or the RFQ is ready for the next submission or quotation action. # Questions Use this page to find the Questions list, review its fields, and open a new question entry. ## Questions A question entry is a question text paired with a survey answer selection. Maintain the Questions list when you need to add or update the questions available to a survey. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the list and review its entries | [Find Questions](#find-questions) | | Check the list column and form fields | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Open a new entry | [Add or maintain a question](#add-or-maintain-a-question) | | Work with rating types | [Rating types](doc:configuration-iso-survey-answers) | | Work with the customer satisfaction survey | [Customer satisfaction survey](doc:configuration-iso-survey-model) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Open the Questions page. - The Questions feature must be included in your subscription for the list and its actions to appear. - Work from the columns and controls visible in your own list and form. ## Find Questions The Questions list is the reference screen for the question entries used by the configuration. **Steps** 1. Open the Questions page. ![The Questions list with its heading, navigation labels, and available actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7710faf81b44de9638330677aefe67a4.png) 2. Confirm that the page heading is **Questions**. 3. Confirm that the page also displays **ISO settings** and **Configuration**. 4. Locate **New** above the list. **Result:** The Questions list is open, with **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** available. ## Understand the list and form The list shows question entries in a single **Question** column. The entry form uses a **Question** text field and a survey answer selection. | Area | What appears | Details | |---|---|---| | List | **Question** | One column appears. | | New-entry form | **Question** | The field carries a required marker and receives the first form focus. | | New-entry form | Survey answer selection | The configuration marks this field as required. | | List | Select **New** to add an entry; use the row menu to edit or remove one. | You cannot add, edit, or delete rows directly in the list. | | List | Filters and headers | Row filtering, header filtering, and column headers are disabled for Questions. | A row count appears beneath the list. ![The landed Questions list with the Question column and row count](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6ffdd1f120a81d64d50e2038dbcb884b.png) ### Open the new-entry dialog Selecting **New** opens a dialog titled New Question. The dialog displays the labelled **Question** field with a required marker and an **OK** control. ![The New Question dialog with the required Question field and OK control](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/31b2ea064fbe48ef29457902e857e995.png) ## Add or maintain a question Use these procedures to add, edit, remove, or export a Questions entry. ### Add or edit a question **Prerequisites** - You are on the Questions list. - **New** is available, or the row menu contains an edit action. **Steps** 1. Choose how to open the form. | If you want to… | Select… | |---|---| | Add a question | **New** | | Edit an existing question | The row edit action | 2. In **Question**, enter the question text. 3. Complete the survey answer selection required by the form. 4. Select **OK** to submit the dialog. **Result:** The new or edited question is submitted through the form. ### Delete a question **Prerequisites** - You are on the Questions list. - The row menu contains a delete action. **Steps** 1. Open the row delete menu. 2. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The selected question is submitted for deletion. ### Export the Questions list **Prerequisites** - You are on the Questions list. - **Export** is available. **Steps** 1. Select **Export** in the export action surface. **Result:** The export action is started. Popup branches can provide **Save**, **Cancel**, and **Don't Save** controls. Use the control that appears in the popup you are working in. ## Handle variations The Questions screen changes according to access and feature conditions. | If… | Then… | |---|---| | Your subscription does not include Questions | The list and its actions do not appear. | | The new-entry action is available | **New** appears above the list. | | Editing is allowed | The row edit action appears. | | Deleting is allowed | The row delete menu appears. | | You open a question for adding or editing | The fields used by that entry appear. | After choosing an action, use the messages below if the form or action stops. ## When question maintenance goes wrong Use the message text below to identify the point at which the form or action stopped. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Field is required` | Complete the required field that raised the message. | | `Question is required` | Enter a value in **Question**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Change the entry so it uses the accepted characters. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and submit the form again. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The new entry has been saved. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The edited entry has been updated. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The selected entry has been deleted. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Review the saved data related to the entry before deleting it. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete action did not complete. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the list. | ## Continue with related ISO settings The Questions list is part of ISO settings. Continue to a sibling page when your task concerns another part of the survey configuration: - [Rating types](doc:configuration-iso-survey-answers) contains the rating-type reference list. - [Customer satisfaction survey](doc:configuration-iso-survey-model) contains the survey-model configuration. # Reference category question units ## Reference category question units Reference category question units connect a category question with one or more units used in category configuration. Open the Questions unit list. The page title is **Questions unit**, and a new entry opens in a `New Question unit` dialog. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the list and its columns | [Find and review the list](#find-and-review-the-list) | | Understand the fields and rules | [Understand the fields and rules](#understand-the-fields-and-rules) | | Create or change a unit entry | [Add or edit an entry](#add-or-edit-an-entry) | | Maintain related category data | [Reference category](configuration-reference-list-reference-category-view.md) | | Return to the wider reference-list area | [Reference list data](reference-list-data.md) | | Resolve a maintenance message | [When saving or deleting goes wrong](#when-saving-or-deleting-goes-wrong) | ## Before you start Before maintaining a unit entry, have the category and its questions available for selection, the unit value or values to record, and the access needed for the action you intend to take. **Category** loads category-question data, and **Category qustion** uses the questions associated with the selected category. | Have or confirm | Why it matters | |---|---| | Access to the configuration area | The list and **New** action depend on the subscription condition. | | Permission to edit | The row edit action is available only when editing is allowed. | | Permission to delete | The row delete menu is available only when deletion is allowed. | | Category reference data | **Category** supplies the categories available for selection. | | Questions for the selected category | **Category qustion** uses the associated questions. | | Unit value or values | Each **Unit** entry is required. | With the reference data and access in place, find the Questions unit list and review its entries. ## Find and review the list The Questions unit list is where you review category-question unit entries before opening an existing row or creating a new one. **Prerequisites** - You have the access and reference data described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). **Steps** 1. Open the Questions unit list. 2. Confirm the page title is **Questions unit**. ![The Questions unit title and arrival controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5d86489b55f7fbe1ba5781d96239c6a3.png) 3. Read the visible list headers. 4. Confirm the headers are **Category** and **Question**. 5. Choose the list action you need. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Inspect list settings | **Settings** | | Create an entry | **New** | ![The Questions unit list with Category and Question headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/410c6c1915a43d9783f21a13fd876f38.png) **Result:** You have reviewed the **Category** and **Question** columns and can choose the list action needed for the next task. ## Understand the fields and rules The list shows the category and question for each entry. The dialog uses **Category**, **Category qustion**, and **Category questions unit** before you enter one or more **Unit** values. | Field or list value | What it does | Rule | |---|---|---| | **Category** | Selects the category used to load its questions. | Required in the new/edit dialog. | | **Category qustion** | Selects a question associated with the selected category. | Required in the new/edit dialog. | | **Category questions unit** | Groups the unit entries in the dialog. | Required in the new/edit dialog. | | **Unit** | Holds one unit value. | Required for each unit entry. | | **Category** in the list | Identifies the category for the entry. | Shown as a list column. | | **Question** in the list | Identifies the question for the entry. | Shown as a list column. | Select **Category** before **Category qustion**; the available questions depend on the selected category. The three dialog fields carry required markers. The units collection is shown in the dialog, while the grid does not edit rows directly; use the row edit action instead. The fields and rules are clear before you begin adding or editing an entry. ## Add or edit an entry Adding or editing a category-question unit entry records the selected category, its question, and one or more unit values in the new/edit dialog. **Prerequisites** - You are on the **Questions unit** list. - The category and its questions are available for selection. - **New** is available, or the row edit action is available for the existing entry. **Steps** 1. Choose the entry point for the task. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Create a new entry | **New** | | Change an existing entry | The row edit action | 2. For a new entry, confirm that the dialog title is `New Question unit`. ![The new question-unit dialog with its required fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d6386f8056d7d5452afcbf9f0f4a8184.png) 3. In **Category**, select the category whose question you are configuring. The **Category qustion** selector lists question records from the selected category and displays each record's question text. 4. In **Category qustion**, select the associated question. 5. In **Category questions unit**, enter the unit value. 6. Select **Add more** when the entry needs another unit value. ![The dialog after another unit entry is added](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1141e90ddfc4e1bef5330991b7eb31c4.png) 7. Enter a value in each additional **Unit** entry. 8. Select the unlabeled control immediately beside a unit entry to remove that entry. 9. Select **OK** to submit the dialog. The form validates before saving. **Result:** The new/edit dialog contains the selected category, associated question, and unit entries, and **OK** submits the form. ## Delete an entry and handle availability The row's delete menu is available only when deletion is allowed. More than one item must remain in the list before the delete action is available. **Prerequisites** - You are on the **Questions unit** list. - The row's delete menu is available. - More than one item remains in the list. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Select **Delete**. 3. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` before continuing. | If you see… | Use this route | |---|---| | The list and **New** action | Continue when the subscription condition permits the feature. | | No **New** action | Use an existing row when its edit action is available. | | No row delete menu | Do not delete that row. | | No row edit action | Use the controls available for your access. | **Result:** You have read the deletion confirmation and can decide whether to continue. ## When saving or deleting goes wrong Use the exact message shown on screen to choose the corrective action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the field marked as required. | | `Required` | Enter a value in the unit entry marked as required. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Replace disallowed characters with accepted characters. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and select **OK** again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Check the selected row before continuing with deletion. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the list. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the row and follow the saved-data dependency. | | `Failed to Delete` | Review the row and repeat the delete action only when it remains available. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Check the list for the updated row. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Check the list for the new row. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Check that the selected row no longer appears in the list. | **Result:** You have the corrective action for the validation, confirmation, save, update, and delete message shown by the screen. ## After maintaining the list After maintenance, review the **Category** and **Question** values in the list and continue with related reference data. The list reloads after a successful save, and the read-only dialog flow ends when you press `Escape`. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Continue configuring related category data | [Reference category](configuration-reference-list-reference-category-view.md) | | Work with another reference-list entity | [Reference list data](reference-list-data.md) | | Check the maintained row | Return to the **Questions unit** list and review **Category** and **Question**. | **Result:** The list is ready for the next category-question unit maintenance task. # Reports A report view is the set of report tabs and widgets configured for your role. Use Reports to open your report view, choose a reporting period, and review its widgets. ## Reports overview Reports is the reader-facing hub for reviewing the report view configured for your role. Open it from the application menu. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Open the Reports hub | [Open Reports](#open-reports) | | Understand the controls on the page | [Understand the Reports screen](#understand-the-reports-screen) | | Choose a reporting period | [Choose a report time frame](#choose-a-report-time-frame) | | Locate or open report widgets | [Review and organize report widgets](#review-and-organize-report-widgets) | | Review the report page | [Report overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Review widget details | [Report widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog) | | Review management report widgets | [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets) | | Generate a principal report | [Principals Report](doc:principal-report) | | Configure administrator-prepared report settings | [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings) | ## Before you start The Reports page shows the report view and controls available for your role and subscription. The page can show administrator-prepared role reports, a subscription-upgrade surface, or an empty-report message. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Reports page. - A report view is configured for your role when you need to review widgets. - Your subscription includes the Reports library. - The role report is not in edit mode when you need to choose a time frame. ## Open Reports Reports is the application page where your configured report view opens. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. In the application menu, select **Reports**. 2. Confirm that the **Reports** heading and the report tabs are visible. If more than one administrator-prepared role report is listed, select the role report that contains the information you need. ![The Reports page with the Time Frame control and configured report tabs](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/212aa645365466e666edd0c3309bfe0c.png) **Result:** The Reports page opens with the report view available to your role. ## Understand the Reports screen The Reports screen combines a time-frame control, report tabs, widget controls, and the widgets assigned to the active tab. The Reports screen can show configured report tabs and widget titles. | Area | What you can use it for | Availability | | --- | --- | --- | | **Time Frame** | Open the report-period choices | Available when the report view is not in edit mode | | Report tabs | Switch between configured report views | Available when report tabs exist | | **Content:** | Open the active tab's widget menu | Available when the active tab has widgets | | **Search for widget** | Filter the widget entries | Available in the active tab's widget menu | | **Extend all** | Open the selected widgets | Available when selected widgets exist and some are closed | | **Collapse all** | Close the selected widgets | Available when at least one selected widget is open | The active tab can also expose **Rename tab** and **Delete tab** while it is in edit mode. The widget picker uses a thumbnail and a title for its visible widget entries. Use **Time Frame** to choose a period, report tabs to switch views, and the widget controls to open or close the views assigned to the active tab. ![The Reports header with the Time Frame control above the report tabs](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a2f7d77f7e601c3237b1c3bdd4615e87.png) ## Choose a report time frame The report time frame determines which period the Reports view uses for its displayed figures. **Prerequisites** - The Reports page is open. - **Time Frame** is available outside edit mode. **Steps** 1. Select **Time Frame**. 2. Choose one period from the available choices. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Use the current year | **This year** | | Use a specific year | **Definite year** | | Use the rolling twelve-month period | **last 12 months** | 3. If you selected **Definite year**, enter a year from `2024` through the current year. 4. Select **OK**. If **Definite year** is required and the field is empty, the page uses the message `This Field Is Required`. **Result:** The Reports time-frame popup contains the period you selected and the corresponding year when **Definite year** is selected. ## Review and organize report widgets Report widgets are the individual report views available inside the active report tab. Use the widget menu to locate a widget, then use the panel controls to open or close widgets. **Prerequisites** - The Reports page has an active report tab with widgets. **Steps** 1. Open the active tab's **Content:** menu. 2. Enter a widget title in **Search for widget**. 3. Select **Select all** when the widget picker is open and you want every listed widget selected. 4. Choose the panel action that matches your review: | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Open the selected widgets | **Extend all** | | Close the selected widgets | **Collapse all** | | Remove a widget while editing the tab | **Remove widget from tab** | When a widget is already present in the tab, the page can show `You already have this widget in this tab`. Removing a widget can open the confirmation message `You are about to exclude this widget from this tab. Are you sure?`. **Result:** The active tab shows the widget panels in the open or closed arrangement you selected. ## Handle report branches and errors Reports can show different surfaces according to the report view, role, subscription, and editing conditions in force. | If you see… | Use this guidance | | --- | --- | | The report library | Review the configured report tabs and widgets. | | A subscription-upgrade surface | Follow your organization's subscription process before using the library. | | **Your role has no report** | Contact your administrator using the instruction shown below the message. | | **Rename tab** or **Delete tab** | You are working in an editable report tab. Open the required tab action. | | No separate-branch controls | Continue with the controls that are visible on the Reports page. | The empty-report branch displays **Your role has no report** and `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a report`. Controls that are unavailable in the current report view do not appear on the page. Administrator-prepared report settings are handled in [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings). If more than one report tab is available for the edit action, the edit-tab popup can show the confirmation message `Are you sure you want to ultimately delete this tab and all it's content ?`. **Result:** You use the branch shown for your role instead of following controls from a different report view or editing state. ## When Reports does not show what you need Use this table when a report action stops or a branch does not appear. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required report field is empty. | Enter the required value, then select **OK**. | | `Your role has no report` | No report is configured for the current role. | Contact your administrator using the instruction shown below the message. | | `You already have this widget in this tab` | The selected widget is already in the tab. | Choose a different widget or continue with the widget already in the tab. | | `You are about to exclude this widget from this tab. Are you sure?` | The selected widget is being removed from the tab. | Stop and review the widget selection before confirming the removal. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The requested operation completed. | Continue with the updated Reports surface. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The requested operation did not complete. | Review the current report view and try the action again. | | `Are you sure you want to ultimately delete this tab and all it's content ?` | The tab and all its content are being deleted. | Continue only when you intend to delete the tab. | **Result:** You can match the message or unavailable control to the next action without treating an unavailable branch as a different Reports workflow. ## Continue from Reports Reports is a review hub rather than a record-lifecycle page. Continue to the page that owns the next job: - For widget names and descriptions, open [Report widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog). - For management-focused widget use, open [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets). - For a principal-facing report, open [Principals Report](doc:principal-report). - For administrator-prepared report settings, open [Reports settings](doc:configuration-reports-settings). - For creating a report setting, open [New report setting](doc:configuration-reports-settings-new). - For editing a report setting, open [Edit report setting](doc:configuration-reports-settings-edit-record). # Sales job information and assessment Use this page to maintain the shared information on a sales job, review its commercial assessment, and save changes without overlooking a required field or an edit restriction. ## Overview A sales job's shared information and commercial assessment describe the opportunity, the parties involved, the expected order, and the factors used to calculate its rating. Maintain these details while the job moves through Potential, Inquiry, Offer, and Order work. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach a new or existing sales job | [Find and open a sales job](#find-and-open-a-sales-job) | | Locate a field and understand what is shown | [Understand the information and assessment screen](#understand-the-information-and-assessment-screen) | | Enter or change job information | [Maintain shared sales-job information](#maintain-shared-sales-job-information) | | Review the commercial assessment | [Review the commercial assessment](#review-the-commercial-assessment) | | Work with a locked or archived job | [Edit or restore archived information](#edit-or-restore-archived-information) | | Add or price the job's items | [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items) | | Follow the job through its stages | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Understand the whole record work area | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | | Create a new sales job | [Create sales job](doc:create-sales-job) | ![Locate the shared information fields, the assessment selectors, and the item headers before entering data.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4d064fac41853f8ba776eafd8ff3009a.png) ## Before you start Before you edit a job, have the client, vendor, salesperson, product type, job title, inquiry dates, bid deadline, and expected order date available. The client and vendor selections are part of the job information used by later sales work, so choose the records that match the request rather than creating a placeholder. The screen requires a signed-in user. Editing a saved inquiry, offer, or order also depends on the job stage, your edit permission, and whether the record has unsaved changes. Archived jobs use separate **Edit** or **Restore** actions. Company configuration can make additional fields mandatory, including **Order chance**, **End User**, Team, **Estimated Value**, **File Number**, **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, **Requested Offer Type**, **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, and **Chance in Competition**. ## Find and open a sales job Open the record you want to maintain before continuing its stage-specific sales work. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - You know whether you are creating a new potential or maintaining a saved job. **Steps** 1. Open the sales-job route that matches your work. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | Create a standard sales job | Open the sales-job list and choose the standard sales-job entry option. | | Create a potential | Open the Potentials list and choose its new-entry option. | | Create a direct order | In the sales-job list, use the new-entry menu for direct orders. | | Create an instant job | In the sales-job list, use the new-entry menu for instant jobs. | 2. On the potential route, select **Add new**. 3. Select **Inquiry**. ![Confirm that the inquiry entry surface opens before entering shared information.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) **Result:** The sales-job information surface opens on the potential sales-job entry screen. ## Understand the information and assessment screen The potential route places shared job information above the sales-job item area and the commercial assessment controls below it. The potential surface shows these fields and buttons: | Area | Fields or controls | What you use it for | | --- | --- | --- | | Job identity | **Branch**, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title** | Identify the branch, responsible person, job type, and job description. | | Opportunity details | **End User**, **Estimated Value**, **File Number**, **Expected Order Date** | Record the end user, expected value, internal reference, and expected order timing. | | Counterparties and inquiry | **Client**, **Vendor**, **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, **Bid Due Date**, **Requested Offer Type** | Record the parties and the inquiry information when those fields are present for the stage. | | Commercial assessment | **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, **Order chance** | Record the assessment inputs used by the calculated rating. | | Commit | **Save**, **Save and Close** | Commit the changes or commit them and close the surface. | On the potential route, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **File Number**, **Client**, and **Vendor** carry a required marker. **Branch**, **End User**, **Estimated Value**, **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, and **Order chance** do not carry a required marker on that route. The required marker for a configuration-conditional field can differ when company configuration changes. The item area shows the headers **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. The complete field display and other list columns depend on company setup. The potential route shows In Branch Currency (Rate:1) and **Calculated Rating** as hidden readouts, so use the visible assessment controls and the headers on screen for the work in front of you. Team is not available on this surface. Use these visible fields and headers to begin maintaining the job information. ## Maintain shared sales-job information Shared sales-job information is the identity and commercial context that later sales work uses to recognize the opportunity and its parties. **Prerequisites** - The information surface is open. - You have the client, vendor, salesperson, product type, job title, and dates to enter. - You know that company configuration can add mandatory requirements. **Steps** 1. In **Salesperson Responsible**, select the person responsible for the sales job. 2. In **Product Type**, select the product type for the job. 3. In **Job Title**, enter the job description. 4. In **End User**, select the end user when the field is available. 5. In **Estimated Value**, enter a value of `0` or more when the field is available. 6. In **File Number**, enter the internal file reference when the field is available. 7. In **Expected Order Date**, choose today or a later date for a new record. For a saved record, choose a date on or after the date the record was created. 8. In **Client**, select the client for the sales job. 9. In **Vendor**, select the vendor for the sales job. 10. Enter the inquiry information when those fields appear for the current stage. | Field | Rule | | --- | --- | | **Client Inquiry Number** | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Inquiry Date** | Required only where your company configures it; it cannot be later than today. | | **Bid Due Date** | Required; it cannot be earlier than **Inquiry Date**. | | **Requested Offer Type** | Required only where your company configures it. | **Result:** The shared identity, parties, and available inquiry details are entered on the sales-job surface, ready for assessment or saving. ## Review the commercial assessment The commercial assessment records the signals used to judge how likely the sales job is to become an order. It includes assessment selectors, commission and margin amounts, and a calculated rating. **Prerequisites** - The shared sales-job information is open. - You have the commercial assessment information needed for the current stage. **Steps** 1. In **Contact to Decision Makers**, select the available value that describes contact with decision makers. 2. In **Budget Availability**, select the available value that describes budget availability. 3. In **Chance in Competition**, select the available value that describes the competitive position. 4. In the assessment area, select **Order chance** when that control is available. The offer-stage control lists `90 %`, `70 %`, `50 %`, `30 %`, and `10 %`. The assessment control uses the values available for the current company setup. 5. Enter the commission or margin amount when its modal is available. | Value | Rule | | --- | --- | | **Percentage** | Cannot be below `0` or above the estimated value. | | Commission amount | Required in its validation group; cannot be below `0` or above the estimated value. | | Margin amount | Required in its validation group; cannot be below `0` or above the estimated value. | 6. In the modal, select **Ok** to apply the commission or margin entry. **Result:** The assessment inputs are recorded in the open surface, and the calculated rating readout is available where the current stage and company setup display it. If the job is archived, continue with [Edit or restore archived information](#edit-or-restore-archived-information); otherwise continue to saving. ## Edit or restore archived information An archived sales job is a job whose stage prevents ordinary editing. The available action depends on the archived stage and your permission. **Prerequisites** - The archived sales job is open. - You have the permission required by the available action. **Steps** 1. In the archived details area, choose the action that matches the job stage. | If the job is… | Select | | --- | --- | | Regretted, cancelled, lost, or rejected | **Edit** | | Deleted and you are allowed to edit it | **Restore** | **Result:** The eligible archived record enters its permitted editing path, ready for the shared information to be maintained or saved. ## Save the information Saving commits the shared information and assessment changes to the open sales job. **Prerequisites** - The required fixed fields are complete. - Configuration-conditional required fields are complete where your company makes them mandatory. - Dates and amounts satisfy their rules. **Steps** 1. Select **Save** to commit the changes and remain on the sales-job surface. 2. Select **Save and Close** to commit the changes and close the surface. **Result:** The save path validates the form before committing it. A successful operation uses the success message appropriate to the action, including `Custom fields saved successfully`, `Job updated successfully`, `Job deleted successfully`, `Job regretted successfully`, `Job cancelled successfully`, `Job missed successfully`, `Job reactivated successfully`, `Converted to offer successfully`, `Converted to inquiry successfully`, `Converted To Regretted`, `Converted to cancelled`, or `Converted to lost`. ## Fix validation and save errors Validation messages identify the value that must be corrected before the sales job can be saved. The save path also carries errors from related sales-job work. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the fields and try the save again. | | `Error saving custom fields` | Review the custom fields and try the save again. | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Stop the reversal and review the due invoice. | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Return the offers to draft status before reverting to inquiry. | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Read the displayed error detail and correct the reported value or action. | | `An account with this name already exists` | Select the existing account instead of creating another one. | | `A project with this name already exists` | Select the existing project instead of creating another one. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete every field carrying a required marker. | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Save the opened inquiry before continuing. | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Return the inquiries to draft stage before reverting to potential. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Correct the item quantity before saving. | | `One or more items has no unit` | Select a unit for each affected item before saving. | The save error path is silent at the component level. If nothing changes after selecting **Save**, do not assume the record was saved; review the fields and try again. **Result:** The blocking message is matched to a correction, or the unchanged record is ready for you to review and try again. ## Know what happens next After the shared information is saved, the sales job continues through its current stage and its related work areas. Use the page that owns the next task rather than repeating its controls here. - Follow stage movement in [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle). - Map the whole work area in [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record). - Add or price rows in [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items). - Create a new record from [Create sales job](doc:create-sales-job). - Review company-configured mandatory rules in [Configuration dynamic validation](doc:configuration-dynamic-validation). - Review order-chance setup in [Configuration sales order chance](doc:configuration-sales-order-chance). # Serial combination details ## Serial combination details A serial combination defines the ordered components that PAMS uses to build a serial number. Use it when you need to control the structure of numbers assigned to jobs and related records. Changes apply only to new jobs; existing jobs keep the combination that was already applied. Before changing a combination, review [Before you start](#before-you-start). | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Choose the serial type to configure | [Find a serial combination](#find-a-serial-combination) | | Identify the fields and history on the screen | [Understand the combination screen](#understand-the-combination-screen) | | Add, edit, validate, or save rows | [Maintain a serial combination](#maintain-a-serial-combination) | | Work with an unavailable edit surface | [Handle access and screen variations](#handle-access-and-screen-variations) | | Resolve a validation or save message | [When saving or deleting goes wrong](#when-saving-or-deleting-goes-wrong) | | Locate the related configuration list | [Serial combinations](doc:configuration-serial-combinations-view) | | Continue with the records that use these combinations | [Products](doc:products) | ## Before you start Editing a serial combination is an administrative task controlled by access and subscription settings. The form requires authentication and uses a leaving-page guard when you navigate away. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Have permission to add, change, and remove combination rows. - Use a subscription that includes this configuration surface. The main form and grid appear when the subscription includes the feature. **Save**, the close action, **Component**, and editable row deletion depend on this permission. The **Last Modifications** tab appears when audit history is available. ## Find a serial combination A serial type identifies which numbering pattern you are configuring, such as a job number or an invoice number. **Prerequisites** - Have access to the serial-combination configuration surface. **Steps** 1. In the serial-type navigation, select the entry for the number you need to configure. | If you need to configure… | Select | |---|---| | Jobs | **Job No** | | Offers | **Offer No** | | Orders | **Order No** | | Invoices | **Invoice No** | | Payments | **Payment No** | | Buyouts | **Buyout No** | | Material request quotations | **MRQ No** | | Packages | **Package No** | | Purchase orders | **Purchase Order No** | | Received shipments | **Received Shipment No** | | Inspected orders | **Inspected Order No** | | Shipping orders | **Shipping Order No** | | Assembly orders | **Assembly Order No** | | Transfer orders | **Transfer Order No** | | Service orders | **Service Order No** | | Issue notes | **Issue Note No** | | Delivery notes | **Delivery Note No** | | Cost transactions | **Cost Transaction No** | | Outgoing payments | **Outgoing Payment** | The form switches to the selected serial type. **Result:** The selected serial-type combination is open for review or maintenance. Continue with [Understand the combination screen](#understand-the-combination-screen). ## Understand the combination screen The combination screen is a grid where each row represents one component in the serial-number order. The preview reflects the combination when the preview is available. The grid contains these fields: | Field | What to use it for | Rule | |---|---|---| | **Serial Component** | Choose the component used in this position | Required for a populated row; the minimum valid component value is `1`. | | **Digits** | Set the number of digits for the selected component | Required when the row has no digits; the valid range is `1` to `12`. | | **Default Value** | Set a fixed value where the selected component allows one | Disabled unless the component is **Auto serial**; text components remain editable. | The page also provides a serial-combination preview and the **Last Modifications** tab when the history surface is available. **Last Modifications** is the audit history for the combination; it displays the text “The audit log provides you with a chronological sequence of actions performed by the users” and its entries. ![Read the three combination grid columns and the controls below the grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4c1eac408293e6603c805ab99453b869.png) The combination table shows **Serial Component**, **Digits**, and **Default Value**. The visible controls are **Save** and **Component**. A refresh control is also present with the title `Refresh`. ![Review the optional Last Modifications history below the combination grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4c1eac408293e6603c805ab99453b869.png) When you are ready to change the rows, continue with [Maintain a serial combination](#maintain-a-serial-combination). ## Maintain a serial combination Maintain the combination by adding component rows, setting their component values and digits, supplying allowed default values, and saving the resulting order. **Prerequisites** - Open the serial type you need to maintain. - Have permission to add, change, and remove combination rows. **Steps** 1. Select **Component** to add a combination row. A new row provides the **Serial Component**, **Digits**, and **Default Value** cells. ![Select Component to add a row to the combination grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4c1eac408293e6603c805ab99453b869.png) 2. In **Serial Component**, choose one of the available component options. The configured options include **Year**, **Auto serial**, and **Text**. 3. In **Digits**, choose a value when the selected component uses a digit count. The **Digits** field is not shown for some component choices. ![Set the digit count for the selected component.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4c1eac408293e6603c805ab99453b869.png) 4. In **Default Value**, enter a value when the selected component permits one. The field is disabled unless the component is **Auto serial**; text components remain editable. ![Review the Default Value cell and its enabled state for the selected component.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4c1eac408293e6603c805ab99453b869.png) 5. Arrange the rows so that the **Auto serial** component is the last item. 6. Select **Save**. The form checks that the combination has a component, has exactly one **Auto serial**, has no more than 12 characters in total, and places **Auto serial** last. ![Select Save after reviewing the component rows and their order.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4c1eac408293e6603c805ab99453b869.png) 7. If you need to remove a populated row, open that row's delete action. | If the row is… | Then | |---|---| | Populated | Confirm the prompt `Are you sure you want to delete this row?` by selecting **Delete**. | | Empty | Use the row's direct delete action. | Select **Cancel** in the confirmation surface to keep the row. **Result:** The combination is saved when the form accepts the rows and displays `Your combination number saved successfully`. Review [Handle access and screen variations](#handle-access-and-screen-variations) for the other surfaces that can appear. ## Handle access and screen variations The screen changes according to the access and subscription conditions applied to your account. Use the following table to identify the surface you are looking at before you try to edit it. **Prerequisites** - Open the serial combination you want to review. **Steps** 1. Compare the screen with the alternatives in the table. | What you see | What it means | What you can do | |---|---|---| | The subscription-upgrade surface replaces the form | The subscription does not include this feature | Use the available subscription path. | | The form has no **Save** or editable **Component** action | Edit access is unavailable | Use the page's leave action to exit without editing. | | A close action remains while editing is unavailable | The page is in a non-editable state | Select the close action to leave the page. | | **Last Modifications** is absent | The modification-history surface is not available in this configuration | Continue with the combination grid. | | A populated row has a confirmation delete action | The row can be removed through confirmation | Select **Delete** or **Cancel** in the confirmation surface. | **Result:** The screen shows the form or subscription surface that applies to your access, with the actions available for that surface. When a save or delete action produces a message, continue with [When saving or deleting goes wrong](#when-saving-or-deleting-goes-wrong). ## When saving or deleting goes wrong The messages below identify the correction to make before you try the action again. **Prerequisites** - Have a combination ready to save or a row ready to delete. **Steps** 1. Apply the correction listed for the message you see. | Message | What to correct | |---|---| | `Please add serial components` | Add a row with **Component**. | | `Serial type is required` | Select the serial type before saving. | | `Please Note that you can't add serial combination larger than 12 characters` | Reduce the total combination length to 12 characters or fewer. | | `Please select a serial type` | Select a serial type before saving. | | `Cannot have multiple Auto Serials` | Remove the additional **Auto serial** component. | | `Must have one Auto Serial` | Add one **Auto serial** component. | | `Auto Serial must be the last item` | Move **Auto serial** to the last row. | | `Quantity is required.` | Choose a value in **Digits** for the affected row. | | `Component is required.` | Choose a value in **Serial Component** for the affected row. | | `Invalid quantity.` | Choose a **Digits** value from the valid range. | | `Invalid component.` | Choose a valid **Serial Component** value. | | `Auto Serial Must Be a Number` | Enter a numeric default value for **Auto serial**. | | `Saving Failed` | Review the combination rows, then select **Save** again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this row?` | Select **Delete** to remove the row or **Cancel** to keep it. | 2. Apply the correction or select the action in the matching table row. **Result:** The affected row is corrected, saved, removed, or kept according to the message you received. After the action completes, continue with [After maintaining a combination](#after-maintaining-a-combination). ## After maintaining a combination After a successful save, the combination has been accepted for new jobs. Existing jobs are not changed by this configuration update. **Result:** The page displays `Your combination number saved successfully` after a successful save. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Locate another saved serial combination | [Serial combinations](doc:configuration-serial-combinations-view) | | Continue with product configuration | [Products](doc:products) | # Shipping orders ## Shipping orders A shipping order records the items selected for shipment and their shipping progress. It belongs to the project-management flow that connects ordering, stock, and delivery work. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Create a shipping order from a sales job | [Create a shipping order](#create-a-shipping-order) | | Find an order already in the system | [Find a shipping order](#find-a-shipping-order) | | Understand the wider project-management flow | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Find the sales job you need to select | [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | | Continue with warehouse fulfillment | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Prepare the related delivery document | [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) | The order begins in the **Draft** status and progresses through the shipment stages shown by the shipping-order filters, ending at shipment completion. ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 [*] --> Draft Draft --> "Goods awaiting issue" "Goods awaiting issue" --> "Goods issued" "Goods issued" --> "Goods inspected" "Goods inspected" --> "Ready for shipping" "Ready for shipping" --> "Released for shipment" "Released for shipment" --> "Shipment complete" ``` ## Before you start A shipping order starts from a sales job whose items are ready to be selected for shipment. The sales job supplies the order number and related client information that appear on the shipping-order form. **Prerequisites** - Know which sales job supplies the shipment items. - Have access to create a new shipping order or edit the saved order you need to open. - For a saved order, work from the order's current status and without unsaved changes when leaving the form. The new form fills **Shipping ordered by** from the signed-in user and **Shipping ordered on** from the current date. Both fields are read-only. The date cannot be later than today. ## Find a shipping order The shipping-order list is where you filter orders by their current shipment status and select an existing row. The list currently displays **Sheet no.**, **Order date**, **P.M Responsible**, **Client order no.**, and **Job no.** ![Shipping Orders list with its status filters and shipment columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c2d3bfd66b327f88cec048a775d12d15.png) ### Open the shipping-order list **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are looking for all orders, requested shipments, ready shipments, released shipments, or completed shipments. **Steps** 1. Open the **Shipping Orders** list at `/projects-management/shipping-order/view`. 2. Select the filter that matches the work you need to locate. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review every shipping order | **All** | | Review draft orders | **Requested shipments** | | Review orders ready to ship | **Ready for shipping** | | Review released shipments | **Released shipments** | | Review completed shipments | **Delivered** | 3. Select the shipping-order row you need. **Result:** The selected shipping order opens for review. The list also provides a **Filter by:** control above the status choices. Select the status choice that matches the shipment work you need to review. ### Open a new shipping order **Prerequisites** - Have a sales job to use for the new order. **Steps** 1. In the project-management list, open the new-record menu. 2. Select **Shipping Order**. **Result:** The new **Shipping Order** form opens at `/projects-management/shipping-order/new`. ## Understand the shipping-order screen The new form identifies the sales job first, then shows the order details and shipment items. After the order is saved, it also provides the **Last Modifications** history tab. ![New Shipping Order form with the required sales-job and order-date fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/56813093efc4e79642ca292a6b7e116a.png) ### Order information | Field | What it contains | Required or available state | | --- | --- | --- | | **Sales Job Number** | The sales job selected for shipment | Required on a new order | | **Shipping ordered by** | The signed-in user responsible for the shipping order | Required and read-only | | **Shipping ordered on** | The order date | Required and read-only | | **Sales order number** | The order number on a saved order | Read-only | | **Client** | Information from the selected sales job | Read-only | | **Items** | The selected shipment items and their quantities | At least one item is required before saving | ### Shipment progress The saved order carries the shipment progress fields below. The progress controls become available according to the order's sales-job and shipment state. | Field | When it is used | What the form does | | --- | --- | --- | | **Ready for shipment** | When the order has a sales job | Provides the readiness checkbox | | **Confirmed on** | After readiness is selected | Remains disabled until readiness is selected | | **Confirmed by** | With the readiness details | Remains disabled | | **Released for shipment** | When the order has a sales job | Provides the release checkbox | | **Released on** | After release is selected | Uses **Confirmed on** as its minimum date and today as its maximum | | **Released by** | With the release details | Remains disabled | | **Delivered** | On the delivery stage | Remains disabled | | **Delivery Date** | With delivery details | Remains disabled and cannot be later than today | | **Delivered by** | With delivery details | Remains disabled | The form does not show **Inventory**, **Moved to shipping on**, **Moved to shipping by**, **Client Order No.**, or **Contractual Delivery Date**. The saved-order tab is **Last Modifications**; the **Comments** tab is not part of this screen. ## Create a shipping order A new shipping order connects one sales job to the items that are going to be shipped. Select the correct sales job before selecting items because the sales job supplies the client, order number, job type, and available shipment items. ![New Shipping Order form before a sales job is selected](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/56813093efc4e79642ca292a6b7e116a.png) **Prerequisites** - Have a sales job with shipment items available for selection. - Be on the new **Shipping Order** form. **Steps** 1. In **Sales Job Number**, select the sales job for the shipment. 2. Confirm that the form shows the related client and sales-order information. 3. Select **Product** to open the **Items for shipment** selection dialog. 4. In the dialog, select the items to include in the shipment. 5. Set any optional distribution values that the dialog shows. | If the dialog shows… | Do this | | --- | --- | | **Dispatch priority** | Choose the priority for item selection. | | **Target Qty** | Enter the target quantity and review **Selected Qty**. | 6. Select **OK** in the dialog. 7. Confirm that the selected items appear in **Items** with their quantities. 8. Choose the save action that matches what you need to do next. | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Continue editing | **Save** | | Save and leave | **Save and Close** | The form validates the order and its item list. If the order is valid, it is saved with **Draft** status and remains available for further work. **Result:** The order is saved with at least one shipment item. **Save and Close** displays `Your request was completed successfully` and closes the form. **Save** keeps the saved order available for further work. ## Handle conditional shipping-order details Some shipment details become useful only after the sales job or the order reaches the relevant stage. Use the fields that appear for the current order state rather than entering shipment progress before the order is ready for it. ### Work with item-selection options **Prerequisites** - Be creating a new order with a selected sales job. - Have the **Items for shipment** dialog open. **Steps** 1. Select **Select all** when every available item belongs in the shipment. 2. Select **Unselect all** when you need to clear the current selection. 3. Review the item rows and select only the items that belong in this shipment. **Result:** The dialog contains the item selection you intend to place in **Items**. ### Split an item when the option is available **Prerequisites** - The order is an instant job. - **Dispatch priority** is set to manual selection. **Steps** 1. In the item-selection dialog, select **Split** for the item you need to divide. **Result:** The split-item flow opens for that item. ### Review shipment progress **Prerequisites** - The order has a sales job. **Steps** 1. Select **Ready for shipment** when the order is ready for that stage. 2. Review **Confirmed on**. 3. Review **Confirmed by**. 4. Select **Released for shipment** when the goods are released for shipment. 5. Review **Released on**. 6. Review **Released by**. 7. Review **Delivered**. 8. Review **Delivery Date**. 9. Review **Delivered by** when delivery information is available. **Result:** The order displays the shipment-progress information available for its current stage. ## Out of scope on this screen The **Finish and release to stock** action and **Inspection template** action are not active controls on the shipping-order screen. The generic save-error message is handled outside the shipping-order-specific corrections on this page. ## When something goes wrong Use the message text to locate the correction that the form requires. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Please enter sales item(s)` | The order has no shipment items | Select **Product**, choose at least one item, and return to **Items**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save request returned an error | Review the form and retry **Save** or **Save and Close**. | | `Some products are not available in stock` | An item in the selection is unavailable | Remove the unavailable item from the selection and choose an available item. | | **Save** or **Save and Close** does not commit a new order | The form has no changes or the required information is incomplete | Select a sales job, add at least one item, and review the required fields. | ## After you create or find the order After saving, a new order is a draft shipping order. It appears under **Requested shipments** in the shipping-order list. The saved record also provides **Last Modifications**, which opens the order's log history. Next steps - Follow the [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) for the broader shipment handoff. - Open [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) when the related delivery document is needed. - Return to the [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) to move between project-management work areas. **Result:** You can locate the saved order under **Requested shipments**, reopen it from the list, and review its **Last Modifications** history. # Templates ## Templates at a glance Templates is the configuration area where you prepare document templates for inquiry, offer, order, RFQ, PO, and invoice work. You can review the template type, uploaded file name, and upload date, then open the available editor or file actions for a row. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Check the access and file prerequisites | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Locate an existing template | [Find a template](#find-a-template) | | Learn what each part of the screen does | [Understand the Templates screen](#understand-the-templates-screen) | | Choose the action for a particular template type | [Choose the right template action](#choose-the-right-template-action) | | Download, upload, or edit a template | [Maintain and use a template](#maintain-and-use-a-template) | | Diagnose a failed template action | [When a template action fails](#when-a-template-action-fails) | | Continue into document work | [Continue with the document workflow](#continue-with-the-document-workflow) | | Work with offers | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Work with orders | [Orders](doc:orders) | | Work with purchasing RFQs | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | Work with purchasing orders | [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Work with invoices | [Create an invoice](doc:create-invoice) | The Templates screen is at `/configuration/templates`. ![The Templates grid with its three headers and available document actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/19cfe0eb19e59cbfedc8b22b5e4eb16d.png) ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - The Word Templates feature is included in your subscription. - To upload the list of variables, you have developer access. - For a company template upload, have a `.doc` or `.docx` file ready. - For a variable-list upload, have a `.pdf` file ready. The available action also depends on the template row. Check the row type before choosing an editor, download, or upload action. ## Find a template Use the Templates list to identify an existing template before opening an action. The list shows the template type, the uploaded file name, and the upload date. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Templates screen. - You know the document type or file name you want to review. **Steps** 1. Open `/configuration/templates`. 2. Read the **Template** column to identify the document type. 3. Read the **Uploaded file name** column to identify the stored file. 4. Read the **Uploaded on** column to identify when the file was uploaded. 5. Note the document type and identify its matching option in **Choose the right template action**. ![The Templates list identified by its three column headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/26d34b5d8351e62ef04f8fb8e62d60d2.png) **Result:** The template row and its document type are identified. Continue to [Choose the right template action](#choose-the-right-template-action). ## Understand the Templates screen The template list is the starting point for reviewing a row. Each row can also show a document-specific email-template option, such as **Offer E-mail Template** or **Invoice E-mail Template**. | Screen area | What you use it for | | --- | --- | | **Template** | Identify the document type. | | **Uploaded file name** | Identify the stored file. | | **Uploaded on** | Compare upload dates. | | Available email-template control | Open the editor for the document type shown in the row. | | Upload popup | Select a file for a company template or variable list. | | HTML Template Editor | Edit template content and insert variables. | The upload surfaces use one file field. The company-template surface accepts `.doc` and `.docx`; the variable-list surface accepts `.pdf`. The editor uses rich text and shows **Type # to insert a variable**. When the editor opens, its dialog is titled **HTML Template Editor**. Its visible controls include the following toolbar actions: | Editing need | Controls | | --- | --- | | Change text formatting | **Bold**, **Italic**, **Underline**, **Font Color**, **Background Color** | | Change alignment and lists | **Align Left**, **Align Center**, **Align Right**, **Ordered List**, **Bullet List**, **Header** | | Work with tables | **Insert Table**, **Delete Table**, **Insert Row Above**, **Insert Row Below**, **Delete Row**, **Insert Column Left**, **Insert Column Right**, **Delete Column** | | Reverse or repeat an edit | **Undo**, **Redo** | | Save the editor | **OK** | ![The HTML Template Editor with its variable instruction and editing toolbar](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/102a11d2dda3d7c7c310ac3602878d16.png) ## Choose the right template action Use the email-template option that matches the document type in the table below. | If the row is… | Choose… | | --- | --- | | Inquiry | **Inquiry E-mail Template** | | Technical or commercial offer | **Offer E-mail Template** | | Order confirmation | **Order E-mail Template** | | Purchase inquiry | **RFQ E-mail Template** | | Purchase order | **PO E-mail Template** | | Commission or sales invoice | **Invoice E-mail Template** | | Inspection sheet | No document-specific editor action is available in this screen. | For rows other than Inquiry, open the row menu to use **Sample template**, **Company template**, **Upload company template**, or **List of variables**. **Company template** is available for download only when the row has a company template; when the row is a basic template, that action is disabled. ## Maintain and use a template Choose one procedure after you have selected the document type and its matching option. ### Download a template or the variable list **Prerequisites** - You have identified the template row. - The row is not an Inquiry when using the row menu actions. **Steps** 1. Open the row menu. 2. Choose one action from the table. | If you need to… | Choose… | | --- | --- | | Download the standard file | **Sample template** | | Download the company file | **Company template** | | Download the variable list | **List of variables** | | Download the variable list from the instructions | **click here to download the list of variables.** | **Result:** The selected download action starts from the template screen. ### Upload a company template **Prerequisites** - You have a `.doc` or `.docx` file ready. - You have identified a non-Inquiry template row. **Steps** 1. Open the row menu. 2. Select **Upload company template**. 3. Select **Browse**. 4. Choose the company template file. 5. Select **Upload**. **Result:** The upload popup closes after the upload path completes. ### Edit a document template **Prerequisites** - You have identified the row's document type. - You have selected its document-specific editor action. **Steps** 1. Select the document-specific email-template action for the row. 2. Edit the content in **HTML Template Editor**. 3. Type `#` to insert a variable. 4. Select **OK** to save the editor content. **Result:** The editor closes after the save path completes. ### Upload the list of variables **Prerequisites** - You have developer access. - You have a `.pdf` file ready. **Steps** 1. Select **Upload list of variables**. 2. Select **Browse**. 3. Choose the PDF file. 4. Select **Upload**. **Result:** The variables upload popup closes after the upload path completes. If an action fails, use [When a template action fails](#when-a-template-action-fails). ## When a template action fails Use this table when a template action does not complete as expected. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `An error occurred while processing your request` while the list loads | Loading the template list failed. | Return to the Templates screen and retry the load. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` after a download action | The requested file download failed. | Retry the same download action. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` after an upload action | The upload request failed. | Check the file type and retry the upload. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` after saving the editor | Saving the template content failed. | Reopen the editor and retry the save. | | The expected document action is not clickable | The action is not available from the current row or screen state. | Recheck the row type and use the matching action in [Choose the right template action](#choose-the-right-template-action). | ## Continue with the document workflow After you maintain the relevant template, continue with the document workflow that uses it. The template screen provides actions for inquiry, offer, order, RFQ, PO, and invoice documents. Continue with the workflow that matches the document you are preparing. | If you are continuing with… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Offers | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Orders | [Orders](doc:orders) | | Purchasing RFQs | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | Purchasing orders | [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Invoices | [Create an invoice](doc:create-invoice) | **Result:** You have a maintained template and a workflow page for the document type you need. # Understanding the interface Review the Dashboard and choose the view that matches your work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the Dashboard and understand the main navigation | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) | | Understand the Dashboard's purpose and measures | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Find a card or chart by its title | [Dashboard widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog) | | Read a Principals Report | [Principal report](doc:principal-report) | | Change dashboard tabs or widgets | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) | | Get help when your role has no dashboard | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | ## What the Dashboard is for The Dashboard is a set of role-based tabs that displays the measures your organization has chosen for your work. Its visible tab names divide the information into separate views, so you can review the view that answers your current business question without changing information first. ## Before you open the Dashboard Prerequisites - You are signed in. - Dashboard access is included for your subscription. - Your role has a dashboard with at least one dashboard tab. You see the Dashboard after signing in. Its tabs and content appear when dashboard access is included. Your dashboard view appears when it is selected and at least one dashboard tab is available. If your role has no dashboard, the page displays `Your role has no dashboard` and `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard`. Contact your administrator to have a dashboard defined for your role. ## Open the Dashboard and orient yourself Open the **Dashboard** to review the measures selected for your role. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - Your role has a dashboard with at least one dashboard tab. Steps 1. Open the **Dashboard**. 2. Locate **Dashboard** and **Principals Report** in the tab strip. 3. Review the cards, charts, and headings on the active dashboard view. 4. Locate the sorting control for the measure you want to review: **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, or **Sort by Achievement**. ![Identify the dashboard tabs, widgets, and sorting controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7938e002abe71479df3f6fdb7c154f95.png) Some controls use icons without text labels. Use the text displayed on the page rather than guessing what an icon-only control does. **Result:** The Dashboard view is on screen with its tabs, cards, charts, and visible sorting controls. ## Select a dashboard view A dashboard view is a tab containing a distinct set of measures for review. Select a visible tab when the question you need to answer belongs to another view. Prerequisites - The Dashboard is open. - At least one visible dashboard tab is available. Steps 1. Select the tab that matches the view you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review the dashboard cards and charts | **Dashboard** | | Review the principals report surface | **Principals Report** | 2. Read the controls and readouts on the selected view. 3. In the **Principals Report** view, use **Report** as the required report field. 4. Use **Generate Report** to generate the report. 5. Use **Download as PDF** to download the report as a PDF. ![Recognize the Principals Report fields and actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d8c7163bcd2419ea80ecb5c0c6be2c96.png) The **Principals Report** view displays Accounts, **Report**, and Time Frame. **Report** carries a required marker. The view also displays **Generate Report** and **Download as PDF**. The Dashboard can also show an Eagle View or an MRM report when those views are available. If you are editing a dashboard, the available controls include **Widget**, **Save**, **Rename tab**, and **Delete tab**. The tab menu also provides **Search for widget** when the active tab contains widgets. Use [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) for that editing task. When a new or edited tab name is required, the field is **New Tab** and the message is `This Field Is Required`. When restoring standard tabs, the confirmation message is `Are you sure you want to replace your tabs with standard tabs?`. When ultimately deleting a tab, the confirmation message is `Are you sure you want to ultimately delete this tab and all it's content ?`. After a dashboard save action, PAMS uses `Your request was completed successfully` for success and `An error occurred while processing your request` for an error. **Result:** The selected dashboard view is on screen, and the Principals Report view exposes its report field and report actions when that tab is selected. ## Review the visible measures The dashboard presents business measures as cards, charts, headings, and values. Review the displayed heading before deciding which view or widget answers your question. | Area | What you can review | |---|---| | Sales pipeline | Sales Pipeline, Potentials, Inquiries, Budget offers, Firm offers, and Orders | | Booking | Booking This Year, Equivalent, Target, Achieved, and Forecast | | Backlog | Backlog, Sales ( orders), and Commission ( commission) | | Trend and status views | Teams Booking vs. Target, Teams Running Offer, Branch Tendency to Target, and Principals Tendency to Target | Prerequisites - The Dashboard is open. - A dashboard view with measures is selected. Steps 1. Read the headings and values on the active dashboard view. 2. Locate the sorting control for the measure you want to review: **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, or **Sort by Achievement**. ![Locate the dashboard sorting controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d8c7163bcd2419ea80ecb5c0c6be2c96.png) **Result:** The active dashboard view remains on screen with its displayed measures and the three visible sorting controls. ## Troubleshooting | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Your role has no dashboard` | Your role does not have a dashboard defined. | Contact your administrator to define one for your role. | | `This Field Is Required` | The **New Tab** field is required when adding or editing a tab. | Enter a tab name. | | `Are you sure you want to replace your tabs with standard tabs?` | The restore action is asking for confirmation. | Confirm only if you want to replace your tabs with the standard tabs. | | `Are you sure you want to ultimately delete this tab and all it's content ?` | The delete action is asking for confirmation. | Confirm only if you want to delete the tab and all its content. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The dashboard request returned an error. | Review the action and contact your administrator if the error remains. | # Warehouses ## Warehouses at a glance A warehouse configuration record identifies a storage location and the details your company uses to manage it. Use **Warehouses** to review configured locations before continuing with warehouse operations. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the list and identify a warehouse | [Find a warehouse](#find-a-warehouse) | | Understand the fields and tabs | [Understand the warehouse screen](#understand-the-warehouse-screen) | | Review or maintain a saved warehouse | [Review and maintain warehouse details](#review-and-maintain-warehouse-details) | | Create a warehouse | [New warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-new) | | Edit a saved warehouse | [Edit warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-edit-record) | | Continue with warehouse operations | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Maintain libraries and files | [Libraries](doc:libraries-files) | ![Review the warehouse list headers and toolbar buttons.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/133e46bf1d1bed3a415a13ca10bc6134.png) ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Configuration area. - The subscription includes the warehouse configuration surface. - To review the main fields, a warehouse record is available. - To use the tabs, the warehouse record is saved. - To add or edit an area, the **Areas** tab is selected and editing is allowed. The fields and tabs can vary with subscription access, the saved state of the warehouse, and your editing permission. The address fields appear when an address is selected. ## Find a warehouse The Warehouses list is the starting point for identifying a configured storage location. The list uses the headers **Name**, **Type**, **Description**, and **Branches**. **Prerequisites** - You can open the Configuration area. - You know which warehouse information identifies the record you need. **Steps** 1. Open the **Warehouses** page. 2. Read the **Name**, **Type**, **Description**, and **Branches** columns. 3. Select the row for the warehouse you want to review. 4. Read the warehouse details that open. **Result:** The selected warehouse details are open. ## Understand the warehouse screen The warehouse screen combines identity, address, area, inventory-model, modification-history, and file surfaces. Use the field tables to distinguish required fields from fields whose requiredness depends on company configuration. ### Warehouse fields | Field | Type | Requiredness | Options | |---|---|---|---| | **Display Name** | Text | Required | — | | **Description** | Text | Required | — | | **Store type** | Select | Required | `Physical`, `Virtual`, `Partner` | | **Store Admin** | Select | Required | The available responsible users appear in the list. | | **Destination Title** | Text | Required | — | | **Country** | Select | Required only where your company configures it | The available countries appear in the list. | | **State** | Text | Required only where your company configures it | — | | **City** | Text | Required only where your company configures it | — | | **Street** | Text | Required only where your company configures it | — | | **Zip-code** | Text | Required only where your company configures it | — | The available **Store Admin** and **Country** choices come from the responsible-user and country lists. ### Areas and related tabs | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review or maintain warehouse areas | **Areas** | | Review the inventory model | **Inventory Model** | | Review modification history | **Last Modifications** | Area maintenance includes **Name** and **Description**. The screen does not present **Short name**, **Area Admin**, **X position**, **Y position**, or **Z position** as available area fields. ### List and toolbar reference The icon-only toolbar buttons are titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ## Review and maintain warehouse details Use this procedure to review a saved warehouse, move between its related tabs, and open area maintenance. Use [New warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-new) for creation instructions and [Edit warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-edit-record) for the saved-record editing procedure. **Prerequisites** - A saved warehouse is open. - To open an area action, the **Areas** tab is selected. - To add or edit an area, editing is allowed. **Steps** 1. Select **Areas** to review the warehouse areas. 2. In the **Areas** tab, select the plus icon above the area list. 3. In the **Areas** tab, select the control in the action column of the area row you want to maintain. 4. Select **Inventory Model** to review the warehouse inventory model. 5. Select **Last Modifications** to review the warehouse modification history. 6. In a popup, select **Save** to save when that popup presents the save action. 7. In a popup, select **Don't Save** to leave without saving when that popup presents the action. 8. In a popup, select **Cancel** to close a cancelable popup. **Result:** The selected warehouse tab or popup is on screen, or the popup closes according to the action you selected. ## Handle available surfaces The available surface depends on the situation you are handling: | What you are doing | What must be true | What you can select | |---|---|---| | Reviewing warehouse fields | The subscription and page are available, and warehouse details exist. | The warehouse fields | | Reviewing related tabs | The subscription and page are available, and the warehouse is saved. | **Areas**, **Inventory Model**, or **Last Modifications** | | Adding an area | The warehouse is saved, **Areas** is selected, and editing is allowed. | In the **Areas** tab, select the plus icon above the area list. | | Editing an area | The warehouse is saved, **Areas** is selected, and editing is allowed. | In the **Areas** tab, select the control in the action column of the area row you want to maintain. | | Reviewing address fields | An address is selected. | The address fields | | Importing data | Import mode is active and importing is enabled. | **Upload** | | Confirming or dismissing a popup | The applicable popup is open. | **No**, **Yes**, **Ok**, or **Cancel** | | Reviewing files | The files surface is available. | **Export** and the file actions shown for the current view | ## When an action does not work Use the message text you see to choose the response below. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue from the saved result or the next available surface. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the information and try the action again. | | `You cannot change or delete records developed by Pams` | Do not try to change or delete that record. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Correct the file name so it uses the accepted characters, then repeat the file action. | The main list can show the list surface without opening the detail tabs. If a detail action does not open, use the applicable recovery move: 1. Choose the action that matches your current screen. | If you are… | Select | |---|---| | Outside the list | Return to the **Warehouses** list. | | On the **Warehouses** list | Select a warehouse row. | **Result:** You have read the message and chosen the appropriate response. ## What to do next | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Create a warehouse | [New warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-new) | | Edit a saved warehouse | [Edit warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-edit-record) | | Follow warehouse operational work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Maintain warehouse product stages | [Product stages](doc:configuration-warehouse-product-stages) | | Maintain related files | [Libraries](doc:libraries-files) | # Who uses PAMS ## Who PAMS is for PAMS is an end-to-end command center for B2B sales operations. It supports teams that manage sales work across opportunities, offers, orders, targets, commissions, suppliers, warehousing, and invoicing. Use the table to choose where to continue. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Compare your operation with the audience descriptions | [Before you choose a starting point](#before-you-choose-a-starting-point) | | Choose the first work area to explore | [Choose your starting point](#choose-your-starting-point) | | Understand what PAMS covers before choosing a work area | [What is PAMS](doc:what-is-pams) | | Follow sales work from its opening stage through delivery | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Orient yourself in the dashboard | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Understand the capabilities available across the product | [What can you do with PAMS](doc:what-can-you-do-with-pams) | | Find help when you do not know where to begin | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | PAMS is intended for these operating models: | Your operation | PAMS fits when you… | |---|---| | Sales agency | Represent multiple principals and manage commission structures and product portfolios. | | Direct sales or trading team | Handle cycles involving clients and suppliers, including bidding, booking, procurement, and warehousing. | | Hybrid company | Represent principals while also selling your own products or projects. | | Sales management or executive team | Need visibility into team performance, revenue, booking forecasts, and target achievement. | | B2B operation replacing disconnected tools | Have outgrown spreadsheets, struggle with generic CRMs, or coordinate work across disconnected systems. | ## Before you choose a starting point Compare your operation with the audience descriptions above before choosing a work area. The Home screen gives you a working dashboard, not an audience-selection list. ![Look at the visible dashboard surface and its sorting controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) The first comparison is about how your business sells. Identify whether you represent other principals, sell your own products or projects, or do both. Then identify whether your main need is running sales work or seeing performance across a sales team. The Home screen does not carry a business-record entry form or customer, supplier, product, or transaction fields. It also does not provide a role or audience list. Use the audience descriptions above to choose your starting point instead of looking for those descriptions on Home. When a dashboard request succeeds, the displayed feedback is `Your request was completed successfully`. If changing the active dashboard fails, the displayed feedback is `An error occurred while processing your request`. ## Choose your starting point Choose a starting page when you are deciding where to begin. **Prerequisites** - Know whether your operation represents multiple principals, sells its own products or projects, or combines both models. - Know whether you are looking for day-to-day sales work or management visibility. - Know whether PAMS is replacing spreadsheets, a generic CRM, or disconnected systems. **Steps** 1. Read the audience table and identify every row that describes your operation. 2. Select one starting page from the matching row: | If you matched… | Start with… | |---|---| | Sales agency, direct sales or trading team, or hybrid company | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Sales management or executive team | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | An operation replacing spreadsheets, a generic CRM, or disconnected systems | [What can you do with PAMS](doc:what-can-you-do-with-pams) | | More than one description, or no clear starting point | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | **Result:** You have a starting page matched to the way your operation works. # Activity status ## Activity status at a glance An activity status is the current work position of a planned Visit, Meeting, or Call. The product lists the statuses in this order: Planned, Overdue, Done, Due, and Cancelled. | Current status | Available action | | --- | --- | | **Overdue** or **Due** | **Done** | | **Done** | **Consider As Not Done** | | **Planned**, **Overdue**, or **Due** | **Cancel This Activity**, when editable | | **Cancelled** | **Undo Cancellation**, when editable | | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find an activity and read its status | [Find an activity](#find-an-activity) | | Understand the list and activity fields | [Understand the activity status screen](#understand-the-activity-status-screen) | | Complete, reverse, or cancel an activity | [Change an activity status](#change-an-activity-status) | | Create a new activity | [Create an activity](doc:create-activity) | | Work with the activity workspace | [My Desk activities](doc:my-desk-activities) | | Continue with tasks and activities | [Tasks and activities](doc:tasks-and-activities) | ## Before you change a status An activity must be saved before its status actions become available. Cancellation actions also require an activity that you can edit. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved activity from the activity list. - Check the current status in the activity record or the list's **Status** column. - Confirm that the activity is editable before using **Cancel This Activity** or **Undo Cancellation**. The available action depends on the current status: | Current status | Action available | Additional condition | | --- | --- | --- | | **Overdue** or **Due** | **Done** | Job changes do not block the action. | | **Done** | **Consider As Not Done** | Job changes do not block the action. | | **Planned**, **Overdue**, or **Due** | **Cancel This Activity** | The activity is editable. | | **Cancelled** | **Undo Cancellation** | The activity is editable. | **Result:** You know which status action can appear for the activity you opened. ## Find an activity The activity list is the place to locate a saved activity and read its current **Status**. **Prerequisites** - Know which activity you need to review. **Steps** 1. Open the activity list. 2. Select the filter that matches what you need to review. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | View all activity types | **All** | | Review visits | **Visits** | | Review email activities | **Email** | | Review meetings | **Meetings** | | Review calls | **Call** | | Include archived activities | **Show archived activities** | 3. Read the activity's value in the **Status** column. 4. Identify the activity by comparing its **Title**, **Visitors**, **Activity purpose**, **Company**, and `Startdate` values. ![Read the activity list headers and status column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/28fc35fa048657f4587675fe876d6adb.png) ![Choose an activity filter from the list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6a28be50580bece1bd14d11b2a4861db.png) **Result:** The activity list is filtered to the work you need to review, and its current status is visible in the **Status** column. ## Understand the activity status screen The activity surfaces combine a list status with activity-specific fields. Visit and Call records use separate **Priority** controls; both offer `High`, `Medium`, and `Low`. | Activity surface | Field | Options or value rule | | --- | --- | --- | | Visit | **Priority** | `High`, `Medium`, `Low` | | Visit | **Visit type** | `Project Meeting`, `Marketing`, `Technical Opening`, `Follow Up`, `Commercial Opening`, `Service Activities`, `Procurement` | | Visit | **Start Date** | Required | | Visit | **End Date** | Required; it cannot be earlier than **Start Date** | | Call | **Priority** | `High`, `Medium`, `Low` | | Call | **Call Use** | `Phone`, `Skype`, `Viber` | | Call | **Start Date** | Required | | Call | **Description** | Optional | The activity list shows **Title**, **Visitors**, **Activity purpose**, **Company**, `Startdate`, and **Status**. The activity list includes **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, **Settings**, and **Visit**. The activity editors provide these fields: | Activity | Field | Entry rule | | --- | --- | --- | | Visit | **Priority** | Required; choose `High`, `Medium`, or `Low`. | | Visit | **Start Date** | Required. | | Visit | **End Date** | Required; it cannot be earlier than **Start Date**. | | Visit | **Visit type** | Optional; choose `Project Meeting`, `Marketing`, `Technical Opening`, `Follow Up`, `Commercial Opening`, `Service Activities`, or `Procurement`. | | Call | **Priority** | Required; choose `High`, `Medium`, or `Low`. | | Call | **Call Use** | Optional; choose `Phone`, `Skype`, or `Viber`. | | Call | **Start Date** | Required. | | Call | **Description** | Optional. | When you create or edit a non-email activity, the editor provides **Save** and **Save and Close**. The status controls are: | Control | Available when | | --- | --- | | **Done** | A saved Visit or Call is **Overdue** or **Due**, and job changes do not block the action. | | **Consider As Not Done** | A saved Visit or Call is **Done**, and job changes do not block the action. | | **Cancel This Activity** | A saved, editable Visit or Call is **Planned**, **Overdue**, or **Due**. | | **Undo Cancellation** | A saved, editable Visit or Call is **Cancelled**. | | **Print Minutes Of Activity** | A saved Visit is open and job changes do not block the action. | ## Change an activity status Use the status action that matches the activity's current status and your editing permission. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved Visit or Call. - Check the current status in the activity record. - Confirm that the activity is editable when the action requires it. **Steps** 1. Select the action that matches the current activity status. | Current status | Select | | --- | --- | | **Overdue** or **Due** | **Done** | | **Done** | **Consider As Not Done** | | **Planned**, **Overdue**, or **Due**, when editable | **Cancel This Activity** | | **Cancelled**, when editable | **Undo Cancellation** | 2. Check the activity's **Status** value after the action. **Result:** The activity remains available for the next status action supported by its current status. ## Choose the applicable status branch The status action depends on both the activity type and its current status. Use the matching branch rather than selecting an action from another activity type. For a saved Visit or Call, check the current status. For **Cancel This Activity** or **Undo Cancellation**, confirm that the activity is editable. Then use the matching row in [Change an activity status](#change-an-activity-status). **Result:** You have the status branch that matches the activity type, current status, and edit permission. ## When a status change goes wrong Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Open an activity belonging to a branch you can work with. | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Add one topic and at least one note before using the action that requires them. | | `There is no topic to print` | Add a topic before selecting **Print Minutes Of Activity**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the activity details and try the action again. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue by checking the activity list or record. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove forbidden characters and repeat the action. | | `Action not allowed` | Check the activity status and your permission before trying again. | Messages owned by other pages are outside this activity-status procedure: | Message | Continue in | | --- | --- | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contacts | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Files | ## After checking or changing a status After a status action, return to the activity's **Status** value before continuing. For broader activity work, continue in [My Desk activities](doc:my-desk-activities). To add a new activity, use [Create an activity](doc:create-activity). For task-based follow-up, use [Create a task](doc:create-task). Use [Tasks and activities](doc:tasks-and-activities) for the combined work area. ![Confirm the status column in the activity list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6a28be50580bece1bd14d11b2a4861db.png) **Result:** You know where to continue with the activity or its related follow-up work. # Assembly orders ## Overview An assembly order records the work needed to assemble products for a project. Use it in the project-management ordering flow after the related sales order and sales item are available, then continue with the resulting warehouse work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the order fields and item grid | [Understand the Assembly Order screen](#understand-the-assembly-order-screen) | | Open an existing order or start a new one | [Find an assembly order](#find-an-assembly-order) | | Enter products and save the order | [Create and save an assembly order](#create-and-save-an-assembly-order) | | Handle a new order, saved order, or optional path | [Handle new, existing, and optional order states](#handle-new-existing-and-optional-order-states) | | Continue with receiving or inspection work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Work with the project-management list context | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | ## Prerequisites Before you start, have the sales order and the sales item that the assembly order will serve. The order form requires **Inventory**, **Sales Order No.**, and **Sales Item Description**. The page also needs the assembly-order feature to be included in your subscription and the permission to create or edit the record. The new-order route warns before navigation when unsaved changes exist. For an existing order, **Save** and **Save and Close** appear only when the record is editable. The form marks **Inventory**, **Sales Order No.**, **Sales Item Description**, **Ordered on**, **Completed on**, and **Completed by** as required. It does not mark **Time Frame**, **Ordered by**, **Final product**, **Qty**, **Unit**, or **Name** as required. ## Find an assembly order An Assembly Orders list is where you locate saved assembly orders; the new-order surface is where you begin a new one. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are opening a saved order or creating a new one. - Have the required access for the list or record. **Steps** 1. Open the route that matches your task. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Locate a saved order | `/projects-management/production-order/view` | | Create a new order | `/projects-management/production-order/new` | | Open a saved order directly | `/projects-management/production-order/edit/` | 2. On the list, identify an order from the headers **Sheet no.**, **Job no.**, **P.M Responsible**, **Order date**, **Item description**, and Expected complete on. 3. Select the order row to open the saved order's details surface. 4. To start a new order from the configured entry, select **Assembly Order**. **Result:** You are on the saved order's details surface or on the new **Assembly Order** surface. The **Assembly Orders** page appears under **Projects Management** and displays Assembly Order records. The list also shows toolbar controls titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ![Assembly Orders list with its six column headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2bb85bcdae2cc12cd7ad1d913677cff7.png) ## Understand the Assembly Order screen The Assembly Order screen combines the order information, its product rows, and completion information. The new-order surface contains the order fields, item grid, final-product fields, completion controls, and save actions. | Area | What you can work with | |---|---| | Order information | **Inventory**, **Sales Order No.**, **Sales Item Description**, **Time Frame**, **Ordered by**, and **Ordered on** | | Items | **Product**, Used qty, and **Unit**; Returned qty is added for an existing order | | Final product | **Qty**, **Unit**, and **Name** | | Completion | **Process completed**, **Completed on**, and **Completed by** | | Save actions | **Save** and **Save and Close** | The new-order screen showed **Product**, Used qty, and **Unit** as the visible item-grid columns and showed `No data` before a product row was added. The **Unit** field in the **Final product** group is separate from the **Unit** column in the Items grid and the **Unit** text field in the product-edit popup. The following surfaces are part of other work or do not appear from this order stage: the details tabs, **Finish and release to stock**, the separate **Final product** add action, and the row-delete action. ![New Assembly Order fields and empty item grid](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f65cceddf8a2e26d67000ffbfb2c7c0.png) ## Create and save an assembly order Create an assembly order when the related sales order and sales item are ready for assembly work. **Prerequisites** - Have the sales order and sales item to select. - Have an inventory available to select. - Know the order date and the project-management person responsible for the order. **Steps** 1. Open `/projects-management/production-order/new`. 2. In **Inventory**, select the inventory for the order. Select an inventory from **Inventory**. The captured screen shows **Inventory** as a visible field; it does not show any choice values. ![The **Inventory** field on the new Assembly Order screen](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f65cceddf8a2e26d67000ffbfb2c7c0.png) 3. In **Sales Order No.**, select the related sales order. Select the related sales order from **Sales Order No.**. The captured screen shows **Sales Order No.** as a visible field; it does not show any choice values. ![The **Sales Order No.** field on the new Assembly Order screen](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f65cceddf8a2e26d67000ffbfb2c7c0.png) 4. In **Sales Item Description**, select the related sales item. 5. In **Ordered on**, review the date shown by the form. 6. In **Ordered by**, select the responsible project-management person when needed. 7. In **Time Frame**, enter the period value and select its period unit when needed. Select the period unit in **Time Frame** when you enter a period value. The captured screen shows **Time Frame** as a visible field; it does not show any period choice values. ![The **Time Frame** field on the new Assembly Order screen](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f65cceddf8a2e26d67000ffbfb2c7c0.png) 8. Select **Product** under **Items** after **Sales Order No.** and **Sales Item Description** have values. 9. In the **Products** popup, select the products for the order. 10. Confirm the product selection with **OK**. 11. In the final-product section, enter **Qty**, select **Unit**, and enter **Name** when those details apply. 12. To record completion, select **Process completed**. 13. In **Completed on**, enter the completion date. 14. In **Completed by**, select the person who completed the work. 15. Select **Save**. 16. Select **Save and Close**. **Result:** The order is saved with its product rows. The success message is `Your request was completed successfully`. ## Handle new, existing, and optional order states The controls available on an Assembly Order change with the record state and with feature access. | If… | Then… | |---|---| | The order is new and both **Sales Order No.** and **Sales Item Description** have values | **Product** is available for adding product rows. | | The order already exists | **Inventory** and **Sales Order No.** are disabled, and Returned qty is added to the Items grid. | | **Process completed** is selected | **Completed on** and **Completed by** become enabled and are required. | | **MRQ for stock** is available | **MRQ for stock** appears in the add menu. | **Prerequisites** - For a new order, select the sales order and sales item before adding a product. - For completion details, select **Process completed** first. **Steps** 1. Use the state in the first column of the table to follow the control named in the matching row. **Result:** You use the controls available for the order's current state. The details tabs, **Finish and release to stock**, the separate **Final product** add action, and the row-delete action are not available as active paths on this screen. ## Resolve validation and access problems When saving stops, use the exact message to choose the correction. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields, including **Inventory**, **Sales Order No.**, **Sales Item Description**, **Ordered on**, **Completed on**, or **Completed by** when applicable. | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Add at least one product row under **Items**. | | `Please enter the storage area and position for each product` | Enter the storage area and position for each product. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Add a product in the **Products** popup before confirming it. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the entered data and try the save again. | | `Shipment is empty. Please enter received quantity` | Continue on the receiving-sheet surface. | | `Received quantity is greater than order quantity` | Continue on the receiving-sheet surface. | | `You have products with no decision regarding accepted or rejected quantity` | Continue on the inspection-sheet surface. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Continue on the file-library surface. | | `Amendment order deleted successfully` | Continue on the amendment-order surface. | **Prerequisites** - An action has stopped and displayed a message. **Steps** 1. Read the message shown after the action stops. 2. Follow the matching correction in the table. 3. Select the action that displayed the message again when the correction applies. **Result:** You have corrected the reported problem or identified the related surface for the next action. ## Know what comes next After saving, continue with the related project-management or warehouse work. | After you… | Continue with… | |---|---| | Need the surrounding project-management work | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Need related receiving or inspection work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | Receiving sheet, inspection sheet, and transfer-history work are not carried by the active order form. Use the related warehouse page for those tasks. **Result:** You know which related page to use for the next warehouse task. # Bonus calculation Bonus calculation is a configuration reference surface for reviewing bonus settings in stage order, from **Costs** through **Bonus distribution**. Use it when you need to review branch values, salary groups, targets, achievement settings, or the distribution of a bonus. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Confirm which bonus stage you are reviewing | [Read the stages and fields](#read-the-stages-and-fields) | | Open the configuration surface | [Open Bonus calculation](#open-bonus-calculation) | | Review or change stage values | [Review and maintain stage values](#review-and-maintain-stage-values) | | Handle a branch or popup variation | [Handle stage and popup variations](#handle-stage-and-popup-variations) | | Match a message to the action that produced it | [When a calculation action goes wrong](#when-a-calculation-action-goes-wrong) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You have access to the configuration area. - You know which year you need. The **Year** list contains `2021`, `2022`, and `2023`. - You know which stage you need to review. The available stage tabs depend on the current stage data loaded for the selected year. The selected year loads the bonus header and its current stage. When no usable year is provided, the page uses `2021`. With these prerequisites in place, open Bonus calculation from the configuration menu. ## Open Bonus calculation Open Bonus calculation from the configuration menu when you need to review a particular year. **Prerequisites** - You have the required configuration access. - You have a year value from the **Year** list. **Steps** 1. Open the configuration area. 2. Select **Bonus calculation**. 3. Check that **Year** and the bonus stage controls appear. 4. If another page opens, return to **Bonus calculation** from the configuration area. ![Check that the configuration page opens with its expected controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8cb1b9b8db1e9f4d786c4b304c2b1c73.png) The rendered page displays **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement** instead of the bonus stages. ![Check that the address bar and page controls belong to the requested configuration surface.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ![Check the page reached after the year route is requested.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8cb1b9b8db1e9f4d786c4b304c2b1c73.png) **Result:** The page is ready when **Year** and the bonus stage controls are visible. Continue with the stage and field descriptions below. ## Read the stages and fields The page presents the exact stages **Costs**, **Salaries**, **Achievement**, and **Bonus distribution**, with target values shown in the stage data. A branch section opens only when its branch data is present and the branch is opened. The stages form a year-based sequence. **Costs** records branch cost inputs, **Salaries** records salary amounts and optional service usage, **Achievement** displays sales-team booking and tendency values and accepts teamless performance and a minimum booking rate, and **Bonus distribution** sets the share of net earning used as a bonus and displays distribution results by team and teamless group. > **Note:** Target settings are not available from the rendered stage bar. | Stage or area | What appears there | When it appears | | --- | --- | --- | | **Costs** | Cost-related numeric fields and earning choices | A branch is open and cost-branch data exists | | **Salaries** | Salary values, salary portions, and usage values | A branch is open and salary-branch data exists | | Target settings | Branch target values and sales-team target values | A branch is open; some values require a sales team | | **Achievement** | Performance and teamless-group values | A branch is open; one value requires a teamless group | | **Bonus distribution** | Branch distribution percentages and distribution choices | Branch data exists, the branch is open, it is not hidden for the widget, and the page is not displayed as a widget | | Group popup | **Group name** | The add-group or edit-group popup is open; No group-type field appears in this popup. | | Usage area | Salary-usage percentage values | The usage table is open and salary-branch data exists | The labels available for the fields include **Year**, **Min margin**, **Salary portion for teamless**, **Commission/Margin distribution**, and **Group name**. No group-type field appears on this page. The year choices are `2021`, `2022`, and `2023`. | Field | Type and rule | | --- | --- | | **Year** | Select from `2021`, `2022`, or `2023`. | | **Group name** | Text field; required in the add-group and edit-group popup. | | **Min margin** | Numeric field with a minimum of `0`; it is not available on this page. | | **Commission/Margin distribution** | Numeric field with a range from `0` to `100`; it is not available on this page. | The page-level form's **Save** action is not available. Use **Save** in the Bonus distribution when that stage is open. Continue with the ordered review procedure when you know which stage and field you need. ## Review and maintain stage values Use the stage-choice table to open the path that matches your task. Each stage exposes branch values only after its branch is open. **Prerequisites** - The bonus-calculation surface is open. - The selected year has loaded its stage data. - A branch is available when the step requires branch values. **Stage choice** | If you need to review… | Select | Follow | | --- | --- | --- | | Cost, salary, or achievement values | **Costs**, **Salaries**, or **Achievement** | Costs, Salaries, and Achievement progression | | Distribution values | **Bonus distribution** | Distribution | | Earning calculation values | **Bonus distribution** | Earning panel | ### Distribution **Steps** 1. Select **Bonus distribution**. 2. In the distribution area, select **In ratio of salaries** when the distribution should use the salary-ratio mode. 3. Select **Save** in **Bonus distribution**. **Result:** The distribution values remain on screen, and a successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. ### Earning panel **Steps** 1. Select **Bonus distribution**. 2. In an earning panel, select **Earning up today** for earnings up to today. 3. In an earning panel for an earlier year, select **Earning till 31 Dec**. 4. Select **Including Forecast** when forecast booking is included in the earning calculation. 5. Select **Save** in **Bonus distribution**. **Result:** The earning-panel values remain on screen after the distribution save. ### Costs, Salaries, and Achievement progression After selecting **Costs** in the stage-choice table, follow the stages in order. **Steps** 1. In **Costs**, select **Save**. 2. In **Costs**, select **Next step**. 3. In **Salaries**, select **Save**. 4. In **Salaries**, select **Next step**. 5. In **Achievement**, select **Save**. 6. In **Achievement**, select **Next step**. **Result:** The selected stage advances through the available progression after each stage save. Use the variation table below when branch data or a popup changes what you can select. ## Handle stage and popup variations The fields and actions change with the branch data and the kind of popup that is open. Use the path that matches what is on screen. **Prerequisites** - The relevant stage is open. - The branch or popup condition in the table below is true. | If you need to… | Use this condition | | --- | --- | | Review cost values | An open branch has cost-branch data. | | Review salary values | An open branch has salary-branch data. | | Review usage values | The usage table is open and salary-branch data exists. | | Add or edit a group | The group popup is in add-group or edit-group mode. | | Review sales-team target values | The open branch contains a sales team. | | Review the teamless achievement value | The open branch contains a teamless group. | | Review distribution values | Branch data exists, the branch is open, the branch is not hidden for the widget, and the page is not displayed as a widget. | | Import a file | The shared popup is in import mode. | **Steps** 1. Choose one path from the table above. 2. When a shared popup presents alternatives, use the control that matches your intended outcome: | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Leave without saving | **Don't Save** | | Close the popup or cancel the task | **Cancel** | | Upload an import file | **Upload** | | Reject a confirmation | **No** | | Confirm a confirmation | **Yes** | | Close an alert | **Ok** | | Leave a subscription-upgrade surface outside a popup | **Back** | **Result:** The applicable branch, field group, or shared popup remains on screen for the selected path. ## When a calculation action goes wrong Use the exact text of the message to identify the action that stopped. | What you see | What to do | | --- | --- | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the values involved in the action and retry the same save or submit control. | | `Salary portions exceeded the total salary of sales teams` | Review the salary portions and bring their total to `100` or less before submitting. | ### Out of scope The shared-popup messages are outside the page-level calculation flows unless a live flow opens that popup. | Situation | What to do | | --- | --- | | Another page opens | If another page opens, select **Bonus calculation** from the configuration menu. | ## After reviewing the calculation After reviewing a stage, leave the values in the stage you intend to maintain and check the result message after an available save action. The available checks for this page are: | Check | What to confirm | | --- | --- | | Stage review | The selected stage and its branch values remain visible. | | Distribution save | `Your request was completed successfully` appears after a successful save. | | Salary validation | `Salary portions exceeded the total salary of sales teams` appears when the salary-portion total is above `100`. | | General failure | `An error occurred while processing your request` identifies the general error path. | **Result:** You have the outcome message for the action you performed and can return to the stage you need. # Common issues and solutions Use this page to triage problems on the home screen, principal report, custom, business-analysis, and sign-in surfaces it can show. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Identify the surface you reached | [Reach and identify the affected surface](#reach-and-identify-the-affected-surface) | | Compare what is visible with the expected screen | [Read the settled surface](#read-the-settled-surface) | | Restore or save changes | [Restore home work](#restore-home-work) | | Handle a sign-in or principal-report branch | [Handle access and report branches](#handle-access-and-report-branches) | | Match an error or unexpected control | [When a message or control does not match](#when-a-message-or-control-does-not-match) | | Continue to the owned help topic | [Continue from the result](#continue-from-the-result) | ## Before you start The home screen is the starting surface for signed-in work and for the signed-out sign-in branch. It can take you to the library, principal report, custom, and business-analysis surfaces. **Prerequisites** - You know whether you are signed in. - You have reached the home screen. - You have the exact labels and message currently visible. - For a principal-report problem, you know which report setup is selected. The home screen does not require a field before you compare it. Report columns depend on the report setup selected for your screen. | Check | Why it matters | |---|---| | Access state | It determines whether the home content or login content is shown. | | Home screen | It identifies the surface to compare. | | Exact wording | The message and label determine which troubleshooting row applies. | | Report setup | The principal-report columns depend on the selected setup. | ## Reach and identify the affected surface From the home screen, open the surface where the problem appears. The home screen switches between signed-in content and the login surface according to your access state. **Prerequisites** - You know whether you are signed in. - You can read the labels currently displayed. **Steps** 1. Open the home screen. 2. Compare each visible label with the entries in the table below. | If you need to… | Start with… | |---|---| | Work with **Dashboard** | **Dashboard** | | Work with the principal report | **Principals Report** | | Check a time range | **Interval** | | Check sorting | **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, or **Sort by Achievement** | | Resolve an access problem | **Email**, **Password**, or `Enter code` | 3. Record the route and the exact label or message that led you to the affected surface. **Result:** You have matched the problem to a home, principal-report, custom, business-analysis, or login branch. ## Read the settled surface The settled surface is the screen after loading finishes. Compare its labels, controls, required markers, buttons, columns, and visible loading state before changing anything. **Prerequisites** - You have reached the affected home surface. - The screen has finished loading. **Steps** 1. Look for the three sorting controls **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement**. 2. Check whether any of those controls carries a required marker. 3. Check whether buttons or report columns are visible. 4. Check whether a password field or spinner is visible. 5. Record the five visible controls without text labels. 6. Compare the visible result with the branch table. | What you see | Follow | |---|---| | The three sorting controls | Investigate the sorting surface. | | No buttons or report columns | Continue with the home or report page that owns the problem. | | A password field | Follow the sign-in branch. | | A spinner | Wait for the screen to settle before comparing it. | The settled screen has shown three sorting controls with no required markers, zero buttons, zero report columns, and five visible controls without text labels. It has shown no visible password field and no spinner. The custom surface also provides the optional **Over**, **Highlight**, and **Interval** fields. The **Over** choices are `Clients`, `Sales Responsibles`, `Projects`, and `Market Segments`. The **Interval** choices are `Last 12 Months` and `All Years`. **Result:** You have recorded the controls and screen elements that are visible before applying a fix. ![Compare the settled labels, sorting controls, and empty button and column areas.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7938e002abe71479df3f6fdb7c154f95.png) ## Restore home work Work on the home screen changes the tabs and widgets available there. Edit mode provides the available actions. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and on the home screen. - The home screen is in edit mode for **Add New Widget**, **Save**, and **Restore Standard Tabs**. **Steps** 1. Select **Add New Widget** to open the widget-selection action. 2. Enter the tab name in the required **New Tab** field when the new-tab popup opens. **Result:** The required **New Tab** value is entered in the new-tab popup. ### Save changes **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and on the home screen. - The home screen is in edit mode. **Steps** 1. Select **Save** to save the tabs. After a successful save, the tabs are saved and edit mode closes. Undo replaces the current tabs with the original copy and exits edit mode. **Result:** The tabs are saved and edit mode closes. ### Remove an extra tab Use this procedure when an edit-tab popup offers the conditional deletion action. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and on the home screen. - The home screen is in edit mode. - The edit-tab popup is open. **Steps** 1. Select **Delete** in the edit-tab popup when the deletion action is available. **Result:** The tab deletion action is applied. ### Restore standard tabs **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and on the home screen. - The home screen is in edit mode. **Steps** 1. Select **Restore Standard Tabs** to open the restore menu. 2. Choose one restore-menu action. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Close the restore menu | **Cancel** | | Restore the standard tabs | **Restore** | **Result:** The restore menu closes or the standard tabs are restored according to your selection. ![Identify the settled home surface before making changes.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/420ccaabe5b7987c5c6d91a5113df44f.png) ## Handle access and report branches The login branch checks access, while the principal-report branch gathers report information. Use the branch that matches the fields and surface currently shown. **Prerequisites** - You know whether the login flow asks for credentials or a verification code. - For the principal report, you have reached the report surface. **Steps** 1. Use the access-state table to choose the login fields. | If the sign-in flow… | Use | |---|---| | Does not require verification | **Email** and **Password** | | Requires verification | `Enter code` | 2. In the principal report, enter the required **Report** value when the report surface asks for it. 3. Follow the report setup fields when the introduction-and-outlines popup is open. 4. If the principal-report validation message appears, choose one or more principals before trying the report action again. The principal-report surface also carries **Introduction :**, **Sales Analysis :**, **Lost Opportunities and Competition :**, **Client Complaints and Difficulties :**, **Suggestions for Business Improvement :**, **Booking Forecast :**, and **Conclusion :** fields in its introduction- and-outlines popup. **Result:** You are working in the login or principal-report branch that matches the fields shown. ## When a message or control does not match Use the exact wording on screen to separate a validation message, a general request failure, a login failure, a control that does not appear, and a surface whose values depend on the saved setup. | What you see | Meaning | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty. | Return to the required field on the active surface and enter its value. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request returned a general error. | Check the active surface and retry the action when its prerequisites are satisfied. | | `Please choose one or more principals` | The principal report needs one or more principals selected. | Select one or more principals before retrying the report action. | | `Incorrect username or password` | The sign-in credentials were rejected. | Re-enter **Email** and **Password**. | The available **Highlight** choices depend on the selected **Over** choice. ### Out of scope messages and choices The following entries belong to other surfaces or depend on runtime records rather than a fixed choice list. | Entry | Owned by | |---|---| | **Vendors** as an **Over** option | Custom surface; it is not an active **Over** option. | | **This Year**, **Definite Year**, `last 12 months`, and **From / To** | Principal report time-frame choices, not the custom **Interval** field. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Pipeline, status, sales, backlog, and management-report widgets. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Pipeline, status, sales, backlog, and management-report widgets. | **Result:** You have matched the exact message or control discrepancy to the action or surface that owns it. ## Continue from the result After the immediate triage, continue in the page that owns the next task rather than repeating the same comparison on the home screen. | If you need to… | Continue with… | |---|---| | Understand home content | [Home overview](dashboard-overview.md) | | Choose or understand widgets | [Widget catalog](dashboard-widget-catalog.md) | | Personalize the workspace | [Personalizing your workspace](personalizing-your-workspace.md) | | Work with the principal report | [Principal report](principal-report.md) | | Match a broader error message | [General error messages](general-error-messages.md) | | Review recurring questions | [FAQ](faq.md) | | Get further assistance | [Getting help](getting-help.md) | **Result:** You have moved from the immediate home-surface problem to the page that owns the next piece of work. # Contact record ## Contact records at a glance A contact record keeps one person's identity, account relationship, contact channels, attached files, and change history together. Use it when you need to inspect or maintain the information held for an existing contact. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Understand the fields and required information | [Understand the record information](#understand-the-record-information) | | Find a saved contact | [Find and open a contact record](#find-and-open-a-contact-record) | | Change the person's information | [Edit and save contact information](#edit-and-save-contact-information) | | Add a phone number, email address, or other channel | [Manage contact details and the image](#manage-contact-details-and-the-image) | | Review files or history | [Review attachments and change history](#review-attachments-and-change-history) | | Create a new contact | [Create a contact](doc:create-contact) | | Browse the contact list | [Contacts](doc:contacts-overview) | | Work with the shared file library | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Get help with an unresolved problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | ## Before you open or change a record Sign in before opening a contact, and choose an existing contact when you need to review its saved details. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Have the contact you want to open available in the Contacts list. - Open an existing contact record when you need the **Attachment** or **Last Modifications** tabs. - Have permission to edit the record when you need the **Save** or **Save and Close** actions. When the feature is unavailable, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface. A read-only record keeps its information available for review while edit actions are unavailable. If you leave with unsaved changes, the page asks you to handle those changes before you leave. Then find the contact you need in the Contacts list. ## Find and open a contact record The Contacts list is the starting point for locating a saved contact. Selecting a row for a contact in the same branch opens that contact's record. **Prerequisites** - Open the Contacts list from the main navigation. - Know which saved contact you need to inspect. **Steps** 1. Open the Contacts list from the main navigation. 2. Choose the entry point that matches your task: | If you need to… | Choose | | --- | --- | | Open a saved contact | Select its row. | | Create a new contact | Follow [Create a contact](doc:create-contact). | ![Check the contact form route and its main fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9e09374860dcc4feb0c78253021984d2.png) **Result:** The contact form is open. The form shows **Title**, **Name**, Position, **Department**, and **Account**. ## Understand the record information The main contact form identifies the person, relates the person to an account, and holds the person's communication details. | Field | What you use it for | Required on the new-contact form | | --- | --- | --- | | **Title** | Enter the contact's title. | No | | **Name** | Enter or select the contact's name. | Yes | | **Position** | Enter the contact's position. | No | | **Department** | Enter the contact's department. | No | | **Account** | Select the related account. | Yes | | Contact-detail value | Enter the value for a selected contact channel. | No | The form applies its validation rules to the main information. **Name** is required and uses a pattern rule. An email contact detail uses email validation. Phone, Fax, and Mobile values accept up to 20 characters. On a new record, **Name** uses an autocomplete control. On an existing record, **Name** uses a text box. **Account** is read-only when the record is read-only. ![Identify the required **Name** and **Account** fields on the new-contact form.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fe8a8cc2503755718728a3c0064a42ec.png) > **Note:** **Name** and **Account** carry required markers on the new-contact form. ## Edit and save contact information Change the identity or account relationship on a contact record. **Prerequisites** - Open the contact record. - Have edit permission for the record. - Have the correct name and related account ready before saving. **Steps** 1. In the main contact form, select **Title**, **Name**, Position, Department, or **Account**. 2. Enter the corrected value or select the related account. 3. If the form displays `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`, remove characters other than `_`, `-`, `.`, and `&` from **Name**. 4. Select **Save** or **Save and Close**: | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the contact record open | **Save** | | Save and leave the record | **Save and Close** | 5. If the form displays `This Field Is Required`, enter the missing required value. 6. Select **Save** or **Save and Close** again. **Note:** **Save** and **Save and Close** are disabled when there are no detected changes or when saving is in progress. **Result:** The contact form remains on screen with its save controls available for the next action. ## Manage contact details and the image Contact details are the communication channels you keep with the person's main record. Add only the channels that belong to this contact so colleagues can use the right route to reach the person. **Prerequisites** - Open an editable contact record. - Have the phone numbers, email address, website, online-support address, or comments you want to add. **Steps** 1. Open the **Contact Details** menu. 2. Select one channel to add: | If you need to add… | Select | | --- | --- | | A telephone number | **Phone** | | A fax number | **Fax** | | A mobile number | **Mobile** | | An email address | **Email** | | A website | **Website** | | Online support information | **Online Support** | | A note about the contact | **Comments** | 3. Enter the value beside the new channel. 4. If you added **Email**, correct the value when the form displays `Email is invalid`. 5. To remove an existing channel, select its remove control. 6. To change the contact image, open the image dialog. 7. Select an image file in the image uploader. 8. Select **Upload**. 9. To remove the current image, open its image menu. 10. Select **Delete**. 11. Confirm the deletion when the dialog displays `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. ![Choose a contact channel from **Contact Details**.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/dda089885e1315fc4f7f815905910fcc.png) **Result:** The selected contact detail or image action is complete on the contact form. ## Review attachments and change history Attachments are files associated with an existing contact. **Last Modifications** is the contact's change-history area. These tabs are available for an existing record opened outside a popup. **Prerequisites** - Open an existing contact record outside a popup. - For file changes, have an editable record and the file you want to attach. **Steps** 1. Select **Attachment** to open the contact's attached files. 2. Select **Attach File** to open the file library. 3. Choose the file action that matches your task: | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Change file details | **Edit** | | Download a file | **Download** | | Link a file | **Link** | | Open a file | **Open** | | Add or remove tags | **Add/Remove tags** | | Rename a file or folder | **Rename** | | Delete a file or folder | **Delete** | | Export the file list | **Export** | 4. If the attachment area reports a load problem, select **Try Again**. 5. Select **Last Modifications** to open the change history. 6. Select **Registration** to open the available registration history entry. | Area | Information or action | | --- | --- | | Attached files | **File Name** is available with the attached-file operation. | | File library | Library name, **File Name**, **Links**, and **Comment** can appear in the file operation. | | File actions | **Edit**, Download, Link, Open, Add/Remove tags, **Rename**, **Delete**, and **Export** are available according to the file state. | **Result:** The selected attachment or history area is open on the contact record. ## When a contact record cannot be saved Use the message text on screen to choose the correction. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | Enter the missing value in the required field. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Remove unsupported characters from **Name** or the file value being checked. | | `Email is invalid` | Correct the value in the email contact-detail field. | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Use a different contact name or review the existing contact before saving. | | `Error: This Contact Name Already Exists` | Use a different contact name or review the existing contact before saving. | | `Error: Server Error` | Contact your administrator or follow [Getting help](doc:getting-help). | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the updated contact record. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Confirm only when you intend to remove the contact image. | ### Out of scope The file-library component has additional messages for standalone library operations, including file selection, duplicate files, missing links, and server errors. Use [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) for those messages. ## Continue from the contact record After you inspect or update the contact record, continue with the part of the contact work you need next. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Locate another saved contact | [Contacts](doc:contacts-overview) | | Create a contact | [Create a contact](doc:create-contact) | | Work with files beyond the contact attachment area | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Resolve an access or server problem | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | The contact record keeps **Attachment** and **Last Modifications** as its related areas. # Cost transactions ## Cost transactions A direct cost transaction records an additional cost and allocates it to one or more sales-order or purchase-order lines in Job Profitability. The allocation connects the cost with the order lines used to review direct cost and margin. A provider is the account associated with the charge. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the list or start a new allocation | [Find or start a cost transaction](#find-or-start-a-cost-transaction) | | Enter the cost, provider, date, and destination | [Enter the transaction details](#enter-the-transaction-details) | | Allocate items or products across order lines | [Allocate the order lines](#allocate-the-order-lines) | | Review, remove a line, or save | [Review, remove, and save the allocation](#review-remove-and-save-the-allocation) | | Continue with payment work | [Payables](doc:payables) | | Review the surrounding job-profitability record | [Job Profitability record](doc:job-profitability-record) | ## Before you start Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters here | |---|---| | The sales order or purchase order you are allocating to | It supplies the order lines available for the allocation. | | The provider account | The transaction records the provider against the cost. | | The cost type, title, amount, invoice date, and invoice number | These identify the cost transaction and support its later review. | | Access to edit the transaction | **Save** and **Save and Close** are available only when editing is allowed. | The **Cost Type** and **Provider** choices come from lists returned for the current setup. The **Sales Order / Purchase Order (PO)** choice set also comes from the corresponding order lookup. Use the records returned by the corresponding lookup. The form requires **Cost Type**, **Transaction Title**, **Amount**, **Invoice Date**, **Provider**, and the order destination. **Invoice No.**, `Cost Classification`, and **Comment** are optional on the form. The form is available when the feature is included and the page is available. When the feature is not included, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface. > **Note:** The destination readout follows the allocation route: **Sales Order** on the sales-order form and > **Purchase Order (PO)** on the purchase-order form. **Result:** You have the order, provider, cost information, and edit access needed to complete the allocation. ## Find or start a cost transaction A cost-transaction list brings together saved additional direct costs and provides the entry point for a new sales-order or purchase-order allocation. Prerequisites - You know whether the cost belongs to a sales order or a purchase order. Steps 1. Open **Additional Direct Cost**. 2. Use the list headers to identify a record: `Cost Transaction No.`, **Transaction Title**, **Amount**, `Sales Job(s)`, `Amount (€)`, `Amount (ج.م.‏)`, **Cost Type**, **Provider**, and **Invoice No.** 3. Use the visible list tools when needed: **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, or **Settings**. 4. Select the list tab that matches the records you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every additional direct cost | **All** | | Review payable costs | **Payable** | | Review paid costs | **Paid** | 5. Choose the allocation route that matches the order type. | Allocation you need | Route | |---|---| | Sales-order allocation | `/finance/payables/cost-transaction/newAllocatioToSales` | | Purchase-order allocation | Purchase-order allocation form | | Existing transaction | Existing cost transaction record | 6. Open an existing transaction from the list when you need to review or change a saved record. ![Review the list headers and list tools before opening a transaction.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8cf52205ac5a85560b07233a57ab2dd7.png) **Result:** The selected list tab remains available for lookup, or the selected allocation form opens. ## Enter the transaction details The transaction-details form identifies the cost, its provider, its destination, and the information needed to review the charge later. Prerequisites - You have opened the sales-order or purchase-order allocation form. - You have the cost information and provider account ready. Steps 1. Select the cost category in **Cost Type**. 2. Select the classification that matches the charge. | Choose this option | Use it for | |---|---| | **Additional Landed Cost** | An inbound additional cost. | | **Delivery Costs** | A delivery charge. | 3. Enter the name of the charge in **Transaction Title**. 4. Enter the charge in **Amount**. 5. Select the invoice date in **Invoice Date**. 6. Enter the supplier's reference in **Invoice No.** when one is available. 7. Select the account in **Provider**. 8. Select **Sales Order / Purchase Order (PO)**. The list contains **Orders**. 9. Review the destination readout for the route you opened. | Form opened for | Destination readout | |---|---| | Sales-order allocation | **Sales Order** | | Purchase-order allocation | **Purchase Order (PO)** | 10. Enter any additional explanation in **Comment**. On both allocation forms, **Cost Type**, **Transaction Title**, **Amount**, **Invoice Date**, and **Provider** carry required markers. The amount accepts values from `0`, and the invoice date cannot be later than today. The title and invoice number use the form's character validation. For an existing record whose currency differs from the branch currency, the form can show the amount in branch currency when the invoice date has not changed. ![Check the sales-order form fields, required markers, and allocation headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5eeb0064e51492ee6fb6090c77881513.png) ![Check the sales-order cost type and classification choices.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4385380d6167e244abdbeee94d2a9822.png) ![Check the purchase-order form fields and order-line headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/07091aa3233a9a768a5faa19179d2ae5.png) **Result:** The transaction identity, classification, amount, date, provider, destination context, and comment are ready for allocation. ## Allocate the order lines An allocation row connects part of the transaction amount to an item or product on the selected order. Prerequisites - The form has an order list available. - You have completed the transaction details. Steps 1. Select an allocation method in **Allocation Method** when more than one allocation detail exists. | Choose this option | Use it for | |---|---| | **Manual** | Enter the allocation percentage and amount yourself. | | **Equal Split** | Divide the allocation equally across the details. | | **Sales price** | Allocate according to sales price. | 2. Select the item source for the allocation route when the order list contains entries. | Allocation route | Select | |---|---| | Sales-order allocation | **Items** | | Purchase-order allocation | **Products** | 3. Select the rows to add in the picker. 4. Review the allocation rows and their values. | Column set | Headers | |---|---| | Shared columns | **Item Price (EUR)**, `Allocation%`, **Allocation Amount** | | Sales-order-specific columns | `Vendor Order No.`, **Job No.**, **Job Title** | | Purchase-order-specific columns | **PO No.**, **Package No**, **Package Title** | 5. Enter the percentage in `Allocation%` when the selected method permits manual editing. 6. Review **Allocation Amount** after the percentage is calculated. 7. Check the total allocation percentage before saving. The total must equal `100%`. If the total differs from `100%`, the form shows `The total must equal 100%`. **Result:** The order lines show their allocation percentages and amounts, ready for review and saving. ## Review, remove, and save the allocation Reviewing the allocation before saving keeps the cost attached to the intended order lines and classification. Prerequisites - The transaction details are complete. - The allocation rows and total are ready for review. Steps 1. Select **Additional Landed Cost** or **Delivery Costs** to confirm the classification. 2. Review the allocation percentage and amount for each row. 3. Open the row's delete action when an allocation row is not needed. 4. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 5. Choose the action that matches what you need to do next. | Action | Use it when you need to… | Result | |---|---|---| | **No** | Keep the selected allocation row | The confirmation closes and the row remains. | | **Yes** | Remove the selected allocation row | The row is removed and the allocation percentage is recalculated. | | **Save** | Save the transaction and continue on the form | The transaction is validated and saved. | | **Save and Close** | Save the transaction and leave the form | The transaction is validated, saved, and the form closes. | After a successful create or update, the page uses `Your request was completed successfully`. If the save request fails, the page uses `An error occurred while processing your request`. **Result:** The transaction is saved, or the selected allocation row is removed before you save. If a validation message stops the save, continue with [When validation stops the save](#when-validation-stops-the-save). ## When validation stops the save Use the message on screen to correct the value or selection named by the validation. | Message | Corrective action | |---|---| | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | Review the validation messages listed with it. | | `Please select at least one order.` | Select an order destination. | | `Please select at least one item/product.` | Add at least one item or product. | | `Please enter the percentage value or delete unused items.` | Enter a positive allocation percentage or remove the unused row. | | `Please adjust cost allocation.` | Adjust the allocation until the total is `100%`. | | `Please enter valid amount.` | Enter an amount greater than `0`. | | `Please choose cost type.` | Select a value in **Cost Type**. | | `Please choose provider.` | Select a value in **Provider**. | | `Please enter Transaction Title.` | Enter a value in **Transaction Title**. | | `Please choose payment due date.` | Select a value in **Invoice Date**. | | `Just '-' '_' and '.' are the only characters that are accepted.` | Remove other characters from **Transaction Title**. | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the required field marked on the form. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove other characters from the validated title field. | | `The total must equal 100% ` | Adjust the allocation percentages until the total equals `100%`. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **No** to keep the row or **Yes** to remove it. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue from the saved transaction. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Correct the transaction details and try the save again. | Account, contact, and shared-component messages belong to their owning pages. Continue with [Accounts](doc:accounts), [Create an account](doc:create-account), or [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) when that separate surface shows the message. **Result:** You have a correction for each validation or save message listed on this page. Return to [Review, remove, and save the allocation](#review-remove-and-save-the-allocation) after correcting the value. ## After saving An existing cost transaction can continue into payment work through its **Payments** tab. Prerequisites - The transaction has an ID and has been saved. Steps 1. Open the saved transaction. 2. Select **Payments**. 3. Select the plus icon at the right side of the **Payments** tab when the transaction is not fully paid. The **Payments** tab contains the payables list for the transaction. Continue with [Payables](doc:payables) for payment work and [Job Profitability](doc:job-profitability-overview) for the surrounding profitability view. **Result:** The saved transaction is available for its payment work and related job-profitability review. # Create an account Create a new account or update an existing account record, then continue from the account record or a related page. ## Create or update an account An account is a business relationship record for work with clients, principals, and suppliers. Create one when the relationship is new; update one when the saved record already exists and its information changes. The account form is a large form with several embedded areas. Use the form to create or update the account itself. Use the related pages for list work and companion tasks. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Create or update the account | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open a new or saved account form | [Find the account form](#find-the-account-form) | | Enter the account's main information | [Enter the account information](#enter-the-account-information) | | Work with registrations, contacts, projects, or files | [Handle conditional account details](#handle-conditional-account-details) | | Find saved account records | [Accounts](accounts.md) | | Create a contact person | [Create a contact](create-contact.md) | | Review account projects | [Projects](projects.md) | | Review account registrations | [VL registrations](vl-registrations.md) | ## Before you start Prepare the information and record state that match the work you are about to do. A primary ID is the identifier that marks an account as saved. | Prepare | Why it matters | | --- | --- | | The account's display name and full name | These identify the account in the form and are checked before saving. | | The account type and market segment | These classify the account and determine which related choices apply. | | Account-manager information, when the account is a client | **Account Manager** is shown for a client account. | | Address information | The form can include **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code**. | | A new account with no primary ID | The new-account fields are used for a new record. | | An existing account with a primary ID | The existing-account route is used to update a saved record. | Some fields are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. The required marker appears on **Display name**, **Full Name**, and **Destination Title**. > **Note:** A field can be required only where your company configures it as mandatory. ## Find the account form Open the new-account form to start an account. Open the saved account when you already have its account identifier. Prerequisites - For a new account, have the account information ready. - For an existing account, have its account identifier. Steps 1. Choose the form that matches your task. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | Start a new account | The new-account form | | Update an existing account | The saved account | | Update an account that uses the logo-specific form | The saved account | ![Identify the new-account form and its two save controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d949ee50e423dda39bcd8dc1fc08e004.png) **Result:** The new-account form opens with the account fields ready. ## Understand the account screen The new-account screen presents identity, classification, address, account-type, and save areas. Related areas appear as the account becomes a saved record. The initial form shows 12 labelled fields and 24 additional visible controls. The labelled fields are grouped below. | Area | Fields or controls | | --- | --- | | Identity and classification | **Display name**, **Full Name**, **Market Segment**, **Account Type**, **VAT ID Number**, **Account Manager** | | Account types | **Client**, **Active**, and other account-type controls | | Main address | **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, **Zip-code** | | Save | **Save**, **Save and Close** | | Saved-record areas | **Comments**, the contact-person area, the registration area, the project area, the contract-data area, **Last Modifications** | The initial form has no table headings. The contact-person and project areas use their own table headings when those saved-record areas are available; work from the headings shown there. ![Locate the account-type controls and the main account fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/33c141bbd5968a03be4a358e6747f200.png) **Result:** You can locate the fields, account-type controls, save controls, and related areas before entering information. ## Enter the account information Prerequisites - Open the appropriate account form. - Have the account identity and address information ready. Steps 1. Enter the account's name in **Display name**. 2. Enter the account's full name in **Full Name**. 3. Select the applicable values in **Market Segment** and **Account Type**. 4. Enter the account's tax identifier in **VAT ID Number**. 5. If the account is a client, select its value in **Account Manager**. 6. In the account-type controls, select the rendered **Sup-supplier** control when it applies. 7. Enter the address in **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code**. 8. Add the contact-information types you need: **Phone**, **Fax**, **Mobile**, **Email**, **Website**, **Online Support**, **Office**, or **Pager**. 9. Select **Save** or **Save and Close**. ![Review the account manager field before saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/33c141bbd5968a03be4a358e6747f200.png) **Result:** The form checks the mandatory fields. When a new account is saved, the new account opens as a saved account for editing and can display `Your request was completed successfully`. ## Handle conditional account details The related areas hold information that applies only to certain account types or to a saved account. Choose the branch that matches the account. | If the account is… | Use | | --- | --- | | A principal | **Client** is required for a new registration. | | Not a principal | **Principal** is required for a new registration. | | A principal or a client | Open the registration area. | | Not a company | Open the contact-person area. | | A saved account | Open **Comments**, the project area, or **Last Modifications**. | | A principal and you have permission to view contract data | Open the contract-data area. | Prerequisites - Save the account before using areas that require a primary ID. - Choose the account type before completing a conditional registration. Steps 1. Choose the registration branch that matches the account. | If the account is… | Select or open | | --- | --- | | A principal | **Client**, **Status**, and the registration area | | Not a principal | **Principal**, **Status**, and the registration area | 2. Enter **Registration Number** when you have one. 3. Enter **Registration date** no later than today. 4. Open the contact-person area when the account is not a company. 5. Open the contract-data area when the account is a principal and you can view contract data. 6. Open **Comments**, the project area, or **Last Modifications** for a saved account. For an existing account, the account form also declares these fields: | Field | Rule | | --- | --- | | **Expiry Date** | The date cannot be earlier than today. | | **Cancellation Period** | Enter a number of at least `1`. | | **Product Type** | Select the applicable contract-data value. | The contact-person form declares **Name**, **Position**, and an organizational field, as well as the contact-information types listed in the account form. ![Choose the account type before using conditional areas.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/33c141bbd5968a03be4a358e6747f200.png) **Result:** The applicable registration or saved-account area is open, with its fields available for the account's condition. ## Save the account and resolve problems The form checks mandatory values before it sends the account information for saving. Use the message text to correct the relevant field or account name. Prerequisites - Complete the fields that carry a required marker. - Have a unique account name when creating a new account. Steps 1. Choose the save action. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the account on the form | **Save** | | Use the close variant | **Save and Close** | 2. Resolve the message that appears, then select **Save** again. | Message | Resolve it by | | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | Enter the missing value, then select **Save** again. | | `An account with this name already exists` | Enter a different value in **Display name**, then select **Save** again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the account information, then select **Save** again. | ![Select the save action for the account form.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/33c141bbd5968a03be4a358e6747f200.png) **Result:** The form either continues the save operation or displays a message that identifies the correction to make. | Message | What to check | | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the field carrying the required marker. | | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | Read the listed validation issues and correct each named field. | | `Display Name field is mandatory` | Enter a value in **Display name**. | | `Full Name field is mandatory` | Enter a value in **Full Name**. | | `Destination Title field is mandatory` | Enter a value in **Destination Title**. | | `An account with this name already exists` | Use a different account name. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the form values and select **Save** again. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue from the saved account record. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters outside the set named in the message, then select **Save** again. | ### Out of scope These messages belong to companion pages: | Message | Continue in | | --- | --- | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | [Accounts](accounts.md) | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | [Accounts](accounts.md) | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | [Accounts](accounts.md) | | ` You already have a contact with this name` | [Create a contact](create-contact.md) | ## After saving The saved account remains the record you revisit from the Accounts area. After a successful save, the new account opens as a saved account for editing. Use the companion pages when the next job is about the related record rather than the account itself: - [Accounts](accounts.md) for saved account list and record orientation. - [Contacts](contacts-overview.md), [Create a contact](create-contact.md), or [Contact record](contact-record.md) for contact work. - [Projects](projects.md) for project work. - [VL registrations](vl-registrations.md) for registration reference work. - [Libraries and files](libraries-files.md) for attached files. **Result:** You know where to continue account work and which companion page owns the next related job. # Customer satisfaction survey ## Customer satisfaction survey models The **Customer satisfaction survay** tab lists and maintains customer satisfaction survey models. Survey answers and survey questions have their own configuration pages. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the available model records | [Find and review survey models](#find-and-review-survey-models) | | Understand the fields and list | [Understand the survey model screen](#understand-the-survey-model-screen) | | Add or change a model | [Add or edit a survey model](#add-or-edit-a-survey-model) | | Remove a model | [Delete a survey model](#delete-a-survey-model) | | Maintain survey answers | Customer satisfaction survey answers | | Maintain survey questions | Customer satisfaction survey questions | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Confirm that your subscription includes the configuration feature. When it does not, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the configuration grid. . - Confirm that the action you need is available to your role. **New** is shown when creating a record is allowed; row editing and deletion depend on the corresponding permissions. . - Start from the list when you are adding a model. Open a row when you are changing an existing model. . ## Find and review survey models Use the list to review configured models or choose a row to maintain. **Steps** 1. Open the **Customer satisfaction survay** tab. 2. Review the **Survey name** and **Module** columns. 3. Select the available action for your task: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a survey model | **New** | | Change an existing survey model | The model row | ![Check the page title, arrival controls, and the **Survey name** and **Module** columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d5de7ffba9b40527f26fdc86aa3af743.png) **Result:** You are at the customer satisfaction survey model list, with the available arrival controls and columns in view. ## Understand the survey model screen The list identifies each model by **Survey name** and **Module**. The form carries the model name, module selection, and survey details. It also carries hidden supporting values that you do not enter on the list. | Area | What to use it for | What it contains | |---|---|---| | List | Review configured models | **Survey name** and **Module** | | Model name | Name the model | **Survey name**; required | | Module | Associate the model with a module | **Module**; required in the form | | Survey details | Provide the model's survey details | Required in the form | The list does not show column headers by default and does not use paging. Use the procedures below to add, edit, or delete a survey model. You can select **Cancel** in the export or shared form dialog and **Export** to open the export-options dialog. The survey-answer, reference-list question, and question-unit fields belong to related configuration pages; maintain survey answers and survey questions on their own pages. ## Add or edit a survey model Add a new survey model or change an existing one. **Survey name**, **Module**, and the survey details are required in the model configuration; the required check is applied when you save. **Prerequisites** - You are on the survey model list. - You have the permission required for the action. - For an edit, the model row is already present. **Steps** 1. Select the action for your task: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a survey model | **New** | | Change an existing survey model | The model row | 2. Enter the model's name in **Survey name**. 3. Select the applicable value in **Module**. 4. Complete the survey details. 5. Select **Save**. The form checks the required fields and can show `Field is required` when a required value is missing. Correct the indicated field and select **Save** again. **Result:** After a successful new submission, the page shows `Data saved Successfully`. After a successful edit, the page shows `Data updated Successfully`. ## Delete a survey model Delete a model when the model should no longer remain in the configuration list. The delete option appears for a row only when your role has delete permission. **Prerequisites** - The model row is present in the list. - You have delete permission. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Read the confirmation message: `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` 3. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The model is removed when deletion succeeds. If the action is refused, the page shows the applicable delete message. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message text on screen to choose the corrective action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Field is required` | A required model value is empty. | Complete the indicated field and select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The submitted value contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters and submit the action again. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The delete request was refused because the model is related to saved data. | Keep the model and review the related saved data before trying another maintenance action. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete request failed. | Do not assume the model was removed; return to the list and review the row. | | `Must have at least one item` | The delete action cannot leave the list without an item. | Keep at least one model in the list. | ## Continue with related survey settings Survey model configuration is one part of the related ISO survey settings. Survey answers and survey questions are maintained on sibling configuration pages. Creating, changing, and deleting a survey model each has a corresponding configuration audit event. **Steps** 1. Select **ISO settings**. 2. Choose the related configuration tab for your task: | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Maintain survey answers | **Rating types** | | Maintain survey questions | **Questions** | **Result:** You are working on the related survey configuration page for the task at hand. # Edit branch A branch record is the company information for one branch. Use it to maintain company information, address details, contact information, and saved-record settings. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach an existing branch | [Find and open the branch](#find-and-open-the-branch) | | Identify a field or its required rule | [Understand the branch information](#understand-the-branch-information) | | Change details and save them | [Maintain branch details and contacts](#maintain-branch-details-and-contacts) | | Review saved settings or history | [Review saved areas and default margins](#review-saved-areas-and-default-margins) | | Maintain a branch logo | [Edit branch logo](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record-2) | | Return to the branch list | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - You are signed in. - You have access to the branch record. - You have the branch information, address details, and contact details you want to enter. - You know whether the branch already has jobs. **Reference Currency** is disabled when it does. - You know that **Display Name** and the two parts of **Financial Year Start** have conditional required rules, while **Reference Currency** and **Local currency** are required. - You have an existing saved branch before opening **Default ** or **Last Modifications**. ## Find and open the branch Open the branch from the company configuration area when you need to maintain its information. Prerequisites - You are signed in. Steps 1. Open **Configurations**. 2. Open **Company**. 3. Open **Branches**. 4. Select the branch row you want to maintain. The edit screen opens for the selected branch. The page can also load a saved branch logo before showing the branch details. ![Review the branch fields and required markers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) **Result:** The selected branch opens on its edit screen. ## Understand the branch information The edit screen groups the branch identity, registration, currency, address, contact, margin, and history information you maintain. ### Branch information fields | Field | Type | Required rule or condition | |---|---|---| | **Display Name** | Text | Required when its value is empty; the form also checks the permitted character pattern. | | **Full Name** | Text | No required rule. | | **Statement** | Text | No required rule. | | **Managing Director** | Text | No required rule. | | **Company Registration No.** | Text | No required rule. | | **VAT ID Number** | Text | No required rule. | | **VatRate** | Number | Accepts values from `0` through `100`. | | **Financial Year Start** | Day and month dropdowns | Required when either value is empty. | | **Reference Currency** | Dropdown | Required; disabled when the branch has jobs. | | **Local currency** | Dropdown | Required. | | **Street** | Text | Available when address data is present. | | **Zip Code** | Number | Available when address data is present. | | **Country** | Dropdown | Available when address data is present. | | **State** | Text | Available when address data is present. | | **City** | Text | Available when address data is present. | | Contact information value | Text | Available for each contact row. Phone, fax, and mobile use the contact field for those entries. | | Fixed Percentage value | Number | Available for a saved branch when **Default ** and fixed-percentage mode are selected. | | Descending margin range | Number inputs | Available for a saved branch when **Default ** and a descending mode are selected. | | Action users | Multiselect | Available when **Last Modifications** is selected. | | Fields | Multiselect | Available when **Last Modifications** is selected. | The edit screen shows the branch fields and required markers on **Display Name**, **Financial Year Start**, **Reference Currency**, and **Local currency**. The page uses field rows rather than a grid. ![Review the financial-year and currency fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) ## Maintain branch details and contacts Use this procedure to change branch information, add contact rows, and save the changed record. Prerequisites - You have opened an existing branch. - You have the values to enter in the branch fields. Steps 1. Select the field you want to change. 2. Enter or select the new value. 3. Repeat the field update for each value you need to change. 4. Open **Contact Information**. 5. Choose one contact type from the following options. | If you need to add… | Select | |---|---| | A telephone number | **Phone** | | A fax number | **Fax** | | A mobile number | **Mobile** | | An email address | **Email** | | A website | **Website** | | Online support details | **Online Support** | 6. Enter the contact value in the new contact row. 7. Select **Save** to save the branch and remain on the record. 8. Select **Save and Close** to save the branch and leave the record instead. ![Check the save controls after updating a branch](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) When a required value is empty, the form displays `Name is required` for **Display Name** or `required` for the required fields. When **Display Name** or **Full Name** contains a disallowed character, the form displays `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted`. **Result:** The changed branch remains on the record after **Save**, or the record closes after **Save and Close**. A successful branch save displays `Branch saved Successfully`. ## Review saved areas and default margins Saved-record areas provide the branch's default-margin settings and its modification history. > **Note:** **Default ** and **Last Modifications** are available after the branch has an existing > saved record. Prerequisites - The branch is saved and has an existing record ID. Steps 1. Select **Default ** to open the default-margin area. 2. Select one margin mode. | If you need to use… | Select | |---|---| | A fixed percentage | **Fixed Percentage** | | A descending absolute percentage | **Descending Absolute** | | A descending accumulative percentage | **Descending Accumulative** | 3. Enter the margin values shown for the selected mode. 4. Select **Save** in the default-margin area. 5. Select **Last Modifications** to open the history area. 6. Choose values in **Action users** and **Fields** to narrow the history. For a descending mode without a degressive margin list, the page displays `Please insert degressive margin list`. A successful default-margin save displays `Data saved Successfully`. If that save fails, the page displays `Error while saving data `. **Result:** The selected saved-record area is on screen, or the default-margin save displays its result. ## Fix validation and save problems Use the message on screen to identify the correction needed before saving again. Steps 1. Read the message displayed on the page. 2. Apply the matching correction or choice. | Message or situation | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a value in **Display Name**. | | `required` | Choose a value in the required field. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove disallowed characters from the affected name field. | | `Branch does not exist` | Return to [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) and open an existing branch. | | `Error: Server Error` | Review the logo operation and use [Edit branch logo](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record-2). | | `Please insert degressive margin list` | Add a degressive margin row before saving a descending margin mode. | | `Error while saving data ` | Review the default-margin values and select **Save** again. | | `Delete item` | Read the confirmation before removing the logo. | | `Logo Deleted Successfully` | Continue on the branch record. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Choose **Yes** to remove the logo, or **No** to cancel. | | Logo window | Select **Attach** to submit the selected image file. | | Unsaved-changes prompt | Select **Don't Save** to leave without saving. | If `Branch saved Successfully` does not appear, remain on the record and review the values before trying again. **Result:** The corrected value is ready for saving, the selected logo action is complete, or the record is left without saving. ## Continue after editing After maintaining the branch, choose the next area according to the work you need to do. Steps 1. Choose the next area from the table. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Review the branch list | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | | Create a different branch | [New branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-new) | | Maintain the branch logo | [Edit branch logo](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record-2) | | Review company currencies used by the dropdowns | [Company currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | **Result:** **Save** keeps the branch record open, while **Save and Close** leaves the record. # Edit dashboard setting ## What a dashboard setting is A dashboard setting defines the tabs and widgets that a role sees on its dashboard. Customize it when the role needs a different working view, such as an additional widget, another tab, a principals report, or Eagle View. The saved setting feeds the active role dashboard that opens for that role. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the dashboard that opens after you save | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Choose a widget for a dashboard tab | [Dashboard widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog) | | Work with the principals report | [Principal report](doc:principal-report) | | Open a saved dashboard setting | [Configuration dashboard settings](doc:configuration-dashboard-settings) | ## Before you start Before changing a dashboard setting, have the existing dashboard record ready and work in edit mode. The edit actions are available in that mode, while **Last Modifications** requires a saved dashboard identifier. Prerequisites - Open an existing dashboard setting from the configuration dashboard list. - Confirm that the dashboard is in edit mode before selecting an edit action. - Have a dashboard identifier available if you need **Last Modifications**. - The report and Eagle View areas appear only when their subscription and active tab conditions are met. - The report tables use the columns available in your dashboard setup. ## Find and open a dashboard setting The configuration dashboard list is where you choose the saved role dashboard setting to edit. The list has the columns **Role**, **Tabs**, **Widgets**, **Users**, and **Last modified**. ![Use the dashboard list headers to identify the saved role setting you want to open.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7da8144c27e58dc4f0629ed4fd3e47bd.png) Prerequisites - You are on the configuration dashboard list. - You know which role dashboard setting you need to customize. Steps 1. Find the role dashboard setting in the list using the **Role**, **Tabs**, **Widgets**, **Users**, and **Last modified** columns. 2. Select the edit link for that row. **Result:** The existing dashboard setting opens for editing, with the edit actions available when the record is in edit mode. ## Understand the dashboard-setting screen The dashboard-setting screen combines dashboard editing actions with conditional dashboard areas. Read the action bar first, then work through the area that matches the change you need. The edit action bar contains these controls: | What you want to change | Control | |---|---| | Add a widget | **Widget** | | Add a blank tab | **Blank Tab** | | Import dashboard content | **Import From** | | Add or open a principals report | **Principals Report** | | Add or open Eagle View | **Eagle View** | | Save the current changes | **Save** | | Save the changes and leave the screen | **Save and Close** | The import area contains **Another role dashboards**. After a source dashboard with tabs is selected, **Select tab(s)** and the tab-selection control appear. The Eagle View area contains Analyze, **Over**, **Highlight**, and **Interval**, together with **All** and **Top 50**. The principals report has a required **Report** field. Its other controls include the time-frame options, date and period values, chart selectors, list controls, client and product-type selectors, and font choices. Use the label shown beside each control. The screen also provides **Last Modifications** when the dashboard has an identifier. Use it to review the dashboard's audit history after maintenance. ## Customize and save the dashboard Customize a dashboard setting by choosing the area that matches the change, then save the setting so the role dashboard uses the new arrangement. Prerequisites - The existing dashboard setting is open in edit mode. - You know whether you are adding a widget, adding a tab, importing content, or configuring a report area. Steps 1. Select the control that matches the dashboard change. | Control | Action | |---|---| | **Widget** | Add a widget to the dashboard. | | **Blank Tab** | Add a blank tab. | | **Import From** | Prepare an import from another role dashboard. | | **Principals Report** | Add or open the principals report area. | | **Eagle View** | Add or open the Eagle View area. | 2. Select **Save** to remain on the screen, or select **Save and Close** to close the edit screen. | Control | Action | |---|---| | **Save** | Save the dashboard setting and remain on the screen. | | **Save and Close** | Save the dashboard setting and close the edit screen. | **Result:** The dashboard setting is submitted. A successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. ## Choose the dashboard branch Each branch is a different dashboard area. Choose one according to the work you need to do, rather than expecting every area to appear at the same time. | If you need to… | Choose | What appears | |---|---|---| | Copy content from another role dashboard | **Import From** | **Another role dashboards**; after a source with tabs is selected, **Select tab(s)** | | Work with the principals report | **Principals Report** | The report area, including **Settings** and **Introduction & Outline** | | Configure the report period | **Settings** or the time-frame option | Chart, list, time-frame, client, product-type, and font controls as applicable | | Read or edit the report introduction | **Introduction & Outline** | The introduction and outline fields, then **Ok** to close the popup | | Analyze an Eagle View dashboard | **Eagle View** | Analyze, **Over**, **Highlight**, **Interval**, **All**, and **Top 50** | The report's time-frame fields are required when their time-frame branch is active. Date values appear for the date-range choice, and a period value appears for the period choice. The chart controls appear when their chart is enabled. The report's **Report** field is required. ## When saving or loading goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to decide what to do next. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request was not completed successfully. | Check the change you made and select **Save** again. | | `You already have this tab in this dashboard` | The tab you are adding is already present in the dashboard. | Return to the existing tab instead of adding another copy. | | The edit actions are unavailable | The dashboard is not in edit mode. | Return to the editable dashboard setting before selecting **Widget**, **Blank Tab**, **Import From**, **Principals Report**, or **Eagle View**. | | **Last Modifications** is unavailable | The dashboard does not have the identifier required for the audit-history area. | Save the dashboard record before opening its modifications. | The principals report has a separate message, `Please choose one or more principals`, for its report-generation flow. Use [Principal report](doc:principal-report) when that message appears. ## After saving the dashboard setting Saving a dashboard setting applies its tab and widget arrangement to the role dashboard. Use **Save and Close** when you have finished the change and want to leave the edit screen. Use **Last Modifications** when you need to review the dashboard's audit history. Prerequisites - The dashboard setting is open and has no further changes to make. Steps 1. Select **Save and Close**. 2. Read `Your request was completed successfully`. 3. Open **Last Modifications** when you need to review the saved dashboard changes. **Result:** The dashboard setting is saved, the edit screen closes, and the dashboard's modification history is available from **Last Modifications**. # Edit report setting A report setting is the saved dashboard configuration assigned to a role. Use this page to review its tabs, widgets, time-frame choices, and editable-month setting, then save a change or review its modification history. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the setting and its available fields | [Understand the report-setting screen](#understand-the-report-setting-screen) | | Find a saved report setting | [Find a report setting](#find-a-report-setting) | | Change tabs, widgets, or time-frame choices | [Change and save report settings](#change-and-save-report-settings) | | Resolve a validation or save message | [When saving or leaving goes wrong](#when-saving-or-leaving-goes-wrong) | | Review the list of report settings | [Reports settings](configuration-reports-settings.md) | | Create a report setting | [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) | | Understand reports available to readers | [Reports hub](reports-hub.md) | ## Before you start Prepare the saved configuration from the Reports settings list. The edit surface uses the record's edit mode for its header actions, and the route for a saved record is `/configuration/reports-settings/edit/:ID`. **Prerequisites** - You know which saved configuration you need to review. - You can reach the record from the Reports settings list. - The record is in edit mode before you use its editable controls. - If your access is read-only, review the setting without submitting a change. ## Find a report setting A report-setting record is a role's saved collection of report tabs and widgets. The list helps you select the role record before its setting details are opened. **Prerequisites** - You are at `/configuration/reports-settings`. **Steps** 1. Review the list by the headers **Role**, **Tabs**, **Widgets**, **Users**, and **Last modified**. 2. Select the list-level **Settings** action. 3. Select the saved report-setting record you need to review. ![Identify a report-setting record from the list headers and modification column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fe2caba6520353f6565151471405867f.png) **Result:** The selected report-setting record opens for review or editing. ## Understand the report-setting screen The report-setting screen groups dashboard choices behind popup states and tab actions. Each field appears only in the popup or screen state described in the following conditions. ### Fields and conditions | Field | Type | Required | Appears when | Limits or note | |---|---|---:|---|---| | **Another role dashboards** | Select | No | The import-dashboard popup is open | Selects another role dashboard source. | | **Select tab(s)** | Checkbox | No | A source dashboard is selected and has tabs | Selects all available imported tabs. | | Tab selection checkbox | Checkbox | No | A source dashboard is selected and has tabs | The visible text is the tab title. | | **number of editable Prev. months** | Number | No | The previous-months popup is open | Minimum `1`; maximum `11`. | | **Search for widget** | Text | No | The active tab has widgets | Filters the widgets in the active tab. | | **New Tab** | Text | Yes | The add-tab popup is open | The form requires a value. | | **New Tab** | Text | Yes | The edit-tab popup is open | The form requires a value. | | Time-frame year | Number | Yes | **Definite year** is selected in the time-frame popup | Minimum `2024`; maximum is the current year. | The edit screen also has the following conditional areas: | Reader action or area | What it opens or displays | Condition | |---|---|---| | **Editable prev. months** | The editable-months field | The previous-months popup is open. | | **Time Frame** | Time-frame choices | The time-frame popup is open. | | **Widget** | The add-widget preparation action | The dashboard has at least one tab. | | **Blank Tab** | Blank-tab preparation | The dashboard tab actions are available. | | **Import From** | Dashboard-import fields | The import-dashboard popup is open. | | **Last Modifications** | The log-history area | The report dashboard record has an identifier. | The time-frame popup provides **This year**, **Definite year**, **last 12 months**, and **From / To** choices. The time-frame year appears for **Definite year**. The edit surface also contains widget contents rather than a separate report grid; use the child widget's own content when reviewing a widget. ![Review the list-level settings action before opening a report-setting record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/37d990b910566ee0ed41507739e60198.png) ## Change and save report settings Changing a report setting updates the dashboard arrangement assigned to the selected role. Use the popup that matches the change you need, then use the save action that matches whether you want to remain on the record. **Prerequisites** - You have opened a saved report-setting record in edit mode. - You know whether you are changing the editable-month count, time frame, tabs, or widgets. **Steps** 1. Select **Editable prev. months** to open the previous-months field. 2. Enter a number from `1` through `11` in **number of editable Prev. months**. 3. Select **Time Frame** to open the time-frame choices. 4. Choose one time-frame option from the following table. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Use the current year | **This year** | | Use one specified year | **Definite year** | | Use the preceding twelve months | **last 12 months** | | Set a start and end date | **From / To** | 5. If you choose **Definite year**, enter a year from `2024` through the current year in the time-frame year field. 6. Select one tab action from the following table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a widget | **Widget** | | Add an empty tab | **Blank Tab** | | Import tabs from another dashboard | **Import From** | | Rename the active tab | **Rename tab** | | Remove the active tab and its contents | **Delete tab** | | Close all open widgets | **Collapse all** | | Remove or manage a widget in the active tab | **Remove widget from tab** | 7. If you selected **Import From**, choose a source in **Another role dashboards**. 8. If imported tabs are available, select **Select tab(s)** or an individual tab-selection checkbox. 9. If you selected **Blank Tab** or **Rename tab**, enter the tab name in **New Tab**. 10. If you need to locate a widget, enter text in **Search for widget**. 11. Choose how to save the dashboard settings. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Keep the record open | **Save** | | Request page exit | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The dashboard settings are submitted, and a successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. ## Handle screen variations The controls available on this screen depend on the record state and the popup you open. Use the conditions below to choose the applicable surface rather than looking for every field at once. | When this is true | What changes | |---|---| | The record is in edit mode | Header actions and editable report controls are available. | | The report dashboard record has an identifier | The **Last Modifications** area is available. | | The import-dashboard popup is open | **Another role dashboards** and its import choices appear. | | A source dashboard has one or more tabs | **Select tab(s)** and individual tab-selection checkboxes appear. | | The previous-months popup is open | **number of editable Prev. months** appears. | | The add-tab popup is open | Required **New Tab** appears. | | The edit-tab popup is open | Required **New Tab** appears for the existing tab name. | | The time-frame popup is open | The time-frame choices appear. | | **Definite year** is selected | The required time-frame year appears. | The Sales report and Eagle View choices do not form part of the available tab choices. ## When saving or leaving goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to choose the appropriate response. | Message | Meaning | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required field has no value. | Return to the required field and enter a value. | | `Required` | The time-frame year requires a value when **Definite year** is selected. | Enter the year before continuing. | | `Are you sure you want to ultimately delete this tab and all it's content ?` | The delete-tab action asks for confirmation before removing the tab and its contents. | Review the message before continuing. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The save request completed successfully. | Continue with the saved record or open **Last Modifications**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save request returned an error. | Review the values and try the save action again. | | `You already have this tab in this dashboard` | The import would add a tab already present in the dashboard. | Choose a different tab or review the existing tab. | > **Note:** Deleting a tab removes the tab and all its content after the confirmation step. Leaving a record with changes opens the exit popup. Leaving without changes calls the page-leave service. Review the exit choice before leaving so that you do not discard a change unintentionally. ## Review the result and continue The modification history is the record's follow-up view after a save. It lets you review the latest changes recorded for the dashboard setting. **Prerequisites** - You have finished reviewing or changing the report setting. **Steps** 1. Choose how to save the setting. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Remain on the record after saving | **Save** | | Save the setting and request page exit | **Save and Close** | 2. Open **Last Modifications** to review the record's modification history. 3. Continue with [Reports settings](configuration-reports-settings.md) to review the list or [New report setting](configuration-reports-settings-new.md) to create another setting. **Result:** The saved dashboard setting remains available from the Reports settings list, and its recorded changes are available under **Last Modifications**. # Features ## Features overview The Features page is where you review the limits assigned to each plan and choose which features each plan includes. The page presents plan limits above a feature grid, so you can review the limits and assignments together before saving a change. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the plan limits and assigned features | [Read the Features screen](#read-the-features-screen) | | Change a plan limit or feature assignment | [Change plan limits and feature assignments](#change-plan-limits-and-feature-assignments) | | Select a parent feature and its child features | [Handle parent and child features](#handle-parent-and-child-features) | | Edit a feature price | [Continue from Features](#continue-from-features) | | Resolve a required-field, name, or save error | [When a value or save goes wrong](#when-a-value-or-save-goes-wrong) | | Open the company list | [Company list](doc:configuration-subscriber-view) | | Review plan details | [Plan details](doc:configuration-plans-record) | ## Before you start The page shows the plans and feature rows available to your account. The plan columns appear when the plan data is available, and the feature area appears when at least one feature is available. **Prerequisites** - Know which plan you need to review or change. - Have the limits and feature assignments you want to compare with the values on screen. - Work from the plan columns and feature rows currently shown on the page. The page's starting values come from the plans loaded for the page. Treat the values shown in the fields as the values to review before making a change; do not assume that a value from another plan applies to the current plan. ## Open Features Open the page and identify its page-level controls. **Prerequisites** - You know the configuration area is available to you. **Steps** 1. Open `/configuration/features`. 2. Confirm that the page shows **Companies** and **Save** above the plan table. **Result:** The Features page is open at `/configuration/features`, with **Companies** and **Save** available at the top of the page. ## Read the Features screen The upper table contains the limits for each plan. The lower feature grid contains the feature rows and an assignment cell for each plan; select an assignment cell to change whether that plan includes a feature. | Field | What to review | |---|---| | **Plan name** | The name shown for the plan. | | **Plan Price** | The plan price; the price field uses the `#,##0.00` format and a minimum of `0`. | | **Branches count** | The branch limit; the allowed range is `1` to `99`. | | **Users count** | The user limit; the allowed range is `1` to `99`. | | **Teams count** | The team limit; the allowed range is `1` to `99`. | | **Roles count** | The role limit; the allowed range is `1` to `99`. | | **Dashboard widgets count** | The dashboard-widget count. | | **Warehouses count** | The warehouse limit; the allowed range is `0` to `99`. | | **Latest modifications count** | The latest-modifications limit; the allowed range is `0` to `99`. | In the current screen, the plan columns are Plan #0, Plan #1, and Plan #2. The active feature grid uses Feature, Id, and Price, followed by those three plan columns. The price cells display `EUR`. The feature rows currently include the following names: | Feature rows currently shown | |---| | All features | | Dashboard Module | | Reports Module | | MyDesk Module | | Sales Module | | Project Management Module | | PurchaseJob Module | | Warehouse Module | | Invoice Module | | Payments Module | | Accounts Module | | L/G Module | | Contacts Module | | Projects Module | | Tasks Module | | Activities Module | | Tickets | The plan fields currently show no values. Use the values displayed in the fields when reviewing or changing a plan. Work with the active feature grid beneath the plan table. ![Compare the plan fields and the Feature, Id, Price, and plan headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8547d409de45bcd6eed953364475a408.png) ## Change plan limits and feature assignments Change plan limits and feature assignments from the plan fields and feature grid, then save the changes. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Features page. - You know the intended values for the plan limits and the feature assignments. **Steps** 1. In the required plan column, select the value in the field you need to change. 2. Enter the new plan value. 3. In the feature grid, select the assignment cell for the feature and plan you want to change. 4. Review the changed value and assignment. 5. Select **Save**. The **Save** control is enabled when the page detects unsaved changes. Saving sends the plan details for processing and reloads the plan details after a successful response. **Result:** The page returns to the plan and feature tables after the save request. The resulting saved values and any save message depend on the response to that request. ## Handle parent and child features A parent feature is a feature row that has child feature rows beneath it. Use the parent row when you need to work with the related child features together. **Prerequisites** - The feature grid contains a parent row with **Select all sub**. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches the change you need: | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Change one feature | Select that feature's assignment cell. | | Select child features for a parent | Select **Select all sub** on the parent row. | | Work with every feature | Select the **All features** row. | 2. Review the assignment cells for the affected plan. 3. Select **Save** to commit the assignment change. **Result:** The affected assignment cells show the selection made for the plan, and the change is ready to save. ## When a value or save goes wrong Use the message text on screen to correct the value or retry the save. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Features page and a validation or error message is visible. **Steps** 1. Choose the correction that matches the message: | What appears | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in the field that has been marked as required, then review the field again. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Correct the plan name using only the characters accepted by the message, then review the name again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the values and assignments, then retry **Save** when the page is ready. | 2. Review the corrected field or assignments. **Result:** The corrected field or assignments remain available on the Features page for review. ## Continue from Features Move to a related configuration task or edit a feature price. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Features page. **Steps** 1. Choose the next action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open the company list | **Companies** | | Edit a feature's price | Select the feature row, then use the edit-feature popup. | | Leave the edit-feature popup without saving | **Cancel** | | Save the edited feature price | **Save** in the popup. | 2. If you edit a feature price, review the price in the popup before selecting **Save**. **Result:** You are either on the company list, back on the Features page after closing the popup, or at the related plan or feature configuration page. # Find archived and exception purchase job work ## Find archived and exception purchase job work A purchase-job exception list gathers work that left the normal purchase-job path at a cancelled, regretted, rejected, or deleted outcome. Use it when you need to find the work after that exit and identify the purchase-job record to review. The purchase-job lifecycle moves through Potential, Offer, Order, Delivered, and Deleted. Its exits include missed, regretted, and cancelled Potential work; regretted, cancelled, and rejected Offer work; and rejected and cancelled Order work. | If you need to… | Go to… | | --- | --- | | Open an archived or exception list | [Find the matching exception list](#find-the-matching-exception-list) | | Read the available row information | [Understand the list and its rows](#understand-the-list-and-its-rows) | | Open the purchase-job record | [Open the matching purchase job](#open-the-matching-purchase-job) | | Diagnose a list problem | [When the list action goes wrong](#when-the-list-action-goes-wrong) | | Continue active purchase-job work | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Continue through the wider procurement flow | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | Before you look for a row, confirm the access and branch conditions in the next section. ## Before you start ### Prerequisites - Your account includes the Buyout Job module. - You know which purchase-job exit you are investigating. - You know enough about the saved purchase job to identify its row, such as its package, sub-supplier, or regret information. - You belong to the branch associated with the row you want to open. The list you open determines which purchase-job exception results you see. Opening a row requires that you belong to the same branch. With those conditions in place, find the list that matches the exit you are investigating. ## Find the matching exception list An archived list is the place to choose between purchase-job work grouped by its exit. Start with the exit you are investigating rather than scanning every row. ### Find a list Prerequisites - You have the access and identifying information listed in [Before you start](#before-you-start). Steps 1. Open the purchase-job exception list. 2. Select **Archived**. 3. Select the list that matches the work you are investigating. | If you are looking for… | Select… | | --- | --- | | RFQs that were not quoted | **Unquoted RFQs** | | Cancelled RFQs | **Cancelled RFQs** | | Rejected quotations | **Rejected Quotations** | | Deleted purchase jobs | **Deleted** | ![Look for **Archived** and the four exception-list choices above the grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e6a1516f378b1c29e906eaa9f4ea4c7d.png) **Result:** The list matching the purchase-job exit is on screen. ## Understand the list and its rows Each row represents purchase-job work in the selected exception list. Use the visible headers to distinguish the job and the reason it appears in that list. The saved list layout determines which columns appear. On the regretted list, the headers were: | Header | What it helps you identify | | --- | --- | | `Package no.` | The package number | | `Sales job No.` | The related sales job number | | `Purchaser` | The person responsible for purchasing | | `Sub-supplier` | The supplier connected to the purchase work | | `Client` | The client connected to the work | | `Package title` | The package description | | `Offer price` | The offer amount | | `Offer price in €` | The offer amount expressed in euros | | `Regret reason` | The reason shown for regretted work | | `Regret date` | The date shown for the regret | The list also provides the titled controls **Refresh** and **Table Layout**. The list has no form fields; work from the headers and controls that appear in your list. When you can identify the row from these headers, open the matching purchase job. ## Open the matching purchase job ### Open a row Prerequisites - The matching exception list is on screen. - You have identified the row using its visible fields. Steps 1. Select the matching row outside the edit column. **Result:** The purchase-job record opens. The purchase-job record page contains the recovery controls **Reactivate Job**, **Back to RFQ**, and **Back to Offer**. Continue there when the record itself needs review or recovery: [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record). Use the next section when you need to distinguish one exception outcome from another. ## Handle exit-list variations The exception lists group each corresponding exception outcome by the stage where the work left the normal purchase-job path. Prerequisites - An exception list is open. - You know which purchase-job exit you are investigating. Steps 1. Identify the exception outcome shown by the selected list label. | List label | Work shown | Stage it leaves | | --- | --- | --- | | **Unquoted RFQs** | Regretted offer work | Offer | | **Cancelled RFQs** | Cancelled offer work | Offer | | **Rejected Quotations** | Rejected offer work | Offer | | **Deleted** | Deleted purchase-job work | The lifecycle includes Deleted | 2. If the selected list does not match the exit you are investigating, select the matching list label in [Find the matching exception list](#find-the-matching-exception-list). For order outcomes, use the corresponding list: | Work you are tracing | Stage it leaves | List used | | --- | --- | --- | | Rejected order work | Order | A separate rejected-order list | | Cancelled order work | Order | A separate cancelled-order list | The archived sub-navigation includes **Cancelled RFQs**, **Rejected Quotations**, and **Deleted**. The **Cancelled Orders** and **Rejected orders** links are not available in that sub-navigation. Each list shows the corresponding exception work. Other exception lists cover regretted, rejected-offer, cancelled-offer, and deleted work. If the Buyout Job module is not included, the list area shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the list. When the module is available, the columns still follow the saved list layout, so different lists can show different headers. Treat the headers on the list in front of you as the fields to use. **Result:** The selected list shows the corresponding exception work, and you can tell which stage it leaves. If an action stops while you use the list, use the next section to identify the symptom. ## When the list action goes wrong Use the exact text below to identify what stopped the list action. Prerequisites - The purchase-job exception list is open. Steps 1. Select the row in the table that matches what you see. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character and apply the filter again. | | `Data Importing completed` | The imported data is ready for use. | Continue working with the list. | | `NO Data to Export` | There are no rows available for export. | Select a list that contains the work you need before exporting. | | `Load data failed:` | The list request returned an error message. | Read the text after `Load data failed:` and use it to diagnose the failed load. | | The sign-in page appears instead of the list | Your session needs authentication. | Sign in, then open the purchase-job exception list again. | | The list disappears | The list view has been replaced, so select a row only after the exception list is open again. | Return to the home page, then open the purchase-job exception list again. | **Result:** You either return to the purchase-job exception list or have the exact message that identifies the list problem. After the list works again, continue with the purchase-job record, active work lists, or the procurement chain. ## Continue the purchase-job work After you identify the exception row, choose the page that owns the next action. Prerequisites - You have identified the exception row. Steps 1. Open the page that matches your next need. | Your next need | Open | | --- | --- | | Review the purchase-job record or use its recovery controls | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | Find active RFQ, quotation, order, or received work | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Follow the wider MRQ-to-purchase-order route | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | **Result:** The page for your next purchase-job action is on screen. # Flags ## Flags A flag is a company reference entry with a name and a color. Use this page to maintain the entries available in the company Flags list. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Check access and prepare to maintain a flag | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Reach the Flags list | [Find Flags](#find-flags) | | Read the fields and list behavior | [Understand the Flags list and form](#understand-the-flags-list-and-form) | | Add or change a flag | [Add or edit a flag](#add-or-edit-a-flag) | | Remove or export flag data | [Delete or export flag data](#delete-or-export-flag-data) | | Resolve a validation or action message | [When flag maintenance goes wrong](#when-flag-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue to another company configuration list | [Continue with company configuration](#continue-with-company-configuration) | Its declared fields are **Name** and **Color**. ## Before you start Before maintaining a flag, sign in with access to the configuration area. Access uses an authentication guard, and the page's list and actions depend on the company subscription and your permissions. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - Your company subscription includes this configuration feature. - Your account has permission for the action you intend to use. - You know the name and color to record. The fields and list columns come from the configuration used for your company. Work from the headers and fields visible in your list. A required marker can depend on that configuration. ## Find Flags Open the configuration area when you need to review or maintain company flag entries. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. Open the configuration area. 2. Select **Flags**. 3. Confirm that **New** is visible before opening a record action. **Result:** The Flags reference list is open and ready for a list action. ![The Flags list with its entry controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) ## Understand the Flags list and form The form uses the same two fields when you create or edit an entry. ### Fields | Field | Type | Required behavior | Where it is used | |---|---|---|---| | **Name** | Text box | Required | Identifies the flag in the list. | | **Color** | Select box | Required | Assigns the flag's color. | Because no header row appears, use the values shown for each entry and select the edit or delete control beside it. The **Color** list includes `Red`, `Blue`, `Green`, `Yellow`, `Orange`, `Violet`, and `Black`. The list of columns and the required marker can vary with your company configuration; use the fields and columns currently shown on your screen. ## Add or edit a flag Add a new company flag or change an existing flag's name or color. **Prerequisites** - The Flags list is open. - **New** is visible for a new entry, or the edit control beside an existing entry is available. - You have the flag name and color to enter. **Steps** 1. Choose the task. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Create a new entry | **New** | | Change an existing entry | The edit control beside an existing entry | 2. Enter or change the flag name in **Name**. 3. Select **Color**. 4. Select a color from the list. 5. Select **Save** in the form. When a required value is empty, the form uses the message `Name is required` for **Name** or `Color is required` for **Color**. The text field also uses the message `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` when its pattern rule rejects the entry. **Result:** A successful new entry produces `Data saved Successfully`. A successful change produces `Data updated Successfully`. ![The new flag form with Name and Color ready for entry](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6c6a1ba0957fc74b540327555a9f2066.png) ## Delete or export flag data Delete an existing flag or open the export choices for the list. **Prerequisites** - The Flags list is open. - You have permission for the list action. **Steps** 1. Follow the path that matches your purpose. After you select the delete control, the confirmation reads `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. | Condition | Action | |---|---| | You want to remove an existing flag | Select the delete control beside the entry. | | You want to keep the flag after the confirmation appears | Select **Cancel**. | | You want to confirm removal after the confirmation appears | Select **Delete**. | | You want to prepare a list export | Select **Export**. | | The export dialog is open | Follow the export choices shown by the dialog. | **Result:** **Cancel** leaves the flag unchanged. A successful deletion produces `Data Deleted Successfully`. The export dialog is open when you choose **Export**. ## When flag maintenance goes wrong Use the message text to choose the corrective action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a value in **Name**. | | `Color is required` | Select a value in **Color**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Edit the text so it uses only the accepted characters. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and select **Save** again. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the list before deleting. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the related flag because saved data depends on it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Try the delete action again after checking that the row is still present. | ## Continue with company configuration After reviewing the Flags list, continue with the configuration area that matches your next task: - [Configuration home](doc:configuration-home) for the configuration entry point. - [Market segments](doc:configuration-company-market-segments) for the neighboring company reference list. - [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) for company branch records. # Incoming inspection notes ## Incoming inspection notes An incoming inspection note records the inspection of products after a goods receipt and before the products are released to stock. Use it to create a note for a received order or locate an existing note in the inspection list. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Create a note for a received order | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Record inspection details](#record-inspection-details) | | Find a note that already exists | [Find an inspection note](#find-an-inspection-note) | | Understand the areas on the note | [Understand the inspection screen](#understand-the-inspection-screen) | | Save your inspection work | [Save the inspection note](#save-the-inspection-note) | | Correct a blocked save or release | [When validation or saving goes wrong](#when-validation-or-saving-goes-wrong) | | Continue with warehouse stock work | [Release inspected products and continue](#release-inspected-products-and-continue) and [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment) | | Review the receipt before inspecting it | [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes) | | Follow the warehouse sequence | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | ## Before you start The received order supplies the shipment context that the inspection note uses. Select the correct order before you enter inspection decisions, because the received-order details determine which inspection areas appear. **Prerequisites** | Have this ready | Why it matters here | | --- | --- | | The received order you are inspecting | It supplies the order context for the note and reveals the received-order details. | | The order number | **Order Number** is required when you create the note. | | The inspection setup used by your company | The inspection base, checklist, and inspection documents are maintained in [Base of inspection](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base), [Inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist), and [Inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents). | | Permission to edit the note | **Save** and **Save and Close** appear when editing is allowed. | | A saved note with no unsaved changes | **Finish and release to stock** appears only for an existing note with no unsaved changes and products not yet released. | The create screen showed **Order Number** with a required marker. It also showed **Inspected by** and **Inspected on** without required markers. ![Check the note title, required Order Number, and save controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3dc0d36b63369f9818f62ad1e647c5ed.png) With the order context ready, choose whether to create a note or locate one that is already saved. ## Find an inspection note The inspection list is the place to locate a note that already exists; the new-note route opens an empty inspection form. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are creating a note or locating one that is already saved. **Steps** 1. Choose the route that matches your task. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | Create a note | `/warehouse/inspection/new` | | Locate an existing note | `/warehouse/list/inspection/view` | 2. In the inspection list, select the warehouse view that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | work in the receiving view | **Receiving** | | work in the shipment-based stock view | **Stock By Shipment** | The receiving view is shown here: ![Look at the Receiving view before choosing another warehouse tab.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7812f6f85f9712f6cfb322ffa3fc0bf5.png) The shipment-based stock view is shown here: ![Look at the Stock By Shipment view.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0ffbae805edc0a323650bdefe08009db.png) The list views did not show headers. If your list displays headers, use them to identify the note and its shipment. **Result:** You are either on the new **Incoming Inspection Note** form or on the inspection list with the warehouse tab that matches your task. With the form or list open, identify the areas you need before entering inspection details. ## Understand the inspection screen The screen groups the received-order header with product decisions, checklist decisions, received documents, comments, and defects. | Area | What it contains | When it appears | | --- | --- | --- | | Header | **Order No.**, **Inspected by**, **Inspected on**, **GRN No.**, **Sub-supplier shipment no.**, **Sub-supplier**, and **Comment** | The note is loaded; received-order fields appear after an order is selected. | | Products | Product rows with ordered, received, accepted, and rejected quantities | A received order and inspected products are present. | | Checklist | Checklist items and decision controls | An inspection checklist is present. | | Documents | Received-document inclusion controls | Received documents are present. | | Defects | Defect rows and defect actions | Inspection defects are present and the note is not read-only. | | Audit history | **Last Modifications** | An existing note has an id. | On a new note, the screen showed **Incoming Inspection Note**, **Order Number**, **Inspected by**, and **Inspected on**. The **Warehouse** and **Client** fields are not part of this stage, and the mounted add-product action is not available at this stage. ## Record inspection details Use the inspection areas to record what arrived, what passed inspection, what was rejected, and which defects or supporting documents need attention. **Prerequisites** - Open the inspection form. - Select the received order so its shipment details and inspection areas can appear. **Steps** 1. In the note header, review **Order No.**, **Inspected by**, and **Inspected on**. 2. Review **GRN No.**, **Sub-supplier shipment no.**, **Sub-supplier**, and **Comment** when the received order is selected. 3. In the Products area, review each product's ordered and received quantities. 4. In the product dialog, enter **Accepted qty** for the quantity accepted into the inspection result. 5. In the product dialog, enter **Rejected qty** for the quantity rejected from the inspection result. 6. In the Checklist area, record each checklist decision when the checklist is present. 7. In the Documents area, set the document inclusion decision when received documents are present. 8. In the Defects area, select **Defect** to add a defect record. 9. Choose the applicable additional action. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | classify the defect | **Defect Category** | | inspect a rejected product again | **Re-inspect** | | add a supporting file while the note is editable | **Attach File** | 10. Enter the defect description in **Defect** when you add a defect record. **Result:** The note contains the inspection quantities and any applicable checklist, document, comment, defect, re-inspection, or attachment details. ## Save the inspection note Saving validates the inspection note before creating or updating it. **Prerequisites** - Enter the required note information. - Resolve any product or defect validation shown in the form. **Steps** 1. Choose the save action that matches where you want to continue. | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | save the note and remain on the page | **Save** | | save the note and leave the page | **Save and Close** | Both controls require editing permission, changed data, and no save already in progress. 2. If the form accepts the information, confirm the message "Your request was completed successfully". If a required value is missing, the form displays `Check mandatory field(s)`. **Result:** The note is saved. A new note opens for editing; an updated note refreshes its information and audit history. If a message appears instead, use the correction table in the next section. ## When validation or saving goes wrong Use the message on screen to identify whether a required value, product decision, or save request needs attention. | Message | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | A required value is missing. | Review the required fields and enter the missing value. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save request returned an error. | Review the note and select **Save** again. | | `You have products with no decision regarding accepted or rejected quantity` | At least one product has neither an accepted nor a rejected quantity. | Enter **Accepted qty** or **Rejected qty** for every product before releasing. | The release validation message is raised before the release confirmation when a product has no accepted or rejected quantity. After correcting the quantity decision, return to the release procedure. ## Release inspected products and continue Releasing inspected products is the handover from inspection work to stock work. **Prerequisites** - Open an existing saved inspection note. - Confirm that the note has no unsaved changes. - Confirm that the products have not already been released. **Steps** 1. Open the note's action menu when the saved note is unchanged. 2. Select **Finish and release to stock**. If a product has neither an accepted nor a rejected quantity, the release displays `You have products with no decision regarding accepted or rejected quantity` instead of opening the confirmation. 3. Read the confirmation "You are about to release these products to stock, are you sure?". 4. Confirm the release in the dialog. 5. Open [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment) to continue warehouse stock work. When printing is allowed and the saved note is unchanged, select **Inspection template** from the note's action menu. **Result:** The products are released through the inspection release action, and the note becomes non-editable. Continue with [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment). # L/G facilities An L/G facility is a configured bank facility value used alongside letter-of-guarantee (L/G) work. Use this Finance reference screen to review the values held for banks and to maintain an existing facility value. | Task | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the facilities list | [Find the L/G facilities list](#find-the-lg-facilities-list) | | Read the fields and list values | [Understand the facilities screen](#understand-the-facilities-screen) | | Change an existing facility | [Maintain an existing facility value](#maintain-an-existing-facility-value) | | Resolve a blocked or unavailable action | [Handle unavailable actions and messages](#handle-unavailable-actions-and-messages) | | Follow an L/G after configuration | [Continue from L/G facilities](#continue-from-lg-facilities) | | Follow an L/G through its business stages | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Create an L/G | [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) | | Review L/G finance work | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | ## Before you start An L/G facility list is available to signed-in users who have access to the Finance configuration area. The list and its actions can change with subscription access and your permissions. Your company's setup determines the headers and available actions. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Have access to the Finance configuration area. - Have an existing facility row when you need to edit or delete a value. - Have permission to edit the row before you select the edit action. - Have permission to delete the row before you open its delete menu. - Use a saved row when you need the edit form or log history. The list appears when subscription access is available. The edit form opens for a selected item, and log history appears while an existing item is being edited. ## Find the L/G facilities list The L/G facilities list is the Finance reference list for the facility values associated with banks. Open it from the Finance configuration area, then use the visible finance labels to recognise the correct list. **Prerequisites** - Complete the prerequisites in [Before you start](#before-you-start). **Steps** 1. Open the Finance configuration area. 2. Select **LGs Facilities**. 3. Confirm that **LGs Facilities** is the selected finance entry. 4. Confirm that the list shows **Banks**, **Bank Accounts**, **LGs Facilities**, and **Invoice Settings** as the visible finance reference entries. ![Use the six list headers to recognise the L/G facilities list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/71fe3cca9480c1f1e6bba06bdc67b127.png) **Result:** The L/G facilities list is open, with its six visible headers and finance reference entries on screen. ## Understand the facilities screen The list identifies each bank by short name and records a facility amount plus percentage measures for bid bond, down payment, performance, and warranty. | Field | List | Form | Required | |---|---|---|---| | **Bank short name** | Visible | Not present | Required in the configuration | | **Full name** | Hidden | Not present | Required in the configuration | | **Applying date** | Hidden | Visible | Required | The list showed 10 rows. > **Note:** Facility amounts use a currency picker and accept non-negative numbers formatted as > `#,##0.00`. Percentage measures accept values from 0 to 100 and display a percent suffix. Currency choices belong to the Banks page's currency collection. The selected currency also determines the symbol shown with the facility amount; there is no separate symbol choice on this form. The screen also shows icon buttons titled **Refresh** and **Settings**. The **New** action is not part of this facilities list. The bank name fields shown in the list are not editable on this form. ![Compare the six visible headers and the **Refresh** and **Settings** buttons.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/338ce3aa43812a5940cba6c5de2e53dd.png) ## Maintain an existing facility value To change a facility value already present in the list, open its edit form. The form is available for a selected item when the edit action is allowed. **Prerequisites** - Open the L/G facilities list. - Have an existing facility row. - Have edit permission for the row. **Steps** 1. Select the row control that opens the edit form. 2. In the form, enter the applicable amount in **LG facility**. 3. Enter the applicable value in **Bid bond (%)**. 4. Enter the applicable value in **Down payment (%)**. 5. Enter the applicable value in **Performance (%)**. 6. Enter the applicable value in **Warranty (%)**. 7. Select the applicable date in **Applying date**. 8. Select **Save**. The form checks the entered values before saving. The edit form can also show log history for an existing item. To leave without saving, select **Cancel** in the applicable popup. **Result:** The facility form closes after a successful save and the list remains available for review. ### Delete an existing facility To delete an existing facility, use the row's delete menu. **Prerequisites** - Open the L/G facilities list. - Have permission to delete the row. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Review `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The deletion action is complete and the list remains available for review. ## Handle unavailable actions and messages Use the branch that matches what you see before repeating an action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | The list is not shown | Subscription access is unavailable | Check access to the Finance configuration area. | | The create action is not shown | New entries are hidden for this configuration | Open an existing row or use the Banks page for the owning bank configuration. | | No edit control appears | Editing is not allowed for your current access | Ask for edit permission for the configuration. | | No delete menu appears | Deletion is not allowed for your current access | Ask for delete permission for the configuration. | | A required field blocks saving | A configured required field is empty | Complete the required field and select **Save** again. | | `<column caption> is required` | The named field is required | Enter a value in the named field, then select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The submitted value contains forbidden characters | Remove the forbidden characters and select **Save** again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The system asks you to confirm removing the row | Select **Delete** to continue. Select **Cancel** to leave the row unchanged. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The row was deleted | Return to the list and review the remaining rows. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains only one item | Keep the remaining item. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Saved data is related to the row | Keep the row and resolve the related saved data before retrying. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete request failed | Keep the row and retry after checking access. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The existing row was updated | Review the values in the list. | | `Data Importing completed` | This message belongs to the shared import flow rather than this list. | Continue with the list that started the import. | | `Exporting List:` | The export choices are open | Select **Export to Excel** or **Export to PDF**. | ### Out of scope | Message | Owning page | Reason | |---|---|---| | `Data saved Successfully` | Banks | This new-record message belongs to the Banks maintenance flow; **New** is hidden on this page. | ### Export the list To export the list, open the export options. **Prerequisites** - Open the L/G facilities list. **Steps** 1. Select **Export** to open the export choices. 2. Choose one export format. | Export format | Select | |---|---| | Create an Excel file | **Export to Excel** | | Create a PDF file | **Export to PDF** | 3. Select **Export**. **Result:** The selected export action is submitted. ## Continue from L/G facilities Facility values support L/G work. When you need to work with an L/G record, follow the business path that matches your next task. | Next task | Continue with | |---|---| | Follow an L/G through its stages | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Enter a new L/G | [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) | | Review L/G finance records | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | | Maintain banks | [Banks](doc:configuration-finance-banks) | | Maintain bank accounts | [Bank accounts](doc:configuration-finance-banks-accounts) | | Maintain invoice settings | [Invoice settings](doc:configuration-finance-billing-settings) | | Maintain guarantee types | [Guarantee types](doc:configuration-sales-requested-guarantee) | **Result:** You have the facility values in view and a documented path to the next L/G or Finance configuration task. # L/G finance view An L/G finance view is the place to review letters of guarantee in lists and open an existing record. It brings together the company L/G list, stage filters, record details, and actions that depend on the record's current stage. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the finance list or narrow it by stage | [Find and filter the L/G list](#find-and-filter-the-lg-list) | | Identify columns and list tools | [Read the L/G list](#read-the-lg-list) | | Review an existing record | [Open and read an L/G record](#open-and-read-an-lg-record) | | Change a record or move it through its stages | [Handle record actions and saving](#handle-record-actions-and-saving) and [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Create a new L/G | [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) | ## Before you start An L/G review begins with access to the finance view and a saved record when you need record-level tabs or actions. **Prerequisites** - Your subscription includes the Letter of Guarantee module. - Your access includes the company L/G view. The Principal LGs view has its own view permission. - To review a record, the record is already present in the list. Record-level areas use an existing record. - To use a stage action, the record has no unsaved changes. Save the record first when the action is unavailable. - Fields marked configurable are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. The record form has 11 validation groups, including basic data, recommendations, extensions, deductions, and increases. The list filters are shown when the Letter of Guarantee subscription is included. On the Principal LGs view, **Draft**, **Awaiting Approval**, and **Approved** are not available. The current stage and access branch determine which record actions appear. ## Find and filter the L/G list The finance list is the starting point for reviewing saved L/G entries. Use its list scope and stage filters to bring the records you need into the grid. **Prerequisites** - Your subscription includes the Letter of Guarantee module. - You have permission for the list scope you need. **Steps** 1. Open the finance list. 2. Choose the list scope that matches the records you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review company L/G entries | **Company LGs** | | Review all available L/G entries | **All** | | Review principal L/G entries | **Principal LGs** | 3. Select the stage filter that matches the records you need. | If you need records in… | Select | |---|---| | All stages | **All** | | Draft | **Draft** | | Awaiting approval | **Awaiting Approval** | | Approved | **Approved** | | Active | **Active** | | Due for return | **Due for Return** | | Expired | **Expired** | | Returned | **Returned** | | Closed | **Closed** | | Cancelled | **Cancelled** | | Liquidated | **Liquidated** | 4. Confirm that the grid refreshes with the selected stage. ![The finance list with its scope tabs, stage filters, and list tools](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/31f217bfeaa963195b25a1eca80fd735.png) **Result:** The finance list remains open with the selected scope and stage filter. The list can also open in the all-records view after you select **All**. ## Read the L/G list The L/G list is a grid of saved entries. Read the headers to identify the record number, parties, values, dates, job reference, current stage, type, and increase amount; do not infer a record's details from a different column. Use these headers to locate information: | Header | Use it to locate | |---|---| | **L/G no.** | The guarantee number | | **Benificiary** | The beneficiary | | **L/G issuer** | The issuer | | **Bank** | The bank | | **Requested value** | The amount requested | | **Issued value** | The amount issued | | **Current value** | The current value | | **Issue date** | The date of issue | | **Expiry date** | The date the guarantee expires | | **JobNo** | The related job reference | | **Stage** | The record's current position | | **L/G type** | The L/G type | | **Increase amount** | The increase amount | The list also provides three tools: **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. The headers shown in your list can depend on the list layout available to you, so use the headers visible in the grid when locating a value. ![The L/G grid with its headers and an Active-stage list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1aef4df61b5d3b6bf42cb5545adbcbb7.png) **Result:** You can identify an L/G row from its visible headers and choose a row to open the existing record. ## Open and read an L/G record An L/G record holds the information used to identify the guarantee, its value and dates, its recommendations, and its current stage. Open a saved row when you need to review or continue that record. **Prerequisites** - The L/G row is present in the finance list. - You know which visible row you need. **Steps** 1. Select a row in the finance list. 2. Read the record's identifying and value fields. | Record information | Fields | |---|---| | Parties and type | **Beneficiary**, **LG Issuer**, **On Behalf of**, **LG Type**, **Bank** | | Numbers and values | **LG Number**, **Requested LG Value**, **Issue Value**, **Cash Cover** | | Dates | **Activation Date**, **Expiry Date** | 3. Read the current stage before choosing a record action. The available stage actions depend on that stage and on your approval or edit access. **Result:** The existing L/G record is open with its identifying fields, values, dates, current stage, and available record actions. ## Handle record actions and saving Record actions move an L/G between stages or change its editable state. The action strip uses the current stage, approval branch, edit access, and whether the record has changes to decide which actions are available. **Prerequisites** - The existing L/G record is open. - The record has no unsaved changes before you choose a stage action. - You have the approval access required for **Approve**, or the approval branch presents **Request approval** instead. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches the current stage and your work. | If the record is… | Available action to look for | |---|---| | Returned and ready to close | **Closed** | | Active and due to be returned | **Due for Return** | | Due for Return or Expired and being returned | **Returned** | | Draft or approved and being cancelled | **Cancel** | | Active, Expired, or Due for Return and being liquidated | **Liquidated** | | A Performance Bond that is Active or Expired and not already upgraded | **Extend As Warranty Bond** | | Active or later and needing changes | **Enable Editing** | | Awaiting approval without approval access | **Cancel approval request** | | Awaiting approval with approval access | **Reject approval request** or **Approve** | 2. Select the action that matches the condition. | Condition | Action | |---|---| | The approval process is active, you do not have approval access, and the record is in Draft | **Request approval** | | The approval process is active, you have approval access, and the record is below Approved | **Approve** | | You need to save changes and keep the record open | **Save** | | You need to save changes and leave the record | **Save and Close** | ![The list scope and stage filters used before opening a record](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/219831210ee182a57307b2374abaeb1d.png) **Result:** The selected stage action changes the record's lifecycle position when its conditions are met. A successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. An unsuccessful save or stage action displays `An error occurred while processing your request`. ## Use supporting record areas Supporting areas keep related discussion, files, and extension information with the L/G record. Open them after the record itself is available. **Prerequisites** - An existing L/G record is open. - The supporting area is available for that record. **Steps** 1. Select the supporting area that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Activate the record's comments area | **Comments** | | Activate the record's attachment area | **Attachment** | | Activate the extensions area | **LG Extensions** | 2. Review the extension period data after **LG Extensions** loads it when needed. **Result:** The selected supporting record area is active. ## Handle feedback and continue Feedback identifies a value, permission, approval, date, or pending-change condition that needs attention before you continue. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the value and submit it again. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the next record action or leave the saved record. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the record and try the action again. | | `You don’t have permission` | Use an action available to your access level. | | `LG still needs confirmation` | Complete the required L/G confirmation before continuing. | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Review the extensions or deductions before attempting the reversal. | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | Choose a date after the current expiry date. | | `There is a pending increase you can edit` | Edit the pending increase before starting another increase. | The finance view is for reviewing and opening existing records. Follow [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) for the complete stage map and lifecycle actions. Follow [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) when the work is to create a new guarantee. ## What to do next After reviewing an existing L/G, continue with its lifecycle when the next task is a stage change or another record action. When the work is to enter a new guarantee, start with [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g); creation fields and entry actions belong there. **Result:** You have a route for the next L/G task: continue in [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) for company-record stage work, or open [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) for new-record work. # Margin items ## Margin items at a glance A margin item is a named percentage definition that you maintain for sales margin calculations. The Margin items page is the reference configuration for these definitions, and it shares its configuration screen with other lists while you work only with this tab. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the fields and list layout | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add, edit, or delete a definition | [Add, edit, and delete a margin item](#add-edit-and-delete-a-margin-item) | | Resolve an access or validation message | [Handle access and validation branches](#handle-access-and-validation-branches) | | Maintain additional cost definitions | [Cost items](doc:configuration-sales-cost-items) | ## Before you start The configuration feature must be available for the grid to appear. Your access also determines whether **New**, row editing, and row deletion are available. The list columns come from the configuration used by your system, so work from the headers displayed in your list. Use the checks below before you choose an action. | Check | What you need to see | |---|---| | Configuration access | The Margin items grid appears rather than the upgrade surface. | | Add access | **New** appears above the list. | | Edit access | Select a row to edit it. | | Delete access | The row delete menu is available. | ## Find Margin items Open the Margin items page to maintain these definitions. ### Open the list or a new item Prerequisites - You have opened the Margin items configuration page. - The Margin items list is visible. Steps 1. Choose the route that matches your task. | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Review or change an existing definition | Select its row. | | Add a definition | Select **New** above the list. | The successful new-item view opens the New Marku up items dialog with **Item Description**, **Ratio of**, **Default (%)**, and **OK**. ![Review the fields in the new margin-item dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/63de7278840d0472b86d75bb6d442aa3.png) **Result:** The list or the new-item dialog is open for the task you chose. ## Understand the list and form The list identifies each definition with its description, ratio basis, and default percentage. The form uses the same three reader-facing labels. ### List fields | Field | Form control | Required | List use | |---|---|---|---| | **Item Description** | Text box | Required | Visible and filterable. | | **Ratio of** | Select box | Required | The displayed name is visible; its numeric value is hidden. | | **Default (%)** | Percentage number box | Required | Visible and filterable. | The configuration also carries hidden ordering, record-identity, and company values. They do not appear as fields for you to enter. The list has no column headers, paging, or header filtering. Its built-in grid editing, adding, and deleting modes are off; use the page actions instead. Rows can be reordered by dragging when editing is allowed. ## Add, edit, and delete a margin item Use these procedures to maintain one definition at a time. Enter a description, choose the ratio basis, and enter a percentage that follows the field rules before selecting **OK**. Prerequisites - The Margin items list is open. - You know the description, ratio basis, and percentage to enter. ### Add or edit a definition Steps 1. Select **New** to add a definition, or select its row to edit it. 2. Enter the definition name in **Item Description**. 3. Select the basis in **Ratio of**. 4. Enter a percentage from 0 through 100 in **Default (%)**. 5. Select **OK** to commit the new or edited definition. **Result:** The definition is committed and the list is ready for review. ### Close without saving Steps 1. Select **Cancel**. **Result:** The form closes without saving. ### Delete a definition Steps 1. Open the row delete menu. 2. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The definition is removed from the list when deletion succeeds. ## Handle access and validation branches The page changes what you can select according to configuration access and the state of the list. The messages below are the messages associated with the fields and record actions. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Item Description is required` | Enter a value in **Item Description**. | | `Ratio of is required` | Choose a value in **Ratio of**. | | `Default (%) is required` | Enter a value in **Default (%)**. | | `Range restricted from 0 - 100 %` | Enter a percentage from 0 through 100 in **Default (%)**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and select **OK** again. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one definition in the list. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the definition because saved data refers to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Return to the list and retry the delete action. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Continue from the list after adding a definition. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Continue from the list after editing a definition. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Continue from the list after deleting a definition. | The grid appears when the configuration feature is included; otherwise the upgrade surface appears. **New** is shown when the add action is available. Selecting a row for editing requires edit access, and the delete menu requires delete access. ## After maintaining the list After you select **Cancel**, the form closes and the list is the next place to review the definitions. After **OK** or **Delete**, continue working from the list and confirm the definition shown there before using it in later sales work. The same configuration screen also contains import and export messages, but those flows belong to their owning configuration pages rather than this Margin items reference. | Shared flow | Message | |---|---| | Import | `Import inserted successfully`; `Data Importing completed` | | Export | `Export to Excel` | **Result:** The Margin items list is ready for the next definition you need to maintain. # Navigation basics ## Overview Navigation basics is the task of choosing the PAMS work area that matches what you need to do. A work area is a PAMS starting place for a kind of work: one area provides summary information, while the personal work area provides work lists and linked work. For shared screen conventions, see [Understanding the interface](understanding-the-interface.md). For summary details, see [Summary overview](dashboard-overview.md). For detailed My Desk work, see [My Desk workspace](my-desk-workspace.md). | If you need to… | Go to… | | --- | --- | | Review summary information | [Summary overview](dashboard-overview.md) | | Open personal work lists and linked work | [Workspace guidance](my-desk-workspace.md) | | Change the layout of your workspace | [Personalizing your workspace](personalizing-your-workspace.md) | | Work with tasks | [My Desk tasks](my-desk-tasks.md) | | Work with activities | [My Desk activities](my-desk-activities.md) | | Read reports | [Reports hub](reports-hub.md) | Start with the prerequisites below, then choose the area that matches your work. ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Sign in before opening the summary area. The summary area displays only when the signed-in condition is true. - Expect the available personal-work areas to depend on your role and subscription. Task, activity, and calendar areas are available only when their corresponding features are included. - Your available areas and columns depend on your role, subscription, and company layout. - Use the labels and headers visible on your screen to choose a view and read its contents. > **Note:** A principal-user setup follows a different My Desk branch. In that branch, the **Tasks**, > **Activities**, and **Calendar** tabs are shown as disabled rather than as selectable tabs. After checking these conditions, choose and open a work area. ## Choose and open a work area Choose the area that matches the question you are answering. Home and My Desk are separate work areas. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - You know whether you need summary information or personal work lists. **Steps** 1. Choose one route from the table. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | Review summary information and page text | the summary area | | Open current or archived work lists and related views | the personal work area | 2. Open the route you chose. 3. Check the address bar for the route you opened. **Result:** The selected area opens with its summary or work-list content. After opening a work area, identify its visible areas and controls. ![Summary area with the three visible sorting controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Understand the visible work area The summary area lists `Principals Report`, `Today`, `Next 10 days`, `Last 10 days`, `Business development`, `Sales Pipeline`, `Potentials`, `Inquiries`, `Budget offers`, `Firm offers`, `Orders`, `Booking This Year`, `Equivalent`, `Target`, `Achieved`, and `Forecast`. The summary area also shows three named controls: **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement**. None carries a required marker. The summary area has no visible data columns and no buttons. On My Desk, the main choices are `Current`, `Archived`, `Graphs`, **Tasks**, **Activities**, and **Calendar**. The views show the following headers and choices. | View | Headers or calendar days | Other visible choices | | --- | --- | --- | | **Tasks** | `Title`, `Owner`, `Start date`, `Due date`, `Status`, `Importance` | **All** | | **Activities** | `Title`, `Visitors`, `Activity purpose`, `Company`, `Startdate`, `Status`, `Importance` | **All**, **Visits**, **Email**, **Meetings**, **Call** | | **Calendar** | `Sun`, `Mon`, `Tue`, `Wed`, `Thu`, `Fri`, `Sat` | **Today**, **September 2026**, **Day**, **Week**, **Month**, **Task** | The **Tasks** view shows six data columns. **Activities** shows its listed columns and controls. Use these visible choices to select the view for your next task. ## Select a view and navigate The personal work area groups work by status and by the kind of work you need to review. **Current** is the starting group; **Archived** groups the archived work. The other tabs select the work view in the centre of the screen. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the personal work area. - The required feature is included if you need **Tasks**, **Activities**, or scheduled work. **Steps** 1. Select the view that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review current work | **Current** | | Review archived work | **Archived** | | Review summary graphs | **Graphs** | | Review tasks | **Tasks** | | Review activities | **Activities** | | Review scheduled work | **Calendar** | **Result:** The selected view appears in the centre of the personal work area, with its headers or calendar controls. If an area or tab differs, compare the role, subscription, and layout conditions before continuing. ![Current view](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c114668cdf58284a04efb5f85879a2d0.png) ![Archived view](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f6282c7d326720e516428f3c32cb348a.png) ![Graphs view](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/bf3c88bd8f706e9be71f9d52c88c51bd.png) ![Tasks view](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fb5410c5ba55b1ca98770f784222ab79.png) ![Activities view with its filters and columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/65e00b920c5b8394381f2d7cbf327ee1.png) ![Calendar view with weekday columns and calendar controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/67ec67008b8664a95d9d02acd427645f.png) The left column can also provide **View**, **Close view**, **Filter by**, and **Clear filter** when the corresponding group and filter conditions are active. The calendar can provide **Timeline** and **Tasks** when its activity feature is included. The tab editor can provide **New Tab**, and the principal report area can provide **Report**. ## Handle role, subscription, and layout differences Your role, subscription, and company layout determine which work areas and tabs appear. The summary area appears under its configuration and subscription conditions. The personal work area uses a separate principal-user branch and checks the subscription for its task, activity, and calendar tabs. | What changes | What to expect | | --- | --- | | Summary-area condition | The summary area shows its configured content when the condition and tabs are present. | | Subscription | **Tasks**, **Activities**, and `Calendar` appear when their corresponding features are included. | | Principal-user branch | This branch shows these tabs as disabled. The personal-work branch shows them as selectable when available. | | Company layout | The available columns and left-column contents follow the saved company layout. | | Task filter options | **Following** is not available in the current task template. | **Result:** The tabs and columns on your screen reflect the role, subscription, and saved layout that apply to your work area. If one of these left-column controls is unavailable, review the role, subscription, and company-layout conditions above before continuing. ## When navigation does not match Use the message text and the visible work area to decide what to do next. **Sort by Booking** is visible on **Home**, but selecting it does not activate the control. Continue with the other visible controls. The following messages can appear while you work in **Home** or **My Desk**. Match the message on screen before you choose what to do next. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | **Your request was completed successfully** | Continue from the updated screen. | | **An error occurred while processing your request** | Review the action and try it again. | | **Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.** | Remove the disallowed characters and retry. | | **Action not allowed** | Stop and use the available action for your role or current screen. | The principal-report message belongs to the report area rather than navigation orientation. ### Out of scope | Message | Owning area | | --- | --- | | **Please choose one or more principals** | Principal report | After reading the message or resolving **Sort by Booking**, continue to the destination for the work. The `Current`, **Archived**, `Graphs`, and **Tasks** views showed no visible controls at the time of checking. **Activities** and **Calendar** showed their controls. No dialog or message appeared. Some work-area content depends on company setup. Use the labels and headers visible on your screen rather than assuming that every possible widget, data column, or tab appears in every work area. ## Continue from the work area Navigation ends when you have opened the work area and selected the view that matches your next job. Continue to the destination that covers that work: - Use [Summary guidance](dashboard-overview.md) for summary areas and widgets. - Use [Workspace guidance](my-desk-workspace.md) for linked records and workspace navigation. - Use [Task guidance](my-desk-tasks.md) for task-list work. - Use [Activity guidance](my-desk-activities.md) for activity-list work. - Use [Workspace-layout guidance](personalizing-your-workspace.md) for layout changes. - Use [Reporting guidance](principal-report.md) or [Reports guidance](reports-hub.md) for reporting. - Use [Help guidance](getting-help.md) when a route or surface remains unavailable. **Result:** You are in the work area and view that match the work you need to continue. # New warehouse ## New warehouse at a glance A warehouse configuration record stores the details PAMS uses to identify and administer a warehouse. The warehouse sits in the purchase chain between the goods receipt note and later warehouse work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Enter a warehouse configuration | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Enter and save warehouse details](#enter-and-save-warehouse-details) | | Review the fields and available choices | [Understand the warehouse form](#understand-the-warehouse-form) | | Maintain a saved warehouse | [Edit warehouse](configuration-warehouse-edit-record.md) | | Locate a warehouse configuration | [Warehouses](configuration-warehouse-view.md) | | Continue into operational warehouse work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) | ## Before you start The form is available when the Warehouse subscription is included and the page is not in its not-found state. Your create or edit permission determines whether the editable controls are available. **Prerequisites** - You have the warehouse name and description to enter in **Display Name** and **Description**. - You know the warehouse's **Store type** and the responsible person for **Store Admin**. - You know which branch choices belong to the warehouse. - You have the address details for **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code**. The saved-record tabs require an existing warehouse record. The area plus and edit actions also require an editable saved record and the **Areas** tab. When these conditions are in place, open the New warehouse page. ## Open the New warehouse page The New warehouse page is the form for entering a warehouse configuration. **Prerequisites** - You have access to Configuration. **Steps** 1. Open `/configuration/warehouse/new`. ![The new-record form with its required fields and save controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5f292920e458eb6a5a4cd39feb976865.png) **Result:** The page opens with **Display Name**, **Description**, **Store type**, and **Store Admin** available for entry. Use the field table that follows to plan the entries. ## Understand the warehouse form The warehouse form identifies the warehouse, assigns its type and administrator, associates branches, and records its address. | Field | Type | Required | Available choices or use | |---|---|---:|---| | **Display Name** | Text | Yes | Enter the warehouse name. | | **Description** | Text | Yes | Enter a description. | | **Store type** | Select | Yes | Choose `Physical`, `Virtual`, or `Partner`. | | **Store Admin** | Select | Yes | Choose one of the available entries. | | **Warehouse belong to branch** | Checkbox choices | No | Select the branches associated with the warehouse. | | **Destination Title** | Text | Yes | Enter the destination title. | | **Country** | Select | No | Choose the country shown by the picker. | | **State** | Text | No | Enter the state. | | **City** | Text | No | Enter the city. | | **Street** | Text | No | Enter the street. | | **Zip-code** | Text | No | Enter the postal code. | The page also provides **Save** and **Save and Close**. The saved-record tabs become available for a saved warehouse record. The area popup uses **Name** and **Description**. The **Store Admin** picker opens. It contains nine entries. The branch choices are displayed under **Warehouse belong to branch**. ![The open Store type picker](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/66f71e1fb26f5138c76f9316464cdc40.png) ![The open Store Admin picker](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/81144917e93796b55a3a0344f31ea63a.png) When you know which values to enter, follow the procedure below. ## Enter and save warehouse details Use this procedure to create the warehouse configuration from the new-record form. **Prerequisites** - The new-record form is open. - You have the warehouse identification, type, administrator, branch, and address details. **Steps** 1. Enter the warehouse name in **Display Name**. 2. Enter the warehouse description in **Description**. 3. Select the warehouse type in **Store type**. | If the warehouse is… | Select | |---|---| | A physical storage location | `Physical` | | A virtual warehouse | `Virtual` | | A partner location | `Partner` | 4. Select the responsible person in **Store Admin**. 5. Select the applicable branch choices under **Warehouse belong to branch**. 6. Enter the destination title in **Destination Title**. 7. Select the country in **Country**. 8. Enter the state in **State**. 9. Enter the city in **City**. 10. Enter the street in **Street**. 11. Enter the postal code in **Zip-code**. 12. Choose how to finish: | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and remain on the warehouse page | **Save** | | Save and leave the page | **Save and Close** | ![The form at the Save action](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1e8107661d20511302f159ba675177d1.png) **Result:** The form contains the warehouse details and the selected save action has been used. After the save completes, continue with the saved warehouse surfaces. ## Use the saved warehouse surfaces A saved warehouse record exposes related surfaces for warehouse areas, its inventory model, and modification history. **Prerequisites** - The warehouse record is saved. - You have edit permission for area changes. **Steps** 1. Select **Areas** to view the warehouse areas. 2. Select the plus icon in the **Areas** tab to prepare a new area. 3. Enter the area name in **Name**. 4. Enter the area description in **Description**. 5. Select **Inventory Model** to view the warehouse inventory model. 6. Select **Last Modifications** to view the warehouse's modification history. **Result:** The saved warehouse's available related surfaces are open for review or maintenance. If an action does not complete, use the message table below. ## When saving or loading goes wrong Use the message text to identify the response from a warehouse action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | The request completed successfully. | Continue with the saved warehouse or leave the page. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request could not be processed. | Check the entered values and your access, then try the action again. | | `You cannot change or delete records developed by Pams` | The record is protected from change or deletion. | Do not attempt to change or delete that record. | | `` `Validatation_commonMessage` is used by the required validators for the warehouse and area forms; rendered text is not resolved in the parser output `` | A required value was not accepted. | Return to the required field and enter a value before saving. | Required-field validation applies to **Display Name**, **Description**, **Store type**, **Store Admin**, and **Name** in the area popup. If a required value is not accepted, return to that field before saving. ## What to do next After entering the warehouse configuration, use the pages that match your next task: - Open [Warehouses](configuration-warehouse-view.md) to locate a warehouse configuration. - Open [Edit warehouse](configuration-warehouse-edit-record.md) to maintain a saved warehouse. - Open [Warehouse product stages](configuration-warehouse-product-stages.md) for related warehouse configuration. - Follow [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) for operational warehouse work. # Potentials ## Potentials A Potential is an early sales-job stage used before an Inquiry. It is the place to record the job, qualify the opportunity, and then receive an inquiry when the work is ready to continue. An Inquiry is the next sales-job stage for work that continues from a Potential. The normal path is `Potential` → `Inquiry` → `Offer` → `Order` → `Delivered`. A Potential can also leave the active path through missed, regretted, or cancelled outcomes. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Create and qualify an early sales opportunity | [Create and qualify a Potential](#create-and-qualify-a-potential) | | Find an existing Potential | [Find and open a Potential](#find-and-open-a-potential) | | Review the fields and stage tabs | [Understand the Potential screen](#understand-the-potential-screen) | | Maintain a saved Potential or receive an inquiry | [Maintain the Potential panel and receive an inquiry](#maintain-the-potential-panel-and-receive-an-inquiry) | | Continue after the inquiry handoff | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Work with offers after an inquiry | [Offers](doc:offers) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Have the job information ready: the responsible salesperson, product type, job title, client, vendor, and the qualification details you want to record. - Know the inquiry date and bid due date if the Potential includes an inquiry panel. - Have access to the target-job flow. The **Potentials** tab is available for a target job, not for direct or instant jobs. - Save the Potential before using actions that require a saved record, such as **Receive inquiry**. - Keep the panel free of unsaved changes before using a stage action. | Rule | Fields | |---|---| | Required only where configured | **End User**, **Estimated Value**, **File Number**, **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, **Requested Offer Type**, **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, **Order chance** | | Required on the new-Potential surface | The form marks **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **Client**, **Vendor**, and **Bid Due Date** as required. | ## Find and open a Potential A Potential list is the starting point when you need to choose an existing sales job. The list presents the job and inquiry information as columns, while the new-Potential route opens an empty job surface. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are creating a new Potential or opening an existing one. - For an existing record, know enough of the visible job information to choose the correct row. **Steps** 1. Open the Potentials list at `/sales/list/Potentials/view`. 2. Use the visible headers to identify the row. | Job identity | Responsibility and parties | Dates and stage | |---|---|---| | Use **Job No.**, **File No.**, and **Job title** | Use **Sales responsible**, **Vendor**, and **Client** | Use **Estimated value**, **Inquiry date**, **Bid due date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage** | 3. Choose the path for the work you need to do. | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Open an existing Potential | Select its row. | | Create a new Potential | Open the new Potential entry from the Sales jobs area. | ![Use the visible job and inquiry headers to choose a Potential.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/049c0dc53742363bdfec98eac2ac4ac3.png) **Result:** The Potentials list is open for selection, or the new-Potential surface is ready for entry. ## Understand the Potential screen The Potential screen combines the sales-job information with the Potential panel, an item area, stage tabs, and save controls. The list's columns are the headers visible in your list; the new-Potential surface currently shows the following fields and controls. | Area | What you can see | |---|---| | Job information | The screen includes **Branch**, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **End User**, **Estimated Value**, and **File Number** | | Potential panel | The panel includes **Client**, **Vendor**, **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, **Bid Due Date**, and **Requested Offer Type** | | Qualification | **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, **Order chance** | | Item area | **Item Description**, **Unit**, **Qty** | | Stage tabs | The workflow tabs are **Potentials**, **Inquiry**, **Offer**, **Order**, and **Delivered** | | Save controls | **Save**, **Save and Close** | | Related area | **Tickets** | The new-Potential surface also shows the item-area columns **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. The availability fields are **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, and **Order chance**. Their required markers depend on company configuration. When enabled for your company, the Potential screen also provides **Commissions** and **Margin**. These surfaces are conditional and do not appear for every configuration. ![Locate the job information and Potential fields before entering them.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3fa3d4abeb485ab3dcb7263a66547d96.png) The Potential panel appears for `Potential` through `Cancelled Potential`, and for a deleted job. Open the panel before looking for its fields. The list shows 11 columns and three toolbar buttons titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ![Use the list headers and toolbar before opening a record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a451fdf8963da271bdc22de58a3984a2.png) ## Create and qualify a Potential Creating a Potential records the early sales opportunity and its qualification information before the work becomes an Inquiry. **Prerequisites** - Open the new Potential entry from the Sales jobs area. - Have the job and qualification information ready. **Steps** 1. In **Salesperson Responsible**, select the person responsible for the sales job. 2. In **Product Type**, select the product type for the job. 3. In **Job Title**, enter the job title. 4. In **Branch**, select or enter the branch shown for the job. 5. In **End User**, select the end user when the job requires one. 6. In **Estimated Value**, enter a value of `0` or greater. 7. In **File Number**, enter the file reference when one is available. 8. In **Client**, select the client for the Potential. 9. In **Vendor**, select the vendor for the Potential. 10. In **Contact to Decision Makers**, select the qualification value when the field is configured for your company. 11. In **Budget Availability**, select the qualification value when the field is configured for your company. 12. In **Chance in Competition**, select the qualification value when the field is configured for your company. 13. In **Order chance**, select the qualification value when the field is configured for your company. 14. Select **Save** or **Save and Close** to finish the entry. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the Potential and remain on the entry surface | **Save** | | Finish entering the Potential from this surface | **Save and Close** | If a required value is missing, the screen can show `Check mandatory field(s)`. Correct the required field and select **Save** again. A successful update can show `Job updated successfully`. ![Complete the qualification fields and select Save.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3fa3d4abeb485ab3dcb7263a66547d96.png) **Result:** The Potential is saved with the job information and qualification values entered on the screen. ### Add an item to a Potential Use an item when the Potential must carry a requested product or service line into the next stage. **Prerequisites** - Open a new Potential. - Have the item description and quantity ready. **Steps** 1. Select **Item** in the Potential item area. 2. In **Item Description**, enter the item description. 3. In **Qty**, enter a quantity from `0.1` through the configured maximum. 4. Select the Potential panel **Save**. If the description is blank, the item cannot be saved. If the quantity is invalid, correct it before saving. The Potential item grid shows **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**; a new Unitized item starts with quantity `1` and unit price `0`, although price is not a Potential grid column. If the item data is invalid, the validation summary can show `Please Solve the Following Issues :`. For an empty item description, it can include `Item No. 1 Description is required`. Correct the item before selecting **Save** again. **Result:** The Potential contains the active item line and is ready for validation or conversion. ### Mark a Potential missed Use the missed outcome when a saved Potential is no longer active. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved Potential that you can edit. - The Potential is not already missed. **Steps** 1. Open the Potential action menu. 2. Select **Missed opportunity**. 3. In the **Missed opportunity** dialog, select **OK**. PAMS displays `Job updated successfully` and refreshes the record history. **Result:** The Potential moves to the missed outcome. ### Reactivate a missed Potential Reactivate a missed opportunity when it returns to active Potential work. **Prerequisites** - Open a job in the missed Potential state. - Have permission to edit the job. **Steps** 1. Open the Potential action menu. 2. Select **Reactivate opportunity**. 3. In the **Activate missed opportunity** dialog, select **OK**. PAMS displays `Job updated successfully` and refreshes the record history. **Result:** The missed opportunity returns to active Potential work. ## Maintain the Potential panel and receive an inquiry The Potential panel holds the client-facing inquiry details that become relevant as the early opportunity is qualified. Maintaining it keeps the record ready for the next sales stage. **Prerequisites** - Open a Potential panel. - Save the Potential before using **Receive inquiry**. - Make sure the panel has no unsaved changes before using a stage action. **Steps** 1. In **Client Inquiry Number**, enter the client inquiry reference when the field is configured for your company. 2. In **Inquiry Date**, enter today or an earlier date. 3. In **Bid Due Date**, enter a date on or after **Inquiry Date**. 4. In **Requested Offer Type**, select the requested offer type when the field is configured for your company. 5. Select **Save** in the Potential panel when the panel is new or has unsaved changes. 6. Select **Receive inquiry** when the Potential is saved, its potential stage is `new`, the job is not deleted, and the job is not Missed Potential. The conversion creates an Inquiry and copies the Potential's active item lines. After conversion, select the **Inquiry** panel header to expand it. PAMS displays `Converted to inquiry successfully` after **Receive inquiry**. If the conversion cannot complete, it displays `An error occurred while processing your request`. The send-mail variant of the handoff also depends on mail permission and the principal relationship. When mail is unavailable, the alternative **Consider As Sent To Principal** action can be shown for a new inquiry when its conditions are met. **Result:** The Potential panel is saved, or the eligible Potential is handed to the Inquiry stage. ### Go to offer Use **Go to offer** when the Inquiry is eligible to move into Offer work. **Prerequisites** - Have an Inquiry reached from a Potential. - For an external principal, the Inquiry is before Offered and meets the relationship conditions. - For an own-company Vendor, the Inquiry is new. **Steps** 1. Open the Inquiry action menu. 2. Select **Go to offer**. PAMS displays `Converted to offer successfully` after the action. **Result:** The Inquiry moves to Offer work. ## When a Potential does not behave as expected Use the message shown on screen to decide what to correct. The following messages belong to the Potential flows. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required field and select **Save** again. | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Return the inquiry to its draft stage before using **Back to potential**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the values and the record state, then retry the action. | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Read the inserted error text and correct the indicated condition. | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Continue after the custom fields save completes. | | `Job updated successfully` | Continue with the saved Potential. | | `Job regretted successfully` | Continue on the regretted outcome route. | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Continue on the cancelled outcome route. | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Continue the record in [Inquiries](doc:inquiries). | | `Converted To Regretted` | Continue on the regretted outcome route. | | `Converted to cancelled` | Continue on the cancelled outcome route. | The Potential-specific actions are also conditional. **Receive inquiry** requires a saved Potential at the `new` stage. **Go to offer** is available before the Offered stage under its relationship conditions. **Back to potential** requires a target job at `Potential` with an inquiry at `new`. Editing and approval actions also depend on permissions and the current state. The new-Potential surface shows the controls listed in the job information, Potential details, and qualification fields described in [Understand the Potential screen](#understand-the-potential-screen). It does not show **Bid Due Date** or **Requested Offer Type** on that surface; those fields belong to the opened Potential panel. ## Out of scope The message `Please save opened inquiry first` belongs to the opened Inquiry flow rather than the Potential flow. ## What happens next - Open [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) to continue the inquiry work after **Receive inquiry**. - Open [Offers](doc:offers) when the inquiry is ready for offer work after **Go to offer**. **Result:** Inquiry work continues on the Inquiries page, followed by offer work when the inquiry is eligible. # Pricing Quotation quotations ## Quotation work from an RFQ A quotation is offer-stage work created from an RFQ: it records the offer before the quotation moves on to the next purchasing stage. The quotation panel is available from Offer until before Order. Each offer in the purchasing job has its own quotation panel. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Find the quotation lists | [Find and open a quotation](#find-and-open-a-quotation) | | Check the fields and available actions | [Understand the quotation editor](#understand-the-quotation-editor) | | Enter or change quotation information | [Save a quotation](#save-a-quotation) | | Mark a draft as valid, or create an alternative or revision | [Choose a quotation outcome](#choose-a-quotation-outcome) | | Correct a blocked action | [When quotation work does not proceed](#when-quotation-work-does-not-proceed) | | Return an offer to its RFQ | [Continue after quotation work](#continue-after-quotation-work) | | Work the RFQ that feeds the quotation | [Pricing Quotation RFQs](doc:pricing-quotation-rfqs) | | See the complete Pricing Quotation flow | [Pricing Quotation](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) | Start with the prerequisites before you open or change a quotation. ## Before you start A quotation action depends on the offer's saved state, your ability to edit it, and the configuration that controls mandatory fields and choice values. | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | A quotation in the Offer-stage window | The quotation panel appears from Offer until before Order. | | A saved quotation with no unsaved changes | The state-dependent actions apply to persisted, unchanged, non-Ordered offers. | | An editable record | **Save** is available only when editing is allowed; a child display can be read-only. | | The sub-supplier and at least one item with a nonblank description | Offer validation requires both before the offer can be saved or advanced. | | The offer information and item details | Quantity must be greater than zero and no more than 999,999; retained items need a description and a non-negative unit price. | | Your company's mandatory-field configuration | The configured mandatory fields are required only where your company enables them. | When these conditions are in place, find and open the quotation. ## Find and open a quotation The Pricing Quotation lists help you identify RFQs and quotations by their visible row headers before you open the record. **Prerequisites** - You can open the Pricing Quotation list. - You know enough of the package, sales job, purchaser, or sub-supplier information to identify the row. **Steps** 1. Open Pricing Quotation. 2. Select **Quotations**. ![The quotation list after selecting Quotations](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5dbf07cade72cd7c2e039ffb83c6468e.png) 3. Identify the row from the visible headers Package no., Sales job No., Purchaser, Offer type, Bid due date, Sub-supplier, Client, Package title, Offer price, and Offer price in €. 4. Select the quotation row. **Result:** The quotation record opens. ## Understand the quotation editor The quotation editor is the offer panel where you maintain the supplier offer, its terms, and the items carried from the RFQ. The panel contains these fields: | Area | Fields and choices | |---|---| | Supplier and offer identity | Sub-supplier, **Offer No.**, **Offer Type**, and **Offer Date** | | Timing and terms | **Validity Period**, **Delivery Time**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, and **Payment Period** | | Purchasing reference | the purchasing reference field | | Items | the item description field, **Unit**, and **Qty** | In **Offer Type**, select **Firm** or **Budget**. Select a value from each available list for **Sub-supplier**, the purchasing reference, and **Unit**. The panel can be read-only when the record is displayed as a child or when editing is not allowed. The quotation list and the RFQs list can also show different columns. The RFQs list includes **RFQ stage**; the quotation list includes **Offer price** and **Offer price in €**. ![The Pricing Quotation list headers and toolbar](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2dfbdd15c2b9ed42fadc84c349c4bb2e.png) The active quotation surface does not provide Convert To Order. Continue quotation work through the actions that are available for the offer's current state. ## Save a quotation Enter or change the quotation details. **Prerequisites** - The quotation panel is open and editable. - You have the sub-supplier, offer information, terms, and item details to enter. - The quotation has at least one item with a nonblank item description. **Steps** 1. In **Sub-supplier**, select the supplier for the offer. 2. In **Offer No.**, enter the supplier's offer number when your company requires it. 3. In **Offer Type**, select the available offer type when your company requires it. 4. In **Offer Date**, enter the offer date when your company requires it. 5. In **Validity Period**, enter a value from 1 through the allowed maximum when your company requires it. 6. In **Delivery Time**, enter a value from 1 through the allowed maximum when your company requires it. 7. In **Delivery Term**, select a term when your company requires it. 8. In **Payment Method**, select a method when your company requires it. 9. In **Payment Period**, enter a whole-number value from 1 through the allowed maximum when your company requires it. 10. In **PO No.**, select the purchasing-order reference when your company requires it. 11. In the item rows, enter a nonblank item description. 12. In **Qty**, enter a value greater than zero and no more than 999,999. 13. In **Unit**, select the unit for the item when one is available. 14. Select **Save**. If a required value is missing, PAMS displays `Check mandatory field(s)`. If the item quantity is outside its range, it displays `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00`. If the unit price is negative, it displays `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value`. **Result:** A new quotation is created or an existing quotation is updated. PAMS displays `Saved Successfully` after a successful create or update. If saving fails, PAMS displays `Saving Error`. ## Choose a quotation outcome Choose the action from the quotation action area according to the quotation's current saved state. **Prerequisites** - The quotation is saved. - The quotation has no unsaved changes. - The quotation is not Ordered for the state-dependent actions. **Steps** 1. Open the quotation action area. 2. Choose one outcome: | If the quotation is… | Select… | What follows | |---|---|---| | A saved Draft with no unsaved changes | **Valid Offer** | The offer moves into the valid-offer path. | | Valid or Expired | **Alternative Offer** | A separate alternative quotation is created from the saved offer. | | Valid or Expired | **Revision** | A separate revision quotation is created from the saved offer. | | Valid or Expired | **Rejected Offer** | The rejection fields open. | | Valid or Expired | **Cancel RFQ** | The cancellation fields open. | | Valid or Expired | **Regretted To Offer** | The regret fields open. | | Rejected | **Consider Offer as Not Rejected** | The rejection is reversed when the declared conditions hold. | | Persisted, unchanged, and not Ordered | **Back to RFQ** | The offer returns to the RFQ path. | 3. Complete the fields in the popup when **Rejected Offer**, **Cancel RFQ**, or **Regretted To Offer** opens. 4. Submit the popup using its confirmation control. **Result:** The selected quotation outcome is applied, or the required reason fields remain available for correction. If an action is blocked, use the message table before continuing. ## When quotation work does not proceed Use the message on screen to identify what to correct. Messages owned by another page are listed with that owning page. | Message | What to check or do | |---|---| | `This field is required ` | Complete the field carrying the required marker. | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the field carrying the required marker. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Correct **Qty**. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Correct the negative item price. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add or retain an item in the quotation. | | `Offer No. cannot exceed 35 characters` | Shorten **Offer No.** to 35 characters or fewer. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the configured mandatory fields. | | `Saving Error` | Check the quotation values and try **Save** again. | | `Upgrade needed` | Ask for the subscription required by the selected quotation action. | | `Purchasing offer cancelled` | The cancellation completed; continue from the quotation's resulting state. | | `Purchasing offer regretted` | The regret completed; continue from the quotation's resulting state. | | `Offer rejected` | The rejection completed; continue from the quotation's resulting state. | | `Purchasing job converted back to offer successfully` | The return-to-offer conversion completed. | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Select one or more job items before creating an RFQ. | | `Input contains forbidden characters(< , >). Please remove them and try again.` | Remove `<` and `>` from the affected text. | | `Purchasing job converted to offer successfully` | The RFQ-to-offer conversion completed. | | `No remaining items. All items have been selected` | The RFQ package-item selection is complete. | | ` Package must have at least one item` | Add an item to the RFQ package. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Use an action for a branch to which you belong. | | `Please enter at least one email` | Enter at least one email address. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add an item to the inquiry. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add an item to the order. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Do not delete items with either of these labels. | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Enter an action for each milestone. | | `Required Offer Type` | Complete the required offer type. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Complete the required bid due date. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The attachment request completed successfully. | | ` You already have a contact with this name` | Review the existing contact or use a different name. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Retry the action or ask an administrator to check the request. | | `Server error` | Retry the action or ask an administrator to check the server request. | | `Saved Successfully` | The quotation was saved successfully. | After correcting a blocked action, continue with the quotation or return it to its RFQ. ## Continue after quotation work After saving or applying an exception outcome, continue from the quotation's next available work surface. **Prerequisites** - The quotation action has completed. - You know whether you need to continue in Quotations, return to the RFQ, or review an exception list. **Steps** 1. Select **Back to RFQ** when the offer must return to its RFQ path. 2. Open the quotation list when you need to continue quotation work. 3. Open the Archived exception lists when you need to review exception work. ![The Quotations list used to continue quotation work](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5dbf07cade72cd7c2e039ffb83c6468e.png) **Result:** The offer remains available in its quotation path, returns to the RFQ path, or is available through the appropriate exception list. # Principal users ## Principal users at a glance A principal user is an administration record for the identity, access choices, approval limits, authentication choice, and profile image used by a principal user in PAMS. The **Principal users** surface uses one screen for a new record and for an existing record. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the fields and choices | [Understand the principal-user screen](#understand-the-principal-user-screen) | | Enter identity, branch, role, approval, or authentication details | [Maintain identity and access details](#maintain-identity-and-access-details) | | Open a new or existing record | [Find or open a principal user](#find-or-open-a-principal-user) | | Check what changes for your access or record state | [Handle access and record variations](#handle-access-and-record-variations) | | Save, leave, or resolve a message | [Save, leave, and handle problems](#save-leave-and-handle-problems) | | Review broader user administration | [Users](doc:users-overview) | | Administer roles | [Roles](doc:roles) | | Administer teams | [Teams](doc:teams) | | Review two-factor configuration | [2-factor Authentications](doc:configuration-2factor-authentications) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - Know whether you are creating a principal-user record or changing an existing one. - Have the identity information and access choices ready before you select a save action. - You need edit access for **Save** and **Save and Close** to be available after you make a change. - The record and its credential information must be loaded before their fields can appear. - The form must pass its validation before it can save. Unsaved changes affect the close action. When you have edit access and the current values differ from the saved values, leaving the page opens a confirmation choice instead of leaving immediately. > Note: Use the required markers beside the fields as your check before selecting a save action. ## Find or open a principal user Use a principal-user record to maintain one person's identity and access settings. Steps 1. Open the security users area. 2. Choose the route that matches your task: | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Start a new record | Select the option to create a new principal user. | | Change an existing record | Select the principal user in the users list. | | Change a profile image | Select the principal user in the users list. | 3. Confirm that the page heading identifies the principal-user record before entering values. ![Check the route and the identity fields before entering a new principal user](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0d46bb3ab739e619d655f36a47e15abc.png) **Result:** The principal-user screen is open at the new-record route or at the existing record you selected. ## Understand the principal-user screen The screen groups identity information, access choices, approval settings, two-factor authentication, and profile-image controls. The new-record screen shows **Email**, **Title**, the person's given name, **Middle Name**, **Last Name**, **Display Name**, and **Mobile**. The following fields are required on the new-record screen: | Field | Type | Required marker | |---|---|---| | **Email** | Text | Yes | | Given name | Text | Yes | | **Last Name** | Text | Yes | | **Display Name** | Text | Yes | | **Mobile** | Text | Yes | These fields are also present but are not marked required on the new-record screen: | Field | Type | Details | |---|---|---| | **Title** | Text | Optional entry | | **Middle Name** | Text | Optional entry | The access area contains the **Allowed Branches** and **User Roles** groups. Their checkbox entries come from the available branch and role data. The new-record screen showed five branch entries and nineteen role entries. **Accessible account** appears as a readout on this screen rather than as a visible selectable control. ![Review the branch checkboxes in the **Allowed Branches** group](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4d8df0987ff42c37d40541f113796879.png) ![Review the role checkboxes in the **User Roles** group](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4d8df0987ff42c37d40541f113796879.png) The approval area contains three approval-limit groups. Each group has an **Up to** amount and an **Unlimited** choice. The groups cover sales, purchasing, and invoicing. The amount uses the format `#,##0.00` and cannot be below `0`. The **Mobile** field accepts a maximum of 20 characters. The authentication area offers **Apply 2-factor Authentication With This User** with the choices **No** and **Yes**. Profile-image actions include an upload action and **Delete**. The screen has no record list. ![Identify the required identity fields and the **Email** field](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1fd1b477727191a1bf61bac414f342a7.png) ## Maintain identity and access details A principal-user record combines identity information with the branches, roles, approval limits, and authentication choice that apply to that person. Prerequisites - The principal-user screen is open. - The identity information is ready. - The branches and roles that apply to the record are known. Steps 1. Enter the address in **Email**. 2. Enter the person's given name in **First Name**. ![Check the given-name field before continuing to the family name](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1fd1b477727191a1bf61bac414f342a7.png) 3. Enter the person's family name in **Last Name**. 4. Enter the name used to identify the record in **Display Name**. 5. Enter the person's mobile number in **Mobile**. 6. Enter the person's title in **Title** when that detail applies. 7. Enter the person's middle name in **Middle Name** when that detail applies. 8. Select the checkboxes for the branches the principal user may access. 9. Select the checkboxes for the roles the principal user needs. 10. Set each approval limit in its **Up to** amount when the corresponding approval must be capped. 11. Select **Unlimited** for an approval area that has no amount cap. 12. Choose the required authentication setting: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Leave two-factor authentication off | **No** | | Apply two-factor authentication | **Yes** | 13. Choose an image in the image dialog. 14. Use the upload action in the image dialog. 15. Select **Delete** in the image menu to remove the current profile image. ![Review the account readout and access groups before choosing branches and roles](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1fd1b477727191a1bf61bac414f342a7.png) **Result:** The identity, access, approval, authentication, and profile-image values are set on the screen and are ready for a save action. ## Handle access and record variations The controls available to you change with your edit access, whether the record is new or existing, and whether an approval area is unlimited. | Situation | What you can use | |---|---| | You can edit and have changed a value | **Save** and **Save and Close** are available in the header. | | You can edit and select the close control at the top-right of the screen with unsaved changes | A confirmation choice opens before you leave. | | You cannot edit | The close control at the top-right of the screen leaves the page directly. | | The record is new | The record fields appear after the new record loads. | | **Unlimited** is selected for an approval area | The amount control for that approval area is replaced by an unlimited value. | | **Unlimited** is not selected | The approval amount is shown and must be at least `0`. | The **User Roles** and **Branches** panels do not contain separate fields; use the inline checkbox groups in the user-information area. The username field and re-send activation-mail button are not part of this screen. ## Save, leave, and handle problems Saving commits the values after the form passes validation. Leaving with unsaved changes uses the page's confirmation choices. Prerequisites - The fields you want to keep are completed. - You have edit access for the save actions. - The validation group passes before saving. Steps 1. Select **Save** in the header to save while staying on the screen. 2. Select **Save and Close** in the header to save and leave the screen. 3. Select the close control at the top-right of the screen when you want to leave without starting a save. 4. When the unsaved-change prompt opens, choose the action that matches your desired outcome: | Desired outcome | Select | |---|---| | Leave without keeping the changes | **Don't Save** | | Keep the changes and leave | **Save** | | Stay on the screen | **Cancel** | 5. When validation stops the save, correct the field identified by the message. 6. Select the save action again. ![Check the header save actions before committing changes](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1fd1b477727191a1bf61bac414f342a7.png) ![Check the **Save and Close** action in the header](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1fd1b477727191a1bf61bac414f342a7.png) | What appears | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in the field identified by the message. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters that the field does not accept. | | `Email is invalid` | Correct the address in **Email**. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Confirm that the current profile image is the one you want to remove before selecting **Delete**. | | `Photo Deleted Successfully` | The profile image was removed. | | `Server Error` | Check the screen and retry the action when the service is available. | | `Error: This Email or User Name Already Exists` | Use a different email or user name. | | `Error: Server Error` | Check the screen and retry the save when the service is available. | | `Data saved Successfully .. An E-Mail was sent to this User` | Continue from the activation dialog. | | `New user created` | Read the activation information in the dialog. | | `A activation mail with instruction sent to user [record email]` | The activation message identifies the address receiving the message. | | `to activate his account Whenever user activate his account You’ll be notified by mail` | Follow the activation instructions for the new account. | | `Do you want to save your changes?` | Choose `Don't Save`, `Save`, or `Cancel` in the unsaved-change prompt. | | `Do you want to save your changes?` | Choose the required unsaved-change action in the prompt. | | `No` | Choose `No` in the authentication control when that is the required setting. | | `Yes` | Choose `Yes` in the authentication control when that is the required setting. | | `Ok` | Close the activation alert. | The phrases `Import instructions and file-size notices` belong to import workflows in the shared popup. `Subscription-upgrade content` belongs to the subscription-upgrade workflow. **Result:** The screen either remains open with the saved values, leaves after **Save and Close**, or presents the message that tells you which correction or confirmation is needed. ## What comes next After you finish the principal-user administration task, continue from the result that appears on screen. A successful new-user save can open the activation information; a leave action returns you to the surrounding security area. Use these related pages for the next administration concern: - [Users](doc:users-overview) for the user list and existing-record entry point. - [Roles](doc:roles) for broader role administration. - [Teams](doc:teams) for team administration. - [2-factor Authentications](doc:configuration-2factor-authentications) for related authentication configuration. - [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) for common application message handling. **Result:** You know which related administration page to open after the current principal-user screen. # Record activities from My Desk Use the standalone **Activities** tab to review sales follow-up across jobs or add a Visit, Meeting, or Call. For work tied to one sales job, continue in [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files). ## Record activities from My Desk An activity records sales follow-up across jobs so you can review visits, meetings, and calls from one workspace. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review activities across jobs | [Find and review activities](#find-and-review-activities) | | Narrow the all-job list | [Filter the activity list](#filter-the-activity-list) | | Add a Visit, Meeting, or Call | [Add a Visit, Meeting, or Call](#add-a-visit-meeting-or-call) | | Choose the right activity form | [Choose the activity type and handle its differences](#choose-the-activity-type-and-handle-its-differences) | | Resolve a validation or action message | [When activity work goes wrong](#when-activity-work-goes-wrong) | | Work with activities for one sales job | [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files) | | Understand activity statuses | [Activity status](doc:activity-status) | ## Before you start The standalone activity workspace is available when your organisation includes the Activities subscription and you are not a principal user. Prerequisites - Open **My Desk**. - Confirm that **Activities** is available as a tab. - Have the information for the activity ready before you open its form. - For a Visit, prepare the title, **Priority**, **Start Date**, and **End Date**. - For a Meeting, prepare the title, **Priority**, **Start Date**, and **End Date**. - For a Call, prepare the title, **Priority**, and **Start Date**. Use the activity-specific fields listed in [Choose the activity type and handle its differences](#choose-the-activity-type-and-handle-its-differences). ## Find and review activities The activity list is the all-job view of recorded sales follow-up. Its visible headers identify the information available for review, and each row can expose actions for opening or deleting an activity. Prerequisites - You are on **My Desk**. - **Activities** is available. Steps 1. Select **Activities**. 2. Read the activity rows under the visible headers. ![Activity list with its visible filters and column headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f194584d63927f3c2ee6fb020d32321d.png) 3. Select **Open** for an activity you are allowed to view. 4. To remove an activity you own, select **Delete**. **Result:** The activity list is open for review, or the selected activity opens in its activity view. The list currently draws **Title**, **Visitors**, **Activity purpose**, **Company**, `Startdate`, **Status**, and **Importance**. Work from the headers visible in your list when the columns differ. Use **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings** in the activity list toolbar. ## Filter the activity list The activity filters let you review one activity type or include archived activities without leaving the all-job list. Prerequisites - The activity list is open. Steps 1. In the activity-type filters, select the view that matches what you need to review. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every activity type | **All** | | Review visits | **Visits** | | Review email activity | **Email** | | Review meetings | **Meetings** | | Review calls | **Call** | 2. Select **Show archived activities** when archived activity records are part of your review. ![Activity filters above the all-job activity list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) **Result:** The activity list displays the filter view you selected. ## Add a Visit, Meeting, or Call Use an activity form when you need to record sales follow-up from the all-job My Desk workspace. Prerequisites - The activity list is open. - You know which activity type describes the follow-up. - You have the required information listed in [Before you start](#before-you-start). Steps 1. Select the unlabeled plus icon beside the **Activities** tab. 2. Select one activity type. | If you are recording… | Select | |---|---| | A visit or site contact | **Visit** | | A scheduled discussion | **Meeting** | | A telephone follow-up | **Call** | 3. In the form, select **Priority**. 4. Enter the title for the selected activity type. 5. Complete the type-specific fields listed in [Choose the activity type and handle its differences](#choose-the-activity-type-and-handle-its-differences). 6. Enter **Start Date**. 7. For a Visit or Meeting, enter **End Date** no earlier than **Start Date**. 8. If the form displays **Reminder**, set the reminder for the saved activity. 9. Choose how to finish saving the activity. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save and keep the form open | **Save** | | Save and close the form | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The selected activity form has been completed and submitted with the values you entered. ## Choose the activity type and handle its differences Visit, Meeting, and Call are three activity types for different kinds of sales follow-up; choose the one that matches the work you are recording. Prerequisites - The activity type has been selected. Steps 1. Review the fields for the selected activity type. | Activity type | Complete these fields | |---|---| | **Visit** | **Priority**, **Visitors**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, and **Visit type** | | **Meeting** | **Priority**, **Start Date**, and **End Date** | | **Call** | **Priority**, **Call Use**, **Start Date**, and **Description** | 2. For an existing activity, use **Reminder** when it is displayed for the saved activity. 3. Use the activity's edit-only tabs when the activity has already been saved. **Result:** You know which fields apply to the selected activity type and which saved-activity controls are available. The add menu offers **Visit**, **Meeting**, and **Call** for this workspace. Use one of these three choices when you add an activity. ## When activity work goes wrong Use the message text on screen to identify the correction needed. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Priority is required` | **Priority** is empty. | Select **Priority**. | | `Title is required` | The activity title is empty. | Enter a title. | | `Start Date is required` | **Start Date** is empty. | Enter **Start Date**. | | `Date is required` | The Call date is empty. | Enter **Start Date** on the Call form. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | The action is restricted to the activity's branch. | Use an activity belonging to your branch. | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Completing the activity requires a topic and a note. | Add one topic and at least one note before completing it. | | `There is no topic to print` | The activity has no topic available for printing. | Add a topic before using the print action. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The requested activity action did not complete. | Review the activity and retry the action. | | `You are about to delete this activity, are you sure?` | PAMS is asking you to confirm the deletion. | Continue only when you intend to remove the activity. | **Result:** The message identifies the correction or the page that owns the related work. ### Out of scope messages These messages belong to the owning pages listed below. | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Record activities from My Desk | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | General error messages | | `Action not allowed` | Record activities from My Desk | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contact record | | `Required Receiving Date` | Record payment | | `This field is required` | Contact record | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Sales job record | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Sales job record | | `An account with this name already exists` | Accounts | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Accounts | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Accounts | | `This Field Is Required` | Accounts | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job updated successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job deleted successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job regretted successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job missed successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Sales job record | | `Converted to offer successfully` | Sales job record | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Sales job record | | `Error saving custom fields` | Sales job record | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Sales job record | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Sales job record | | `A project with this name already exists` | Sales job record | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Sales job record | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Sales job record | | `Please enter action for each milstone` | Sales job record | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Sales job record | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Bill of materials | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Bill of materials | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Bill of materials | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Bill of materials | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Products | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Products | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Products | | `Please select one product` | Products | | `Required Receiving After` | Purchase job information | | `Package must have at least one item` | MRQ record follow-up | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | MRQ record follow-up | | `Please enter at least one email` | Purchase job record | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Purchase job record | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Purchase job record | | `Order must have at least one item` | Purchase job record | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Purchase job record | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchase job record | | `Required Offer Type` | Purchase job information | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Purchase job information | | `Error loading accounts` | Delivery notes | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Reference list data | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Reference list data | | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Reference list data | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | L/G lifecycle | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | L/G lifecycle | ## Continue with job-filtered activity work The standalone My Desk list covers activities across jobs. Use the sales-job activity page when you need to review or manage activities in the context of one sales job. **Result:** Continue with [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files) for job-filtered activity work. # Record a payment An incoming payment records money received from an account against one or more invoices. In PAMS, it follows the AR Invoice in the finance flow and keeps the received amount, currency, account, and invoice allocation together. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a payment already recorded | [Find a payment](#find-a-payment) | | Recognize the fields and totals on the payment screen | [Understand the payment screen](#understand-the-payment-screen) | | Enter a new payment | [Enter payment details](#enter-payment-details) | | Handle cheque, bank-transfer, or invoice-allocation choices | [Handle payment method and invoice allocation](#handle-payment-method-and-invoice-allocation) | | Correct a validation or allocation problem | [Save the payment and resolve errors](#save-the-payment-and-resolve-errors) | | Continue after saving | [After the payment is saved](#after-the-payment-is-saved) | | Create the invoice that the payment belongs to | [Create an invoice](doc:create-invoice) | | Review the invoice-to-payment flow | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | Manage files attached to the payment | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Look up general error messages | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) | ## Before you start A payment needs an account, the payment information, and an invoice context before you enter or allocate money. Selecting the right account loads the invoices that can receive the payment. Prerequisites - Know the account that made the payment. - Have the receiving date, amount, currency, and receiving method available. - Have permission to use the payment feature and create a payment. The payment list and the new-payment screen are available when the feature and permission conditions allow them. - Save the payment before opening **Attachment**, **Last Modifications**, or changing an allocation. - Plan to provide **Received From**, **Receiving Date**, **Received Amount**, Currency, and **Recieving Method**. ## Find a payment The incoming-payment list is the workspace for locating payments that are already recorded and reviewing their allocation totals. Prerequisites - Know whether you need all payments, payments that are not completely allocated, or payments that are completely allocated. Steps 1. Open the incoming-payment list at `/finance/payments/list/all/view`. 2. Select the list view that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every payment | **All** | | Review payments with an outstanding allocation | **Not completely allocated** | | Review payments fully allocated to invoices | **Completely allocated** | 3. Read the visible payment headers. | Header | Use it to… | |---|---| | Transaction no. | Identify the payment record. | | Receiving on | Check the receiving date. | | Account | Check who the payment came from. | | Amount | Check the received amount. | | Amount in € | Compare the amount in the displayed euro value. | | Unallocated amount | Find the amount not allocated to invoices. | | Unallocated Amount in € | Compare the unallocated amount in the displayed euro value. | ![Read the payment headers and choose the row you need.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f86c048e231d2c4579a4a8b41f57086e.png) 4. Choose the list action that matches what you need next. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Refresh the list | **Refresh** | | Change the list display | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | | Export the list | **Settings**, then **Export** | 5. Select the payment row to open its saved record. **Result:** The selected payment opens for review or editing. The list shows the headers and allocation values for the chosen list layout. ## Understand the payment screen The payment screen combines the account and payment details with invoice allocation, summary totals, and saved-record tabs. The new-payment screen shows four required fields: **Received From**, **Receiving Date**, **Received Amount**, and **Recieving Method**. It also asks you to select a currency. | Area | What you see | |---|---| | Payment details | **Received From**, **Receiving Date**, **Received Amount**, **Recieving Method**, and the currency field. | | Invoice area | `No Invoices To Display` when no invoice rows are available. | | Totals | `Recieved Amount`, `Allocated Amount`, and `None Allocated Amount`. | | Related work | `Tickets`, plus **Attachment** and **Last Modifications** after the payment is saved. | ## Enter payment details Create a payment here when the account and payment information are ready. Prerequisites - Know the account that made the payment. - Have the receiving date, positive amount, currency, and receiving method ready. Steps 1. Open the new-payment screen from the finance payment workspace. 2. In **Received From**, select the account that made the payment. 3. In **Receiving Date**, enter the date the payment was received. 4. In **Received Amount**, enter the received amount. 5. Select the payment currency. 6. In **Recieving Method**, select the method used to receive the payment. 7. Complete the fields for the selected receiving method. | If **Recieving Method** is… | Complete… | |---|---| | BankTransfer | **Receiving Account** and optionally **Bank Charges** | | Cheque | **Reference #** | 8. Select **Save** to keep the payment open, or select **Save and Close** to save it and leave the page. | If you select… | The payment… | |---|---| | **Save** | Remains open after the save. | | **Save and Close** | Saves and leaves the page. | ![Check the payment fields and the save controls before entering values.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ba779ff4258db69897af0c194eb460e9.png) **Result:** The payment is submitted for validation. The new-payment screen requires the account, receiving date, positive amount, currency, and receiving method before it can be saved. ## Handle payment method and invoice allocation The receiving method determines which supporting fields you complete, while allocation assigns the received amount to invoice balances. Prerequisites - Enter the account, date, amount, currency, and receiving method. - Use a saved payment before changing an existing allocation. Steps 1. Select the method-specific fields. | When **Recieving Method** is… | Complete… | |---|---| | Cheque | **Reference #** | | BankTransfer | **Receiving Account** and **Bank Charges** | 2. Review `Amount` and `Rate to` when the payment currency and displayed invoice currencies require conversion. 3. Review the invoice rows and enter the amount to allocate in **Allocated Amount**. 4. Choose the editing action that matches the payment's current state. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start editing an existing allocation | **Enable Editing** | | Change an existing allocation | **Adjust Allocation** | | Leave editing mode | **Exit Enable Editing Mode** | Selecting **Enable Editing** shows `Enable editing mode is active`. Selecting **Exit Enable Editing Mode** shows `Enable editing mode is inactive`. 5. Check the totals after changing an allocation. The payment recalculates the allocated and remaining amounts from the invoice rows. ![Review the amount area before allocating the payment.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0dd8a96c112b556b4951ee063bc19098.png) Select **Recieving Method** to show the fields for the chosen method. The initial screen shows `No Invoices To Display`. **Result:** The payment method requirements are complete and the allocation totals reflect the invoice amounts you entered. ## Save the payment and resolve errors Validation messages identify the value that must be corrected before the payment can be saved. Prerequisites - Have the payment screen open. - Have the account, date, amount, currency, and method available for correction. Steps 1. Select **Save** or **Save and Close**. When the form shows `Check mandatory field(s)`, use the validation summary steps below. 2. Review the validation summary. 3. Enter the missing or invalid values listed under `Please Solve the Following Issues :`. | Message | Correction | |---|---| | `Client is Required` | Select an account in **Received From**. | | `Receiving Date is Required` | Enter **Receiving Date**. | | `Received Amount is Required` | Enter a positive **Received Amount**. | | `Received Amount Currency is Required` | Select the payment currency. | | `Payment Method is Required` | Select **Recieving Method**. | | `Receiving bank account is required` | Complete **Receiving Account** for BankTransfer. | | `Reference # is required` | Complete **Reference #** for Cheque. | | `The Allocated Amount is more than Payment Amount` | Reduce **Allocated Amount**. | When the allocation area shows `Allocated amount is bigger than Due Amount` or `Allocated amount is bigger than recieved amount`, use the matching correction below. 4. Enter an allocation equal to the invoice’s due amount. 5. Enter an allocation equal to the received amount. 6. Reload the payment record when the screen shows `Error loading payment data`. 7. Review the payment values and select **Save** again when the screen shows `Save error`. 8. Respond to the close confirmation before leaving when you have unsaved changes. The payment screen uses a can-deactivate guard for this situation. **Result:** The payment remains on the form until its validation issues are corrected; the incomplete-form response is `Check mandatory field(s)`. ## After the payment is saved A saved payment is the record you return to when you need to review allocation, attach files, or inspect its change history. Prerequisites - Complete the payment values and pass validation. Steps 1. Choose the saved-record action that matches what you need next. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the payment open after saving | **Save** | | Save and leave the page | **Save and Close** | | Continue with files or payment history | **Attachment** or **Last Modifications** | 2. Confirm the success message `Data saved Successfully`. 3. When a new payment remains open after **Save**, continue editing the saved payment. **Result:** The saved payment remains available from the payment list, with **Attachment** and **Last Modifications** available on the saved record. # Reference serial status A serial status is a reference value that describes the condition assigned to a serial number. Maintain these values in the **Reference list** area of **Configuration**. ## Reference serial status Use this page to review the values available to serial-number work and maintain the list. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the serial-status list | [Find serial statuses](#find-serial-statuses) | | Understand the list and its field | [Understand the serial-status screen](#understand-the-serial-status-screen) | | Add, edit, or remove a value | [Add, edit, or remove a serial status](#add-edit-or-remove-a-serial-status) | | Handle access or item-count rules | [Handle access and action branches](#handle-access-and-action-branches) | | Resolve a validation or deletion message | [When validation or deletion fails](#when-validation-or-deletion-fails) | | Continue with reference-list guidance | [Reference list data](reference-list-data.md) | | Return to the configuration starting point | [Configuration](configuration-home.md) | | Maintain a related reference value | [Reference category](configuration-reference-list-reference-category-view.md) | ## Before you start Before maintaining a serial status, have access to the serial-status list and the permission required for the action you want to perform. | Before you start | What it affects | |---|---| | Your subscription includes the configured feature | The serial-status page and its controls can appear. | | The list has loaded | The list and its page controls are available. | | New-item permission is available | **New** is available. | | Edit permission is available | The edit control is available. | | Delete permission is available | The delete control is available. | | More than one item exists | The delete action can be used without removing the final item. | ## Find serial statuses The serial-status list is where you review existing reference values before opening a maintenance form. **Prerequisites** - Your subscription includes the configured feature. - The serial-status list is available to you. **Steps** 1. Open **Configuration**. 2. Open **Reference list**. 3. Open **Serial status**. 4. Locate the value in the **Status** column. ![The serial-status list under Reference list and Configuration, with the Status column visible](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a193d522e510384a24ea0c1cb4e57a5a.png) **Result:** The serial-status list is on screen, with the **Status** column available for review. ## Understand the serial-status screen This screen includes a **Status** text field for entering one value and lists serial status values. | Screen element | What it does | |---|---| | **Status** column | Identifies each serial-status value in the list. | | **Status** field | Accepts the serial-status text in the new or edit form. | | **New** | Opens the new-item form when the new-item action is available. | | **Refresh** | Refreshes the list. | | **Settings** | Opens the list settings control. | The **Status** field is required. The list displays the **Status** column. ## Add, edit, or remove a serial status Use this section when you need to maintain one value in the serial-status list. ### Add a serial status Use the add path when a new reference value is needed. **Prerequisites** - The serial-status list has loaded. - Your subscription includes the configured feature. - New-item permission is available. **Steps** 1. Select **New**. 2. In the new-item form, enter the serial-status text in **Status**. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** The new serial status is submitted from the form. ### Edit a serial status Use the edit path when an existing reference value needs to change. **Prerequisites** - The serial-status list has loaded. - Edit permission is available. **Steps** 1. Select the edit control in the row for the serial status you want to change. 2. Change the value in **Status**. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** The changed serial status is submitted from the edit form. ### Remove a serial status Use the delete path only when more than one serial-status item exists. > **Note:** Keep at least one serial-status item in the list. **Prerequisites** - The serial-status list has loaded. - Delete permission is available. - More than one serial-status item exists. **Steps** 1. Select the delete control in the row for the serial status you want to remove. 2. Select **Delete** in the delete menu. **Result:** The selected serial status is submitted for deletion. ## Handle access and action branches The controls available on this page depend on subscription access, permissions, list state, and the number of items in the list. | If… | Then… | |---|---| | The subscription does not include the configured feature | The serial-status list and its page controls do not appear. | | New-item permission is unavailable | **New** does not appear. | | Edit permission is unavailable | The edit control does not appear. | | Delete permission is unavailable | The delete control does not appear. | | The list has one item | Keep that item in the list. | | The list has more than one item | The delete path is available. | | The list is still loading | Wait until the list appears before selecting **New** or an edit/delete control. | Use the condition that matches your list before choosing a maintenance path. ## When validation or deletion fails Use the message shown on screen to choose the corrective action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Field is required` | Enter a value before saving. | | `Status is required` | Enter a value in **Status** before saving. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from **Status**, then save again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Delete** to continue, or **Cancel** to stop. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Return to the list and check the changed **Status** value. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Return to the list and check the new row. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Return to the list. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the item while saved data relates to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Keep the item and return to the list. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep one serial-status item in the list. | After correcting the issue, return to the maintenance path that matches the action you were taking. ## After maintaining a serial status After you submit a valid form, continue at the reference list and check the **Status** column. Use [Reference list data](reference-list-data.md) for broader reference-list guidance, or return to [Configuration](configuration-home.md) for another configuration area. For a related reference entity, open [Reference category](configuration-reference-list-reference-category-view.md). **Result:** You are back at the reference-data area and can continue with another configuration task. # Sales and backlog widgets ## Sales and backlog widgets Sales and backlog widgets are dashboard views for monitoring sales activity, backlog, booking, team, branch, and due-date work. The catalog groups related views so you can choose the widget that answers the business question you are working on. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach the dashboard and locate the configured rows | [Find the dashboard widgets](#find-the-dashboard-widgets) | | Understand how the widget families are grouped | [Understand the widget catalog](#understand-the-widget-catalog) | | Change a widget's displayed view or selection | [Use widget controls](#use-widget-controls) | | Understand why a widget or action appears conditionally | [Handle widget availability and branches](#handle-widget-availability-and-branches) | | Diagnose an unsuccessful action or an unavailable row | [When a widget or action does not work](#when-a-widget-or-action-does-not-work) | | Learn about the general dashboard surface | Dashboard overview | | Review the broader widget selection | Dashboard widget catalog | ![Dashboard rows and the visible sales, booking, team, and branch widget labels](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Sign in with access to the dashboard. - Know which business question you want to answer: sales activity, backlog, booking, team, branch, or due-date work. - Work from a dashboard whose selected widgets and display options are already configured. - If a widget is subscription-gated, use a dashboard where that widget is available. The dashboard page is available from your dashboard access. The visible rows depend on the selected widget set, the available dashboard options, and the chart selection that matches each widget. Subscription availability also changes which widget surface appears. A subscription-gated widget is available only when the current dashboard access allows it. ## Find the dashboard widgets Use the dashboard to find configured widget rows. **Steps** 1. Open the dashboard page. 2. Locate the configured rows by their visible widget titles, such as **Booking This Year**, **Teams Booking vs. Target**, **Branch Booking vs. Target This Year**, or **Branch Running Offers**. ![Configured dashboard rows with widget titles and sort controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/420ccaabe5b7987c5c6d91a5113df44f.png) **Result:** The dashboard page opens with the configured widget rows on screen. Use the visible rows to understand the widget families before changing a view. ## Understand the widget catalog The widget catalog is a grouped set of dashboard views. Each family answers a different monitoring question, while the visible rows depend on the dashboard configuration. | Family | Use it to look at… | | --- | --- | | Sales widgets | Sales activity and sales comparisons | | Backlog widgets | Work remaining in the backlog | | Booking widgets | Booking totals, targets, and achievement | | Teams widgets | Team booking and running-offer views | | Branch widgets | Branch tendency, booking, and running-offer views | | Due-date widgets | Items approaching or passing a due date | The dashboard surface contains a widget grid. The available grid information does not provide reader-facing field labels, so use the headers and titles you can see on your configured dashboard rather than internal names. The current dashboard surface visibly includes **Booking This Year**, **Teams Booking vs. Target**, and **Branch Booking vs. Target This Year**. ## Use widget controls Use widget controls to change the view within a configured widget or manage the widget selection. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the dashboard page. - The relevant widget is present in the configured dashboard. - For widget selection, the dashboard is in its edit state and the widget-selection surface is open. **Steps** 1. Choose the option that answers your question. | If you need to… | Choose… | | --- | --- | | See the company view in the booking-today chart | **Only My Company** | | Use equivalent booking as the basis | **Equivalent** | | Include forecast data | **Including Forecast** | | Filter the account hit-rate view to sales jobs | **Only Sales Jobs** | | Use commission invoices in the backlog-payment view | **Commission Invoices** | | Use sales invoices in the backlog-payment view | **Sales Invoices** | | Show current offers | **Only Current Offers** | | Show budget offers | **Budget Offers** | | Show firm offers | **Firm Offers** | | Use a product-type breakdown | **Product Types** | | Show the sales-team breakdown | **Sales Teams** | 2. Apply the additional action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Choose or read… | | --- | --- | | Read the booking series | **Target**, **Total**, and **Achieved** | | Select every available widget | **Select all** | | Remove the selected widget in edit mode | **Remove widget from tab** | | Sort a branch or principal booking view | **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, or **Sort by Achievement** | **Result:** The selected widget remains on the dashboard with the chosen view, filter, series, or selection state. If an expected option is absent, check the conditions in the next section. ## Handle widget availability and branches A widget appears when its selected widget entry, dashboard options, and matching chart selection allow it to appear. An edit-only menu appears only in edit mode, and a subscription-gated widget uses the subscription branch for the current dashboard access. **Steps** 1. Check the widget title and its visible options before choosing a filter or series. 2. Choose only the controls shown for that widget, such as **Including Forecast** for a forecast comparison or **Only Sales Jobs** for the account hit-rate view. 3. If the dashboard has no configured dashboard, follow the on-screen instruction to contact your administrator. **Result:** You work with the widget options that are available for the selected dashboard view. If an action returns a message, use the message text in the next section to choose your next move. ## When a widget or action does not work Use the message text and the widget's visible condition to decide what to do next. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The dashboard action completed successfully. | Continue with the updated dashboard view. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The dashboard action returned an error. | Check the widget selection and available dashboard options, then retry the action. | | A widget option is absent | That option is conditional on the selected widget, edit state, chart selection, or subscription availability. | Work with the options visible for the current widget. | The dashboard read-only surface showed no dialog, confirmation message, validation message, or error message. It stayed on the dashboard page. ## Continue from the dashboard widgets After identifying the widget family you need, continue with the page that owns the next question: - Dashboard overview explains the general dashboard surface. - Dashboard widget catalog covers the broader widget-selection reference. - Pipeline and status widgets covers pipeline, status, account, bid, forecast, order, and visit families outside this page's grouped catalog. - Management report widgets covers management-report families outside this page's scope. Continue with the relevant dashboard reference after you have identified the view you need. # Sales job items ## Sales job items A sales-job item is a row that records the product content of the job. Item work sits in the sales flow that moves through its sales stages and into fulfillment. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the job that contains the item rows | [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | | See how the item area fits into the complete record | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | | Add or price a row | [Add item rows](#add-item-rows) | | Review delivery and commercial values | [Price the item and review delivery details](#price-the-item-and-review-delivery-details) | | Follow the job after item work | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Continue from an order toward delivery | [From orders through fulfillment](doc:from-orders-to-delivered) | | Review cost and margin information | [Job profitability record](doc:job-profitability-record) | ## Before you start Have the sales job open and ready to edit. The record uses **Salesperson Responsible** and **Product Type** as required fields, and the item area contains the product description, unit, and quantity. The record can also show additional job details; the visible fields and required markers depend on the current panel and company configuration. Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters here | |---|---| | A sales job in the edit record | Item rows belong to the sales-job record. | | The client, vendor, salesperson, and product type | These are the record choices shown with the item area. | | The product description, unit, and quantity | These are the item-grid values used to describe and measure a row. | | Permission to edit the record | The item controls and save actions depend on edit access. | | The job's current stage | The stage changes which panels and item actions apply. | The record can also show **Save** and **Save and Close**. The item panel may expose fields that depend on company configuration, so use the fields and required markers shown on your screen. Open the relevant Inquiry, Offer, or Order panel and expand it before you work with its item rows. If the panel is collapsed, its item controls are not visible. ## Find and open the sales job The inquiry list is the starting point for opening a sales job. Choose the tab that matches the work you need to open. | Work to open | Tab | |---|---| | All listed sales jobs | **All** | | Early opportunity work | **Potentials** | | Inquiry work | **Inquiries** | | Offer work | **Offers** | | Order work | **Orders** | | Archived work | **Archived** | | Jobs needing a customer survey | **Job Missing Customer Survey** | Prerequisites - You know which saved sales job to open. Steps 1. Open the inquiry list from the Sales workspace. 2. Choose the path that matches your work. | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Open a saved sales job | Select its row and wait for the sales-job record to open. | | Create a new potential | Select **Add new**. | 3. If you chose **Add new**, select **Potentials**. ![Use the inquiry-list tabs and columns to choose the sales job.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/96026c87bdca3fcc48d361cf43de599b.png) **Result:** The saved sales-job record or the new potential form opens. ## Understand the item surface The item surface is the part of the sales-job record where each row describes product content. The record view shows the columns **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. The record also shows **Save** and **Save and Close**. The item work connects to several areas of the record: | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | Item grid | Add, describe, measure, and select item rows. | | Offer details | Review item prices, discounts, totals, and delivery values. | | Order details | Review order delivery values and order-stage restrictions. | | Cost calculation | Review purchase price and other direct cost information. | | Margin by items | Review item margin and price actions. | An item mode is the choice between **Package** and **Unitized**. The item controls also include **+ Item** and **Reset Item** where the surface offers them. The available item mode and the values initially shown depend on the job state and the fields available on the surface. ![Recognize the item columns and save controls on the sales-job record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c2dbf65806d7cf21eaeb65e353bf348c.png) ## Add item rows Use an item row to state what product is part of the job, which unit measures it, and how much is needed. The item description is required. The quantity accepts values from `0.1` through the configured maximum. Prerequisites - The sales-job edit record is open. - You know the product description, unit, and quantity to enter. Steps 1. In the items grid, select **Item**. 2. In **Item Description**, select the product for the new row. 3. In **Unit**, select the unit for the row. 4. In **Qty**, enter a value from `0.1` through the configured maximum. 5. Choose the item mode that the surface offers. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Record an item as an individual, measured row | **Unitized** | | Record an item as a grouped package | **Package** | 6. Select **Save**. 7. When working from a saved new potential, select **Receive inquiry** to continue the inquiry flow. ![Add an item row after opening the sales-job record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/de632cef3d9a1ec7b2b16b314218dec0.png) **Result:** The item row remains in the item grid with its **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty** values. For a new Unitized Inquiry, Offer, or Order row, the starting quantity is `1` and the starting unit price is `0`. For the worked request, enter quantity `40` for the DN150 electric valve actuators at the quantity step. ## Price the item and review delivery details Pricing tells you the commercial value of the item; delivery details tell you how the job carries that item toward fulfillment. Where the pricing fields are available, the area includes **Unit Price**, **Item Price**, **Discount limit (%)**, **Discount (%)**, and **Currency**. Offer and order details also include **Delivery Time** and **Delivery Term**. Prerequisites - An item row is present. - You have the commercial values and delivery details to enter or review. Steps 1. In **Unit Price**, enter or review the price for one unit. 2. In **Discount (%)**, enter or review the item discount. 3. Review **Item Price**. 4. Review **Currency**. 5. In **Delivery Time**, enter or review the delivery period. 6. In **Delivery Term**, select or review the delivery term. 7. Open the cost or margin area you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review purchase-price information | **Purchase Price** | | Review other direct costs | **Other Direct Cost** | | Release item prices | **Release Prices** | The delivery and commercial fields can be required only where your company configures them. The commission and margin fields appear in their respective popups; the commission fields include **Percentage**, and the margin fields include **Agreed Margin Amount**. **Result:** The item row shows the available pricing and delivery values for the current sales-job stage. ### Use Unitized and Packages lines Unitized and Packages are item types that change which commercial values the Offer and Order grids accept for a line. The Inquiry grid does not offer the type switch. | Item type | Values available in the Offer or Order grid | |---|---| | **Unitized** | Unit, quantity, unit price, discount, calculated total, and currency where those columns apply. | | **Packages** | Total price remains available; unit, quantity, unit price, and discount are cleared and disabled. | For a Unitized line, the calculated total is unit price multiplied by quantity, less the discount. For a Packages line with a positive total price, the panel calculation uses quantity `1`, copies the total to unit price, and resets discount to `0`. Selecting a product disables the **Unit** cell. When the grid is otherwise editable, the total-price cell remains available for a Packages line. ## Handle item branches and locks The same item row can behave differently as the job progresses. The item grid can become read-only according to the offer stage, order stage, edit mode, and approval state. Purchase-package and purchase-order activity can also prevent later item changes. | Condition | What to check on screen | |---|---| | The job is before Order | Work with the pre-order item and pricing fields shown for that stage. | | The offer or order has progressed | Check whether the row controls are available before changing a value. | | A purchase package exists | Treat product editing and deletion as restricted. | | A purchase order exists | Treat product editing as restricted. | | The item is ready for shipment or has entered fulfillment | Treat deletion as restricted. | | The item is linked to an invoice or delivery work | Continue in the owning invoice or delivery page. | An Order with invoices cannot accept a new item line. In that Order grid, **Qty**, total price, discount, and tax are read-only. Prerequisites - The record is open at the stage where you need to change the item. - You can see the item controls for that stage. Steps 1. Check the current stage shown in the sales-job record. 2. Check whether the item row controls are available. 3. Edit an available item field, such as **Qty**. 4. Select **Save**. **Result:** The row remains editable when the current stage and related work permit the change; otherwise the applicable lock message identifies the blocked operation. ## Follow item values into delivery and invoices Item values continue into downstream work. A partial delivery reduces the original item's quantity and creates a second item for the shipped quantity. Invoice creation copies quantity, unit, unit price, discount, tax, and total into invoice items. > **Note:** A new item in an Order can also update bill-of-material details; a changed quantity can > notify the project manager when the item has bill-of-material products. ## Save the item changes and resolve validation errors Saving checks the item rows and returns a message when the change succeeds or when a rule blocks it. Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. Prerequisites - The item row contains the values you want to keep. - You can select **Save** or **Save and Close**. Steps 1. Select **Save**. 2. Look for `Your request was completed successfully` after the save. 3. Select the corrective action for the message shown on screen. | Message | Corrective action | |---|---| | `This field is required ` | Complete **Item Description**. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Correct **Qty**. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value in the affected price or cost field. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Correct the zero quantity in **Qty**. | | `One or more items has no unit` | Select a value in **Unit**. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add an item to the inquiry. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add an item to the offer. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add an item to the order. | | ` Package must have at least one item` | Add an item to the package. | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Add at least one product before saving. | | `One of products has no quantity` | Enter a quantity for each product. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields shown on the form. | | `Check validation` | Correct the validation indicated on the current form. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Use the branch permitted for the action. | | `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.` | Reduce the maximum discount to the negotiation margin. | | `No remaining items. All items have been selected` | Continue with the selected items. | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Select one or more item rows before creating the RFQ. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Keep the item row and continue without deleting it. | | `Sales order is archived` | Do not add the product to the archived order. | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Reduce the booked quantity to the required quantity. | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Leave the product unchanged after the purchase package exists. | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Leave the product unchanged while it is in purchasing. | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Leave the product unchanged after the PO exists. | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Select a product that is not already in the BOM. | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Keep the first variant. | | `Please select one product` | Select one product. | | `Action not allowed` | Stop the action and continue with an available control. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and try again. | | `Required Receiving Date` | Enter the required receiving date. | | `Required Receiving After` | Enter the required receiving-after value. | | `Required Offer Type` | Select the required offer type. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Enter the bid due date. | | `Error saving custom fields` | Correct the custom fields and save again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the current fields and try the action again. | **Result:** The item changes are saved when the success message appears; otherwise the displayed message identifies the value or item condition to correct. ## Continue the sales job After item work, the sales job continues through its stage flow or through a related work area. Continue complete lifecycle, purchasing, invoicing, delivery, or profitability work in the owning area. | Continue with… | Open | |---|---| | Stage movement | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Offer work | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Order work | [Orders](doc:orders) | | Order-to-delivery work | [From orders through fulfillment](doc:from-orders-to-delivered) | | Purchase-package work | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | Invoice work | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | Cost and margin work | [Job profitability record](doc:job-profitability-record) | **Result:** You know which sales-job stage or related work area to open next. # User layouts ## User layouts at a glance User layouts are saved presentations of a list: they determine which columns you see and how the list is displayed. The User layouts list is part of the configuration area. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find the list | [Find the User layouts list](#find-the-user-layouts-list) | | Read fields and display controls | [Understand the list and its fields](#understand-the-list-and-its-fields) | | Maintain a layout | [Choose and maintain a layout](#choose-and-maintain-a-layout) | | Adjust display or export | [Adjust the display and export the list](#adjust-the-display-and-export-the-list) | | Handle an unavailable action or message | [Handle unavailable actions and messages](#handle-unavailable-actions-and-messages) | | Continue from a selected layout | [What to do next](#what-to-do-next) | | Return to the configuration layout area | [Default layouts](doc:configuration-default-layouts) | | Edit a saved layout in detail | [Edit user layout](doc:configuration-users-layouts-edit-record) | | Personalize other list workspaces | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) | When you know which controls you need, review the conditions before opening the list. ## Before you start The list and its controls depend on the selected layout and the display settings available to you. | Before you start | What to expect | | --- | --- | | The list area is available | The list appears only when a selected layout is present. | | The list has loaded | The right-side action controls appear with the list. | | Table-layout controls are available | **Table Layout** and its choices appear only when table-layout access is available. | | Export is available | **Export** requires the export feature and remains disabled when export is unavailable. | | A row is editable | Its edit link appears in the row. | | Display settings are configured | **Filter Row** and **Group Panel** appear only when their corresponding settings are available. | With these conditions in place, find the list in the configuration navigation. ## Find the User layouts list From this list, review a saved presentation before opening it for detailed editing. **Prerequisites** - You can open the configuration route. **Steps** 1. In the configuration navigation, select **Users layouts**. 2. Confirm that the **Users layouts** tab is selected. 3. Select **Filter by:** to open the filter area. The list includes a status selection and a username text field when the selected layout is present. ![Locate the Users layouts tab, filter entry point, and list area.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f6af8ec29d22551646d78a7b1f8f918e.png) **Result:** The **Users layouts** list is on screen with its filter entry point. With the list open, review its fields, columns, and display controls. ## Understand the list and its fields The User layouts screen combines filters, a data grid (the table of results), and display settings so you can work from the columns in the selected layout. | Field or choice | Type and rule | What it controls | | --- | --- | --- | | Status selection | Select box; optional | Filters the list by status. | | Username text field | Text box; optional | Filters the list by username. | | **Layout name** | Text box; optional | Names a new layout. | | **Expand column width** | Check box; optional | Toggles automatic column width. | | **Filter Row** | Check box; optional | Shows or hides the grid filter row. | | **Group Panel** | Check box; optional | Shows or hides the grid group panel. | | File input in the shared popup | File input; optional | Accepts an uploaded file when that shared surface is used. | The data grid uses the columns in the selected layout. Column names and their order therefore follow the layout currently in use. The grid supports paging, filtering, grouping, and sorting, remembers the list settings during the session, and uses a page size of 30. The row filter and group panel appear when their corresponding display settings are available. The grid's **Columns Chooser** is disabled. With the list structure clear, choose and maintain a layout. ## Choose and maintain a layout Use a layout when you want a saved column presentation for the User layouts list. **Prerequisites** - The selected layout and the **Table Layout** menu are available. **Steps** 1. Select **Table Layout**. | If you need to… | Complete this step | | --- | --- | | Use an available saved presentation | Select the required layout choice. | | Start a new presentation | Select **Save New Layout**. | | Change the current presentation | Select **Update Current**. | | Remove the current presentation | Select **Delete Current**. | ![Choose a saved layout or open a layout maintenance action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f56b7f0d0b9bc0dbd6c8cf715adba21a.png) **Update Current** and **Delete Current** are disabled for the standard layout. ![Enter a name for a new layout and save or cancel.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4f2242197831cb33e657c763010a779c.png) ### If you selected **Save New Layout** 1. Enter the name in **Layout name**. 2. Select **Save**. **Result:** The new layout is submitted from the layout menu. ### If you selected **Update Current** **Result:** The current layout is updated from the layout menu. ### If you selected **Delete Current** 1. Review **Are you sure?**. 2. Select **Delete** to confirm the deletion. **Result:** The deletion confirmation closes after the selected response. ### If you opened the deletion confirmation but do not want to remove the layout 1. Select **Cancel**. **Result:** The deletion confirmation closes without removing the layout. **Result:** The selected layout remains active, or the layout maintenance surface closes after the selected action. After choosing a layout, adjust the list display or open its export choices. ## Adjust the display and export the list Display settings change how the list is shown; export choices determine how the current list data is prepared for export. **Prerequisites** - The User layouts list is open. - The relevant settings are available. **Steps** 1. Select **Settings**. | If you need to… | Complete this step | | --- | --- | | Show or hide row filtering | Select **Filter Row**. | | Show or hide grouping | Select **Group Panel**. | | Start an export | Select **Export**. | | Close export choices without exporting | Select **Export**. | ![Choose a display setting or open Export from Settings.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca7ffc6e1b77f2870addfcf5d0fbaaa9.png) The export surface starts with `Export to Excel`; the other available choice is `Export to PDF`. When the data set is empty, the message `NO Data to Export` appears and the export does not start. ![Choose the export format in the Exporting List dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/adae218a2cf1c349b89f07af0f76d405.png) ### If you selected **Filter Row** **Result:** The row-filter display changes. ### If you selected **Group Panel** **Result:** The group-panel display changes. ### If you selected **Export** to start an export 1. Select an option in **Exporting List:**. 2. Select **Export** to start the export. **Result:** The selected export format is submitted. ### If you selected **Export** to close the choices 1. Select **Cancel**. **Result:** The **Exporting List:** dialog closes without an export. **Result:** The list display reflects the selected setting, or the **Exporting List:** dialog is closed without an export. If a control is unavailable or a message appears, use the handling table before continuing. ## Handle unavailable actions and messages The controls available on this screen depend on the selected layout, display settings, and export availability. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | No fixed set of data-column names | The selected layout determines which headers the list shows. | Read the headers in the selected layout. | | No Import action in Settings | This list does not offer file import from **Settings**. | Use the available settings, or maintain a layout through **Table Layout**. | | No create or delete controls appear in the list | Layout maintenance is available through **Table Layout** rather than the list. | Select **Table Layout**, then use **Save New Layout** or **Delete Current** when available. | | `Error loading accounts` | Account information did not load for the lookup. | Wait until the account information is available, then continue. | | `NO Data to Export` | The list has no data to send to the export dialog. | Use the status or username filters to locate data before exporting again. | | **Export** is disabled | Export is not enabled for your configuration. | Review the list or change its display settings instead. | | The list controls are absent after opening the configuration area | The page is not on the User layouts surface. | Select **Users layouts** from the configuration navigation. | The messages `Job Deleted Successfully`, `Job Ultimately Deleted`, `Server Error`, and `Data Importing completed` belong to other or inactive flows on this surface. They are not actions to use from the User layouts list. When the list work is complete, continue to the selected layout record or return to Default layouts. ## What to do next An opened layout row takes you to the detailed User layout record, where you continue layout editing. **Prerequisites** - The User layouts list contains the row you need. **Steps** 1. Select the required data row to open its layout record. 2. Select **Open in new tab** from the row context menu when you need the layout record in another browser tab. 3. Select **Default layouts** to return to the default-layouts area. **Result:** The selected layout record opens for detailed work, the record opens in a new tab, or the Default layouts area is on screen. # What can you do with PAMS PAMS is an agent-centric CRM for B2B sales operations, connecting sales work with principals, suppliers, purchasing, warehousing, delivery, invoicing, and follow-up work. Use this page to choose the business area that matches your next task. ## What you can do with PAMS PAMS brings the sales operation together from the first inquiry through final delivery. The same flow can include bidding, tenders, procurement, delivery coordination, and commission work. Principal work covers the companies and manufacturers you represent; supplier work covers purchasing coordination and related operational records. The business flow connects customer work with principal, sales, purchasing, and warehouse work: ```mermaid flowchart LR Customer --> Inquiry Inquiry --> Pricing Pricing --> Offer Offer --> Order Order --> Delivery Delivery --> Invoice Invoice --> Payment Inquiry --> MRQ MRQ --> RFQ RFQ --> PurchaseOrder[Purchase Order] PurchaseOrder --> GoodsReceipt[Goods Receipt Note] GoodsReceipt --> Warehouse Warehouse --> Delivery ``` Use the orientation table to choose a starting point: | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | understand what PAMS is and how it fits your operation | [What is PAMS](doc:what-is-pams) | | choose the work area for a sales record | [Run the sales and operations flow](#run-the-sales-and-operations-flow) | | open the Home orientation surface | [Open Home](#open-home) | | read the business views on Home | [Read Home](#read-home) | | sort a visible Home view | [Choose a Home sort](#choose-a-home-sort) | | follow a sales job from inquiry to delivery | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | prepare purchasing work from a sales need | [Pricing Quotation overview](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) | | continue warehouse and delivery work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | manage invoices and payments | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | manage shared contacts | [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview) | | manage tasks and activities | [My Desk workspace](doc:my-desk-workspace) | | manage a client or supplier project | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | review reports and performance detail | [Reports hub](doc:reports-hub) | | get help with a notification or unavailable view | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | ## Before you start The Home route requires a signed-in session. Your role and subscription setup determine which Home areas are available, so use the views that appear for your role rather than expecting every Home option to be present. Prerequisites - Have an account that can sign in to PAMS. - Know which business work you need to start: sales, purchasing, warehouse, invoicing, contacts, activities, projects, or performance review. - Expect Home to reflect your role and subscription setup. > **Note:** The views available on Home reflect your role and subscription setup. The Home surface is an orientation surface rather than a record-entry form. The current screen shows three fields, no required markers, and no action buttons. ## Open Home Home is the surface where PAMS brings together the business views available to your role. ![Use the visible Home headings and business readouts to choose your next work area.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Read Home Home is a set of business views that summarise sales flow, bookings, offers, accounts, targets, forecasts, teams, and running work. Read the headings to decide whether you need a detailed sales, purchasing, warehouse, relationship, project, or reporting page. The current Home view includes these areas: | If you are reviewing… | Look for… | | --- | --- | | early sales work | Potentials, Inquiries | | offer and order work | Budget offers, Firm offers, Orders | | booking and target performance | Booking This Year, Target, Achieved, Forecast | | accounts and teams | Accounts in Sales Pipeline, Clients, Principals, Teams Booking vs. Target | | backlog and running offers | Backlog, Teams Running Offer, Branch Running Offers, Principals Running Offers | | trend and performance views | Branch Tendency to Target, Principals Tendency to Target, Branch Booking vs. Target This Year, Principals Booking vs. Target This Year | ![Use the Home headings to identify the sales, booking, offer, account, and performance view you need.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/420ccaabe5b7987c5c6d91a5113df44f.png) The current Home screen also shows **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement**. The three controls have no required marker. The screen has no table columns or loading indicator, and no visible password field. **Result:** You can identify the business view that matches your next task and move to its own procedure without treating Home values as fixed product settings. ## Choose a Home sort Use a Home sort when you want the visible performance view arranged around a different comparison. Prerequisites - Be on Home with the view that contains the sorting controls. Steps 1. Select the sorting choice that matches the comparison you need. | If you want to compare by… | Select | | --- | --- | | booking | **Sort by Booking** | | target | **Sort by Target** | | achievement | **Sort by Achievement** | ![Select the sorting choice shown beside the performance view.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/420ccaabe5b7987c5c6d91a5113df44f.png) **Result:** The selected Home sorting choice is on screen. ## Run the sales and operations flow The sales flow follows work from an inquiry through pricing, an offer, an order, delivery, invoicing, and payment. Related principal work includes principal invoices, incoming payments, and commission invoices. Related supplier work includes material requisitions, requests for quotation, purchase quotations, purchase orders, goods receipts, warehouse work, and delivery. Prerequisites - Know whether the next task concerns a customer, principal, supplier, or internal purchasing hand-off. - Have the business record or request that starts the next part of the flow. Steps 1. Identify the next work area from the task you need to complete. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | move a sales job through its stages | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | continue from an order into delivery | [From orders through delivery](./from-orders-to-deli%76ered.md) | | prepare supplier purchasing work | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | prepare pricing and purchasing quotations | [Pricing Quotation overview](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) | | continue warehouse fulfilment | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | handle invoices and payments | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | 2. Follow the detailed procedure for that work area. **Result:** You are at the procedure for the sales, principal, supplier, purchasing, warehouse, delivery, invoice, or payment work you selected. ## Manage relationships, activities, and projects Relationship work keeps the people and organisations around a business flow available to the team. PAMS describes a shared, searchable contact database, a filtered view of activity across the sales operation, and a connected project flow for clients and suppliers. Prerequisites - Know whether you need a contact, a follow-up activity, a task, or a project workspace. - Know which sales, client, or supplier work the relationship information supports. Steps 1. Choose the workspace that matches the supporting work. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | work with shared contacts | [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview) | | review tasks and activities | [My Desk workspace](doc:my-desk-workspace) | | manage a client or supplier project | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | review a job's comments, files, contacts, or history | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | 2. Use the linked workspace for the supporting work. **Result:** The supporting contact, activity, task, project, document, or history work is open in its own workspace. ## Monitor performance and decide what to do next Use Home to scan performance views, then move to the detailed report or profitability page when the decision needs more detail. PAMS describes equivalent booking values as a way to compare performance where commission rates or margins differ. Its reporting capabilities include booking, target, forecast, invoice, principal, and profitability signals. Steps 1. Read the Home view that matches the decision you need to make. 2. Open the detailed page for that decision. | If you need to… | Open | | --- | --- | | review Home use and widget choices | [Home overview](./%64ashboard-overview.md) | | prepare or read a principal report | [Principal report](doc:principal-report) | | assess job profitability | [Job profitability overview](doc:job-profitability-overview) | | continue invoice and payment work | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | **Result:** The detailed performance, report, profitability, invoice, or payment workspace is open for the next decision. For a Home action that returns a notification, the success text is `Your request was completed successfully`. An error notification reads `An error occurred while processing your request`. Related pages can show these messages: - Principal Report: `Please choose one or more principals`. - Login: `Incorrect username or password`. # Work procedure settings ## Work procedure settings Work procedure settings are branch-level rules for when work requires approval and when saved sales records become non-editable. Use this page to review or change the rules that apply to sales jobs, offers, orders, L/G requests, purchasing, and sales invoicing. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Check what each approval choice controls | [Understand the settings](#understand-the-settings) | | Open the settings for a company branch | [Find and open the settings](#find-and-open-the-settings) | | Change a rule and keep working on the page | [Change and save settings](#change-and-save-settings) | | Choose between saving in place and leaving the page | [Change and save settings](#change-and-save-settings) | | Review previous changes | [Review changes and continue](#review-changes-and-continue) | | Continue with sales workflow rules | **Sales jobs lifecycle** | | Continue with purchasing workflow rules | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Continue with L/G workflow rules | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Continue with invoicing workflow rules | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | The page is a reference surface for fields, workflow uses, and update actions. It does not create a business record. ## Before you start **Prerequisites** | Have or know… | Why it matters here | | --- | --- | | Access to the Work procedure settings feature | The settings surface appears when the feature is included. | | Permission to edit settings | **Save** and **Save and Close** are available for changed data only when edit permission applies. | | The company branch whose rules you need to review | Each branch has its own settings panel. | | The approval choice for each activity you are reviewing | The page has separate choices for sales, non-editable mode, L/G, purchasing, and invoicing work. | | The person who confirms an L/G requirement or financial viability, where applicable | **User entitled to confirm** is required when its corresponding recommendation choice is **Yes**. | The two **User entitled to confirm** selectors are conditional. One follows the L/G requirement recommendation; the other follows the L/G financial viability recommendation. The corresponding **User entitled to confirm** field appears when that recommendation is **Yes** and carries a required marker. ## Find and open the settings Work procedure settings are opened from the configuration area at the page route `/configuration/process-approvall`. **Prerequisites** - You have the access described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). - You know which company branch you need to review. **Steps** 1. Open **Work procedure settings** from the configuration area. 2. Select the company-branch heading or its expand control to open the branch panel. If no branch is already open, the page opens the logged-in user's branch when the approval list loads. ![The Work procedure settings screen with its branch panels and page controls visible](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/473c188e6f7bc1af09915d82515c2dbf.png) **Result:** The Work procedure settings screen is open at `/configuration/process-approvall`, with the selected company-branch panel ready for review. ## Understand the settings Each company branch has settings that answer one question: should this activity use the approval rule, and should the related saved sales record be protected from editing? The page groups the choices by workflow use rather than by a business record. The main settings groups are **Apply reviewing**, **Apply approval for booking**, and **Non-editable mode (Disabled fields)**. The page also contains **Apply approval for L/G**, **Apply approval for purchasing**, and **Apply approval for invoicing**. ### Approval and editing choices | Field | Available choices | Required marker | | --- | --- | --- | | **for sales job.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | Booking approval before submission and acceptance | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for regetting to submit offers.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for submiting offers.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for extending offers.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for cancelling requests.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for losing offers.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for rejecting orders.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **for cancelling orders.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **Stop edit inquiries sent to principals.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **Stop edit approved offers.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **Stop edit valid offers.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **Stop edit approved orders.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **Stop edit valid orders.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | | **Stop edit archived jobs.** | **Always**, **Never**, **Only Sales Jobs** | None shown | ### L/G, purchasing, and invoicing choices | Field | Available choices | Required marker | | --- | --- | --- | | **for requests of new L/G** | **Yes, all L/Gs**, **No**, **Only if my Company is the issuer** | None shown | | L/G requirement recommendation | **Yes**, **No** | None shown | | **User entitled to confirm** for the L/G requirement | Searchable user selection | Required when the recommendation is **Yes** | | L/G financial viability recommendation | **Yes**, **No** | None shown | | **User entitled to confirm** for L/G financial viability | Searchable user selection | Required when the recommendation is **Yes** | | Purchasing approval | **Yes**, **No** | None shown | | Invoicing approval | **Yes**, **No** | None shown | The screen also includes **Last Modifications**. Its buttons are **Save**, **Save and Close**, and an icon-only button titled **Refresh**. This page has no grid columns and does not create, delete, import, or export business records. ![The approval and editing radio choices available on the settings screen](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/473c188e6f7bc1af09915d82515c2dbf.png) ![The workflow settings groups and save controls for a branch](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/473c188e6f7bc1af09915d82515c2dbf.png) ## Change and save settings Change one or more branch rules when needed. **Prerequisites** - You have edit permission. - The required company-branch panel is open. - You know the choices you want to apply. **Steps** 1. Select the required choice in each field you need to change. 2. If an L/G recommendation is **Yes**, select a person in **User entitled to confirm**. 3. Choose one save path: | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Save the changed settings and continue on this page | **Save** | | Save the changed settings and leave this page | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The settings are validated and posted. **Save** keeps the page available for further work and refreshes the history; **Save and Close** leaves the page after the save succeeds. A successful save displays `Your company work procedure settings has been saved successfully`. ## Handle setting branches The controls available to you depend on whether the feature is included, whether you can edit, and which recommendation choices you select. **Prerequisites** - The Work procedure settings page is open. - You know whether you are reviewing or changing a branch. **Steps** 1. Use the applicable branch below. | If… | Then… | | --- | --- | | The feature is included | Review the settings surface and its branch panels. | | The feature is not included | Use the subscription-upgrade surface and select **Back** to return. | | You can edit and data has changed | Use **Save** or **Save and Close**. | | You cannot edit | Select the control at the upper-right corner of the branch-panel header to leave through the read-only path. | | The L/G requirement recommendation is **Yes** | Select a person in **User entitled to confirm**. | | The L/G requirement recommendation is **No** | **User entitled to confirm** is not required. | | The L/G financial viability recommendation is **Yes** | Select a person in **User entitled to confirm**. | | The L/G financial viability recommendation is **No** | **User entitled to confirm** is not required. | | When you have changed data and select the control at the upper-right corner of the branch-panel header | The unsaved-change popup offers **Don't Save** and **Save**. | When **for requests of new L/G** is changed to **No**, the two L/G recommendation choices are cleared. **Result:** The page presents the branch, permission, recommendation, and leaving path that applies to your current settings. ## When saving or loading goes wrong Use the message text to identify which operation needs attention. | Message | When it appears | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required **User entitled to confirm** selection is missing after its recommendation is **Yes**. | Select a user in **User entitled to confirm**, then use the save procedure. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Loading the approval settings does not complete successfully. | Return to `/configuration/process-approvall` and open the required branch again. | | `Server Error` | Saving the settings returns a server error. | Review the selected values and use **Save** again. | ## Review changes and continue **Last Modifications** is the audit history for the settings. It provides a chronological sequence of user actions and displays dated change rows. The audit-log text reads: `The audit log provides you with a chronological sequence of actions performed by the users`. **Prerequisites** - A company identifier is loaded. - The settings screen is open. **Steps** 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Review the dated change rows. 3. Continue with the workflow that uses the rule you reviewed: | If you reviewed… | Continue with… | | --- | --- | | Sales approval or editing rules | **Sales jobs lifecycle** | | Purchasing approval | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | L/G approval or recommendations | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Sales-invoicing approval | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | ![The Last Modifications audit history with its chronological text and dated rows](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/473c188e6f7bc1af09915d82515c2dbf.png) **Result:** The audit history is open, and you can continue in the workflow whose approval rule you reviewed. # Attachment categories ## Attachment categories An attachment category is a named entry in the Attachment categories list. Use **Attachment categories** to maintain these entries under **Attachment**. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Check the access and setup conditions | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open the list | [Find the attachment categories list](#find-the-attachment-categories-list) | | Read the field and form | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add, review, remove, or export an entry | [Add, review, and remove a category](#add-review-and-remove-a-category) | | Respond to a different surface | [Handle surface variations](#handle-surface-variations) | | Resolve a message | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Continue with configuration | [What to do next](#what-to-do-next) | ## Before you start Open **Attachment categories** from the configuration area. The attachment subscription condition determines whether the list or the upgrade surface appears. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Use a subscription that includes attachments. - Have permission for the action you want to use. - Have the category name you want to enter or change. The columns and available actions can vary with your configuration. Work from the controls and columns visible on your screen. ## Find the attachment categories list Open the list before choosing a category-maintenance action. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. Open **Attachment categories**. 2. Confirm that **Name** is the list column. 3. Confirm that **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** are visible. **Result:** The Attachment categories list is open with the **Name** column and its rows. ![The Attachment categories list with its Name column, row count, and controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5fcc5a6d527b7c15d31efa4e49948bd0.png) ## Understand the list and form The category form uses **Name** for the entry name. The new-entry form shows **Name** as a text box with a required marker and uses **OK** as its commit button. | Field or surface | What you see | Use | |---|---|---| | **Name** | Required text box | Enter the category name. | | **OK** | Form button | Commit the new-entry form. | | Column headers | No header row | Use the visible **Name** column and row controls. | ## Add, review, and remove a category Use the branch that matches the maintenance action you need. **Prerequisites** - The Attachment categories list is open. - You have permission for the action you intend to use. - You have the category name to enter or change. ### Create a category **Steps** 1. Select **New**. 2. Enter the category name in **Name**. 3. Select **OK** to commit the form. **Result:** The new-entry surface is titled `New Attachment categories`. The available success message is `Data saved Successfully`. ![The new Attachment categories form with the required Name field and OK button](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ce9fa93118267d4e4ae0feddd3c78c5b.png) ### Review a category **Steps** 1. Select the row's edit control. 2. Review the value in **Name**. **Result:** The existing category is open for review. ### Change a category **Steps** 1. Select the row's edit control. 2. Enter the changed value in **Name**. 3. Select **OK** to commit the change. **Result:** The available update message is `Data updated Successfully`. ### Delete a category **Steps** 1. Select the row delete control beside the row. 2. Choose the action that matches your decision. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Keep the row | **Cancel** | | Confirm removal | **Delete** | **Result:** The row remains when you select **Cancel**. A successful removal uses `Data Deleted Successfully`. ### Export the list **Steps** 1. Select **Export**. **Result:** The export choices open. ## Handle surface variations The list and its available actions depend on subscription and permission settings. **Prerequisites** - The configuration area is open. **Steps** 1. Choose the visible surface that matches your setup. | If you see… | Do this | |---|---| | The configuration grid | Continue with the list action you need. | | The subscription-upgrade surface | Use a subscription that includes attachments. | | **New** | Open the new-entry form. | | The row's edit control | Open that row for review or change. | | The row delete control | Open the row's delete menu. | | **Refresh** and **Settings** | Use the controls currently visible on the list. | **Result:** The surface matching your subscription, permissions, and visible list controls is open for the next action. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message text to choose the next action. **Prerequisites** - A maintenance message is displayed. **Steps** 1. Follow the instruction in the displayed message. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Cancel** to keep the row, or **Delete** to confirm removal. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Follow the displayed message. | | `Failed to Delete` | Follow the displayed message. | | `Must have at least one item` | Follow the displayed message. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Follow the displayed message. | | A message after saving | Follow the displayed message. | **Result:** You have the action indicated by the message and can continue with the applicable maintenance branch. ## What to do next After reviewing or maintaining a category, remain on the Attachment categories list to review the rows currently shown. Continue with [Configuration home](doc:configuration-home) when you need another configuration area. # Comments and tasks on a sales job ## Comments and tasks on a sales job A sales job is the workspace for one sales opportunity throughout its working life. Its **Comments** area keeps the written conversation with the job, while **Tasks** keeps follow-up work linked to that job. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Record or reply to written job discussion | [Keep the job discussion](#keep-the-job-discussion) | | Review tasks linked to the saved job | [Maintain an open follow-up task](#maintain-an-open-follow-up-task) | | Understand which tabs and fields are available | [Understand the comments and tasks surface](#understand-the-comments-and-tasks-surface) | | Create a new sales job | [Create a sales job](doc:create-sales-job) | | Work with the full task form | [Create a task](doc:create-task) | | Continue with activities and files | [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Have a saved sales job. The **Comments** and **Tasks** tabs require the job to have an ID. - Have the Comments or Tasks feature available to your account. - For task actions, work in the matching branch and use the role or ownership required by the action. - For an existing task, be its owner when the action is limited to the owner. - Have the discussion or follow-up information you want to record ready before you open the editor. The available task columns come from the list layout used for your account. Work from the headers that appear in your list rather than expecting every list to have the same columns. > **Note:** The **Comments** and **Tasks** tabs belong to a saved job. Open the record before > looking for discussion or job-linked tasks. ## Open a saved sales job A saved sales job is the record that carries the **Comments** discussion and **Tasks** follow-up work. The **Comments** and **Tasks** tabs belong to the sales-job record, not to the new-record form. **Prerequisites** - Know which saved sales job you need to open. - If you are creating a new job instead, use [Create a sales job](doc:create-sales-job). **Steps** 1. Open the saved sales job at `/sales/edit/:id`. 2. Confirm that the sales-job workspace displays the **Comments** and **Tasks** tabs. ![Saved sales-job workspace with the Comments and Tasks tabs](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0fb140b34ff7a6ba28f7e5e31830966a.png) **Result:** The saved sales-job workspace is open and ready for you to select **Comments** or **Tasks**. ## Understand the comments and tasks surface This surface places discussion and job-linked follow-up work beside the sales-job record. The available tabs are **Comments**, **Tasks**, **Activities**, **Attachment**, **Contacts**, **LGs**, **Pricing Quotations**, and **Last Modifications**. The **Comments** surface provides a rich-text editor and **Post**. Its editor toolbar includes the following controls: | Editing need | Control | |---|---| | Reverse or repeat an edit | **Undo**, **Redo** | | Format text | **Bold**, **Italic**, **Strikethrough**, **Underline**, **Font Color** | | Format lists | **Ordered List**, **Bullet List** | | Remove formatting | **Clear Formatting** | The **Tasks** surface displays a task list filtered to the saved sales job. | Area | What you can work with | |---|---| | Comments | Rich-text discussion, **Post**, replies, and your own comment controls | | Tasks | Job-linked task rows and the list views **All**, **My Tasks**, and **View completed tasks** | | Main job fields | **Order chance**, **Status**, **Branch**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **End User Account**, **File Number**, and **Expected Order Date** | | Task form fields | **Priority**, task title, **Description**, **Start Date**, **Due Date**, and **Task Progress**. Follow is not available here. | | Task columns seen in the list | **Title**, **Owner**, **Start date**, **Due date**, **Status**, and **Importance** | In this workspace, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, and **File Number** carried required markers. **Order chance**, **Status**, **Branch**, **End User Account**, and **Expected Order Date** did not carry required markers. ![Tasks tab with the job-linked task list and visible columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f06bdaffa1ecc0c3af4119a1f4ceb70.png) Select **Comments** for discussion and **Tasks** for job-linked follow-up work. ## Keep the job discussion The job discussion is the written conversation associated with the current sales job. Use it to leave context that colleagues returning to the job can read later. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved sales job. - The **Comments** tab is available. - Have the comment text ready. **Steps** 1. Select **Comments**. 2. Enter the discussion in the rich-text editor. 3. Select **Post**. 4. Confirm that the new comment appears in the displayed conversation. **Result:** The comment is associated with the current sales job and appears in its conversation. ### Reply to a comment **Prerequisites** - Open the **Comments** tab. - Have a top-level comment from another person to answer. **Steps** 1. Select **Reply** on the comment. 2. Enter the response. 3. Select **Reply**. **Result:** The response is added beneath the comment. ### Edit your own comment **Prerequisites** - Open the **Comments** tab. - Have one of your own comments available. **Steps** 1. Select **Edit** on your comment. 2. Enter the revised text in the comment editor. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** Your edited comment is saved in the job discussion. ### Delete your own comment **Prerequisites** - Open the **Comments** tab. - Have one of your own comments available. **Steps** 1. Select **Delete** on your comment. 2. Read the confirmation. 3. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The selected comment deletion is submitted. The editor does not post when its plain text is empty or contains only spaces. Keep at least one meaningful character in the comment before selecting **Post**. ## Maintain an open follow-up task The **Tasks** tab is the sales job's related-task list. It keeps task rows associated with the current job instead of showing the general task list. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved sales job. - The **Tasks** tab is available. - For task changes, be the task owner when the action requires ownership. **Steps** 1. Select **Tasks**. 2. Review the task rows shown for the current sales job. 3. Select a task row to open that task. 4. Select **View completed tasks** when completed work needs to be included. ![Job-linked task rows and the View completed tasks option](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/6f06bdaffa1ecc0c3af4119a1f4ceb70.png) The embedded list starts on **All**. The task list can show **Title**, **Owner**, **Start date**, **Due date**, **Status**, and **Importance**. A task row opened from the embedded list opens the task in a new browser tab. The full task form contains the following fields: | Field | Rule | |---|---| | **Priority** | Required | | Task title | Required | | **Description** | Optional | | **Start Date** | Required | | **Due Date** | Required and cannot be earlier than **Start Date** | | **Task Progress** | Optional | | Follow | Not available here. | Use [Create a task](doc:create-task) for the full task-creation procedure. **Result:** The task list shows work associated with the saved sales job, and the selected task is open for the next task-specific action. ## Handle availability branches The tabs and task actions change with feature access, role, branch, ownership, and task status. Use the visible tab and action state to choose the applicable route. | Situation | What to use or expect | |---|---| | Comments is available | Select **Comments** to open the job discussion. | | Tasks is available to a non-principal user | Select **Tasks** to open the job-linked task list. | | You are a principal user | The **Tasks** tab is displayed as disabled. | | A task action requires ownership | Work from the task owner's account before selecting the action. | | The task is completed | Completed-task controls are disabled for the completed state. | | You need a task action from another branch | The task activity menu is available only when the branch matches. | | You need a new task from the job | The job-level plus control requires the **Tasks** tab, the matching branch, a non-input-driven record, and permission to create a task. | | You look for Follow | Follow is not available here. | | You need to search comments | Search comments is not available here. | The task list columns depend on your saved list layout. The task list showed **Title**, **Owner**, **Start date**, **Due date**, **Status**, and **Importance**. ## When a comment or task action goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to identify the correction or the page that owns the action. | Class | Message | What to do | |---|---|---| | Validation | `Required Receiving Date` | Complete the receiving-date field on the sales-job items surface. | | Validation | `This field is required` | Complete the required field on the sales-job items surface. | | Validation | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a value within the displayed range. | | Validation | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value. | | Success | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Continue after the custom fields save. | | Success | `Job updated successfully` | Continue with the updated job. | | Success | `Job deleted successfully` | Continue in the sales-job lifecycle page. | | Success | `Job regretted successfully` | Continue in the sales-job lifecycle page. | | Success | `Job cancelled successfully` | Continue in the sales-job lifecycle page. | | Success | `Job missed successfully` | Continue in the sales-job lifecycle page. | | Success | `Job reactivated successfully` | Continue in the sales-job lifecycle page. | | Success | `Converted to offer successfully` | Continue with [Offers](doc:offers). | | Success | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Continue with [Inquiries](doc:inquiries). | | Error | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the action and its conditions before trying again. | | Error | `Error saving custom fields` | Review the custom fields before trying again. | | Error | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Continue with [From orders to delivered](doc:from-orders-to-delivered). | | Error | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Continue with [Offers](doc:offers) and return the offers to draft status. | | Error | `An account with this name already exists` | Continue with [Accounts](doc:accounts). | | Error | `A project with this name already exists` | Continue with [Projects](doc:projects). | | Error | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Save the opened inquiry before returning to the previous stage. | | Error | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Continue with [Potentials](doc:potentials) and return the inquiries to draft stage. | | Error | `Please enter action for each milstone` | Complete the required action for each milestone. | | Error | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Continue with [Job profitability record](doc:job-profitability-record). | | Success | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the related activity. | | Error | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Save the vendor before continuing. | | Error | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Save the client before continuing. | | Validation | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the required field before saving. | | Error | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and try again. | | Error | `You already have a contact with this name` | Continue with [Contact record](doc:contact-record). | | Error | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Correct the booked quantity on the items surface. | | Error | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Continue with [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items). | | Error | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Continue with [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain). | | Error | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Continue with [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders). | | Error | `This product is already included in BOM` | Review the BOM before adding the product again. | | Error | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Continue with [Sales job variants](doc:sales-job-variants). | | Error | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Continue with [Configuration integration CRMs](doc:configuration-integration-crms). | | Validation | `Please select one product` | Select one product before continuing. | | Validation | `Required Receiving After` | Complete the receiving-after field. | | Validation | `Package must have at least one item` | Add at least one item to the package. | | Validation | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Add a product before saving. | | Error | `Action not allowed` | Check the action's role, branch, and record-state conditions. | | Validation | `Please enter at least one email` | Enter at least one email address. | | Validation | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add at least one inquiry item. | | Validation | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add at least one offer item. | | Validation | `Order must have at least one item` | Add at least one order item. | | Error | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Continue with [From orders to delivered](doc:from-orders-to-delivered). | | Validation | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Select the items for the RFQ. | | Validation | `Required Offer Type` | Complete the offer type. | | Validation | `Required Bid Due Date` | Complete the bid due date. | | Error | `Error loading accounts` | Continue with [Accounts](doc:accounts). | | Error | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Review the serial and manufacturer. | | Error | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Correct the serial and try again. | | Validation | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Enter at least one serial. | | Error | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Continue with [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle). | | Validation | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | Choose a date after the current expiry date. | | Error | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Add one topic and at least one note before completing the activity. | The list above includes messages from shared sales-job surfaces and other stages. For ownership, use these pages: [Sales job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment), [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle), [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items), [Sales job contacts, guarantees and history](doc:sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history), [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files), and [Sales job variants](doc:sales-job-variants). ## Continue after saving The saved job remains the home for its discussion and related task list. Continue according to the work you need to do next: | Next need | Continue with | |---|---| | Review the sales-job record around the **Comments** and **Tasks** tabs | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | | Work through the job lifecycle | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Create or maintain the full task record | [Create a task](doc:create-task) | | Work with activities and files | [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files) | | Find another saved sales job | [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | **Result:** The saved sales job retains its written discussion and job-linked follow-up work, and you know which registered page owns the next action. # Company features ## Company features Company features lets you review the limits and feature assignments used by your company plans. The feature matrix is the table that compares those limits and assignments. Use this page when you need to compare plan limits, change which features a plan includes, or adjust a feature price. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Review plan limits and the feature matrix | [Read the plan and feature tables](#read-the-plan-and-feature-tables) | | Assign a feature or its child features | [Maintain feature assignments and prices](#maintain-feature-assignments-and-prices) | | Change a feature price | [Maintain feature assignments and prices](#maintain-feature-assignments-and-prices) | | Review plan definitions | [Plan details](configuration-plans-record.md) | ![Review the plan limits and feature matrix before making a change](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8547d409de45bcd6eed953364475a408.png) ## Before you start Before you review or change the matrix, open a saved plan record with its plan and feature lists loaded. The page builds one plan column for each plan in the loaded list, so the columns you see depend on the plans available to your company. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the company features page. - The plan table is visible. - The feature list is available when you need to assign a feature. The page uses the loaded plan data to populate the plan columns and the feature list to populate the feature matrix. Work from the headers and rows currently shown on screen. ## Find the company features page Open the company features page to review plan limits and feature assignments for a company. **Prerequisites** - You know the company record whose plans you need to review. **Steps** 1. Open `/configuration/features`. 2. Confirm that the **All plans** and **Plans** breadcrumb context is shown. 3. Select **Companies** when you need to return to the company list. **Result:** The company features screen is open. You can read the plan table and feature matrix when their lists have loaded. ## Read the plan and feature tables The plan table describes the limits configured for each plan, and the feature matrix shows which features are assigned to those plans. The screen currently shows the plan fields and the feature-grid headers below. ### Plan fields | Field label | Type | Requirement or rule | | --- | --- | --- | | **Plan name** | Text | Required. The name accepts letters and the characters allowed by the pattern rule. | | **Plan Price** | Number | Optional; minimum `0`; displayed with the format `#,##0.00`. | | **Branches count** | Number | Required; minimum `1`; maximum `99`. | | **Users count** | Number | Required; minimum `1`; maximum `99`. | | **Teams count** | Number | Required; minimum `1`; maximum `99`. | | **Roles count** | Number | Required; minimum `1`; maximum `99`. | | **Dashboard widgets count** | Number | Required; minimum `1`; maximum `99`; calculated from applied dashboard-widget features. | | **Warehouses count** | Number | Required; minimum `0`; maximum `99`. | | **Latest modifications count** | Number | Required; minimum `0`; maximum `99`. | The **Dashboard widgets count** field is disabled. Its value is recalculated from the dashboard-widget features assigned to the plan. > **Note:** Review the assigned dashboard-widget features when the **Dashboard widgets count** > value needs to change. ### Feature matrix The feature matrix uses the following headers. **Feature**, **Id**, and **Price** are fixed headers. The plan columns are variable: their labels and number come from the plans loaded for the company. | Header | What you use it for | | --- | --- | | **Feature** | Identify the feature row. | | **Id** | Identify the feature's numeric record. | | **Price** | Review the feature's unit price. | | Plan columns | Review or change the feature assignment for each displayed plan. | The plan headers come from the plans available in the loaded list, so their labels and number vary with the loaded plans. The feature matrix is shown when the feature list contains items. Feature-selection cells use an icon rather than a text label. Select the icon in the plan column to change that feature's assignment. Rows with child features can also show **Select all sub**. ![Compare plan fields with the Feature, Id, Price, and plan headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Maintain feature assignments and prices Use this procedure to adjust an existing plan's feature assignments or to change a feature's unit price. The popup **Save** handles the edited feature price. The page **Save** handles feature-assignment changes. **Prerequisites** - The plan table is visible. - The feature matrix is visible when you are changing an assignment or price. **Steps** 1. Choose the change you need in the table: | If you need to… | Do this | | --- | --- | | Assign or remove a feature | Select the feature-selection icon in its plan column. | | Apply child features | Select **Select all sub** on the row. | | Change a feature price | Select an editable cell in the feature row. | 2. If you are changing a feature price, enter the new non-negative amount in the **Edit feature** popup. 3. If you are changing a feature price, select **Save** in the popup. 4. If you changed a feature assignment, select the page **Save** button. **Result:** A price-only change is handled by the popup **Save**. An assignment change is handled by the page **Save**. ![Apply child features from a parent-feature row](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4681d13e2cd48b72c213c94e9815608c.png) ## Handle parent features and unavailable actions A parent feature groups child features beneath it. When the row has child features, **Select all sub** appears beside the feature-selection control and applies the child features to the plan. The number of plan columns varies with the plans loaded for the company. Use the plan headers currently displayed rather than assuming a fixed column count. Plan and feature creation or deletion are outside this page. For plan record maintenance, go to [Plan details](configuration-plans-record.md). ## When saving or validating goes wrong Use the message text below to identify the problem while completing the plan fields or saving a plan or feature price. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required plan field is empty. | Enter a value in the required field, then select **Save**. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | **Plan name** contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Replace the unsupported character in **Plan name**, then select **Save**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The load or save request returned an error. | Review the values you changed and select **Save** again. | ## After reviewing the configuration After reviewing the tables, continue with the plan details when you need to maintain the plan record itself. The company features page keeps the plan limits and feature matrix together so you can review the displayed assignments before leaving the configuration. # Create an activity Create a Visit, Meeting, or Call from the Add new routes, enter its details, and save it. ## Create an activity An activity records planned follow-up work as a Visit, Meeting, or Call. Choose the type that matches the work you are arranging. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the activity workspace | [My Desk activities](doc:my-desk-activities) | | Create a Visit, Meeting, or Call | [Find the activity form](#find-the-activity-form) | | Understand activity statuses after saving | [Activity status](doc:activity-status) | | Work with files attached to an activity | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | Mail activities use a different creation path. ## Before you start Prerequisites - Your Activities subscription is included. - You know whether you are creating a Visit, Meeting, or Call. - You have the details needed for the selected activity, including its required dates. - You are creating a new activity rather than editing an existing activity. Reach the form through the **Add new** menu. Leaving the form is protected by an unsaved-changes warning. ## Find the activity form Use the **Add new** menu to open a form for the activity type you are arranging. Prerequisites - You have the Activities feature available. Steps 1. Open the **Add new** menu. 2. Select the activity type you need. | If you need to create… | Select | |---|---| | A visit with a destination and visit type | **Visit** | | A meeting with participants and a location | **Meeting** | | A call with a call use and description | **Call** | 3. Confirm that the heading matches the selected activity type. ![The Visit form with its activity fields and save controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/99d0ac0c1a4f31c24e94b0b027a7b83d.png) **Result:** The form for the selected activity type is open. To change an existing activity, open it from the activity workspace. To create a new activity, use the **Add new** menu. ## Understand the activity form The form keeps the common activity details together and changes the type-specific fields for Visit, Meeting, or Call. ### Visit fields | Field | Type | Required in the form | |---|---|---| | **Priority** | Select | Yes | | **Title** | Text | Yes | | **Start Date** | Date | Yes | | **End Date** | Date | Yes | | Participant edit option | Boolean | No | | **Visit type** | Select | No | On the Visit form, **Visit Purpose**, **Priority**, **To**, and **Visit type** have no required marker; **Start Date** and **End Date** do. The form also labels **Prepared By**. ![The Visit form with the Priority control open](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e10695bb419877cc1d83d1c3222c0b53.png) ### Meeting fields | Field | Type | Required in the form | |---|---|---| | **Priority** | Select | Yes | | **Title** | Text | Yes | | **Start Date** | Date | Yes | | **End Date** | Date | Yes | | Member restriction option | Boolean | No | | Participant edit option | Boolean | No | On the Meeting form, **Meeting Purpose**, **Priority**, and **Location** have no required marker; **Start Date** and **End Date** do. ![The Meeting form with the Priority control open](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/040671ff336ce3dbca351e61d45fa867.png) ### Call fields | Field | Type | Required in the form | |---|---|---| | **Priority** | Select | Yes | | **Title** | Text | Yes | | **Call To** | Text | No | | **Call Use** | Select | No | | **Call Number** | Text | No | | **Start Date** | Date | Yes | | **Description** | Text | No | Use **Call To**, **Call Use**, **Call Number**, **Start Date**, and **Description** for the corresponding Call details. > Note: The Call form uses the same required **Priority**, **Title**, and **Start Date** rules as the > other activity forms, while **Call Use** and **Description** are optional. ### Controls on a new activity When creating a new activity, the form shows **Save** and **Save and Close** before the activity is saved. After saving, use **Attachment** to work with files and **Last Modifications** to review the activity's modification history. The extra Priority controls and print options are not part of the usable form. ## Enter the activity details Enter the details for the activity type you selected. The form checks the required fields for Visit, Meeting, and Call before saving. Prerequisites - The selected activity form is open. - You have the required details for that activity type. Steps 1. Complete the fields for the selected activity type. | Activity type | Complete these fields | |---|---| | Visit | **Priority**, **Start Date**, **End Date**, and, when applicable, **Visit type**. Enter a value in **Title**. | | Meeting | **Priority**, **Start Date**, and **End Date**. Enter a value in **Title**. | | Call | **Priority**, **Call To**, **Call Use**, **Call Number**, **Start Date**, and, when needed, **Description**. Enter a value in **Title**. | 2. Set **End Date** to a date that is not earlier than **Start Date** for a Visit. 3. Review each required field before saving. ![The Visit End Date control after the date fields are entered](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e10695bb419877cc1d83d1c3222c0b53.png) **Result:** The selected activity form contains the details needed for its activity type and is ready for a save choice. ## Save the activity Use the save choice that matches whether you want to remain on the activity form. Prerequisites - The selected activity form contains its required details. Steps 1. Choose one save action. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save while staying with the activity form | **Save** | | Save and leave the activity form | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The selected save action starts the form's validation before the save request. ## When activity creation goes wrong Use the message on screen to choose the corresponding correction. | Message | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | The action is restricted to your branch. | Use the activity from the branch to which you belong. | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | The activity cannot be marked done without a topic and a note. | Add one topic and at least one note before selecting **Done**. | | `There is no topic to print` | There is no topic available for the minutes. | Add a topic before selecting **Print Minutes Of Activity**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request was not completed. | Review the required fields for the selected activity before selecting **Save** again. | The Activities list can also show these messages while you work with list actions: | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the list search value. | | `Action not allowed` | Use an action available for the selected activity. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the updated activity list. | Use the available controls shown for the selected activity type. Extra Priority controls and print options are unavailable during activity creation. Mail activities use a different creation path. ## After creating the activity An activity with a saved activity ID can carry follow-up work in its saved activity tabs. Prerequisites - The activity is saved. Steps 1. Choose the follow-up area you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Work with files | **Attachment** | | Review the activity's modification history | **Last Modifications** | **Result:** The selected follow-up area is open for the saved activity. For status meanings and existing-record status actions, continue with [Activity status](doc:activity-status). For the Activities workspace and list navigation, open [My Desk activities](doc:my-desk-activities). For file procedures, open [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files). The activity status values are Planned, Overdue, Done, Due, and Cancelled. # Create an MRQ An MRQ is a material requisition record for entering a request into the procurement chain. Use this page when you need to raise a new request or find one that is already saved. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Prepare the request and confirm access | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open a new request or find a saved one | [Find an MRQ](#find-an-mrq) | | Identify the fields and commands | [Understand the MRQ screen](#understand-the-mrq-screen) | | Enter the request and save it | [Enter and save the MRQ](#enter-and-save-the-mrq) | | Choose the internal route or a saved-record command | [Handle MRQ variations](#handle-mrq-variations) | | Correct a message that stops saving | [When saving goes wrong](#when-saving-goes-wrong) | | Continue with products or history after saving | [Continue with the saved MRQ](#continue-with-the-saved-mrq) | | See the procurement chain around the MRQ | [Purchase job procurement chain](purchase-jobs-procurement-chain.md) | ## Before you start An MRQ starts procurement work that can continue through a request for quotation, a purchase quotation, and a purchase order. Prerequisites | Have or know | Why it matters | | --- | --- | | The request title and required receiving date | Complete both fields before saving. | | The request's products and quantities | The save checks that at least one requested product exists and that its quantity is valid. | | Access to the MRQ feature and permission to edit | **Save** and **Save and Close** appear only when editing is allowed and the feature is included. | | A saved MRQ with no unsaved changes | **RFQ** and **Direct PO** are available only from a saved record when purchase permission is available and there are no unsaved changes. | ## Find an MRQ The MRQ list is where you locate existing requests; the new route is where you begin a request that does not yet exist. ### Open a new MRQ Prerequisites - Have the request information listed in [Before you start](#before-you-start). Steps 1. Open `/procurement/material-requisition/new`. 2. Look for **MRQ title**, **Required Receiving Date**, and **Save** on the form. **Result:** The new MRQ form is open. ### Find a saved MRQ Prerequisites - Know that the request has already been saved. Steps 1. Open `/procurement/material-requisition/list/view`. 2. Select the tab that matches the work you need to locate. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | See every listed MRQ | **All** | | Work with requests for quotation | **RFQs** | | Work with quotations | **Quotations** | | Work with purchase orders | **POs** | | Find archived requests | **Archived** | | Find products that need ordering | **Products To Order** | 3. Select the saved request from the list. ![MRQ list headers and work tabs](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5e74634cb7c605b4129c65112c298802.png) **Result:** The selected MRQ opens for review or follow-up. ## Understand the MRQ screen The MRQ screen has a request header for identification and receiving timing, followed by supplier and shipping choices. | Area | What you use it for | Rule or availability | | --- | --- | --- | | **Branch** | View the branch associated with the request | Read-only | | **MRQ title** | Enter the request title | Required | | **Required Receiving Date** | Enter the date by which you need the material | Required | | **Drop shipping** | Mark an internal request for drop shipping | Available on the internal-new route | | **Short Vendors List** | Select one or more suppliers | Available | | **Limit to short vendors list** | Restrict handling to the selected supplier list | Disabled when no recommended suppliers exist | The request also provides **Products** and **Additional Requirements** when the MRQ type is stock, project, or needs. These commands are available on the main request rather than when the request is displayed as a child. The list headers shown in [Find an MRQ](#find-an-mrq) are `MRQ no.`, `MRQ type`, `Title`, `Required receiving date`, `Sales`, and `Short vendor list`. The list shows the headers provided by its selected layout. Use **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings** when those controls are available. ## Enter and save the MRQ Enter the request's identifying information and receiving date before committing the MRQ. Prerequisites - Open a new MRQ as described in [Find an MRQ](#find-an-mrq). - Have at least one requested product and its quantity ready. Steps 1. In **MRQ title**, enter the title for the request. 2. In **Required Receiving Date**, enter the date you need the material, on or after the date the MRQ was created. 3. Add the request details that apply to the MRQ type. | If the MRQ type is… | Do this | | --- | --- | | Stock, project, or needs | Select **Products**, then enter a quantity of at least `0.01` for each requested product. | | Stock, project, or needs and extra requirements are needed | Select **Additional Requirements**, then enter a quantity of at least `0.01` for each additional requirement. | 4. Select **Save** to keep the MRQ open. 5. Select **Save and Close** to save the MRQ and leave the page. After a successful new save, the application navigates to `/procurement/material-requisition/edit/` and displays `Saved Successfully`. **Result:** The MRQ is saved, and the saved-record route is available for follow-up. ## Handle MRQ variations The internal route adds a shipping choice, while saved-record commands appear only after the request has an identifier and no unsaved changes. Prerequisites - For the internal variation, open `/procurement/material-requisition/for-internal/new`. - For saved-record commands, open a saved MRQ with no unsaved changes. Steps 1. Choose the route or command that matches your work. | If you need to… | Use | | --- | --- | | Create an internal request with drop shipping | Select **Drop shipping** on `/procurement/material-requisition/for-internal/new`. | | Continue to a request for quotation from a saved MRQ | Select **RFQ**. | | Continue to a direct purchase order from a saved MRQ | Select **Direct PO**. | | Begin a direct-order action from the MRQ list | If **Direct P.O.** is available, select **Direct P.O.**. | **Result:** The selected procurement route opens when its permission and record conditions are met. After you select **+ RFQ**, a new **Purchasing** MRQ-context entry opens instead of an `Add New RFQ` dialog. ## When saving goes wrong Use the message on screen to correct the specific part of the request that stopped the operation. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete **MRQ title** and **Required Receiving Date**, then select **Save** again. | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Add a requested product through **Products**, then save again. | | `One of products has no quantity` | Enter a quantity of at least `0.01` for every requested product. | | `Package must have at least one item` | Keep at least one request item before trying the operation again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Retry the operation after checking the request data. | | `Saving Error` | Retry the new-record save after checking the required fields and products. | | `Updating Error` | Retry the saved-record update after checking the request data. | | `Loading error` | Reload the MRQ and try again. | | `Required Receiving After` | This field is not active on this form. | | `Updated Successfully` | The saved-record update completed. | | `Deleted Successfully` | The product deletion completed. | ## Continue with the saved MRQ A saved MRQ is the starting point for maintaining its requested products, additional requirements, and recorded changes. Steps 1. Open the saved MRQ at `/procurement/material-requisition/edit/`. 2. Continue product and additional-requirement work in [Complete an MRQ record](mrq-record-follow-up.md). 3. Review **Last Modifications** on the saved MRQ when you need its recorded changes. **Result:** The saved MRQ is ready for follow-up procurement work. ## Out of scope The message `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` belongs to product maintenance on a saved MRQ, not to creating the MRQ. Continue with [Complete an MRQ record](mrq-record-follow-up.md) for saved-record product work. ## Related - [Purchase job procurement chain](purchase-jobs-procurement-chain.md). - [Complete an MRQ record](mrq-record-follow-up.md). - [Create a direct purchase order](create-direct-purchase-order.md). # CRM integration settings Use these settings to choose a CRM integration for each company branch and control which sales orders, purchase orders, invoices, commission invoices, and products synchronize. ## CRM integration settings The **Integration with CRMs** page holds one set of integration choices and synchronization rules for each company branch. A company branch is the branch-level area where you review and maintain those CRM choices. The workflow table lists the directions and rows that control synchronization. Open a branch to review its current choices, then save any changes before leaving the page. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Identify the page and its location | [Find and open a branch](#find-and-open-a-branch) | | Review the available integrations and workflow rows | [Review and configure synchronization workflows](#review-and-configure-synchronization-workflows) | | Understand why rows or choices differ | [Handle configuration branches](#handle-configuration-branches) | | Save changes or leave without saving | [Save or leave settings](#save-or-leave-settings) | | Resolve a loading or saving problem | [When settings do not save](#when-settings-do-not-save) | | Return to the configuration entry area | [Configuration home](configuration-home.md) | | Maintain the company branches used by this page | [Company branches](configuration-company-branchs-view.md) | The page opens at `/configuration/integration-crms`. Its main choice is between **No integration** and the available CRM choices. When an integration other than **No integration** is selected, the page also shows the synchronization directions **Pams >> CRM** and **Pams << CRM**. ## Before you start The settings apply to a company branch, so decide which branch you need before changing a choice. The page can show an upgrade surface instead of the settings when the subscription does not include this feature. Editing controls also depend on your access, and leaving with unsaved changes opens a save-before-leaving dialog. | Check before you begin | What you need to know | | --- | --- | | Subscription | The settings page is available when the subscription includes the feature. | | Branch | The page loads company integration data and lists the company branches. | | Access | **Save** and **Save and Close** are available when editing is allowed. | | Unsaved changes | The X icon in the page header uses a save-before-leaving flow when changes exist. | ## Find and open a branch The page lists five expandable branch rows; the workflow table appears after you open a branch. Prerequisites - You are on `/configuration/integration-crms`. Steps 1. Identify the company branch row you need. 2. Select the branch header or its expand control. 3. Review the integration choices in the opened branch panel. ![Identify a company branch and the integration choices](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/92d0fd4a7a749e4306b022efb864c50c.png) **Result:** The selected branch panel is open, and its integration choices are visible. Continue to review and configure the synchronization workflows. ## Review and configure synchronization workflows The workflow table describes when information moves between Pams and the selected CRM. Its rows cover booking, purchasing, invoices, commission invoices, and products. | Workflow area | Fields and choices | | --- | --- | | Integration | **No integration**, **Odoo**, **Sugar**, **Sales force**, **M.s. dynamics**, **SAP** | | Direction | **Pams >> CRM**; **Pams << CRM** | | Booking | **Synchronize when create new sales order**; **Synchronize when update sales order**; **Automatically when sales order is draft**; **Automatically when sales order is valid**; **Automatically when sales order is delivered** | | Purchasing | **Synchronize when create new purchase order**; **Synchronize when update purchase order**; **Automatically when PO is draft**; **Automatically when PO is valid**; **Automatically when PO is received** | | Sales invoice | **Synchronize when create new sales invoice**; **Synchronize when update sales invoic**; **Automatically when invoice is draft**; **Automatically when invoice is due**; **Automatically when invoice is paid** | | Commission invoice | **Synchronize when create new sales invoice**; **Synchronize when update sales invoic**; **Automatically when invoice is draft**; **Automatically when invoice is due**; **Automatically when invoice is paid** | | Product | **Synchronize when create new product**; **Synchronize when update product** | Prerequisites - You have opened the branch whose settings you want to review. Steps 1. Select the CRM choice for the branch. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Leave the branch without a CRM integration | **No integration** | | Configure the available CRM integration | **Odoo** | 2. Read the workflow headings **Pams >> CRM** and **Pams << CRM** to distinguish the two synchronization directions. 3. Select a create-synchronization checkbox for the workflow you want to configure. 4. Review the update and timing rows that appear for that workflow. ![Choose the integration for an open branch](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e2004dd14a81dbab2394cb88416a9410.png) ![Review the synchronization directions and workflow rows](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/826f38df9d0ea377abf6111f79aa2572.png) **Result:** The branch shows the synchronization rows for the selected integration and the workflow choices in the workflow table for the selected create-synchronization checkbox. Continue to handle any differences in the choices or visible rows. ## Handle configuration branches The page changes its visible choices according to the subscription, the selected integration, and the create-synchronization choices. Use the branch that matches what you need to do. | If… | Then… | | --- | --- | | The subscription does not include the feature | The page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the settings. | | You need no CRM integration | Select **No integration**. The workflow table is not shown for this choice. | | You need the available CRM integration | Select **Odoo**. The workflow table shows the two synchronization directions. | | You see **Sugar**, **Sales force**, **M.s. dynamics**, or **SAP** | These choices are shown as unavailable on the settings form. | | You select a create-synchronization checkbox | The corresponding update and timing rows become available in the workflow group. | There is no separate workflow-exclusion option. Select **No integration** when you need no CRM integration. Prerequisites - You have opened a branch panel. Steps 1. Choose the branch that matches your intended configuration. | If you want to… | Use this choice or condition | | --- | --- | | Keep CRM synchronization off | **No integration** | | Configure the available CRM | **Odoo** | | Configure dependent workflow rows | Select a create-synchronization checkbox first | 2. Review which workflow rows appear after your choice. ![Review the workflow rows after a synchronization choice](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a5373d2201413695f15c8049fcd8c087.png) **Result:** The branch shows the controls associated with the selected integration and synchronization path. Continue to save or leave the settings. ## Save or leave settings Use **Save** to keep the page open after saving, or use **Save and Close** to save and leave the page. If you select the X icon in the page header while changes exist, choose what to do in the save-before-leaving dialog. Prerequisites - You have reviewed or changed the settings in an open branch. Steps 1. Choose the action that matches what you need to do. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Save the settings and remain on the page | **Save** | | Save the settings and leave the page | **Save and Close** | | Leave the page after reviewing or changing settings | The X icon in the page header | 2. If you selected the X icon in the page header while changes exist, choose one option in the save-before-leaving dialog. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Return to the settings without leaving | **Cancel** | | Leave without keeping the changes | **Don't Save** | | Save the changes before leaving | **Save** | ![Choose how to save the settings](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a5373d2201413695f15c8049fcd8c087.png) ![Choose what to do with unsaved changes](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/47e8711fa134ec6e45b9c88eff037e07.png) | Message class | Message | When it appears | | --- | --- | --- | | Success | `Your company work procedure settings has been saved successfully` | After a successful save | **Result:** The settings are saved, or the leave dialog has applied the option you selected. If a saving problem appears, continue to When settings do not save. ## When settings do not save Use the exact message on screen to identify the type of interruption. The page can report a load error or a server error while its settings are being processed. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the page state and try the operation again. | | `Server Error` | Check the settings you changed and try the save operation again. | | A choice remains unavailable | Use the choices that are available on the form. | After resolving a saving problem, continue to What to do next. ## What to do next After reviewing the branch settings, verify the page state by checking the selected integration, the visible workflow rows, and the save controls. If you changed a setting, use **Save** or **Save and Close** before moving on. For branch maintenance, continue to [Company branches](configuration-company-branchs-view.md). Prerequisites - You have finished reviewing the settings for the branch. Steps 1. Check the selected integration choice. 2. Check the workflow rows visible for that choice. 3. Select **Save** or **Save and Close** if you changed a setting. **Result:** The branch settings remain on screen with the selected integration and workflow rows, or the page has left after the save action. # Delivery terms Delivery terms are named and coded entries maintained in the sales configuration list. Use this page when you need to review the list or maintain an entry. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the list and check its columns | [Find the Delivery terms list](#find-the-delivery-terms-list) | | Check the fields before entering a value | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add or change an entry | [Add or edit an entry](#add-or-edit-an-entry) | | Remove an entry or handle access branches | [Handle delete and access branches](#handle-delete-and-access-branches) | | Resolve a validation or maintenance message | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue to another sales reference list | [After maintaining Delivery terms](#after-maintaining-delivery-terms) | | Maintain units | [Item units](doc:configuration-sales-item-units) | | Maintain additional costs | [Cost items](doc:configuration-sales-cost-items) | | Maintain payment methods | [Payment methods](doc:configuration-sales-payments-methods) | | Maintain guarantee types | [Guarantee types](doc:configuration-sales-requested-guarantee) | | Maintain offer, order, or inquiry statuses | [Offer status](doc:configuration-sales-offer-status), [Order status](doc:configuration-sales-order-status), or [Inquiry status](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-status) | | Maintain lost, regret, or cancellation reasons | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons), [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons), [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons), or [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain order activation conditions | [Order activation conditions](doc:configuration-sales-order-activation-conditions) | ## Before you start You must be signed in with access to the sales configuration page. Have the name and code for the entry ready before you begin; both fields are required in the form. Prerequisites - You have access to the sales configuration page. - You have the value to enter in **Name**. - You have the value to enter in **Code**. The availability of editing, deleting, importing, and exporting depends on your access. The page can also restrict **New** through the page's access settings. ## Find the Delivery terms list Open the Delivery terms list to review existing entries before adding or changing one. Prerequisites - You are signed in and have access to sales configuration. Steps 1. Open the **Delivery Terms** configuration page. 2. Check that the page shows the **Delivery Terms** title and the **Name** and **Code** columns. 3. Choose the next action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add an entry | **New** | | Review the list again | **Refresh** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | | Edit an existing entry | The row in the list | **Result:** The Delivery terms list is open, and you have either selected the next list action or identified the row to edit. ![Check the Delivery Terms title, the Name and Code columns, and the list controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1c741087823e79b0c8d3598f392d7042.png) ## Understand the list and form The list and form use the same two values. Both form fields are text fields and both carry a required marker. | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | List | Review the **Name** and **Code** columns. | | **Name** | Enter the name shown for the entry. | | **Code** | Enter the code shown for the entry. | | New-entry dialog | Enter the two values and select **OK**. | The new-entry dialog is titled `New Delivery Term`. The page also shows sibling navigation labels, including **Units**, **Payment Methods**, **Guarantee Types**, **Offer Status**, **Order Status**, **Inquiry Status**, **Lost Reasons**, **Regret Reasons**, **Cancellation Reasons**, **Order Cancellation Reasons**, **Additional Costs**, **Mark Up Items**, and **Order Activation Conditions**. Select a sibling page when you need to maintain that other reference list. The form does not present `DisplayOrder`, `DeliveryTermID`, or `CompanyID` as editable fields. ## Add or edit an entry To add or edit an entry, follow these steps. Prerequisites - You have access to create or edit the entry. - You have values for **Name** and **Code**. Steps 1. Choose the entry action: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Create a new entry | Select **New**. | | Change an existing entry | Select the row in the list. | The shared new or edit dialog opens. Editing a row requires edit access. 2. Enter the entry name in **Name**. 3. Enter the entry code in **Code**. 4. Select **OK**. The form validates the fields before saving. If the new entry is saved, the application displays `Data saved Successfully`. If an existing entry is saved, it displays `Data updated Successfully`. **Result:** The saved entry is loaded back into the list. ![Check the New Delivery Term dialog, its required Name and Code fields, and OK.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/37558187d88856f32d2a924890029186.png) ## Handle delete and access branches Deletion applies to an existing row. The delete option is available only where your access allows deletion; importing, exporting, editing, and creating can also depend on access. Prerequisites - You have identified the row to remove. - You have delete access. Steps 1. Select the row's delete control. 2. Choose one action in the confirmation menu: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the entry | **Cancel** | | Remove the entry | **Delete** | | If the list contains more than one entry | Select **Delete**. | | If saved data uses the entry | Select **Cancel**. Resolve the related data before trying **Delete** again. | **Result:** The entry remains in the list after **Cancel**, or the list is refreshed after a successful deletion. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text to identify whether the form needs a value, a permitted character, or a different maintenance action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | <field caption> is required | Enter a value in the named field. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Replace characters that are not accepted in the field. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and submit the form again. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the entry and resolve the saved data that uses it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Check the entry and your delete access before trying the delete action again. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one entry in the list. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The new entry was saved; check the list for it. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The edited entry was saved; check the list for the change. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The entry was deleted; check the list for its removal. | | `Data Importing completed` | Check the list after the import operation. | Before removing an entry, the confirmation asks `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` Select **Cancel** to keep the entry or **Delete** to continue. ## After maintaining Delivery terms After a successful maintenance action, check the list rather than leaving the page: the save operation reloads the list, and the delete operation updates the list after the response. Prerequisites - You have completed or cancelled the maintenance action. Steps 1. Check the **Name** and **Code** columns for the entry you maintained. 2. Select the sibling reference-list label for the next configuration task. **Result:** You remain on the Delivery terms list until you choose another registered sales configuration page. # Edit branch logo ## Edit branch logo A branch record stores the branch identity, financial settings, address, contact information, and logo used for branch configuration. Use this screen to review those values, attach or remove the logo, and save branch changes. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the branch fields and required markers | [Understand the branch screen](#understand-the-branch-screen) | | Attach or remove the logo | [Maintain the logo and branch changes](#maintain-the-logo-and-branch-changes) | | Review margin or history areas | [Review the margin and history branches](#review-the-margin-and-history-branches) | | Fix a validation or action problem | [Resolve validation and action failures](#resolve-validation-and-action-failures) | | Open the branch list | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | | Maintain branch details beyond the logo-focused screen | [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record) | When you know which branch you need, continue with **Before you start**. ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Have the branch record available. The address fields appear when the branch has an address. - Use an editable branch record when you need **Save**, **Save and Close**, contact changes, or logo changes. - Use an existing saved branch when you need the saved-record tabs. - Have the new logo file ready before opening the upload area. The main form appears when the branch is available and the subscription condition permits the configuration surface. When these conditions are in place, continue with **Find and open the branch**. ## Find and open the branch The branch-edit screen is a record page. Open it from **Branches** when you need to work on one saved branch rather than review the list. **Prerequisites** - Know which saved branch record you need to open. - Start from the [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) list when you need to locate the record first. **Steps** 1. Open **Branches** from the configuration area. 2. Select the branch record you want to maintain. 3. Open the branch-edit page for that record. **Result:** The branch edit screen opens for the selected record. Continue with **Understand the branch screen** to identify the fields and areas available for the record. ## Understand the branch screen The branch screen groups identity, financial, address, contact, logo, margin, and history work on one record surface. The branch screen displays the fields in the table below and shows **Save** and **Save and Close**. ### Branch fields | Field | Type and rule | When it appears | |---|---|---| | **Display Name** | Text; required only where your company configures it | Branch is available | | **Full Name** | Text; optional | Branch is available | | **Statement** | Text; optional | Branch is available | | **Managing Director** | Text; optional | Branch is available | | **Company Registration No.** | Text; optional | Branch is available | | **VAT ID Number** | Text; optional | Branch is available | | VatRate | Number from `0` to `100`; optional | Branch is available | | **Financial Year Start** | Select; required only where your company configures it | Branch is available | | — day | Select; required only where your company configures it | Branch is available | | — month | Select; required only where your company configures it | Branch is available | | **Reference Currency** | Select; required | Branch is available | | **Local currency** | Select; required | Branch is available | | **Street** | Text; optional | Address is available | | **Zip Code** | Number; optional | Address is available | | **Country** | Select; optional | Address is available | | **State** | Text; optional | Address is available | | **City** | Text; optional | Address is available | | Contact information value | Text; one value for each contact row | Contact list contains a row | | Logo file | File control | Logo upload area is open | The branch screen marks **Display Name**, **Financial Year Start**, **Reference Currency**, and **Local currency** as required. ![Review the branch fields, required markers, and save buttons](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) ### Tabs and conditional areas | If you need to… | Area or control | Condition | |---|---|---| | Review default-margin values | **Default ** | Existing saved branch | | Review history | **Last Modifications** | Existing saved branch | | Choose a fixed percentage margin | Fixed-percentage option | Existing saved branch and default-margin area | | Choose a descending absolute margin | Descending-absolute option | Existing saved branch and default-margin area | | Choose a decreased percentage margin | Decreased-percentage option | Existing saved branch and default-margin area | | Review degressive ranges | From, To, and Percentage values | Accumulated or decreased margin type | | Filter history | User and Fields filters | History area | The available working areas do not include registration choices, nominal commission or margin inputs, currency-conversion inputs, map or bank-account fields, or an extra currency choice for accumulated margins. Use **Maintain the logo and branch changes** when you need to change the image, contact rows, or branch values. ## Maintain the logo and branch changes Use the logo controls beside the branch image, then save the branch when the change is complete. ### Add, replace, or remove the logo **Prerequisites** - Open the branch record. - Have the replacement file ready if you are adding or replacing the logo. - To remove a logo, the branch must already have one. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | **Order** | **Add or replace** | **Remove** | |---|---|---| | 1 | Select the icon beside the branch image | Select the delete icon | | 2 | Choose the logo file | Review `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | | 3 | Select **Attach** | Select **Yes** | **Result:** The logo area reflects the upload or deletion action, and the branch can be saved. ### Save branch and contact changes **Prerequisites** - Open an editable branch record. - Complete each required field before saving. **Steps** 1. Enter or change the branch values you need to maintain. 2. Select the contact action that matches the contact row you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a telephone contact | **Phone** | | Add a fax contact | **Fax** | | Add a mobile contact | **Mobile** | | Add an email contact | **Email** | | Add a website contact | **Website** | | Add online-support information | **Online Support** | 3. Enter the contact value in the new row. 4. Select the row's delete icon when you need to remove a contact row. 5. Choose how to finish the change. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Remain on the record | **Save** | | Save and leave | **Save and Close** | If the branch save succeeds, the screen displays `Branch saved Successfully`. If the branch is new, the save action opens the saved branch record and refreshes its history area. **Result:** The branch record remains open after **Save**, or the branch page closes after **Save and Close**. Continue with **Review the margin and history branches** when you need to review those saved-record areas. ![Check the branch values and save controls before saving](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a76927619cb9e5b0d20833347ae39be2.png) ## Review the margin and history branches Default-margin settings control the branch's margin choices, while Last Modifications records the branch's change history. These areas belong to an existing saved branch. ### Review default-margin settings **Prerequisites** - Open an existing saved branch. - Open the default-margin area. **Steps** 1. Select **Default **. 2. Select the margin type that matches the rule you need. 3. Enter the applicable default-margin values. 4. Select **Save** in the default-margin area. When the selected margin type is accumulated or decreased and its degressive list is empty, the screen displays `Please insert degressive margin list`. A successful default-margin save displays `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The default-margin area remains open with the selected margin type and saved values. ### Review history **Prerequisites** - Open an existing saved branch. **Steps** 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Choose a user or field filter when you need to narrow the history. **Result:** The history area opens for the branch. Continue with **Resolve validation and action failures** if a message stops the action. ## Resolve validation and action failures Use the message text to identify which branch action needs correction. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a value in **Display Name**. | | `required` | Complete the field showing the required marker, including the financial-year selectors or currency selectors. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters that the branch-name pattern does not accept. | | `Branch saved Successfully` | Continue with the saved branch record. | | `Logo Deleted Successfully` | Continue with the branch after the logo is removed. | | `Error: Server Error` | Correct the logo action or contact your administrator. | | `Please insert degressive margin list` | Add a degressive margin range before saving the margin choice. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Continue with the saved default-margin values. | | `Error while saving data ` | Review the default-margin values and try **Save** again. | | `Branch does not exist` | Return to **Branches** and open an available branch record. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Yes** only when you intend to remove the logo. | If the subscription condition prevents the configuration form, the screen shows the subscription- upgrade area instead. If authentication remains on the sign-in form, the branch page is not available. A loading screen or a failed route does not provide the branch controls; return to **Branches** and open the record again. After resolving the problem, continue with **Continue after branch editing**. ## Continue after branch editing After reviewing or saving the branch, continue with the branch task that matches your goal. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Locate another branch | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | | Maintain the full branch record | [Edit branch](doc:configuration-company-branchs-edit-record) | | Review the next configuration area | [Configuration dashboard](doc:configuration-home) | The logo-focused screen covers the fields, logo actions, contact rows, default-margin area, and history area listed on this page. **Result:** You have a clear next configuration destination after branch review or maintenance. # Edit user layout ## What a user layout is A user layout is the saved column arrangement for one list. Use this page when you need to parse, compare, or maintain that arrangement. It sits between the [User layouts](doc:configuration-users-layouts-view) list, where you find a layout, and [Default layouts](doc:configuration-default-layouts), whose columns provide the comparison layout. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find and open an existing layout | [User layouts](doc:configuration-users-layouts-view) | | Review the opened layout's fields and options | Continue to **Understand the edit surface** below | | Compare the user layout with the configured default | [Default layouts](doc:configuration-default-layouts) | ## Before you start Open **User layouts** and identify the layout record you want to maintain. The page loads an existing layout when the ID is non-zero. With no ID or a zero ID, it resets the layout model. If the layout has changes, leaving the page opens a confirmation flow; if it has no changes, the page leaves directly. ## Find and open the layout Open the saved list arrangement before changing its text or columns. **Prerequisites** - You know the layout record ID. **Steps** 1. Open **User layouts**. 2. Open the layout record you want to maintain. 3. Select **Recall** to load the layout and its default comparison. The selected record opens for editing. **Result:** The edit page opens at the layout route and shows the layout fields and the two parsed areas when their column data is available. ## Understand the edit surface The edit surface has record details, editable layout text, parsed layout areas, and a column editor that opens from a populated parsed layout. ### Record and layout fields | Field | Type | State | | --- | --- | --- | | **Name** | Text | Required; disabled | | **List num** | Select | Required; disabled | | **Is current** | Boolean | Optional; disabled | | **Is standard** | Boolean | Optional; disabled | | **Layout** | Text area | Required; editable | On the page, **Name**, **List num**, and **Layout** have required markers. The page also shows **Is current** and **Is standard** beside these fields. ### List choices | Option | ID | | --- | ---: | | `Activities (0)` | `0` | | `Tasks (1)` | `1` | | `Contract (2)` | `2` | | `Registeration data (3)` | `3` | | `Ticket - Running (4)` | `4` | | `Ticket - Closed (5)` | `5` | | `Layouts (6)` | `6` | | `Pricing indicator (7)` | `7` | | `Project (21)` | `21` | | `Clients (22)` | `22` | | `Principals (23)` | `23` | | `Roles (26)` | `26` | | `Users (27)` | `27` | | `Account (29)` | `29` | | `Contact (30)` | `30` | | `Invoices all (31)` | `31` | | `Payment (32)` | `32` | | `Sales Leads(39)` | `39` | | `Sales All(40)` | `40` | | `Sales Inquiries (41)` | `41` | | `Sales Offers (42)` | `42` | | `Sales Orders (43)` | `43` | | `Sales Delivered (44)` | `44` | | `Sales Lost offer (45)` | `45` | | `Sales Regretted (46)` | `46` | | `Sales Deleted (48)` | `48` | | `Sales Rejected orders (49)` | `49` | | `Sales Missed Inquiries (50)` | `50` | | `Sales Cancelled offer (51)` | `51` | | `Sales Cancelled order (52)` | `52` | | `Buyout All (53)` | `53` | | `Buyout RFQ (54)` | `54` | | `Buyout Offer (55)` | `55` | | `Buyout Order (56)` | `56` | | `Buyout Delivered (57)` | `57` | | `Buyout Rejected offer (58)` | `58` | | `Buyout Regretted (59)` | `59` | | `Buyout Deleted (61)` | `61` | | `Buyout Rejected order(62)` | `62` | | `Buyout Cancelled offers (64)` | `64` | | `Buyout Cancelled order (65)` | `65` | | `Principal invoice (67)` | `67` | | `teams (70)` | `70` | | `Account managers (71)` | `71` | | `Subscription Invoices (72)` | `72` | | `Letter of guarantees all (73)` | `73` | | `Products (74)` | `74` | | `MRQ (75)` | `75` | | `Procurement All (76)` | `76` | | `Procurement RFQ (77)` | `77` | | `Procurement Offer (78)` | `78` | | `Procurement Order (79)` | `79` | | `Procurement Delivered (80)` | `80` | | `Procurement Rejected (81)` | `81` | | `Procurement Regretted (82)` | `82` | | `Procurement Deleted (83)` | `83` | | `Procurement Rejected order (84)` | `84` | | `Procurement Cancelled offers (85)` | `85` | | `Procurement Cancelled orders (86)` | `86` | | `Extension rejected offer (89)` | `89` | | `Un-allocated products (89)` | `89` | | `Assigned products to sales (90)` | `90` | | `Warehouse configuration (91)` | `91` | | `Receiving shipment (92)` | `92` | | `Inspection (93)` | `93` | | `PM All (94)` | `94` | | `PM Planned To Order (BOM) (95)` | `95` | | `PM Ready To Order (MRQ) (96)` | `96` | | `PM In Procurement All (97)` | `97` | | `PM In Procurement Inquiry (98)` | `98` | | `PM In Procurement Offer (99)` | `99` | | `PM In Procurement Order (100)` | `100` | | `PM In Procurement Stuck (101)` | `101` | | `PM Products Receipt (102)` | `102` | | `PM Product Rejected (103)` | `103` | | `PM Stored (104)` | `104` | | `PM Assembly (105)` | `105` | | `PM Loss (106)` | `106` | | `PM Ready For Shipment (107)` | `107` | | `PM Delivered (108)` | `108` | | `Stock (109)` | `109` | | `Packages (110)` | `110` | | `upcoming stock (111)` | `111` | | `Production order (112)` | `112` | | `Shipping order (113)` | `113` | | `Issue goods note (114)` | `114` | | `External service order (115)` | `115` | | `Transfer order (116)` | `116` | | `Return note (117)` | `117` | | `Delivery note (118)` | `118` | | `PM orders (119)` | `119` | | `In-warehouse all (120)` | `120` | | `PM Delivered orders (121)` | `121` | | `Reference list by serial num. (122)` | `122` | | `Job Profitabilty (123)` | `123` | | `Job Cost Transaction (124)` | `124` | | `Purchase Invoice (125)` | `125` | | `Outgoing Paymnet (126)` | `126` | ### Parsed layout areas The **Parsed user layout** and **Parsed Default layout** areas appear when the layout has columns. | Parsed-area column | Use | | --- | --- | | **Index** | Column position | | **Field** | Data field | | **Type** | Data type | | **Caption** | Column caption | | **Visible** | Visibility setting | | **Width** | Column width | In the row for the column you want to change, choose the action that opens its details. In the row for the column you want to remove, choose the action that opens the removal confirmation. The confirmation asks **Are you sure?**. ### Column editor fields and choices To inspect an existing column, in the row for the column you want to change, choose the action that opens its details. To remove it, in the row for the column you want to remove, choose the action that opens the removal confirmation. The confirmation asks **Are you sure?**. | Field | Type | Required | Rule | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Index** | Text | Yes | Disabled in the column editor | | **Visible** | Boolean | No | Editable | | **Field** | Text | Yes | Editable | | **Type** | Select | Yes | Choose one of the values below | | **Caption** | Text | No | Editable | | **Width** | Number | No | Minimum value `0` | | **Filter value** | Text | No | Editable | | **Selected filter operation** | Select | Yes | Choose one of the values below | The **Type** choices are `string`, `number`, `date`, and `boolean`. The **Selected filter operation** choices are: | Option | ID when different | | --- | --- | | `contains` | — | | `Does not contain` | `notcontains` | | `Starts with` | `startswith` | | `Ends with` | `endswith` | | `Equals` | `=` | | `Not equals` | `<>` | When the layout contains columns, each column row provides actions for editing or deleting it. **Save** and **Save and Close** are unavailable until you make a change. ## Maintain the layout text and compare defaults A layout text is the saved representation that the page parses into columns and serializes back after changes. **Prerequisites** - The edit page is open. - You have a layout record to maintain. **Steps** 1. Select **Recall** to load the user layout and its default comparison. 2. Review **Layout** for the saved layout text. 3. Select **Parse** to turn the layout text into the parsed user layout. ![The **Layout** field and **Parse** control beside the parsed area](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/74f4fb4f64f0b97e71aa53c3e02637ff.png) 4. Select **Stringfy** after changing the parsed layout to copy the parsed layout back into **Layout**. ![The layout text after serializing the parsed layout](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/cf8c4df315efc36477ed5c4ec83638d1.png) 5. Choose the action that matches what you need to do: | If you need to… | Select | Outcome | | --- | --- | --- | | Remove duplicate or unmatched user columns | **Clean user layout** | The user layout is cleaned | | Add missing default columns and update matching columns | **Update user layout** | The user layout is aligned with the default comparison | | Save the layout and remain on the page | **Save** | The layout is validated and saved | | Save the layout and leave the page | **Save and Close** | The layout is validated, saved, and the page closes | **Result:** The layout is saved, the parsed layout is refreshed, and the page shows `Your request was completed successfully`. **Save and Close** also leaves the page. ## Maintain layout columns A layout column defines one list column's position, field, type, visibility, caption, width, and filter behavior. **Prerequisites** - The parsed user layout has columns. **Steps** 1. Select a parsed-layout row to open its column details. 2. In the column editor, review **Index**, **Visible**, **Field**, **Type**, **Caption**, **Width**, **Filter value**, and **Selected filter operation**. 3. Choose the column change you need: | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Add a column | Enter the required values and save the column | | Change a column | Change its values and save the column | | Remove a column | Select the delete icon in that row to open the removal confirmation | | Keep a column after opening removal confirmation | Select **No** | | Leave an exit or task-completion confirmation without saving | Select **Don't Save** | | Close an applicable confirmation without confirming | Select **Cancel** | 4. If you chose to remove a column, select **Yes** to confirm the removal. The column is removed from the parsed layout. 5. Select **Save** on the edit page to save the changed layout. **Result:** The parsed layout contains the column changes you kept, and the edit page is ready for the save result. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text on screen to choose the response. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required field has no value. | Enter the required value in the field named in the form, then select **Save** again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Loading or processing did not complete. | Review the layout values and select **Recall** or **Save** again. | | `Are you sure?` | The delete-column confirmation is open. | Select **Yes** to remove the column or **No** to keep it. | | No controls appear after opening the route | The route did not load the edit surface. | Return to [User layouts](doc:configuration-users-layouts-view) and open the layout from its list. | ## What to do next After a successful save, the layout remains the maintained user layout, and **Save and Close** leaves the edit page. Return to [User layouts](doc:configuration-users-layouts-view) to find the layout again, or open [Default layouts](doc:configuration-default-layouts) to compare or maintain the default arrangement. **Prerequisites** - You have completed the layout changes you want to keep. **Steps** 1. Select **Save** and wait for `Your request was completed successfully`. 2. Select **Save and Close** when you want to leave after saving. **Result:** The saved layout remains available from the user-layout list, and the page closes after **Save and Close**. # Edit warehouse ## Overview A warehouse configuration record holds the warehouse's identity, branch association, address, areas, inventory model, and modification history. Use it to keep the warehouse definition aligned with the warehouse work that follows. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find an existing warehouse | [Warehouse list](doc:configuration-warehouse-view) | | Create a warehouse | [New warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-new) | | Review identity, address, or branch association | [Review and save warehouse details](#review-and-save-warehouse-details) | | Add, edit, or remove an area | [Maintain warehouse areas](#maintain-warehouse-areas) | | Choose a storage model or review history | [Choose an inventory model and review history](#choose-an-inventory-model-and-review-history) | | Continue with warehouse operations | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | ## Before you start You edit a saved warehouse record. The record must load on a page where the subscription is included and the page is not in its not-found state. Editing actions require edit permission. **Prerequisites** - Have the warehouse record you need to review. - Collect the warehouse display name, description, store type, administrator, branch association, and address details before changing the form. - Have edit permission for the record. - Know that **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code** are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. ## Find and open a warehouse record The warehouse list is the starting point for opening an existing warehouse. Select the warehouse you need from the list. **Prerequisites** - Have access to the warehouse list. **Steps** 1. Open the warehouse list. 2. Select the row for the warehouse you want to review. The selected record opens for review. **Result:** The selected warehouse record is open for review. ## Understand the warehouse screen The edit screen combines the warehouse details form with related areas, inventory-model choices, and modification history. The areas surface is a grid; the other related surfaces are selected from tabs. | Surface | What it contains | |---|---| | Warehouse details | **Display Name**, **Description**, **Store type**, **Store Admin**, and branch checkboxes | | Address | **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code** | | Areas | A grid with **Name**, **Short name**, **Description**, **X Position**, **Y Position**, and **Z Position** | | Inventory Model | **Storage-only warehouse**, **Storage with Assembly Area warehouse**, or **Storage with Standalone Assembly Area warehouse** | | Last Modifications | The record's modification-history surface | The area popup carries **Name** and **Description**. **Short name**, **Area Admin**, **X position**, **Y position**, and **Z position** are not part of the available area popup. ![Open the warehouse list before selecting a record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/133e46bf1d1bed3a415a13ca10bc6134.png) ## Review and save warehouse details Review or change the warehouse identity, branch association, address, or required values. **Prerequisites** - Open the warehouse record. - Have the values to enter for the warehouse details. **Steps** 1. Review **Display Name** and **Description**. 2. Review **Store type** and **Store Admin**. 3. Select or clear the branch checkboxes under the warehouse's branch association. 4. Review **Destination Title**, **Country**, **State**, **City**, **Street**, and **Zip-code**. 5. Enter a value in every field marked as required on your screen. 6. Select one save option: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the record open | **Save** | | Save the record and leave the page | **Save and Close** | 7. Read the message that appears after the save request. The form uses `This Field Is Required` when a required value is missing. A successful save uses `Your request was completed successfully`; a failed request uses `An error occurred while processing your request`. **Result:** The warehouse details remain on screen after **Save**, or the page closes after **Save and Close**. ## Maintain warehouse areas An area is a named warehouse location represented as a row in the Areas grid. Maintain an area when the warehouse's internal locations change. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved warehouse record. - Have edit permission. - Select **Areas**. **Steps** 1. Review the area row using **Name**, **Short name**, **Description**, **X Position**, **Y Position**, and **Z Position**. 2. Choose the area action you need: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Add an area | Select the plus icon, enter the area name in **Name**, enter the optional explanation in **Description**, and select **Save** in the popup. | | Edit an area | Select the row's edit control on an existing non-default area, change **Name** or **Description**, and select **Save** in the popup. | | Remove an area | For an existing non-default area, select **Delete** in the row menu. | The product treats a default area as protected: it does not allow that area to be edited or deleted. The area actions use the common success and error messages listed in the save procedure. **Result:** The eligible area is added, updated, or removed from the Areas grid. ## Choose an inventory model and review history The inventory model describes how the warehouse handles storage and assembly. Modification history shows the record's prior changes. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved warehouse record. - Have edit permission before changing the inventory model. **Steps** 1. Select **Inventory Model**. 2. Select the option that matches the warehouse: | If the warehouse… | Select | |---|---| | Stores goods without an assembly area | **Storage-only warehouse** | | Uses an assembly area in the warehouse | **Storage with Assembly Area warehouse** | | Uses a separate assembly area in production | **Storage with Standalone Assembly Area warehouse** | 3. Select **Save** in the Inventory Model surface. 4. Select **Last Modifications**. 5. Select **Registration** when a history entry is available. The inventory-model save is separate from the main warehouse-details save. **Result:** The selected inventory model is saved separately, or the modification history is open. ## When an action is unavailable or fails Use the message text to identify whether the form needs a value, the request failed, or the record cannot be changed. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required field has no value | Enter the missing value and select **Save** again. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The request completed | Continue with the next warehouse task. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request failed | Review the values and submit the save action again. | | `You cannot change or delete records developed by Pams` | The selected area is protected | Leave the protected area unchanged. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | A file name contains an unsupported character | In the file surface, remove the unsupported character from the file name. | ## Continue after reviewing the warehouse After reviewing or maintaining the configuration, continue with the task that uses the warehouse. The [Warehouse list](doc:configuration-warehouse-view) returns you to the available warehouses. Use [New warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-new) when you need a separate warehouse record. Follow the [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) for operational warehouse work. # Inquiries ## What an inquiry is An Inquiry is a sales-job stage between a Potential and an Offer. A Potential is the earlier sales stage, and an Offer is the next stage for pricing the request. You use an Inquiry to complete the request, send it to a principal or vendor when required, correct or approve its outcome, and move an eligible record forward to an Offer. The sales flow includes these main stages: ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 Potential --> Inquiry: Receive inquiry Inquiry --> Offer: Go to offer Inquiry --> Regretted Inquiry: Regret Inquiry --> Cancelled Inquiry: Inquiry Cancelled By Client ``` | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Qualify an early sales opportunity before it becomes an Inquiry | [Potentials](doc:potentials) | | Complete, send, correct, or advance an Inquiry | This page | | Continue with pricing and the offer | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Understand the complete sales-stage sequence | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | The client company | The client is a required selection on the Inquiry panel. | | The vendor or principal | The vendor is a required selection and determines which send route is available. | | The customer's reference and requested deadline | They give you the information for **Client Inquiry Number** and **Bid Due Date**. | | The requested items, units, and quantities | The Inquiry item grid records what the Offer must address. | | Permission to send correspondence or advanced approval access, when those routes apply | These permissions control which Inquiry actions appear. | | A saved Inquiry with no unsaved changes | **Go to offer**, resend, approval, and correction routes have saved-record conditions. | The **Inquiry Date** cannot be later than today, and **Bid Due Date** cannot be earlier than the Inquiry Date. **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, and **Requested Offer Type** are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. ## Find or open an inquiry An Inquiries list is the work list for sales jobs at the Inquiry stage. Use it to start a new record or to open a saved record. 1. Open the sales-jobs list. 2. Select **Inquiries** from its sales-job views. The list uses **Inquiry date**, **Inquiry type**, and **Inquiry stage** as its visible columns. The other sales-job tabs help you move to the surrounding stages: **All**, **Potentials**, **Offers**, **Orders**, **Archived**, and **Job Missing Customer Survey**. ![Use the Inquiry date, Inquiry type, and Inquiry stage headers to identify the list you need.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7517274068c93ed726e006d8e98f20b8.png) 3. Select **Add new**. 4. Choose one route from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start an Inquiry workspace | **Inquiry** | | Start a direct order instead | **Direct order** | After you select **Direct order**, the direct-order workspace opens. Continue there for that separate task rather than completing an Inquiry. 5. Select an existing list row when you need to continue a saved Inquiry. The saved record opens in the sales-job workspace at `/sales/edit/`. **Result:** You are either in a new Inquiry workspace or in the saved sales-job workspace for an existing Inquiry. ## Understand the Inquiry workspace The Inquiry workspace is the part of a sales-job record where you identify the client and vendor, record the request, and enter the requested items. A saved record also exposes companion areas for work that belongs to the wider sales job. The new-Inquiry workspace showed these fields: | Area | Fields or controls | |---|---| | Job header | **Status**, **Branch**, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **End User**, **Estimated Value**, **File Number**, and **Expected Order Date** | | Inquiry panel | **Client**, **Vendor**, **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, **Bid Due Date**, and **Requested Offer Type** | | Assessment fields | **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, and **Order chance** | | Item grid | **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty** | | Actions | **Save** and **Save and Close** | ![Use the Inquiry panel and item-grid headers to locate the fields you complete.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5ce84428101bdf92bb4336509d3ad240.png) **Client** and **Vendor** are required. **Bid Due Date** is required and cannot precede **Inquiry Date**. **Client Inquiry Number**, **Inquiry Date**, and **Requested Offer Type** are required only where your company configures them as mandatory. The Inquiry item row requires **Item Description**. **Unit** can be unavailable for package items or when the selected product supplies a unit. **Qty** accepts values greater than zero up to `999,999.00` in the visible validation rule. Custom fields can appear in the Inquiry area when your company has configured them for Inquiry records. Their labels and values depend on that configuration. After the record is saved, the workspace showed the **Inquiry** stage and these companion areas: | Area | Use it to… | |---|---| | **Comments** | Shown after saving. | | **Tasks** | Shown after saving. | | **Activities** | Shown after saving. | | **Attachment** | Shown after saving. | | **Contacts** | Shown after saving. | | **LGs** | Shown after saving. | | **Last Modifications** | Shown after saving. | ![Use the saved workspace header to recognize the Inquiry stage and its companion areas.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a0cba6ddf91e45763a6f7f0e47b80d12.png) **Result:** You can tell the shared sales-job fields from the Inquiry panel, the item grid, and the companion areas that appear after saving. ## Complete and save an inquiry Completing an Inquiry records the request that the later Offer must address. Enter the client, vendor, dates, requested offer information, and at least one requested item before saving. **Prerequisites** - You know the client, vendor, requested item, unit, quantity, and bid deadline. - You are in a new Inquiry workspace or have an Inquiry with unsaved changes. **Steps** 1. In **Client**, select the company that sent or requested the Inquiry. 2. In **Vendor**, select the principal or vendor that will respond. 3. In **Client Inquiry Number**, enter the customer's reference when one is available. 4. In **Inquiry Date**, enter the date of the request. 5. In **Bid Due Date**, select a date on or after **Inquiry Date**. 6. In **Requested Offer Type**, select the requested offer type when the field is required for your company. 7. In the item grid, enter the requested product or service in **Item Description**. 8. In **Unit**, select the unit for the item when the field is available. 9. In **Qty**, enter a quantity greater than zero. 10. Select **Save**. ![Check the saved Inquiry stage and the **Send inquiry to principal** action after saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a0cba6ddf91e45763a6f7f0e47b80d12.png) **Result:** The saved sales-job workspace opens with the **Inquiry** stage. The workspace shows **Send inquiry to principal** when that action is available for the record. ## Send an inquiry and handle its branches The Inquiry action menu changes with the vendor, stage, saved state, and your permissions. Use the route that matches the question you need to answer. | If you need to… | Use this action | Before you select it | |---|---|---| | Send the Inquiry to an external principal | **Send inquiry to principal** | Mail sending is allowed, the vendor is external, and the Inquiry is new. | | Send it again after it was sent | **Re-send inquiry to principal** | Mail sending is allowed, the vendor is external, and the Inquiry is at the sent-to-principal stage. | | Record that it was sent without correspondence | **Consider As Sent To Principal** | The Inquiry is new, the vendor is external, and correspondence is unavailable. | | Approve or reject a regret request | **Regretting Approval** or **Regretting Disapproval** | The Inquiry is awaiting regret approval and you have advanced approval access. | | Approve or reject a cancellation request | **Approve Cancelled** or **Disapprove Cancelled** | The Inquiry is awaiting cancellation approval and you have advanced approval access. | | Reverse a regret or cancellation choice | **Consider as not regretted** or **Consider as not cancelled** | The Inquiry is in the corresponding regret or cancellation state. | | Reverse the considered-sent state | **Consider as not sent to principal** | The Inquiry is external and in the considered-sent state. | | Request a regret | **Regret** | The received job is before the Offer stage. | | Request a client cancellation | **Inquiry Cancelled By Client** | The received job is before the Offer stage. | | Produce an Inquiry printout | **Print** | Print access is available. | 1. Review the current **Inquiry** stage and the selected **Vendor** before opening the action menu. 2. Select the action that matches your vendor and stage from the table above. 3. Read the resulting stage or message before choosing another action. **Result:** The Inquiry remains in the branch selected by the action, or the action is unavailable until its stage, saved state, vendor, or permission condition is met. ## Resolve validation and save problems When an Inquiry action stops, use the exact message on screen to identify the correction. Correct the field or item it names, then retry the action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty. | Complete the field marked as required, then select **Save**. | | `This field is required ` | The item description is empty. | Enter the requested item in **Item Description**. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | The quantity is outside the accepted range. | Enter a quantity greater than zero and no greater than `999,999.00` in **Qty**. | | `You just changed the vendor after sending this inquiry to another vendor. The inquiry will return to draft` | The vendor was changed after the Inquiry was sent. | Review the vendor and continue from the draft state. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | The Inquiry has no item row to process. | Add an item and complete **Item Description** before saving. | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | The open Inquiry has not been saved before the next action. | Select **Save**, then retry the action. | | `Required Offer Type` | The requested offer type is required. | Complete **Requested Offer Type**. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | The bid deadline is required. | Complete **Bid Due Date**. | | `Error loading accounts` | The account lookup could not load its choices. | Retry the lookup before selecting **Client** or **Vendor**. | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | The vendor selection is not saved. | Save the vendor selection before retrying. | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | The client selection is not saved. | Save the client selection before retrying. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A text value contains a forbidden character. | Remove the character and retry the save. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request was not completed. | Review the current fields and retry the action. | | `Inquiry updated successfully` | The Inquiry update completed. | Continue with the next action for the current stage. | | `Inquiry successfully considered as sent to principal` | The Inquiry was marked as considered sent. | Continue with the next available Inquiry action. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | The Inquiry-to-Offer conversion completed. | Continue in [Offers](doc:offers). | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The requested operation completed. | Continue with the next available action. | The following messages belong to other workflows. Use the page for the named workflow when one of these messages appears: | Message | Owning workflow | |---|---| | `Items updated successfully` | Offers and orders | | `Order updated successfully` | Orders | | `Required Receiving Date` | Orders | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Offers and orders | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Custom fields | | `Job updated successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job deleted successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job regretted successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Job missed successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Potentials | | `Error saving custom fields` | Custom fields | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Delivered sales jobs | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Offers | | `An account with this name already exists` | Accounts | | `A project with this name already exists` | Projects | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Potentials | | `Please enter action for each milstone` | Payment milestones | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Cost sheets | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contacts | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Bill of materials | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Purchasing | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Products | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Purchasing | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Bill of materials | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Products | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | CRM integration | | `Please select one product` | Products | | `Required Receiving After` | Orders | | `Package must have at least one item` | Purchasing packages | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Products | | `Action not allowed` | Shared workflow controls | | `Please enter at least one email` | Invoices and payables | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Offers | | `Order must have at least one item` | Orders | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Orders | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchasing | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Serial numbers | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Serial numbers | | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Serial numbers | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Letters of guarantee | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | Letters of guarantee | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Activities | Selecting **Save** with the required new-Inquiry fields empty displayed the following validation summary: `Please Solve the Following Issues : | - Product type is required | - Job title is required | - Client is required | - Vendor is required | - Bid Due Date is required | - Item Description is required | - Vendor and client is the same.. It is not possible.` ![Use the validation summary after selecting **Save** to identify the fields to complete.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5ce84428101bdf92bb4336509d3ad240.png) The **Inquiry Date** and **Bid Due Date** boundary rules also apply when you save. If a date is refused, correct the date and retry **Save**. ## Convert an eligible inquiry to an offer An eligible Inquiry is a saved Inquiry that has no unsaved changes and meets the vendor and stage conditions for the Offer handover. The handover changes the sales flow from Inquiry to Offer. **Prerequisites** - The Inquiry is saved with no unsaved changes. - The Inquiry is before the Offered stage. - The vendor and your role meet the current **Go to offer** action condition. **Steps** 1. Open the saved Inquiry workspace. 2. Check the **Inquiry** stage in the workspace. 3. Open the Inquiry action menu. 4. Select **Go to offer** when it is available. **Result:** The Inquiry-to-Offer handover is initiated, and the next work continues in [Offers](doc:offers). # Invoice settings **Invoice settings** is the finance configuration page for choosing how invoices are generated for finance branches. The **Auto generate** choice determines whether the invoice is an editable proforma or a non-editable invoice. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Prepare access and branch conditions | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open the configuration page | [Open Invoice settings](#open-invoice-settings) | | Identify the fields and page areas | [Understand the Invoice settings screen](#understand-the-invoice-settings-screen) | | Change the invoice choice | [Change and save an invoice choice](#change-and-save-an-invoice-choice) | | Leave after changing a choice | [Handle branch and unsaved-change variations](#handle-branch-and-unsaved-change-variations) | | Diagnose a load or save message | [When loading or saving goes wrong](#when-loading-or-saving-goes-wrong) | | Review history or continue with invoice work | [Continue after Invoice settings](#continue-after-invoice-settings) or [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | ## Before you start The page uses the subscription, your editing access, the loaded company, and the open branch to decide which parts of the settings surface you can use. | Check | What must be true | What you see when it applies | | --- | --- | --- | | Subscription | The invoice-setting feature is included. | The settings surface loads. | | Editing access | You have permission to edit the settings. | **Save** and **Save and Close** are available when a change exists. | | Company | The company identifier is loaded. | **Last Modifications** appears. | | Branch | A finance branch is open. | Its invoice choices appear. | | Saved state | The loaded choice has no uncommitted change, or you are ready to handle the leave prompt. | The page can detect whether the choice changed. | If the subscription does not include the feature, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the settings surface. If editing access is unavailable, the save controls are not available. ## Open Invoice settings Open the finance configuration page through its registered route. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - The Configuration menu is available. Steps 1. Open the **Configuration** menu. 2. Select **Invoice settings**. ![Identify the Invoice settings page and its branch headings](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d36a1a7c30cf0298c3e6fc0aedbdc95b.png) **Result:** The Invoice settings page opens with the branch settings surface available. ## Understand the Invoice settings screen An invoice-setting branch is the expandable area where you choose the invoice-generation mode. The page also provides page actions and an audit history for the loaded company. | Area | What it contains | | --- | --- | | Branch list | Five branch headings. Open one heading to see its invoice choices. | | Invoice choice | **Auto generate**, with **Editable proforma** and **Non editable invoice** as the two radio choices. | | Page actions | **Save**, **Save and Close**, and a button titled **Refresh**. | | History | **Last Modifications**, with chronological user-action text and metadata fields including `Created On` and `By`. | The three invoice-choice labels have no required marker. No table or additional fields appear on the page. Selecting a branch heading opens that branch and closes another branch that was open. ![Compare the invoice-setting label and radio choices](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d36a1a7c30cf0298c3e6fc0aedbdc95b.png) Select **Last Modifications** when you need to review the audit history below the branch settings. ![Review the Last Modifications audit-log surface](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4fdd4ee1d586a166a699ab3a24122572.png) ## Change and save an invoice choice Select the option that matches the required invoice handling. Prerequisites - The invoice-setting feature is included in the subscription. - You have editing permission. - The branch you want to change is open. Steps 1. Select the invoice choice that matches the required invoice handling: | If the invoice must… | Select | | --- | --- | | Remain editable as a proforma | **Editable proforma** | | Remain non-editable | **Non editable invoice** | 2. Select the save action that matches what you want to do next: | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the settings page open | **Save** | | Save the choice and leave the page | **Save and Close** | The page validates the form before saving. A successful save refreshes the saved settings and the **Last Modifications** history. It displays `Your company process approvall settings has been saved successfully`. If the save returns an error, it displays `Server Error`. **Result:** The selected invoice choice is submitted through the save action you chose; an in-page save keeps the settings page open, while **Save and Close** leaves it after the save completes. ![Choose an invoice option and select a save action](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5fd2a79096048514faf5463f9f35362c.png) ## Handle branch and unsaved-change variations Select a branch heading to open its settings and close any other branch that is open. When a choice changes, the unlabeled close button at the top of the page opens a confirmation dialog. | Situation | What to do | | --- | --- | | The branch is closed | Select its branch heading or expand control to open it. | | Another branch is open | Select the branch heading you need; the previously open branch closes. | | You have not changed the setting | Select the unlabeled close button at the top of the page to leave directly. | | You changed the setting and select the unlabeled close button at the top of the page | Choose how to handle the unsaved change in the **Leaving Page** dialog. | Prerequisites - A branch is open. - You changed its invoice choice and want to leave before using the page save action. Steps 1. Select the unlabeled close button at the top of the page. 2. In the **Leaving Page** dialog, choose one action: | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the dialog open | **Cancel** | | Discard the changed choice and leave | **Don't Save** | | Save the changed choice through the dialog | **Save** | The dialog asks, `Do you want to save your changes?`. ![Choose how to handle an unsaved invoice-setting change](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/37d9785a986c6149dcff1646b6b3ab7f.png) **Result:** **Cancel** keeps the dialog open, **Don't Save** discards the change and lands at the home page, and the dialog **Save** action saves the changed choice. ## When loading or saving goes wrong Use the message text to identify whether the problem occurred while loading the settings or while saving a changed choice. | Message | What it indicates | Next action | | --- | --- | --- | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Loading the invoice settings failed. | Return to **Invoice settings** and try opening the page again. | | `Server Error` | Saving the changed setting returned an error. | Review the branch choice and use the save action again. | | Save controls are unavailable | Editing access is unavailable. | Review the setting without changing it, then use the unlabeled close button at the top of the page to leave. | | The settings surface is replaced by subscription-upgrade content | The subscription does not include the feature. | Use the subscription-upgrade surface before returning to invoice settings. | ## Continue after Invoice settings Use **Last Modifications** after reviewing or saving a branch choice to review the chronological user-action information for the loaded company. Prerequisites - The company identifier is loaded on the page. Steps 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Review the chronological user-action text and the metadata fields including `Created On` and `By`. **Result:** The audit-history surface is open below the branch settings. Continue invoice processing in [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle). # Market segments ## Market segments at a glance Market segments are reference values maintained in the company configuration area. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach the list and check that it loaded | [Find and open Market segments](#find-and-open-market-segments) | | Understand the field and list controls | [Understand the Market segments screen](#understand-the-market-segments-screen) | | Add or change an entry | [Create or edit a market segment](#create-or-edit-a-market-segment) | | Remove an entry or open export | [Delete or export the list](#delete-or-export-the-list) | | Resolve a message or unavailable surface | [When the list or save action does not work](#when-the-list-or-save-action-does-not-work) | | Maintain company branches | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | | Maintain product types | [Product Types](doc:configuration-company-product-types-view) | | Maintain frequent currencies | [Frequent Currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | | Maintain flags | [Flags](doc:configuration-company-flags) | ## Before you start You maintain Market segments from the company configuration area when the subscription includes the configuration feature and your account has the permissions needed for the action. Prerequisites | Before you start | What you need to know | | --- | --- | | Route | Open the Market segments configuration page. | | Included subscription | The configuration grid is available when the feature is included. | | New permission | **New** appears when the subscription surface is available and the new action is not hidden. | | Edit permission | The row edit action and row-click editing depend on edit access. | | Delete permission | The delete action depends on delete access. | | Import and export permissions | Import and export availability depends on your account permissions. | If the feature is not included, the configuration area shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the grid. With these conditions in place, continue to [Find and open Market segments](#find-and-open-market-segments). ## Find and open Market segments The list opens with **Market Segments** as its title and **Name** as its visible column. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - You have the route and subscription access described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). Steps 1. Open the Market segments configuration page. 2. Check that the page title reads **Market Segments**. 3. Check that the list contains the **Name** column. 4. Check that the list has loaded its rows before selecting a maintenance action. The list contains 31 rows and settles without a visible spinner. ![Check the Market Segments title, New button, Name column, and loaded rows.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b9d0c798649009423c6b05634d47bb4d.png) **Result:** The Market segments list is open, with **Name** visible as its list column and the list ready for review or maintenance. Continue to [Understand the Market segments screen](#understand-the-market-segments-screen) before choosing a maintenance action. ## Understand the Market segments screen The Market segments screen is a list with one visible business field, **Name**, and a shared action area. The form uses **Name** when you create or edit an entry; the list uses **Name** to identify each row. | Surface | What it contains or does | | --- | --- | | **Name** | The text field shown in the new/edit form. It is required for this configuration. | | **Name** column | The visible list column. It can be filtered, but it is not sortable or directly editable in the grid. | | Hidden fields | Display order, the market-segment identifier, and the company-branch identifier are stored fields rather than visible list columns. | | List header | Column headers are hidden for this configuration. | | Paging and row filter | Paging is disabled and the configured row filter is not shown. | | Action area | The screen shows **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**. | Other configuration lists use fields for survey answers, reference category questions, question units, currencies, banks, colours, surveys, costs, products, and dates. Those fields belong to their own configuration pages; use the related links in the overview rather than looking for them in a Market segments entry. When you are ready to maintain a value, continue to [Create or edit a market segment](#create-or-edit-a-market-segment). ## Create or edit a market segment Use **New** to add a value or open an existing row for editing, then save the **Name** so the list contains the corrected value. Prerequisites - The Market segments list is open. - You have the permission for the action you are taking. - You have the name to enter in front of you. Steps 1. Choose one route: | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Add a value | Select **New**. | | Change a saved value | Select the row's edit action, or select the row outside the action column when edit access is available. | 2. In **Name**, enter the market-segment name. 3. Select **Save**. 4. If the form reports "Name is required", enter a value in **Name**. 5. Select **Save** again. After a successful new entry, the application reports `Data saved Successfully`. After a successful edit, it reports `Data updated Successfully`, refreshes the list, and closes the popup. ![Use the visible list and New action as the starting point for a new or existing entry.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b9d0c798649009423c6b05634d47bb4d.png) **Result:** The saved or updated market segment appears in the Market segments list, and the popup is closed. For removal or export, continue to [Delete or export the list](#delete-or-export-the-list). ## Delete or export the list Deleting removes an eligible list entry; exporting opens the list export flow. Treat deletion as a removal of a reference value, and confirm the row is the one you intend to remove before choosing the delete action. Prerequisites - The Market segments list is open. - You have delete permission to remove a row. - You have export permission to use the export action. Steps 1. Choose one route: | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Remove a row | Open the row's delete action. | | Prepare an export | Select **Export** in the action area. | 2. When the confirmation displays `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`, select **Delete**. 3. Select **Cancel** to leave the row unchanged instead. 4. If you opened **Export**, choose the required export option in the export dialog. After a successful deletion, the application reports `Data Deleted Successfully` and updates the list. If the row is related to saved data, it reports `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted`. For another delete failure, it reports `Failed to Delete`. If the list contains only one item, it reports `Must have at least one item` instead of deleting it. **Result:** The row is removed and the **Market Segments** list is updated, the row remains unchanged after **Cancel**, or the export flow is open for the **Market Segments** list after selecting **Export**. ## When the list or save action does not work Use the message or the visible surface to choose the next check. The list and form have different failure points, so start with the place where the message appears. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The applied list filter contains forbidden characters. | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter and apply it again. | | The subscription-upgrade surface appears instead of the grid. | The configuration feature is not included. | Ask your administrator to review the subscription before attempting list maintenance. | | The sign-in form remains after submitting credentials. | The Market segments page did not open. | Sign in again, then open the Market segments configuration page. | | "Name is required" | **Name** has no value when the form is validated. | Enter the market-segment name in **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The row is related to saved data. | Keep the row and use the related business record rather than deleting this reference value. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete request failed for another reason. | Leave the row unchanged and retry after checking access. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains only one item. | Keep the remaining item; the last item cannot be deleted. | If the page title **Market Segments** or **New** is absent, the Market segments page has not loaded. Open the Market segments configuration page again and check the page title before selecting a maintenance action. ## What to do next After a successful save or edit, the application refreshes the list and closes the popup. After a successful deletion, it updates the list and renumbers the remaining display order. Continue from the list when you need to maintain another reference value. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Maintain branches | [Branches](doc:configuration-company-branchs-view) | | Maintain product types | [Product Types](doc:configuration-company-product-types-view) | | Maintain frequent currencies | [Frequent Currencies](doc:configuration-company-company-currencies) | | Maintain flags | [Flags](doc:configuration-company-flags) | **Result:** You are back at the Market segments list, with the saved, updated, or remaining rows ready for the next configuration task. # Personalizing your workspace Use the available work surface to keep the view that matters to you in focus. Use the card-and-chart surface to find or add the cards and charts arranged for your role. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Choose a work view, list group, or workspace scope | [Set your work view](#set-your-work-view) | | Find or add a card or chart | [Manage widgets](#manage-widgets) | | Understand why a tab or control is unavailable | [Handle workspace availability branches](#handle-workspace-availability-branches) | | Work with tasks from the work surface | [Manage workspace tasks](my-desk-tasks.md) | | Record a visit, meeting, or call | [Record workspace activities](my-desk-activities.md) | | Read cards and charts | Cards and charts | | Choose a widget by its title | Widget catalog | ![The work surface with its current and archived views](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8dfc8a139aeb8fc3262a520aba9739a8.png) ## Before you start ### Prerequisites - Know whether you are working in the work surface or the card-and-chart surface. - Have the subscription that provides the work tabs you need. - Have tabs available for your role when you want to manage widgets. - If you need to change widgets, use the card-and-chart surface in edit mode. The work surface can show a standard or principal-user heading. Tasks, Activities, and Calendar depend on the applicable subscription and are disabled for principal users. Widget-editing controls appear only in edit mode. The columns in several workspace lists depend on your saved layout, so use the headers that appear in your lists. ## Open the workspace Open the surface that matches the change you want to make. Steps 1. Open the work view from the application menu. 2. Open the card-and-chart view from the application menu. **Result:** The selected workspace surface is open. ## Recognize the workspace surfaces The work surface is for reviewing grouped work, tasks, activities, graphs, and calendar information. The card-and-chart surface is a set of role-based tabs that displays the measures chosen for your work. ### Work view The work view uses one workspace context across its views. Choose from the scope values rendered for your workspace. Its list groups and work tabs are the values rendered for your workspace. The work surface includes its rendered list groups, work tabs, and workspace readouts. ![The work surface with its work tabs and list groups](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/eb8025ca8407f3c4eb5b16af3f5dad42.png) ### Card-and-chart view The tabs divide the information into separate views. **Search for widget** finds a card or chart already on the active tab. The widget picker uses **Select all**, a keyword search, selected rows, and **OK**. Use the controls that appear on your screen. ## Set your work view Use the work view when you want one work context across lists, graphs, tasks, activities, and calendar views. ### Prerequisites - Open the work view. - If you use Tasks, Activities, or Calendar, confirm that the tab is available to you. Steps 1. Select **Filter**. 2. Choose a scope value rendered for your workspace. 3. Select the view or list group that matches your work. | If you need to… | Select the value shown in the **Filter** column | | --- | --- | | Review grouped work | the list view | | Review current work | the current list group | | Review archived work | the archived list group | | Review graphs | the graphs view | | Review tasks | the tasks view | | Review activities | the activities view | | Review scheduled work | the calendar view | Use the new-activity menu when you need to start a related activity: | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Record a visit | **Visit** | | Record a meeting | **Meeting** | | Record a call | **Call** | **Result:** The work view shows the selected scope, work tab, or list group. The selected tab and list group remain stored for the workspace. ## Manage widgets Use the card-and-chart surface when you need to find a card or chart on the active tab or add one that is available to your role. ### Prerequisites - Open the card-and-chart surface. - Use edit mode for widget changes. Steps 1. Select **Search for widget** to find a card or chart already on the active tab. 2. Select **Widget** to open the widget picker when editing is available. 3. Select a widget row to include it in the selection. 4. Complete the widget change. | Action | Select | | --- | --- | | Select every available row | **Select all** | | Add the selection and close the picker | **OK** | | Save the tabs | **Save** | The picker excludes widgets already on the active tab and sorts the available titles. A successful save displays `Your request was completed successfully`. A failed request displays `An error occurred while processing your request`. **Result:** The selected cards and charts are included on the active tab, and the saved arrangement remains available after edit mode ends. ### Edit tabs Use the edit controls when you need to restore standard tabs, add widgets, or save the arrangement. ### Prerequisites - Open the card-and-chart surface in edit mode. **Steps** 1. Choose the edit action for your change. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Restore standard tabs | **Restore Standard Tabs**, then **Restore** | | Add a widget | **Widget** | | Save the tabs | **Save** | **Result:** The edit controls perform the selected tab or widget change while edit mode is available. ## Handle workspace availability branches The workspace surface changes with your role, subscription, saved tabs, and edit mode. ### Prerequisites - Have the workspace surface open. Steps 1. Choose the path that matches what you see. | If you see… | Use this path | | --- | --- | | My Desk | Follow [Set your My Desk view](#set-your-my-desk-view). | | Principal Desk | Use the available principal-user workspace tabs. | | Tasks, Activities, or Calendar disabled | Use the available tabs or ask your administrator about the required subscription. | | `Your role has no dashboard` | Read `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard`, then contact your administrator. | | Card-and-chart view without widget-editing controls | Open the card-and-chart view in edit mode before changing widgets. | **Result:** You are using the workspace branch available for your role and subscription. ## When a workspace change does not appear Use this table when a workspace action does not produce the expected screen response. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Data saved Successfully` after saving a task or activity | The task or activity save completed. | Continue from the updated task list or activity view. | | `Error while deleting task` | The task deletion failed. | Review the task and try the deletion again. | | `Are you sure that you want to mark this task as completed?` | PAMS is asking you to confirm completion. | Confirm the action in the confirmation dialog. | | `Are you sure that you want to un-complete this task?` | PAMS is asking you to confirm removing completion. | Confirm the action in the confirmation dialog. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | The activity action is restricted to the job branch. | Use an activity belonging to your branch. | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | The activity has no topic and note combination required for completion. | Add one topic and at least one note. | | `There is no topic to print` | The activity has no topic available for printing. | Add a topic before printing. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The card-and-chart request completed successfully. | Continue with the saved arrangement. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The card-and-chart request failed. | Review the changes and submit them again. | | List headers differ from another workspace view | The list columns depend on your saved layout. | Work from the headers visible in the current list. | **Result:** You have a message-specific action or a supported next step for the workspace response. ## Continue from your workspace An opened record is a linked record that you inspect without leaving My Desk. Use the detailed pages when the next task belongs to the record rather than to the workspace arrangement. ### Prerequisites - Have a linked record opened in My Desk. Steps 1. Select a linked record in My Desk. 2. Select its titled tab to return to the opened record. 3. Select the pen action when you need the record's normal page. 4. Select the close action when you finish reviewing the record. Saving a new task validates the task form, reloads the task list, and closes the task popup. Use [Manage tasks from My Desk](my-desk-tasks.md) for task actions, [Record activities from My Desk](my-desk-activities.md) for activity actions, Cards and charts for reading cards and charts, and Widget catalog for widget choices. **Result:** You are at the detailed page or workspace view for the next task. ## Related - [My Desk workspace](my-desk-workspace.md). - [Manage tasks from My Desk](my-desk-tasks.md). - [Record activities from My Desk](my-desk-activities.md). - Cards and charts. - Widget catalog. - [Understanding the interface](understanding-the-interface.md). # Pipeline and status widgets ## Pipeline and status widgets Pipeline and status widgets are grouped dashboard views for reviewing sales coverage and near-term activity. Use them when you need to compare offer or order status, accounts, bids, forecasts, or visits. The Dashboard is organised into role-based tabs, so the visible tab names separate the measures available for your work. The dashboard view includes **Dashboard**, **Principals Report**, **Today**, Next 10 days, and Last 10 days. Each available widget title identifies the subject you are reviewing. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Locate a widget on a visible dashboard tab | [Find a widget on the dashboard](#find-a-widget-on-the-dashboard) | | Read pipeline, account, offer-status, or order-status rows | [Understand the grouped results](#understand-the-grouped-results) | | Choose a time-based bid, forecast, or visit view | [Choose a bid, forecast, or visit view](#choose-a-bid-forecast-or-visit-view) | | Review dashboard setup and role-based tabs | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Add or manage widgets in the catalog | [Dashboard widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog) | | Review sales and backlog measures | [Sales and backlog widgets](doc:sales-and-backlog-widgets) | | Review management reporting measures | [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets) | ![Compare the dashboard tabs, widget titles, and sort controls before choosing a view](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Before you start The dashboard library is available when its subscription check passes. A visible tab must be available, and the active tab must contain widgets. The search field and widget titles appear for an active user or MRM tab that contains widgets. A result also depends on selecting the matching widget and having the dashboard surface it uses. | What must be in place | What you can look for | |---|---| | Dashboard library access | The dashboard library is available. | | A visible active tab | The tab title is visible and the tab is active. | | Widgets on that tab | **Search for widget** and the widget titles are available. | | A matching widget and its dashboard surface | The selected widget displays its grouped result. | No record, saved-state, permission, or data-collection step is part of reviewing these grouped dashboard results. ## Find a widget on the dashboard Use this procedure to locate a displayed pipeline, status, account, bid, forecast, or visit widget. **Prerequisites** - The dashboard library and a visible active tab are available. - The active tab contains widgets. **Steps** 1. Open **Dashboard**. 2. Select the visible dashboard tab that contains the widget. 3. Open the active tab's widget list. 4. Enter the displayed widget title in **Search for widget**. 5. Select the widget title that matches the measure you need. **Result:** The active tab shows the widget title that matches your search. The dashboard also shows **Sort by Booking**, **Sort by Target**, and **Sort by Achievement**. ## Understand the grouped results Grouped result widgets summarise sales work as rows and measures rather than as data-entry fields. The visible dashboard includes pipeline, account, offer-status, and order-status subjects. **Prerequisites** - You have found the relevant widget title on the active dashboard tab. **Steps** 1. Select the displayed widget title that matches the result you need. | If you need to… | Select | Then read | |---|---|---| | Review pipeline results | **Sales Pipeline** | The pipeline rows | | Review account results | **Accounts in Sales Pipeline** | The account rows and measures | | Review firm-offer status | **Statuses of Jobs in Offer Stage (Firm Offers)** | The offer-status rows | | Review running-order status | **Statuses of Running Orders** | The order-status rows | The pipeline rows can include **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Budget offers**, **Firm offers**, and **Orders**. Use the visible sort choices when comparing the displayed measures. **Result:** You can identify the pipeline, account, offer-status, and order-status result family from its displayed title and read the grouped rows shown for that widget. Read the displayed rows, measures, counts, values, and columns for the selected widget. ## Choose a bid, forecast, or visit view Bid and visit widgets separate activity by period, while forecast widgets present a forecast measure. Choose the title that matches the question you need to answer. **Prerequisites** - The active dashboard tab contains the bid, forecast, or visit title you need. **Steps** 1. Select the displayed widget title that matches your question. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review upcoming bid due dates | **Bid Due Date in Next 10 Days** | | Review bid due dates in the previous period | The displayed bid title for the previous 10 days | | Review a forecast measure | The displayed forecast title that matches the measure | | Review visits from the previous 10 days | **Visits in Last 10 Days** | | Review planned visits for the next 10 days | **Planned Visits in Next 10 Days** | 2. On a forecast view, select **Including Forecast** when that control is available. **Result:** The active tab shows the selected bid, forecast, or visit view. ## When a widget or result is not available Start with the active tab and the displayed widget title when a result is not available. The widget list depends on the active tab containing widgets, and each widget depends on its matching selection and dashboard surface. **Prerequisites** - You are on the dashboard. - You can see the active tab and its displayed widget titles. **Steps** 1. Check the active tab and the displayed widget title. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | The widget list is not shown | Select a visible active tab that contains widgets. | | A named widget does not appear | Check another visible tab and search using the displayed widget title. | | A result does not appear after selecting its title | Check that the selected title matches the result and that its dashboard surface is available. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue reviewing the displayed dashboard result. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Select the displayed widget title again. | 2. Read the displayed rows, measures, counts, values, and columns for the configured dashboard surface. 3. Use the surrounding widget title to identify the result opened by an icon-only view action. **Result:** You know which tab, title, or dashboard surface to check, and you have reviewed the available rows, measures, counts, values, and columns without changing the underlying records. ## What to read next | If you need to… | Read | |---|---| | Understand dashboard setup and role-based tabs | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Add, remove, or manage widgets | [Dashboard widget catalog](doc:dashboard-widget-catalog) | | Review sales and backlog measures | [Sales and backlog widgets](doc:sales-and-backlog-widgets) | | Review management reporting measures | [Management report widgets](doc:management-report-widgets) | | Choose principals for the Principal report | [Principal report](doc:principal-report) | | Review general navigation | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) | The message `Please choose one or more principals` belongs to the Principal report's principal selection and report-generation panel. Use [Principal report](doc:principal-report) for that task. # Pricing Quotation active lists ## Pricing Quotation lists at a glance Pricing Quotation lists are work lists for requests for quotation and quotations that support the pricing stage before an offer. Open them from **Pricing Quotation** at `Sales ▸ Pricing Quotation`. An RFQ is a request for quotation that you review before working with a quotation. Use the primary tabs to choose the work you need to review: | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review every Pricing Quotation | **All** | | Review requests for quotation | **RFQs** | | Review quotations | **Quotations** | | Review outcome lists | **Archived** | | Work with the RFQ record | [Pricing Quotation RFQs](doc:pricing-quotation-rfqs) | | Work with a quotation record | [Pricing Quotation quotations](doc:pricing-quotation-quotations) | | Understand the wider Pricing Quotation work | [Pricing Quotation overview](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Your account includes the Buyout Job Module. - You know whether you need **All**, **RFQs**, **Quotations**, or **Archived**. - You can open **Pricing Quotation** from the menu. The list and its tabs appear when the Buyout Job Module is included. If the module is not included, the list surface is replaced by the subscription-upgrade surface. You can review the list without completing required fields or validation groups. ## Find and open a list **Prerequisites** - You have the access described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). **Steps** 1. Open **Pricing Quotation**. 2. Select the tab that matches your work. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review every Pricing Quotation | **All** | | Review requests for quotation | **RFQs** | | Review quotations | **Quotations** | | Review outcome lists | **Archived** | | If you select… | You open… | |---|---| | **All** | the complete Pricing Quotation list | | **RFQs** | requests for quotation | | **Quotations** | quotations | | **Archived** | archived Pricing Quotation outcomes | ![Check the primary list tabs and the list headers before choosing a work list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2dfbdd15c2b9ed42fadc84c349c4bb2e.png) **Result:** The selected Pricing Quotation list opens at its corresponding address. ## Understand the active list An active list is a table of Pricing Quotation work. The headers tell you which request, person, supplier, client, stage, date, or price each row contains. The main RFQ list shows these headers: | Header | What to use it for | |---|---| | **Package no.** | Identify the package. | | **Sales job No.** | Identify the related sales job. | | **Purchaser** | See the purchasing owner. | | **Offer type** | See the offer type. | | **Bid due date** | Check the bid deadline. | | **Sub-supplier** | See the sub-supplier. | | **Client** | See the client. | | **RFQ stage** | Check the request's stage. | | **Package title** | Identify the package subject. | The headers change with the list you select. **All** uses **Package stage**; **RFQs** uses **RFQ stage**; **Quotations** adds **Offer price** and `Offer price in €`. The list also shows **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings** as titled controls. ![Check the RFQ stage and deadline headers in the RFQs list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b842b1c968965fa36f675e4b63f79c30.png) Your saved list layout determines the headers you see, so use the headers currently shown in your list when you compare rows. The list supports column reordering and resizing. It displays 30 records per page and provides page-navigation buttons. The standard grid displays the record count, offer total, order total, and order-backlog total in the configured main currency. The grid has a visible header filter. **Filter Row** exposes filter cells beneath the column headings; apply the criteria with the filter action or by pressing Enter. Grouping starts collapsed when it is available. The standard grid's columns, visibility, data types, widths, and captions come from the selected saved layout, so the concrete column set can differ between accounts or saved layouts. The Orders tab is not available on this screen. The primary list shows 18 additional visible controls without text labels. The screen has no labelled form fields. Use the titled controls when you need to refresh, change the list layout, or open settings. ![Check the quotation price headers and the titled list controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5dbf07cade72cd7c2e039ffb83c6468e.png) ## Open the Archived list choices Archived lists are outcome lists for Pricing Quotation work that is no longer in the main active lists. Select **Archived** when you need to review those outcomes. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the Pricing Quotation list. **Steps** 1. Select **Archived**. 2. Choose the outcome list that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to review… | Select | |---|---| | RFQs without a quotation | **Unquoted RFQs** | | Cancelled RFQs | **Cancelled RFQs** | | Rejected quotations | **Rejected Quotations** | | Deleted Pricing Quotations | **Deleted** | 3. Use the headers on the selected outcome list. | List | Additional headers | |---|---| | **Unquoted RFQs** | **Regret reason**, **Regret date** | | **Cancelled RFQs** | **Cancel reason**, **Cancel date** | | **Rejected Quotations** | **Reject date**, **Reject reason** | | **Deleted** | **RFQ stage** | The Received choice is not available under **Archived**. ![Check the four outcome choices under Archived.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/faa03c1296a086cfa0c1cf46fcc7c72a.png) The detailed procedures for these four outcome lists are in [Pricing Quotation exception lists](doc:pricing-quotation-exception-lists). **Result:** The selected archived list opens with its outcome-specific headers. ## When the list does not match Use this procedure when a filter, subscription, or saved layout prevents you from getting the list view you expect. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the Pricing Quotation list. **Steps** 1. Match what you see with the alternatives below and follow the corresponding action. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter and submit it again. | | The list or its tabs do not appear | Check that your account includes the Buyout Job Module. | | The headers differ from another list | Work from the headers currently shown in your saved list layout. | **Result:** The filter is corrected, the subscription requirement is identified, or you have the current saved-layout headers to use for comparison. Export availability depends on your access. Opening a record from a data row and using an alternate saved layout are separate actions from choosing a list tab. ## Know what is next A Pricing Quotation row identifies work that can continue in its record. Select a data-row cell other than the edit-cell area to open the corresponding Pricing Quotation record. From there, continue in [Pricing Quotation RFQs](doc:pricing-quotation-rfqs) for RFQ work or [Pricing Quotation quotations](doc:pricing-quotation-quotations) for quotation work. To keep the list open while opening a record, open the row context menu and select **Open in new tab**. Use [Pricing Quotation exception lists](doc:pricing-quotation-exception-lists) for the four Archived outcome lists. Use [Pricing Quotation overview](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) for the wider work flow. **Result:** You have the list that matches your work and the focused page for the next record task. # Principal invoices ## Principal invoices A principal invoice is the finance record for an invoice issued on behalf of a principal. It sits after the sales-job work and before the principal payment flow. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find an existing principal invoice | [Find and open a principal invoice](#find-and-open-a-principal-invoice) | | Understand the list, record, and related tabs | [Understand the principal-invoice screen](#understand-the-principal-invoice-screen) | | Change the record information | [Update the principal-invoice record](#update-the-principal-invoice-record) | | Record a principal payment or deduction | [Manage payments, deductions, and paid status](#manage-payments-deductions-and-paid-status) | | Continue with the general invoice status flow | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | Work in the separate payment routes | [Record a payment](doc:record-payment) | The application provides separate list and record routes for principal invoices. The finance navigation destination is **Tracking Principal Invoices**. A principal invoice belongs to the principal-side chain from principal sales invoice to principal incoming payment; the record can also carry the **Awaiting Principal Payoff** status. In the finance workspace, **Tracking Principal Invoices** is the active principal-invoice tab. The same workspace also exposes **All**, **Sales Invoices**, **Commission Invoices**, and **Incoming Payments**. ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. The record routes require authentication. - The invoice record is loaded before record actions are available. - The finance feature is included in your subscription. - The list has a selected layout. The grid appears only after the layout is available. - The list is not in minimum layout when you need its status filters. - To use **Save** or **Save and Close**, you have permission to edit the record. - For a record action, check the current **Status** first. The status controls whether **Consider As Paid**, **Consider As Not Paid**, **Comments**, **Deductions**, **Principal Payments**, and **Last Modifications** are available. ## Find and open a principal invoice A principal-invoice list is the place to narrow the existing records before opening one record for review or editing. **Prerequisites** - You can open `/finance/principal-invoices` or `/finance/principal-invoices/view`. **Steps** 1. Open the principal-invoice list. ![Check the finance heading, status filters, and list headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/53e12b5feac33d24203a21554c07b5de.png) 2. Select the filter that matches the work you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | See every principal invoice | **All** | | See upcoming invoices | **Upcoming** | | See receivable invoices | **Receivable** | | See paid invoices | **Paid** | ![Check the four status filters above the grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e9bd3771f405bee7ec5e01a2a5505a6.png) 3. Select the invoice row you want to review. **Result:** The selected principal-invoice record is open for review. ### Export the current principal-invoice list **Prerequisites** - The principal-invoice list is open. **Steps** 1. Open the list toolbar's **Settings** menu. 2. Select **Export**. **Result:** The export options for the current list are opened. ## Understand the principal-invoice screen The principal-invoice screen combines a list with a record form and status-dependent tabs. The list headers currently shown are: | Header group | List headers | |---|---| | Record and dates | **Job no.**, **Invoice No.**, **Client**, **Principal**, `Invoice date`, `Shipment date` | | Amounts and notes | **Note**, **Invoice amount**, **Paid**, **Deduction** | | State | **Status** | ![Compare the visible grid headers with the list you are using.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7fbb43136ea6bdde301791351d89f87a.png) The record information includes the following fields: | Group | Fields | |---|---| | Record information | **Client**, **Vendor**, `Shipment Date`, **Invoice Date**, `Order Date`, `Delivery Date` | | People and product | **End User**, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **Item Description** | | References | **Vendor Order No.**, **Client Order No.**, **Invoice No.**, **Note** | | Payment popup | **Payment Date**, **comment**, and the amount control | | Deduction popup | **Deduction reason**, **comment**, and the amount control | | Consider-as-paid popup | **For Sure Paid**, **Probably Paid**, and **Reason For Consideration As Paid** | The **Payment Date**, payment amount, and payment comment are required in the principal-payment popup. The payment amount must be at least `1`, cannot exceed the remaining amount, and uses the `#,##0.00` format. The payment date cannot be later than today. The deduction amount, **Deduction reason**, and deduction comment are required in the principal-deduction popup. The deduction amount must be at least `1`, cannot exceed the remaining amount, and uses the `#,##0.00` format. The **Deduction reason** list contains the reasons available to your company. The seeded options are `Late Delivery`, `Technical Reason`, `Missed Parts`, `Missed Services`, and `Unreasoned`. The record tabs are **Comments**, **Deductions**, **Principal Payments**, and **Last Modifications**. The deductions grid uses `Deduction reason`, `Amount`, and `Comment`. The principal-payments grid uses `Payment date`, `Amount`, and `Comment`. These tabs depend on the record and your access. **Comments** requires a loaded record, a non-upcoming and non-awaiting status, and the Comments subscription. **Deductions** requires a status of at least due. **Principal Payments** is hidden for a principal user. **Last Modifications** requires a loaded record that is not upcoming or awaiting payoff. The add control on **Deductions** is available when the record is not paid or considered paid. The add control on **Principal Payments** is available for the due-to-paid payment statuses. The list toolbar also exposes the button titles **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. The columns you see depend on the saved list layout, so work from the headers visible in your list. > **Note:** Use the headers visible in your list when the saved layout supplies a different set > of columns. Use the numeric amount box in the popup you opened: the payment popup's box is the payment amount, and the deduction popup's box is the deduction amount. ## Update the principal-invoice record Updating a principal invoice changes the information held on the finance record. **Client**, **Vendor**, **Invoice No.**, and **Note** are required only where your company configures them as mandatory; the other record fields listed above are not required by the form. **Prerequisites** - You have opened a saved principal-invoice record. - You can edit the record. - You know which record information needs changing. **Steps** 1. Select the field you need to change: **Client**, **Vendor**, the shipment, invoice, order, or delivery date field, **End User**, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Vendor Order No.**, **Client Order No.**, **Invoice No.**, **Job Title**, **Item Description**, or **Note**. 2. Enter or select the corrected value. 3. Choose the save action that matches what you want to do next. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the record open after the update | **Save** | | Save the update and leave the record | **Save and Close** | 4. Read the success message after the update. The message is `Your request was completed successfully`. 5. Choose what to do in the departure confirmation dialog. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Leave without saving | **Don't Save** | | Save and leave | **Save** | | Stay on the record | **Cancel** | **Result:** The principal-invoice record is updated, and **Save and Close** leaves the record after the successful update. ## Manage payments, deductions, and paid status Payment and deduction entries record how the principal invoice is settled. Paid-status actions record whether the invoice is considered paid or returned to a due state. ### Consider an invoice paid **Prerequisites** - The record has a positive remaining amount. - The record is not upcoming, paid, or already considered paid. **Steps** 1. Select **Consider As Paid**. 2. Enter the required values in **For Sure Paid**, **Probably Paid**, and **Reason For Consideration As Paid**. 3. Select **Save** in the popup. **Result:** The consider-as-paid popup has been completed, the invoice is considered paid after the operation succeeds, and the message is `Updated successfully`. ### Return an invoice to due **Prerequisites** - The record is in the considered-paid status. **Steps** 1. Select **Consider As Not Paid**. **Result:** The invoice returns to the due status after the operation succeeds, and the message is `Updated successfully`. ### Add a deduction or principal payment **Prerequisites** - For a deduction, the record status is at least due and the deductions tab is available. - For a principal payment, you are not a principal user and the payment tab is available. - The record is in a status that permits the corresponding add action. **Steps** 1. Select the tab for the work you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add or review deductions | **Deductions** | | Add or review principal payments | **Principal Payments** | 2. In the toolbar above the selected tab's grid, select the plus control. 3. Complete the popup that matches the tab you selected. | If you selected… | Complete these fields | |---|---| | **Deductions** | the amount, **Deduction reason**, and required **comment** | | **Principal Payments** | the amount, **Payment Date**, and required **comment** | 4. Select **Save**. 5. Read the success message. The message is `Your request was completed successfully`. **Result:** The saved deduction or principal payment is shown in its related grid. ## When a principal-invoice action fails Use the message on screen to decide whether to correct the form, retry the list, or check the record status and access. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Check validation` | A popup validation group rejected the values. | Check each required field and the amount or date rule, then select **Save** in the popup again. | | `Updating error ` + error | The update service returned an error. | Check the record values and your edit access before retrying. | | `Deductions Reasons failed to load` | The deduction-reason list could not load. | Return to the deduction entry after the list is available. | | `NO Data to Export` | The list has no data to export. | Check the selected filter and list contents. | | `Load data failed: ` + msg | The list load returned an error message. | Retry the list load and check the displayed message. | ## After reviewing a principal invoice Saving a record update reports `Your request was completed successfully`. Status actions report `Updated successfully`. Saving a principal payment or deduction reloads the related data, closes its popup, and reports `Your request was completed successfully`. The **Last Modifications** tab is the record-history destination. Use [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) for the general invoice workspace and status flow. Use [Record a payment](doc:record-payment) for the separate finance payment routes. **Result:** You know whether the principal-invoice record was updated or whether the payment or deduction was saved, and you have the next finance procedure for the work that follows. # Projects ## Projects overview A project record is the saved information managed through the Projects list and its record surfaces. Use the list to find a project or start a new one; use the record surface to review or maintain its information and related tabs. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list and choose an existing project or a new one | [Find a project](#find-a-project) | | Review fields, options, tabs, and registration surfaces | [Understand the project record](#understand-the-project-record) | | Enter or change project information | [Create or update project information](#create-or-update-project-information) | | Interpret differences between new and saved records | [Handle project surface variations](#handle-project-surface-variations) | | Correct a Projects validation message | [When project work goes wrong](#when-project-work-goes-wrong) | | Continue with jobs, contacts, files, or registrations | [Continue from the project record](#continue-from-the-project-record) | | Work in the project-management workspace | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Work with contacts | [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview) | | Work with files | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Work with registrations | [VL registrations](doc:vl-registrations) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - You are signed in and have access to the Projects feature. - Your company subscription includes Projects. The project surfaces are shown when the Projects feature is included. - To use a saved record's tabs, open an existing project record. The record tabs are shown when the project has been saved. - To use a registration form, the registration feature must be available to your company and you must have access to edit the project. - Have the project name and the information you want to enter ready before you open the form. The form can show required markers for some fields according to your company's setup. Treat a field with a required marker as mandatory before saving. The new and saved record surfaces can therefore show different fields or requirements. ## Find a project The Projects list is where you locate an existing project or open the new-project surface. Its current list state and visible headers tell you which records and information you are viewing. Prerequisites - Know whether you need an existing project or a new project. - For an existing project, have a project name or another identifying value visible in the list. Steps 1. Open the Projects list. ![Use the list headers to identify the project row.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/60616a9c7308a3527bd882fb1c205280.png) 2. Select **Open** to view the open-project list. 3. Use the visible headers to identify a row. The current list shows `Name`, `Full name`, `Status`, `Vendor by`, `Construction by`, `Engineering by`, `PMC by`, `Description`, `Market segment`, and `Owner company`. 4. Choose the path that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open an existing project | The project row | | Start a new project | **New** | ![Select **New** from the Projects list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1209a1608b358e6f06122acfbaae18c7.png) **Result:** The existing project record or the new-project surface is open. ## Understand the project record The project record holds project details first, then saved-record tabs for related work. A registration is a related project entry with its own vendor, status, registration number, and registration date. ### Project details The main details area includes the following fields: | Field | What to enter or choose | |---|---| | **Project Name** | The project's name. It is required on a new project and required only where your company configures it on an existing project. | | **Full Name** | The full project name. This field is required only when your company setup marks it as required. | | **Sales Responsible** | The responsible salesperson. | | **Estimated Cost** | The estimated cost. The value cannot be below `0`. | | **Final Product** | The final product. | | **Status** | Choose one of `Proceeding`, `Completed`, `OnHold`, `Planned`, `Canceled`, or `Closed`. | | **Expected Completion On** | The expected completion date. This field is required only when your company setup marks it as required. | | **Location** | The project location. | | **Market Segment** | Choose one or more of `Oil and Gas - General`, `Chemicals`, `Petrochemicals`, `Fertilizers`, `Water and Waste water`, `Electricity and Power`, `Food and Beverage`, `Engineering and Contracting`, `Service & Maintenance`, `Pharmaceutical`, `Paper & pulp`, `Iron & Steel Industry`, `Automotive`, `General Industries`, `Military Defense`, `Military Production`, `Oil & Gas - Upstream`, `Oil & Gas - Refineries`, `Oil & Gas - Marketing`, `Oil & Gas - Pipeline`, `Cement Industry`, `Sugar Industry`, `Mining`, `Oil & Gas Down Stream`, `Agriculture`, `Textile & leather products`, `Construction`, `Computer-Software`, `Marine`, `Ceramic`, or `ZZ-doc-Enter-Market-Segment-Nam`. | | **Importance** | Choose `Low`, `Normal`, `High`, or `Highest`. | | **Created on** | Enter a date when your company setup marks **Created on** as required. | | **Description** | The project description. | ![Review the main project fields before saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1c97617159f2ce039e54d71fc5104fe2.png) ### Saved-record tabs After the project is saved, the record can show **Comments**, **Attachment**, **Contact Persons**, **Project Jobs**, **Registrations**, and **Last Modifications**. These tabs organize related work around the project rather than changing the main project details. ### Registration dialog In **Registrations**, select **New** to open `New Registration`. The dialog contains **Vendor**, **Status**, **Registration Number**, and **Registration date**. The **Status** list contains `Registered`, `Proceeding`, and `Not Registered`. ## Create or update project information Enter project information on a new project or change the details of an existing project with this procedure. Prerequisites - Open the new-project surface or an existing editable project record. - Have the project information ready. - Use the required markers currently shown on the form; some requirements depend on your company's configuration. Steps 1. In **Project Name**, enter the project name. 2. In **Full Name**, enter the full project name when the field is shown. 3. In **Sales Responsible**, choose the responsible salesperson when one is needed. 4. In **Estimated Cost**, enter a value of `0` or more. 5. Complete the remaining project fields that apply to your work. 6. In a choice field, use the option set shown for that field. | Field | Options | |---|---| | **Status** | `Proceeding`; `Completed`; `OnHold`; `Planned`; `Canceled`; `Closed` | | **Market Segment** | The 30 values listed in [Project details](#project-details) | | **Importance** | `Low`; `Normal`; `High`; `Highest` | 7. Select **Save** to save the project and remain on the record. 8. Select **Save and Close** to save the project and leave the form. ![Enter the project name before saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fd68d89b5e255c0dfa0e2dd9fe1b44a2.png) **Result:** The project form shows the available save controls **Save** and **Save and Close** for completing the project-information task. ## Handle project surface variations The project surface changes with the record state and your company's setup. A new project uses the new-record form; an existing project uses the saved-record form and can expose related tabs. | What changes | What you see | |---|---| | New versus existing record | **Project Name** is shown for a new record and a separate existing-record version is used for a saved record. | | Company subscription | The project details surface is available when Projects is included in the subscription. | | Required-field configuration | **Full Name**, **Expected Completion On**, **Created on**, and the existing-record version of **Project Name** are required only where configured. | | Saved-record state | **Comments**, **Attachment**, **Contact Persons**, **Project Jobs**, **Registrations**, and **Last Modifications** are associated with a saved project. | | List setup | The Projects list uses the headers visible in your current list layout. | | Related-data setup | The registration and contact areas use the choices and rows available for your company. | The list layout can present columns selected for your account. Work from the headers you can see rather than expecting every project list to have the same columns. > **Note:** The headers in your Projects list are the headers to use when you identify > a project row. ## When project work goes wrong The Projects surface reports the following messages for the listed conditions: | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | A project name or related value contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Remove the unsupported character and enter the value again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The list filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character from the filter and apply it again. | | `You already have a contact with this name` | The Contact Persons surface already has a contact with this name. | Use a different contact name or review the existing contact in [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview). | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The shared file or contact surface completed the requested operation. | Continue from the surface you opened. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | The shared file surface rejected a name containing an unsupported character. | Remove the unsupported character and enter the file or folder name again in [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files). | ## Continue from the project record The project record is the starting point for related project work. Choose the surface that matches the next job instead of repeating the project-information procedure. | If you need to… | Use | |---|---| | Review or manage project jobs | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) | | Work with people associated with the project | [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview) | | Add or review attachments | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Review project registrations | [VL registrations](doc:vl-registrations) | | Read comments or modification history | **Comments** or **Last Modifications** on the saved project record | Prerequisites - Open a saved project record to use its related tabs. - Select the tab that matches the work you need to continue. Steps 1. Select the tab for the work you need to continue. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review or manage project jobs | **Project Jobs** | | Work with people associated with the project | **Contact Persons** | | Add or review attachments | **Attachment** | | Review or add project registrations | **Registrations** | 2. Select **Comments** or **Last Modifications** to review the related record history. **Result:** The selected companion surface is open for the next project-related task. # Shareable content ## Shareable content overview Shareable content is the configuration page for choosing how selected company content is shared between branches and for reviewing its modification history. The page is a reference screen with the **Last Modifications** area below the sharing settings. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | See the sharing fields and page actions | Understand the screen | | Check whether branch selection is available | Handle branch-sharing choices | | Save a sharing choice | Save sharing settings | | Review changes | Review modifications and continue | | Maintain the company branches that supply the choices | Company branches | ![Identify the sharing fields, save actions, and modification history on the page](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a9ad649f507b95956e66ea6874f6f261.png) ## Before you start The page loads company sharing data when the sharing configuration is included in your subscription. The main content also requires company data with shared objects. Editing requires permission for the configuration route and changed data enables the save actions. When these conditions are in place, open the page in Open Shareable content. Prerequisites | Check | What must be true | |---|---| | Subscription | The sharing configuration is included in your subscription. | | Company data | The company has shared objects for the page to list. | | Permission | You have permission to edit `configuration/shareable-content` when you need to save. | | Changes | Data has changed before **Save** or **Save and Close** becomes available. | | Company identity | The company identity is available before **Last Modifications** is available. | The page has no required fields or validation groups. If the subscription does not include the configuration, the page uses its subscription-upgrade surface instead of the sharing content. ## Open Shareable content Open the Shareable content configuration page to review or maintain the branch-sharing settings. Prerequisites - You know the page route. Steps 1. Open `/configuration/shareable-content`. **Result:** The page remains at `/configuration/shareable-content` and displays the sharing settings. Use Understand the screen to identify each area before changing a choice. ## Understand the screen The page presents the sharing settings first and the history area below them. In this view, the two labelled fields are multi-select controls and neither carries a required marker. Use the sharing rows to handle the branch choices before saving. | Area | What you see | |---|---| | Account sharing | **Share Accounts/contacts Between Branches** | | Project sharing | **Share Projects Between Branches** | | Page actions | **Save** and **Save and Close** | | History action | **Last Modifications** | | History refresh | An icon-only button with the title `Refresh` | | History text | `The audit log provides you with a chronological sequence of actions performed by the users` | | Readouts | `Created On: - By` and `Tickets` | No table appears in this view. The page also presents no dialog or alert message while it is open. ![Locate the two sharing fields and the page actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7c209b4b8ea8cc95d73eeb4a3531e4f6.png) ## Handle branch-sharing choices The sharing choices determine which company branches receive a shared object. The page can provide an unlabelled branch picker when branch data exists and the object is set to share with some branches. Prerequisites - The page has loaded shared objects and branch data. - The object uses the share-with-some-branches choice. Steps 1. Review the row label for the object you want to configure: **Share Projects Between Branches**, **Share Accounts/contacts Between Branches**, or **Share Contacts Between Branches**. 2. When the unlabeled branch picker appears for the object, select the branches to include. 3. Review the resulting Account and Contact choices before saving. The three share-option checkboxes are not part of the page's active view. The available sharing choices are no branches, all branches, and some branches, but their checkbox group is unavailable on this page. The page also does not provide a reader-facing label for the branch picker. The Account choice can change the Contact choices: sharing an Account with some branches can disable the Contact all-branches choice, while choosing not to share an Account can disable both Contact choices. Sharing an Account with all branches leaves both Contact choices available. **Result:** The sharing rows show the branch choices available for the loaded data, ready for saving. Continue to Save sharing settings to save the selected choice. ## Save sharing settings Save the selected sharing choice after reviewing the rows. The page enables the save actions only when you have editing permission and the data has changed. Prerequisites - You have editing permission for the page. - You have changed a sharing choice. Steps 1. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the page open | **Save** | | Save and leave the page | **Save and Close** | 2. Read the result shown by the page. When the save succeeds, the page displays `Your request was completed successfully`. **Save** keeps the page open and refreshes the modification history. **Save and Close** leaves the page. **Result:** If the save succeeds, go directly to Review modifications and continue to review the refreshed history or the route after **Save and Close**. If the save fails, go to When saving does not work to review the message and conditions. ## When saving does not work Use the message shown by the page to distinguish a failed save from the successful result. Prerequisites - You have editing permission for the page. - You have changed a sharing choice. Steps 1. Read the message shown after you select **Save** or **Save and Close**. 2. Identify the result and take the matching action: | Result | Action | |---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the editing and changed-data conditions. | | No dialog or alert | Continue with the page controls that are visible. | **Result:** You have identified whether the page displayed the success message `Your request was completed successfully`, the error message `An error occurred while processing your request`, or no message. After correcting the editing or changed-data condition, return to Save sharing settings and select **Save** or **Save and Close** again. ## Review modifications and continue The history area remains on the Shareable content route when **Last Modifications** is selected. Prerequisites - The company identity is available. - The sharing configuration is included in your subscription. Steps 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Review the audit-log text `The audit log provides you with a chronological sequence of actions performed by the users`. 3. After saving without leaving the page, review the refreshed history area. **Result:** The **Last Modifications** area is open at `/configuration/shareable-content`. For branch records that need separate maintenance, continue to Company branches. # Stock by shipment Use the warehouse stock views to read quantities by shipment or by product, then adjust the columns and filters shown in the list. ## Stock views for warehouse work Stock views are reference lists for checking inventory after warehouse receiving and inspection work. **Stock By Shipment** groups the view around incoming shipment information; **Stock By Products** groups it around products. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Read quantities, locations, and stages tied to incoming stock | **Stock By Shipment** | | Read stock grouped by product | **Stock By Products** | | Review receiving work before checking stock | [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes) | | Review inspection work before checking stock | [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes) | | Follow the wider warehouse sequence | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | The warehouse list also includes **Receiving**, **Stock By Shipment**, and **Stock By Products**. ## Before you start Prerequisites - Have access to the Warehouse list. - Have a saved list layout available for the view. - Know whether you need shipment-oriented or product-oriented stock information. The list controls appear only when the relevant subscription and list settings allow them. The grid appears after its list layout is available. > [!NOTE] > Your saved layout determines which headers you see. Read the headers currently displayed rather > than relying on a fixed column order. ## Find a stock view Open a stock reference list from the Warehouse tabs. Prerequisites - You can access the Warehouse list. Steps 1. Open the Warehouse list. 2. Select one option from the table. | If you need to… | Select or open | |---|---| | Check stock connected to incoming shipments | **Stock By Shipment** | | Check stock grouped by product | **Stock By Products** | **Result:** The selected list opens with its active tab and the headers provided by its saved layout. ## Compare the two stock views **Stock By Shipment** is the list for reading each stock row against its shipment-related information. Its displayed headers are grouped below. | Stock detail | Headers | |---|---| | Product and quantity | `Product`, **Description**, **Qty**, `Qty (available)`, `Unit` | | Placement | **Area**, **Location** | | Inspection and status | **Inspection no.**, **GRN**, **Stage** | ![Stock By Shipment with its shipment-oriented headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4db3ce9528e436b64895699a64d43c9b.png) **Stock By Products** is the product-oriented list. Use the headers shown in that list because the saved layout controls which product columns appear. ![Shipment view with its visible grid headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0ffbae805edc0a323650bdefe08009db.png) The list toolbar shows **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ## Adjust the displayed view Use this read-only procedure to inspect the available layout and list settings without changing a saved layout or applying a filter. Prerequisites - Open either stock list. - Confirm that **Table Layout** or **Settings** is visible in the toolbar. Steps 1. Select **Table Layout**. 2. Read the available layout choices. | If you need to… | Select or read | |---|---| | Identify the current standard choice | `Standard Layout` | | Start a new layout | **Save New Layout** | | Enter the name for a new layout | **Layout name** | | Change the current saved layout | **Update Current** | | Remove the current saved layout | **Delete Current** | | Review column choices | **Columns Chooser** | | Expand columns to fit their contents | **Expand column width** | The layout menu also provides the controls for creating or removing a saved layout. **Save New Layout** opens the layout-name form. **Save** stores the new layout. **Cancel** closes the form. **Delete Current** opens the delete-layout submenu. **Delete** removes the selected layout. **Cancel** closes the submenu. 3. Select **Settings**. 4. Read the available list settings. | If you need to… | Select or read | |---|---| | Open export options | **Export** | | Show the grid filter row | **Filter Row** | | Show the grid group panel | **Group Panel** | ![Table Layout options above the stock grid](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ddd2aaa9fcc0736e61f4f1e5419cd419.png) ![Settings options above the stock grid](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/389cb575201f155b87d8e18d0287ada2.png) **Result:** The selected menu is open and its available view options are visible. The headers in the grid continue to follow the saved layout. ## When a view or control is unavailable Use the table below when a list opens with fewer controls or different headers. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | The grid has no fixed set of headers | The displayed columns come from the saved list layout. | Work from the headers currently shown in the grid. | | The search panel is not shown | Search is not available through the list's search panel. | Use the headers and list controls that are visible. | | The grid's column chooser is unavailable | The grid-level column chooser is disabled, although the layout menu can show **Columns Chooser**. | Use the saved layout that is already active. | | **Import** is unavailable | Import is not an available list action. | Use the list for reference. | | A product row has no edit link | The product list does not provide an active edit link in its action column. | Use the stock view for reference. | When a layout operation reports a message, match the exact text below to the operation you were using: | Operation or condition | Message | |---|---| | Loading list layouts | `Couldnt Load Table Layouts` | | Entering a layout name already in use | `Duplicate Layout Name` | | Saving a new layout | `Layout saved Successfully` | | Updating a saved layout | `Error Saving Layout` | | Trying to change the standard layout | `You can't change the standard layout.. please, create new layout` | | Trying to modify the default layout | `Default Layout Cannot be modified` | | Trying to delete the default layout | `Default Layout Cannot be deleted` | | Deleting a saved layout | `Data Deleted Successfully` | | Deleting a layout when the delete operation fails | `Error Deleting the Layout` | | Loading the default layout | `Couldnt Load Default Layout` | | Saving a new layout when its save error path reports a failure | `Error Saving Layout` | | Setting the current layout when its error path reports a failure | `Error setting current layout` | ## Know what to do next The stock lists are reference surfaces. Continue with the page that owns the next warehouse task: - [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes) for receiving work. - [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes) for inspection work. - [Goods issue notes](doc:goods-issue-notes) for issuing goods. - [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) for delivery work. - [Upcoming stock](doc:upcoming-stock) for stock that is still upcoming. - [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) for broader workspace layout choices. # System requirements PAMS deployment requirements describe the frontend and API resources used to prepare a deployment. Open Home after signing in. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Check the resources required before deployment | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Locate the files that define deployment | [Find the deployment definitions](#find-the-deployment-definitions) | | Understand the frontend and API baseline | [Understand the deployment baseline](#understand-the-deployment-baseline) | | Prepare the frontend | [Prepare the frontend deployment](#prepare-the-frontend-deployment) | | Prepare the API | [Prepare the API deployment](#prepare-the-api-deployment) | | Compare development and production | [Handle development and production deployments](#handle-development-and-production-deployments) | | Check the application entry point | [Check the application entry point](#check-the-application-entry-point) | | Continue with the application | [Dashboard overview](dashboard-overview.md) | | Get help with an unresolved requirement | [Getting help](getting-help.md) | ## Before you start Before you prepare a deployment, collect the storage, node, CPU, and memory values below. The API uses two `azurefile` volumes: `10Gi` for `App_Data` and `5Gi` for `Data`. The API pods target Windows nodes with `agentpool: win2`. | Component | Request | Limit | | --- | --- | --- | | API | `250m` CPU, `512Mi` memory | `500m` CPU, `1Gi` memory | | Frontend | `100m` CPU, `128Mi` memory | `500m` CPU, `512Mi` memory | When these values are ready, open the four deployment definitions. ## Find the deployment definitions Use the four deployment definitions as your checklist. Prerequisites: - You can open the four deployment definitions. - You know whether you are preparing the development or production definition. Steps: 1. Open `Frontend/Dockerfile` to check the frontend build image, serving image, and exposed port. 2. Open `Pams/API/Pams.API/Dockerfile` to check the API base image and file permissions. 3. Open `pams-frontend-deployment.yaml` to check the frontend deployment, service, and ingress definitions. 4. Open `pams-api-deployment.yaml` to check the API volumes, deployment, service, and ingress definitions. **Result:** You have the four deployment definitions needed to prepare the frontend and API. ## Understand the deployment baseline The frontend is a static web application built with Node 16 and served by NGINX. The API runs on the ASP.NET 4.8 Windows Server Core LTSC 2022 image. The API stores application data in `App_Data` and `Data`; both the frontend and API use port 80 for their service endpoints. | Area | Frontend | API | | --- | --- | --- | | Build or base image | Node 16 build image | ASP.NET 4.8 Windows Server Core LTSC 2022 | | Serving | NGINX serves `/app/dist/pams` | IIS serves the API image | | Storage | No volume is declared in the frontend deployment | `App_Data` and `Data` volume mounts | | Traffic handler | NGINX frontend service | IIS API service | | Entry routing | Frontend ingress | API ingress | The API image creates `C:\Data` and grants access to the IIS worker identities. The API deployment uses the Windows node, CPU, and memory values listed in [Before you start](#before-you-start). After you understand this baseline, prepare the frontend deployment. ## Prepare the frontend deployment Prepare the frontend image and its deployment settings. Prerequisites: - The frontend build context contains `package*.json`, the application source, and `nginx.conf`. - The frontend deployment has the resource values from [Before you start](#before-you-start) available. Steps: 1. In `Frontend/Dockerfile`, locate `BUILD_ENV` and record its default value, `development`. 2. In `Frontend/Dockerfile`, locate `npm run build:${BUILD_ENV}` and record the build command. 3. In `Frontend/Dockerfile`, locate the frontend build output and its NGINX destination. 4. In `Frontend/Dockerfile`, locate `EXPOSE 80` and record the frontend container port. 5. In `pams-frontend-deployment.yaml`, locate the frontend CPU and memory requests and limits and compare them with [Before you start](#before-you-start). 6. In `pams-frontend-deployment.yaml`, locate the frontend service port and target port. 7. In `pams-frontend-deployment.yaml`, locate the ingress backend port and compare it with the frontend service port. **Result:** You have checked the frontend build, NGINX destination, container port, resource, service, and ingress settings. After the frontend settings are ready, prepare the API deployment. ## Prepare the API deployment Prepare the API image and its deployment settings. Prerequisites: - A Windows node matching `agentpool: win2` is available. - The two `azurefile` volume claims are available with `10Gi` for `App_Data` and `5Gi` for `Data`. Steps: 1. In `Pams/API/Pams.API/Dockerfile`, locate the ASP.NET 4.8 Windows Server Core LTSC 2022 base image. 2. In `Pams/API/Pams.API/Dockerfile`, locate the command that creates `C:\Data`. 3. In `Pams/API/Pams.API/Dockerfile`, locate the permissions granted to the IIS worker identities for `C:\Data`. 4. In `pams-api-deployment.yaml`, locate the volume mount for `C:\inetpub\wwwroot\App_Data`. 5. In `pams-api-deployment.yaml`, locate the volume mount for `C:\inetpub\wwwroot\Data`. 6. In `pams-api-deployment.yaml`, confirm that the API deployment targets Windows nodes with `agentpool: win2`. 7. In `pams-api-deployment.yaml`, locate the API CPU and memory requests and limits and compare them with [Before you start](#before-you-start). **Result:** You have checked the API image, permissions, storage, node, CPU, and memory settings. After the API settings are ready, select the environment definition. ## Handle development and production deployments Development and production use separate API deployment definitions. Both environments use the same storage sizes, node placement, and API resource values; the image names differ. Prerequisites: - You have selected the environment definition to apply. - You have the API storage claims and Windows node available. Steps: 1. Choose the environment definition that matches your target: | If you are preparing… | Use | | --- | --- | | Development | The development API deployment and its development image | | Production | The production API deployment and its production image | 2. Apply the selected API storage, node, and resource values. 3. Compare the selected image and volume claim names with the matching environment block. **Result:** The selected environment uses its own API image and deployment definitions while retaining the documented storage, node, and resource settings. Use [Getting help](getting-help.md) when a deployment question remains after you apply these settings. ## When a requirement is missing Use the values in the deployment tables for preparation. Obtain the following requirements before you proceed if your installation needs them: | Requirement | Action | | --- | --- | | Browser support | Obtain the supported browser value before deployment. | | Workstation requirements | Obtain the end-user workstation value before deployment. | | Database | Obtain the database engine and sizing values before deployment. | | Network and version requirements | Obtain the required network and version values before deployment. | | Operator dependencies | Obtain the dependency checklist before deployment. | Use the confirmed values when you prepare the deployment. After these requirements are available, check the application entry point. ## Check the application entry point The frontend service and ingress route traffic to port `80`. After signing in, Home opens the authenticated dashboard surface. Prerequisites: - The frontend service and ingress are available on port `80`. - You know where to select Home in the application navigation. Steps: 1. Select Home in the application navigation. 2. Check that Home shows `Sort by Booking`, `Sort by Target`, and `Sort by Achievement`. 3. Check that no required marker appears on those three controls. 4. Check that Home shows no data table or action buttons in this view. ![Check the Home route and its three sorting controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) If another Home branch produces a message, use the exact text below to identify the outcome: | Outcome | Message | | --- | --- | | Home dashboard action | `Your request was completed successfully` | | Home dashboard action | `An error occurred while processing your request` | | Principal report | `Please choose one or more principals` | | Login | `Incorrect username or password` | **Result:** Home opens with the three sorting controls visible and no data table or action buttons in this view. # Teams ## Teams at a glance Teams is the security-administration area for viewing the team list and opening the new and existing team record routes. The list is titled **All Teams**. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | See the available teams and their list columns | [Find and open a team](#find-and-open-a-team) | | Start a new team record | [Start a team record or merge teams](#start-a-team-record-or-merge-teams) | | Review fields and member information | [Understand the team screen](#understand-the-team-screen) | | Add or manage members on an existing team | [Maintain members and team status](#maintain-members-and-team-status) | | Check related user administration | [Users overview](doc:users-overview) | | Check related role administration | [Roles](doc:roles) | | Review booking-target setup | [Booking target](doc:configuration-booking-target) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Sign in with access to the Teams routes. - Open **Teams** from the security administration menu to open the list. - Select **New** from the list to start a team without an existing record. - Have a saved team record before using record-only actions such as **Last Modifications**, **Activate team**, or **Deactivate team**. - Have edit access before using the record-edit, member, or status controls. The **New** and **Merge teams** controls appear when your access allows new-team actions. The record's edit actions appear when editing is allowed. **Last Modifications** and the status actions require an existing team record. The standalone record screen shows its breadcrumbs and action bar; the embedded member dialog uses a different display mode. ## Find and open a team The Teams list is where you identify a team row and choose whether to start a new record or open an existing one. The list currently displays the headers **Team**, **Leader**, **Memebers**, **Department**, **Target**, and **Active**. **Prerequisites** - Have access to **Teams** in the security administration menu. **Steps** 1. Open **Teams** from the security administration menu. 2. Choose the route that matches your task. | If you need to… | Do this | | --- | --- | | Start a team record | Select **New**. | | Open an existing team | Select the row's edit control. | **Result:** The Teams list is on screen, or the selected new or existing team route is open. ![The Teams list with its six visible headers and list tools.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c5f278192dc785b823bf9b06134b3a02.png) ## Understand the team screen A team record identifies the team, its department, its members, and its leader. The screen also provides a members area and, for an existing record, a **Last Modifications** area. | Area | What you see | When it appears | | --- | --- | --- | | Team details | **Team Name** and **Department** | On the team record screen | | Team summary | **Members**, **Team Leader**, and **Booking target** | The summary readouts appear on the record; **Booking target** is tied to the sales-team condition. | | Members tab | **Member**, the **Team member name** column, **Make as leader**, and **Remove from team** | On the **Members** tab | | Audit tab | **Last Modifications** | When the team has an existing record | | Record actions | **Save** and **Save and Close** | When the record is editable | | List tools | **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings** | On the Teams list | The member grid has a **Team member name** column and a second column with no caption for member status. Use **Make as leader** or **Remove from team** when those controls appear. The headers in the Teams list come from the saved list layout, so work from the headers visible in your own list. ![The new-team screen with the Members tab, summary readouts, and member grid.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ccca644635c4173daabcdd7f2a3f70a9.png) ## Start a team record or merge teams Use **New** to open a blank team record. Use **Merge teams** to open the merge dialog from the Teams list. ### Start a new team record **Prerequisites** - Be on the Teams list. - Have access to the new-team action. **Steps** 1. Select **New**. **Result:** The new-team screen opens with **Team Name** and **Department** marked as required. It also shows the team summary, member area, and save controls. 2. Enter a value in **Team Name**. 3. Select a value in **Department**. 4. Choose the save action that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the team record open | **Save** | | Save the team and leave the record | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The new team record remains open after **Save**, or it closes after **Save and Close**. ![The new-team screen with the required Team Name and Department fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/bc397f0ec9d359757eb885c93e3a8291.png) ### Open the merge dialog **Prerequisites** - Be on the Teams list. - Have access to the merge action. **Steps** 1. Select **Merge teams**. **Result:** The merge dialog opens with **Department**, **Team Name**, **Choose teams to merge**, **Members**, and **Team Leader**. The dialog provides an **OK** button. 2. Select a value in **Department**. 3. Enter the resulting name in **Team Name**. 4. Select more than one team in **Choose teams to merge**. 5. Review **Members**. 6. Select the resulting leader in **Team Leader**. 7. Select **OK**. **Result:** The merge dialog accepts the selected teams and the fields needed for the merge decision. ![The merge dialog with its team-selection fields and OK button.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4104a09d022cf748a4ae9698bd8cd983.png) The merge dialog displays `Please choose more than team inside branch name branch`. The **Team Name** field also uses the required-field and pattern checks listed in [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages): `This Field Is Required` and `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`. ## Maintain members and team status An existing editable team is the place to maintain membership, identify its leader, change its active state, and review its modification history. | If you need to… | Use | Condition shown by the screen | | --- | --- | --- | | Add a member | **Member** | The **Members** tab is active and the team is in standalone edit mode. | | Set a member as leader | **Make as leader** | The control is available on an editable team. | | Remove a member | **Remove from team** | The control is available on an editable team. | | Activate a team | **Activate team** | The saved team is inactive and editable. | | Deactivate a team | **Deactivate team** | The saved team is active and editable. | | Review changes | **Last Modifications** | The team has an existing record. | ### Add or edit a member **Prerequisites** - Open an existing editable team. - Open the **Members** tab. **Steps** 1. Select **Member**. 2. In the member dialog, choose a person in **Team Members**. 3. Set **Team leadership** when the member is the team leader. 4. Complete the required **Team Members** field. **Result:** The member dialog contains the selected person and the optional leadership choice. ![The existing-team Members tab and its member action area.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/994b53db574dfc2800b7533f8d88b5ad.png) ### Change a member or the team status **Prerequisites** - Open an existing editable team. - Open the **Members** tab. **Steps** 1. Open the member-row menu for the member you want to change. 2. Select **Make as leader** or **Remove from team**. 3. Select the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Activate an inactive team | **Activate team** | | Deactivate an active team | **Deactivate team** | | Review the record history | **Last Modifications** | **Result:** The available member, status, or audit branch is open for the existing team. The confirmation messages for these actions are: | Action | Message | | --- | --- | | **Make as leader** | `Are you sure you want to make {{tempMember.PersonName}} a team leader?` | | **Activate team** | `Are you sure you want to activate {{TeamDetails.TeamName}}` | | **Deactivate team** | `Are you sure you want to deactivate {{TeamDetails.TeamName}}` | | **Remove from team** | `Are you sure you want to exclude {{tempMember.PersonName}} from the team?` | ## When a field or route is unavailable Use the message on screen to identify whether a required value, a permitted character, or a request-processing problem stopped the current action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required field is empty. | Return to the named field and enter a value. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | **Team Name** contains a character outside the allowed pattern. | Correct **Team Name** and repeat the action. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request was not processed. | Review the current values before repeating the action. | The list's visible columns depend on the saved list layout. Read **Members**, **Team Leader**, and **Booking target** from the summary when those readouts appear on the team record. ## What to do next After reviewing a team, continue with the related security records that supply its people and access setup. Use [Users overview](doc:users-overview) for user administration and [Roles](doc:roles) for role administration. If the team uses a booking target, continue with [Booking target](doc:configuration-booking-target). # Activities and attachments on a sales job ## Activities and attachments on a sales job Activities are the visits, meetings, and calls that belong to a sales job. Attachments are files associated with that same job so related work stays together. Both are available after the sales job is saved. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the saved sales job | [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | | Record a visit, meeting, or call from the sales job | [Record a visit, meeting, or call](#record-a-visit-meeting-or-call) | | Attach a supporting file | [Attach and manage supporting files](#attach-and-manage-supporting-files) | | Create an activity outside the sales-job workspace | [Create an activity](doc:create-activity) | | Review activity statuses | [Activity status](doc:activity-status) | | Work with the wider file library | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - Have a saved sales job. - Have access to the Activities module and the attachment area. The **Activities** tab is unavailable to principal users, and **Attachment** is disabled for principal users. - Have the activity title, priority, dates, and any visit or call details ready. - Have the file and its file name ready when you need to associate supporting material. The activity editor requires **Priority**, **Title**, **Start Date**, and **End Date** for visits and meetings. Calls also require **Priority**, **Title**, and **Start Date**. **End Date** cannot come before **Start Date**. **Visit type**, **Call Use**, and **Description** are optional where they appear. > **Note:** The **Attachment** tab appears after you save the activity. **Attach File** is available when the related record exists and is editable. The **Activities** tab requires its subscription; the add control also requires the current **Activities** tab, the same branch, no input-driven record, and new-activity permission. ## Find the sales job and open related work A sales job is the saved workspace for one job and its related work. Prerequisites - Know which saved sales job you need to open. Steps 1. Open the saved sales job from [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work). 2. Select **Activities** to work with visits, meetings, and calls. 3. Select **Attachment** to work with files associated with the sales job. 4. In the activity list, select the filter that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to review… | Select | |---|---| | Every activity | **All** | | Visits | **Visits** | | Email activity | **Email** | | Meetings | **Meetings** | | Calls | **Call** | | Archived activity | **Show archived activities** | **Result:** The sales-job workspace shows the related-work area you selected. Selecting an activity row opens that activity in a new tab. A non-mail activity also has **Delete** when the owner check passes. ## Understand the activities and files surfaces The Activities area lists work related to the sales job; the Attachment area lists files related to the same record. ![Identify the Activities area, related-work tabs, and activity list on the sales-job workspace](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) The activity list uses these columns: | Column | Use | |---|---| | Title | Identify the activity. | | Visitors | Review the visitors associated with the activity. | | Activity purpose | Review the activity's purpose. | | Company | Identify the associated company. | | Startdate | Review when the activity starts. | | Status | Review the activity status. | | Importance | Review the activity's importance. | The attached-file list uses `File name`, **Category**, **Tags**, `Size (B)`, and `Modified`. The file library uses **Name**, **Type**, `Tags`, `Modified`, and a size column without a label. An empty activity list displays `No data` and `Count: 0.00`. When no files are available, the attachment list displays `No Files`; while it loads, it displays `loading...`. ## Record a visit, meeting, or call A visit, meeting, or call records a piece of follow-up work against the current sales job. Prerequisites - Open a saved sales job. - Open **Activities**. - Have the details for the activity ready. Steps 1. In the **Activities** tab, select the add control. 2. Choose one activity type from the activity choices. | If you need to record… | Choose | |---|---| | A visit with the customer or another participant | **Visit** | | A scheduled meeting | **Meeting** | | A phone call | **Call** | 3. Enter the required and optional information for the activity. | Activity | Required fields | Optional fields | |---|---|---| | Visit | **Priority**, **Title**, **Start Date**, **End Date** | **Visit type** | | Meeting | **Priority**, **Title**, **Start Date**, **End Date** | — | | Call | **Priority**, **Title**, **Start Date** | **Call Use**, **Description** | 4. Set **End Date** on a visit or meeting to the same time as, or later than, **Start Date**. 5. Select **Save** to keep the activity open. 6. Select **Save and Close** to save the activity and close its editor. The add control is available only when **Activities** is selected, the job is in the same branch, the page has no input-driven record, and you have new-activity permission. After a save event, the activity list reloads and the creation popup closes. **Result:** The activity is saved in the sales-job activity list. The saved activity can expose the **Attachment** and **Last Modifications** tabs. ## Attach and manage supporting files Supporting files preserve the documents that belong with the sales job. Prerequisites - Open a saved sales job or a saved activity with an editable related record. - Have the file ready to upload, or know which existing file to associate. Steps 1. Select **Attachment**. 2. Select **Attach File**. 3. For a new upload, enter the file information. | If you are completing… | Enter or select | |---|---| | A file upload | **File Name** and **Links** | | A new library | **Library name** | | An attached-file category | **Category** | 4. Choose the action for the selected file. | Action | When to use it | |---|---| | **Link** | Associate an existing file from the file library. | | **Open** | Open a selected file from the file library. | | **Download** | Download a selected file. | | **Add/Remove tags** | Change the tags on a selected file. | 5. Select a file name in the attachment list to download it. 6. Select the file's **Category** value to set or change its category. **Result:** The file is associated with the sales job and appears in the attached-file list. ## Handle activity status and activity choices An activity status tells you where the visit, meeting, or call is in its planned work. | Activity status | Meaning for the activity | |---|---| | **Planned** | The activity is scheduled. | | **Due** | The activity is due during its scheduled period. | | **Overdue** | The activity's scheduled period has passed. | | **Done** | The activity is complete. | | **Cancelled** | The activity is cancelled. | Prerequisites - Open an existing activity from the sales-job activity list. - Use an editable activity when the action requires editing permission. Steps 1. Select the status action that matches the activity's current status. | When the activity is… | Select | |---|---| | Due or Overdue | **Done** | | Done | **Consider As Not Done** | | Planned, Overdue, or Due and editable | **Cancel This Activity** | | Cancelled and editable | **Undo Cancellation** | | An existing activity whose minutes you need | **Print Minutes Of Activity** | 2. Select **Show archived activities** when you need to include archived activity records. 3. Select **Delete** for a non-mail activity when you are the owner and the activity belongs to your branch. **Result:** The activity list reflects the status or list choice you selected. ## When an activity or file action fails The message on screen identifies whether to correct the activity details, access, or file input. Steps 1. Choose the correction that matches the message on screen. | Message | Correction | |---|---| | `Action not allowed` | Review the available status action. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue after the requested activity or file action finishes. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Use an activity in your branch. | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Enter a topic and note in the activity. | | `There is no topic to print` | Add a topic before selecting **Print Minutes Of Activity**. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Remove the characters that the field does not accept. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters. | | A required field is empty | Enter the empty field, such as **Priority**, **Title**, or a required date field. | | **End Date** is earlier than **Start Date** | Correct the date range. | **Result:** The corrected activity or file action is ready to complete. ### Out of scope | Message | Correction | |---|---| | `Attached files cannot be loaded` | Select **Try Again**. | ## After you record the activity or attach the file The sales job keeps its related activities and files together. Return to **Activities** to review the activity list, or return to **Attachment** to review and download an associated file. A saved activity can also expose **Last Modifications** for its record history. For other work, continue with [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work), [Create an activity](doc:create-activity), [Activity status](doc:activity-status), or [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files). # Base of inspection ## Base of inspection Base of inspection is the reference list where you maintain the named bases used for warehouse inspection work. It is one of the lists under the warehouse configuration area, alongside inspection checklists, inspection documents, transfer reasons, and service types. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the list and recognise its columns | [Find the reference list](#find-the-reference-list) | | Understand the list and its entry field | [Understand the list and entry form](#understand-the-list-and-entry-form) | | Open an entry, enter its name, or cancel deletion | [Open an entry and cancel deletion](#open-an-entry-and-cancel-deletion) | | Check which controls your access provides | [Handle access and configuration variations](#handle-access-and-configuration-variations) | | Resolve a validation or maintenance message | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Maintain inspection checklists | [Inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Maintain inspection documents | [Inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents) | | Maintain transfer reasons | [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | Maintain service types | [Service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | ## Before you start You need access to the configuration area and a name for each base you add. The **Name** field is required for this list. The controls available to you depend on your access and on the list's configuration. Prerequisites - Sign in and select **Base Of Inspection** in the warehouse configuration area. - Have the name you want to maintain ready before opening the entry form. - Check the controls shown on your screen before choosing a maintenance action. ## Find the reference list Use the page title and visible sibling labels to distinguish this list from the other warehouse configuration lists. Prerequisites - Be signed in to PAMS. Steps 1. Select **Base Of Inspection** in the warehouse configuration area. 2. Confirm that the page heading reads **Base of inspection**. 3. Confirm that the surrounding warehouse configuration area includes **Base Of Inspection**, **Inspection Checklist**, **Inspection Document**, **Transfer Reasons**, **Service Types**, and **Stock Withdrawal And Valuation**. ![Check the Base of inspection heading and the warehouse reference-list navigation.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b7ea8c0c2a425c3edad5836d70189920.png) **Result:** The Base of inspection reference list is open. ## Understand the list and entry form The list shows the inspection-base names available in your configuration and draws one `Name` column. The entry form uses **Name** as its visible text field. | Area | What you use there | When it appears | |---|---|---| | List | `Name` | On the reference list | | Entry form | **Name** | When a new or existing entry is open | | List header | **New** | When the new-entry action is available | | List header | **Refresh** | As an icon-only list control | | List header | `Settings` | As an icon-only list control | Only **Name** is a visible entry field on this list. The shared form shows a configured text field when the entry form is open and the selected column is marked visible in the form. Its required marker follows the configuration for that column. ![Check the Name column and the New, Refresh, and Settings controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1cb08c4e3a57b0a3854c4d53cf626a63.png) ## Open an entry and cancel deletion Open a new or existing entry to work with its **Name**, or open the delete menu and cancel when you decide not to remove a row. Prerequisites - Know the name to enter. - Confirm that **New**, **Edit**, or **Delete** is available for the action you need. Steps 1. Open the entry you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start a new entry | **New** | | Open an existing entry | **Edit** on the selected row | The new-entry dialog is titled **New Base of inspection**. 2. Enter the base name in **Name** when adding or changing an entry. 3. Select **Delete** on the selected row when you need to open its delete menu. 4. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 5. Select **Cancel** to close the delete menu without removing the row. ![Check the entry form and its Name field.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2459e44b70968b80347fd09228a8b5a0.png) **Result:** The **Name** field is open for a new or existing entry, or the delete menu closes without removing the row when you select **Cancel**. ## Handle access and configuration variations The list can show different maintenance controls and columns according to your access and the configuration assigned to the list. Work from the controls and column headers currently visible on your screen. Prerequisites - Have the Base of inspection list open. Steps 1. Choose the action that matches the control available to you: | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | **New** | Select **New** to start an entry. | | **Edit** | Select **Edit** on the row you need to change. | | **Delete** | Select **Delete** on the row you need to remove. | | **Export** | Use the export action when it is available in the settings controls. | 2. Use the headers currently shown in the list when the configured column set differs from another user's list. **Result:** You use only the maintenance action and list columns available in your configuration. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `\ is required` | Enter a value in the required field, such as **Name**, then try the form action again. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters other than letters, numbers, underscores, hyphens, and periods from the affected value. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter value and try again. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Read the message as the response to the attempted update. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Read the message as the response to the attempted save. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Read the message as the response to the attempted deletion. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the row and remove the related saved data before trying again. | | `Failed to Delete` | Do not repeat the removal until you have checked the row and your access. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one entry in the list. | | `Data Importing completed` | Continue after the import finishes. | ## Continue with related warehouse lists The warehouse configuration area groups related reference lists together. Choose the sibling list that matches the next type of value you need to maintain. | If you need to maintain… | Go to | |---|---| | Inspection checklist values | [Inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Inspection document values | [Inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents) | | Transfer-reason values | [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | Service-type values | [Service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | **Result:** You are in the reference-list page that owns the next warehouse configuration task. # Basic terminology The Dashboard is the signed-in home surface where PAMS presents dashboard views and business readouts. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | understand the dashboard terms | [Read the dashboard terms](#read-the-dashboard-terms) | | check what you need before opening the dashboard | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | understand a message or an unavailable choice | [Messages and unavailable choices](#messages-and-unavailable-choices) | | learn the wider dashboard surface | [Dashboard overview](doc:dashboard-overview) | | change your dashboard workspace | [Personalizing your workspace](doc:personalizing-your-workspace) | | open navigation guidance | [Navigation basics](doc:navigation-basics) | | get help with a dashboard you cannot access | [Getting help](doc:getting-help) | | understand principal-specific reporting | [Principals Report](doc:principal-report) | ## What these terms mean When your role has no dashboard, PAMS displays the message `Your role has no dashboard` and the guidance `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard`. ## Before you start Sign in before you open the dashboard. PAMS protects this surface with an authentication requirement, so a signed-in session is needed before you use the dashboard terminology. After signing in, continue with the dashboard labels below. ## Read the dashboard terms The dashboard combines named views, result-order controls, and business readouts. The following labels help you identify what you are looking at: | Label | What it identifies | |---|---| | **Sales Pipeline** | A dashboard readout. | | **Accounts in Sales Pipeline** | A dashboard readout. | | **Teams Booking vs. Target** | A dashboard readout. | | **Booking This Year** | A dashboard readout. | | **Equivalent** | A dashboard value label. | | **Target** | A dashboard value label. | | **Achieved** | A dashboard value label. | | **Forecast** | A dashboard value label. | The dashboard also includes the labels **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Budget offers**, **Firm offers**, and **Orders**. Use the labels visible in your dashboard to orient yourself among the displayed readouts. ![Identify the dashboard readouts and the three result-order controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) **New Tab** is the field label used when a dashboard tab is added or renamed. The field is required in those tab dialogs. Use one of the following controls to choose the order of the principal results. **Prerequisites** The principal results are visible. **Steps** 1. Choose one result order. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | order the results by booking | **Sort by Booking** | | order the results by target | **Sort by Target** | | order the results by achievement | **Sort by Achievement** | **Result:** The principal results are ordered by the criterion you selected. The arrival view showed three named controls and five additional visible controls. None of the three named controls carried a required marker, and no table headers appeared. ## Messages and unavailable choices The home surface presents the dashboard terms above. **Global view** and **Single view** do not appear as available choices. Use the views and readouts that are visible on your dashboard. ![Check the home surface after it loads.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f59d469bbe0206c7338790cd782bcb14.png) When dashboard actions produce messages, use the wording below to identify the outcome: | Situation | Message | What to do | |---|---|---| | The dashboard service reports success | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the dashboard result. | | The active-dashboard change reports an error | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the active dashboard selection and repeat the change. | | Your role has no dashboard | `Your role has no dashboard` | Contact your administrator to define a dashboard. | | The dashboard gives the empty-dashboard guidance | `Kindly, Contact your administrator to define a dashboard` | Contact your administrator to define a dashboard. | The message `Please choose one or more principals` belongs to [Principals Report](doc:principal-report), not to the home terminology surface. The arrival view showed no dialog or message. The available home surface is therefore the place to read the dashboard labels and choose among the visible result-order controls. **Result:** You can identify the Dashboard terms, recognize the available ordering controls, and distinguish home messages from the principal-report message. # Complete an MRQ record ## Complete a saved MRQ record An MRQ (Material Requisition) is a saved purchase request that carries the products and additional requirements needed for purchasing work. Additional requirements are extra product needs kept with the same request. Its **Last Modifications** surface is the record's audit history. Use this page to complete the request before continuing to an RFQ or direct purchase order. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the detail fields and product grids | [Understand the MRQ detail surface](#understand-the-mrq-detail-surface) | | Add requested products or additional requirements | [Complete requested products and additional requirements](#complete-requested-products-and-additional-requirements) | | Save the changes and review the history | [Save the completed MRQ and review Last Modifications](#save-the-completed-mrq-and-review-last-modifications) | | Resolve a validation or save message | [Resolve validation and save errors](#resolve-validation-and-save-errors) | | Create the first request | [Create an MRQ](doc:create-mrq) | | Keep comments, files, and history with the MRQ | [Comments, files, and history on an MRQ](doc:mrq-comments-files-and-history) | | Continue with an RFQ | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | Create a direct purchase order | [Create a direct purchase order](doc:create-direct-purchase-order) | ## Before you start Prerequisites | Have or know | Why it matters here | |---|---| | A saved MRQ | The saved-record edit surface and its audit history apply to an existing record. | | The requested products and any additional requirements | These are the rows you review or add before saving. | | The MRQ type | The **Products** and **Additional Requirements** controls are available for stock, project, and needs MRQs. | | An editable record that is not displayed as a child | The add controls and save controls require this edit context. | | Access to the subscribed feature | The add and save controls require the subscription feature to be included. | The screen can contain saved field values and product rows when you open it. Work from those values first; do not add a duplicate row unless the record needs another product or requirement. **Result:** You have a saved MRQ, its requested information, and the edit access needed for the follow-up work. ## Find and open the saved MRQ A saved MRQ is the existing material request you return to when its products or requirements need attention. Prerequisites - You know which saved MRQ to open. - The record is not the first request you are creating. Steps 1. Open the saved MRQ you need. **Result:** The saved MRQ edit surface is on screen. ## Understand the MRQ detail surface The detail surface puts the MRQ header above two product grids and places **Last Modifications** below them. Use the visible headers and labels to confirm that you are working on the saved request before changing a row. | Area | What you can use there | |---|---| | Header | **Branch**, **MRQ title**, and **Required Receiving Date**. **MRQ title** and **Required Receiving Date** carry required markers. | | Requested products | The **Product**, **Unit**, **Qty**, **Purchasing**, and **Forecasted Receiving Date** columns, plus the row number column `#`. | | Additional Requirements | The **Product**, **Unit**, and **Qty** columns. | | Record actions | **Save**, **Save and Close**, and **Refresh**. | | History | **Last Modifications**, which displays the record's audit history. | ![Check the header fields, product columns, save controls, and Last Modifications surface.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a716fb494b6b1a54ad266564dbd87f37.png) The requested-product grid is available when its product data is present. The quantity editor accepts values from `0.01`; for a project MRQ, the quantity editor is disabled. The **Purchasing** and **Forecasted Receiving Date** columns do not apply to MRQs for needs. ## Complete requested products and additional requirements The requested-product grid lists products the MRQ asks purchasing to obtain; the **Additional Requirements** grid holds the extra rows for the same saved request. Prerequisites - The saved MRQ is not displayed as a child. - The MRQ type is stock, project, or needs. - You know the product, unit, and quantity for each row you need to add. Steps 1. Review the existing rows in the requested-product and additional-requirement grids. 2. Enter a quantity of at least `0.01` in each existing row's **Qty** cell. 3. Review the **Product** and **Unit** values in each existing row. 4. Select the add control for the type of row you need. | If you need to add… | Select | |---|---| | A requested product | **Products** | | An additional requirement | **Additional Requirements** | If the request needs no further row, leave the existing rows in place and continue to saving. The product and unit must describe the same requested item; a correct number with the wrong unit can change what purchasing understands the request to mean. **Result:** Existing rows have the quantities and product details you intend to save, or the appropriate add control has been selected for the next product-entry step. ## Save the completed MRQ and review Last Modifications Use the audit history after the MRQ is saved, so save the detail work before reviewing it. Prerequisites - The requested-product and additional-requirement rows are complete. - The record is editable, is not displayed as a child, and has the required subscription access. Steps 1. Choose how to save the changes. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the changes on the current page | **Save** | | Commit the changes and leave the record | **Save and Close** | 2. Select **Last Modifications**. 3. Review the chronological audit surface for the saved MRQ. ![Review the audit surface below the MRQ detail grids.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) **Result:** The MRQ remains saved, and **Last Modifications** is available for reviewing its history. ## Handle unavailable fields and record conditions The detail surface changes with the record context. Use the conditions below to choose the next available action. | If the record is… | Use this rule | |---|---| | A stock, project, or needs MRQ | **Products** and **Additional Requirements** are the add controls for this detail work. | | Displayed as a child | The add controls and save actions are not available in the child display. | | Your subscription does not include this feature | The add and save actions are not available. | | Not editable | The save actions are not available. | | A project MRQ | The **Qty** editor is disabled. | | An MRQ for needs | **Purchasing** and **Forecasted Receiving Date** are not part of the requested-product columns. | Some additional time-period fields, an advanced additional-requirement grid, and extra product columns do not form part of the usable surface described here. Use the fields and columns listed in the detail-surface table instead. The page can show an `Additional Requirements` heading while its add option is unavailable in the current configuration. If the page returns to **Dashboard**, reopen the saved MRQ before continuing with the detail work. ## Resolve validation and save errors Use the message text you see to identify the correction. The messages below belong to the MRQ detail work; messages for files and product configuration belong with those features. | Message | What to correct | |---|---| | `Package must have at least one item` | Add at least one item to the package before saving. | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Keep the product in the MRQ; it is already in purchasing work. | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Select **Products** and add a requested product before saving. | | `One of products has no quantity` | Enter a quantity of at least `0.01` in the affected **Qty** cell. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Review the fields with required markers, including **MRQ title** and **Required Receiving Date**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the record and repeat the save action when the record is editable. | **Required Receiving Date** is the required date field on this surface. If the screen shows `Required Receiving After`, use the required date field identified as **Required Receiving Date** on this surface. Messages belonging to the linked features are not part of this MRQ correction table: `Your request was completed successfully` and `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` belong to Files; `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.`, `This product is already included in BOM`, `The first variant cannot be deleted`, `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.`, and `Please select one product` belong to Product configuration. **Result:** You know which value or row to correct for each MRQ message before trying the save again. ## Continue with purchasing work After the saved MRQ detail work and history review, the record can continue into purchasing work. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Request supplier quotations | **RFQ**, then continue in [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs). | | Create a direct purchase order | `Direct PO`, then continue in [Create a direct purchase order](doc:create-direct-purchase-order). | These actions are the handoff from the completed MRQ to the separate purchasing procedures. **Result:** The saved MRQ is ready for the purchasing route you choose. # Getting help Getting help means identifying a problem on the Home dashboard and locating the next documented route for it. The **Home** dashboard is the place to begin when the problem appears in dashboard information. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Prepare to check the Home dashboard | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open the Home dashboard | [Open Home](#open-home) | | Read the visible dashboard state | [Recognize the Home state](#recognize-the-home-state) | | Understand dashboard behavior | [Dashboard](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Resolve a documented dashboard problem | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) | | Look up an error message | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) | | Check a recurring question | [FAQ](doc:faq) | ## Before you start Access to **Home** requires a signed-in account. Before you check the dashboard, have a clear description of the problem you want to identify. There is no help-request or support-contact information to enter on the Home surface. Begin with the dashboard problem itself, then use the visible Home state to choose the next documented route. ## Open Home Open **Home** to check a problem before choosing its next route. Prerequisites - You have signed-in access. - You have a clear description of the dashboard problem. Steps 1. Open **Home**. ![Check the Home dashboard before assessing its visible state.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) **Result:** The Home dashboard is on screen. ## Recognize the Home state The Home state is the dashboard information and controls visible after you open **Home**. Use the labels and visible content to decide whether the problem belongs to the dashboard. Prerequisites - The Home dashboard is on screen. Steps 1. Locate the sorting choices in the dashboard information. | Control | Use it to compare | |---|---| | Sort by Booking | Booking results | | Sort by Target | Target results | | Sort by Achievement | Achievement results | 2. Check the visible sorting choices for required markers. 3. Check the dashboard for visible columns. 4. Check the dashboard for visible buttons. 5. Check whether the dashboard displays a message or dialog. 6. Check whether the dashboard changes stage. The dashboard state in this route has three labelled sorting choices and no required marker on any of them. It has zero columns, zero buttons, and five visible controls without labels. Six columns are not drawn in this state. **Result:** The visible Home state is assessed without opening a help dialog or changing a stage. If it does not identify the next route, continue to [When Home cannot resolve the problem](#when-home-cannot-resolve-the-problem). ## When Home cannot resolve the problem Home is a dashboard surface, not a help-request or support-contact form. If the dashboard state does not identify the next route, continue only to a registered page that owns the problem. The Home surface does not provide a Help or Troubleshooting control, and it does not declare an approved support channel or destination. When you save dashboard changes, no success message confirms the save. If saving is refused, the screen gives no error message. Open the owning page for the problem in the [owning-page table](#owning-page-table). | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | [Dashboard](doc:dashboard-overview) | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | [Dashboard](doc:dashboard-overview) | | `Please choose one or more principals` | [Principal report](doc:principal-report) | | `Incorrect username or password` | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) | **Result:** You have identified whether Home can classify the problem. Open the [owning page for the next step](#owning-page-table). ## Continue to the registered help page Use the owning page for the problem instead of repeating dashboard or support instructions. Prerequisites - You have checked the Home state. - You know whether the problem concerns dashboard behavior, a documented issue, an error message, or a recurring question. Steps 1. Open the page that matches the problem. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Understand dashboard behavior | [Dashboard](doc:dashboard-overview) | | Resolve a documented dashboard problem | [Common issues and solutions](doc:common-issues-and-solutions) | | Look up an error message | [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) | | Check a recurring question | [FAQ](doc:faq) | **Result:** The owning help page is on screen. # Goods issue notes ## Goods issue notes A goods issue note records goods issued through warehouse work. An issue order is the order you select under **Related to**. Use the note when you need to create a new record for that order or locate one that already exists before continuing with warehouse work. The Warehouse list is the list where saved goods issue notes appear and where you begin the new-note form. The surrounding warehouse flow includes receiving, inspection, stock, goods issue, and delivery activities. [Read the warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) for the wider sequence. Continue with [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) when your work moves to that document. Start with [Before you start](#before-you-start) when you are ready to prepare the note. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Start a new note | [Create the note and add products](#create-the-note-and-add-products) | | Find a saved note | [Find or start a goods issue note](#find-or-start-a-goods-issue-note) | | Recognize the fields and item list | [Understand the note screen](#understand-the-note-screen) | | Correct a save problem | [Save the note and recover from errors](#save-the-note-and-recover-from-errors) | ## Before you start Have the issue order that the note relates to available before you begin. You select it under **Related to** in the new-note form. Collect the product quantities before opening the note. Have the identifying list information ready if you are locating a saved note, including its sheet number, product, warehouse, quantity, unit, responsible person, issuer, and issue date. You need access to the Warehouse list and the new goods issue note form. If you are opening an existing note, continue to [Find or start a goods issue note](#find-or-start-a-goods-issue-note). ## Find or start a goods issue note Use the Warehouse list to choose between opening the new-note form and locating a note that already exists. **Prerequisites** - You know whether you are creating a note or locating a saved note. - You know the issue order or list information you need. **Steps** 1. Open the Warehouse list. 2. Choose one path: | If you need to… | Then | |---|---| | Start a note | Open the new-note form. | | Locate a saved note | Open the existing-note list, then use **Sheet no.**, **Warehouse**, **Product**, **Qty**, **Unit**, **P.M Responsible**, **Issued by**, and **Issued on** to identify it. | ![Use the visible list headers to identify a saved goods issue note.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/582cff0d1d39cebdee7636576b002144.png) **Result:** You are on the new-note form or have identified the saved note you need. Continue by reviewing the fields and item area. ## Understand the note screen The goods issue note screen contains the note information at the top and an item grid when the note has an issue order. The new-note screen displays **Related to**, **Issued By**, **Issued on**, **Save**, and **Save and Close**. | Area | What you use it for | What changes | |---|---|---| | **Related to** | Select the issue order for a new note, or read the related order on a saved note. | A new note shows the picker; an existing note shows the related order value. | | **Issued By** | See who issued the goods. | The control is shown without a required marker. | | **Issued on** | See the issue date. | The control is shown without a required marker. | | Target-items grid | Review products and quantities tied to the issue order. | It appears when an issue order is present. | Use the list headers above to identify the saved note. The list also provides **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. ![Identify the new-note fields and save actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b7d160b9bd628e7ea47c7772c1a5495f.png) When you recognize the fields and item area, continue by creating the note and adding its products. ## Create the note and add products Create a note by selecting the related issue order, adding its products, and entering the quantity issued for each product. **Prerequisites** - You are on the new-note form. - You have the issue order and the quantities to issue. **Steps** 1. In **Related to**, select the issue order. 2. Confirm that the target-items grid appears. 3. Select **Products**. 4. Select the products for the note. 5. Open the product row edit action. 6. In **Qty**, enter the quantity issued. 7. Check **Unit**. 8. Check **Product** and **Product Variant**. ![Check the new-note controls before adding products.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b7d160b9bd628e7ea47c7772c1a5495f.png) **Result:** The selected products and their issued quantities are listed for the note. Continue to **Handle new and existing notes** or **Save the note and recover from errors**. ## Handle new and existing notes New and saved goods issue notes show different controls because a new note still needs its related issue order, while a saved note already has one. **Prerequisites** - You know whether you are creating a note or locating a saved note. **Steps** 1. Open the Warehouse list. 2. Choose one path: | If you need to… | Then | |---|---| | Create a note | Open the new-note form. | | Locate a saved note | Open the existing-note list. | 3. Complete the path you chose: | If you need to… | Then | |---|---| | Locate a saved note | Select a row in the existing-note list. | | Create a note | Select **Products** after an issue order is available. | The target-items grid appears only when an issue order is present. **Products** is available for a new note with an issue order, or for a developer. The **Inventory** field is not part of the editable note form, and **Final product**, **Comments**, **Last Modifications**, and the row delete action are not part of the active note path. **Result:** You are on the new-note form with **Products** available when an issue order is present, or you have opened the selected saved note. Continue with **Save** after the product quantities are ready. ## Save the note and recover from errors Save the note after the related issue order and product quantities are ready. Saving validates the form and the product list before it sends the note. **Prerequisites** - **Related to** has a selected issue order. - The product rows contain the quantities to issue. **Steps** 1. Select **Save** to save the note and remain on the note screen. 2. Select **Save and Close** to save the note and leave the form. 3. If the save succeeds, look for `Your request was completed successfully`. 4. If the product validation displays `Please enter the storage area and position for each product`, enter the required storage area and position for each product before saving again. 5. If the save displays `An error occurred while processing your request`, correct the note data you can review and try the save action again. 6. If the product message displays `Package products cannot be empty`, add the required products before saving again. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue to the next warehouse activity. | | `Please enter the storage area and position for each product` | Enter the storage area and position for each product. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the note and try the save action again. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Add products before saving again. | **Result:** The note remains available for review after **Save**, or the form closes after **Save and Close**. Continue to **Know what comes next**. ## Know what comes next After you save a goods issue note, continue with the warehouse activity that follows your work. Use [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) when the next document is a delivery note. Use **Save** or **Save and Close** to save the goods issue record; its completion menu is not part of the active note path. The saved-note list presents the eight headers **Sheet no.**, **Warehouse**, **Product**, **Qty**, **Unit**, **P.M Responsible**, **Issued by**, and **Issued on**, together with **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. Work from the headers visible in your list when locating the saved note. # Item categories Item categories is the company configuration area for maintaining the categories and subcategories used in the item-category list. Open it when you need to review the list or maintain one of its category records. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the fields and list columns | [Understand the Item categories screen](#understand-the-item-categories-screen) | | Add or change a category | [Add and edit categories](#add-and-edit-categories) | | Remove a category or export the list | [Delete or export list data](#delete-or-export-list-data) | | Resolve a validation or save message | [When validation or saving goes wrong](#when-validation-or-saving-goes-wrong) | | Classify products by product category | [Product categories](doc:configuration-company-product-categories) | ## Before you start You need access to the company configuration area and the permission that matches the action you want to perform. PAMS checks access when the page loads and checks new, edit, delete, export, and import permissions. | Before you start | Why it matters | |---|---| | Access to the company configuration area | It lets you open the Item categories list. | | The item-category feature included in your subscription | PAMS shows the subscription-upgrade surface when the feature is not included. | | Permission to create | **New** appears only when new access is allowed. | | Permission to edit | **Add New Sub-Category** and **Edit** appear only when edit access is allowed. | | Permission to delete | The row delete action appears only when delete access is allowed. | | Permission to export | The export action is available only when export access is allowed. | Importing is not part of the category-maintenance procedures. With access in place, find the Item categories list. ## Find Item categories The Item categories list is a company configuration list. Open the company configuration area and select **Item Categories**. Prerequisites - You are signed in to PAMS. - You have access to company configuration. Steps 1. Open the company configuration area. 2. Select **Item Categories**. **Result:** The Item categories list opens. ## Understand the Item categories screen The screen lists item categories in a **Category** column and opens category details in a dialog. The same dialog pattern is used for a category and for a subcategory. An item category is a named entry in the item-category list. A subcategory is a named entry under its parent category. The category dialog contains **Product category name**. The subcategory dialog contains **Sub product category name**. Both fields are required and use the page's pattern validation. The product-category list contains **Product code**; this Item categories list does not. | Area | What to use | |---|---| | Category list | The **Category** column. | | Category dialog | **Product category name**. | | Subcategory dialog | **Sub product category name**. | | Existing record | The log-history area can appear when the record has an ID. | The list shows its rows without a search panel or paging controls. Reordering rows is available on the product-category list, not on this Item categories list. If you are not signed in when you open the address, the page can show **Email**, **Password**, **Remember Me**, and **Login**, together with **Forgot Your Password?** and **Reset Password**. Complete sign-in before using the Item categories list. ![Sign-in fields shown before the Item categories list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) Use the fields and columns above to choose the maintenance action you need. ## Add and edit categories A subcategory is opened from its parent row with **Add New Sub-Category**. ### Add or edit a category Prerequisites - You are on the Item categories list. - For a new record, you have new permission. - For a subcategory or an existing record, you have edit permission. Steps 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a top-level category | **New** above the list | | Add a subcategory under a row | **Add New Sub-Category** on that row | | Change an existing category | **Edit** on that row | 2. In **Product category name**, enter the category name when the category dialog is open. 3. In **Sub product category name**, enter the subcategory name when the subcategory dialog is open. 4. Finish the dialog. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the category or subcategory | **Save** | | Close without completing the maintenance action | **Cancel** | **Result:** PAMS displays `Data saved Successfully`, closes the dialog, and updates or repaints the list. ![Category dialog with the category name field and save controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/40cbd5134c940aed4af560a13875e9eb.png) ## Delete or export list data Delete removes a category after a confirmation. Export opens the list-export dialog; both actions are distinct from adding or editing a category. ### Delete a category or export the list Prerequisites - You are on the Item categories list. - You have delete permission to remove a row or export permission to export the list. Steps 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Remove a row | The delete action on that row | | Export the list | **Export** in the page controls | 2. Complete the selected action. | If you selected… | Do this | |---|---| | The row delete action | Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`, then select **Delete**. | | **Export** | Choose an export option in the export dialog, or select **Cancel** to close it without exporting. | **Result:** After a successful deletion, PAMS displays `Data Deleted Successfully` and removes the row from the list. The export path opens its export options and closes when you select **Cancel**. ## When validation or saving goes wrong Use the exact message to identify the correction required. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in the required name field. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Correct the name so it follows the accepted character pattern. | | `Must have maximum 10 letters` | Shorten the value to no more than 10 letters. | | `Please Enter the Required Field` | Enter the required category or subcategory name before saving. | | `Required Field can not be Empty Spaces` | Replace a value made only of spaces with a name. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Delete** to confirm or **Cancel** to leave the row unchanged. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The save completed and the dialog closes. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The deletion completed and the row is removed. | ## After maintaining item categories After a successful save, the category dialog closes and the list is updated or repainted. After a successful delete, the row is removed and the list is refreshed. Use [Product categories](doc:configuration-company-product-categories) when you need the product-category list. **Product code** belongs to that list. # Manage accounts ## Manage accounts Account merging combines one or more existing accounts into one account that you select as the target. Use **Manage accounts** when duplicate account records need to be brought together from the configuration area. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the configuration screen | [Find Manage accounts](#find-manage-accounts) | | Review the two account-selection controls and the action available | [Understand the merge screen](#understand-the-merge-screen) | | Combine source accounts into one target account | [Select accounts and confirm a merge](#select-accounts-and-confirm-a-merge) | | Resolve access, selection, or request problems | [Handle access, validation, and errors](#handle-access-validation-and-errors) | | Continue account maintenance | [Know what happens next](#know-what-happens-next) | | Review or create an account before merging | [Accounts](doc:accounts) or [Create an account](doc:create-account) | With the purpose clear, continue to [Before you start](#before-you-start). ## Before you start Before you begin, identify the source accounts you want to combine and the target account you want to keep. A source account is one you combine; the target account is the one you keep. The screen loads the account list through the account lookup for the selected branches; the account names therefore come from that list rather than from a fixed set of choices. . Prerequisites - The configuration subscription that provides the account-merge feature is available. When it is not available, the screen takes the subscription-upgrade path instead of showing the merge area. . - The account records needed for the merge already exist in the account lookup. . - You can identify which accounts are the sources and which account is the target. . - The target is different from every selected source account. If the target is also a source, the merge is stopped before confirmation. . - Neither account-selection control has a required marker in the page definition. The merge action still requires at least one source selection and one target selection. . When these prerequisites are ready, continue to [Find Manage accounts](#find-manage-accounts). ## Find Manage accounts Open **Manage accounts** from the configuration menu. Steps 1. Open the configuration menu. 2. Select **Manage accounts**. 3. Confirm that the **Manage accounts** heading is displayed. ![Confirm the Manage accounts heading, the two account-selection controls, and the Merge action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/30838d7798c7ce540683c0f0f86518b0.png) **Result:** The **Manage accounts** screen is open with the account-merge area available. Continue to [Understand the merge screen](#understand-the-merge-screen). ## Understand the merge screen An account-selection control is a picker for choosing one or more account records. The merge area has two account-selection controls and one merge action. **Select the accounts to be merged from** accepts multiple source accounts; **Select one account to be merged to** accepts one target account. Both account-selection controls receive account records loaded for the selected branches, and the account names are not fixed labels on the page. . | What you need to do | Control | How it works | |---|---|---| | Choose accounts to combine | **Select the accounts to be merged from** | Multi-selection picker; adding and removing an item updates the source selection. The list contains account records for the selected branches with account type `0`; each record is identified by its account ID and displays its account name. | | Choose the account to keep | **Select one account to be merged to** | Single-selection picker; adding or removing an item updates the target selection. The list contains account records for the selected branches with account type `0`; each record is identified by its account ID and displays its account name. | | Start the merge | **Merge** | Available when at least one source and one target are selected. | . The page displays the two picker labels and **Merge**, with no required marker. > **Note:** The account list is loaded for the selected branches, so use the account names shown > in the account-selection controls when choosing the source and target. > The merge area focuses on the two account-selection controls and **Merge**; use the import dialog for file uploads. With the controls identified, continue to [Select accounts and confirm a merge](#select-accounts-and-confirm-a-merge). ## Select accounts and confirm a merge Before you start, identify the account records to combine and the account to keep. Prerequisites - The merge area is visible. - At least one source account and one different target account are available in the account-selection controls. Steps 1. In **Select the accounts to be merged from**, select each account that you want to combine. The list contains account records for the selected branches with account type `0`; each record is identified by its account ID and displays its account name. ![Review **Select the accounts to be merged from** while choosing source accounts.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/343037d6c5b91d8ee08bda8de18aa977.png) 2. In **Select one account to be merged to**, select the account that you want to keep. The list contains account records for the selected branches with account type `0`; each record is identified by its account ID and displays its account name. ![Review **Select one account to be merged to** while choosing the account to keep.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/343037d6c5b91d8ee08bda8de18aa977.png) 3. Select **Merge**. 4. If the confirmation dialog opens, read `You are about to merge these accounts, Are you sure?`. . 5. At the confirmation choice, select one of the following: . | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Send the selected merge request | **Yes** | | Keep the selected accounts unchanged | **No** | **Result:** After step 3, the valid-selection path opens the merge confirmation choice. If a message or alternate access path appears, continue to [Handle access, validation, and errors](#handle-access-validation-and-errors). ## Handle access, validation, and errors The screen has separate paths for feature access, an invalid source-target combination, and a request failure. Use the path that matches what is on screen. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | The subscription-upgrade area appears instead of the merge area | The account-merge feature is not available on this configuration path. | Use the available subscription process, or contact the administrator who manages your configuration. | | `The target account cannot be one of the selected source accounts. Please choose a different account.` | The target is also selected as a source. | Return to **Select one account to be merged to** and choose an account that is not in the source selection. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` while account data loads | The account lookup request failed. | Reload the screen and try again. If the error persists, contact your administrator. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` after the merge request | The merge request failed. | Reload the screen and try again. If the error persists, contact your administrator. | The shared popup also supplies **Cancel** for its supported popup modes. Steps 1. Compare the message on screen with the table above. 2. If the message says `The target account cannot be one of the selected source accounts. Please choose a different account.`, return to **Select one account to be merged to**. 3. If the message appears while account data loads, reload the screen and try again. If it appears after you select **Merge**, reload the screen and try again. If the message persists, contact your administrator. 4. Choose the action that matches the open prompt: | If… | Select | |---|---| | The merge confirmation is open and you want to stop | **No** | | A supported shared popup is open and you want to close it | **Cancel** | **Result:** You have either corrected the selection, stopped the confirmation, or identified the request error shown by the screen. When the request succeeds, continue to [Know what happens next](#know-what-happens-next). ## Know what happens next After a confirmed merge, the component clears the source and target selections, reloads the account lookup, shows `Your request was completed successfully`, and refreshes log history when the reader stays on the page. The merge request sends the selected source accounts and target account to the accounts merge endpoint. Steps 1. Select **Yes** in the confirmation dialog. 2. Confirm that the source and target selections clear. 3. Confirm that the account list reloads. 4. Confirm that the screen shows `Your request was completed successfully`. **Result:** The selected merge request is complete when the selections clear, the account list reloads, and the success message appears. Continue with [Accounts](doc:accounts) for account maintenance or [Create an account](doc:create-account) when another account record is needed. # Manage demo data ## Manage demo data Demo company data gives you records to explore PAMS functions before you use your own data. Use this page to import the demo data, refresh dates in already imported data, or remove the demo data while keeping private data added during your work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Add the demo company data | [Import demo data](#import-demo-data) | | Update dates in imported demo data | [Refresh or delete imported demo data](#refresh-or-delete-imported-demo-data) | | Remove the demo company data | [Refresh or delete imported demo data](#refresh-or-delete-imported-demo-data) | | Resolve an import, refresh, or deletion problem | [When an operation goes wrong](#when-an-operation-goes-wrong) | | Return to the Configuration area | [Configuration home](configuration-home.md) | The page offers **Import demo data** before demo data is imported. After import, it offers **Refresh demo data** and **Delete demo data**. ```mermaid flowchart LR NotImported[Demo data not imported] -->|Import demo data| Imported[Demo data imported] Imported -->|Refresh demo data| Imported Imported -->|Delete demo data| NotImported ``` ## Before you start Choose an operation on the **Manage demo data** page after you open it. Prerequisites - Know whether demo data is already imported so you can choose the action shown for that state. The page starts with the import state when demo data is not imported. In that state, the import description and **Import demo data** are shown. In the imported state, the refresh and deletion descriptions and their controls are shown. ## Find the page Open the page from the Configuration area to reach the demo-data actions. Steps 1. Open the **Configuration** area. 2. Select **Manage demo data**. ![The Manage demo data page after opening it from the Configuration area.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/dca054ee95a287148f64c187d8f18ad3.png) **Result:** The Manage demo data page opens. In the initial state, **Manage demo data**, **Configuration**, and **Import demo data** are visible; **Refresh demo data** and **Delete demo data** are not shown. ## Understand the screen The Manage demo data screen is a state-based action page: its descriptions and controls change when demo data is imported or removed. | Page state | What you see | What you can do | |---|---|---| | Demo data is not imported | The import description | Select **Import demo data** | | Demo data is imported | The refresh description | Select **Refresh demo data** | | Demo data is imported | The deletion description | Select **Delete demo data** | | Import has completed | The completion message | Select **Close** | | Deletion needs confirmation | The deletion question and warning | Select **Keep** or **Delete** | | Deletion has completed | The completion message | Select **Close** | The page is an action page rather than a data-entry list: there are no fields to fill in and no table of records to review. The import modal includes a file-upload surface for its import option, with **Upload** available when importing is not disabled. ![The initial state with the import description and Import demo data action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) ## Import demo data Select **Import demo data** when it is available to add demo company data for exploring PAMS functions without changing your private data. Prerequisites - The page shows **Import demo data**. Steps 1. Select **Import demo data**. 2. Keep the browser window open while the import runs. The import modal displays `Start importing demo company data…` and `Importing the demo company data will take a few minutes. Please do not close this browser window until the import process is complete.` It also displays `Ending the import process before it is finished may result in corrupt data being entered.` 3. When `Importing demo company data completed.` appears, select **Close**. ![The import page state and its available action.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) **Result:** The page is in the imported state and offers **Refresh demo data** and **Delete demo data**. ## Refresh or delete imported demo data Imported demo data can either receive updated dates or be removed from the page while real private data remains. > **Warning:** Deleting demo company data removes all demo data and related records. It does not > affect real private data added during experimentation. Prerequisites - The page is in the imported state. Steps 1. Select the operation that matches your goal, then follow the corresponding action sequence: | If you need to… | Action sequence | |---|---| | Refresh dates in imported demo data | Select **Refresh demo data**. Continue using the imported demo data when `Demo company data refreshed successfully` appears. | | Remove imported demo data and keep it | Select **Delete demo data**. Read `Deleting demo company data?`, the warning `Deleting demo company data (and all its related records) will not affect your real private data that was added during the experimentation.`, and `Important: Importing the demo company data will take a few minutes.` Select **Keep**. | | Remove imported demo data | Select **Delete demo data**. Read `Deleting demo company data?`, the warning `Deleting demo company data (and all its related records) will not affect your real private data that was added during the experimentation.`, and `Important: Importing the demo company data will take a few minutes.` Select **Delete**. Keep the browser window open while deletion runs. When `Demo company data deleted successfully` appears, select **Close**. | The deletion modal displays `Deleting the demo company data will take a few minutes. Please do not close this browser window until the deleting process is complete.` and `Ending the deleting process before it is finished may result in corrupt data being entered.` **Result:** Refresh leaves the imported demo data available with updated dates. Keeping the data closes the confirmation modal. Completing deletion returns the page to its not-imported state. ## When an operation goes wrong The import, refresh, and deletion actions use the same common error response when their request fails. | What you see | Applies to | What to do | |---|---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Import | Check the current page state before selecting the available action again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Refresh | Check the current page state before selecting the available action again. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Delete | Check the current page state before selecting the available action again. | | `Importing the demo company data will take a few minutes. Please do not close this browser window until the import process is complete.` | Import | Keep the browser window open until the import completes. | | `Deleting the demo company data will take a few minutes. Please do not close this browser window until the deleting process is complete.` | Delete | Keep the browser window open until deletion completes. | ## After managing demo data After a successful import, the page shows the imported state with **Refresh demo data** and **Delete demo data**. After successful deletion, it shows the not-imported state with **Import demo data**. The page also states that demo company data can be managed again from Settings through **Demo Data Settings**. | After you finish… | The page shows | Continue with | |---|---|---| | Importing demo data | **Refresh demo data** and **Delete demo data** | Refresh dates or delete the demo data | | Refreshing demo data | The imported state | Continue using the demo data | | Keeping demo data | The imported state | Continue using the demo data | | Deleting demo data | **Import demo data** | Import demo data again when needed | # Management report widgets ## Management report widgets Management report widgets are grouped report views for comparing management measures, financial information, rankings, aging, and bonus information. The groups keep related views together instead of requiring you to search for each widget separately. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Understand the overview first | [Overview](dashboard-overview.md) | | Find the general widget picker | [Widget catalog](dashboard-widget-catalog.md) | | Review sales and backlog measures | [Sales and backlog widgets](sales-and-backlog-widgets.md) | | Review pipeline and status measures | [Pipeline and status widgets](pipeline-and-status-widgets.md) | | Review principal-report selection | [Principal report](principal-report.md) | | Maintain tabs and widget settings | [Settings](configuration-dashboard-settings.md) | ## Prerequisites Before you choose a management report widget, open the overview. Select the tab where you want to review or maintain widgets. The widget library is the surface where widgets are selected. Edit mode is the state in which widget tools and tab-management entries are available. The widget library is available when the module is included in your subscription. The widget grid appears when the selected tab contains at least one widget. | Before you start | What it determines | |---|---| | The module is included in your subscription | The widget library can appear. | | The selected tab contains at least one widget | The widget grid appears. | | The selected tab is in edit mode | Widget tools and tab-management entries are available. | | Your role, subscription, and setup support the catalog branch | The available rows can differ. | | The selected tab supports the widget picker | The widget picker can appear. | ## Find and open the widget catalog The widget catalog is the place where you find available cards and charts for the selected tab. **Prerequisites** - You can open the overview. - The tab you want to review is selected. **Steps** 1. Open the overview. 2. Select the tab that owns the widgets you want to review. 3. Open the widget catalog for the selected tab. 4. Select **Search for widget** when the catalog menu is open. 5. Enter a widget title in **Search for widget**. 6. Review the matching widget rows. **Result:** The matching widget rows are visible in the widget catalog when the catalog is available. ## Understand the catalog and report surface The report surface contains tabs and a widget area. The widget catalog uses a multi-select grid with a search panel, thumbnails, titles, and descriptions. The thumbnail and title columns are visible in the catalog grid. The identifier and description columns are conditional. When the report surface is in edit mode, the active tab menu contains **Rename tab** and **Delete tab**. The tab popup labels its tab-name field **New Tab**. Its deletion choices include **Cancel** and **Delete**. The live report surface displays the following labelled sorting controls without a required marker: | Control | What you can review with it | |---|---| | **Sort by Booking** | Principal booking order | | **Sort by Target** | Principal target order | | **Sort by Achievement** | Principal achievement order | The report surface also displays **Principals Report**, **Today**, **Next 10 days**, **Last 10 days**, **Sales Pipeline**, **Accounts in Sales Pipeline**, **Teams Booking vs. Target**, **Backlog**, **Teams Running Offer**, **Branch Tendency to Target**, **Principals Tendency to Target**, **Branch Booking vs. Target This Year**, **Branch Running Offers**, **Firm Offers**, and **Budget Offers**. ![Review the report surface's visible management-report views and sorting controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/48a474559dad410770fcdeb81cb1cba9.png) ## Review Top-N widgets Top-N widgets are available through the shared picker when the relevant subscription is present. Booking and sales breakdown widgets provide a period selector, paging, chart-type switch, reference- commission switch, label-visibility control, and **Download as image** when their option bar is enabled. Offer breakdown widgets also provide current-offer, budget-offer, and firm-offer filters. **Booking This Year** compares achieved booking, forecast, and blind forecast for the year. The account hit-rate widget provides **Client**, **Principals**, **Sales responsible**, **Teams**, **Market segment**, and **Product types** choices, with count-rate and value-rate data. ## Review MRM widgets The selectable MRM set covers booking, backlog, L/G, warehouse, sales, cost, profit, currencies, receivables, payables, net profit, gross margin, and forecast cash flow. MRM widgets are available when the required subscription is present. MRM widgets in the catalog are locked and cannot be moved. When editing is allowed, editable financial widgets permit the current month or the immediately preceding month. **Total Sales** provides **Taxable**, **Pams data**, and **Manual data** choices, together with group- and-product views and the documented sales measures. Receivables and payables require **Currency** when a missing or new currency is entered in an editable row. **Forecast Cash Flow** provides invoice-delay settings. For each setting, enter a number, choose **Days**, **Weeks**, or **Months**, and select **Apply**. ## Choose and manage widgets Choosing a widget adds it to the selected widget list for the active tab. A widget already in that tab cannot be added a second time. In edit mode, the widget menu contains **Remove widget from tab**. **Prerequisites** - The tab you want to change is selected. - The report surface is in edit mode when widget tools are required. **Steps** 1. Open the widget catalog for the selected tab. 2. Choose the widgets to add: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Add specific widgets | Select the individual widget rows. | | Add every available widget | Select **Select all**. | 3. Return to the report grid. 4. Open the widget menu for the widget you want to remove. 5. Select **Remove widget from tab**. **Result:** The selected report tab contains the widgets you selected, and a removed widget no longer appears in that tab. ## Handle widget availability and report branches Report tabs can show different report views. User and MRM report tabs use the standard widget area, while **Principals Report** and Eagle View use separate views. | If you are reviewing… | Use this guidance | |---|---| | Ranking views | Review the ranking rows for principals, clients, vendors, teams, market segments, account managers, product types, variants, months, sales, offers, backlog, and account hit rate. | | Cash views | Review receivables, cash-cover, invoice, outstanding-commission, and forecast-backlog-payment rows. | | MRM views | Review the available booking, warehouse, finance, project-management, cash-flow, receivables, payables, profit, currency, and shipment rows. | | Aging views | Review aging receivables. | | Bonus views | Review Bonus Distribution and Teams Tendency and Bonus. | | Other report views | Review pipeline, booking, offers, orders, deliveries, tasks, visits, targets, trends, statuses, guarantees, and time-based comparisons. | The live report surface shows principal names and numeric readouts rather than a data grid in **Principals Report**. ## When widget selection fails Use the exact message on screen to choose the corrective action. | Message | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required tab value is empty. | Enter the tab value, then submit the tab action again. | | `You already have a tab with the same name` | The tab name is already used. | Enter a different tab name. | | `You already have this tab in this dashboard` | The selected tab already exists in this report. | Continue with the existing tab or choose a different tab. | | `You already have this widget in this tab` | The selected widget is already in the tab. | Keep the existing widget instead of adding it again. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The request completed successfully. | Return to the report surface and review the selected tab. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request did not complete. | Retry the action from the owning report or report page. | | `Please choose one or more principals` | Principal selection is required for the Principal report. | Continue with [Principal report](principal-report.md). | ## What to do next After selecting or removing a widget, review the selected report tab. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Review the report surface and its tabs | [Overview](dashboard-overview.md) | | Review the general widget picker | [Widget catalog](dashboard-widget-catalog.md) | | Review sales and backlog measures | [Sales and backlog widgets](sales-and-backlog-widgets.md) | | Review pipeline and status measures | [Pipeline and status widgets](pipeline-and-status-widgets.md) | | Review principal-report selection or columns | [Principal report](principal-report.md) | | Maintain report tabs and widget settings | [Settings](configuration-dashboard-settings.md) | **Result:** You are back on the report tab that owns the widget, or on the owning report page when the widget branch requires report-specific selection. # Offers Use this page to prepare a priced Offer, move it through approval and client delivery, revise it when needed, and return it to an earlier sales stage or continue to an Order. ## Offers An Offer is the priced sales proposal between an Inquiry and an Order. It carries the commercial terms and item values that the next stage uses. The sales-job path is Potentials → Inquiries → Offers → Orders, followed by completion. An Offer can also leave the active path through regret, cancellation, or loss. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find an existing Offer | [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) and then [Find and open an Offer](#find-and-open-an-offer) | | Enter prices, dates, terms, or items | [Price and save an Offer](#price-and-save-an-offer) | | Request approval or send the proposal | [Approve and send an Offer](#approve-and-send-an-offer) | | Change the proposal or choose an exit | [Revise, close, or return an Offer](#revise-close-or-return-an-offer) | | Continue after the Offer | [What happens next](#what-happens-next) | | Work on the preceding request | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Work on the accepted commercial commitment | [Orders](doc:orders) | ## Before you start Prerequisites | Have ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | The Inquiry context, including the client, vendor, requested items, responsible person, product type, commercial terms, and relevant dates | These details feed the Offer and the later Order. | - Have permission to edit the sales job. The Offer action area is available only for an editable saved record with no unsaved Offer changes. - Confirm that the sales job is at the Offer stage or one of its Offer outcomes. The Offer panel covers the Offer through Lost Offer stages. - Confirm which fields your company requires. Offer No., Offer Type, Bid Due Date, Offer Date, Validity Period, Delivery Time, Delivery Term, Payment Method, and Payment Period are required only where company configuration marks them required. - Use the available **Offer Type** choice. - Have the approval role and mail permission needed for the action you intend to take. | Choice | Reader action | |---|---| | **Offer Type** | Select an available value. | ## Find and open an Offer Use the Offers list when you need to locate work already in the Offer stage or an Offer outcome. Steps 1. Open the Sales jobs list at `/sales/list/offers/view`. 2. Select **Offers**. 3. Use the visible headers **Job No.**, **File No.**, **Sales responsible**, **Vendor**, **Client**, **Job title**, Offer price (€), **Offer type**, Job status, and **Offer stage** to identify the record. ![The Offers list with its stage tabs and Offer columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4ad969154afaec70ae65f640b65b49fa.png) 4. Select the record row to open its sales-job workspace. The list also provides icon buttons titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and Settings. On the Offers route, `Show archived` is absent. Use the [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) page for the shared list-navigation procedure. **Result:** The selected sales job opens with its Offer panel available when the record and stage conditions allow it. ### Open the Direct order entry from the Offers list This route creates an Order record rather than an Offer. Use it only when your work belongs in the Order entry flow. Steps 1. Select **Add new**. 2. Select **Direct order**. 3. Confirm that **Save** and **Save and Close** are available on the Direct order page. ![The Direct order entry page with its controls and item grid](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c987701d5b156c3b914c50cde5b7fc1f.png) 4. Use the [Create a sales job](doc:create-sales-job) page for the Direct order procedure. **Result:** The Direct order entry page is open with **Save**, **Save and Close**, its order fields, and its item grid. ## Understand the Offer workspace An Offer workspace is the sales-job record around one Offer panel: the panel contains the commercial information, the item rows, the panel actions, and links to related Offer work. The Offer panel appears when the subscription is included, the sales job is in the Offer through Lost Offer range, and the Offer is open. The panel action area requires an editable saved record with no unsaved Offer changes. | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | Offer No. | Identify the proposal number | | Offer Type | Choose an available value | | Bid Due Date | Record the deadline; it cannot precede the Inquiry Date | | Offer Date | Record the proposal date; it cannot precede the Inquiry Date | | Validity Period | Set the validity period within the allowed company range | | Delivery Time | Set the delivery period from 1 through the allowed company maximum | | Delivery Term | Choose a delivery term from the values available to your company | | Payment Method | Choose a payment method from the values available to your company | | Payment Period | Set the payment period from 1 through the allowed company maximum | | Item grid | Enter the item description, quantity, unit, unit price, discount, and calculated item value | | Offer links | Open **Calculation Sheet**, **Margin**, **Commissions**, **Payment Milestone**, **Technical Notes**, or **Commercial Notes** when each link is available | Use the headers displayed in your Offer grid when you enter item values. The panel also contains selectors beside Validity Period, Delivery Time, and Payment Period whose labels are not shown in the panel template. The Offer panel can contain company-configured fields. If a field is not present in your workspace, continue with the fields and links displayed for your company. Use the Offers list headers described in [Find and open an Offer](#find-and-open-an-offer) when you identify an Offer from this workspace. ![The opened Offer panel with its commercial fields and item area](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e08959a6a4f0d3f01ffe69b79f03d07b.png) ## Price and save an Offer Use this procedure to prepare the proposal from the Inquiry information or update an existing Offer. ### Enter the Offer details Prerequisites - The Offer is open in an editable saved sales-job workspace. - You have the proposal date, bid deadline, validity period, delivery terms, payment terms, and item values. Steps 1. In **Offer No.**, enter the proposal number when your company requires one. 2. In **Offer Type**, select an available value. 3. In **Bid Due Date**, enter a date on or after the Inquiry Date. 4. In **Offer Date**, enter a date on or after the Inquiry Date. 5. In **Validity Period**, enter a value within the allowed company range. 6. In **Delivery Time**, enter a value from 1 through the allowed company maximum. 7. In **Delivery Term**, select a delivery-term record from the list. Each option is identified by its displayed Code. 8. In **Payment Method**, select a payment-method record from the list. Each option is identified by its displayed Code. 9. In **Payment Period**, enter a value from 1 through the allowed company maximum. **Result:** The Offer panel contains the commercial information needed for pricing and review. ### Add item values and related commercial work Steps 1. In the item grid, enter the item description and a positive quantity for each row. 2. Select the unit for each item row. 3. Enter the unit price for each item row. 4. Enter the discount for each item row. 5. Select the link that matches the related work you need: | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Review the saved supplier Offer's cost calculation | **Calculation Sheet** | | Review the margin view | **Margin** | | Review commissions for a non-supplier user | **Commissions** | | Review payment milestones when the feature is available | **Payment Milestone** | 6. Select **Technical Notes** or **Commercial Notes** for the corresponding Offer notes. **Result:** The Offer contains its item values and any related calculation, margin, commission, milestone, or note work you opened. ### Save the Offer Steps 1. Select **Save** in the Offer panel. 2. Confirm that the Offer remains open and that its changes are displayed. **Result:** The saved Offer remains in the workspace and the application displays `Job updated successfully` after a successful update. ## Approve and send an Offer Approval and client delivery depend on the Offer stage, the approval process, your approval permission, mail permission, and the Send Email feature. | If the Offer is… | Use… | |---|---| | Awaiting approval and you cannot approve it | **Cancel approval request** | | Awaiting approval and you can approve it | **Approve** or **Reject approval request** | | Approved and you need to reverse approval | **Consider as not approved** | | Eligible for client delivery and mail is available | **Send offer to client** or **Re-send offer to client** | | Eligible for submission when mail is unavailable | **Consider Offer As Sent To Client** | Prerequisites - The Offer is saved with no unsaved changes. - The Offer stage and your role match one of the rows in the table. Steps 1. Check the stage shown on the Offer panel. 2. Open the Offer action menu. ![The Offer action menu with state-dependent actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e00cb92783c80f47b93ba4355c371937.png) 3. Select the action that matches the Offer stage and your permission. 4. Confirm the resulting stage or client-delivery state shown on the Offer panel. **Result:** The Offer is submitted for approval, approved, sent to the client, marked as sent without mail, or left unchanged when the required branch is unavailable. ## Revise, close, or return an Offer Use the Offer action menu for a revision, alternative proposal, validity extension, regret, cancellation, loss, reversal, return to Inquiry, or conversion to Order. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Convert an eligible Offer to the next sales stage | **Order** | | Extend an expired or approval-pending validity period | **Extend offer validity** | | Prepare a revised proposal | **Revision** | | Prepare an additional proposal | **Alternative Offer** | | Edit an approved-or-later Offer when editing is allowed | **Enable Editing** | | Close an Offer as regretted | **Regret** | | Reverse a regretted result when allowed | **consider as not regretted** | | Record that the client cancelled the request | **Inquiry Cancelled By Client** | | Reverse a cancellation when allowed | **Consider As Not Cancelled** | | Close an Offer as lost | **Lost** | | Reverse a lost result when allowed | **Consider As Not Lost** | | Return a draft Offer to the preceding stage | **Back to Inquiry** | | Remove a draft or rejected-approval Offer | **Delete** | Prerequisites - The Offer is saved and its current stage matches the action you need. - The relevant feature, permission, and approval conditions are available. Steps 1. Check **Offer stage** in the Offer panel or list row. 2. Open the Offer action menu. 3. Select the applicable action from the table. 4. Confirm that the Offer panel or list shows the resulting stage. **Result:** The Offer follows the selected revision, exit, reversal, return, or Order path. An eligible Offer can continue to the Order workspace. ## When Offer work goes wrong Use the message text below to choose the correction route. Messages belonging to another page are grouped under that page so you do not correct the wrong record type. ### Offer and Offer-related messages | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `This field is required ` | Complete the field marked as required. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a value greater than 0 and no higher than 999,999.00. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter 0 or a positive value. | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Enter an action for every payment milestone. | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Save the open cost sheet before continuing with the Offer action. | | `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.` | Review the discount and negotiation margin in the cost calculation. | | `Job updated successfully` | The Offer update completed. | | `Job deleted successfully` | The Offer deletion completed. | | `Job regretted successfully` | The Offer regret action completed. | | `Job cancelled successfully` | The Offer cancellation action completed. | | `Job reactivated successfully` | The record was reactivated. | | `Converted to lost` | The Offer moved to the lost outcome. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the Offer fields and action conditions, then retry the applicable action. | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Return every Offer to Draft before selecting **Back to Inquiry**. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the fields marked as required. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Enter a positive quantity for every item row. | | `One or more items has no unit` | Select a unit for every item row. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add at least one item to the Offer. | | `Offer converted to order successfully` | Continue in the Order workspace. | | `Offer updated successfully` | The Offer update completed. | | `Please Solve the Following Issues :` | Correct each field listed below the summary. | | `Bid Due Date is required` | Return to the Inquiry and enter **Bid Due Date** before converting it to an Offer. | If a zero-price confirmation appears, read the full prompt before choosing an option: `Offer price zero | Your Offer Price Is Zero! | Are you sure you want to deliver free of charge?` ### Messages owned by the Inquiries page `Converted to offer successfully` belongs to Inquiry work. `Please save opened inquiry first` belongs to Inquiry work. `Converted to inquiry successfully` belongs to Potential work. Use [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) for that correction route. If you see `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential`, return to the Potential work and keep each Inquiry in Draft before selecting the return action. This message belongs to the Potential context: `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential`. | Message | Owning context | Reader action | |---|---|---| | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Potential work | Keep each Inquiry in Draft before selecting the return action. | ### Messages owned by Orders and purchasing pages `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists`, `Sales order is archived`, and the following messages belong to purchasing or Order work. Use [Orders](doc:orders) or the relevant purchasing page. | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Orders | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Orders | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Orders | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Orders | | `No remaining items. All items have been selected` | Purchase jobs | | `Order must have at least one item` | Orders | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Purchase jobs | | `Please enter at least one email` | Purchase jobs | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Purchase jobs | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Orders | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchase jobs | ### Messages owned by other pages - Account and contact work: `Custom fields saved successfully`, `An account with this name already exists`, `Error: Vendor not saved yet`, `Error: Client not saved yet`, `This Field Is Required`, `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.`, and ` You already have a contact with this name`. - Files and products: `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`, `This product is already included in BOM`, `The first variant cannot be deleted`, `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.`, and `Please select one product`. - Materials requisitions: ` Package must have at least one item`, `You cannot save without adding at least one product`, and `One of products has no quantity`. - Activities and invoices: `Action not allowed`, `Check validation`, `One topic and at least one note is required`, and `There is no topic to print`. - Delivery and reference work: `Error loading accounts`, `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer`, `There is error in serial you have entered`, and `Minimum: At least one serial`. - Letters of Guarantee: `You don’t have permission`, `LG still needs confirmation`, `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage`, `Please choose a date after the current expiry date`, and ` There is a pending increase you can edit`. - Other shared job outcomes: `Custom fields saved successfully`, `Job missed successfully`, `Converted To Regretted`, `Converted to cancelled`, `Error saving custom fields`, `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists`, `Error {{errorMsg}}`, `A project with this name already exists`, `Your request was completed successfully`, and `Package must have at least one item`. ### Messages owned by Material requisition and Purchasing inquiry pages `Required Receiving Date`, `Required Receiving After`, `Required Offer Type`, and `Required Bid Due Date` belong to Material requisition details or Purchasing inquiry pages, not the Offer panel. ## What happens next An eligible Offer continues to an Order. The **Order** action is available for Offers in Valid, Considered as valid, or Expired states. Conversion moves the sales job to Order and opens the first Order panel. Use [Orders](doc:orders) for the next stage. Returning a draft Offer with **Back to Inquiry** sends the work back to the Inquiry stage. Use [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) to continue the preceding request. If the Offer is lost, regretted, or cancelled, continue with the corresponding outcome procedure in [Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs). # Payables ## Payables Payables is the list area for supplier invoices and outgoing supplier payments. Use it to review the items that feed additional direct-cost work and Job Profitability. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Open a list and choose its status view | [Find a purchase invoice or outgoing payment](#find-a-purchase-invoice-or-outgoing-payment) | | Read the list headers and display controls | [Understand the Payables lists](#understand-the-payables-lists) | | Use the available export path | [Export a Payables list](#export-a-payables-list) | | Choose a payment or list branch | [Handle list and payment branches](#handle-list-and-payment-branches) | | Respond to a blocked action | [When a Payables action fails](#when-a-payables-action-fails) | | Continue with the record after list review | [Continue from a Payables list](#continue-from-a-payables-list) | | Follow the invoice flow | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | Record a payment | [Record a payment](doc:record-payment) | | Review profitability after payment and cost work | [Job profitability overview](doc:job-profitability-overview) | ## Before you start Payables is available when the Invoices module is included. The list family and the actions you can use depend on access rights and on the list layout available to your company. **Prerequisites** | Before you start | Why it matters | | --- | --- | | Payables is included in your subscription | The Payables lists and their controls can appear. | | You know whether you need Purchase Invoices or Outgoing Payments | Each tab provides a different list family and its own status views. | | Your account has the permission needed for the action | New-payment, export, and delete controls are permission-dependent. | | A list layout is available | The headers you see come from the selected list layout. | The list has no required-entry step or required marker. Its columns are selected from the list layout, so use the headers currently shown on your screen rather than expecting one fixed set. ## Find a purchase invoice or outgoing payment Purchase Invoices are the list of supplier invoices. Outgoing Payments are the list family for payments made against those invoices or against additional direct costs. **Prerequisites** - You can open the Payables list. - You know which list family contains the item you want to review. **Steps** 1. Open the Purchase Invoices list at `/finance/payables/list/purchase-invoices/view`. 2. Select the list family that matches your work. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Review supplier invoices | **Purchase Invoices** | | Review payments or payment allocation | **Outgoing Payments** | 3. Select the status view for the list family. | List family | Available status view | | --- | --- | | Purchase Invoices | **All**, **Upcoming**, **Payable**, or **Paid** | | Outgoing Payments | **All**, **Not completely Allocated**, or **Completely Allocated** | 4. Review the rows in the selected view. 5. Select a row outside its action area to open the corresponding invoice or payment record. **Result:** The selected Payables list remains open on the chosen status view, ready to review a row or continue to its record. ![Review the Purchase Invoices list, its list-family tabs, status views, and current headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/04d511049225a316c31a1c0241d06e54.png) ## Understand the Payables lists The list combines status views, a layout-controlled grid, paging, and display settings. The headers are the quickest way to identify what each row contains. The Purchase Invoices list currently shows these headers: | Header | What to use it for | | --- | --- | | **Account** | Identify the account on the row. | | **Created By** | Identify who created the row. | | **Job No.** | Identify the related job number. | | **Sub-supplier Order No.** | Identify the sub-supplier order number. | | **Payment Due Date** | Check the payment due date. | | **Total Amount** | Review the total in its original currency. | | **Total Amount (€)** | Review the total converted to euros. | | **Due Amount** | Review the amount still due in its original currency. | | **Due Amount (€)** | Review the amount still due in euros. | | **Paid Amount** | Review the paid amount in its original currency. | | **Paid Amount (€)** | Review the paid amount in euros. | | **Status** | Review the row status. | The selected layout controls the column set, so a different layout can change the headers shown. The list also provides these display controls: | Control | Use | | --- | --- | | **Refresh** | Reload the list. | | **Table Layout** | Open the list-layout controls. | | **Settings** | Open display settings. | | **Filter Row** | Show the row-filter area after settings are opened. | | **Group Panel** | Show the grouping area after settings are opened. | The list uses 30-row paging. Use the current headers and the available settings. ![Read the current Purchase Invoices headers and list controls before reviewing a row.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5b51985477e0ac62bc30576860127760.png) ![Review Filter Row and Group Panel after opening Settings.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ba649f41922242807ab3ab1a023d05af.png) ## Export a Payables list Use the export controls from the current list view. **Prerequisites** - The export control is available to your account. - The list you want to export is open. **Steps** 1. Select **Settings**. 2. Select **Export**. 3. Select **Export to Excel**. **Result:** The export path is set to **Export to Excel**. ## Handle list and payment branches The payment menu appears only for the matching list and access branch. The display settings also depend on which list options your account can use. **Prerequisites** - You know whether you are reviewing a list, creating a payment, filtering, or grouping. - The permission and list condition for that branch are available. **Steps** 1. Select the branch that matches your task. | If… | First control | Next control | | --- | --- | --- | | You need to review supplier invoices | **Purchase Invoices** | — | | You need to review payment allocation | **Outgoing Payments** | — | | You need to create a payment for a purchase invoice | **Outgoing Payment** | **Pay Purchase Invoice** | | You need to create a payment for an additional direct cost | **Outgoing Payment** | **Pay Additional Direct Cost** | | You need to filter the list | **Settings** | **Filter Row** | | You need to group the list | **Settings** | **Group Panel** | | You need to export the list | **Settings** | **Export** | **Result:** The list or payment branch that matches your task is open. ## When a Payables action fails Use the message text to decide whether to correct a filter, review access, or stop before continuing to a branch that needs another task. **Prerequisites** - An action has displayed a message or has not provided the control you need. **Steps** 1. Compare the message or missing control with the table below. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character and apply the filter again. | | `Are you sure you want to Delete this transaction ?` | A cost-transaction deletion message is open. | Stop and use the page that owns cost-transaction deletion. | | `NO Data to Export` | The current list has no data to export. | Review the current list before exporting again. | | Export message | `Export to PDF` | Continue with the list procedure. | | The new-payment, export, or delete control is absent | The corresponding permission or list condition is not active. | Review the required access with your administrator. | | The list shows a different set of headers. | The selected list layout provides a different column set. | Use the headers currently shown in your list. | **Result:** You have corrected the filter or identified the access or list branch to use next. ## Continue from a Payables list A Payables row is the handoff point from list review to the invoice or payment record. Supplier invoices lead into invoice work; outgoing supplier payments and additional direct costs feed the Job Profitability view. **Prerequisites** - The correct list family and status view are open. - A row is available to review. **Steps** 1. Select the row you want to continue with outside its action area. 2. Continue in the record that matches the selected list family. 3. Choose the next procedure for the work you need to do. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Follow invoice status work | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | | Record payment work | [Record a payment](doc:record-payment) | | Review profitability after payment or additional direct-cost work | [Job profitability overview](doc:job-profitability-overview) | **Result:** You leave the Payables list with the next invoice, payment, or profitability procedure identified. # Payment methods ## Payment methods Payment methods are named, coded entries that you maintain in the Payment Methods reference list. Use this page when you need to add, change, or remove an entry. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Check the list and its fields | [Find the Payment Methods list](#find-the-payment-methods-list) | | Read the fields and dialog controls | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add or edit an entry | [Add or edit a payment method](#add-or-edit-a-payment-method) | | Delete, filter, import, or export | [Handle delete, filter, import, and export branches](#handle-delete-filter-import-and-export-branches) | | Resolve a save, delete, or refresh message | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue to a sibling reference list | [After maintaining payment methods](#after-maintaining-payment-methods) | | Maintain delivery terms | [Delivery Terms](doc:configuration-sales-delivery-terms) | | Maintain units | [Units](doc:configuration-sales-item-units) | | Maintain guarantee types | [Guarantee Types](doc:configuration-sales-requested-guarantee) | | Maintain lost reasons | [Lost Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Maintain regret reasons | [Regret Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Maintain cancellation reasons | [Cancellation Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain order cancellation reasons | [Order Cancellation Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | ## Before you start The Payment Methods list is a permission-controlled reference list: the actions available to you depend on the permissions returned for your account. **Prerequisites** | Before you begin | What to have ready | |---|---| | Add an entry | The **Name** and **Code** you want to enter. | | Edit an entry | The payment-method row you want to change. | | Delete an entry | The row you want to remove and permission to delete it. | | Export the list | Permission to export it. | | Import entries | Permission to import them. | | Show the filter row | Access to the **Settings** menu. | The entry form is where you enter **Name** and **Code**. An action column is the action area at the end of a row. The **New** action depends on add permission; the edit action in an existing row’s action column depends on edit permission; the delete action in a row’s action column depends on delete permission; and the **Export** and **Import** items depend on their respective permissions. ## Find the Payment Methods list The Payment Methods list is the screen where you locate an existing row or start a new entry. The list contains three rows under the **Name** and **Code** columns. ![Look for the three rows, their Name and Code headers, and the sibling reference-list navigation.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a7ff5700538898c66fcca68be26543b0.png) **Prerequisites** - You know the **Name** or **Code** you want to find. **Steps** 1. Open **Payment Methods** in the configuration navigation. 2. Confirm that the page heading reads **Payment Methods**. 3. Identify rows under the **Name** and **Code** columns. 4. Choose how to continue. | If you want to… | Do this | |---|---| | Add an entry | Select **New**. | | Edit an entry | Select an existing row. | 5. Select the icon whose title is **Refresh** to refresh the list. 6. Select the icon whose title is **Settings** to open list options. ![Look for the Payment Methods heading, the **Name** and **Code** columns, and the **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a712265c1039baf8f3b7f7dce949b54c.png) **Result:** You are on the Payment Methods list and can choose a row or **New**. ## Understand the list and form The list presents the payment-method values as **Name** and **Code** columns; the entry dialog presents those same two values as required text fields. The list also contains a hidden payment-method identifier and an action column. The identifier is used by the system but is not an entry value for you to edit. The filter row is controlled by **Filter Row** in the **Settings** menu. The form appears when a payment method is selected. | What you see | What it is for | |---|---| | **Name** | The payment method's name. | | **Code** | The payment method's code. | | **Filter Row** | Shows or hides the grid filter row. | | **OK** | Confirms the open entry dialog. | | **Table Layout** | Header control beside **Settings**. | | `PaymentMethodID` | A hidden identifier, not an editable value. | | Sibling reference-list labels | Destinations for other configuration lists, including **Units**, **Delivery Terms**, **Lost Reasons**, **Regret Reasons**, **Cancellation Reasons**, and **Order Cancellation Reasons**. | When the import branch is opened, the shared popup contains a file control. The **Import** menu item is permission-controlled. To edit an existing row, use the action control at the end of that row. The visible columns are **Name** and **Code**. No additional column chooser is available. ![Look for the New Payment Method dialog and its required **Name** and **Code** fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e1847c16caa1077f87937271385f5a94.png) ## Add or edit a payment method Use the form to maintain the **Name** and **Code** values for an entry. **Prerequisites** - You have permission to add or edit payment methods. - For an edit, you have an existing row selected. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | Task | Action | |---|---| | Add an entry | Select **New**. | | Edit an entry | In an existing row, select the edit control in the action column. | 2. Confirm that the **Name** and **Code** fields are present in the **New Payment Method** dialog. 3. Enter the payment method name in **Name**. 4. Enter the payment method code in **Code**. 5. Confirm the dialog, then choose the outcome you want. | If you want to… | Select… | |---|---| | Submit the entry | **OK**, then **Save**. | | Close without saving | **OK**, then **Cancel**. | ![Look for the New Payment Method dialog, the required **Name** and **Code** fields, and **OK**.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ec218b4f56dde3deed7d32b6f8cd9185.png) **Result:** The entry form closes after the save action, and a successful save produces the message `Data saved Successfully`. ## Handle delete, filter, import, and export branches These branches change what you can do from the list: deletion acts on a selected row, filtering changes the list view, and export opens a separate list-format dialog. ### Delete an entry **Prerequisites** - You have permission to delete payment methods. - You have identified the row to remove. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Read the confirmation message `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose the result you want. | If you want to… | Select… | |---|---| | Keep the row | **Cancel** | | Remove the row | **Delete** | **Result:** The row remains when you select **Cancel**; a successful deletion produces `Data Deleted Successfully`. ### Filter or export the list **Prerequisites** - You are on the Payment Methods list. - You have permission for the action you choose. **Steps** 1. Select **Settings**. 2. Choose one option from this table. | If you want to… | Select… | What appears | |---|---|---| | Show or hide the grid filter row | **Filter Row** | The filter row changes visibility. | | Open the export choices | **Export** | The **Exporting List:** dialog opens. | | Leave the export dialog | **Cancel** | The dialog closes. | | Run the displayed export choice | **Export** | The export action runs. | 3. In the **Exporting List:** dialog, select **Export to Excel** when that option is displayed. 4. Select **Cancel** to leave the dialog without running the displayed export choice. ![Look for the Exporting List dialog and its Export to Excel, Cancel, and Export controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f1817010ebfac280d4cd17b1df32e51d.png) **Result:** The filter row is shown or hidden, or the export dialog closes after you leave it. The **Import** item is available only when import permission allows it. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the message text to identify what happened after a list action. | What you see | When it appears | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Data saved Successfully` | After a successful save. | Check the list for the maintained entry. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | After a successful deletion. | Check that the row is no longer in the list. | | `Updated around a minute ago` | When the refresh tooltip calculates about one minute since the last refresh. | Select **Refresh** when you need the list refreshed. | | `Updated minutes ago` | When the refresh tooltip calculates more than one minute since the last refresh. | Select **Refresh** when you need the list refreshed. | The availability of **New**, edit, delete, **Export**, and **Import** depends on the corresponding permission. The entry form is available when a payment method is selected. Required markers on **Name** and **Code** appear in the opened form. ## After maintaining payment methods The Payment Methods page remains the place to check the list after a maintenance action. **Prerequisites** - You have completed or stopped the action you started. **Steps** 1. Select **Refresh** to reload the list. 2. Check the **Name** and **Code** columns for the entry you maintained. 3. Choose the sibling list that matches your next task: | If you need to maintain… | Continue to… | |---|---| | Units | [Units](doc:configuration-sales-item-units) | | Delivery terms | [Delivery Terms](doc:configuration-sales-delivery-terms) | | Guarantee types | [Guarantee Types](doc:configuration-sales-requested-guarantee) | | Lost reasons | [Lost Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Regret reasons | [Regret Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Cancellation reasons | [Cancellation Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Order cancellation reasons | [Order Cancellation Reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | **Result:** The list is refreshed, and you can continue with the next reference-list task. # Pricing Quotation exception lists ## Pricing Quotation exception lists Pricing Quotation exception lists bring together records that need review outside the ordinary Pricing Quotation lists. Use the Archived tab to choose one of five filters: **Archived**, **Unquoted RFQs**, **Cancelled RFQs**, **Rejected Quotations**, or **Deleted**. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Open the archived exception filters | [Open an exception list](#open-an-exception-list) | | Identify the columns and controls on the list | [Read the exception-list results](#read-the-exception-list-results) | | Choose the list that matches the record's exception | [Handle list variations and problems](#handle-list-variations-and-problems) | | Continue with a record after reviewing a list | [Continue from an exception list](#continue-from-an-exception-list) | | Understand the wider Pricing Quotation work area | [Pricing Quotation overview](doc:pricing-quotation-overview) | | Work with current, non-exception records | [Pricing Quotation active lists](doc:pricing-quotation-active-lists) | ![Identify the five exception filters and the current result columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e6a1516f378b1c29e906eaa9f4ea4c7d.png) ## Before you start Before you open an exception list, make sure your account includes the Buyout Job Module. When the module is included, the Pricing Quotation list loads; otherwise, the application shows the upgrade surface. The list also appears only in the purchasing area of a saved job when the purchasing tab and its feature conditions are met. The column set comes from the list layout saved for your workspace. Work from the headers that are visible in the list rather than expecting every available field on every exception route. Prerequisites - You have access to the Buyout Job Module. - You are in the purchasing area where the Pricing Quotation list is available. - You know which exception you need to review. ## Open an exception list After you confirm access and the purchasing area, an exception filter gives you a saved route for reviewing Pricing Quotation records grouped by the way they left the ordinary list. Open the filter that matches the work you need to review. Prerequisites - You are on the Pricing Quotation list. - The Archived tab is available. Steps 1. Select **Archived** to open the archived list. ![Select Archived to open the exception filters.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ea0f6713b73d06d572b9922e2dad4640.png) 2. Select one filter from the table. | If you need to review… | Select | | --- | --- | | records with no quotation | **Unquoted RFQs** | | cancelled quotation requests | **Cancelled RFQs** | | rejected quotations | **Rejected Quotations** | | deleted Pricing Quotations | **Deleted** | | the archived landing list | **Archived** | 3. Confirm the selected filter label at the top of the list. **Result:** The selected exception list is open, and its filter label is visible above the results. ## Read the exception-list results After you open a filter, each result row represents one Pricing Quotation record. The list currently shows the fields in the saved layout, so the headers visible on your route are the fields available for that view. The main archived view shows these ten columns: | Column | What the list displays | | --- | --- | | **Package no.** | The identifier assigned to the package | | **Sales job No.** | The sales job associated with the package | | **Purchaser** | The person responsible for purchasing | | **Sub-supplier** | The supplier providing the package item | | **Client** | The client associated with the package | | **Package title** | The name describing the package | | **Offer price** | The quoted amount for the offer | | Offer price in € | The quoted amount expressed in euros | | **Regret reason** | The reason recorded for the exception | | **Regret date** | The date recorded for the exception | The list definition includes twelve field types: job number, package stage, package, purchasing responsible, sub-supplier, offer stage, offer type, offer date, offer price, order stage, order date, and order price. The ten columns above are the ones shown in the main archived view. The list also provides titled controls for **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. The list has no labelled form fields. The **Cancelled RFQs** route shows ten columns, ending with Cancel reason and Cancel date. The **Rejected Quotations** route shows ten columns, ending with Reject date and Reject reason. The **Deleted** route shows nine columns: Package no., Sales job No., Purchaser, Offer type, Bid due date, Sub-supplier, Client, RFQ stage, and Package title. ## Handle list variations and problems Each filter sends the list request for a different exception stage. Use this procedure to choose the appropriate filter and respond when a list operation stops. Prerequisites - You are on the Pricing Quotation list. - The Archived filter set is open. Steps 1. Select the filter that matches the exception you are reviewing. | If you need to review… | Select | List stage used by the route | | --- | --- | --- | | records with no quotation | **Unquoted RFQs** | regretted-offer stage | | cancelled quotation requests | **Cancelled RFQs** | cancelled-offer stage | | rejected quotations | **Rejected Quotations** | rejected-offer stage | | deleted Pricing Quotations | **Deleted** | deleted stage | | the archived landing list | **Archived** | archived list | 2. Remove forbidden characters, confirm that rows exist before exporting, or retry the list operation according to the matching message. | Message | Action | | --- | --- | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter value and submit the filter again. | | `NO Data to Export` | Confirm that the list contains data before exporting. | | Load data failed: `<message>` | Check the message detail and retry the list operation. | ```text Load data failed: `` ``` The archived sub-navigation also contains the parent **Archived** control. Cancelled Orders and rejected orders are not active choices in this filter set. **Result:** The selected exception list remains on screen with its filter label visible, or the message-specific correction is ready for the next list attempt. ![Compare the Cancelled RFQs filter label with the columns in that list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2f137aa795b224a0a7d175a0e4ed07ee.png) ## Continue from an exception list After you choose a filter and respond to any list message, continue in the Pricing Quotation record when you need to work on that record. The record page owns the actions available after the list. Steps 1. Choose how to continue from the row. | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | open the record in the current page | Select a row cell other than the edit cell. | | open the record in another browser tab | From the row context menu, select **Open in new tab**. | Continue with the [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) page for record actions. Return to [Pricing Quotation active lists](doc:pricing-quotation-active-lists) when you need the corresponding active work lists. **Result:** The selected record opens in its record page, or the record opens in a new browser tab when you select **Open in new tab**. ![Review the Deleted list before continuing to the record page.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8099836367a9d4ac3676499eb0619ca1.png) # Roles Roles control which areas and actions are available to people in your company. Use this page to find the role list, create a role, or maintain an existing role's permission matrix, the grid of pages and access choices for that role. ## Roles The Roles area contains a list of roles and separate routes for creating and editing a role. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a role or start role administration | [Find and open a role](#find-and-open-a-role) | | Understand the list and permission matrix | [Understand the role surfaces](#understand-the-role-surfaces) | | Create or change permissions | [Create or maintain role permissions](#create-or-maintain-role-permissions) | | Choose the correct branch for a system or inactive role | [Handle role conditions](#handle-role-conditions) | | Respond to a validation or service message | [Resolve role problems](#resolve-role-problems) | | Continue after saving | [After saving a role](#after-saving-a-role) | | Administer users who receive roles | [Users overview](doc:users-overview) | | Create a user and assign access | [Create user](doc:create-user) | | Administer principal users | [Principal users](doc:principal-users) | | Administer teams | [Teams](doc:teams) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - You are signed in. The three role routes use the application sign-in guard. - You have the permission needed for the action you are about to take. The list checks separate permissions for creating, editing, deleting, importing, and exporting, and the record screen checks whether editing is allowed. - The role is saved before you use controls that require an existing role. The **Last Modifications** area is only available for an existing role that is not a system role. - You know whether the role is a system role. A system role disables the role name and the permission checkboxes. - Your subscription permits another role when you select **New**. If the role limit has been reached, the list uses the limit branch instead of opening the new-role route. The list and record screens also use a leave-page guard. If you leave a record with unsaved changes, the application can interrupt the departure before the next route opens. With these conditions in place, continue to [Find and open a role](#find-and-open-a-role). ## Find and open a role A role is a named set of access choices shown in the role list and maintained on its record surface. Prerequisites - You are signed in and have reached the Security area. - You know whether you want to open the list, start a new role, or open an existing role. Steps 1. Choose the route that matches your task. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | View the role list | Select **Roles** in Security. | | Create a role | Select **New** on the role list. | | Edit an existing role | Select the edit action on the role's row. | ![The Roles list with its role rows and list controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4cfef0d96c94de79dd1ccb6fe1c6a7dd.png) **Result:** The list, the new-role form, or the existing-role form is on screen. Continue to [Understand the role surfaces](#understand-the-role-surfaces) to identify the list headers and permission matrix. ## Understand the role surfaces The role list is a searchable administration surface, and the role record combines a name with a matrix of pages and access choices. The active list displayed **Role Name** and **Active**, with 22 role rows. The headers come from the list layout in use, so work from the headers visible in your list. The new-role surface displayed the permission columns listed below. | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | Permission columns | All, Sections, View, **New**, **Edit**, **Delete**, **Import**, **Export**, Enable Editing, Send Email, Print, and Validate. | | **Role Name** | Enter the role name. The field is required and also checks the permitted character pattern. | | **All** | Select or clear the permission choices across the matrix. | | **Sections** | Identify the page or section represented by each matrix row. | | Access columns | Select a permission for a page, or use an access-type selection for the column. | | Page rows | Expand a row when its child pages are available. | | List controls | Use the configurable grid, filters, grouping, export, and row opening features when they are available in your layout. | | **Copy new role** | Copy an existing role when editing is allowed. | | **Last Modifications** | Open the history area for an existing non-system role. | The role history area has no action-types filter. The history area includes Action users and Fields filters. The **Comments** tab is commented out and is not available. ![The new-role permission matrix and its access columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/8e9e7d11307df318fac29bc0cdea34ab.png) Continue to [Create or maintain role permissions](#create-or-maintain-role-permissions) when you are ready to enter a name or change access choices. ## Create or maintain role permissions A role permission record gives a named role access choices for the pages and actions shown in the matrix. ### Create a role Prerequisites - You are on the new-role screen. - You know the name to give the role and the access choices it needs. Steps 1. Select the **Role Name** field. 2. Enter the role name. 3. Select the required choices in the permission matrix. Use **All** for the complete matrix, an access column's selection for a complete access type, or an individual page checkbox for a narrower choice. 4. Select the save action that matches where you want to continue. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Keep working on the role record | **Save** | | Leave the role record after saving | **Save and Close** | If the name is empty, the application displays `This Field Is Required`. If the name contains an unsupported character, it displays `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`. **Result:** After a successful create, the application displays `Data saved Successfully` and opens the role's edit screen when you use **Save**; **Save and Close** leaves the role screen. ![The role-name field on the new-role form](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9c6fc45e5d3905d23441083ed8d43821.png) ### Maintain an existing role Prerequisites - You have opened an existing role from the role list. - The role is not a system role when you need to change its name or permission choices. Steps 1. Select **Copy new role** when you need a new role based on the existing role. 2. Select the page or access checkbox you want to change. 3. Select **All** when the whole matrix needs the same permission change. 4. Select **Save** to remain on the role record, or select **Save and Close** to leave it. **Result:** After a successful update with **Save**, the application displays `Data saved Successfully` and refreshes the history area; **Save and Close** leaves the role screen. ![The new-role save controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9c6fc45e5d3905d23441083ed8d43821.png) ### Export the role list Use the role-list export when you need a file containing the selected format. Prerequisites - You are on the role list. - The export control is available in your list layout. Steps 1. Select **Export**. 2. Select the format in the export popup. 3. Select **Export** in the popup. **Result:** The selected role-list format is exported. Continue to [Handle role conditions](#handle-role-conditions) when the role is a system role, inactive, or subject to an authorization or subscription branch. ## Handle role conditions Role administration branches according to whether you are creating, editing, deleting an inactive role, or viewing a system role. | Situation | What the screen does | |---|---| | You may create roles and the limit permits another role | **New** opens the new-role route. | | You may create roles but the limit has been reached | **New** opens the role-limit branch instead. | | You may edit a role | The edit action and save controls are available according to the record conditions. | | The row is inactive and deletion is allowed | The row has a delete menu with **Cancel** and **Delete**. | | The role is a system role | The role name and permission checkboxes are disabled. | | The role is saved and is not a system role | **Last Modifications** is available in the record surface. | ### Delete an inactive role Prerequisites - The role row is inactive. - You have permission to delete roles. Steps 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Read the confirmation `Are you sure you want to delete?`. 3. Select **Cancel** to close the menu without deleting the role. 4. Select **Delete** to delete the inactive role. **Result:** The role is removed after a successful delete, and the application displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. ## Resolve role problems Use the exact message on screen to decide whether to correct the role name, review the role state, or retry the operation with the applicable permission. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in **Role Name**. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Correct the role name so it uses the accepted characters. | | `This Role Name Already Exists` | Choose a different role name. | | `NO Data to Export` | Confirm that the list contains data before exporting. | | `Are you sure you want to delete?` | Select **Cancel** if you do not intend to delete the inactive role. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The delete request completed successfully. | | `Error: Please Refresh the Page and Try Again.` | Refresh the page and try the role operation again. | | `A duplicate occurred with the existing data` | Review the role name and try again. | | `Action not allowed` | Check that your account has the required role permission. | | `This record is related to saved data and cannot be deleted` | Keep the role and review the related saved data. | | `You’ve reached the maximum storage limit` | Resolve the storage-limit condition before retrying. | | `Some products are not available in stock` | Review stock availability before retrying. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Retry the operation or ask an administrator to review the failure. | When a delete request fails, the application selects an error message from the returned error. When an update request fails, the application displays the text returned for that error. After resolving the message, continue to [After saving a role](#after-saving-a-role) for the next administration task. ## After saving a role After role administration, continue from the route that matches the work you need to do next. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Review users who receive the role | [Users overview](doc:users-overview) | | Create a user who needs the role | [Create user](doc:create-user) | | Review principal-user access | [Principal users](doc:principal-users) | | Review team administration | [Teams](doc:teams) | | Review two-factor security settings | [Two-factor authentication](doc:configuration-2factor-authentications) | After a successful new-role save, the application opens the role's edit screen. After a successful update with **Save**, it displays `Data saved Successfully` and refreshes the history area; **Save and Close** leaves the role screen. The role record's audit entry point is **Last Modifications** when the role is saved and is not a system role. **Result:** The role is either open for further editing or you are on the related security page for the next administration task. # Subscribers Use this list to review companies, their sub domains, and their plans, then open the related details. ## Subscribers A subscriber is a company shown with the sub domain and plan assigned to it. Use this reference list when you need to review those assignments or continue to the subscriber details page. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach the subscriber list | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Identify a subscriber row | [Find a subscriber](#find-a-subscriber) | | Read the list columns and filters | [Understand the subscriber list](#understand-the-subscriber-list) | | Review filtered rows | [Filter and review the list](#filter-and-review-the-list) | | Open the subscriber record | [Know what is next](#know-what-is-next) | | Review the subscriber record | [Subscriber details](doc:configuration-subscriber-edit-record) | | Review plan configuration | [Plans](doc:configuration-plans) | ## Before you start Open the Subscribers page to reach the list. This page presents subscriber rows for review. It does not provide a subscriber-entry form, validation fields, or create and delete controls. Continue to [Subscriber details](doc:configuration-subscriber-edit-record) for the separate subscriber record surface. Then continue to [Find a subscriber](#find-a-subscriber). ## Find a subscriber Locate a subscriber row before reviewing its assignment. Prerequisites - You can open the Subscribers page. Steps 1. Open the Subscribers page. 2. Read the **Company**, **Sub domain**, and **Plan** columns to identify the row. ![Identify a subscriber by the Company, Sub domain, and Plan headers.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5c99c5bfb9ff57a0bc9bf979abbddcb6.png) **Result:** The subscriber list is on screen, with the **Company**, **Sub domain**, and **Plan** columns available for review. Continue to [Understand the subscriber list](#understand-the-subscriber-list). ## Understand the subscriber list The subscriber list is a read-only grid for comparing each company with its sub domain and plan. The visible columns are filterable and not editable. | Column | What it shows | List behaviour | | --- | --- | --- | | **Company** | The subscriber company | Visible, filterable, and not editable | | **Sub domain** | The subscriber sub domain | Visible, filterable, and not editable | | **Plan** | The plan assigned to the subscriber | Visible, filterable, and not editable; the column also carries the record-count summary | Filtering, paging, and sorting use remote list operations. The filter row applies a filter on click, and header filters are visible. The grid allows column reordering and resizing. The column chooser is disabled. ![Read the Sub domain column in the subscriber list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2c2f65a6971389f6fdbcfdfcf2e9601d.png) The live page also displayed a count summary and six visible controls without labels. No buttons, spinner, or password field appeared. ![Read the Plan column and its count summary.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2c2f65a6971389f6fdbcfdfcf2e9601d.png) Continue to [Filter and review the list](#filter-and-review-the-list) when you need to narrow the rows. ## Filter and review the list Narrow the visible rows without changing subscriber data. Prerequisites - The subscriber list is open. Steps 1. In the row beneath the headers, enter a filter for the column you want to review. 2. Apply the filter on click. 3. Read the matching rows under **Company**, **Sub domain**, and **Plan**. 4. Choose filter options for a column. ![Review the Company column after filtering.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2c2f65a6971389f6fdbcfdfcf2e9601d.png) **Result:** The grid shows the rows returned by the selected filter, while the subscriber data remains unchanged. If the list reports an error, continue to [When list review goes wrong](#when-list-review-goes-wrong). ## When list review goes wrong The list-load error is shown as `An error occurred while processing your request`. | Situation | Message | | --- | --- | | The subscriber list load reports an error | `An error occurred while processing your request` | When the list is ready, continue to [Know what is next](#know-what-is-next). ## Know what is next After you identify a subscriber row, continue to the separate subscriber details page to review the selected record. Prerequisites - A subscriber row is visible in the list. Steps 1. Open the selected subscriber using one of these choices: | If you want to… | Select… | | --- | --- | | Open it from the row | a data-row cell outside the edit area | | Use the edit control in the row | the edit control in that row | **Result:** The selected subscriber opens on [Subscriber details](doc:configuration-subscriber-edit-record). The Subscribers list has no controls for creating or deleting subscribers. Use [**Plans**](doc:configuration-plans) for plan configuration. # Two-factor authentication ## Two-factor authentication at a glance The **2-Factor authentication** configuration screen is where you review user two-factor choices, trusted devices—the device records associated with sign-ins—and modification history—the record of changes made by users on this screen. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review or change user two-factor choices and code-recipient choices | [Maintain user two-factor settings](#maintain-user-two-factor-settings) | | Review signed-in devices | [Review trusted devices and modifications](#review-trusted-devices-and-modifications) | | Read changes made on the configuration screen | [Review trusted devices and modifications](#review-trusted-devices-and-modifications) | | Resolve a failed save or unavailable action | [When a setting or device action does not work](#when-a-setting-or-device-action-does-not-work) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You can open the **2-Factor authentication** configuration screen. - Editing permission determines whether **Save** and **Save and Close** are available for changes. - User rows and their checkboxes appear when the user details are available. - The **Last Modifications** area appears when the configuration has a company identifier. - Device actions depend on the state shown for each device. ## Find the Two-factor authentication screen **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and can open the configuration area. **Steps** 1. Open the **2-Factor authentication** configuration entry. 2. Confirm that the address is `/configuration/2factor-authentications`. ![Confirm the configuration title, tabs, and save controls at the top of the screen.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/cc1450adb5d27a17faffa44ef20a91cb.png) **Result:** The **2-Factor authentication** screen opens with the two-factor settings and the **Trusted devices** tab available. ## Understand the screen and its fields The screen groups user two-factor choices, trusted-device details, and modification history into separate tabs and panels. | Area | What you can review | When it appears | |---|---|---| | **2-Factor authentication** | **User**, **Apply 2 factor authentication**, **Send verification code**, **By mail**, **Y/N**, **To admin.**, and **To user** | When the two-factor tab is active and user details are available | | **Trusted devices** | **Device name**, **Trusted machine**, **Location**, **First login at**, and **Last login at** | When the trusted-devices tab is active | | **Last Modifications** | A chronological history of actions performed by users | When the configuration has a company identifier | The two-factor table uses **By mail** for both child columns. The visible grouped header also shows **Y/N** and **By SMS**, while the mounted child columns carry the **By mail** caption. The trusted-device columns are read-only. The screen does not provide editable text, date, or numeric fields. The trusted-devices table includes a **User** column and displays `Count: 288`. An icon-only **Refresh** control is available. The **Last Modifications** panel includes the text `The audit log provides you with a chronological sequence of actions performed by the users` and dated history entries. ![Review the user rows and grouped two-factor headers before changing a setting.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a1f4670862d7e3b94c6e8433df48d091.png) ## Maintain user two-factor settings Change the settings shown in the user rows here. **Prerequisites** - The **2-Factor authentication** tab is active. - User details are available. - Editing is allowed, and **Save** or **Save and Close** is enabled after a change. **Steps** 1. In the user row, select the checkbox under **Apply 2 factor authentication**. 2. Review the resulting email-code choice under **By mail**. 3. Select the recipient checkbox under **To admin.** or **To user** when two-factor authentication is enabled for that user. 4. Use the all-user checkboxes when the same choice applies across the user rows. The admin/user recipient checkboxes keep the two recipient choices mutually aligned. 5. Choose one save action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the changes and remain on the screen | **Save** | | Save the changes and leave the screen | **Save and Close** | 6. Read the result message. A successful save uses `Your request was completed successfully`. 7. If the save is rejected, read `An error occurred while processing your request` and return to the changed settings before trying again. **Result:** The selected two-factor and recipient choices are submitted, and either the screen remains open or it closes according to the save action you selected. ## Review trusted devices and modifications Use **Trusted devices** to review device records associated with sign-ins, and use **Last Modifications** to read changes made by users on this screen. **Prerequisites** - The **2-Factor authentication** screen is open. - The configuration has a company identifier if you need to read **Last Modifications**. **Steps** 1. Select **Trusted devices**. 2. Review the columns **Device name**, **Trusted machine**, **Location**, **First login at**, and **Last login at**. 3. Choose the applicable **Last Modifications** action: | Panel state | Reader action | |---|---| | Available | Select **Last Modifications**. | | Unavailable | Continue with the trusted-device review. | 4. If the panel is available, read the dated entries in the history panel. ![Review the trusted-device columns and device rows.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e5959fc6d1ef49bc878ed14c9dbd127b.png) ![Read the dated entries under Last Modifications.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c752481c1fc993ad09099fdab9ab14b7.png) **Result:** The screen shows the trusted-device details and, when **Last Modifications** is available, its dated history. ## Handle trusted-device actions Device actions depend on whether the selected row is marked as a trusted machine. **Prerequisites** - The **Trusted devices** tab is open. - A device row is visible in the **Trusted devices** tab. **Steps** 1. Select **Untrust** for a trusted device or **Delete** for a device that is not trusted to open the corresponding confirmation. | If the device is… | Select | |---|---| | Trusted | **Untrust** | | Not trusted | **Delete** | 2. Select **Cancel** to close the confirmation without changing the device. 3. Read the confirmation question for the action you selected: | Action | Confirmation question | |---|---| | **Untrust** | `Are you sure you want to untrust this device?` | | **Delete** | `Are you sure you want to delete this device?` | **Result:** Selecting **Untrust** or **Delete** opens the corresponding confirmation, and selecting **Cancel** closes it without submitting the action. ## When a setting or device action does not work | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The save request was rejected. | Review the changed settings and try the enabled save action again. | | **Save** or **Save and Close** is unavailable | Editing is not allowed, or no change is available to save. | Review your access and make a change before selecting a save action. | | User checkboxes are not available | User details are not available for the two-factor table. | Remain on the screen and work from the user rows when they appear. | | **Last Modifications** is not available | The configuration does not have the company identifier required for that panel. | Continue with the two-factor or trusted-device tabs. | | A device action is not available | The row state does not expose that action. | Use the action that matches the state shown for the row. | The confirmation wording is available when its corresponding dialog opens. The save success message is `Your request was completed successfully`. ## Out of scope The following confirmation titles belong to the corresponding two-factor confirmation states, not to the trusted-device actions described above. | Message | Scope | |---|---| | `Enable 2FA for your account` | Enable confirmation state | | `Disable 2FA for your accounts` | Disable confirmation state | ## What to do next After reviewing the tables or saving a change, stay on the screen to review the updated choices, or use **Save and Close** when you have finished and want to leave it. **Result:** Your configuration review ends on the updated screen or after **Save and Close** leaves it. # VL registrations ## VL registrations VL registrations are reference entries that group a registration by its client or project relationship. Use this surface when you need to inspect registration data at a client or at a project. Registration statuses describe the registration's current position. The available status values are `Registered`, `Proceeding`, `NotRegistered`, and `Updated`. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Inspect registrations grouped at clients | [Choose the relationship view](#choose-the-relationship-view) | | Inspect registrations grouped at projects | [Choose the relationship view](#choose-the-relationship-view) | | Review the list columns and popup fields | [Understand the registration list](#understand-the-registration-list) | | Prepare a new registration | [Add a registration](#add-a-registration) | | Continue with the related account | [Accounts](doc:accounts) | | Continue with the related project | [Projects](doc:projects) | | Continue with reference data | [Reference list](doc:reference-list-data) | | Continue with related files and libraries | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | ## Before you start Choose the client relationship view or the project relationship view for the relationship you need to inspect. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you are checking a client relationship or a project relationship. - Have access to the registration list for that relationship. - If you need **New**, your access must allow the page's new-record permission for the selected relationship. - If you need **Export**, your access must allow export for the selected relationship. **Result:** You know which relationship view to open and have access to its registration list. ## Find VL registrations Use the **VL registrations** entry in the **Data** area to open the registration reference list. The entry opens the accounts view first; the list then provides the relationship tabs. **Prerequisites** - Know whether you want to inspect the client or project relationship. **Steps** 1. Open **VL registrations** from **Data**. 2. Select the relationship view: | If you need to inspect… | Select | |---|---| | Client relationships | **At Clients** | | Project relationships | **At Projects** | **Result:** The selected relationship list is on screen. ![Registration list with its relationship tabs and six columns](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/612317007f7133ce817f6f2e58c3186b.png) ## Understand the registration list The list has two relationship tabs and a grid whose headers identify the registration data being reviewed. The grid headers are **Company**, **Principal**, **Registration date**, **Registration no.**, **Status**, and **Branch**. The list contains data rows for review. The page exposes the button titles **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. The popup renders the relationship and registration-detail fields. Each popup has three required select fields and two optional fields. The date field accepts a date no later than today. The lookup choices and starting field values come from the lists shown for the selected relationship. ## Choose the relationship view Use the client relationship view for client checks and the project relationship view for project checks. **Prerequisites** - Know whether the registration belongs to the client or project relationship you are checking. **Steps** 1. Select the matching tab: | If you are checking… | Select | |---|---| | A client relationship | **At Clients** | | A project relationship | **At Projects** | 2. Review the popup fields described above when you select **New**. **Result:** The selected relationship view is on screen with its matching list and popup field set. ## Add a registration Adding a registration starts from **New** on the relationship view. The popup title identifies the relationship: `New register at account` or `New register at project`. **Prerequisites** - Be on the relationship tab where you want the registration. - Know the client, vendor, project, status, registration number, and registration date that apply. **Steps** 1. Select **New**. 2. Follow the relationship-specific outcome: | Relationship | Outcome | |---|---| | Client | The account popup fields do not appear after **New**. | | Project | Select **Project**. The project page opens instead of keeping the registration popup open. | **Result:** **New** does not open the account popup on the client relationship. On the project relationship, selecting **Project** opens the project page instead. ![Account relationship state after selecting New](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/1a136b452aad8c6fab48c460f3d088bc.png) ![Project destination reached after selecting Project](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/78babcbf6772000f4a9a09a8afe51073.png) The registration grid does not offer **Edit** or **Delete** actions. ![Project registration popup with its fields and required markers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/85ac510a547119b131e74c6f0bc0ff7e.png) ## When registration work goes wrong The registration forms declare the following required-field messages: | Field | Message | |---|---| | **Client** | `Client is required` | | **Vendor** | `Vendor is required` | | **Status** | `Status is required` | | Project **Vendor** | `Vendor is required` | | Project **Project** | `Vendor is required` | | Project **Status** | `Status is required` | The list and service paths also declare these messages: | Situation | Message | |---|---| | A filter contains forbidden characters | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | | Loading the list fails | `Load data failed` | | Saving an account registration succeeds | `Data saved Successfully` | | Saving an account registration fails | `Error Saving Registration` | | Saving a project registration fails | `Error saving registration` | | Export has no data | `NO Data to Export` | **Steps** 1. Read the message shown beside the field or list action. 2. Correct the field named in the message, or remove the forbidden characters from the filter. 3. Select **OK** again for a registration form, or repeat the list action after correcting the filter. **Result:** The form or list is ready for the same action again. ## What to do next After reviewing a registration, continue with the relationship that needs attention. Use the account page for account work, the project page for project work, the reference-list page for reference data, or the libraries-and-files page for related files. **Steps** 1. Select the next relationship-specific destination: | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Work with the related account | [Accounts](doc:accounts) | | Work with the related project | [Projects](doc:projects) | | Continue with reference data | [Reference list](doc:reference-list-data) | | Continue with related files | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | **Result:** The related work area is selected for the next task. ## Out of scope The import completion message `Data Importing completed` belongs to the shared-popup import flow, which is not part of the registration actions covered here. # Account managers ## Account managers overview The Account managers reference screen is the place to review the people listed as account managers and maintain that list. Use it when you need to add an account manager, assign account ownership, remove an account manager, or export the list. Account ownership identifies the account manager who owns the selected account. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the list and its headers | [Find and review account managers](#find-and-review-account-managers) | | Add a person to the list | [Add an account manager](#add-an-account-manager) | | Assign account ownership | [Assign account ownership](#assign-account-ownership) | | Remove a person or export the list | [Remove or export account managers](#remove-or-export-account-managers) | | Resolve a message | [When an account-manager action does not work](#when-an-account-manager-action-does-not-work) | Start with [Before you start](#before-you-start) to check the conditions for the work you need to do. ## Before you start The list uses your available list layout for its data headers. The actions available to you also depend on your permissions and on the state of the selected row. An account owner is a user who can assign account ownership. | Before you start | What must be true | |---|---| | List layout | An available list layout supplies the data columns. | | Add | Your account has permission to add an account manager. | | Ownership | You are an account owner, and the selected row is not already an account owner. | | Remove | The selected row is not already an account owner. | | Export | Your account has export permission. | When these conditions are in place, [find and review account managers](#find-and-review-account-managers). ## Find and review account managers Review the grid headers and account-manager rows. **Prerequisites** - You can open the account-manager page. **Steps** 1. Open the account-manager page. 2. Read the headers shown in the grid. ![Review the account-manager list, its headers, and the header controls](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/05812848c94f920d8471ac2148fe53e7.png) The current list shows these headers: | Header | What it identifies | |---|---| | **Name** | The account manager's name. | | **Email** | The account manager's email. | | **Phone** | The account manager's phone number. | | **Position** | The account manager's position. | | **Active** | Whether the account manager is active. | The header also contains **Add account manager** and icon-only controls titled **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. When the list has no rows, it shows **No data**. **Result:** The account-manager list is open, and you can see the headers and available header controls. Use [Understand the account-manager screen](#understand-the-account-manager-screen) to review the list's areas and available actions. ## Understand the account-manager screen The screen combines a list of account managers with actions for maintaining the list. The data headers come from your list layout, so the headers you see can vary with that layout. The data columns are read-only. The screen does not provide an edit control for an existing account manager. Continue with [assigning account ownership](#assign-account-ownership), [removing or exporting account managers](#remove-or-export-account-managers) when you need those actions. When you select **Add account manager**, the **Add Account manager** dialog contains the **Users** searchable selection field. The field carries a required marker, and the dialog provides **OK**. ![Review the Add Account manager dialog, the required Users field, and OK](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/f9a994058fed692be7b0862ee2534d94.png) | Screen area | What you can do there | |---|---| | Data columns | Review the grid headers. | | Existing account managers | Existing account-manager records are read-only on this screen. | | Add dialog | Select a person in **Users**, then submit with **OK**. | To add a person, follow [Add an account manager](#add-an-account-manager). ## Add an account manager Follow these steps when you need to add a person to the account-manager list. **Prerequisites** - Your account has permission to add an account manager. - You know which person to select in **Users**. **Steps** 1. Select **Add account manager**. 2. In the **Add Account manager** dialog, open **Users**. 3. Select the person to add in **Users**. 4. Select **OK**. ![Review the add-account-manager dialog before submitting it](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/ca2b010aa37ad96f761eb09ea614bb63.png) If you select **OK** before choosing a person, the required field uses the message `This Field Is Required`. **Result:** If the add request is accepted, the account-manager list refreshes. Continue with [assigning account ownership](#assign-account-ownership) or [removing or exporting account managers](#remove-or-export-account-managers). ## Assign account ownership Use account ownership to identify the account manager who owns the selected account. The **Make as account owner** action appears when you are an account owner and the selected row is not already an account owner. **Prerequisites** - You are an account owner. - The selected row is not already an account owner. **Steps** 1. In an eligible row, select **Make as account owner**. 2. Read the ownership confirmation in the dialog. 3. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Confirm the ownership change | **Yes** | | Leave ownership unchanged | **No** | 4. If you selected **Yes**, wait for the account-manager list to reload. The ownership dialog states `Account Ownership has been changed` and `The new manager should receive an email shortly to notifying his new role`. **Result:** If the ownership operation completes, the account-manager list reloads and the dialog closes. Continue with [removing or exporting account managers](#remove-or-export-account-managers). ## Remove or export account managers Follow the removal steps for an eligible row. Follow the export steps when you need a file of the list. The two actions have different conditions and outcomes. ### Remove an account manager **Prerequisites** - The selected row is not already an account owner. **Steps** 1. Select the row's delete icon. 2. Read the exclusion question: `Are you sure you want to exclude this user as account manger?`. 3. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Leave the account manager on the list | **Cancel** | | Continue the removal | **Delete** | 4. If the permanent-delete dialog opens, read `Are you sure you want to delete this user totally from the database?`. 5. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Stop permanent deletion | **Cancel** | | Submit permanent deletion | **Delete** | **Result:** If deletion succeeds, the account-manager list refreshes. To create a file of the list, follow [Export the account-manager list](#export-the-account-manager-list). ### Export the account-manager list **Prerequisites** - Your account has export permission. **Steps** 1. Select **Export**. 2. Choose the export option in the **Exporting List:** dialog. 3. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Close the dialog without exporting | **Cancel** | | Submit the export | **Export** | If the list has no rows, the export action uses the message `NO Data to Export`. **Result:** If rows are available, the selected export is sent for processing; otherwise, the empty-list message appears. Continue with [When an account-manager action does not work](#when-an-account-manager-action-does-not-work) if a message appears. ## When an account-manager action does not work Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | **Users** has no selected person. | Select a person in **Users**. | | `Are you sure you want to exclude this user as account manger?` | The exclusion confirmation asks whether to remove the manager from the list. | Select **Delete** to continue. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this user totally from the database?` | The permanent-delete dialog is open. | Select **Delete** to submit the deletion. | | `Account Ownership has been changed` | The ownership confirmation reports the ownership change. | Continue after the ownership dialog closes. | | `The new manager should receive an email shortly to notifying his new role` | The ownership confirmation includes a notice for the new manager. | Continue after reviewing the notice. | | `NO Data to Export` | The list has no rows to export. | Return to the list and use the headers to confirm whether rows are available. | | `You can not delete yourself` | The selected account manager is your own user. | Do not use deletion for your own account manager entry. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The common success response is displayed. | Continue with the next list-maintenance task. | After you resolve the message, return to [What to do next](#what-to-do-next). ## What to do next After reviewing the list, continue with the next task from the same screen: add an account manager, assign account ownership, remove an eligible account manager, or export the list. If the list shows **No data**, use **Add account manager** to begin adding a person. The list remains the starting point for these maintenance tasks. # Comments, files, and history on an MRQ Use this page after an MRQ is saved to keep its discussion and supporting files together and to review the record's **Last Modifications** history. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the saved MRQ edit surface | [Find and open the saved MRQ](#find-and-open-the-saved-mrq) | | Identify the fields, actions, and product columns | [Understand the saved-MRQ surface](#understand-the-saved-mrq-surface) | | Add or manage supporting files | [Keep supporting files with the MRQ](#keep-supporting-files-with-the-mrq) | | Add or maintain discussion | [Keep discussion with the MRQ](#keep-discussion-with-the-mrq) | | Review record activity | [Review Last Modifications](#review-last-modifications) | | Create the request first | [Create an MRQ](doc:create-mrq) | | Complete the MRQ record | [Complete an MRQ record](doc:mrq-record-follow-up) | | Work with the shared file library | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | Follow the procurement hand-off | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | ## Before you start An MRQ is a material request that begins the procurement flow before later purchasing work. Use this page after the request is saved because the footer surfaces depend on a saved record. **Prerequisites** - Have a saved MRQ open. - Have the discussion or file information you want to keep with that MRQ. - Open the saved MRQ page and confirm that **Branch**, **MRQ title**, and **Required Receiving Date** are visible; **MRQ title** and **Required Receiving Date** are required. - Expect the available surfaces to depend on the record and feature conditions. The file library appears inside the document popup, and the comment area is available only when its conditions are met. ## Find and open the saved MRQ The saved MRQ edit surface is the record page where you keep supporting information and review record activity. **Prerequisites** - Know which saved MRQ you need to review. **Steps** 1. Open **MRQs**. 2. Select the saved MRQ. 3. Confirm that the record page shows the footer area with **Last Modifications**. **Result:** The saved MRQ edit surface is open and ready for the follow-up work. ## Understand the saved-MRQ surface The saved-MRQ surface combines header information, requested-product rows, follow-up actions, and the history area in one record page. | Area | What you can see or use | |---|---| | Header | **Branch**, **MRQ title**, and **Required Receiving Date** | | Record actions | **Save** and **Save and Close** | | Readouts | **Short Vendors List** and **Additional Requirements** | | Requested products | row number, product, unit, quantity, purchasing reference, and forecasted receiving date | | History | **Last Modifications** and a **Refresh** control | The requested-products grid shows the product rows associated with the MRQ. Use the headers that are visible on your screen when you review a row. The page also shows procurement-stage choices and separate product areas for the request and its additional requirements. When the history area is open, use **Action users** to narrow entries by user and **Fields** to narrow them by changed field. A **Registration** entry can be inspected when user logs exist. The file surface can also show **Filter**, **Tags**, **Type**, and **Modified**; the headers depend on the current file-list setup. ![Check the saved MRQ header, product columns, and Last Modifications area](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a716fb494b6b1a54ad266564dbd87f37.png) ## Keep supporting files with the MRQ A supporting file is a document kept with the MRQ so the request and its related material remain together. After the document surface opens, it provides library, folder, upload, linking, review, download, rename, tag, and delete actions. If you cannot find the document surface for the MRQ, use [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) to open the independent file-library surface. **Prerequisites** - Have the file library open for the MRQ. - Have the file, library name, folder name, or link information ready. The file view determines which creation controls appear. **New Library** appears in the initial library view. **New Folder** and **Upload** appear after you are in a non-default library location. ### Enter library details **Steps** 1. Select **New Library** when you need a separate library for the MRQ's supporting documents. 2. Enter the library name in **Library name**. **Result:** The new library form contains the library name you entered. ### Enter folder details **Steps** 1. Select **New Folder** when the current library needs another folder. 2. Enter the folder name in **Folder name**. **Result:** The new folder form contains the folder name you entered. ### Enter upload details **Steps** 1. Select **Upload** to add one or more files. 2. Select **Browse** in the upload form. 3. Enter the document name in **File Name**. 4. Select a type in **Links** when the file needs a related record link. 5. Select **Link target** after the link type is chosen. 6. Enter file context in **Comment** when the upload form shows that field. **Result:** The upload form contains the selected file and its entered file details. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Load older cloud files | **Get old cloud** | | Change file details | **Edit** | | Save a copy locally | **Download** | | Associate a selected file | **Link** | | View a selected file | **Open** | | Change its tags | **Add/Remove tags** | | Change its name | **Rename** | | Remove a selected file | **Delete** | The **Link target** field appears after a link type is selected. A file-name or library-name validation failure uses `This Field Is Required`. The file surface also owns the message `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`; use the [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) page for that file-library rule. **Result:** The file library shows the supporting document or the selected file action's result. ## Keep discussion with the MRQ Discussion is the record conversation associated with the MRQ. When the Comments surface is available, it provides a rich-text entry area, comment search, replies, editing, sub-comments, and deletion confirmation. If **Comments** is available in your record, use its discussion controls. The comment editor requires a loaded comment list and comment permission, and **Search comments** appears only when comment search is enabled. **Prerequisites** - Have the Comments surface available for the saved MRQ. - For edit and delete actions, work with a comment you own. - For a reply, work with a comment that is not your own and has reply access. **Steps** 1. Enter the discussion in the rich-text comment area. 2. Select **Post** to add the discussion to the MRQ. 3. Enter text in **Search comments** when the search control is available to narrow the displayed comments. 4. Choose the action that matches the discussion you are maintaining. | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Reply to a comment | Select **Reply**, enter the response, and select **Reply** again when the comment is not yours and reply access is available. | | Edit your comment | Select **Edit**, change the text, and select **Save**. | | Expand replies | Select **view sub comments** when the comment has replies. | | Delete a comment | Select **Delete** for a comment you own. When `Are you sure you want to delete this topic and all its content?` appears, select **Delete** to confirm or **Cancel** to keep the comment. | **Result:** The MRQ discussion shows the comment, reply, edit, expanded replies, or deletion result that you selected. ## Review Last Modifications **Last Modifications** is the audit-history surface: it presents a chronological sequence of actions performed by users and includes a created-on entry. **Prerequisites** - Have a saved MRQ open. **Steps** 1. Select **Last Modifications** in the footer. 2. Select **Refresh** to reload the history. 3. Choose users in **Action users** when you need to narrow the entries. 4. Choose fields in **Fields** when you need to narrow the entries by changed field. 5. Select a history row to open its available details. **Result:** The history area shows the chronological activity available for the MRQ, including its created-on entry and any details opened from a history row. ## When a follow-up action goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. The following MRQ messages belong to record, product, or save validation: | Message | What to do | |---|---| | ` Package must have at least one item` | Add an item before continuing with the package action. | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Keep the product because it is already in purchasing. | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Add at least one product before saving. | | `One of products has no quantity` | Enter a quantity for every product that you are saving. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Return to the required fields and complete them. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the action and try again after correcting the record information. | | `This Field Is Required` | Complete the required file-library field. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this topic and all its content?` | Select **Delete** only when the entire comment topic and its content should be removed; otherwise select **Cancel**. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue after the file action completes. | The following messages belong to other pages: | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Configuration products list | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Configuration products list | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Configuration product details | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Configuration product details | | `Please select one product` | Configuration product details | ## Know what to do next When you finish this follow-up, continue according to the work you need to do next: | Next need | Continue with | |---|---| | Create a new material request | [Create an MRQ](doc:create-mrq) | | Complete requested-product or additional-requirement work | [Complete an MRQ record](doc:mrq-record-follow-up) | | Continue through later procurement stages | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Manage the shared file surface | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | **Result:** You know which page continues the work after the MRQ discussion, file, and history task. # Contacts, L/Gs, and Last Modifications on a sales job ## Contacts, L/Gs, and Last Modifications on a sales job A saved sales job is the record that carries the workflow stages and its related contacts, L/Gs, and recorded changes. Contacts is where you associate a contact with this saved sales job and maintain the contact information shown with that association. A job-related L/G is the guarantee record that you review or move through its available request, approval, active, return, cancellation, extension, deduction, or increase actions. Last Modifications is the sales-job history area for reviewing recorded changes and opening an individual Registration entry. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the saved sales job first | [Open a saved sales job](#open-a-saved-sales-job) | | See which fields and related-work tabs are available | [Understand the related-work surface](#understand-the-related-work-surface) | | Associate or maintain contact information | [Associate a contact with the sales job](#associate-a-contact-with-the-sales-job) | | Review or request a job-related L/G | [Review or request a job-related L/G](#review-or-request-a-job-related-lg) | | Review recorded changes | [Review recorded job changes](#review-recorded-job-changes) | | Understand why a control is unavailable | [Handle availability and stage branches](#handle-availability-and-stage-branches) | | Correct a blocked action | [When a related-work action goes wrong](#when-a-related-work-action-goes-wrong) | | Work with the surrounding sales-job record | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | | Find a sales job from the work lists | [Find sales job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | | Work with contacts beyond this job | [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview) | | Create a standalone contact | [Create a contact](doc:create-contact) | | Maintain a contact record | [Contact record](doc:contact-record) | | Follow the complete L/G lifecycle | [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | | Create a new L/G | [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) | | Review finance-specific L/G information | [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - Have a saved sales job. The **Contacts**, **LGs**, and **Last Modifications** tabs require a job ID. - Have the feature available for the area you need: Contacts, Letter of Guarantee, or Latest Modifications. - Use a role that can edit the intended record. Principal users do not receive these related-work tabs. - For contact attachments and contact history, open a contact with a contact-person ID outside a popup. - For L/G stage actions, have no unsaved L/G changes. The available action also depends on the L/G's current stage and on the approval and editing permissions for that record. - Have the contact details, L/G information, or history filters you want to use ready before you open the related-work area. The record's branch and feature access affect which controls are available. If a feature is not available, the related-work tab is not a route to that work; use the owning page named in the orientation table instead. ## Open a saved sales job Open the saved sales job before selecting a related-work area. **Prerequisites** - Know which saved sales job you need to open. - Have access to the Sales jobs work lists or another link to the saved record. **Steps** 1. Open the saved sales job at `/sales/edit/:id`. 2. Confirm that the record shows the workflow labels **Inquiry**, **Offer**, **Order**, **Project management**, and **Delivered**. 3. Continue to [Understand the related-work surface](#understand-the-related-work-surface). **Result:** The saved sales-job record is open and its related-work areas are available for selection when their conditions are met. ## Understand the related-work surface Use the related-work surface to work with job contacts, L/Gs, and recorded changes beside the saved sales-job information. The record displays these fields in the main job area: | Field | What you see in this record | |---|---| | **Order chance** | A selection field without a required marker in this record | | **Status** | A selection field without a required marker in this record | | **Branch** | A text field without a required marker in this record | | **Product Type** | A selection field with a required marker | | **Job Title** | A text field with a required marker | | **End User Account** | A selection field without a required marker in this record | | **File Number** | A text field with a required marker | | **Expected Order Date** | A date field without a required marker in this record | The available buttons are **Save**, **Save and Close**, and **Calculation Sheet**. | Related-work label | Area | |---|---| | **Comments** and **Tasks** | Discussion and follow-up | | **Activities** | Job activities | | **Attachment** | Attached files | | **Contacts** | Job contacts | | **LGs** | Job-related guarantees | | **Pricing Quotations** | Pricing work | | **Last Modifications** | Recorded job changes | The Contacts list displays the headers **Title**, **Name**, **Position**, **Department**, **Account**, and **Branch**. An empty list displays **No data** and **Count: 0**. Use the headers and fields available on your screen; L/G fields and list columns depend on your configuration. ![The saved sales job with its workflow stages, related-work labels, and Contacts headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/243e03acd1b1b83591c14d4fc0aa039d.png) ## Associate a contact with the sales job Use Contacts to associate or maintain contact information on this saved sales job. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved sales job with the Contacts feature available. - Work as a non-principal user. - For contact-level attachments or history, use a contact with a contact-person ID outside a popup. **Steps** 1. Select **Contacts**. 2. Review the Contacts list using the headers **Title**, **Name**, **Position**, **Department**, **Account**, and **Branch**. 3. Select the contact association or contact record you need to maintain. 4. Enter or review **Name**. 5. Enter or review **Position**. 6. Enter or review **Department**. 7. Select the control that matches the contact detail you need to add: | If you need to add… | Select | |---|---| | A phone number | **Phone** | | A fax number | **Fax** | | A mobile number | **Mobile** | | An email address | **Email** | | A website | **Website** | | Online support information | **Online Support** | | A note about the contact | **Comments** | 8. Choose the related contact action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Work with contact attachments | **Attachment** | | Review contact changes | **Last Modifications** | | Upload a contact photo | **Upload** | | Delete a contact photo | **Delete** | If the contact name is already in use, the screen can show `You already have a contact with this name`. Use the contact record that already carries the required information or change the name before trying again. **Result:** The saved sales job's Contacts area shows the contact information you selected or maintained, subject to the available contact and feature access. ## Review or request a job-related L/G Use the job-related L/G record to review or move through its available request, approval, active, return, cancellation, extension, deduction, or increase actions. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved sales job with the Letter of Guarantee feature available. - Work as a non-principal user. - Have no unsaved L/G changes before selecting a stage action. - Have the permission required by the current L/G stage and approval route. **Steps** 1. Select **LGs**. 2. Review the available L/G fields: | Field | Rule | |---|---| | **Expiry Date** | Required on the upgrade form and cannot be earlier than today | | **On Behalf of** | Required only where your company configures it | | **LG Type** | Required only where your company configures it | | **Requested Amount** | Required only where your company configures it; its minimum is 0 | | **Confirmation Of The LG Requirement** | Required when the L/G is at or beyond Requested and sales recommendation is required | | **Confirmation Of The Financial Viability** | Required when the L/G is at or beyond Requested and finance recommendation is required | | **Extension Period** | Required only where your company configures it; its minimum is 1 | | **Expiration date** | Required only where your company configures it and cannot precede the current L/G expiry date | 3. Choose how to save the L/G: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Save the L/G and keep the form open | **Save** | | Save the L/G and close the form | **Save and Close** | 4. Choose the available stage action: | If the current condition is… | Select | |---|---| | Approval is required and you cannot approve a Requested L/G | **Request approval** | | Approval is required, you can approve, and the L/G is before Approved | **Approve** | | The L/G is Requested without the approval process, or Approved with it | **Active** | | The L/G is Running | **Due for Return** | | The L/G is due for return or Expired | **Returned** | | The L/G is Requested or Approved | **Cancel** | | The L/G is a Running or Expired performance bond that is not already upgraded | **Extend As Warranty Bond** | | The L/G is Running or later and you have editing access | **Enable Editing** | | A new extension is allowed | **LG Extensions** | | A new deduction is allowed | **LG Deductions** | | A new increase is allowed | **LG Increase** | 5. If an extension form opens, enter **Extension Period** and **Expiration date** before saving the extension. The L/G operation can display `Your request was completed successfully` after a successful request. If the operation is blocked, read the exact message before changing the record. The available messages include `An error occurred while processing your request`, `You don’t have permission`, `LG still needs confirmation`, `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage`, `Please choose a date after the current expiry date`, and `There is a pending increase you can edit`. **Result:** The L/G remains on the saved sales job with the fields and stage action appropriate to its current state. ## Review recorded job changes Use Last Modifications to review recorded changes and open an individual Registration entry. **Prerequisites** - Open a saved sales job with the Latest Modifications feature available. - Work as a non-principal user. - Have user or field criteria ready if you need to narrow the history. **Steps** 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Use **Action users** to narrow the history by user. 3. Use **Fields** to narrow the history by field. 4. Select **Registration** to open a recorded history entry when user logs are available. **Result:** The history area shows the available recorded job changes and the Registration entry you selected. ## Handle availability and stage branches The related-work controls change with access, record state, popup context, and L/G stage. Use the following rules to choose the correct route. | Situation | What to use or expect | |---|---| | The job is not saved | The Contacts, LGs, and Last Modifications areas require the saved job ID | | The related feature is unavailable | Use the owning page from the orientation table | | You are a principal user | These related-work tabs are unavailable | | Contact attachment or history work is in a popup | The contact-person and outside-popup conditions are not met | | An L/G has unsaved changes | Stage actions are unavailable until the changes are resolved | | An L/G is at a different stage | Choose only the stage action listed for that stage | | A field is company-configured | Treat it as required only where your company configures it | | The list headers differ | Work from the headers visible in your list; L/G columns depend on the available setup | | A field or control is listed as unavailable in this page | Use the owning page rather than looking for it in this related-work area | The Contacts list uses **Title**, **Name**, **Position**, **Department**, **Account**, and **Branch**. L/G list columns and L/G fields depend on the available setup. ## When a related-work action goes wrong Use the exact message shown on screen to choose the corrective action. Messages owned by another work area are listed at the end with the page or stage that owns them. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the unsupported characters and retry the contact-related entry. | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Use the existing contact or change the name before retrying. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue with the saved L/G or close the completed action. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the current record state and permissions before retrying. | | `You don’t have permission` | Use a role with the required L/G permission. | | `LG still needs confirmation` | Complete the required L/G confirmation before moving its stage. | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Resolve the extension or deduction before reverting the stage. | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | Enter an extension date after the current expiry date. | | `There is a pending increase you can edit` | Edit the pending increase instead of starting another one. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields shown on the current form. | | `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.` | Review the related commercial values before saving. | | `Action not allowed` | Review the current access and record conditions before retrying. | Messages from other panels or stages are quoted here so you can identify them if they appear while working around this record. Their owning page or stage is shown in the last column. | Message | Owning page or stage | |---|---| | `Required Receiving Date` | Material requisition | | `This field is required` | Sales job items | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Sales job items | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Sales job items | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job updated successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job deleted successfully` | Sales job record | | `Job regretted successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Job missed successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Converted to offer successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Converted To Regretted` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Converted to cancelled` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Converted to lost` | Sales job lifecycle | | `Error saving custom fields` | Sales job record | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Delivery reversal | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Offer-to-inquiry flow | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Sales job record | | `An account with this name already exists` | Account creation | | `A project with this name already exists` | Project creation | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Inquiry editing | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Potential conversion | | `Please enter action for each milstone` | Offer and order milestones | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Sales job profitability | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Accounts | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Accounts | | `This Field Is Required` | Accounts | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Files | | `Sales order is archived` | Bill of materials | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Bill of materials | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Bill of materials | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Bill of materials | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Bill of materials | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Products | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Products | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Products | | `Please select one product` | Products | | `Required Receiving After` | Material requisition | | `Package must have at least one item` | Material requisition | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | Material requisition | | `No remaining items. All items have been selected` | Material requisition | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Branch-restricted activity or purchasing flow | | `Please enter at least one email` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Order must have at least one item` | Purchasing order | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Sales job items | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Required Offer Type` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Purchasing inquiry | | `Error loading accounts` | Sales jobs list | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Reference list | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Reference list | | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Reference list | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | Activities | No dialog, validation message, or confirmation message appeared during the read-only review. ## Continue with the saved sales job The saved sales job remains the continuing record after you review or maintain related work. Use [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) for the surrounding workspace, [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview) for the broader contacts area, [Contact record](doc:contact-record) for contact-level maintenance, [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) for the complete L/G stage flow, [Create an L/G](doc:create-l-g) for a new guarantee, and [L/G finance view](doc:l-g-finance-view) for finance-specific review. **Result:** You know which work remains with the saved sales job and which registered page owns the next contact, L/G, or sales-job task. # Delivery notes ## Delivery notes A delivery note records the warehouse-owned delivery surface after the sales order and before the AR Invoice. A **Shipping order** is the warehouse record that identifies what the delivery note covers. Use the delivery note to find an existing record, complete the delivery, and print the completed note. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Create a delivery note | [Create and save a delivery note](#create-and-save-a-delivery-note) | | Find a delivery note already recorded | [Find a delivery note](#find-a-delivery-note) | | Understand the fields and item rows | [Understand the delivery note screen](#understand-the-delivery-note-screen) | | Complete or print a note | [Complete or print a delivery note](#complete-or-print-a-delivery-note) | | Review the full warehouse sequence | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Open the source shipping record | [Shipping orders](doc:shipping-orders) | | Continue to invoicing | [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) | The business flow places the delivery note after the Sales Order and before the AR Invoice. ## Before you start A **Shipping order** is required for a new note; an existing note displays its shipping order as a fixed field. The delivery-note page also depends on the feature being included and the page being available. Prerequisites: | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | A **Shipping order** | You select it when creating a note; an existing note displays its shipping order as a fixed field. | | Access to the warehouse delivery-note feature | The detail page appears only when the feature is included and the page is available. | | Edit access and changed data | **Save** and **Save and Close** appear only when you can edit and the note has changes. | | An existing, unchanged, incomplete note | **Delivery completed** appears only for this state. | | An existing, unchanged, complete note and print access | **Print** appears only for this state and permission. | **Result:** You have the order, access, note state, and edit or print conditions needed to continue to [Find a delivery note](#find-a-delivery-note). ## Find a delivery note The **Delivery Notes** work list is the warehouse surface for locating an existing note and reaching the new-note form. Prerequisites: | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | A value that identifies the note | A visible list value helps you recognise the row. | | A **Shipping order** when you are creating a note | The new note begins by selecting its source shipping order. | Steps: 1. Open **Delivery Notes** to see the delivery-note work list. 2. Check one of the visible headers to identify the note you need. Check the visible headers and row values to recognise the note. 3. Select the row for the note you want to open. 4. In the work-list toolbar, select the plus icon. 5. Select **Delivery Note** to create a new delivery note. ![Use the visible list headers to identify the delivery note you need.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/458acc4e7a4eed4a974ac89dad752196.png) **Result:** You have either the delivery-note form for a new note or the record you selected from the work list. Continue to [Understand the delivery note screen](#understand-the-delivery-note-screen). The list also shows icon-only toolbar buttons. The record breadcrumb is `Goods delivery note sheet`. ## Understand the delivery note screen The delivery-note page combines order information, delivery information, item rows, and actions that change with the note's state. | Area | What you find there | |---|---| | Source order | **Shipping order** for a new note; an existing note shows the fixed shipping-order value. | | Order and party information | Order and party values from the source shipping order. | | Delivery information | **Carrier**, **Delivery Date**, **Delivery Destination**, **Total Weight**, **Invoice Date**, and **Delivery Terms**. | | Destination | **Shipping Address**, when a shipping order is present. | | Item rows | When a shipping order is present, the product grid contains the item rows. | | Item editing | The inspected-product editor is the area where **Returned Qty** and **Unit** appear. In the inspected-product row, select the edit or delete icon. | | List layout | The list uses its current configured header set. | The **Delivery Date** and **Invoice Date** controls accept dates no later than today. The fields marked configurable are required only where your company configures them. The saved record has **Receiving sheet**, **Inspection sheet**, **Transfer history**, and **Last Modifications**. The print options do not include cover-letter fields. ![Read the eight list headers before selecting a delivery note.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3d67b202e4fd4ff708dfd9b13cf1f402.png) **Result:** You can identify the information, item, and conditional areas before entering data. Continue to [Create and save a delivery note](#create-and-save-a-delivery-note). ## Create and save a delivery note Create a delivery note when the warehouse has a **Shipping order** to record the delivery. The shipping order identifies the delivery relationship. Prerequisites: Have the source **Shipping order** ready. You need edit access and a change to save. When a shipping order is present, the product grid contains the item rows. The save controls are disabled while the note is saving or when there are no changes. Steps: 1. In the work-list toolbar, select the plus icon. 2. Select **Delivery Note**. 3. Select the record in **Shipping order**. 4. Review the order and party information shown on the form. 5. Enter or review **Carrier**, **Delivery Date**, **Delivery Destination**, **Total Weight**, **Invoice Date**, and **Delivery Terms**. 6. Select **Shipping Address** when the destination address must be chosen. 7. Review the item rows and, in the inspected-product row, select the edit or delete icon when you need to change an inspected item. 8. Select one save option. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep working on the note | **Save** | | Save the note and leave the screen | **Save and Close** | 9. Confirm the success message `Your request was completed successfully` before continuing. **Result:** The delivery note is saved using the selected save option. **Save** opens the saved edit record; **Save and Close** leaves the page. Continue to [Complete or print a delivery note](#complete-or-print-a-delivery-note). ## Complete or print a delivery note Completion changes an existing incomplete delivery note to a completed note. Printing is available after completion when printing is allowed. Prerequisites: Open an existing note with no unsaved changes. Use the branch that matches its current state. Steps: 1. Open the note's action menu and follow the branch that matches the note. | Note state | Path | |---|---| | Incomplete | Select **Delivery completed**. Confirm the completion dialog. Select **Yes**. | | Complete and you have print access | Select **Print**. Select **Print watermark** when needed. Enter the watermark text when its required field appears. | **Result:** The note is complete after the completion confirmation, or the print options are open for a completed note. Selecting **Yes** sets the note complete and updates it. Selecting **Print watermark** enables the adjacent text field and makes that field required. If a message appears, continue to [When delivery-note validation goes wrong](#when-delivery-note-validation-goes-wrong). After completion, **Shipping Address** is disabled. The print action generates a downloadable Delivery note document from the print options. ![Use the warehouse list when you need to return to delivery-note work.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/93131f4d724b1ee121f5fae0e6d6a29a.png) ## When delivery-note validation goes wrong When an error appears, match its wording below to the action you just took. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue after the save result. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the note and try the action again. | | `Please review the validation error for each product` | Review the validation display for each product. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Review the package products before continuing. | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Read the error text on screen and correct the reported issue. | | `You don’t have permission` | Use an account with permission for the action. | | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in the field carrying the message. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Use only the characters named in the message. | **Result:** You can match a message to the action that produced it and return to the relevant step. ### Out of scope The message `Please enter the storage area and position for each product` belongs to product storage assignment rather than delivery-note work. ## After the delivery note A completed delivery note is followed by the AR Invoice in the business flow. Continue with [Invoice lifecycle](doc:invoice-lifecycle) when the delivery note has reached the invoice stage. Return to [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) for the preceding and related warehouse records. # Departments ## Departments at a glance Departments is the company reference list for maintaining department entries in the HR configuration area. The page title is **Departments**, and a new or edited entry opens in a **Department** popup under **HR**. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Prepare access and recognise the available surface | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Open the list | [Find Departments](#find-departments) | | Check fields and list behaviour | [Understand the Departments screen](#understand-the-departments-screen) | | Add or rename an entry | [Add or change a department](#add-or-change-a-department) | | Remove an entry or open export | [Remove or export departments](#remove-or-export-departments) | | Handle a different available surface | [Handle surface variations](#handle-surface-variations) | | Resolve a blocked action | [When a department action goes wrong](#when-a-department-action-goes-wrong) | | Continue configuration work | [Continue after department maintenance](#continue-after-department-maintenance) | | Open the configuration dashboard | [Configuration dashboard](doc:configuration-home) | | Review reference-list configuration | [Reference-list data](doc:reference-list-data) | ## Before you start Prerequisites - Have access to the Departments configuration route. - Confirm that the configured subscription feature is included for the company. - Have the department name ready before opening the entry form. - Expect the available list headers to depend on the page configuration when the list opens. The list surface loads when the configured feature is included. When it is not included, the list is replaced by an upgrade surface. The **New** control is available when the new-entry control is not hidden. The edit control and delete menu depend on the corresponding access settings. ## Find Departments From the configuration area, open **Departments**. ![Dashboard before opening Departments](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/179d7bb0d0a709c24322bc21eab0ffb6.png) Prerequisites - Have access to the configuration area. Steps 1. From the configuration area, select **Departments**. **Result:** The Departments configuration route opens when the configured feature is available. ## Understand the Departments screen The Departments screen maintains the department name while keeping record and ordering values behind the form. Use the visible field for the value you want to change. | Field | What to expect | Required | Where it appears | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | **Name** | The department name | Yes | List and entry form | | Ordering value | The list order value | No | Hidden | | Entry identifier | Identifies the entry | No | Hidden | | Company-branch reference | Identifies the company branch | No | Hidden | | Description | Not shown in the entry form | No | Hidden | The form exposes **Name** as the visible editable field. The columns shown in the list can vary, so read each entry using the headers currently shown. A new entry opens in the **Department** popup. ## Add or change a department A department entry is a named reference value that you maintain from the Departments list. ### Add or edit an entry Prerequisites - Know the department name to enter. - Have the Departments list open. Steps 1. Choose the action for the entry you need. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Create a new entry | **New** | | Change an existing entry | The row edit control | A new entry opens a **Department** popup. An existing row opens the same popup for editing. 2. In the popup, enter the department name in **Name**. 3. Select **Save**. | Entry type | Message | | --- | --- | | New entry | `Data saved Successfully` | | Edited entry | `Data updated Successfully` | **Result:** The list reloads after a successful save, and the popup closes. ## Remove or export departments Use the row delete menu to remove an entry and the list **Export** control to open export choices. ### Delete an entry or open export Prerequisites - Have the Departments list open. - For deletion, have more than one entry in the list. Steps 1. Choose the list action you need. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Remove an entry | The row delete control | | Open export choices | **Export** | 2. If you opened the row delete menu, choose one option. | If you want to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the entry | **Cancel** | | Continue deletion | **Delete** | Confirm deletion when the prompt displays `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. If you selected **Delete**, wait for the result. **Result:** A successful deletion displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. Selecting **Export** opens the export-options dialog; selecting **Cancel** leaves the entry in the list. ## Handle surface variations The Departments surface can differ according to subscription and access settings. Prerequisites - Have the configuration area open. Steps 1. Choose the applicable surface branch. | If you see… | Then… | | --- | --- | | The list | Use the available list actions. | | An upgrade surface instead of the list | Use the upgrade route available to your company. | | No **New** control | Use an available maintenance route or contact an administrator. | | No row edit control | Review your access before attempting an edit. | | No row delete menu | Review your access before attempting a deletion. | | Different list headers | Read entries using the headers currently shown. | **Result:** You use the Departments surface and controls available for the current configuration. ## When a department action goes wrong Use the message text to choose the corrective action. | What you see | Meaning | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `No message is emitted when validation is invalid; the save returns.` | The save returns without displaying a validation message. | Check the required **Name** field, then select **Save** again. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Saved data is related to the entry. | Keep the entry and review the saved relationships before trying again. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list cannot be reduced to zero entries. | Keep at least one department entry. | | `Failed to Delete` | The deletion did not complete. | Review access and saved relationships, then try again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The filter contains characters the list rejects. | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter and apply it again. | ## Continue after department maintenance When the list has reloaded and the popup has closed after a successful save, continue with the next configuration list from the [Configuration dashboard](doc:configuration-home), or review related reference-list work in [Reference-list data](doc:reference-list-data). # Guarantee types ## Guarantee types at a glance Guarantee types are the reusable names maintained in the **Guarantee Types** reference list. The list is part of the sales configuration area and shows saved guarantee-type names under the **Name** column. Use this page when you need to review or maintain one of those names. From the configuration area, select **Guarantee Types**. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Find a saved guarantee type | [Find a guarantee type](#find-a-guarantee-type) | | Understand the list and its form | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Create, edit, or delete a type | [Create, edit, and delete a guarantee type](#create-edit-and-delete-a-guarantee-type) | | Use list settings | [Handle permissions and list settings](#handle-permissions-and-list-settings) | | Open a related sales reference list | [Continue with related configuration](#continue-with-related-configuration) | The screen also sits beside related configuration lists, including [Inquiry types](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-types), [Delivery terms](doc:configuration-sales-delivery-terms), and [Payment methods](doc:configuration-sales-payments-methods). ## Before you start Before maintaining a guarantee type, make sure you have access to the requested-guarantee configuration area and the **Name** value you want to review or enter. The **Name** field is required in the form. Your access determines which actions appear. | Your access allows you to… | Available control | |---|---| | Create a type | **New** | | Edit a type | The row edit action | | Delete a type | The row delete action | | Export the list | **Export** | | Import list data | **Import** | With access and the required **Name** value ready, find the list before reviewing or maintaining a type. ## Find a guarantee type A guarantee type appears as a row in the list, with its name in the **Name** column. Prerequisites - You know the name you want to review, or you are ready to create a new name. Steps 1. Select **Guarantee Types** in the configuration area. 2. Read the **Name** column to locate the saved guarantee type. 3. Select **Refresh** to reload the list when you need the latest list contents. 4. Select **New** when you need to add a guarantee type. The screen initially displays **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**. The refresh hint uses `Updated around a minute ago` when the last update was around one minute earlier. At other intervals the exact message is `Updated ` + minutes + ` minutes ago`. **Result:** The guarantee type is visible in the **Name** list, or the screen is ready for you to start a new entry. ![The Guarantee Types list with the Name column and its header actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/10cfd8d6087c239e8be249801581967d.png) ## Understand the list and form The list shows the **Name** column. Select a list row to review its value. | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | **Name** column | Read the saved guarantee type name | | **Guarantee** form field | Enter or change the name | | **Save** | Save the form through the shared popup | The form appears after you open a type or select **New**. The **Name** form item carries the required marker. The form uses **Guarantee** for the type name. After reviewing the form details, choose the appropriate maintenance procedure. ![The visible Name list and row layout](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/335b82ddeb6d0a4a2317463650dfea28.png) ## Create, edit, and delete a guarantee type Use **Name** when you create or edit a type. ### Create a guarantee type Prerequisites - You have the permission that makes **New** available. - You have the name to enter. Steps 1. Select **New**. 2. Enter the type name in **Guarantee**. 3. Select **Save**. After you select **New**, the form opens for a new guarantee type. After a successful save, the application displays `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The new guarantee type is added to the list. ### Edit a guarantee type Prerequisites - You have access to edit guarantee types. - The guarantee type appears in the **Name** list. Steps 1. Select the guarantee type row in the **Name** column. 2. Enter the new value in **Guarantee**. 3. Select **Save**. The selected row opens in the form with its current name. After a successful save, the application displays `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The updated value appears in the **Name** list. ### Delete a guarantee type Prerequisites - You have access to delete guarantee types. - The type appears in the **Name** list. Steps 1. Select the icon-only delete action for the selected **Name** row. 2. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose the outcome that matches your task: | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Remove the type | **Delete** | | Keep the type | **Cancel** | After selecting **Delete**, the application displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. After selecting **Cancel**, the delete menu closes. **Result:** The type is removed from the **Name** list after **Delete**, or the list remains unchanged after **Cancel**. ![The guarantee-type form field](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9de42a29a3c5254db9af7a8d5650105b.png) After maintenance, use **Settings** when you need a list tool. ## Handle permissions and list settings The header tools change what you can do with the list. **Settings** opens the list tools. The edit and delete options appear when your access allows those actions. Prerequisites - You are on the Guarantee Types list. Steps 1. Select **Settings**. 2. Choose the tool that matches your task: | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Show or hide the filter row | **Filter Row** | | Export the list | **Export** | | Import list data | **Import** | | Work with the list layout | **Table Layout** | **Result:** The list tool you selected is available for use, subject to your permissions. If an action produces a message, match it in the troubleshooting table that follows. ## When an action does not work Use the message text to identify the point at which the action stopped. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | A confirmation asks whether you want to delete the selected item. | Check the row, then select **Delete** or **Cancel**. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The save path completed. | Return to the **Name** list and read the saved value. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The delete path completed. | Confirm that the row no longer appears. | | `Updated around a minute ago` | The refresh hint reports an update around one minute earlier. | Continue reviewing the list. | | `Updated ` followed by minutes and ` minutes ago` | The refresh hint reports the elapsed minutes. | Continue reviewing the list. | | `Export to Excel` or `Export to PDF` | An export format is selected. | Continue with the selected format. | **Result:** You can match the message or screen state to the next action without treating a confirmation prompt as a completed change. When the list work is complete, continue with related configuration. ## Continue with related configuration The Guarantee Types screen is one list in the configuration area. The surrounding navigation contains these related reference lists: | Related configuration list | |---| | **Lost Reasons** | | **Regret Reasons** | | **Cancellation Reasons** | | **Order Cancellation Reasons** | | **Units** | | **Delivery Terms** | | **Payment Methods** | | **Guarantee Types** | | **Account Types** | | **Offer Status** | | **Order Status** | | **Inquiry Status** | | **Activity Purpose** | | **Order Activation Conditions** | | **Additional Costs** | | **Mark Up Items** | Continue with the page that matches the reference value you need to maintain: - [Reference-list data](doc:reference-list-data) for the broader reference-data area. - [Inquiry types](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-types) for inquiry-type values. - [Delivery terms](doc:configuration-sales-delivery-terms) for delivery-term values. - [Payment methods](doc:configuration-sales-payments-methods) for payment-method values. - [Finance letters of guarantees facilities](doc:configuration-finance-letters-of-guarantees-facilities) for the separate finance-side guarantee configuration. # Inspection checklist ## Inspection checklist An inspection checklist is a warehouse reference list of checks used to describe what must be inspected about a product. It sits in warehouse configuration alongside the other reference lists that support warehouse work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the list and recognize its columns | [Find the inspection checklist](#find-the-inspection-checklist) | | Read an entry before changing it | [Understand the checklist list](#understand-the-checklist-list) | | Add, edit, delete, or export entries | [Maintain checklist entries](#maintain-checklist-entries) | | Resolve a validation or maintenance message | [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue into warehouse inspection work | [Continue with warehouse inspection work](#continue-with-warehouse-inspection-work) | | Work with related inspection references | [Base of inspection](configuration-warehouse-inspection-base.md) or [Inspection documents](configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents.md) | ## Before you start You use this page to review or maintain the reference entries that support warehouse inspection work. Access to the route requires a signed-in account. The list can also depend on your company's subscription and permissions, and its visible columns come from the configuration used for your list. Prerequisites - Sign in to PAMS. - Have the inspection object and its description ready before adding or changing an entry. - Know which inspection base belongs with the entry before you maintain it. - Confirm that your account can access warehouse configuration and the required action. **Result:** You have the access and information needed to find the inspection checklist. ## Find the inspection checklist The inspection checklist page is the reference list headed Products inspection checklist. It is reached from the warehouse configuration area by selecting **Inspection Checklist**. Steps 1. Open the warehouse configuration area. 2. Select **Inspection Checklist**. 3. Confirm that the page heading is Products inspection checklist. ![Confirm the page heading, warehouse configuration list, and toolbar.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c45e4b523e3813caf0d5cc2f5a5916bb.png) **Result:** The inspection-checklist list is on screen. ## Understand the checklist list Each row is a checklist entry. The list presents the entry's inspection object, description, and inspection base so you can recognize the entry before you maintain it. | Column or area | What to use it for | |---|---| | **Object to inspet** | Identify what the inspection checks. This field is required when the form marks it required. | | **Description** | Read the description of the inspection check. | | **Inspection base** | Read the inspection base associated with the entry. | | **New** | Start a new checklist entry. | | **Refresh** | Refresh the list. | | **Settings** | Open the list settings. | | Count | Check the number of entries currently listed. | The list currently displays seven rows and `Count: 7`. The row contents are records in the list, so use the headers and the values in your own list when identifying an entry. The page does not display `DisplayOrder`, `ID`, or `CompanyID` as visible list or form fields. **Result:** You can identify a checklist entry from its visible columns and row values. ## Maintain checklist entries A checklist entry records the object to inspect, its description, and its inspection base. Use the action that matches the change you need to make. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start a new entry | **New** | | Open an existing entry for change | the row edit action when it is available | | Remove an entry | the row delete action, then **Delete** | | Close a delete menu | **Cancel** | | Save a form | **Save** | | Export the list | **Export** | Prerequisites - You are on the inspection checklist list. - You know whether you are creating, changing, removing, or exporting an entry. - For a new or changed entry, you have the inspection object and description ready. Steps 1. Select the action that matches your task in the following table. | Task | Action | |---|---| | Start a new entry | **New** | | Open an existing entry for change | the row edit action when it is available | | Remove an entry | the row delete action, then **Delete** | | Close a delete menu | **Cancel** | | Save a new or changed entry | **Save** | | Export the list | **Export** | **Result:** The new/edit form, delete menu, or export controls are open; **Cancel** closes the menu; **Save** or **Delete** submits its action. ## Handle access and setup differences The controls on this page depend on the access and setup applied to your account and company. Use the following conditions to interpret what you see. | What you see | What it means | |---|---| | **New** is available | Your account can use the new-entry action on this page. | | The edit action is available on a row | Your account can edit that row. | | The delete action is available on a row | Your account can open the deletion menu for that row. | | A field appears in the form | The entry configuration makes that field visible in the form. | | A column appears in the list | Your list setup includes that column. | The available choices for **Inspection base** depend on the list setup. Work from the labels and columns that appear on your page. ## When maintenance goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | ` is required` | Enter a value in the named field, then submit the form again. | | `This Field Is Required` | Enter the required value, then submit the form again. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters other than letters, numbers, `_`, `-`, and `.`, then submit the form again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the entry, then submit it again. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The new entry has been saved. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The changed entry has been updated. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The entry has been deleted. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the entry and review the saved data related to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Do not repeat the deletion until the cause of the failure is resolved. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one checklist entry in the list. | ## Continue with warehouse inspection work After you review or maintain the checklist reference list, continue with the reference list or operational page that matches your next warehouse task. Prerequisites - You have finished reviewing or maintaining the inspection checklist reference list. Steps 1. Select the destination that matches your next task. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Review inspection bases | [Base of inspection](configuration-warehouse-inspection-base.md) | | Review inspection documents | [Inspection documents](configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents.md) | | Record incoming inspection work | [Incoming inspection notes](incoming-inspection-notes.md) | | Follow the wider warehouse process | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) | **Result:** You have a route from the inspection-checklist reference list to the related warehouse configuration and inspection work. # Orders Find an Order, review its fields, and choose the state-dependent action that confirms, activates, progresses, amends, rejects, cancels, or returns it. ## Orders An Order is the Sales jobs stage after Offers and before Delivered. Use it when an offer has become an order and you need to confirm the order, progress its fulfilment, or correct its status. The order path is: ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 Offer --> Order: Order Order --> Valid: Activate Order Valid --> ReadyForShipment: Ready for shipment Valid --> Delivered: Deliver Order ReadyForShipment --> Delivered: Deliver Order Order --> Rejected: Reject Order Acceptance Order --> Cancelled: Cancelled order Order --> Offer: Back to Offer ``` | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review or change an order after an offer | [Understand the order panel](#understand-the-order-panel) | | Confirm, activate, ship, or deliver an order | [Confirm, activate, and progress an order](#confirm-activate-and-progress-an-order) | | Correct, reject, cancel, or return an order | [Amend, reject, cancel, and return an order](#amend-reject-cancel-and-return-an-order) | | Work on the item lines | [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items) | | Continue after the order reaches delivery | [From orders to delivered](doc:from-orders-to-delivered) | | Configure activation conditions | [Sales order activation conditions](doc:configuration-sales-order-activation-conditions) | ## Before you start An order action is available only when the saved order, its stage, your access, and the relevant feature settings satisfy that action's conditions. | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | A saved order with no unsaved changes | The order actions require an existing record and, for most actions, a saved panel. | | A new order or unsaved order changes | **Save** is available for a new order or when the order has changes, when editing is allowed and the record is not read-only. | | The order's current stage | The available action changes between Draft, Awaiting Approval, Approved, Awaiting Activation, Valid, Ready for Shipment, Delivered, Rejected, and Cancelled. | | The client, vendor, order dates, delivery terms, payment terms, and order references | These values are the information the order panel validates or carries forward. | | Permission to edit or validate the order | **Activate Order** checks permission; other actions also require editing access and, where applicable, the order's branch. | | The required feature subscription | **Payment Milestone** and **Order Activation Conditions** appear only when their features are subscribed. | | Your company's required-field configuration | Client and vendor order numbers, dates, delivery and payment fields, the L/C number, and the external order number can be required by configuration. | With the order saved and its stage, access, and required settings ready, find it in the Orders list. ## Find and open an order Use the Orders list to locate an existing order. **Prerequisites** - You know enough of the job number, client, vendor, or job title to recognise the row. **Steps** 1. Open the Orders list at `/sales/list/orders/view`. ![Identify an order from the Orders list headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a59bcf2ccb2634af86f70753fc7ba7c2.png) 2. Identify the row from the visible headers. | Use this information | Header | |---|---| | Job reference | **Job No.** | | Internal file reference | **File No.** | | Responsible salesperson | **Sales responsible** | | Counterparties | **Vendor** and **Client** | | Work description | **Job title** | | Financial and delivery position | **Order price (€)**, **Order price (incl. tax)**, **Order backlog**, and **Order backlog (€)** | | Process position | **Order stage** and **Job status** | | Dates and project-management position | **Order date**, **Forecast delivery date**, and **PM status** | 3. Select the order row. ![Select the order row you need to open](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e8db9011e06f3a16d8c8accd4dee2508.png) 4. Select the list tool you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Reload the current rows | **Refresh** | | Work with the saved list layout | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | **Result:** The selected order record opens. ## Understand the order panel The order panel is where you review the counterparties, dates, delivery and payment terms, references, items, and order-specific tools before selecting a state action. The panel is available when the job is at Order or a later stage and the selected order is open. ### Order fields | Field | What to check | Requirement or rule | |---|---|---| | **Client** | The customer for the order | Select the applicable account. | | **Vendor** | The supplying party | Select the applicable vendor. | | **Client Order No.** | The customer's reference | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Vendor Order No.** | The vendor's reference | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Order Date** | The order date | Required in Draft when the rule applies; it cannot precede the offer date. | | **Order Activation Date** | The date the order becomes active | Required only where your company configures it; it cannot precede **Order Date** or be later than today. | | **Delivery Time** | The delivery period | Required only where your company configures it; the value starts at 1 and cannot exceed the configured maximum. | | Delivery-time unit | The unit paired with **Delivery Time** | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Forecasted Delivery Date** | The forecast date | Its minimum is the offer date. | | **Delivery Term** | The agreed delivery term | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Payment Method** | The payment method | Required only where your company configures it. | | **Payment Period** | The payment period | Required only where your company configures it; the value starts at 1 and cannot exceed the configured maximum. | | Payment-period unit | The unit paired with **Payment Period** | Required only where your company configures it. | | **L/C Number** | The letter-of-credit reference | Required only where your company configures it. | | **External order no.** | The external system's order reference | Required only where your company configures it; it is shown when the supplier-side condition allows it. | | **Percentage** | The amount subject to commission in the commissions popup | Required there; it cannot be below 0 or above the order total price. | | **Delivered On** | The delivery date in the delivery dialog | Required; it cannot be later than today. | The panel also contains a partial-delivery switch, commission and margin popup fields, activation condition switches and date, a local-currency rate, and a company-configured custom-field area. The item area uses columns selected by the current layout, so work from the headers visible in your order panel rather than assuming a fixed item-column set. ### Supporting order tools | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review payment milestones | **Payment Milestone** | | Review activation requirements | **Order Activation Conditions** | | Add the configured activation conditions when the list is empty | **Insert activation conditions** | | Format a comment | **Undo**, **Redo**, **Bold**, **Italic**, **Strikethrough**, **Underline**, **Ordered List**, **Bullet List**, **Font Color**, or **Clear Formatting** | | Add the comment | **Post** | The opened record also shows these tabs: | Work area | Tabs | |---|---| | Sales stages | **Inquiry**, **Offer**, **Order**, **Delivered** | | Collaboration | **Comments**, **Tasks**, **Activities**, **Attachment**, **Contacts**, `Tracking` | | Financial and history | `Principal Invoices`, **Commission Invoices**, **Commission Payments**, **LGs**, **Reference List**, **Last Modifications** | The visible record actions include **Save**, **Save and Close**, and **Deliver Order**. In the opened record, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, and **File Number** carry required markers. **Status** and **Branch** do not carry required markers. ![Recognize the opened order record and its available actions](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e15934311be697f77f11390202ea9031.png) **Result:** You can open the order action menu and choose the action for the order's stage. ## Confirm, activate, and progress an order When the order is ready for its next state-dependent action, choose the control that matches its current stage. The applicable control depends on the order stage, supplier relationship, branch, approval process, and mail permission. **Prerequisites** - The order is saved and has no unsaved changes. - You know the current value shown in the order's stage control. - You have the permission and feature access required by the selected action. **Steps** 1. Open the order action menu. 2. Select the action that matches the order's current condition. | If the order is… | Select | |---|---| | Approved, or at the supplier-side stage that permits client confirmation | **Send order confirmation to client** | | At the same confirmation stage when sending mail is unavailable | **Consider Order As Confirmed To Client** | | Awaiting Activation or Consider As Awaiting Activation | **Activate Order** | | Valid on the own-company supplier route | **Ready for shipment** | | Valid on the external-supplier route | **Deliver Order** | | Ready for shipment on the own-company supplier route | **Deliver Order** | 3. Complete the dialog for the selected action. | If you selected… | Complete this dialog | |---|---| | **Activate Order** | Review **Confirm activation date**. Enter an **Order Activation Date** that is not earlier than **Order Date**. | | **Deliver Order** | Review `Delivering this order`. Enter **Delivered On** as a date no later than today. | 4. If the order has no item, add an item before saving; the blocked action message is `Order must have at least one item`. 5. If a required field is empty, complete it; the required-field message is `This field is required `. 6. Enter a quantity within the permitted range. 7. Select **Save**. 8. Enter a non-negative value in the discount or tax field. 9. Select **Save**. 10. If payment milestones are open, enter the action for every milestone after the message `Please enter action for each milstone `. **Result:** The selected order action opens its applicable dialog or advances the order through the corresponding order route. Confirmation uses `Order Submitted to Client`. A completed delivery uses `Order updated successfully. A draft invoice was created. Check the Invoices tab for details`. ![Choose an order action from the state-dependent menu](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/e15934311be697f77f11390202ea9031.png) ## Amend, reject, cancel, and return an order Use these branches when the order needs correction, approval reversal, rejection, cancellation, or a return to the offer stage. **Prerequisites** - The order is open and saved. - The current order stage satisfies the selected branch. - You understand whether the action changes the order's route or only reverses a previous action. **Steps** 1. Open the order action menu. 2. Select one action from the table. | If you need to… | Select when… | |---|---| | Create an amendment | The order is Valid or Ready for shipment. Select **Order amendment**. | | Re-enable editing | Editing is allowed and the order is Approved, Awaiting Activation, Consider As Awaiting Activation, Delivered, or Valid, but not Rejected or Cancelled. Select **Enable Editing**. | | Reject order acceptance | The order is Draft, Awaiting Approval, or Rejected Approval and is not awaiting cancellation or rejection approval. Select **Reject Order Acceptance**. | | Reverse a rejection | The order is Rejected, or is awaiting rejection approval without advanced approval. Select **Consider as not rejected**. | | Cancel an order | The order is not Ready for shipment, Delivered, Rejected, awaiting cancellation approval, awaiting rejection approval, or already Cancelled. Select **Cancelled order**. | | Reverse a cancellation | The order is Cancelled, or is awaiting cancellation approval without advanced approval. Select **Consider As Not Cancelled**. | | Reverse activation | The order is Valid. Select **Not activated yet**. | | Reverse shipment readiness | The order is Ready for shipment on the supplier route. Select **Not ready for shipment yet**. | | Reverse delivery | The order is Delivered on the supplier route. Select **Not delivered yet**. | | Return to the offer | The job is not a direct or instant job and the order is Draft, Awaiting Approval, or Rejected Approval. Select **Back to Offer**. | **Result:** The order remains in its current record while the selected amendment, rejection, cancellation, reversal, or return route is applied according to its stage. The corresponding messages include `Order Returned to Draft`, `Order Rejected`, `Order Cancelled`, `Order Considered as Not Rejected`, and `Order Considered as Not Cancelled`. ## When an order action does not work Use this table to match the exact message to the correction required. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Order must have at least one item` | Add at least one order item. | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Complete the action for every payment milestone. | | `This field is required ` | Complete the field carrying the required marker. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a quantity within the permitted range, then select **Save**. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter a non-negative discount or tax value, then select **Save**. | | `Order Submitted to Client` | The confirmation route has submitted the order to the client. Continue with the stage shown in the order record. | | `Order Approved Successfully` | The approval action completed. Continue with the next action shown for the new stage. | | `Order Saved Successfully` | The order save completed. | | `Order Updated Successfully` | The order update completed. | | `Order updated successfully. A draft invoice was created. Check the Invoices tab for details` | Open [Invoices](doc:invoice-lifecycle) to review the draft invoice. | | `Order Returned to Draft` | The order is back in Draft. Review it before selecting another action. | | `Order Rejected` | The order is in the rejected route. Use the order stage and archived lists to continue. | | `Order Cancelled` | The order is in the cancelled route. Use the order stage and archived lists to continue. | | `Order Considered as Not Cancelled` | The cancellation reversal completed. Review the order stage before continuing. | | `Order Considered as Not Rejected` | The rejection reversal completed. Review the order stage before continuing. | | `This order has binding invoices. It cannot be reverted` | Do not use a reversal action while binding invoices prevent it. | | `This job has binding invoices. You may not be able to edit all fields` | Review which fields remain editable before changing the order. | | `You don’t have permission` | Ask for the permission required by the action. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Use an order in your branch or ask the responsible branch to perform the action. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the order values and retry the permitted action. | Messages raised by other areas belong with their owning pages. Use [General error messages](doc:general-error-messages) for the application-wide catalogue, then continue with the relevant page: | Owning area | Related page | |---|---| | Sales job information, items, and variants | [Sales job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment), [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items), [Sales job variants](doc:sales-job-variants) | | Offers and offer costing | [Offers](doc:offers) | | Purchasing and procurement | [Purchase jobs procurement chain](doc:purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Activities | [Tasks and activities](doc:tasks-and-activities) | | Accounts and projects | [Accounts](doc:accounts) and [Projects](doc:projects) | | Bill of materials and product selection | [Project management workspace](doc:project-management-workspace) and [Products](doc:products) | | Contacts, serial references, and letters of guarantee | [Contacts overview](doc:contacts-overview), [Reference list data](doc:reference-list-data), and [L/G lifecycle](doc:l-g-lifecycle) | The full out-of-scope message inventory includes `Custom fields saved successfully`, `Job updated successfully`, `Job deleted successfully`, `Job regretted successfully`, `Job cancelled successfully`, `Job missed successfully`, `Job reactivated successfully`, `Converted to offer successfully`, `Converted to inquiry successfully`, `Converted To Regretted`, `Converted to cancelled`, `Converted to lost`, `Error saving custom fields`, `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists`, `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry`, `Error {{errorMsg}}`, `An account with this name already exists`, `A project with this name already exists`, `Check mandatory field(s)`, `Please save opened inquiry first`, `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential`, `One or more items has ZERO quantity`, `One or more items has no unit`, `Please save opened cost sheet first`, `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.`, `Your request was completed successfully`, `Error: Vendor not saved yet`, `Error: Client not saved yet`, `This Field Is Required`, `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.`, ` You already have a contact with this name`, `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`, `Sales order is archived`, `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity`, `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created`, `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing`, `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created`, `This product is already included in BOM`, `The first variant cannot be deleted`, `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.`, `Please select one product`, `You cannot save without adding at least one product`, `One of products has no quantity`, `Action not allowed`, `Check validation`, `Please enter at least one email`, `No remaining items. All items have been selected`, ` Package must have at least one item`, `Inquiry must have at least one item`, `Offer must have at least one item`, `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.`, `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted`, `Error loading accounts`, `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer`, `There is error in serial you have entered`, `Minimum: At least one serial`, `LG still needs confirmation`, `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage`, `Please choose a date after the current expiry date`, ` There is a pending increase you can edit`, `One topic and at least one note is required`, and `There is no topic to print`. **Result:** You can match an order message to the field, stage, permission, invoice, or owning page that requires the next action. ## Continue after the order Delivered is the Sales jobs stage after Order. Detailed delivery and fulfilment work continues in the warehouse flow rather than in the order panel. **Prerequisites** - The order is ready for the next stage or the action route has finished. **Steps** 1. Review the order stage shown in the record. 2. Open the page for the next part of the order journey. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Continue the sales hand-off toward Delivered | [From orders to delivered](doc:from-orders-to-delivered) | | Continue with detailed fulfilment | [Warehouse fulfilment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | **Result:** You continue with the page that owns the next part of the order journey. # Reference list ## Reference list overview The Reference list is the place to find, create, and maintain reference records used in the user-facing data work. Use the list to identify a record, then open its detail surface to enter reference information or review its saved status and history. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find an existing reference record or start a new one | [Find and open a reference](#find-and-open-a-reference) | | Understand the fields and record areas | [Understand the reference record](#understand-the-reference-record) | | Create a record or keep changes | [Create or update a reference](#create-or-update-a-reference) | | Review status or modification history | [Review a saved reference](#review-a-saved-reference) | | Resolve a validation or save message | [When validation or saving goes wrong](#when-validation-or-saving-goes-wrong) | | Maintain the choices used by the record | [Reference category](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-category-view) or [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) | Open the Reference list to view records. From the list, select **Product** to start a new record or select an existing row to open its details. ## Before you start Before you work with a reference record, make sure you can reach the list and have the information needed for the record. Access, subscription, permission, branch, saved-record state, and company configuration determine which fields and actions appear. The **Check-up** area records status checks. **Last Modifications** lists changes made to the saved record. Prerequisites | Check | What must be in place | | --- | --- | | List access | The Reference list surface is available to your account. | | Form access | The record detail has loaded and is not a subscription or not-found surface. | | New record | You have permission to create a new record. | | Existing record | The record has loaded with its reference-detail collection. | | Saved-record actions | The record has an ID before **Print**, **Check-up**, or **Last Modifications** can appear. | | Editing a status | The record is in the active **Check-up** area, you have edit permission, you are in the same branch, and no passed record ID limits the action. | | Company configuration | Fields marked configurable are required only where your company configures them as required. | | List layout | The list columns depend on the selected list layout, so work from the headers visible in your list. | ## Find and open a reference A reference record in this list is identified by the information in its visible row. Use the list to choose an existing record or to reach the new-record surface. Prerequisites - You can open the Reference list. - For an existing record, you know which visible row to open. Steps 1. Open `/reference-list/view` to display the Reference list. 2. Identify the record from the headers visible in the list: **Category**, **Job No.**, Model, **Year of manufacturing**, **Delivery date**, **Warranty end date**, and **Manufacturer**. 3. Choose the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Open an existing record | The row for that record | | Start a new reference record | **Product** | | Export the list | **Export** | The list also provides icon-only actions titled **Refresh**, Table Layout, and **Settings**. Use the title shown on the icon to choose the list action you need. ![Identify a reference record from the eight visible list columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/802ab14708b8d69e2af009aec4313800.png) **Result:** The selected existing record opens for detail work, or the new-record surface opens. For a record surface, continue with [Understand the reference record](#understand-the-reference-record). ## Understand the reference record A reference record stores identifying, commercial, product, application, and status information for one reference entry. The new-record surface displays 16 labelled fields. Its required markers are shown on these fields: | Required field | Required marker | | --- | --- | | **Serial Number** | Shown | | **Manufacturer** | Shown | | **Vendor** | Shown | | **Client** | Shown | | **End User** | Shown | | **Category** | Shown | | Area | Fields and rule | | --- | --- | | Identification | **Serial Number** is text and required. **Manufacturer** is a required selection. | | Product details | **Year of manufacturing** is numeric. **Product delivery date** is a date. **Warranty period** is numeric and has a minimum of `0`. **Warranty end date** is a date. | | Parties | **Vendor**, **Client**, and **End User** are required selections. | | Orders and market | **Client Order No.**, **Vendor Order No.**, **Market Segment**, and **Country** are configurable text fields. | | Classification | **Category** is a required selection. **Model name** is a configurable text field. | | Application | **Application** is a configurable text area. | | Question controls | Configurable warranty unit, question answer, and question unit; units must be available for the question. | | Check-up | **Checked on** is required and cannot be later than today. **Status** and **Comment** are required. | | Print options | The print area contains printing and watermark options. | The fields governed by company configuration are **Year of manufacturing**, **Product delivery date**, **Warranty period**, **Warranty end date**, **Client Order No.**, **Vendor Order No.**, **Market Segment**, **Country**, **Model name**, **Application**, and the question fields. Their required marker follows the configuration in use. The saved-record surface can provide **Print**, **Check-up**, and **Last Modifications**. The **Check-up** area uses a grid with **Status**, **Checked on**, and **Comment**. The **Application** field is a text area. The print area contains printing and watermark options. ![Enter the required serial number and review the first detail fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/19baec845eb0248b13ad46bfa1fb9faf.png) ![Review the required Manufacturer selection on a new reference.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/19baec845eb0248b13ad46bfa1fb9faf.png) ![Review the required Client selection on a new reference.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) ![Review the required End User selection on a new reference.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) ![Review the required Category selection on a new reference.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) ![Review the Model name field on a new reference.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) ![Locate the Application field and the surrounding reference fields.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) Use these fields to complete the record, then continue with [Create or update a reference](#create-or-update-a-reference). ## Create or update a reference Creating or updating a reference means entering the identifying and reference information, then committing it with the save action. Complete the required fields shown on your screen; optional configured fields are required only where your company configuration marks them required. Prerequisites - You have opened a new reference or an existing reference record. - You have the reference information needed for the fields shown on the form. Steps 1. Enter the reference identifier in **Serial Number**. 2. Select the manufacturer in **Manufacturer**. 3. Complete the displayed product, party, order, market, classification, and application fields. 4. Choose the save outcome you need. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the record open | **Save** | | Save the record and leave the form | **Save and Close** | 5. If an unsaved-changes confirmation opens, select **Don't Save** to leave without the changes. The form validates the main reference data, the status data when a status is being added or edited, and the print-option data when print options are being completed. A successful save can display `Your request was completed successfully`. ![Save the reference while remaining on the record surface.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) ![Save the reference and leave the record surface.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c58250321bce3dea32f3f94e2ef779d3.png) **Result:** The reference remains on the form after **Save**, or the saved record leaves the form after **Save and Close**. Continue with [Review a saved reference](#review-a-saved-reference) when you need to inspect the saved status or history. ## Review a saved reference Reviewing a saved reference means checking its printed representation, its recorded status checks, or the changes made to it over time. Prerequisites - The reference record has loaded and has an ID. - For status changes, **Check-up** is active and the edit and branch conditions are satisfied. - **Last Modifications** also requires the latest-modifications feature. Steps 1. Select **Print** when the record has no unsaved changes and printing is allowed. 2. Select **Check-up** to open the status area. 3. In **Check-up**, complete the status form when it is available. 4. Enter **Checked on**, **Status**, and **Comment** in the status form. 5. Select the action you need. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Save the status | **Save** | | Open the modification history | **Last Modifications** | | Open a history entry | **Registration** | The status grid identifies each entry with **Status**, **Checked on**, and **Comment**. The history area also provides user and field filters; the action-type filter is not available on this surface. The shared popups can also provide **Cancel**, **Don't Save**, **No**, **Yes**, and **Ok**, depending on the popup mode. **Result:** The saved record shows the selected print, status, or modification-history surface, or the status is saved with **Save**. If an action or field differs from the main path, continue with [Handle optional fields and access branches](#handle-optional-fields-and-access-branches). ## Handle optional fields and access branches The reference surfaces change with company configuration, subscription, permissions, branch, and record state. Use the condition that applies to the action instead of treating every field or tab as available on every record. | If you are trying to… | The required condition is… | | --- | --- | | See the list | The list is not behind the subscription-unavailable or not-found condition. | | Start a record | The new-record permission allows **Product**. | | Edit the detail fields | The detail collection has loaded and the form is available. | | Use **Print** | The record has an ID, has no unsaved changes, and printing is allowed. | | Open **Check-up** | The record has an ID. | | Add a status | **Check-up** is active, the record has an ID, you can edit it, the branch condition is satisfied, and no passed ID restricts the action. | | Edit a status | **Check-up** is active and an existing serial status is present. | | See the question-unit selection | Question units are available for the question. | | Use **Last Modifications** | The record has an ID and the latest-modifications feature is available. | If the subscription does not include the list, the subscription-unavailable surface provides **Back**. The declared action-type filter is not available on this surface. Fields marked configurable follow company setup. On the new-record surface, the current required markers are on **Serial Number**, **Manufacturer**, **Vendor**, **Client**, **End User**, and **Category**. **Result:** The form, tabs, and actions on screen match the record state, your access, branch, and company configuration. If a save or validation message appears, continue with [When validation or saving goes wrong](#when-validation-or-saving-goes-wrong). ## When validation or saving goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. The following messages belong to the Reference list and its record surfaces. | What you see | What to do | | --- | --- | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue from the saved-record result. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the fields and action conditions, then try the save action again. | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Use a serial number that is not already associated with the same manufacturer. | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Correct the serial number and submit the form again. | | `Please enter the storage area and position for each product` | Check each product's storage area and position, then continue. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and repeat the action. | The **Warranty period** value has a minimum of `0`. **Checked on** cannot be later than today. After correcting the entry, return to the relevant record step. When the record is saved, continue with [What to do next](#what-to-do-next). ## What to do next After saving a reference, continue from the saved record when you need to review its status or history. The choices used by the record are maintained in related configuration surfaces. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Maintain reference categories | [Reference category](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-category-view) | | Maintain question units | [Reference category question units](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-category-question-units-view) | | Maintain serial statuses | [Reference serial status](doc:configuration-reference-list-reference-serial-status-view) | **Result:** You have either returned to the saved reference for review or identified the related configuration surface for the next maintenance task. # Subscriber details Use **Subscriber details** to review the company assigned to a subscription plan and change that assignment. ## Subscriber details A subscriber record associates a company with the plan assigned to that company. Use this page after opening a subscriber record. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find the company record to open | [Subscribers](doc:configuration-subscriber-view) | | Review or maintain plan definitions | [Plans](doc:configuration-plans) | | Review or maintain feature definitions | [Features](doc:configuration-features) | | Review the company, assigned plan, and save control | [Understand the subscriber details screen](#understand-the-subscriber-details-screen) | | Change and save the assigned plan | [Review and save the assigned plan](#review-and-save-the-assigned-plan) | | Review a feature price when a feature row provides that path | [Review a feature price](#review-a-feature-price) | ## Before you start Have the following in place before you open the record: | Requirement | What to have ready | | --- | --- | | Saved record | A saved subscriber record. | | Record loading | The subscriber details must load before the form fields appear. | | Plan review | Have the company and plan details you need to review. | | Plan choices | The available **Plan** options are not a fixed list. | ## Find a subscriber record Open an existing subscriber record from the subscriber list or from a record you have already selected. **Prerequisites** - You know which saved subscriber record you need to review. **Steps** 1. Choose an entry path. | If you need to… | Do this | | --- | --- | | Find the record in the subscriber list | Select the subscriber record in [Subscribers](doc:configuration-subscriber-view). | | Already have the record selected | Open the selected subscriber record. | ![Check that the subscriber details page is open and the page title area is visible.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/51c20b935242d1287a20e26c3d33fae7.png) **Result:** The subscriber details page is open. ## Understand the subscriber details screen The screen presents the company, its assigned plan, and a save control. The **Features** area is not available as a working area on this screen, and no feature list appears. | Screen item | What it does | Required or available | | --- | --- | --- | | **Company** | Displays the subscriber company. | Disabled; not required. | | **Plan** | Selects the plan assigned to the company. | Required. | | **Save** | Saves a changed plan assignment. | Disabled when there are no plan changes. | | Feature price | Accepts a feature price when the conditional feature editor is available. | Minimum `0`; format `#,##0.00`. | The **Plan** choices load before you choose one. Each choice uses the plan name as its displayed label and the plan ID as its value. The complete list of choices is not fixed on this screen. ![Check the **Company** field and the surrounding record controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) ## Review and save the assigned plan Change the assigned subscription plan when the company should use a different plan. **Prerequisites** - The subscriber record is open. - The **Plan** choices have loaded. **Steps** 1. Review the current value in **Plan**. 2. Open **Plan**. 3. Record the available plan labels and values for the change you are about to make. 4. Select the plan that the company should use. Changing **Plan** refreshes the subscriber feature and capacity values associated with the selected plan. ![Check the **Plan** choice control before selecting a plan.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9234e3d094ab46c3835b3e8b8af1087e.png) 5. Select **Save**. ![Check the **Save** control after a plan selection.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9234e3d094ab46c3835b3e8b8af1087e.png) **Result:** The selected plan is submitted for the subscriber record. The save response updates the page's stored subscriber details when the request succeeds. ## Review a feature price The feature-price editor is a conditional path for a feature row; it is not a standard area of the subscriber details screen. **Prerequisites** - A feature row provides the feature edit entry point. **Steps** 1. Open **Edit feature** for the feature row. 2. Review the feature price field in the `Edit feature` popup. 3. Enter a value that is at least `0` when the price is editable. **Result:** The feature-price editor shows the amount with the `#,##0.00` format. This page does not save feature-price changes. ## When loading or saving goes wrong | What you see | Meaning | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | **Plan** has no selected value. | Select a **Plan** before saving. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Loading or saving a subscriber request failed. | Review the record and try the operation again. | | The page displays `An error occurred while processing your request` while the edit controls are present. | The page is not healthy even though the controls are listed. | Do not rely on the values or save outcome until the record loads normally. | The **Plan** validation rule is required. The common processing error is used for subscriber detail loading, plan-list loading, and plan saving. ## After reviewing the subscriber After the assignment is reviewed, continue with the configuration task that matches the change: - Use [Plans](doc:configuration-plans) to maintain plan definitions. - Use [Features](doc:configuration-features) to maintain feature definitions. - Return to [Subscribers](doc:configuration-subscriber-view) to open another subscriber record. # Sales handoff ## Sales handoff A sales handoff is the sales-job work where you confirm the commercial order, activate it, prepare its shipment, and record delivery. The completion stage follows the delivery work. The order panel owns confirmation, activation, shipment readiness, delivery, and corrections; the operational area owns the detailed receiving, inspection, stock, and delivery-note work that follows. ```mermaid stateDiagram-v2 Record --> Confirmation: Send confirmation Confirmation --> Active: Activate Active --> Shipment: Prepare shipment Active --> Complete: Deliver Shipment --> Complete: Deliver Complete --> Active: Reverse delivery ``` Use this page when you already have a saved order and need to move it through the order-owned handoff. Use [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) for the wider sales-job journey, and [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) when the detailed Warehouse work begins. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find an existing Order | [Find and open the Order](#find-and-open-the-order) | | Identify Order fields and actions | [Understand the Order panel](#understand-the-order-panel) | | Confirm and activate an Order | [Confirm and activate the Order](#confirm-and-activate-the-order) | | Prepare shipment or start delivery | [Prepare shipment and deliver the Order](#prepare-shipment-and-deliver-the-order) | | Reverse or correct an Order | [Correct the Order and handle problems](#correct-the-order-and-handle-problems) | | Continue receiving, inspection, stock, or delivery-note work | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) | | Create or locate a Warehouse delivery note | [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) | ## Before you start > **Note:** A field marked configurable is required only where your company configuration > makes it mandatory. Prerequisites - You have a saved sales job with an Order. - You can edit the sales job and the Order is new or has unsaved changes when you need to use **Save**. - You have the customer and supplier references needed for the Order fields. - You know the Order's current stage. **Request Pricing Confirmation** is available for a Draft Order that has not already been released or requested. **Activate Order** is available at Awaiting Activation or Consider As Awaiting Activation. - The shipment path depends on the supplier relationship. **Ready for shipment** is available for the supplier route at Valid; **Deliver Order** is available for a non-supplier Valid Order or a supplier Ready for Shipment Order. ## Find and open the Order The Orders list is the working list for sales jobs at the Order stage. Use it to identify the record, then open the record before you change the Order panel. Prerequisites - You can access Sales jobs and know which saved Order you need. Steps 1. In the application menu, select **Sales**. 2. Select **Sales jobs**. 3. Select **Orders**. 4. Open `/sales/list/orders/view`. 5. Select the list tab that matches the work you need to locate. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Work with current Order records | **Orders** | | Search across sales-job work | **All** | | Review earlier sales stages | **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, or **Offers** | | Find finished or left-route work | **Archived** | | Review jobs missing a customer survey | **Job Missing Customer Survey** | 6. Identify the row from **Job No.**, **File No.**, `Sales responsible`, **Vendor**, **Client**, **Job title**, `Order date`, and `Forecasted Delivery Date`. 7. Select the row to open the sales-job record. **Result:** The sales-job record opens with the Order panel available when the job is at the Order stage. Select the client, vendor, or stage title bar to expand the collapsed Order panel before using its menu or panel **Save**. ## Understand the Order panel The Order panel is the part of the sales-job record where you maintain order references, dates, delivery terms, payment information, and order items. The record also shows the current Order stage and its available actions. The panel fields are: | Field | What it records | Requirement or rule | | --- | --- | --- | | **Client Order No.** | The reference printed on the customer's order | Required only where company configuration makes it mandatory | | **Vendor Order No.** | The reference assigned by the vendor | Required only where company configuration makes it mandatory | | **Order Date** | The date shown on the customer order | Required only where configured; it cannot precede the Offer Date | | **Order Activation Date** | The date the Order becomes active | Required only where configured; it is between the Order Date and today | | **Delivery Time** | The agreed delivery period | Required only where configured; its minimum is 1 and its maximum is the configured period limit | | **Forecasted Delivery Date** | The date you expect delivery | Required only where configured | | **Shipping Address** | Where the goods are to arrive | Address used for shipment | | **Delivery Term** | The agreed delivery condition | Required only where configured | | **Payment Method** | How the customer pays | Required only where configured | | **Payment Period** | The agreed payment interval | Required only where configured | | **Partial Delivery** | Whether the delivery can be split | Visible on the opened Order panel | | **L/C Number** | The L/C reference | Required only where configured | | **External order no.** | The reference used by an external system | Required only where configured | The item grid contains `Item Description`, `Unit`, `Qty`, `Unit Price`, `Item Price`, `Currency`, `Discount limit (%)`, `Discount (%)`, and `Tax (%)`. Enter a quantity with its unit: the Order can show `One or more items has ZERO quantity` or `One or more items has no unit` when an item row is incomplete. Order confirmation validates `Client`, `Vendor`, at least one item, item descriptions, quantities, prices, discounts, tax, and the form. The record header shows `Client` and `Vendor`. The Order menu contains **Order amendment** and **Enable Editing** when their stage and permission conditions are met. An order with invoices cannot add an item and locks `Qty`, `Item Price`, `Discount (%)`, and `Tax (%)`. The screen can display `Can not be done.. this order has outstanding invoice(s).`. ## Confirm and activate the Order After the Order fields and items are ready, move the Order from pricing or approval into activation. Prerequisites - The Order panel is open. - The Order is saved before you use actions that require an existing Order. - The Order has at least one item with a quantity and unit. Steps 1. Complete the configured Order fields and item rows. 2. Select **Save** when the Order is new or has unsaved changes. 3. If the Order is Draft and pricing has not been released or requested, select **Request Pricing Confirmation**. 4. If your process uses a pricing calculation, select **Calculation Sheet**. 5. If approval is required, select **Request approval**. 6. If you are an approver, select **Approve**. 7. Select **Consider Order As Confirmed To Client** when the Order is ready for client confirmation. 8. When the Order stage is Awaiting Activation or Consider As Awaiting Activation, select **Activate Order**. Selecting **Consider Order As Confirmed To Client** displays `Order Submitted to Client`. Selecting **Activate Order** opens Confirm activation date, where you enter **Order Activation Date**. The date cannot be earlier than **Order Date**. After a valid activation date, the dialog closes and the order updates to its next applicable activation state. If a save or action is refused, use the exact message in [Correct the Order and handle problems](#correct-the-order-and-handle-problems). A successful save can show `Custom fields saved successfully`, `Job updated successfully`, or `Your request was completed successfully`. **Result:** The Order remains on the record with its updated fields, and an activation-ready Order presents **Activate Order** when its stage permits activation. ## Prepare shipment and deliver the Order Shipment readiness is the branch between an activated Order and delivery. A supplier Order uses **Ready for shipment** before **Deliver Order**; a non-supplier Valid Order can use **Deliver Order** directly. The delivery scenario covers thirty-eight actuators first, followed by two replacements. Prerequisites - The Order is saved and has no unsaved Order changes. - The Order is Valid for the direct-delivery route or Ready for Shipment for the supplier route. - You are allowed to edit the sales job and the Order belongs to the permitted branch. Steps 1. Choose the shipment path for the Order. | If the Order is… | Select | | --- | --- | | A supplier Order at Valid | **Ready for shipment** | | A non-supplier Order at Valid | **Deliver Order** | | An own-company supplier Order at Ready For Shipment | **Deliver Order** | 2. Select **Ready for shipment** for the own-company supplier route. 3. Select **Deliver Order** when the delivery action is available. 4. In Delivering this order, enter **Delivered On**. 5. Select **OK** to confirm the delivery. The opened Order record displays **Deliver Order** when the Order is Valid on the non-supplier route or Ready for Shipment on the supplier route. The delivery action is controlled by the supplier branch and the Order stage. **Delivered On** is required and cannot be later than today. Delivery also requires that you belong to the job branch and that delivery is allowed. Selecting **Ready for shipment** does not open a date dialog. External-supplier delivery displays `Order updated successfully. A draft invoice was created. Check the Invoices tab for details.` Partial delivery leaves the job short of completion; the job reaches completion only when completed orders equal active orders. **Result:** The order reaches completion when all active orders are complete, or remains short of completion when delivery is partial. ## Correct the Order and handle problems Use the correction actions when an Order needs editing, must be moved back from a later stage, or stops with a validation or permission message. Steps 1. Open the Order action menu. 2. Select the correction that matches the Order's current stage. | If the Order is… | Select | | --- | --- | | An editable order that is not rejected or cancelled | **Enable Editing** | | Valid or Ready for Shipment | **Order amendment** | | Valid after activation | **Not activated yet** | | Ready for Shipment on the supplier route | **Not ready for shipment yet** | 3. Select **Not delivered yet** when delivery must be reversed. Use the message table to decide what to correct: | What you see | What to check | | --- | --- | | `This field is required` | Complete the field marked as required. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a value within the displayed numeric range. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the configured mandatory fields. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Enter a quantity greater than zero for each item. | | `One or more items has no unit` | Select a unit for each item. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add an item before saving the Order. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Keep those items in the Order. | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Do not reverse delivery while a due invoice exists. | | `This order has binding invoices. It cannot be reverted.` | Do not reverse delivery while binding invoices exist. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Use an Order in a branch where you are allowed to act. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the Order values and try the permitted action again. | | `Error saving custom fields` | Review the custom fields and save them again. | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Save the Vendor before saving the Order. | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Save the Client before saving the Order. | The delivery action can also show `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch.` or `Cannot be converted to delivered because the PM process is ongoing.`. The first means the job belongs to another branch; the second means the delivery check declined the action. **Result:** The Order is edited, amended, reversed, or ready for the next permitted action. ## Out of scope The message `Please enter action for each milstone ` is outside this handoff. ## Continue after delivery The completed-delivery view contains completed delivery work. The operational area handles receiving, inspection, stock, issue, and delivery-note work after the sales-order handoff. Steps 1. Open the sales-job list view that contains the completed work. 2. Select `Delivered`. 3. Use the visible list headers to locate the completed Order. 4. Open [Warehouse fulfillment flow](doc:warehouse-fulfillment-flow) for receiving, inspection, and stock work. 5. Open [Delivery notes](doc:delivery-notes) for the Warehouse delivery-note procedure. The list routes open their corresponding views. The available columns depend on the saved list layout, so use the headers shown in your view. **Result:** The completed-delivery view is open, and you know whether to continue in the sales-job record or in the operational delivery workflow. # Inquiry types An inquiry type is a reference value used to classify inquiries. Use this page when you need to maintain the available inquiry-type values rather than an individual inquiry record. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the fields and list behaviour | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add, change, or remove a value | [Add, edit, and remove an inquiry type](#add-edit-and-remove-an-inquiry-type) | | Resolve a validation or action message | [When validation or an action fails](#when-validation-or-an-action-fails) | | Work with inquiry records | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Maintain order-chance values | [Order chance](doc:configuration-sales-order-chance) | | Maintain delivery terms | [Delivery terms](doc:configuration-sales-delivery-terms) | | Maintain payment methods | [Payment methods](doc:configuration-sales-payments-methods) | | Maintain lost reasons | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Maintain regret reasons | [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Maintain cancellation reasons | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain order-cancellation reasons | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain requested guarantees | [Requested guarantee](doc:configuration-sales-requested-guarantee) | ## Before you start Access to the configuration area is required. The page's available maintenance controls depend on the subscription feature and the permissions assigned to the current account. | Before you start | What to check | |---|---| | Access | Open the Inquiry types configuration page. | | Subscription | The configuration subscription feature must be included. | | Create permission | The **New** control is available when creating new values is allowed. | | Edit permission | The row edit action is available when editing is allowed. | | Delete permission | The row delete action is available when deleting is allowed. | | Import permission | Import is available through the shared settings controls when importing is allowed. | | Export permission | Export is available through the shared settings controls when exporting is allowed. | ## Find the inquiry types The Inquiry types reference list is on the Inquiry types configuration page. Prerequisites - You have the access described in [Before you start](#before-you-start). Steps 1. Open the Inquiry types configuration page. 2. If the login page opens, complete the sign-in action in the following table. | Field or control | Action | |---|---| | **Email** | Enter your account details. | | **Password** | Enter your account details. | | **Login** | Select the control. | The route can also redirect to the home page before the list is available. **Result:** You are on the Inquiry types reference list when the route does not redirect and the list is available. ![Use the Inquiry types route and list when the page is available.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) ## Understand the list and form The list maintains one visible value, **Name**. The other configured fields support identification and ordering but are hidden from the list. | Field | What it is used for | Required | |---|---|---| | **Name** | The inquiry-type value shown in the list and entered in the add or edit form | Yes | | `DisplayOrder` | The hidden ordering field | No | | `InquiryTypeID` | The hidden inquiry-type identifier | No | | `CompanyID` | The hidden company association field | No | The list does not use paging, and its column headers are hidden. The add or edit form uses the configured columns and opens after an item is selected. The text field applies the required rule and the restricted-name pattern. The page is part of the shared Sales configuration area. Use the links in the overview to move to another reference list instead of treating those lists as additional inquiry-type fields. ## Add, edit, and remove an inquiry type Maintain an inquiry-type value in the list. Prerequisites - You are on the Inquiry types list. - The permission for the action is available. - For an edit or delete, the target row is already in the list. Steps 1. Choose the task in the following table. | Task | Action | |---|---| | Add a value | Select **New**. | | Edit a value | Select the row edit action. | 2. In **Name**, enter the inquiry-type value. 3. Select **Save**. Adding a value appends the new value to the list. Saving an edit replaces the matching row. **Result:** A successful add shows `Data saved Successfully`; a successful edit shows `Data updated Successfully`. To remove an existing value: Prerequisites - The target row is already in the list. - More than one item remains in the list. Steps 1. Select the row delete action to open its confirmation menu. 2. Choose the outcome in the following table. | Task | Action | |---|---| | Remove the value | Select **Delete**. | | Keep the value | Select **Cancel**. | Deleting a value removes the row and reindexes the hidden `DisplayOrder` values. **Result:** Selecting **Delete** removes the value and shows `Data Deleted Successfully`; selecting **Cancel** leaves the value in the list. ## When validation or an action fails A validation or action message tells you what to correct before you try again. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Name is required` | The **Name** field is empty. | Enter a value in **Name** and select **Save**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | The value contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Correct **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character and apply the filter again. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list contains only one item. | Keep the remaining item; deletion does not proceed. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Saved data is related to the item. | Keep the item and resolve the related saved data before trying again. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete action failed. | Check the item and try the delete action again. | If the route opens the login page instead of the reference list, complete the sign-in step in [Find the inquiry types](#find-the-inquiry-types). If it redirects to the home page, open the Inquiry types page again. ## Continue with inquiry records or related settings After maintaining the reference values, use [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) to work with inquiry records. The Sales configuration area also contains separate lists for order chance, delivery terms, payment methods, lost reasons, regret reasons, cancellation reasons, order-cancellation reasons, and requested guarantees. Open the relevant linked page when you need to maintain one of those subjects. # Libraries ## Libraries at a glance Libraries is the shared file area for organizing libraries, folders, and files in the Data area. Open it when you need to keep files available for reuse or connect a file with a related record. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the shared file area | [Find and navigate library contents](#find-and-navigate-library-contents) | | Create a library, folder, or file | [Create and maintain libraries and files](#create-and-maintain-libraries-and-files) | | Set permissions for a new library | [Set library roles](#set-library-roles) | | Fix a validation or duplicate-name message | [When a file operation goes wrong](#when-a-file-operation-goes-wrong) | | Link a file with a sales job | [Continue with linked files](#continue-with-linked-files) and [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md) | The main toolbar provides **New Library**, the icon-only **Switch View**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls. The page also provides **Get old cloud**. Select **Get old cloud** to retrieve older cloud files. ![The Libraries page with the main toolbar and the current location](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/31717ee2268eae6666d17cb905f059ca.png) ## Before you start Libraries actions depend on your subscription, the location you have opened, and the kind of item you select. | Before you choose an action | What to check | |---|---| | Use the Libraries surface | The Libraries subscription is included. Otherwise the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface. | | Create a folder or upload | Open a location other than the root or the default library. | | Open **Settings** | Select a non-default library. | | Work with a file | In list view, select a row whose type is **File**. | | Rename an item | Select a **Folder** or **Library** row. | | Delete an item | In list view, select the row. | The page opens at the root location. Open a library or folder before working with an item in list view. Select the item after its contents appear. ## Find and navigate library contents Use this procedure to open Libraries, search tile contents, switch between views, and move through the folders and files shown in the current location. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the Libraries area. - You know whether you are looking for a library, folder, or file. **Steps** 1. Open **Libraries** from the Data area. 2. Read the current location from the active breadcrumb heading. 3. Enter a search term in the search field with the placeholder `Keyword to Search...`. 4. Select the icon-only **Switch View** control to change between the two content views. 5. Select **Refresh** to reload the current contents. 6. Select the displayed name of a library or folder to open it. 7. In list view, use the headers to identify each row. The list view uses these columns: | Header | Use it to identify | |---|---| | **Name** | The library, folder, or file name | | **Type** | Whether the row is a library, folder, or file | | Size (B) | The file size when the value is shown | | **Tags** | Links associated with the file | | **Modified** | The date shown for the item | Library, folder, and file names appear in the current content area. When you first open the page, the current location and toolbar can appear without labelled fields or column headings. ![The Libraries arrival view with the current location and toolbar](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b6d56156ce3ca7ebb99a4fe06302a26c.png) **Result:** The Libraries contents for the selected location are on screen in tile or list view, and you can distinguish each library, folder, or file from its displayed type and name. ## Create and maintain libraries and files Use the operation that matches the item you need to create or maintain. Each operation starts from the current Libraries location. ### Create a library **Prerequisites** - You are at the root location, where **New Library** is available. **Steps** 1. Select **New Library**. 2. In the dialog titled `New Library`, enter the library name in **Library name**. 3. Review the permissions in **Roles**. 4. Select **OK**. **Result:** The new library is processed with the name and roles you entered. ### Create a folder **Prerequisites** - You are inside a non-default library location. **Steps** 1. Select **New Folder**. 2. Enter the folder name in the text field with the placeholder `Enter Folder Name..`. **Result:** The folder name is entered in the open form for the current library location. ### Upload a file **Prerequisites** - You are inside a non-default library location. - You have the file ready to upload. **Steps** 1. Select **Upload**. 2. Select **Browse** and choose the file. 3. Enter the file's name in **File Name**. 4. Select **Links** when the file belongs with a related record. 5. Select the related record from the target list. 6. Select **Link**. 7. Enter a note in **Comment** when you need to retain context with the file. 8. Select **Add**. **Result:** The upload form contains the selected file, name, links, and comments. ### Edit, open, download, rename, or delete an item **Prerequisites** - The item is present in the current list view. - You know whether the selected row is a file, folder, or library. **Steps** 1. Select the item's action button. 2. Choose one action from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Open a file | **Open** | | Change a file name, links, or comments | **Add/Remove tags** or the edit action in **Settings** | | Download a file | **Download** | | Rename a folder or library | **Rename** | | Remove a row | **Delete** | 3. Complete the fields shown for the selected action. **Result:** The selected item's form or action menu remains on screen with the information you entered. The form can contain a name field, **Links**, and **Comment**. After you choose a link type, a second list appears for the related record. Use the exact message shown on screen if the operation stops. ### Refresh or retrieve older cloud files **Prerequisites** - The Libraries subscription is included. **Steps** 1. Choose the toolbar action that matches what you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Retrieve older cloud files | **Get old cloud** | | Reload the current contents | **Refresh** | **Result:** The requested toolbar action is started and the Libraries surface remains available for the next operation. ![The New Library dialog with Library name and Roles](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/de01aebd235265bd3565fb2e99ae64a8.png) ## Set library roles Roles are the permission choices shown while you create a library. They control which library actions are presented to each role. **Prerequisites** - You are at the root Libraries location. **Steps** 1. Select **New Library** from the root Libraries location. 2. Read the role permissions in **Roles**. 3. Use the role grid to review `Roles name`, `View`, `New folder`, **Edit**, **Delete**, **Upload**, and **Download**. 4. Select **OK** when you finish reviewing the roles. **Result:** The role permissions for the new library are on screen, ready for **OK**. ## When a file operation goes wrong Use the message on screen to locate the correction. | Message | When to correct it | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required library, folder, or file-name field is empty. | Enter a value in the field marked as required. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | A library, folder, or file name contains an unsupported character. | Edit the name to use only the accepted characters. | | `Library Name Already Exists` | The library name already exists in the current list. | Enter a different library name. | | `Folder Name Already Exists` | The folder name already exists in the current list. | Enter a different folder name. | | `Please Select a file to Upload` | No file was selected for upload. | Select **Browse** and choose a file. | | `File Nmae is Required` | The upload file name is empty. | Enter a value in **File Name**. | | `File already Exist` | The file name already exists in the current list. | Enter a different file name. | | `File Title is Used` | The edited title is already used by another item. | Enter a different title. | | `Data Saved Successfully` | A library, folder, uploaded file, or edited file was saved. | Continue with the updated item in the current Libraries location. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | A file, folder, or library was deleted. | Continue with the refreshed Libraries contents. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | The operation finished without an error. | Continue with the next Libraries action. | ## Continue with linked files Link a file to a related record when the file needs to be found from that record as well as from Libraries. The selected-file details area can show links to clients, employees, jobs, projects, users, vendors, tasks, activities, invoices, and payments. **Prerequisites** - A file is selected. - The link form is available for the selected file. **Steps** 1. Select **Links**. 2. Choose the link type. 3. Choose the related record from the target list. 4. Select **Link**. 5. Continue in [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md) when the linked file belongs to a sales job. **Result:** The file's selected-file details can show the related record, and sales-job file work continues on [Sales job activities and files](sales-job-activities-and-files.md). ## Out of scope The **Export** modal markup is declared, but its opener is commented out. Do not document **Export** as a visible Libraries toolbar action. # Purchase job record ## What a Purchase job record is A Purchase job record is the workspace for shared purchasing information, package items, and the hand-offs from MRQ through RFQ, quotation, purchase order, and the **Received** stage. The stage bar identifies the work area you are entering; the focused pages carry the detailed panel procedures. ```mermaid flowchart LR MRQ[MRQ] --> RFQ[RFQ] RFQ --> Offer[Offer] Offer --> PO[PO] PO --> Received[Received] ``` | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the information and package area | [Understand the workspace](#understand-the-workspace) | | Open a new or saved record | [Find and open a Purchase job](#find-and-open-a-purchase-job) | | Find an existing Purchase job | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | Find an exception or archived Purchase job | [Purchase job exception lists](doc:purchase-job-exception-lists) | | Create the MRQ needed before purchasing work | [Create an MRQ](doc:create-mrq) | | Start ordinary RFQ work | [Manage purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | Work with a quotation | [Manage purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) | | Work with a purchase order | [Manage purchase orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Create a direct purchase order | [Create a direct purchase order](doc:create-direct-purchase-order) | | Maintain shared information and package items | [Prepare purchase job information](doc:purchase-job-information) | | Review attachments and history | [Comments, files, and history on a purchase job](doc:purchase-job-comments-files-and-history) | ## Before you start Prerequisites Have the information needed for the shared record fields and know whether you are opening a new record, a saved record, or the direct-order route. The shared form requires **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, and **Package Title**; **Branch** is also shown on the form. The workspace is available when the subscription and page checks pass. Commands that work on a saved panel require the record to exist, and command availability also depends on the record stage, record type, edit access, and panel status. Steps 1. Check that you have a purchaser for the record. 2. Check that you know the required product type. 3. Check that you have the package title. 4. Use a saved-record route before choosing a command that requires an existing panel record. **Result:** You have the shared record information and the route conditions needed to open the workspace. ## Find and open a Purchase job A new Purchase job starts a workspace, a direct purchase order starts the direct variant, and selecting a saved Purchase job record opens the existing record. Prerequisites Choose the route that matches the work you need to begin. Steps 1. Choose one route: | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Start an ordinary Purchase job | The ordinary Purchase job entry | | Start a direct purchase order | The direct purchase-order entry | | Open an existing Purchase job | The saved Purchase job record | 2. Confirm that the address ends with the route you selected. 3. Confirm that the stage bar and shared fields appear. ![Identify the shared fields, stage bar, and MRQ product area on a new Purchase job record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b19fb969e1c652e283faba8ee06f3d84.png) **Result:** The selected Purchase job workspace is open. ## Understand the workspace The workspace has shared record information above the package-item area, a stage bar for MRQ, RFQ, quotation, purchase-order, and receipt work, and follow-up tabs on a saved record. The shared fields are **Branch**, **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, and **Package Title**. The new-record screen shows **Drop shipping** as the Product Type option. The package area is headed **Products**. The stage bar contains these work areas: | Work area | Use it to identify | |---|---| | **MRQ** | Material requisition work | | **RFQ** | Request-for-quotation work | | **Offer** | Quotation work | | **PO** | Purchase-order work | | **Received** | Receipt work | The package area also shows **MRQ product** and **Tickets**. ![Identify the package area and its MRQ product and Tickets links.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5d1394a58a27a9e84dc7ef7f3b527e17.png) The MRQ product area draws these headers: | Header | |---| | **Item No.** | | **Product** | | **Category** | | **Group** | | **MRQ Qty.** | | **MRQ type** | | **Qty** | | **Unit** | | **Required Receiving Date** | | **Job no.** | | **MRQ** | | **V.L.** | | **Is limited V.L.** | | **Stage** | On a saved record, the follow-up tabs are **Attachment**, **Purchase Invoices**, and **Last Modifications**. The **Purchase Invoices** tab lists these groups: **All**, **Upcoming**, **Payable**, and **Paid**. Its visible columns include **Account**, **Created By**, **Job No.**, **Sub-supplier Order No.**, Payment Due Date, Total Amount, Total Amount (€), Due Amount, Due Amount (€), Paid Amount, Paid Amount (€), and **Status**. ![Recognize the saved-record tabs and the Purchase Invoices columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/66dbceb4239f46c4ec2df3f59fb658c1.png) The workspace includes record-level save commands and an ordinary procurement hand-off command. A saved record also shows the **Approved** status control. **Result:** You can identify the shared fields, package area, stage bar, follow-up tabs, and the headers visible on the current surface. ## Save the record and choose a hand-off The workspace commands start the next focused activity; the ordinary hand-off belongs to the ordinary route, while the direct-order command is available only for the direct-order record type. Prerequisites Open the ordinary new route or the direct-order route, and have the shared required fields ready. Steps 1. Choose the route that matches your next activity: | If you need to… | Select or open | |---|---| | Begin ordinary RFQ work | **+ RFQ** | | Save the current workspace | **Save** | | Save and leave the workspace | **Save and Close** | | Begin direct purchase-order work | **+ Direct P.O.** | If the ordinary hand-off or direct-order command is unavailable, check the record type, stage, edit access, saved panel state, and panel status before continuing. These conditions control command availability. ![Recognize the direct purchase-order command and its stage bar.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b2a36ffd473bf008313c6dc4cec81a7f.png) **Result:** The workspace shows the command set for the selected work. ## Choose the ordinary or direct-order path The ordinary path presents RFQ, quotation, and purchase-order work in sequence. The direct-order path opens purchase-order work without the ordinary RFQ and quotation path. | If the record is at… | Use the workspace to… | Continue with | |---|---|---| | MRQ or the ordinary opening stage | Start RFQ work | Manage purchase job RFQs | | Offer | Continue quotation work | Manage purchase job quotations | | Order through **Received** | Continue purchase-order work | Manage purchase orders | | Direct order at the opening stage | Continue purchase-order work | Create a direct purchase order | The inquiry panel is available from the unknown stage through before Offer, and for a deleted job. The offer panel is available from Offer through before Order. The order panel is available from Order through **Received**, and for a direct order at the unknown stage. Stage, record type, edit access, saved panel state, and panel status conditions affect command availability. On the ordinary new surface, the stage bar showed the rendered purchasing stages, including **RFQ** and **Offer**, followed by the receipt stage. On the saved record, **RFQ** was not on screen when checked; the screen continued to show **Offer** and the purchase-order work area. ![Identify the quotation stage on a saved record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/09bda1bbc55e5ffb5fd51721eaf194d1.png) **Result:** You know which focused page owns the next panel procedure and which stage labels to look for before continuing. ## When the workspace rejects an action The workspace uses validation messages when required package or panel content is missing. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Check PO mandatory field(s)` | Check the required purchase-order fields before continuing. | | `Please insert at least one PO` | Add a purchase-order item before continuing. | | `Check RFQ mandatory field(s)` | Check the required RFQ fields before continuing. | | `Please insert at least one RFQ` | Add an RFQ item before continuing. | | `Please insert at least one product` | Add a product to the package. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Check the required fields on the current workspace or panel. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Add a product to the package. | | `Product package deleted from all inquiries` | The product package was deleted from all inquiries. | | `Product package deleted from all offers` | The product package was deleted from all offers. | | `Product package deleted from all orders` | The product package was deleted from all orders. | | `Item(s) Regretted` | The selected items were regretted. | | `Item(s) Cancelled` | The selected items were cancelled. | | `Item(s) Rejected` | The selected items were rejected. | | `Item(s) Reactivated` | The selected items were reactivated. | | `Order updated successfully. Undelivered. A draft invoice was deleted` | The order was updated as undelivered and its draft invoice was deleted. | | `Job reactivated successfully` | The job was reactivated. | | `Email sent to client. Added to emails list activity` | The email was sent and added to the emails list activity. | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | The record was converted to an inquiry. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | The record was converted to an offer. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add an inquiry item. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add an offer item. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add an order item. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Keep items with either status in the order. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the current fields and try the action again. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a value in the permitted range. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | Enter a tax rate from 0 through 100. | | `Required Offer Type` | Complete the required offer type. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Complete the required bid due date. | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Enter an action for each milestone. | On the saved record, **RFQ** was not on screen when checked. **Save and Close** was on screen. **Result:** You can match a workspace validation message to the next correction to make. ## Continue the Purchase job After the shared workspace is open, continue in the focused page that owns the next activity. 1. Select the focused page for the stage you need to work: | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Maintain shared information or package items | Prepare purchase job information | | Work with an RFQ | Manage purchase job RFQs | | Work with a quotation | Manage purchase job quotations | | Work with a purchase order | Manage purchase orders | | Create a direct purchase order | [Create a direct purchase order](doc:create-direct-purchase-order) | | Review attachments or history | Comments, files, and history on a purchase job | 2. Choose one saved-record follow-up: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review attached files | **Attachment** | | Review invoice lists and status groups | **Purchase Invoices** | | Review record history | **Last Modifications** | ![Locate the saved-record follow-up tabs.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/473b35798afcff87877c4ff5c5d1ed35.png) **Result:** The next stage or follow-up activity has a focused page, and the saved record shows the selected follow-up surface. # QC ## QC at a glance QC is the warehouse quality-control surface for reviewing received items before the next warehouse step. It sits beside receipt work, inspection work, and stock follow-up. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the quality-control list | [Find the QC list](#find-the-qc-list) | | Read the list and change its visible layout | [Read and arrange the QC list](#read-and-arrange-the-qc-list) | | Review receipt and inspection information | [Review receipt and inspection details](#review-receipt-and-inspection-details) | | Choose the correct receipt or inspection path | [Handle receipt and inspection branches](#handle-receipt-and-inspection-branches) | | Finish an inspection and continue warehouse work | [Finish the inspection and continue](#finish-the-inspection-and-continue) | | Correct a blocked action | [Resolve validation and errors](#resolve-validation-and-errors) | | Continue with a neighbouring warehouse task | [Continue warehouse work](#continue-warehouse-work) | The page is headed `Quality Control` and groups its work under `Receiving`. The list can show the item's sales-job number, product, quantities, unit, stage, receipt number, and inspection number. ## Before you start Before you work with an item, make sure the warehouse record and its receipt or inspection record are available. The detail areas use the saved record to decide which tabs, fields, and actions you can use. Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters here | |---|---| | An identified warehouse record | The receipt, inspection, and warehouse detail areas require the record to exist. | | Receipt information | The receipt area changes according to whether the item came from a purchase order or a delivery note. | | Inspection information | Inspection fields and the release action appear only when the inspection record is available. | | Permission to edit the record | **Save**, **Re-inspect**, and **Defect** depend on the record being editable. | | Your company's inspection configuration | **Stock Type** is required only where your company configures it. | | No unsaved inspection changes | **Finish and release to stock** appears only after the inspection is saved and unchanged. | Required fields are conditional on the detail area. The following fields are required when their corresponding area is active. | Area | Required fields | |---|---| | Warehouse details | **Areas**, **Qty**, **In Stock**, and **Position** where the matching stock-product form is active | | Receiving shipment | **Recieved by** | | Inspection details | **GRN No.** and **Sub-supplier** when a received order exists | | Inspected product | **Ordered Qty.**, **Received Qty.**, **Accepted qty**, and **Rejected qty** | | Defect | **Defect** | | Attachment category | **Category** when an attachment category is being edited | With these conditions ready, find the QC list. ## Find the QC list The QC list is the place to start when you need to review warehouse items already in the quality-control area. Prerequisites - You have access to the warehouse quality-control area. Steps 1. Select **Quality Control**. 2. Confirm that the page title reads `Quality Control`. 3. Confirm that the list section reads `Receiving`. 4. Read the headers shown in the list. 5. Select the header control that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Arrange the columns | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | ![Check the Quality Control title, Receiving list, headers, and header buttons.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b8f86e6dccd759bea57dad38299d566f.png) The list can be empty. In that case, the page displays `No data`; there is no record row to open from the list. **Result:** You can see `Quality Control` and `Receiving`, and know whether a row is available to review. Next, read and arrange the QC list. ## Read and arrange the QC list The QC list is a grid whose visible headers come from the list layout selected for your company. Work from the headers that are actually shown rather than expecting every possible header in every layout. The current list shows these columns: | What you need to check | Header | |---|---| | Sales reference | **Sales job no.** | | Item description | **Product** and **Description** | | Storage location | **Area** and **Position** | | Order and receipt quantities | **P.O.s**, **Received Qty**, **Accepted qty**, and **Rejected qty** | | Measurement | **Unit** | | Warehouse progress | **Stage** | | Receipt and inspection references | **GRN** and **Inspection No.** | The available header controls depend on your list configuration. The list may show **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. Prerequisites - You are on the QC list. - The list has finished loading. Steps 1. Read the visible headers to identify the sales reference, item, quantities, location, stage, receipt, and inspection reference. 2. Select **Refresh** when you need to reload the list. 3. Select **Table Layout** to open the layout controls. 4. Select one of **Standard Layout**, **Save New Layout**, **Update Current**, **Delete Current**, **Columns Chooser**, or **Expand column width**. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Return to the standard column arrangement | **Standard Layout** | | Save a new arrangement | **Save New Layout** | | Change the current saved arrangement | **Update Current** | | Remove the current saved arrangement | **Delete Current** | | Choose which columns are available | **Columns Chooser** | | Change a column's width | **Expand column width** | 5. Select **Settings** when you need the list's settings control. ![Check the visible QC column headers and the empty list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5eb28bd7e38397d937252ac592dc6c0e.png) ![Check the layout controls opened from Table Layout.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fd0549b4e7ccec813a76e4437c901ced.png) The list can still display `No data` while its layout controls are open. Read the headers shown by the selected list layout. The available layout controls depend on your list configuration. The menu may also expose **Expand column width** while the same columns and `No data` remain visible. **Result:** You can read the columns shown by your QC list and use the layout controls without leaving the QC surface. When a row is available, continue to review its receipt and inspection details. ## Review receipt and inspection details Receipt details record how the warehouse received the item. Inspection details record who checked it, the quantities accepted or rejected, and any defect information that accompanies the inspection. The detail panels can also include **Product**, **Description**, **Stocked By**, **Stocked On**, **Note**, and **Unit** in warehouse details. File work can include **Library name**, **File Name**, **Links**, and **Comment**. These fields appear only on their matching detail or popup path. Prerequisites - You have opened a warehouse item from the QC list. - The relevant receipt or inspection detail area is available. - You have the receipt and inspection information needed for the fields shown. Steps 1. Review **Recieved by** and **Recieved on** in the receiving-shipment details. 2. Review **Sub-supplier** and **Sub-supplier shipment no.** when the receipt is from a purchase order. 3. Review the text **Sub-supplier** field when the receipt is from a delivery note. 4. Review **Inspected by**, **Inspected on**, **GRN No.**, **Sub-supplier shipment no.**, and **Sub-supplier** in the inspection details. 5. Review **Checklist**, **Documents**, and **Comment** when those areas are present. 6. Review each inspected product's **Product**, **Ordered Qty.**, **Received Qty.**, **Accepted qty**, and **Rejected qty**. 7. Review **Defect** and **Defect Category** when the inspection has a defect area. 8. Select the control that matches the saved-record detail you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review comments | **Comments** | | Review the receiving record | **Receiving sheet** | | Review the inspection record | **Inspection sheet** | | Review transfer movements | **Transfer history** | | Review saved changes | **Last Modifications** | 9. Select **Save** after changing receiving-shipment information. 10. Select **Consider PO As Not Received** when the saved purchase order must be returned to its not-received path and the record has no unsaved changes. **Result:** You have reviewed the receipt, inspection, quantities, defects, comments, and saved-record details available for the item, and can choose the receipt or inspection branch that applies. ## Handle receipt and inspection branches The receipt type and the item's saved state change which controls are available. Use the branch that matches the item rather than entering information from a different receipt type. Prerequisites - The receipt or inspection record is open. - The record state satisfies the action's condition. - You have edit access for actions that change the record. Steps 1. Use the matching branch: | If the item is… | Work with… | |---|---| | From a purchase order | **Sub-supplier** and **Sub-supplier shipment no.** in the purchase-order receipt area | | From a delivery note | The text **Sub-supplier** field in the delivery-note receipt area | | An inspected product with company-configured stock rules | **Stock Type** where the company configuration requires it | | A rejected item that can be inspected again | **Re-inspect** | | An editable inspection with defect information | **Defect** | | A saved inspection that is unchanged and not released | **Finish and release to stock** | 2. In a received-products grid, select **Package**, **Unitized**, **Split**, or **Delete**, as shown in the table below. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Group products into a package | **Package** | | Mark products as unitized | **Unitized** | | Divide one row into items | **Split** | | Remove a row | **Delete** | 3. In a split-item area, select the exact item action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add an item | **+ Item** | | Restore the item values | **Reset Item** | 4. In an inspection, select **Inspection template** when the saved inspection and printing permission allow it. 5. In the file area, select the control for the document action you need. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Attach a file | **Attach File** | | Open a file | **Open** | | Download a file | **Download** | | Rename a file | **Rename** | | Delete a file | **Delete** | | Retry an attachment operation | **Try Again** | | Change file tags | **Add/Remove tags** | | Export the file list | **Export** | 6. When a popup asks for a decision, select **No**, **Yes**, **Ok**, or **Cancel** according to the choice shown. **Result:** You have followed the receipt and inspection branch that matches the item's source, record state, permissions, and available detail area. The item is ready for the finish action when its conditions are met. ## Finish the inspection and continue Finishing an inspection releases its accepted warehouse work to the next stock step. A rejected item follows the re-inspection path when that action is available. Prerequisites - The inspection record is saved. - The inspection has no unsaved changes. - The items have not already been released to stock. Steps 1. Review the accepted and rejected quantities in the inspection details. 2. Select **Re-inspect** when rejected products exist and the record is editable, then complete the re-inspection details that appear. 3. Select **Finish and release to stock** when the inspection is saved, unchanged, and not yet released. **Result:** The available inspection completion action has been selected, or the item is ready for the registered warehouse page that owns its next step. ## Resolve validation and errors When an action stops, use the exact message to identify the information that needs attention. | Message | What to check | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | The requested action completed. Continue to the next warehouse step. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the record values and try the action again. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields in the active detail area. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Check that the package contains product rows before continuing. | | `You have products with no decision regarding accepted or rejected quantity` | Enter an accepted or rejected quantity decision for every product. | | `Please enter the storage area and position for each product` | Complete **Areas** and **Position** for each product that requires storage information. | | `Position is required` | Complete **Position** before saving the warehouse details. | | `Shipment is empty. Please enter received quantity` | Enter the received quantity for the shipment. | | `Received quantity is greater than order quantity` | Check **Received Qty.** against the order quantity before saving. | The message `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` belongs to the Files page, not QC. ## Out of scope | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Files | **Result:** You have matched the message or blocked interaction to the field, quantity, package, or layout action that needs attention. ## Continue warehouse work After QC review, continue on the warehouse page that owns the next action rather than repeating the same review on the list. | If you need to… | Continue with | |---|---| | Follow the overall warehouse handover | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) | | Work with receipt notes | [Goods receipt notes](goods-receipt-notes.md) | | Work with incoming inspection notes | [Incoming inspection notes](incoming-inspection-notes.md) | | Follow items awaiting warehouse work | [Upcoming stock](upcoming-stock.md) | **Result:** You know which registered warehouse page owns the next action after QC review. # Reactivation reasons ## Reactivation reasons A reactivation reason is a name that staff select when they record why a relationship resumes. Administrators maintain the available names here so staff can use the approved wording when they reactivate related work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Check the available names and list behaviour | [Understand the list and entry form](#understand-the-list-and-entry-form) | | Add or change a reason | [Add or edit a reactivation reason](#add-or-edit-a-reactivation-reason) | | Remove a reason | [Delete a reactivation reason](#delete-a-reactivation-reason) | | Resolve a save or delete message | [When saving or deleting goes wrong](#when-saving-or-deleting-goes-wrong) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You have permission to create, edit, or delete reasons for the action you need. - You have a selected saved row before you edit or delete it. - You are signed in to PAMS before opening the configuration route. The available actions depend on your permissions. **New** requires create permission, edit access requires edit permission, and the delete menu requires delete permission. The entry form appears when a reason is selected. Continue with [Find the reactivation-reasons list](#find-the-reactivation-reasons-list) when these prerequisites are in place. ![Sign in before opening the configuration list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) ## Find the reactivation-reasons list **Prerequisites** - You are signed in to PAMS. - You have access to the company configuration page. **Steps** 1. Open the Reactivation reasons page from the company configuration navigation. **Result:** The Reactivation reasons list opens. ## Understand the list and entry form The list provides one available field: **Name**. It is sortable and filterable. The same field is required when you add or edit a reason. The following settings describe how to work with this list: | List area | What you can do | |---|---| | **Name** | Read, sort, and filter the reason names. | | List actions | Add, edit, or delete a reason from the page. | | Page navigation | The list does not use paging. | | Search and layout | The search panel and column chooser are unavailable. | | Headers | Column headers are hidden. | With the list open, continue with [Add or edit a reactivation reason](#add-or-edit-a-reactivation-reason). ## Add or edit a reactivation reason Add a new reason or change an existing name. **Prerequisites** - To add a reason, you have create permission. - To edit a reason, you have edit permission and a saved row to change. **Steps** 1. Choose the action for the record you want to maintain. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a new reason | **New** | | Change an existing reason | the row's edit control, or select the row's **Name** cell | The entry popup is titled `New Reactivation Reason` for a new entry or `Edit Reactivation Reason` for an existing entry. 2. Enter the approved reason name in **Name**. 3. Select **Save**. If **Name** is empty, the form displays `Name is required`. A blank or space-only value also displays `please enter a proper name`. **Result:** A successful save closes the popup, updates the list, and displays `Data saved Successfully`. Continue with [Delete a reactivation reason](#delete-a-reactivation-reason) when a saved name is no longer needed. ## Delete a reactivation reason Deleting removes a selected reason from the list. Delete a reason when the name is no longer needed. **Prerequisites** - You have delete permission. - The reason is present in the list. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Choose the action you need. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the reason | **Cancel** | | Remove the reason | **Delete** | The confirmation asks `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. **Result:** After a successful deletion, the reason is removed from the list and the page displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. Continue with [Handle access and row-selection variations](#handle-access-and-row-selection-variations) when the available action depends on where you select the row. ## Handle access and row-selection variations The action available for a row depends on your permission and on which part of the row you select. **Prerequisites** - You have the permission for the action you want to use. - The list contains the row you want to select. **Steps** 1. Select the part of the row that matches your task. | Situation | What the page does | |---|---| | You select the **Name** cell while you have edit permission | Opens the reason for editing. | | You select the row's **Delete** option | Starts deletion instead of opening the editor. | | You lack permission for a page action | That action does not appear. | **Result:** The page opens the editor only for an editable row selection; otherwise, use the action that your permissions provide. ## When saving or deleting goes wrong Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a value in **Name**. | | `please enter a proper name` | Enter a name that is not blank or spaces only. | | `Error: Please Refresh the Page and Try Again.` | Refresh the page and try the operation again. | | `A duplicate occurred with the existing data` | Use a name that is not already used. | | An API-provided error description or error-code message | Follow the instruction in the returned message or contact your administrator with the exact text. | The first two messages apply when saving. The fallback and duplicate messages can appear when a save or delete request returns an error. ## After maintaining a reason After a successful save or deletion, the list reflects the change and displays the corresponding success message. The names maintained here are available for staff to record why a relationship resumes. # Sales job variants ## Overview A sales job starting route is the entry point you choose for the kind of sales work you are recording. **Potentials** starts early opportunity work, **Direct order** starts order work without the earlier route, and **Standing job** starts the standing-job route when that choice is available. All three routes open the same sales-job workspace; the route sets which starting mode the workspace uses. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Start early opportunity work | [Potentials](#find-and-choose-a-starting-route) | | Start an order directly | [Direct order](#find-and-choose-a-starting-route) | | Start standing-job work | [Standing job](#handle-route-availability-branches) | | Enter the new sales-job information | [Create a sales job](doc:create-sales-job) | | Review shared sales-job fields and assessment | [Sales job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment) | | Work with the saved sales-job record | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** | Have or know | Why it matters | |---|---| | Permission to open Sales jobs | You must be signed in to open the Sales jobs choices. | | The sales-job information you intend to record | The first screen includes required fields such as **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, and **Job Title**. | | Your company’s field and list configuration | Required markers and available fields can depend on company configuration. | | The layout used for your item and related lists | Some columns are taken from saved list layouts. | | The route you intend to use | The route selects the starting mode before the workspace opens. | The form validates before saving and protects the page when you leave it. A field marked configuration-dependent is required only where your company configures it. The page can also include company-added fields and saved-layout columns, so use the labels and headers that appear for you. The workspace remains unchanged until you choose a control that changes a record. Do not select **Save** or **Save and Close** until the information is complete. ## Find and choose a starting route A starting route is a choice in the Sales jobs creation menu. Select the route that matches the work you are beginning. **Prerequisites** - You can open the Sales jobs creation choices. - You know whether you are starting Potential work, direct order work, or standing-job work. **Steps** 1. Select **Add new** beside the Sales jobs creation choices. 2. Choose one route from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start early opportunity work | **Potentials** | | Start an order directly | **Direct order** | | Start standing-job work when the choice is present | **Standing job** | 3. Check that the selected workspace opens with the starting mode you chose. | Choice | Visible starting mode | |---|---| | **Potentials** | Potential workspace | | **Direct order** | Direct-order workspace | | **Standing job** | Standing-job workspace | **Result:** The selected starting route opens the sales-job workspace, or **Standing job** remains unavailable in the creation choices. ![The Potential workspace with its route-specific controls and item headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/83d5ec54a1314ab8fa992a191d88c91d.png) The creation choices showed **Potentials** and **Direct order**. ## Recognize the Potential workspace The Potential surface is the starting workspace for early opportunity work. On the loaded Potential route, the visible form fields and controls were: | Field or control | Type | Required marker on this surface | |---|---|---| | **Branch** | Text field | No | | **Salesperson Responsible** | Selection field | Yes | | **Product Type** | Selection field | Yes | | **Job Title** | Text field | Yes | | **End User** | Selection field | No | | **Estimated Value** | Number field | No | | **File Number** | Text field | Yes | | **Client** | Selection field | Yes | | **Vendor** | Selection field | Yes | | **Contact to Decision Makers** | Selection field | No | | **Budget Availability** | Selection field | No | | **Chance in Competition** | Selection field | No | | **Order chance** | Selection field | No | The page also reports an In Branch Currency readout and **Calculated Rating** as hidden readouts. The item grid has the headers **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. The available save controls are **Save** and **Save and Close**. The Potential workspace opens without a dialog or stage-change message. Use [Sales job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment) for the shared field work and [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items) for the item rows. ## Handle route-availability branches Route availability answers a different question from field availability: it tells you which kind of sales job you can start from the creation choices. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the Sales jobs creation choices. - You know which route you intend to start. **Steps** 1. Select **Add new**. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start early opportunity work | **Potentials** | | Start an order directly | **Direct order** | | Start standing-job work when the choice is present | **Standing job** | 2. Choose one available route from the table. **Result:** **Direct order** and **Potentials** are available choices; **Standing job** is unavailable in the creation choices. When **Standing job** is unavailable, select **Potentials** or **Direct order** instead. ## Choose another starting route The Sales jobs creation choices let you select a different starting route. **Prerequisites** - You have selected a starting route. **Steps** 1. Review the starting choices on screen. 2. Return to the Sales jobs creation choices when you need a different starting route. 3. Select **Add new**. 4. Choose an available route. **Result:** You can choose another available starting route. ## Continue with the owning page The route page answers which starting workspace to open. The pages below own the work after that choice. | Work you need to do | Page | |---|---| | Create the selected sales-job type | [Create a sales job](doc:create-sales-job) | | Maintain shared fields and assessment | [Sales job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment) | | Work with product rows | [Sales job items](doc:sales-job-items) | | Follow Potential work | [Potentials](doc:potentials) | | Follow Inquiry work | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Follow order-to-delivery work | [Orders](doc:orders) and the delivery workflow | | Review the saved record | [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) | | Work with comments and tasks | [Sales job comments and tasks](doc:sales-job-comments-and-tasks) | | Work with activities and files | [Sales job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files) | | Work with contacts, guarantees, and history | [Sales job contacts, guarantees, and history](doc:sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history) | The focused pages above own the shared fields, actions, choice lists, and save behaviour. Use them when you need to enter values, select list options, save a record, or continue the sales-job flow. The available choice lists are owned by the focused pages below. Use the list that opens beside each field or action. Use [Sales job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment) to choose **Status** and **Requested Offer Type**. Use [Create a sales job](doc:create-sales-job) to choose **Product Type**. | Choice control | Available choices | |---|---| | **Order chance** | `90 %`, `70 %`, `50 %`, `30 %`, `10 %` | | **Contact to Decision Makers** | `High`, `Medium`, `Low` | | **Budget Availability** | `Not Available Yet`, `In Progress`, `Available` | | **Chance in Competition** | `High`, `Medium`, `Low` | | **Regret Reason** | Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs | | **Cancellation Reason** | Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs | | **Lost Reason** | Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs | For validation and save messages, use the focused page where the related action is performed. The messages available for the related sales-job work are: | Class | Message | Owning work | |---|---|---| | success | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Shared sales-job fields | | success | `Job updated successfully` | Shared sales-job fields | | success | `Job deleted successfully` | Sales-job record | | success | `Job regretted successfully` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Job cancelled successfully` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Job missed successfully` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Job reactivated successfully` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Converted to offer successfully` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Converted To Regretted` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Converted to cancelled` | Sales-job lifecycle | | success | `Converted to lost` | Sales-job lifecycle | | error | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Shared sales-job action | | error | `Error saving custom fields` | Shared sales-job fields | | error | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Sales-job lifecycle | | error | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Sales-job lifecycle | | error | `An account with this name already exists` | Account details | | error | `A project with this name already exists` | Project details | | error | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Shared sales-job validation | | error | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Sales-job lifecycle | | error | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Sales-job lifecycle | | error | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Sales-job items | | error | `One or more items has no unit` | Sales-job items | | Owning page | Message | |---|---| | Sales offer information | `Please enter action for each milstone `; `Please save opened cost sheet first` | | Cost calculation | `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.` | | Account details | `Your request was completed successfully`; `Error: Vendor not saved yet`; `Error: Client not saved yet`; `This Field Is Required` | | Contacts and contact details | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.`; ` You already have a contact with this name` | | Files | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | | Bill of materials | `Sales order is archived`; `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity`; `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created`; `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing`; `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | | Embedded sales and purchasing panels | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00`; `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | | Products and product details | `This product is already included in BOM`; `The first variant cannot be deleted`; `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.`; `Please select one product` | | Materials request | `Package must have at least one item`; `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | | Activities | `Action not allowed`; `One topic and at least one note is required` | | Purchasing details | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists`; `Please enter at least one email`; `Inquiry must have at least one item`; `Offer must have at least one item`; `Order must have at least one item`; `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted`; `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | | Procurement details | `Required Offer Type`; `Required Bid Due Date` | | Outgoing payment details | `Required Receiving Date`; `Required Receiving After` | | Deliveries | `Error loading accounts` | | Reference list details | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer`; `There is error in serial you have entered`; `Minimum: At least one serial` | | Letters of guarantee details | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage`; `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | **Result:** You know which page owns the next action instead of repeating the shared workspace inventory on this route-comparison page. # Stock withdrawal and valuation ## Stock withdrawal and valuation Stock withdrawal and valuation is a warehouse reference list that assigns a withdrawal method and a valuation method to each product group. It sits with the other warehouse reference lists under Configuration. Each setting is one product group's rule for how stock is withdrawn and how its cost is valued. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Review the three settings on this page | [Understand the setting](#understand-the-setting) | | Find an existing setting or open a new one | [Find a setting](#find-a-setting) | | Create or change a product-group setting | [Maintain a setting](#maintain-a-setting) | | Work with product stages | [Warehouse product stages](doc:configuration-warehouse-product-stages) | | Set up inspection information | [Warehouse inspection base](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base) or [Warehouse inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Set up transfer or service reference values | [Warehouse transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) or [Warehouse service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | ## Before you start Before you start, have access to the warehouse configuration area and know which product group, withdrawal method, and valuation method you need to maintain. **Prerequisites** - The product group you need is available in **Group**. - You have permission to edit the setting if you are changing an existing row. - You have permission to create a setting if you are selecting **New**. - The page has loaded its current list configuration. The form appears after you open a new or existing setting. The available controls can change with your access and company configuration. ## Find a setting Open this page to review a saved setting or start a new one. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in to PAMS. - You are in the warehouse configuration area. **Steps** 1. Open **Configuration**. 2. Open **Warehouse settings**. 3. Select **Stock Withdrawal And Valuation**. 4. Read the **Group**, **Withdrawal**, and **Valuation** headers to locate the setting you need. 5. Choose one action from the table. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Change an existing setting | the edit action in the setting row’s action column | | Start a new setting | **New** | ![Check the **Group**, **Withdrawal**, and **Valuation** headers and the **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) **Result:** The stock withdrawal and valuation list is on screen, or the setting form is open. ## Understand the setting Use the list columns to compare settings before opening one. ### Fields and choices | Field | What you choose | Required | |---|---|---| | **Group** | The product group to which the rule applies. | Yes | | **Withdrawal** | `NA`, `FIFO`, `LIFO`, `FEFO`, or `ManualSelection`. | Yes | | **Valuation** | `NA`, `ActualCost`, or `AverageCost`. | Yes | The list uses **Group**, **Withdrawal**, and **Valuation** as its visible columns. Paging, row filtering, and header filtering are disabled. > **Note:** Work from the visible headers and rows; this list has no paging, row filtering, or > header filtering. The edit form shows the same three fields as select boxes, each with a required marker. ![Check the three required select boxes in the new-setting form.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/871ff45955b2ea331e9dcff79455a80b.png) The list can show `No data` and `Count: 0` when it contains no rows. When you open a new setting, the dialog title is `New Stock withdrawal and valuation by group` and the dialog provides **OK**. ## Maintain a setting Maintain a setting when a product group needs a withdrawal rule or a valuation rule. Use the same three fields when creating a new row or changing an existing row. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the new-setting form or an existing setting. - You know the product group and the two methods to assign to it. **Steps** 1. In **Group**, select the product group for the rule. 2. In **Withdrawal**, select the withdrawal method. 3. In **Valuation**, select the valuation method. 4. Choose one way to finish from the table. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Save the setting | **Save** in the popup | | Leave without completing the popup action | **Cancel** | | Leave without saving after the exit prompt appears | **Don't Save** | If a required value is missing, the field displays `Field is required`. **Result:** The form remains available for correction, or the popup closes after you select an available action. ## Handle configuration and access branches The page can present different choices and actions depending on the product groups and access available to you. | If you need to… | Use this path | |---|---| | Assign a product group | Open **Group** and choose from the product groups available to you. | | Choose a withdrawal method | Use **Withdrawal** and select one of the listed methods. | | Choose a valuation method | Use **Valuation** and select one of the listed methods. | | Create a row | Select **New** when it is available. | | Change a saved row | Select the edit action in the setting row’s action column. | **Prerequisites** - The required action is visible on your screen. - The product group choices needed for the setting are available in **Group**. **Steps** 1. Choose one action from the table. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Assign a product group | **Group** | | Choose a withdrawal method | **Withdrawal** | | Choose a valuation method | **Valuation** | | Create a row | **New** | | Change a saved row | the edit action in the setting row’s action column | **Result:** The page opens the list or form for the branch available to you. ## When saving or loading goes wrong Use the message or visible condition in the first column to choose the response. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Field is required` | A required setting has no value. | Return to the marked field and choose a value in **Group**, **Withdrawal**, or **Valuation**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The save input contains characters the application rejects. | Remove the rejected characters and try the save action again. | | The sign-in form remains visible with **Email**, **Password**, and **Login**. | The configuration list is not ready for use. | Sign in before using the warehouse configuration controls. | | A row edit action is unavailable. | Editing is not available for the current access or page state. | Use the controls that are visible, or ask an administrator to provide editing access. | | **New** is unavailable. | Creating a row is not available for the current access or page state. | Open an existing setting if one is available, or ask an administrator to provide creation access. | The page does not provide paging, row filtering, or header filtering. Work from the visible list headers and rows. When the setting is complete, continue with the related warehouse settings below. ## Continue with related warehouse settings After you finish with this reference list, continue with the warehouse reference list that matches the next setting you need to maintain. **Prerequisites** - You have finished reviewing or maintaining the current setting. **Steps** 1. Select the warehouse configuration entry for the next reference value. 2. Choose the next page from the table. | If you need to maintain… | Open… | |---|---| | Product stages | [Warehouse product stages](doc:configuration-warehouse-product-stages) | | Inspection settings | [Warehouse inspection base](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base) or [Warehouse inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Inspection documents | [Warehouse inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents) | | Transfer reasons | [Warehouse transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | Service types | [Warehouse service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | **Result:** The selected warehouse reference-list page is on screen. # Subscription invoices Subscription invoices is the reference list for reviewing subscription-invoice rows and continuing to an invoice's detail record. The list can also provide layout, filter, settings, and export tools. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Identify the list and its purpose | [Subscription invoices at a glance](#subscription-invoices-at-a-glance) | | Check what must be available before you start | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Read the visible columns and list tools | [Understand the invoice list](#understand-the-invoice-list) | | Adjust the list or prepare an export | [Personalize, filter, and prepare the list](#personalize-filter-and-prepare-the-list) | | Review a different layout or access variation | [Handle layout and access branches](#handle-layout-and-access-branches) | | Respond to a message | [When a list action goes wrong](#when-a-list-action-goes-wrong) | | Find and open an invoice | [Find and open an invoice](#find-and-open-an-invoice) | | Continue reviewing one invoice | [Subscription invoice details](doc:configuration-subscription-invoices-edit-record) | ## Subscription invoices at a glance A subscription invoice is a record presented in this configuration list for review before you continue to its detail record. The page is the Subscription invoices list at its configured route. The list is a reference surface: use it to read the rows that appear, adjust how the list is shown, and open an invoice. The invoice-detail page owns the record review after you select a row. ## Before you start Before you use the list, have access to the **Subscription invoices** page and a list layout available to your account. The grid appears when a selected layout is available, and its headers come from that layout. The controls for **Table Layout**, **Settings**, filtering, and **Export** also depend on the applicable list configuration and permissions. **Prerequisites** - You are on the **Subscription invoices** page. - A selected list layout is available so the grid can display. - You know that the visible columns can follow your selected layout rather than a fixed column list. - Your access includes the list tools you need, such as **Table Layout**, **Settings**, or **Export**. If the list contains no rows, the page displays `No data` and `Count: 0`. ## Understand the invoice list The invoice list is a grid whose visible headers come from the selected list layout. In the available list view, the headers are **Company**, **Invoice date**, **Invoice no.**, **Total amount**, and **Subscription**. | What you see | How to use it | |---|---| | **Company** | Identify the company shown for the row. | | **Invoice date** | Read the invoice date shown for the row. | | **Invoice no.** | Identify the invoice number shown for the row. | | **Total amount** | Read the total amount shown for the row. | | **Subscription** | Identify the subscription associated with the row. | The page also provides these list tools: | Control | Use | |---|---| | **Refresh** | Reload the list. | | **Table Layout** | Open the available layout choices and layout actions. | | **Settings** | Open list settings. | The grid's column set follows the selected layout, so work from the headers visible in your list. **Result:** The invoice list remains open with its visible headers and list tools ready for the next list action. ## Personalize, filter, and prepare the list Use the list tools to change how the rows are presented or to prepare the current list for export. These actions concern the list view; they do not change invoice data. **Prerequisites** - You are on the **Subscription invoices** page. - The list tools you need are visible. **Steps** 1. Select the layout action that matches what you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review or change the selected layout | **Table Layout** | | Create another layout | **Save New Layout** | | Save changes to the selected layout | **Update Current** | | Remove the selected layout | **Delete Current** | | Choose visible columns | **Columns Chooser** | | Adjust automatic column sizing | **Expand column width** | The layout menu also shows **Standard Layout**. If you choose **Save New Layout**, the dialog provides **Cancel** and **Save**. 2. Select **Settings**. 3. Select the list action that matches what you need: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Show a filter row under the grid headers | **Filter Row** | | Show the group panel when it is available | **Group Panel** | | Open the export dialog | **Export** | The export dialog is headed `Exporting List:`. It provides **Cancel** and **Export**. If the format choices are present, select **Export to Excel** for a spreadsheet or **Export to PDF** for a PDF file. ![Review the available layout actions before changing the list presentation.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a26625b62518848f8a8eb60be59ff400.png) ![Review the export dialog heading and actions before selecting an export format.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/7b06561727cde80854bdcf283a019ddb.png) **Result:** The selected list tool or dialog is open, ready for the next list-view action. ## Handle layout and access branches The list can present different tools and headers according to your available layout, permissions, subscription, and branch context. Use the surface that is visible rather than looking for a fixed set of columns or menu items. **Prerequisites** - You are on the **Subscription invoices** page. - At least one list control is visible. **Steps** 1. Identify the visible variation that matches your task: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review or change the selected list layout | **Table Layout** | | Show a filter row | **Filter Row** | | Show the group panel | **Group Panel** | | Open the export dialog | **Export** | | Open an invoice in the current branch | the edit action in the invoice row | 2. Select the control in the matching row. The import item is not part of this list surface. The grid's own column chooser is disabled; use the available shared **Columns Chooser** action when it is shown. **Result:** The selected layout, filter, group, export, or invoice-detail surface is open. ## When a list action goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to identify which list action needs attention. | Message | Action or condition | |---|---| | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The list request returned an error. | | `Couldnt Load Table Layouts` | Loading the available table layouts returned an error. | | `Duplicate Layout Name` | The new layout name duplicates an existing layout name. | | `Layout saved Successfully` | A layout save reports completion. | | `You can't change the standard layout.. please, create new layout` | The standard layout cannot be changed through the current action. | | `Error Saving Layout` | Saving the layout returned an error. | | `Default Layout Cannot be modified` | The default layout cannot be modified. | | `Default Layout Cannot be deleted` | The default layout cannot be deleted. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Layout deletion reports completion. | | `Error Deleting the Layout` | Deleting the layout returned an error. | | `NO Data to Export` | The export action found no data to export. | | `Are you sure?` | When **Are you sure?** appears, confirm the deletion only if you intend to remove the selected layout. | | `Couldnt Load Default Layout` | The default-layout load path reports an error. | | `Error setting current layout` | Setting the current layout reports an error. | If the page returns to **Dashboard** or **Tickets** instead of showing the invoice list, reopen **Subscription invoices** before using the list tools. ## Find and open an invoice Use the Subscription invoices list when you need to identify an invoice row and continue to its detail record. The edit action in the invoice row is available when the invoice belongs to the same branch as the current list context. **Prerequisites** - You are on the **Subscription invoices** page. - The invoice row is available in the list. **Steps** 1. Identify the invoice from the visible row values and columns. 2. Select the edit action in the invoice row. The invoice-detail page opens for that row. **Result:** The selected subscription invoice is open in its detail page. ![Review the invoice list headers and the list tools before opening a row.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4bee3431db88a3a4f730a86e7264a0dc.png) ## Continue to invoice details The subscription-invoice details page owns review of the selected invoice record. The list page only hands you to that record; use [Subscription invoice details](doc:configuration-subscription-invoices-edit-record) for the next screen. These tools do not create, update, or delete invoice records. **Delete Current** applies to the selected list layout, while **Export** opens the export dialog. **Result:** You know whether to continue with the invoice detail record or return to the list tools. # Inspection documents ## Inspection documents An inspection document is a named entry in the warehouse inspection reference list. Use this page when you need to review or maintain the names available to inspection work. The list belongs to **Warehouse settings** alongside other warehouse reference lists. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list or open an existing entry | [Find an inspection document](#find-an-inspection-document) | | Understand the list and the entry form | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add, review, or remove an entry | [Add or maintain an inspection document](#add-or-maintain-an-inspection-document) | | Resolve a message or blocked action | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Work with the inspection base | [Inspection base](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base) | | Work with the inspection checklist | [Inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | Work with transfer reasons | [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | Work with service types | [Service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | | Work with stock withdrawal and valuation | [Stock withdrawal and valuation](doc:configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You are ready to work in the warehouse configuration area. - Your subscription includes this configuration surface. - The list and form actions available to you depend on your access. - The list has loaded before you open an existing entry or create a new one. The form appears for a selected entry while the new/edit dialog is open. The list headers can depend on your company's setup, so use the headers actually shown in your list. ## Find an inspection document Use the list to locate a name before reviewing or maintaining it. **Prerequisites** - You know that the entry belongs in the inspection document list. **Steps** 1. Open **Configuration**. 2. Choose **Warehouse settings**. 3. Select **Inspection document**. 4. Review the **Name** column to identify the row you need. 5. If a filter control is visible for **Name**, use it to narrow the rows. 6. Select the control at the end of the row to open an existing entry. ![Locate an inspection document name in the list and use the New, Refresh, or Settings controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/400af0733c27e335f3a3f11d96f1bd95.png) **Result:** The inspection document list is on screen, with its **Name** column and available row actions ready for the next task. ## Understand the list and form The list presents the inspection document name; the record also carries system fields that are not shown for editing. The form presents **Name** as the page-specific field. | Field or surface | What you use it for | |---|---| | **Name** | The inspection document name shown in the list; it is the first field in the form and is required. | | Ordering value | The list's ordering value; it is not shown as a list column or form field. | | Company association | The company association; it is not shown as a list column or form field. | | Other page-specific field types | This entry form provides no page-specific select box, date box, number box, file field, or multi-value field. | The list showed **Name** as its column. The new-entry surface is titled `New Inspection document` and shows **Name** with a required marker. The dialog also shows **OK**. Use the controls in each row’s action area; the area has no heading. ![Review the New Inspection document dialog, including the required Name field and OK control.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9513e6822a97f2b895ce1971f1655e12.png) Use this field layout when you add, review, or remove an entry. ## Add or maintain an inspection document Use this procedure to add a name, review an existing name, or remove a row. The same page uses the row list for all three tasks. **Prerequisites** - You are on the inspection document list. - To edit or remove an existing entry, its row is visible in the **Name** column. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Start a new entry | **New** | | Review or change an existing entry | The control at the end of the row | | Remove an existing entry | The control at the end of the row | 2. For a new or edited entry, enter the name in **Name**. If **Name** is empty, enter a value in **Name** before completing the dialog; the form displays `Name is required`. 3. For a removal, choose the action that matches your decision. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Close the confirmation menu | **Cancel** | | Continue with removal | **Delete** | 4. For a new or edited entry, select **OK** to complete the dialog. The form checks its required fields before it sends the entry for saving. New and edited entries produce different success messages. ![Enter the inspection document name in the New Inspection document dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9513e6822a97f2b895ce1971f1655e12.png) **Result:** The selected inspection document entry is open for review or maintenance, or the available delete choice has been selected. ## Handle access and surface variations The page can show different surfaces according to subscription, access, and company setup. | What changes | What you see | |---|---| | The subscription does not include the feature | The configuration area is replaced by the subscription-upgrade surface. | | New-entry access is unavailable or the new control is hidden | **New** is not available. | | Edit access is unavailable | The control at the end of the row is not available. | | Delete access is unavailable | The control at the end of the row is not available. | | Your company setup supplies a different list layout | Work from the column headers shown in your list. | | Import or export access is unavailable | The toolbar showed **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**, with no import or export controls. | | Import or export is available | Use the available import or export control from the page toolbar. | This form provides **Name** and no other page-specific field type. The shared surface can contain controls for other configuration lists, but they do not become fields for this entry. Use the messages in the next section when an action is blocked. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message text below to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a value in **Name** before completing the dialog. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter, then apply it again. | | `Data updated Successfully` | The edited entry has been updated. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The new entry has been saved. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The entry has been deleted. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one item in the list before deleting another. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the entry because saved data is related to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Keep the entry and retry after resolving the deletion failure. | | `Data Importing completed` | Return to the list and review the imported entries. | The forbidden-character message applies when the list filter is applied. The delete messages apply to the delete action and the number or relationships of the entries. After resolving a message, continue with the related warehouse list that matches your next task. ## Continue with related warehouse configuration The warehouse configuration surface groups inspection documents with related reference lists. Use the page that matches the information you need to maintain next. | If you need to maintain… | Go to | |---|---| | The inspection criteria's foundation | [Inspection base](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base) | | The checks used during inspection | [Inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist) | | The reasons used for transfers | [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons) | | The service types used in warehouse work | [Service types](doc:configuration-warehouse-service-types) | | Stock withdrawal and valuation settings | [Stock withdrawal and valuation](doc:configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal) | | The inspection document names | Stay on this page | # Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs Use this page to find a sales job that left the normal path, identify the stage it left from, and check the recovery route available for that exit. ## Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs An exit state records that a job stopped progressing from Potential, Offer, or Order. The list labels tell you where to find the job; the compound stage names identify the stage it left. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a job that stopped at Potential | [Assess Potential exits](#assess-potential-exits) | | Find a job that stopped at Offer | [Assess Offer exits](#assess-offer-exits) | | Find a job that stopped at Order or was deleted | [Assess Order and deleted exits](#assess-order-and-deleted-exits) | | Open the relevant archived list | [Find an exit list](#find-an-exit-list) | | Review the normal sales path | [Sales jobs lifecycle](sales-jobs-lifecycle.md) | | Open a saved sales job | [Find sales job work](find-sales-job-work.md) | | Work with the saved record | [Sales job record](sales-job-record.md) | The exit states are grouped by the stage they leave: | Stage left | Exit state shown to the reader | |---|---| | Potential | **Missed**, **Regretted to Offer**, **Cancelled Inquiries** | | Offer | **Regretted to Offer**, **Cancelled Inquiries**, **Lost** | | Order | **Rejected Orders**, **Cancelled Orders** | | No further stage | **Deleted Inquiries** | ## Before you start - You can open the sales list. - You know which exit state you need to find. - For a recovery action, the job is saved and you have editing access. The sales list displays the archived outcome links when its archived filter is available. The reactivation control is shown only when editing is allowed. ## Find an exit list The sales list groups the exit lists under **Archived**. Use the list that matches the job's exit state rather than searching the active **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Offers**, or **Orders** lists. Steps 1. Open the sales list. 2. Select **Archived**. The archived filters include **Delivered**, **Lost**, **Regretted to Offer**, **Cancelled Inquiries**, **Cancelled Orders**, **Rejected Orders**, **Missed**, and **Deleted Inquiries**. 3. Select the archived list that matches the job. | If you need to find… | Select | |---|---| | A missed job | **Missed** | | A regretted offer | **Regretted to Offer** | | A cancelled inquiry | **Cancelled Inquiries** | | A cancelled order | **Cancelled Orders** | | A rejected order | **Rejected Orders** | | A lost offer | **Lost** | | A deleted inquiry | **Deleted Inquiries** | 4. Use the visible column headers to identify the job. ![Use the archived links and the visible grid headers to choose an exit list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/30c54ffbb963b5498c59c1b55f1ffb2b.png) The lists show **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. The visible columns come from the saved list layout, so use the headers currently shown in the list. **Result:** The matching exit list is open, and you can identify a job from its visible headers. ## Assess Potential exits A Potential exit is a job that stopped before it reached Offer. Use the compound stage name to separate a missed, regretted, or cancelled Potential. | Exit | General instruction | Recovery path | |---|---|---| | Potential exit | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Open the job record to review its available recovery action. | | Regretted Potential | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Potential. | | Cancelled Potential | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Potential. | The Potential exits are separated by their reader-facing labels. **Missed** identifies a missed Potential, **Regretted to Offer** identifies a regretted Potential, and **Cancelled Inquiries** identifies a cancelled Potential. Steps 1. Select the list that matches the exit. | Exit | Select | |---|---| | A missed Potential | **Missed** | | A regretted Potential | **Regretted to Offer** | | A cancelled Potential | **Cancelled Inquiries** | 2. Read the list headers and the exit-specific reason or date where it is shown. 3. Open the job record if you need to review its recovery action. **Result:** You have identified the Potential exit and its list, then reviewed the available recovery action. Continue to [Assess Offer exits](#assess-offer-exits) for an Offer exit. ## Assess Offer exits An Offer exit is a job that stopped after it reached Offer and before it reached Order. The compound stage name distinguishes regret, cancellation, and loss. | Exit | General instruction | Recovery path | |---|---|---| | Regretted Offer | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Offer. | | Cancelled Offer | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Offer. | | Lost Offer | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Offer. | Steps 1. Select the list that matches the exit. | Exit | Select | |---|---| | A regretted Offer | **Regretted to Offer** | | A cancelled Offer | **Cancelled Inquiries** | | A lost Offer | **Lost** | 2. Read Regret reason, Cancel reason, or the lost-offer details where the selected list provides that column or the record provides that detail. 3. Open the job record if you need to use its recovery action. **Result:** You have identified the Offer exit and its list, then reviewed the available recovery action. Continue to [Assess Order and deleted exits](#assess-order-and-deleted-exits) for an Order or deleted exit. ## Assess Order and deleted exits An Order exit is a job that stopped after it reached Order. A deleted job is kept in a separate deleted list and does not use the recovery branch for the other exits. | Exit | General instruction | Recovery path | |---|---|---| | Rejected Order | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Order. | | Cancelled Order | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Return the job to Order. | | Deleted inquiry | Select the matching archived list and use the generic identifying columns currently shown. | Do not use reactivation for this list. | Steps 1. Select the list that matches the exit. | Exit | Select | |---|---| | A rejected Order | **Rejected Orders** | | A cancelled Order | **Cancelled Orders** | | A deleted inquiry | **Deleted Inquiries** | 2. Read the order or cancellation columns when they are shown. 3. Open the job record when you need to review the available record actions. **Result:** You have separated the Order exits from Deleted and know that Deleted has no reactivation branch. Continue to [When exit information is missing](#when-exit-information-is-missing) if the list does not provide the information you need. ## Recover an archived job Recovery returns eligible Potential, Offer, or Order work to the active stage that feeds the relevant working page. **Reactivate Job** is available outside an embedded record when you can edit the job and its stage is not Deleted. Steps 1. Open the archived job outside an embedded record. 2. Select **Reactivate Job**. The confirmation dialog opens with `You are about To reactivate this job`. 3. Select **Yes**. PAMS displays `Job reactivated successfully`. 4. Confirm the active stage for the returned work. | Archived work | Active stage after reactivation | |---|---| | Cancelled or regretted Potential | Potential | | Regretted, cancelled, or lost Offer | Offer | | Rejected or cancelled Order work | Order | **Result:** The eligible archived work is returned to its active stage. ## When an exit is recorded An exit is recorded only after the corresponding active work has no remaining work that keeps the job in that stage. | Work being closed | Condition for recording the exit | |---|---| | Inquiry cancellation | No active Potential remains. | | Inquiry regret | No active Potential or Inquiry remains. | | Offer cancellation or regret | No active Offer remains. | | Offer loss | Linked purchasing jobs and inquiries are also cancelled. | | Order cancellation or rejection | No active Order remains. | ### Restore deleted work **Restore** is available on a deleted job outside an embedded record when you can edit the job. It sets the current stage to Potential and displays `Your request was completed successfully`. Steps 1. Open the deleted job outside an embedded record. 2. Select **Restore**. 3. Confirm that the job returns to Potential. **Result:** The deleted job returns to Potential and PAMS displays `Your request was completed successfully`. > **Warning:** **Ultimate Delete** is available only on a deleted job outside an embedded record when > you can edit the job. ## When exit information is missing The list uses the saved list layout, so work from the headers visible in the list. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue after the requested action completes. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the action and try again when the record is in the required state. | | `Error loading accounts` | Check the account information before continuing. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and submit the value again. | ## What to do next Use the page that owns the next part of the work: 1. Open [Sales jobs lifecycle](sales-jobs-lifecycle.md) to place the exit against the complete sales path. 2. Open [Find sales job work](find-sales-job-work.md) to locate another saved job or list. 3. Open [Sales job record](sales-job-record.md) to work with record-level actions and details. 4. Open [Inquiries](inquiries.md), [Offers](offers.md), or [Orders](orders.md) for the stage that the job left. 5. Open [Configuration: sales regret reasons](configuration-sales-regret-reasons.md), [Configuration: sales cancellation reasons](configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons.md), [Configuration: sales order cancellation reasons](configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons.md), or [Configuration: sales lost reasons](configuration-sales-lost-reasons.md) for the related reason lists. **Result:** You know which page owns the next action for the job's stage or record. # Order chance ## Order chance in the sales flow Order chance is a salesperson's estimate of how likely a sales opportunity is to become an order. You maintain its reference entries for use at the Order stage of the sales flow; the configured values can also be used in sales forecasts and job documents. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the reference list | [Find the Order chance list](#find-the-order-chance-list) | | Review the fields and list layout | [Understand the list and edit form](#understand-the-list-and-edit-form) | | Add or change an entry | [Add or edit an Order chance entry](#add-or-edit-an-order-chance-entry) | | Remove an entry | [Delete an Order chance entry](#delete-an-order-chance-entry) | | Search, refresh, or export the list | [Filter, refresh, and export the list](#filter-refresh-and-export-the-list) | | Use the values in sales work | [After maintaining Order chance](#after-maintaining-order-chance) | | Configure related sales settings | Configuration sales order activation conditions | ## Before you start Prepare the access needed to maintain Order chance entries before you open the page. **Prerequisites** - Sign in to PAMS. - Open **Order Chance** from the sales configuration menu. - Have permission for the operation you need. The page checks access separately for creating, editing, deleting, importing, and exporting entries. - If the page does not show the list, use [Find the Order chance list](#find-the-order-chance-list) and [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong) to check the route and the available controls. > **Note:** The controls available to you depend on the operation you need. ## Find the Order chance list Use the list to review and maintain the entries available to sales work. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. - You can open **Order Chance** from the sales configuration menu. **Steps** 1. Select **Order Chance** from the sales configuration menu. 2. Check that the page heading and list for Order chance are present. 3. Check that **New** is present before starting an add operation. ![Check the page reached after opening the route](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e8d47ea26bfdc265f91efcfaace09be.png) If another page opens instead of **Order Chance**, stop before changing data and follow [When maintenance goes wrong](#when-maintenance-goes-wrong). **Result:** The Order chance list is open and you can choose a list operation. ## Understand the list and edit form The list is a reference table with one editable field in its add/edit popup. The list's visible entry is the entry name; its percentage value appears with a percent sign in the list. | Area | What you use it for | What appears | |---|---|---| | List | Review entries | The entry name is visible by default and can be filtered. The percentage value is hidden by default and can be filtered. | | Entry row | Edit an entry | Select the row except its menu area. | | Entry menu | Remove an entry | Select **Delete** from the open menu. | | Add/edit popup | Enter the entry name | **Chance** is the editable text field. | | Search area | Find matching list text | The placeholder is `Keyword to Search...`. | The list does not show column headers, paging, or the column chooser. Use the page actions and popup to add, change, or remove entries. The percentage field does not appear as an editable field in the popup. ## Add or edit an Order chance entry Adding creates a new reference entry; editing changes the selected entry's name. Use the same popup for both operations. **Prerequisites** - The Order chance list is open. - You have permission to add or edit entries. **Steps** 1. Choose the operation in the table. | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Add an entry | Select **New**. | | Edit an entry | Select the row, except its menu area. | 2. In **Chance**, enter the name for the entry. 3. Select **Save** in the popup. 4. If **Chance** is empty, enter a value before saving again. The page displays `Can't save empty item` and does not send the save request. 5. Check for `Data saved Successfully` after the save completes. **Result:** The popup closes after a successful save and the new or updated entry appears in the list. ## Delete an Order chance entry Deleting removes the selected reference entry from the list. Review the confirmation before you commit the removal. **Prerequisites** - The Order chance list is open. - You have permission to delete entries. **Steps** 1. Open the entry menu. 2. Select **Delete** in that menu. 3. Read the confirmation text `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 4. Choose one option in the confirmation dialog. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Keep the entry | **Cancel** | | Remove the entry | **Delete** | 5. Check for `Data Deleted Successfully` after the deletion completes. 6. If the operation fails, check for `Failed to Save` before repeating the action. **Result:** The entry remains in the list after **Cancel**, or is removed after **Delete**. ## Filter, refresh, and export the list Use the list tools when you need to locate an entry, update the displayed rows, or prepare a copy of the list. **Prerequisites** - The Order chance list is open. - You have permission to use **Export** in the **Settings** menu. **Steps** 1. Select **Refresh** to reload the list. 2. Select **Settings** to open the list settings. 3. Select one of these options from **Settings**: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Show or hide the filter row | **Filter Row** | | Open the export dialog | **Export** | 4. Enter search text in `Keyword to Search...`. 5. Select **Table Layout** to open the layout options. 6. In `Exporting List:`, choose one option. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Export an Excel file | **Export to Excel** | | Export a PDF file | **Export to PDF** | | Close the dialog without exporting | **Cancel** | | Run the selected export | **Export** | **Result:** The list is refreshed or filtered, or the selected export operation is completed or closed. ## When maintenance goes wrong Check that the Order chance list is visible before you select a maintenance control. If a control or message in the table appears, follow the matching action in the last column. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Can't save empty item` | **Chance** has no value when you try to save. | Enter a value in **Chance**, then select **Save**. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The add or edit save completed. | Return to the list and check the entry. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The delete operation completed. | Check that the entry is no longer in the list. | | `Failed to Save` | The delete request reached its error path. | Do not assume the entry changed; review the list before retrying. | | **New**, **Refresh**, or **Order Chance** is not on screen | The required list surface or permission-controlled control is unavailable. | Check the route, sign-in state, and the permission for the operation. | | Another page opens instead of **Order Chance** | The requested list did not open. | Select **Order Chance** from the sales configuration menu, then confirm that the list is visible before continuing. | ![Check the page reached when the expected list does not load](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/31d4a00195ba1ea3c7448bec37ef31e5.png) ## After maintaining Order chance After you finish maintaining the list, continue with the sales record information and assessment area when you need to use a value in a sales record. Use the sales and backlog widgets when you need to review forecast or backlog effects. For related configuration, continue to Configuration sales order activation conditions or the Order status reference list. # Prepare purchase job information ## Overview A purchase job is the shared purchasing record that collects the information and package items needed before the job continues through purchasing stages. In PAMS, an MRQ can lead to an RFQ and then a PO. Use this page to prepare the shared record and its package items; use the focused pages for RFQ, quotation, and purchase-order work. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Start a new purchasing record | [Find or start a purchase job](#find-or-start-a-purchase-job) | | Check the shared fields and package grid | [Understand the shared information and package area](#understand-the-shared-information-and-package-area) | | Add products from an MRQ and save the record | [Maintain package items and save the record](#maintain-package-items-and-save-the-record) | | Choose the option for a Direct Order or another job type | [Handle stage and record variations](#handle-stage-and-record-variations) | | Resolve a validation message or an unavailable record | [When saving or selecting items goes wrong](#when-saving-or-selecting-items-goes-wrong) | | Continue with the wider purchase-job workspace | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | Work with RFQs, quotations, or purchase orders | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs), [Purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations), or [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Continue with MRQ-specific work | [MRQ record follow-up](doc:mrq-record-follow-up) | ## Prerequisites — what must be in place for this to go smoothly **Prerequisites** | Have this ready | Why it matters here | |---|---| | The purchase-job information you want to record | **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, and **Package Title** are required on the shared form. | | The MRQ products you want to add | **MRQ product** opens **Planned orders**, where products are selected for the package. | | An editable record with changes to save | **Save** and **Save and Close** are available when you can edit, there are changes, and a save is not already in progress. | | A record at a stage that permits product selection | **MRQ product** is available through Order, including a Direct Order at Order. | The main record area appears when the purchasing feature is included and the page shows the purchase-job surface rather than the product's not-found page. Save the record before you return to it or use its follow-up surfaces. ## Find or start a purchase job A new purchase job is the blank purchasing surface; a saved purchase job is the record you return to when you need to change its shared information or package items. **Prerequisites** - Have the required purchase-job information ready. - Know whether you are starting a new record or returning to a saved record. **Steps** 1. Open **Purchase Jobs** from the purchasing area. 2. In **Purchase Jobs**, use the table to select the entry that matches your task. | If you need to… | In **Purchase Jobs**, choose… | |---|---| | Start a new purchase job | Select the new purchase-job entry. | | Open a saved purchase job | Select the saved purchase job from the list. | | Start a Direct Order | Select **Direct order** to begin that purchase job. | 3. Confirm that the page shows the purchase-job information surface before entering data. ![Check the shared purchase-job fields, stage labels, and package grid before entering information.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b19fb969e1c652e283faba8ee06f3d84.png) **Result:** You are on a new purchase-job surface or on the saved purchase-job surface. ## Understand the shared information and package area The shared information area identifies the purchase job, while the package-items grid lists the products being prepared for the purchasing flow. The page contains these fields: | Field | What you see | |---|---| | **Branch** | Read-only branch text. | | **Purchaser** | A single-selection picker. The field carries a required marker. | | **Product Type** | A selection field. The field carries a required marker. | | **Package Title** | A text field. The field carries a required marker. | | **Drop shipping** | A check box for the destination type. | The page shows the current stage on the record. The package area is headed **Products** and displays **MRQ product** for product selection. The package grid can show these headers: | Header | Use it to read… | |---|---| | **Item No.** | The item number. | | **Product** | The product row. | | **Category** | The product category. | | **Group** | The product group. | | **MRQ Qty.** | The quantity requested by the MRQ. | | **MRQ type** | The MRQ type. | | **Qty** | The package quantity. | | **Unit** | The quantity unit. | | **Required Receiving Date** | The required receiving date. | | **Job no.** | The related job number. | | **MRQ** | The related MRQ. | | **V.L.** | The short vendor-list indicator. | | **Is limited V.L.** | Whether the item is limited to the short vendor list. | | **Stage** | The product stage. | | **Current vendor** | The current vendor from Order onward. | The new-record surface currently shows `No data` until package items are present. Selecting **MRQ product** opens **Planned orders**. That selection surface can show **MRQ no.**, **Title**, and **Short vendor list**. ![Select an MRQ product from the Planned orders surface.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5bb181ca60b89ef4e3034f4377c81654.png) ## Maintain package items and save the record Maintaining a purchase job means entering its shared information, adding the products that belong in its package, and committing the record-level changes. **Prerequisites** - Open a new or editable purchase-job surface. - Have the purchaser, product type, package title, and MRQ products ready. **Steps** 1. In **Purchaser**, select the person responsible for the purchasing job. 2. In **Product Type**, select the product type for the record. 3. In **Package Title**, enter the package title. 4. Select **Drop shipping** when the purchase job uses that destination type. 5. Select **MRQ product**. 6. In **Planned orders**, select the MRQ product or products to add. 7. Select **OK** to return to the purchase-job surface. 8. Check the package grid for the selected product rows. 9. Select the record-level save action that matches your next move. | If you need to… | Select… | |---|---| | Keep working on the record | **Save** | | Save and leave the record | **Save and Close** | 10. If validation appears, enter the missing values in the fields identified by the displayed validation. 11. If validation appears, select the save action again. ![Correct the required-field validation shown after an incomplete save.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/95f847711316430e77e2839b4005132a.png) **Result:** The record is saved. **Save** keeps the purchase-job surface open, while **Save and Close** leaves it; displayed validation identifies values that still need correction. ## Handle stage and record variations The available package and handoff actions change with the job type and stage shown on the purchase-job surface. A purchase-job stage represents the record's position in the purchasing flow. **Prerequisites** - Check the current stage shown on the record. - Check whether the job is a Direct Order before choosing a handoff action. **Steps** 1. Choose the available package action for the record state. | If the record is… | Choose this option | |---|---| | At or before Order and you need to add an MRQ product | Select **MRQ product**. | | A Direct Order at Order | Select **MRQ product** or **Direct P.O.** when it is shown. | | A non-Direct Order in an eligible creation stage | Select **RFQ** when it is shown. | 2. Read the **Current vendor** column when the record reaches Order. 3. Select the displayed handoff action from the active top action group. The package grid displays **Current vendor** when the record reaches Order. The shared information form shows no **Time Frame for Shipment** or **Status** fields. **Result:** You use the package or handoff action that matches the job type and stage without entering the focused RFQ, quotation, or purchase-order procedure. ## When saving or selecting items goes wrong Use the exact message on screen to identify what to correct or which focused page owns the next action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `This Field Is Required` | A required shared field is empty. | Complete **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, or **Package Title**, then select **Save** again. | | `Saved Successfully` | A new purchase job was saved. | Continue on the saved purchase-job surface. | | `Updated Successfully` | An existing purchase job was updated. | Continue with the updated purchase-job surface. | | `Please choose at least one MRQ` | No MRQ was selected in **Planned orders**. | Select at least one MRQ product before confirming the selection. | | `Please choose at least one product` | No product was selected in a product-selection dialog. | Select a product before confirming the dialog. | | `Please insert at least one product` | The purchase job has no product to save. | Select **MRQ product**, add a product, and select **Save** again. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | The package contains no products. | Add a product with **MRQ product**, then save again. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | A required value in the record or its active items is missing. | Review the required fields and active item data, then select **Save** again. | | `Saving Error` | A new-record save returned an error. | Review the shared information and select **Save** again. | | `Updating Error` | An existing-record update returned an error. | Review the changed information and select **Save** again. | | `404 Page Not Found` | The attempted saved-record route did not open the purchase-job surface. | Return to the purchase-job list and open the saved record from there. | The following messages belong to focused pages rather than this shared-information task: | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Check RFQ mandatory field(s)`; `Please insert at least one RFQ`; `Inquiry must have at least one item`; `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00`; `Required Offer Type`; `Required Bid Due Date` | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | `Offer must have at least one item`; `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value`; `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | [Purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) | | `Check PO mandatory field(s)`; `Please insert at least one PO`; `Order must have at least one item`; `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted`; `Order updated successfully. Undelivered. A draft invoice was deleted`; `Please enter action for each milstone ` | [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | `Product package deleted from all inquiries`; `Product package deleted from all offers`; `Product package deleted from all orders`; `Item(s) Regretted`; `Item(s) Cancelled`; `Item(s) Rejected`; `Item(s) Reactivated`; `Job reactivated successfully` | [Purchase job exception lists](doc:purchase-job-exception-lists) | | `Email sent to client. Added to emails list activity`; `An error occurred while processing your request` | [Purchase job comments, files, and history](doc:purchase-job-comments-files-and-history) | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | [Purchase job work lists](doc:purchase-job-work-lists) | | ` You already have a contact with this name` | [Contact record](doc:contact-record) | | `Your request was completed successfully`; `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | [Purchase job comments, files, and history](doc:purchase-job-comments-files-and-history) | ## Continue after saving the purchase job After a successful new-record save, continue with the saved purchase-job surface. On a saved record, use **Attachment** for attached documents and **Purchase Invoices** for purchase-invoice follow-up. Continue with the wider record in [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record), or choose the focused page for the next purchasing stage: - [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) for RFQ actions. - [Purchase job quotations](doc:purchase-job-quotations) for quotation actions. - [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) for purchase-order actions. - [Create direct purchase order](doc:create-direct-purchase-order) for the Direct P.O. route. - [MRQ record follow-up](doc:mrq-record-follow-up) for MRQ-specific follow-up. - [Purchase job comments, files, and history](doc:purchase-job-comments-files-and-history) for companion record work. After the validation shown above, the new purchase-job surface remains open. The attempted saved-record opening shows `404 Page Not Found`. **Result:** You know whether to continue with the purchase-job record or open the focused page that owns the next purchasing action. # Product categories ## Product categories Product categories is the configuration list for maintaining product-category names and codes. A subcategory is a product category arranged beneath a parent category. Open the Product Categories configuration page to see the `Product Categories` page with **Category** and **Code** columns. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Reach the list and locate a category | [Find product categories](#find-product-categories) | | Identify the fields and available actions | [Understand the category list](#understand-the-category-list) | | Add or change a category | [Create or update a category](#create-or-update-a-category) | | Add a child category | [Create a subcategory](#create-a-subcategory) | | Remove a category | [Delete a category](#delete-a-category) | | Filter or prepare a list export | [Filter or export the list](#filter-or-export-the-list) | | Resolve a blocked action or validation message | [When category maintenance goes wrong](#when-category-maintenance-goes-wrong) | | Continue after maintenance | [What to do next](#what-to-do-next) | ## Before you start You maintain them from the Product Categories configuration page. The list is available when the Product Categories package is included and your account has the permission needed for the action. Prerequisites | Before you start | What you need | | --- | --- | | Page access | Access to the Product Categories configuration page. | | Product Categories package | The package must be included for the category list to appear. | | Create permission | **New** appears when the new permission is available. | | Edit permission | **Add New Sub-Category** and **Edit** are available when edit permission is available. | | Delete permission | The row's **Delete** action is available when delete permission is available. | | Export and import permissions | The corresponding list actions depend on your permissions. | | Existing parent row | Select an existing category before adding a subcategory. | When the package is not included, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the list. The page checks permission levels for new, edit, delete, export, and import actions. After checking these conditions, go to [Find product categories](#find-product-categories). ## Find product categories Use the Product Categories list to locate an existing category before changing or removing it. The page title, **Category** and **Code** columns, and **New** control identify the list when it is available. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - The Product Categories package and the required permission are available. Steps 1. Open the Product Categories configuration page. 2. Check that the page title reads `Product Categories`. 3. Check that the list contains the **Category** column. 4. Check that the list contains the **Code** column. 5. Select the category row you need to maintain. ![Check the Product Categories title and the Category and Code columns.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/583828740bc8daf7c4d203f2229c7f59.png) **Result:** The Product Categories list is open, and the category row is ready for a maintenance action. Continue to [Understand the category list](#understand-the-category-list) before choosing the action. ## Understand the category list The category list arranges parent categories with their subcategories beneath them and provides a category-name column, a product-code column, and an action column. The product-code column appears on the Product Categories page. The same form supplies the fields for both entry types. | Surface | What it contains or does | | --- | --- | | **Category** | Identifies each category or subcategory row. | | **Code** | Shows the product code for the Product Categories page. | | **Product category name** | Required text field for a category. | | **Sub product category name** | Required text field for a subcategory. | | **Product code** | Required text field. Its length is from 1 through 10 characters. | | Action area | Contains **New**, **Add New Sub-Category**, **Edit**, and **Delete** according to permission. | | List toolbar | Provides `Apply filter`, **Export**, and other shared list actions when available. | | Existing-record history | The history area appears when the selected record has an ID. | The category form and subcategory form both require their name and product-code fields on this page. The name fields also use the product's pattern validation. The search panel is not shown, and the action column has no heading of its own. Use [Create or update a category](#create-or-update-a-category) for a category entry, or [Create a subcategory](#create-a-subcategory) for a child entry. ## Create or update a category A category is a named product-category entry with a product code. Use **New** for a new entry or **Edit** to change a saved entry, then save the values in the form. Prerequisites - The Product Categories list is open. - You have the permission for the action you are taking. - You have the category name and product code ready to enter. Steps 1. Choose one route. | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Add a category | Select **New**. | | Change a category | Select **Edit** on the category row. | 2. In **Product category name**, enter the category name. 3. In **Product code**, enter a code from 1 through 10 characters. 4. Select **Save**. 5. Read the validation message and apply the matching correction in the table. | Message | Action | | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | Enter a value in the field named by the message. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters that are not accepted from the field value. | | `Must have maximum 10 letters` | Shorten **Product code** to 10 characters or fewer. | | `Required Field can not be Empty Spaces` | Replace spaces-only text in **Product category name** with a category name. | | `Please Enter the Required Field` | Enter the required category value before saving. | 6. Select **Save** again after correcting the value. After a successful save, the application reports `Data saved Successfully`, refreshes the list, and closes the popup. ![Use the category list as the starting point for a new or existing category.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) **Result:** The category is saved or the corrected form remains ready for another **Save** action. Continue to [Create a subcategory](#create-a-subcategory) when the category needs a child entry. ## Create a subcategory Use the subcategory form to add a child entry beneath an existing parent category. The selected row provides the parent context. Prerequisites - The Product Categories list is open. - An existing parent category row is available. - You have edit permission. Steps 1. On the parent category row, select **Add New Sub-Category**. 2. In **Sub product category name**, enter the subcategory name. 3. Review **Product code** and change it when the parent code is not the code required for the child. 4. Select **Save**. 5. If a validation message appears, correct the field using the message table in [Create or update a category](#create-or-update-a-category). 6. Select **Cancel** when you want to close the form without saving the subcategory. The new subcategory is initialized with the selected row as its parent and with the selected row's product code copied into **Product code**. ![Select the parent category row before opening Add New Sub-Category.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/583828740bc8daf7c4d203f2229c7f59.png) **Result:** The subcategory form closes after **Save**, or it closes without a new subcategory after **Cancel**. Continue to [Delete a category](#delete-a-category) when you need to remove an entry. ## Delete a category Deleting removes the selected category from the list. The delete action is available only when your account has delete permission, and the application asks you to confirm before removal. Prerequisites - The Product Categories list is open. - The row you intend to remove is selected. - You have delete permission. Steps 1. Open the selected row's **Delete** action. 2. Read the confirmation `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose one route. | If you need to… | Action | | --- | --- | | Remove the selected category | Select **Delete**. | | Keep the category | Select **Cancel**. | After a successful deletion, the application reports `Data Deleted Successfully` and refreshes the list. During the request, the loading status reads `Deleting`. **Result:** The category is removed and the list is refreshed, or the category remains unchanged after **Cancel**. Continue to [Filter or export the list](#filter-or-export-the-list) when you need to work with the list. ## Filter or export the list The list toolbar provides a filtering action and an export action when those permissions are available. Use filtering to narrow the visible list, or open the export options when you need a list file. Prerequisites - The Product Categories list is open. - You have export permission for the export action. Steps 1. Apply a list filter with `Apply filter`. 2. Select **Export**. 3. When `Exporting List:` opens, choose the required list export option. 4. Select **Cancel** to close the export options without continuing. The export dialog provides Excel and PDF list options. The product-code column is included in the Product Categories list, while the action column is excluded from export. **Result:** The filtered list remains open, or the export options are closed after **Cancel**. Continue to [When category maintenance goes wrong](#when-category-maintenance-goes-wrong) if a message or unavailable action needs attention. ## When category maintenance goes wrong Use the message or surface you see to choose the next action. The page can block a field, hide an action based on permission, or show the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the list. | What you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `This Field Is Required` | A required field has no value. | Enter a value in the named field and select **Save**. | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | The value contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Remove the unaccepted character and select **Save**. | | `Must have maximum 10 letters` | **Product code** is longer than 10 characters. | Shorten the code and select **Save**. | | `Required Field can not be Empty Spaces` | **Product category name** contains only spaces. | Replace the spaces with a category name and select **Save**. | | `Please Enter the Required Field` | The required category value was not entered. | Enter the value and select **Save**. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The application is waiting for a deletion choice. | Select **Delete** to remove the row or **Cancel** to keep it. | | `Saving...` | The save request is in progress. | Wait for the save result before selecting another action. | | `Deleting` | The delete request is in progress. | Wait for the deletion result before selecting another action. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The save completed. | Continue from the refreshed list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The deletion completed. | Continue from the refreshed list. | | `Data Importing completed` | The import action completed. | Continue from the refreshed configuration list. | | The subscription-upgrade surface appears instead of the list. | The Product Categories package is not included. | Ask an administrator to review the package before maintaining categories. | | **New**, **Edit**, **Add New Sub-Category**, or **Delete** is absent. | The corresponding permission is not available. | Ask an administrator to review your permission for that action. | After resolving the message or access condition, return to [What to do next](#what-to-do-next). ## What to do next After category maintenance, continue from the Product Categories list. A successful save refreshes the list and closes the popup; a successful deletion refreshes the list. The selected parent context is used when you create a subcategory. Steps 1. Check the refreshed list after saving or deleting a category. 2. Select another category when you need to continue maintaining the list. 3. Return to [Create a subcategory](#create-a-subcategory) when you need to add a child under an existing category. **Result:** The Product Categories list is ready for the next category maintenance action. # Subscription invoice details ## Overview A subscription invoice details record is a read-only reference for the customer, contract, subscription, and amounts shown on an invoice. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list of subscription invoices | [Subscription invoices](doc:configuration-subscription-invoices-view) | | Find and open an existing invoice | [Find and open a subscription invoice](#find-and-open-a-subscription-invoice) | | Locate invoice identity, subscription, and totals | [Review the invoice details](#review-the-invoice-details) | | Leave the record | [Leave the details screen](#leave-the-details-screen) | | Resolve a loading problem | [When the invoice cannot be loaded](#when-the-invoice-cannot-be-loaded) | Open **Subscription invoices** to choose an existing invoice and view its details page. ## Prerequisites Before you start, have the list open and an invoice available to select. | Before you start | Why it matters | |---|---| | Open **Subscription invoices** | This is the list entry point for existing subscription invoices. | | Have a selectable invoice row | A row identifies the invoice whose details you will review. | ## Find and open a subscription invoice A subscription-invoice list is the place where you locate an existing invoice before reviewing its details. **Prerequisites** - Open the subscription-invoice list. - Have a selectable invoice row. **Steps** 1. Open **Subscription invoices**. The list columns are: | Column | What it identifies | |---|---| | **Company** | Company associated with the invoice. | | **Invoice date** | Date associated with the invoice. | | **Invoice no.** | Number assigned to the invoice. | | **Total amount** | Invoice total. | | **Subscription** | Plan associated with the invoice. | ![Check the subscription-invoice list headers and list actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/4bee3431db88a3a4f730a86e7264a0dc.png) 2. Select one list action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Refresh the list | **Refresh** | | Change the list layout | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | 3. Select the invoice row you want to review. **Result:** The invoice details page opens when a selectable row is available. ## Review the invoice details The invoice details page presents the invoice identity, subscription line, and amount summary. The invoice identity is arranged in two labelled areas: | Area | Values shown | |---|---| | **Bill to** | Client name, address, city, and country. | | **Details** | **Invoice number**, **Invoice date**, customer information, and domain information. | The subscription line uses these columns: | Column | Value shown | |---|---| | **Subscription** | Plan and domain information. | | **Interval** | Contract start date and contract end date. | | **Amount** | Subscription amount. | The amount summary uses these rows: | Row | Value shown | |---|---| | **Subtotal** | Amount before tax with its currency. | | **Vat** | VAT percentage and VAT amount. | | **Total in currency** | Amount after tax with its currency. | The invoice body appears when the invoice record is loaded. VAT amount is calculated from the VAT percentage and total amount before it is displayed. After reviewing these values, leave the details page. ## Leave the details screen Use the page-header close control after you finish reviewing the invoice. The header also contains **Dwonload**; the **Dwonload** control has no action. **Prerequisites** - Open an invoice details record. **Steps** 1. Select the page-header close control. **Result:** The details page closes and the previous page opens. ## When the invoice cannot be loaded The list can stop before the details page when it has no selectable invoice row. The page displays the request error shown in the table when the invoice request fails. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `No data` and `Count: 0` | The list has no invoice row to open. | Return to the list when an invoice row is available. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The invoice request returned an error. | Select an invoice from the list. | ![Check the empty subscription-invoice list state before selecting a record.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3a1e7ecf13ac301c2e26fe8a7a01c4e3.png) When an invoice row is available, select it to open the details page. ## What to do next Invoice information is for review only; you cannot edit, save, delete, or advance the invoice here. Continue with [Subscription invoices](doc:configuration-subscription-invoices-view) when you need to choose another invoice. # Upcoming stock ## Upcoming stock Upcoming stock is the Inventory destination for reviewing products as they move from receipt through inspection and toward storage. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Choose the warehouse queue | [Find the Upcoming stock list](#find-the-upcoming-stock-list) | | Read the columns and toolbar | [Read the Upcoming stock list](#read-the-upcoming-stock-list) | | Review both queue routes | [Choose the queue to review](#choose-the-queue-to-review) | | Handle a stocking action | [Handle the conditional Stock product action](#handle-the-conditional-stock-product-action) | | Continue from receipt work | [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes) | | Continue from inspection work | [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes) | | Review Quality Control work | [QC](doc:qc) | | Review another stock view | [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment) | The page provides two queues: **Awaiting Inspection** and **Awaiting Storage**. **Awaiting Inspection** is the received-but-not-inspected list. **Awaiting Storage** is the Quality-Control-released list. ![The Upcoming stock heading, queue choices, toolbar controls, and list headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/527faa5b47f15ceb48ca06b927dd10c0.png) ## Before you start Your access, saved list layout, and available rows determine what appears on Upcoming stock and which controls are available for each row. Prerequisites - Have access to the Inventory area. - Open **Inventory** > **Upcoming stock**. - Use a row whose product is eligible for stocking when you need the **Stock product** action. - Have the storage area and position ready before you save stocking details. The list requires a saved layout selection before its grid appears. If the subscription does not include this surface, the page follows its subscription branch instead of showing the list. The stocking action also requires a row that meets the product's stocking condition. ## Find the Upcoming stock list Reach the Inventory destination, then choose the queue that contains the products you need to review. Prerequisites - Have access to the Inventory area. Steps 1. Open the Inventory area. 2. Select **Upcoming stock**. 3. Select the queue that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Review products awaiting inspection | **Awaiting Inspection** | | Review products awaiting storage | **Awaiting Storage** | **Result:** The selected Upcoming stock queue is open. ## Read the Upcoming stock list The Upcoming stock list shows warehouse rows with receipt, quantity, unit, stage, and inspection references. The visible list uses these headers: | Header | What to use it for | |---|---| | **Sales job no.** | Identify the related sales job. | | **Product** | Identify the product. | | **Description** | Read the product description. | | **Area** | Read the displayed area. | | **Position** | Read the displayed position. | | **P.O.s** | Read the purchase-order reference. | | **Received Qty** | Read the received quantity. | | **Accepted qty** | Read the accepted quantity. | | **Rejected qty** | Read the rejected quantity. | | **Unit** | Read the quantity unit. | | **Stage** | Read the current displayed stage. | | **GRN** | Read the goods-receipt reference. | | **Inspection No.** | Read the inspection reference. | The list also presents the toolbar controls **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings**. When your saved layout includes **Table Layout** choices, use the headers and rows currently visible in your list because the saved layout changes which columns are shown. ## Choose the queue to review Compare the inspection and storage queues by selecting each queue and reviewing its list. Prerequisites - Have the Upcoming stock list open. Steps 1. Select the queue that matches the work you need to review. | If you need to… | Select | Destination | |---|---|---| | Review products awaiting inspection | **Awaiting Inspection** | Upcoming stock list | | Review products awaiting storage | **Awaiting Storage** | Awaiting Storage list | 2. Review the list headers and rows. ![The Awaiting Inspection queue and its list headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/251836856aec85e7015dc6dbb04e430e.png) ![The Awaiting Storage queue and its list headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fde36e26af2002abd9b7677a117a177e.png) **Result:** The queue matching the warehouse stage is open, with its list headers and rows available for review. ## Handle the conditional Stock product action Select **Stock product** to assign an eligible product to storage. The control appears only for eligible rows. The row must have a receiving shipment, an inspection, and a release to Inventory, and it must have no rejected quantity before **Stock product** is rendered. Prerequisites - Have an eligible row in the Upcoming stock list. - Have the storage area and position to enter. The stocking details use **Areas**, **Position**, **Stocked By**, and **Stocked On**. The storage destination is selected through **Areas** and **Position**. **Stock Type** uses these choices: `Available for sale`, `Received for PM`, `Rejected`, `Maintenance`, and `Reserved for PM`. The available **Areas**, **Stocked By**, and **In Stock** entries depend on the current list data. Selecting **Stock product** opens the **Product assignment certificate** popup. The popup requires **Position**. The popup uses **OK** to submit the stocking entry. When the entry saves, Upcoming stock refreshes and the popup closes. Steps 1. In an eligible row, select **Stock product**. 2. Enter or select the storage area in **Areas**. 3. Enter the storage position in **Position**. Before submission, choose one outcome: | If you want to… | Select | Outcome | |---|---|---| | Save the stocking entry | **OK** | Upcoming stock refreshes and the popup closes. | | Cancel without saving | **Don't Save** | The popup closes without saving. | 4. Select the control that matches your chosen outcome. ![The row list where the Stock product action can be checked](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/527faa5b47f15ceb48ca06b927dd10c0.png) ![The stocking popup after selecting Stock product](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0d7498fcf3f8a602a0bf3878663ab4c9.png) ![The Product, Areas, Position, and stocking fields](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0d7498fcf3f8a602a0bf3878663ab4c9.png) **Result:** Selecting **OK** saves the stocking entry, refreshes Upcoming stock, and closes the popup. Selecting **Don't Save** closes the popup without saving. ## When the list or action does not work Use the message text below to correct the stocking entry or identify the owning warehouse flow. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | The request completed successfully. | Continue with the updated warehouse work. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | The request could not be processed. | Check the values in the stocking form and try the action again. | | `Please enter the storage area and position for each product` | A product lacks a storage area or position. | Complete **Areas** and **Position** for each product. | | `Position is required` | A required position is empty. | Enter a value in **Position**. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | The product package has no products. | Return to the product details and add the required product before saving. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The entered value contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character and retry the action. | If PAMS displays `Please enter the storage area and position for each product`, enter a **Position** before selecting **OK** again. If **Stock product** is not available on a row, review another row in the queue. The action depends on the product's eligibility. Messages for receiving-shipment, inspection, shared-file, and amendment-order work belong to their owning flows: [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes), [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes), and [Libraries](doc:libraries-files). **Result:** You have either corrected the displayed stocking message or identified the warehouse flow that owns the message. ## What comes next After reviewing **Awaiting Inspection**, continue with [Incoming inspection notes](doc:incoming-inspection-notes). After reviewing **Awaiting Storage**, continue with [QC](doc:qc) when the next task concerns quality-control release. For receipt work, use [Goods receipt notes](doc:goods-receipt-notes). For another stock view, use [Stock by shipment](doc:stock-by-shipment). The detail surface can also lead to **Comments**, **Receiving sheet**, **Inspection sheet**, **Transfer history**, and **Last Modifications** when warehouse details have an ID. # Create a sales job ## Overview A sales job records commercial work as it moves from an early opportunity through inquiry, offer, order, and delivery. Create one when you need a record for a new piece of sales work; open an existing one when you need to continue work already recorded. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Start a new sales job | [Enter the main job information](#enter-the-main-job-information) | | Check which parts of the form apply | [Understand the sales-job form](#understand-the-sales-job-form) | | Add customer, inquiry, or item details | [Complete the applicable stage details and items](#complete-the-applicable-stage-details-and-items) | | Save the completed form | [Save the sales job and handle validation](#save-the-sales-job-and-handle-validation) | | Continue the saved work | [Continue with the sales-job lifecycle](#continue-with-the-sales-job-lifecycle) | | Read the stage flow | [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Locate an existing row | [Find sales-job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) | | Compare the available creation routes | [Sales-job variants](doc:sales-job-variants) | The sales-job stages are **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Offers**, and **Orders**. Work can also leave the main path through missed, regretted, cancelled, lost, rejected, or deleted outcomes. ```mermaid flowchart LR P[Potentials] --> I[Inquiries] I --> O[Offers] O --> R[Orders] R --> D[completion] I --> X[Missed / regretted / cancelled] O --> Y[Lost / regretted / cancelled] R --> Z[Rejected / cancelled] ``` ## Prerequisites — what must be in place for this to go smoothly Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters | |---|---| | The customer and vendor for the job | These parties are selected in **Client** and **Vendor** when the applicable stage details are completed. | | The job title and product type | They identify the commercial work in the form and in later list views. | | The inquiry number, inquiry date, bid due date, and requested offer type when the route asks for them | These values describe the request that the job tracks. | | The item description, unit, and quantity | These values define what the job concerns and are checked before saving. | | Permission to edit the job and belong to the relevant branch | Edit actions are limited by the job's edit and branch rules. | | A saved record with no unsaved panel changes for later stage actions | Several later actions require an existing job and a saved panel. | Some fields are required only where your company configures them. The same applies to some embedded panels and list columns. Use the fields and headers that appear in your form and list layout. > Important: Check the required marker on the field in front of you. A field can > be required on one configured form and optional on another. ## Find or open a sales job A sales-job route is the place where you either start a new record or continue with an existing row. To create a new record, use the standard new-job option in the Sales jobs entry surface. Prerequisites - You know whether you are creating a new record or continuing an existing one. - For an existing record, you know enough identifying information to recognize its row. Steps 1. Open the standard new-job form to create a standard sales job. 2. Open [Sales-job variants](doc:sales-job-variants) to choose a potential, direct order, or instant-job route. 3. Open [Find sales-job work](doc:find-sales-job-work) to continue with an existing sales job. 4. If the sales-job list is already open, use the visible stage tabs and column headers to identify the row instead of relying on a fixed column arrangement. 5. Select the row you need when the list presents it. **Result:** You are on the new sales-job form or have identified the existing sales job to open. ![Check the stage controls, form fields, item headers, and Save buttons on a new sales-job form.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/72ba55f4a1135c1ec6a13cdba04da7f6.png) ## Understand the sales-job form The sales-job form brings the job's identity, stage details, items, and related work together. The current form displays the stage controls followed by the job fields and an item grid. Use the stage row to choose a stage, the job fields to identify the work, and the item grid to enter the products or services included in the job. | Area | Fields | |---|---| | Job identity | **Status**, **Branch**, **Salesperson Responsible**, **Product Type**, **Job Title**, **End User**, **Estimated Value**, **File Number**, **Expected Order Date** | | Parties and inquiry | **Client**, **Vendor**, and applicable inquiry fields | | Assessment | **Contact to Decision Makers**, **Budget Availability**, **Chance in Competition**, **Order chance** | | Item grid | **Item Description**, **Unit**, **Qty** | The form also displays the readouts **Time Frame**, In Branch Currency (Rate:1), and **Calculated Rating** when they apply. The item grid currently shows the headers **Item Description**, **Unit**, and **Qty**. The form can include leads, inquiries, offers, orders, comments, tasks, activities, files, contacts, invoices, payments, letters of guaranties, purchasing, job costing, references, and customer survey areas. A panel or tab appears only when its stage, record, feature access, or user role permits it. Related-work guidance is in [Sales-job comments and tasks](doc:sales-job-comments-and-tasks), [Sales-job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files), and [Sales-job contacts, guarantees, and history](doc:sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history). The form also contains **Save** and **Save and Close**. The Team field is not part of the available form, and **Category** is not an item-grid header. ## Enter the main job information The main information identifies the work, the parties responsible for it, and the commercial assessment that accompanies it. Prerequisites - You are on the standard new-job form or on a permitted editable sales-job form. - You have the job title, product type, customer, vendor, and any available dates or commercial assessment information. Steps 1. In **Branch**, review the branch shown for the job. 2. In **Salesperson Responsible**, select the person responsible for the sales job. 3. In **Product Type**, select the option that describes the job. **Product Type** presents product-name options, and each option has an identifier. 4. In **Job Title**, enter the title used to recognize the job. 5. In **End User**, select the end user when the field is available. 6. In **Estimated Value**, enter the estimated value when it is available. 7. In **File Number**, enter the file number when you use one. 8. In **Expected Order Date**, enter the expected date when it is available. 9. In **Client**, select the company the request came from. 10. In **Vendor**, select the vendor connected with the job when the applicable stage requires one. 11. Complete the assessment fields that apply. | If you need to record… | Use | |---|---| | The people who decide | **Contact to Decision Makers** | | The customer's budget position | **Budget Availability** | | The competitive position | **Chance in Competition** | | The likelihood of an order | **Order chance** | | A stage-specific status | **Status** | 12. In **Order chance**, choose a value when the field appears: `90 %`, `70 %`, `50 %`, `30 %`, or `10 %`. 13. Review the required markers before moving to the stage details. **Result:** The identifying, party, date, and assessment information is entered on the sales-job form. ## Complete the applicable stage details and items Stage details describe the request, offer, or order represented by the job. Item rows describe the products or services included in that stage. Prerequisites - The main job information is entered. - You know which stage details apply to the selected route. - You have each item's description, unit, and quantity. Steps 1. In the inquiry details, complete the fields that apply. | Information to record | Field | |---|---| | The customer's inquiry reference | The applicable inquiry field | | The date of the inquiry | The applicable inquiry field | | The date by which the bid is due | The applicable inquiry field | | The requested offer format | The applicable inquiry field | 2. In the item grid, enter the item description in **Item Description**. 3. Select the matching unit in **Unit**. 4. Enter the quantity in **Qty**. 5. Review the applicable offer or order panel before saving. | Panel | Use it for | |---|---| | Inquiry details | Request and bid information | | Offer details | Offer information and offer-stage work | | Order details | Order information and order-stage work | 6. Correct the item row if **This field is required ** appears. 7. In **Qty**, enter a value greater than zero and no greater than the displayed limit if `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` appears. **Result:** **Qty** contains a value greater than zero and no greater than the displayed limit. 8. Select the affected price or tax entry in the applicable offer or order grid and correct it if `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` appears. **Result:** The affected price or tax value is non-negative. **Result:** The applicable inquiry, offer, or order information and item rows are ready for validation. ![Review the required main fields, inquiry fields, and item grid before saving.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5ce84428101bdf92bb4336509d3ad240.png) ## Save the sales job and handle validation Saving validates the form before it commits the job. **Save** keeps the form in the current work area; **Save and Close** is the alternate save control shown on the form. Prerequisites - The applicable fields and item rows are complete. - You have checked the required markers. - You are not trying to trigger an embedded activity, purchasing, email, or other related workflow from this page. Steps 1. Select **Save**. 2. Inspect the message on screen and select the corrective action in this table. | Message | Corrective action | |---|---| | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the fields with required markers. | | `One or more items has ZERO quantity` | Enter a quantity greater than zero in **Qty**. | | `One or more items has no unit` | Select a value in **Unit**. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Correct the fields you changed and select **Save** again. | | `Error saving custom fields` | Select **Save** again after reviewing the configured fields. | | `An account with this name already exists` | Use the existing account rather than creating a duplicate. | | `A project with this name already exists` | Use the existing project rather than creating a duplicate. | | `Please save opened inquiry first (owning page: Sales-job lifecycle)` | Save the open inquiry before continuing with the sales job. | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential (owning page: Sales-job lifecycle)` | Keep the inquiry in draft before returning to the potential stage. | | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Continue from the invoice state rather than attempting to reverse delivery here. | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Return the offer to draft before returning to inquiry. | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Use the text substituted for `{{errorMsg}}` to correct the affected entry. | | `This field is required ` | Complete the item field identified by the validation marker. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Correct the quantity in **Qty**. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Correct the affected price or tax value in the applicable grid. | | `Custom fields saved successfully` | Continue with the next available sales-job action. | | `Job updated successfully` | Continue with the updated sales job. | | `Job deleted successfully` | Follow [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) for the resulting job state. | | `Job regretted successfully` | Follow [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) for the resulting job state. | | `Job cancelled successfully` | Follow [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) for the resulting job state. | | `Job missed successfully` | Follow [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) for the resulting job state. | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Continue with the reactivated sales job. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | Continue in [Offers](doc:offers). | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Continue in [Inquiries](doc:inquiries). | | `Converted To Regretted` | Follow [Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs). | | `Converted to cancelled` | Follow [Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs). | | `Converted to lost` | Follow [Missed, regretted, and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs). | | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Please save opened inquiry first (owning page: Sales-job lifecycle)` | Sales-job lifecycle | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential (owning page: Sales-job lifecycle)` | Sales-job lifecycle | **Result:** You have identified the correction or next page for the message shown. 3. Read the message in the following table and follow its stated correction on the named owning page. | Message | Owning page | Exact source | |---|---|---| | `Cannot be un-delivered — a due invoice already exists` | Sales-job lifecycle | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:42964` | | `All offers must be in draft status to revert to inquiry` | Sales-job lifecycle | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:42968` | | `Error {{errorMsg}}` | Sales-job lifecycle | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:42972` | | `An account with this name already exists` | Sales-job lifecycle | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:42976` | | `A project with this name already exists` | Sales-job lifecycle | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:42980` | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Sales offer | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:54577` | | `Please save opened cost sheet first` | Sales offer | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:54581` | | `There is a maximum discount that exceeds the negotiation margin.` | Cost calculation | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:55749` | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Account details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:57428` | | `Error: Vendor not saved yet` | Account details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:57442` | | `Error: Client not saved yet` | Account details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:57446` | | `This Field Is Required` | Account details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:57450` | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Contacts | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:61543` | | ` You already have a contact with this name` | Contact details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:62064` | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Files | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:62920` | | `Sales order is archived` | Bill of materials | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:68711` | | `Booked quantity for this job is greater than the required BOM quantity` | Bill of materials | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:68715` | | `You cannot edit or delete the product after the purchase package is created` | Bill of materials | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:68719` | | `Cannot be deleted. Product is in purchasing` | Bill of materials | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:68723` | | `You cannot edit the product after the PO is created` | Bill of materials | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:68727` | | `This product is already included in BOM` | Products list | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:69655` | | `The first variant cannot be deleted` | Product details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:70074` | | `An error occurred while connecting to your CRM system.` | Product details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:70078` | | `Please select one product` | Product details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:70082` | | ` Package must have at least one item` | MRQ details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:71885` | | `You cannot save without adding at least one product` | MRQ details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:71893` | | `One of products has no quantity` | MRQ details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:71897` | | `Action not allowed` | Activities | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:74823` | | `Check validation` | Principal invoices | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:77784` | | `No remaining items. All items have been selected` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81745` | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81753` | | `Please enter at least one email` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81757` | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81761` | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81765` | | `Order must have at least one item` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81769` | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81773` | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Purchasing | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:81781` | | `Error loading accounts` | Deliveries and orders | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:90933` | | `Serial you have entered already exist and belong to same manufacturer` | Reference details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:92082` | | `There is error in serial you have entered` | Reference details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:92086` | | `Minimum: At least one serial` | Reference details | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:92094` | | `You don’t have permission` | Letters of guaranties | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:94558` | | `LG still needs confirmation` | Letters of guaranties | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:94562` | | `LG has one or more extensions or deductions and cannot be reverted to the requested stage` | Letters of guaranties | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:94566` | | `Please choose a date after the current expiry date` | Letters of guaranties | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:94570` | | ` There is a pending increase you can edit` | Letters of guaranties | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:94574` | | `One topic and at least one note is required` | New activity | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:97968` | | `There is no topic to print` | New activity | `runs/pams-sales-jobs/facts/facts-screen-create-sales-job-1.json:97972` | | `Required Receiving Date` | MRQ details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1175` | | `Required Receiving After` | MRQ details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1176` | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Sales offer and order item grids | `Frontend/src/app/components/sales/new-job/offer-panel-details/offer-panel-details.component.ts:427` | | `Please save opened inquiry first` | Inquiry editing | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:253` | | `All inquiries must be in draft stage to revert to potential` | Potential conversion | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:2211` | | `Required Offer Type` | Inquiry details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1130` | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Inquiry details | `Frontend/src/assets/i18n/en.json:1129` | **Result:** You know which page owns an embedded-area message. **Result:** The form has been submitted for validation. ## Continue with the sales-job lifecycle The saved job continues through the sales-job lifecycle. Read [Sales job lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) for the stage flow. Read [Sales-job record](doc:sales-job-record) for the workspace after you open a row. Steps 1. Use the stage shown on the sales-job form to identify whether the work is in **Potentials**, **Inquiries**, **Offers**, **Orders**, or the final stage. 2. Open [Sales-job information and assessment](doc:sales-job-information-and-assessment) when you need field-level guidance for the job information or assessment. 3. Open [Sales-job items](doc:sales-job-items) when you need detailed item-grid guidance. 4. Open [Sales-job comments and tasks](doc:sales-job-comments-and-tasks) for related comments and tasks. 5. Open [Sales-job activities and files](doc:sales-job-activities-and-files) for activities and attachments. 6. Open [Sales-job contacts, guarantees, and history](doc:sales-job-contacts-guarantees-and-history) for contacts, guarantees, and history. **Result:** You know which sales-job page owns the next stage or related workspace activity. # Manage purchase job RFQs ## What a purchase-job RFQ is A purchase-job RFQ is a saved request that records what you need from a sub-supplier before you work with the supplier's response. You create the RFQ from the purchase job, send it or record that it was submitted, receive the response, and continue the record into the next purchasing stage. The record uses these stages for the work covered here: | Stage | Use it when you need to… | | --- | --- | | Inquiry | Create or manage the RFQ sent to a sub-supplier. | | Offer | Work with the supplier response after **Receive Offer**. | | Order | Continue with the purchasing order after a valid offer. | The RFQ page covers the request and its handover. The [Purchase-job quotations](purchase-job-quotations.md) page owns offer-stage work, and the [Purchase-job orders](purchase-job-orders.md) page owns order-stage work. | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Find an existing RFQ | Find and open an RFQ | | Enter or correct request details | Create and correct an RFQ | | Send the request or record submission | Send or record submission and receive the offer | | Mark an RFQ closed, regretted, or deleted | Correct or close an RFQ | | Resolve a validation message | When an RFQ action fails | | Continue with supplier-response work | Purchase-job quotations | | Continue with order work | Purchase-job orders | ## Before you start An RFQ action is available only when the purchase job, its stage, and the RFQ state satisfy that action's conditions. Have the request details and item rows ready before you begin; a saved RFQ is required for submission and later state actions. | Have or confirm | Why it matters | | --- | --- | | A saved purchase job | The RFQ action requires a saved purchase job. | | Permission to edit the record | **Save**, submission, correction, and closure controls use the record's edit permission. | | The sub-supplier | The RFQ submission controls are tied to the sub-supplier response. | | The package title | **Package Title** identifies the purchasing package on the record. | | The shipment time frame | **Shipment Time Frame** is available before the Order stage and may be required by your company configuration. | | The requested items and quantities | The item grid requires an **Item Description** and accepts a quantity from 1 through 999,999. | | The request details | **Offer Type** and **Bid Due Date** are required RFQ information when those fields are shown. | The record must be in a stage that exposes the action you need. For example, the RFQ action requires a saved job that is not in the completed or Deleted state; submission actions require an editable inquiry; and receipt actions require an eligible inquiry or order state. A field marked as configurable is required only where your company configures it. ## Find and open an RFQ The RFQ list is where you identify a saved purchase-job request before opening its record. Prerequisites - You know which saved purchase job you need to work on. Steps 1. In **Purchasing**, select **RFQs**. 2. In the RFQ list, locate the record using **Purchasing no.**, **MRQ no.**, **Purchaser**, **Job stage**, **Package title**, **Required receiving date**, or **Supplier**. 3. Select the row for the RFQ you need to manage. ![Use the RFQ list headers to identify the purchase job before opening it.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9dfcf2929b42a7af12c6e6525bc29048.png) The list also provides **All**, **Quotations**, purchase orders, **Archived**, and **MRQs** for choosing the purchasing list that matches the work you need to do. Use **Refresh** to reload the list, **Table Layout** to change the visible list layout, or **Settings** to open the list settings. **Result:** The selected RFQ record opens for the next action. ## Understand the RFQ record The RFQ record combines request information, item rows, supplier-response data, and stage actions so that the request and its response stay together. | Information | What you use it for | | --- | --- | | **Package Title** | Identify the purchasing package. | | **Shipment Time Frame** | Record the requested shipment period before the Order stage. | | **Sub-supplier** | Identify the supplier connected to the RFQ response. | | **Offer No.**, **Offer Type**, and **Offer Date** | Record the supplier's offer details. | | **Delivery Time** and **Delivery Term** | Record the supplier's delivery commitment. | | **Item Description** | Identify the product or package item. This item value is required. | | **Unit** | Record the unit used for the item quantity. | | **Qty** | Record the requested quantity. Values must be from 1 through 999,999. | | **Regret Reason** and **Regret Date** | Complete the regret action when that branch is available. | | **Cancellation Reason** and **Cancellation Date** | Complete the cancellation action when that branch is available. | | **Reject Date** and **Comment** | Complete the rejection or correction dialog when that branch is available. | | **Received On** | Record the received date when the received branch is available. | The record has 96 controls. Some fields are required only where your company configuration makes them required. The item list can also contain columns selected by the saved layout, so work from the headers visible in your list. The item list includes **Unit** and **Qty** when those columns are shown. **Result:** You can match the requested data, the supplier response, and the available stage action before choosing what to do next. Enter or correct the request in the next section. ## Create and correct an RFQ Creating an RFQ records the request that a sub-supplier must answer. Correct the request before submission because later actions depend on the saved item and quantity data. Prerequisites - You have opened the purchase job and can edit it. - You have the package title, request details, item descriptions, units, and quantities. Steps 1. In the purchase-job record, select **RFQ**. 2. Enter the request name in **Package Title**. 3. Enter the requested period in **Shipment Time Frame** when that field is shown. 4. Add the item description in **Item Description**. 5. Enter the item quantity in **Qty**. 6. Choose how to save the RFQ. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Keep the RFQ open | **Save** | | Save the RFQ and leave the record | **Save and Close** | Use the following correction when a value is rejected: | Message | Correction | | --- | --- | | `This field is required ` | Enter the field value before saving. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a quantity from 1 through 999,999. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Replace the negative value with zero or a positive value. | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | Enter a tax rate from 0 through 100. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the fields marked as required, then save again. | | `Please insert at least one RFQ` | Add an RFQ before continuing the purchasing operation. | | `Please insert at least one product` | Add at least one product to the package. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Add a product to the package before saving or continuing. | **Result:** The RFQ remains open after **Save**, or the record closes after **Save and Close**. Continue to the submission actions when the RFQ has the required supplier and item information, the record is editable, and its current stage exposes the action. ## Send or record submission and receive the offer Submission actions record how the RFQ moves from request preparation to supplier response. Choose the action that matches the RFQ state shown on the record. Prerequisites - The RFQ is saved. - The RFQ has the sub-supplier and item information required by your setup. - The record is editable and its current stage exposes the action. Steps 1. Open the action menu beside the RFQ's **Sub-supplier** entry. 2. Choose one action from this table. | If you need to… | Select | | --- | --- | | Send the RFQ to the supplier | **Send RFQ To Sub-supplier** | | Record that the RFQ was submitted without sending it from this action | **Consider RFQ As Submitted To Sub-supplier** | | Send the RFQ again | **Re-send RFQ To Sub-supplier** | | Return a submitted RFQ to its not-submitted state | **Consider RFQ As Not Submitted** | | Record that a supplier response was received | **Receive Offer** | 3. If you need to download the request, select **RFQ template**. 4. If you need to print the request, select **Print**. 5. If you selected **Receive Offer**, continue with the offer-stage work in [Purchase-job quotations](purchase-job-quotations.md). **Result:** The RFQ shows the submission or response state selected for its current stage, or the offer-stage record opens for the next purchasing task. ## Correct or close an RFQ Closing an RFQ records why the request stopped or was reversed. Use the branch that matches the current RFQ state instead of deleting a record that already has supplier activity. Prerequisites - The RFQ is saved and editable. - The RFQ state exposes the correction or closure action. - You have the reason, date, and comment needed by the dialog. Steps 1. Open the RFQ action menu beside the current RFQ entry. 2. Select the action that matches the state. | If the RFQ is… | Select | | --- | --- | | Ready to be cancelled | **Cancel RFQ** | | Already cancelled and needs restoring | **Consider RFQ As Not Cancelled** | | Ready to be regretted | **Regretted To Offer** | | Regretted and ready to restore | **Consider As Not Regretted** | | Ready for editing | **Enable Editing** | | Eligible for deletion | **Delete RFQ** | | An offer that must return to RFQ work | **Back to RFQ** | 3. Complete the fields for the selected branch. | If you selected… | Enter… | | --- | --- | | ready to be regretted | **Regret Reason**, **Regret Date**, and **Comment** | | **Cancel RFQ** | **Cancellation Reason**, **Cancellation Date**, and **Comment** | | **Rejected Offer** | **Reject Date** and **Comment** | The product also reports deletion outcomes that apply to shipment-ready or completed items: `Product package deleted from all inquiries`, `Product package deleted from all offers`, and `Product package deleted from all orders`. The remaining messages describe package deletion from the corresponding purchasing stage. The RFQ action can also report these completed branches: | Message | Meaning | | --- | --- | | `Item(s) Regretted` | The RFQ item was regretted. | | `Item(s) Cancelled` | The RFQ item was cancelled. | | `Item(s) Rejected` | The RFQ item was rejected. | | `Item(s) Reactivated` | The RFQ item was reactivated. | **Result:** The RFQ is cancelled, restored, regretted, rejected, returned to RFQ work, or deleted according to the selected branch. If a message appears, use the matching correction in the next section. ## When an RFQ action fails Use the exact message on screen to identify the correction. The same record can also expose validation for inquiry, offer, order, package, and branch actions. | Message | What to do | | --- | --- | | `This field is required ` | Complete the field marked as required. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a quantity from 1 through 999,999. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | Enter a tax rate from 0 through 100. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields and try the action again. | | `Check RFQ mandatory field(s)` | Complete the RFQ fields marked as required and try the action again. | | `Required Offer Type` | Complete **Offer Type** before continuing. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | Complete **Bid Due Date** before continuing. | | `Please insert at least one PO` | Add a purchase order before continuing the order operation. | | `Please insert at least one RFQ` | Add an RFQ before continuing the purchasing operation. | | `Please insert at least one product` | Add a product to the package. | | `Please select one or more items to create a RFQ.` | Select at least one item before creating the RFQ. | | `Package must have at least one item` | Add an item to the package. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add an item to the inquiry. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add an item to the offer. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add an item to the order. | | `No remaining items. All items have been selected` | Continue with the selected items or change the selection. | | `This action is only allowed if you belong to that branch` | Use a record belonging to a branch you belong to. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the record and try the action again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the value. | | `Your request was completed successfully` | Continue after the completed operation. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Keep shipment-ready or completed items in the record. | | `Product package deleted from all inquiries` | The product package was deleted from inquiries. | | `Product package deleted from all offers` | The product package was deleted from offers. | | `Product package deleted from all orders` | The product package was deleted from orders. | ### Out of scope — Libraries and files, contact editing, and payment milestone editing These messages belong to related operations: | Message | Owning page | | --- | --- | | `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted` | Libraries and files | | `You already have a contact with this name` | Contact editing | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Payment milestone editing | | `Please enter at least one email` | Email activity | **Result:** You have either corrected the value named by the message or have the exact message ready when requesting help. ## Continue after the RFQ The RFQ hands the purchasing work to the stage that matches the result. An inquiry can become an offer after supplier-response work; order work continues after the valid offer is converted. | Result | Continue with | | --- | --- | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | Return to RFQ inquiry work. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | [Purchase-job quotations](purchase-job-quotations.md) | | `Job reactivated successfully` | Continue the reopened RFQ branch. | | `Order updated successfully. Undelivered. A draft invoice was deleted` | Continue order work in [Purchase-job orders](purchase-job-orders.md). | The quotation page owns offer validation, conversion, alternatives, revisions, and returns. The order page owns approval, award, receipt, and order-stage work. **Result:** You know which purchasing page owns the next stage after the RFQ. # Offer status ## Overview Offer Status is the company reference list for the statuses that can be assigned to sales offers. Maintain its names and order in the sales configuration area so the list used for offers matches the way your company describes its work. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | understand the list and its fields | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | add, change, or remove a status | [Maintain Offer Status entries](#maintain-offer-status-entries) | | use the list tools or handle access variations | [Use list tools and handle access variations](#use-list-tools-and-handle-access-variations) | | resolve a validation or deletion message | [When an Offer Status operation goes wrong](#when-an-offer-status-operation-goes-wrong) | | maintain another sales reference list | [Order status](doc:configuration-sales-order-status), [Inquiry status](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-status), [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons), or [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | ## Before you start **Prerequisites** - You have access to the configuration area and the Offer Status list. - Your subscription includes this configuration area. When it does not, the page shows the subscription-upgrade surface instead of the list. - To add an entry, **New** must be available. To change an entry, an edit control must be available on the intended row. To remove an entry, a delete control must be available on the intended row. - Have the status name ready before you open the add form. The form contains one visible field, **Name**. - The list layout can determine which columns appear, so work from the column headers you can see on your screen. The page can keep a status only when its validation group is valid. Deleting is available only when more than one row exists; the page keeps at least one item in the list. > **Important:** Keep at least one status in the list. The page blocks deletion when it would leave > the list empty. ## Find the Offer Status list Use the shared configuration screen to reach this sales reference list. The same screen exposes sibling lists, so check the page title and selected list name before you change a value. **Prerequisites** - You can open the configuration area. **Steps** 1. Open **General settings** from the configuration menu. 2. Select **Offer Status** from the sales reference-list choices. 3. Check that the page title says **Offer Status**. 4. Check that the list contains the **Name** column. 5. Check the selected sibling list before changing an entry. ![Check the Offer Status title, sibling list names, and Name column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) The list can show **No data** when no rows are available. If navigation returns you to the sign-in surface, use this alternative: **Steps** 1. Complete the sign-in recovery and reopen the list: | Action | Control | |---|---| | Enter your address | **Email** | | Enter your password | **Password** | | Sign in | **Login** | | Open the configuration list | **General settings** | | Select the list | **Offer Status** | **Result:** The Offer Status list opens after sign-in. **Result:** You are on the Offer Status list and can distinguish it from the neighbouring sales reference lists. ## Understand the list and form The list holds the company’s status names, and its add/edit form contains the one visible value you maintain: **Name**. | Area | What you use | What to expect | |---|---|---| | List | **Name** | Visible text column; filtering is enabled and sorting and editing are disabled. | | List | `DisplayOrder` | Hidden ordering value. | | List | `OfferStatusID` | Hidden identifier value. | | List | `CompanyID` | Hidden company value. | | Add/edit form | **Name** | Text box and first form field; its required marker follows the configured column rule. | | Grid | Column headers, paging, built-in add, update, delete, and column chooser | These list features are disabled; use **New**, the edit control, or the delete control instead. | The visible column set depends on the list setup available to your company. Use the headers you see rather than looking for hidden identifiers. The form includes no other visible Offer Status field. ![Look at the New Offer Status dialog and its Name field.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/56be18684d099940a2aa2176d63905eb.png) ## Maintain Offer Status entries Add a value when the list needs a new status, edit its name when the wording changes, or delete it when it is no longer needed. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Offer Status list. - For an add, **New** is available. - For an edit, an edit control is available on the intended row. - For a delete, a delete control is available on the intended row and the list contains more than one row. **Steps** 1. Choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | add a status | **New** | | edit a status | the edit control in the intended row | | start removing a status | the delete control in the intended row | 2. For an add or edit, enter the status name in **Name**. 3. For an add or edit, select **OK** in the form header. 4. When `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` appears, choose one action: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | keep the row | **Cancel** | | remove the row | **Delete** | The add dialog is titled `New Offer Status` and displays **Name**. Its submit control is **OK**. ![Check the New Offer Status title, Name field, and OK control.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c4889599083cb502b0b77306fad65d81.png) The form checks the configured required rule before sending a save request. Correct any message shown for the field before trying again. After a successful add, the page shows `Data saved Successfully`. After a successful edit, it shows `Data updated Successfully`. After a successful deletion, it shows `Data Deleted Successfully`. **Result:** The selected add, edit, or delete action is complete when its corresponding result message appears and the list returns to its updated state. ## Use list tools and handle access variations The shared configuration screen changes its available actions according to access, subscription, rows, and the list setup. Check the control that is actually available before choosing an action. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | **New** is visible | Adding is available on this screen. | Select **New** to open the add form. | | An edit control is visible | Editing is available for that row. | Select the edit control in the intended row. | | A delete control is visible | Deleting is available for that row. | Select the delete control in the intended row. | | **Export** is available | The list can open its export choices. | Select **Export**, choose the required list format, then confirm the export. | | The upgrade surface appears | The subscription branch is active. | Contact your PAMS administrator about access to this configuration area. | | The list shows **No data** | No rows are available on the current screen. | Check the selected list and list setup before selecting an edit or delete control. | The export modal is titled **Exporting List:** and provides **Export** and the choices **Export to Excel** and **Export to PDF**. When several rows are listed, select the edit control in the row you intend to change. **Prerequisites** - You are on the Offer Status list or its sign-in surface. **Steps** 1. Select **Export** when you need a file of the list. 2. Choose the required export option in **Exporting List:**. 3. If the sign-in surface appears, complete the sign-in recovery in [Find the Offer Status list](#find-the-offer-status-list). 4. Open **General settings**. 5. Select **Offer Status**. **Result:** You use only the actions available for your access and current list, and you know which screen state to correct before selecting an edit or delete control again. ## When an Offer Status operation goes wrong Use the exact message to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a value in **Name**. | | `Field is required` | Enter a value in the required form field, then select **OK**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | Remove characters outside the accepted name pattern, then try again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Cancel** to keep the row or **Delete** to continue removing it. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the row and review the saved data that refers to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Check the row and your access, then retry the delete action. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one row in the list. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove forbidden characters from the filter value, then apply the filter again. | The add form can also show `Name is required` when its configured required rule is active. The page does not send the save request while the validation group is invalid. ## Continue with related configuration The shared configuration host groups Offer Status with other sales reference lists. After you finish here, choose the list that matches the next reference value you need to maintain. **Prerequisites** - You have finished the Offer Status change or decided which related list you need. **Steps** 1. Select the related list in the table below. | If you need to maintain… | Go to | |---|---| | order statuses | [Order status](doc:configuration-sales-order-status) | | inquiry statuses | [Inquiry status](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-status) | | reasons for lost sales | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | reasons for regretted sales | [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | cancellation reasons | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | order cancellation reasons | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | **Result:** You are ready to continue with the related sales reference list that matches your next configuration task. # Transfer reasons ## Transfer reasons A transfer reason is a named reference value maintained in Warehouse settings. Review and maintain the names available for transfer-related warehouse work. Open the **Transfer Reason** configuration list from Warehouse settings. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list and recognise its controls | [Find the transfer-reason list](#find-the-transfer-reason-list) | | Understand the list and its editable field | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add, edit, or remove a name | [Add, edit, and remove a transfer reason](#add-edit-and-remove-a-transfer-reason) | | Decide what to do when access or list size changes | [Handle access and list-size variations](#handle-access-and-list-size-variations) | | Resolve a validation or deletion message | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Maintain another warehouse reference list | [Service types](configuration-warehouse-service-types.md) or [Stock withdrawal](configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal.md) | ## Before you start The list and its maintenance actions depend on the subscription and access available to your account. Have the name you want to maintain ready before you open the form. Prerequisites - Your subscription includes the configured feature. When it does not, the list area is replaced by the subscription-upgrade area. - You have access to the actions available on this page. Creation, editing, and deletion can each be controlled independently. - You know the transfer-reason name you want to add or change. ## Find the transfer-reason list The transfer-reason list is the Warehouse settings page headed **Transfer Reason**. The list shows one visible column, **Name**, and the page controls **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**. Steps 1. Open the **Transfer Reason** list from Warehouse settings. 2. Confirm that the page heading is **Transfer Reason**. 3. Confirm that the list contains the **Name** column. 4. Locate **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** on the page. ![Identify the Transfer Reason heading, Name column, and page controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c26bf412ebb8e0b0f11a280814e99382.png) **Result:** The Transfer Reason list is on screen with its **Name** column and page controls available according to your account. ## Understand the list and form The list identifies each reference value by **Name**. The form contains the same reader-facing field for a new or edited value. The list layout can determine which columns you see, so use the headers displayed in your list rather than looking for hidden record fields. | What you see or enter | What it is used for | |---|---| | **Name** | The transfer-reason name shown in the list and entered in the form. | | **Name** column | The visible list column for the reference values. | The list also carries system fields for ordering, record identification, and company association, but those fields are hidden from the list and form. ## Add, edit, and remove a transfer reason Maintain the reference names through the available add, edit, delete, or export action. The list must be available, and the action you need must be available to your account. Prerequisites - You are on the Transfer Reason list. - For a new value, **New** is available. - For an existing value, its edit action is available. - To delete a value, more than one record must remain after deletion. ### Add a transfer reason Prerequisites - **New** is available. Steps 1. Select **New**. 2. Enter the transfer-reason name in **Name**. 3. Select **Save**. 4. If the form reports `Name is required`, enter a name in **Name** and select **Save** again. **Result:** The new value is saved and the page displays `Data saved Successfully`. ### Edit a transfer reason Prerequisites - An existing value has an available edit action. Steps 1. Select the edit action for the value you want to change. 2. Replace the value in **Name**. 3. Select **Save**. **Result:** The changed value is saved and the page displays `Data updated Successfully`. ### Delete a transfer reason Prerequisites - More than one record remains in the list. Steps 1. Select the delete action for the value you want to remove. 2. Review `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Select **Delete**. **Result:** The value is deleted and the page displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. ### Export the list Prerequisites - The export action is available. Steps 1. Select **Export**. 2. Choose the required export format. 3. Select one option from the table. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Confirm the export | **Export** | | Close the export window | **Cancel** | **Result:** The export window closes after your selection. ## Handle access and list-size variations Your available path depends on what PAMS exposes for your account and on how many records are in the list. | What you encounter | Path to take | |---|---| | The configured feature is included | Work from the list and use the actions available to you. | | The configured feature is excluded | Use the subscription-upgrade area shown in place of the list. | | **New** is hidden | Open an existing value only if its edit action is available. | | The edit action is unavailable | Review the list without editing the value. | | The delete action is unavailable | Review the list without deleting a value. | | More than one record exists | Use the delete action when it is available. | | One record or no records exists | Keep the remaining value; the delete request is not sent. | Steps 1. Choose one applicable path from the table. | If… | Do this | |---|---| | The configured feature is included | Open the Transfer Reason list and use the available action. | | **New** is available | Select **New** to add a value. | | The edit action is available | Select the edit action for the value you want to change. | | The delete action is available and more than one record remains | Select the delete action for the value you want to remove. | | One or no records exists | Keep the remaining value and do not select **Delete**. | **Result:** You use the available maintenance path without attempting an unavailable action or removing the last value. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message text on screen to choose the matching action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Name is required` | Enter a name in **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove forbidden characters from the filter, then apply the filter again. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Delete** to continue or **Cancel** to leave the value unchanged. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep the remaining value; deletion cannot proceed when it would leave no item. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the value and resolve the saved-data relationship before trying again. | | `Failed to Delete` | Keep the value and retry the deletion after checking that the delete action is available. | | `Do you want to save your changes?` | Choose the save or leave-page option shown by the dialog. | | `Step 1 - Download the blank template` | Follow the numbered import step shown by the import dialog. | | `Step 2 - Fill the template with your data and save the file on your computer` | Follow the numbered import step shown by the import dialog. | | `Step 3 - Upload your data into Pams` | Follow the numbered import step shown by the import dialog. | | `Step 4 - Choose one of the importing options` | Follow the numbered import step shown by the import dialog. | ## After maintaining transfer reasons After a successful save or deletion, return to the list and check the **Name** column for the resulting entry. The page's list refreshes after a successful save or deletion. If you need another warehouse reference list, continue with [Service types](configuration-warehouse-service-types.md) or [Stock withdrawal](configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal.md). For operational warehouse work, continue with [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md). # Manage purchase job quotations ## Manage purchase job quotations An RFQ is a request sent to sub-suppliers for an offer. A purchase quotation records the offer that comes back, after the RFQ and before the purchase-order stage. Use it to check the offer, keep a valid alternative or revision, and move the selected quotation forward as a purchase order (PO). | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Prepare the record and identify the quotation stage | [Before you start](#before-you-start) | | Reach the saved purchase job | [Find and open a quotation](#find-and-open-a-quotation) | | Check fields, items, and related tabs | [Understand the quotation panel](#understand-the-quotation-panel) | | Save, validate, or convert the quotation | [Validate and convert a quotation](#validate-and-convert-a-quotation) | | Create an alternative, revision, or return | [Create alternatives, revisions, and returns](#create-alternatives-revisions-and-returns) | | Correct a refused action | [When a quotation action is refused](#when-a-quotation-action-is-refused) | | Continue after conversion | [Continue with the purchase order](#continue-with-the-purchase-order) | | Work on the RFQ before the quotation | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | Continue with the order after conversion | [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Manage files and history on the record | [Purchase job comments, files, and history](doc:purchase-job-comments-files-and-history) | ## Before you start Before choosing a stage action, prepare the saved record and the offer details. Prerequisites - Have a saved purchase job with an open **Offer** panel. - Make sure the quotation is editable. **Save**, **Valid Offer**, **Alternative Offer**, **Revision**, and **Back to RFQ** depend on the record being saved and editable in the applicable quotation state. - Have the offer number, offer type, offer date, validity period, delivery time, delivery term, payment method, and payment period ready. - Check the quotation's item rows before validating it. An offer must contain at least one item. The **Offer** panel applies while the purchase job is at Offer and before Order, and the individual offer must be open. **Convert To PO** applies when the offer is valid or considered valid. **Alternative Offer** and **Revision** apply when the offer is valid, considered valid, or expired. **Back to RFQ** applies to a saved quotation that is not ordered. ## Find and open a quotation A quotation is opened from the saved purchase-job record at `/procurement/edit/:ID`. Prerequisites - Know the saved purchase job you need to review. Steps 1. Open the saved purchase job record. 2. Select **Offer** in the stage bar. 3. Open the quotation in the **Offer** panel. ![Look at the purchase-job record header and stage bar before opening the quotation panel.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d9fa4ef8a606f4dbb282e2a37c52f306.png) **Result:** The quotation is open in the **Offer** panel. ## Understand the quotation panel The quotation panel contains the offer details, item information, stage actions, and related record tabs. Review these areas before changing the offer. | Area | What to check | |---|---| | Offer details | **Offer No.**, **Offer Type**, **Offer Date**, **Validity Period**, **Delivery Time**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, and **Payment Period** | | Offer status | **Status** and **Vendor** | | Item information | **Product**, **Offer Validation**, **Unit Price**, and **Currency** | | Related record work | **Attachment**, **Purchase Invoices**, and **Last Modifications** | | Stage actions | **Valid Offer**, **Convert To PO**, **Alternative Offer**, **Revision**, **Rejected Offer**, **Cancel RFQ**, **Denied To Extend**, and **Back to RFQ** | The offer form applies the following value rules: | Field | Rule | |---|---| | **Offer Date** | The date cannot be later than today. | | **Validity Period** | The value cannot be below `0`. | | **Delivery Time** | The value cannot be below `1`. | | **Payment Period** | The value cannot be below `1`. | The record also includes the product, offer date, offer validation, delivery time, delivery term, payment method, payment period, unit price, and currency columns for quotation items. ## Validate and convert a quotation Use this procedure to save the quotation, mark a saved draft as valid, and convert a valid quotation into a purchase order. Prerequisites - Open a saved, editable quotation in the **Offer** panel. - Complete the quotation fields and keep at least one item in the offer. Steps 1. Select **Save** after completing or changing the quotation. 2. Check the quotation fields and item rows if the screen displays `Check mandatory field(s)`. 3. Add an item if the screen displays `Offer must have at least one item`. 4. Enter a value that meets the field rule. 5. Select **Valid Offer** when the saved quotation is a draft. 6. Select **Save** again. 7. Select **Convert To PO** when the quotation is valid or considered valid. **Result:** The quotation is marked valid or continues as a purchase order. ## Create alternatives, revisions, and returns These actions keep a quotation's correction and return paths with the quotation stage. Choose one action that matches the quotation's current status. Prerequisites - Open a saved quotation that is not ordered. - Make sure the quotation is editable. Steps 1. Select the action that matches the quotation's current status. | Quotation situation | Select | |---|---| | Valid, considered valid, or expired; you need another offer | **Alternative Offer** | | Valid, considered valid, or expired; you need a changed version | **Revision** | | Valid, considered valid, or expired; you need to reject it | **Rejected Offer** | | Valid, considered valid, or expired; you need to cancel the RFQ path | **Cancel RFQ** | | Expired; the extension must be refused | **Denied To Extend** | | Saved and not ordered; the quotation must return to the RFQ stage | **Back to RFQ** | | Rejected; you need to restore the quotation | **Consider Offer as Not Rejected** | | Cancelled; you need to restore the RFQ path | **Consider RFQ As Not Cancelled** | | Regretted; you need to restore the quotation | **Consider As Not Regretted** | | Extension rejected; you need to restore the extension path | **Undo Denied To Extend** | **Result:** The quotation follows the selected alternative, revision, rejection, cancellation, extension, or RFQ-return path. ## When a quotation action is refused Quotation validation messages identify the information or item state that must be corrected. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required quotation fields. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | Add an item to the quotation. | | `Please insert at least one product` | Add a product to the package. | | `Check RFQ mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required RFQ fields before continuing the quotation flow. | | `Please insert at least one RFQ` | Add an RFQ before continuing. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | Add an item to the inquiry. | | `Check PO mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required purchase-order fields. | | `Please insert at least one PO` | Add a purchase order before continuing. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add an item to the order. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | Keep the protected item in the order. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Add a product to the package. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Check the quotation data and try the action again. | The quotation actions can also return these messages: | Message | |---| | `Converted to offer successfully` | | `Item(s) Regretted` | | `Item(s) Cancelled` | | `Item(s) Rejected` | | `Item(s) Reactivated` | | `Product package deleted from all inquiries` | | `Product package deleted from all offers` | | `Product package deleted from all orders` | | `Order updated successfully. Undelivered. A draft invoice was deleted` | | `Job reactivated successfully` | | `Email sent to client. Added to emails list activity` | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | ## Continue with the purchase order A purchase order is the next purchase-job stage after a quotation is converted. Continue the order work on the purchase-job order page, and use the record's related tabs for companion work. | Next task | Page | |---|---| | Work on the converted purchase order | [Purchase job orders](doc:purchase-job-orders) | | Return to RFQ work | [Purchase job RFQs](doc:purchase-job-rfqs) | | Manage files, invoices, and change history | [Purchase job comments, files, and history](doc:purchase-job-comments-files-and-history) | **Result:** The quotation work ends at the purchase-order handover or at the selected RFQ return path. # Order status An order status is a named value that describes accepted work before delivery. The sales flow places Orders before Delivered; this list keeps the names used to describe that progress consistent. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Maintain a status name | [Before you start](#before-you-start), then [Add, edit, and remove a status value](#add-edit-and-remove-a-status-value) | | Reach the list | [Find the Order status list](#find-the-order-status-list) | | Understand the fields | [Understand the list and its fields](#understand-the-list-and-its-fields) | | Export the list | [Export the list](#export-the-list) | | Resolve a maintenance message | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Work with accepted orders | [Orders](orders.md) | | Follow orders toward delivery | [From orders to delivered](from-orders-to-delivered.md) | | Compare earlier sales statuses | [Offer status](configuration-sales-offer-status.md) or [Inquiry status](configuration-sales-inquiry-status.md) | ## Before you start The Order status list is a configuration reference list. Access requires sign-in, an included configuration subscription, and the permission that controls the action you want to take. **Prerequisites** | Check | What must be true | |---|---| | Access | You are signed in. | | Subscription | The configuration subscription is included. | | Add | **New** is available when the subscription is included, the button is not hidden, and new-item access allows it. | | Edit | The row edit action is available when edit access is allowed. | | Delete | Delete access is allowed and the list contains more than one item. | ## Find the Order status list The **Order Status** list is available in the configuration area. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in and have configuration access. **Steps** 1. Open the configuration area. 2. Select **Order Status**. 3. Check for the page title **Order Status**. 4. Check the available actions: **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**. ![Check the Order Status title, Name column, and page actions.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/da392310c446328691cf89509a6f6462.png) **Result:** The **Order Status** list is open. ## Understand the list and its fields The list displays the status name in the **Name** column. The configuration also carries hidden ordering, identifier, and company fields. | Field | Type | How it is used | |---|---|---| | `Name` | string | The visible status name and the form field for the status name. | | `DisplayOrder` | numeric | Hidden from the list and used for ordering. | | `OrderStatusID` | numeric | Hidden identifier field. | | `CompanyID` | numeric | Hidden grid field. | The configuration marks **Name** as required. The list uses the item form for field editing. Paging is disabled, column headers are disabled by the settings, and column reordering is enabled. Use the visible headers to identify the columns in the list. ![Recognise the Order Status list and its Name column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/46fa95bbfdceb7300c79f53dddf95aad.png) ## Add, edit, and remove a status value A status value is the name colleagues use to describe where accepted order work stands. Choose a distinct name that matches the terminology your company uses. ### Add or edit a value **Prerequisites** - The Order status list is open. - You have the permission required for the action. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches your task: | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Add a value | Select **New**. | | Edit a value | Select the row edit action. | 2. Enter or change the status name: | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Enter a new value | Enter the status name in **Name**. | | Change a value | Replace the existing value in **Name**. | 3. Choose the completion action that matches your task: | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Leave without saving | Select **Cancel**. | | Commit the shared popup form | Select **Save**. | | Use the dialog's available confirmation | Select **OK**. | ![Review the New Order Status dialog and its Name field.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2715f8cc3c7f1bd1d804ea0994cca76d.png) **Result:** The dialog remains available for its next action, or it closes when you select **Cancel**. ### Remove a value **Prerequisites** - The list contains more than one item. - Delete access is available. **Steps** 1. Open the selected row's delete menu. 2. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose the action that matches your task: | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Remove the value | Select **Delete**. | | Keep the value | Select **Cancel**. | **Result:** The delete menu closes without deletion when you select **Cancel**. A successful deletion removes the selected value from the list. ## Export the list Export is a list operation. It is separate from adding, editing, or deleting a status value. **Prerequisites** - The Order status list is open. - Export access is available. **Steps** 1. Open the list export action from the page action area. 2. Choose an export option in the export dialog. 3. Select **Export** to confirm the export. **Result:** The export request is confirmed from the export dialog. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Field is required` | Enter a value in **Name** before committing the form. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | Select **Delete** only when the selected value is the one you intend to remove; otherwise select **Cancel**. | | `Data saved Successfully` | Review the new value in the list. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Review the changed value in the list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Review the remaining list. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one value in the list. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the value and review the saved data that refers to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Check the selected row and delete access before trying again. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and try again. | ## Continue with related sales settings Order status configuration names the values used by order work. Operational order work is in [Orders](orders.md), and the continuation toward delivery is in [From orders to delivered](from-orders-to-delivered.md). | Continue with… | Open | |---|---| | Earlier sales-stage status values | [Offer status](configuration-sales-offer-status.md) or [Inquiry status](configuration-sales-inquiry-status.md) | | The order workflow | [Orders](orders.md) | # Service types Service types is the warehouse reference list for named external service types. Use this page to review the list and maintain its entries. Before you open the list, check the conditions in [Before you start](#before-you-start). | If you need to… | Go to | | --- | --- | | Check the list and its available controls | [Find and review service types](#find-and-review-service-types) | | See which fields belong to an entry | [Understand the service types screen](#understand-the-service-types-screen) | | Add or change an entry | [Add or edit a service type](#add-or-edit-a-service-type) | | Remove an entry | [Remove a service type](#remove-a-service-type) | | Resolve a validation or list-tool message | [Validate entries and use list tools](#validate-entries-and-use-list-tools) | | Continue with related warehouse reference settings | [Warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-view), [Inspection base](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base), or [Stock withdrawal](doc:configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal) | ## Before you start Open the Service types page from the navigation path **Configuration** > **Warehouse settings** > **Service Types**. The page uses the warehouse configuration feature, and its list and controls depend on the configuration available to your account. | Before you start | What applies | | --- | --- | | Access | The list is shown when the configured subscription feature is included. | | **New** | The control is hidden when the subscription feature is not included or the new-entry control is hidden by configuration. | | Edit | The row edit control is shown when editing is allowed. | | Delete | The delete control is shown when deleting is allowed. | | **Export** | Export access is loaded separately from the page's other action access. | | **Name** | The field is required when the list configuration marks it as required. | With these conditions in place, open the list to review its entries and controls. ## Find and review service types Use this procedure to open the list and check the entries and list controls. Prerequisites - You know the navigation path **Configuration** > **Warehouse settings** > **Service Types**. Steps 1. Open **Configuration** > **Warehouse settings** > **Service Types**. 2. Review the **Name** column. 3. Review the row count. 4. Review the available **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** controls. ![Check the Name column, row count, and list controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/096d99339696ecd83979c8eaabae9b8c.png) **Result:** The list shows the **Name** column, one row, `Count: 1`, **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings**. Use this list view to inspect the field and dialog before making a change. ## Understand the service types screen The list identifies each service type by its **Name**. The form provides the same **Name** field for a new or edited entry. | Screen item | What you use it for | Required or visible state | | --- | --- | --- | | **Name** | Enter the service type name. | Required; appears in the list and form. | The list uses these settings: | List setting | Value | | --- | --- | | Paging | Off | | Row alternation | On | | Column reordering | On | | Row filtering | Off | Selecting **New** opens a dialog titled `New External Service types`. The dialog displays **Name** with a required marker and an **OK** button. ![Check the New External Service types dialog and its required Name field.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a9dccc5e8963602bd7e416df3bdc3db9.png) Use this form when you are ready to add or edit an entry. ## Add or edit a service type Add or edit a service type when the warehouse reference list needs a new name or a changed name. Prerequisites - Have the service type name ready. - For an edit, have an existing row in the list. Steps 1. Choose the entry you want to maintain. | If you need to… | Do this | | --- | --- | | Add an entry | Select **New**. | | Change an entry | Select the row edit control. | 2. In the form, enter the name in **Name**. 3. Select **OK** to submit the form. 4. Review the list for the updated entry. ![Check the new-entry form before submitting the service type name.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a9dccc5e8963602bd7e416df3bdc3db9.png) **Result:** A new entry displays `Data saved Successfully`. An edited entry displays `Data updated Successfully`. The popup closes and the list reloads. ## Remove a service type Remove an entry when it is no longer needed in the service type reference list. Prerequisites - Deleting must be allowed for your account. - The list must contain more than one item. Steps 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Select **Delete**. 3. Select **Delete** in the confirmation menu. **Result:** A successful removal displays `Data Deleted Successfully` and the list is reordered. Use the message table below if the deletion does not complete. ## Validate entries and use list tools Use the message on screen to correct the action you just took. | When you see | What it means | What to do | | --- | --- | --- | | `Name is required` | **Name** has no value. | Enter a name in **Name**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | The name contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Replace the unsupported character. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The list filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character from the filter. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The entry is related to saved data. | Keep the entry and review the related saved data. | | `Failed to Delete` | The deletion did not complete. | Review the entry and try the deletion again when it is allowed. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list cannot be reduced below one item. | Keep at least one service type in the list. | | `Data Importing completed` | The import finished. | Review the refreshed list. | The export dialog provides **Cancel** and **Export**. Select **Cancel** to close that dialog. Select **Export** to start the selected export operation. Prerequisites - Have a list action that you want to check. Steps 1. Read the message displayed after the action. 2. Use the action in the matching message row. 3. Apply the correction in the matching message row. **Result:** You have the correction or follow-up action associated with the displayed message. ## Continue after maintenance After a successful maintenance action, the list is loaded again and the popup closes. New entries receive the current list length as their display-order value. For related warehouse reference settings, open [Warehouse](doc:configuration-warehouse-view), [Inspection base](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-base), [Inspection checklist](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-checklist), [Inspection documents](doc:configuration-warehouse-inspection-documents), [Transfer reasons](doc:configuration-warehouse-transfer-reasons), [Stock withdrawal](doc:configuration-warehouse-stock-withdrawal), or [Warehouse product stages](doc:configuration-warehouse-product-stages). # Inquiry status ## Overview An Inquiry Status is a named reference value used with sales inquiries. You maintain these values in the sales configuration area alongside the lists used by the sales-inquiry workflow. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Reach the list | [Find the Inquiry Status list](#find-the-inquiry-status-list) | | Check the fields and list layout | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add or change a status | [Add, edit, delete, and export Inquiry Status entries](#add-edit-delete-and-export-inquiry-status-entries) | | Resolve a validation or deletion message | [When an Inquiry Status operation goes wrong](#when-an-inquiry-status-operation-goes-wrong) | | Continue with inquiry work | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Review the sales flow | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Maintain related inquiry configuration | [Inquiry types](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-types) | ![Recognize the Inquiry Status page heading, list, and toolbar before opening an entry.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/49a37c3b84e72c6c9161784bde07e4a4.png) ## Before you start Prerequisites - You are signed in with access to the configuration area. - The subscription feature for this configuration is available to your company. - You know whether you are reviewing the list or maintaining a status name. - You know that the visible columns can follow the list setup in use. The list and its actions depend on the available subscription feature and your configuration permissions. If the subscription feature is unavailable, the page shows the subscription upgrade surface instead of the list. When the feature is available, the list shows the columns and actions provided for your configuration. ## Find the Inquiry Status list The list is in the Sales configuration area. Prerequisites - You are signed in. - The configuration area is available to you. Steps 1. Open the Sales configuration area. 2. Select **Inquiry Status**. 3. Confirm that the page heading is **Inquiry Status**. 4. Confirm that the list contains the **Name** column. ![Identify the Inquiry Status list, its Name column, and the New and Refresh controls.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/be04b74bf62d7706cd6edee0077f36dc.png) **Result:** The Inquiry Status list is open. The list displays the **Name** column, the **New** control, and the toolbar control titled **Refresh**. ## Understand the list and form The list uses **Name** for the visible status name; the other configured fields support the record without appearing as form fields. | Area | What you see | What it means | |---|---|---| | List | **Name** | The visible status-name column. | | New or edit form | **Name** | The text field used for the status name. | | Supporting list information | Row order | Not editable in this form. | | Supporting list information | Status identity | Not editable in this form. | | Supporting list information | Company association | Not editable in this form. | | Form rule | Required only where your company configures it | **Name** can be required when your company configures it that way. | | List layout | No column headers | The list shows its rows without a column-header row. | | Form content | **Name** only | The form shows **Name** as its visible entry field. | | Other form types | No repeatable sub-item, select box, date box, percentage, or amount field | The Inquiry Status form shows none of these additional field types. | | List setup | Your list may show a different set of columns. | Review the columns displayed on your page. | Selecting **New** opens the New Inquiry Status dialog. The dialog contains one **Name** text box and **OK**. The required marker was absent in the dialog, and Add more was not present. ![Review the New Inquiry Status dialog, its Name field, and the OK control.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b4355462da3d0cf9b09b4f9f0a3722a9.png) ## Add, edit, delete, and export Inquiry Status entries You can add, change, remove, or export an Inquiry Status entry from this page. | If you need to… | Use this operation | |---|---| | Add a status name | Open a new form with **New**. | | Change a saved status name | Open the row's **Edit** action. | | Remove a saved status | Open the row's delete menu, then use **Delete**. | | Prepare a list export | Open the export dialog with **Export**. | ### Add a status Prerequisites - The Inquiry Status list is open. - The **New** control is available. Steps 1. Select **New**. 2. In the New Inquiry Status dialog, enter the status name in **Name**. 3. Select **OK**. For a valid new entry, the save operation adds the returned entry to the list and shows `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The new status entry appears in the Inquiry Status list. ### Edit a status Prerequisites - The Inquiry Status list contains the status row you want to change. - You have permission to edit the row. Steps 1. Select the row's **Edit** action. 2. Replace the value in **Name**. 3. Select **OK**. For a valid edit, the updated entry replaces the existing row and shows `Data updated Successfully`. **Result:** The changed status name appears in the list. ### Delete a status Prerequisites - The Inquiry Status list contains the status row you want to remove. - You have permission to delete the row. - More than one list item remains after the deletion. Steps 1. Open the row's delete menu. 2. Read the confirmation text, `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Select **Delete**. For a successful deletion, the row is removed and the page shows `Data Deleted Successfully`. **Result:** The selected status no longer appears in the list. ### Export the list Prerequisites - The Inquiry Status list is open. - The export action is available. Steps 1. Select **Export**. **Result:** The export dialog opens for the Inquiry Status list. ## Handle access and runtime branches What appears on the page depends on your subscription, permissions, and list setup. | Condition | What appears | |---|---| | The subscription feature is unavailable | The subscription upgrade surface replaces the list. | | The page setup hides new entries | **New** is hidden. | | Your editing permission is unavailable | The row's **Edit** action is hidden. | | Your deletion permission is unavailable | The row's delete menu is hidden. | | Your saved list setup supplies different columns | The list follows that setup and shows the columns it provides. | | You open a related reference list | That list can show fields suited to its own entries rather than the fields shown here. | The page presents the same list-and-form arrangement used by related reference lists, with the Inquiry Status fields shown here. ## When an Inquiry Status operation goes wrong Use the message on screen to identify the operation that stopped and the correction to make. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Field is required` | The configured required rule has no value. | Enter a value in **Name**. | | `Name is required` | The form's **Name** validation rule has no value. | Enter a value in **Name** before selecting **OK**. | | `Just '_' '-' And '.' Characters Accepted` | The value contains a character outside the accepted pattern. | Replace the disallowed character in **Name**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The list filter contains a forbidden character. | Remove the forbidden character from the filter, then apply the filter again. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Related saved data prevents deletion. | Keep the status entry and review the related saved data. | | `Failed to Delete` | The deletion request failed. | Keep the status entry and retry after checking the row and access. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list cannot be reduced below one item. | Keep at least one status entry. | After a successful add, the page shows `Data saved Successfully`. After a successful edit, it shows `Data updated Successfully`. After a successful deletion, it shows `Data Deleted Successfully`. ## Continue with related sales configuration Inquiry Status belongs to the sales-inquiry configuration set. Continue from the work you need to do next. | If you need to… | Open | |---|---| | Work with sales inquiries | [Inquiries](doc:inquiries) | | Review the complete sales flow | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Maintain inquiry types | [Inquiry types](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-types) | | Maintain offer statuses | [Offer status](doc:configuration-sales-offer-status) | | Maintain order statuses | [Order status](doc:configuration-sales-order-status) | | Maintain lost reasons | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Maintain regret reasons | [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Maintain cancellation reasons | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain order-cancellation reasons | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | **Result:** You have a route from Inquiry Status to the sales-inquiry workflow and its related reference lists. # Manage purchase orders ## Manage purchase orders A purchase job is the record that contains the purchase-order panel and its current order state. A purchase order is the post-quotation record you use to move that job through approval, award submission, activation, and receipt. It belongs to the `Order` stage and continues toward `Delivered`. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Prepare the order fields and save the order | [Save the order and request approval](#save-the-order-and-request-approval) | | Choose the approval route for your role | [Approve and submit the order award](#approve-and-submit-the-order-award) | | Activate an approved order or record receipt | [Activate the order and record receipt](#activate-the-order-and-record-receipt) | | Amend, reject, cancel, reverse, or return an order | [Amend, correct, or close the order](#amend-correct-or-close-the-order) | | Work on the quotation before conversion | [Manage purchase job quotations](purchase-job-quotations.md) | | Create a direct purchase order | [Create a direct purchase order](create-direct-purchase-order.md) | | Continue with warehouse receipt and handling | [Goods receipt notes](goods-receipt-notes.md) or [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) | | Review supporting files and history | [Comments, files, and history on a purchase job](purchase-job-comments-files-and-history.md) | The order panel is available after quotation work has produced an order. Direct purchase-order creation is a separate task. ## Before you start Before you start, the purchase order must be saved and attached to a quotation conversion. The fields below determine which information you complete before each order action. Prerequisites | Have this ready | Why it matters here | |---|---| | A purchase job with an existing order | Order actions require an existing order and no unsaved order changes. | | The purchaser, product type, and package title | These are required fields on the purchase-job record. | | The order number, delivery details, payment details, and logistics costs | These order fields can be required by your company configuration. | | The order's current state | Approval, activation, amendment, receipt, correction, and closure actions depend on it. | | The permission needed for the intended action | Approval, editing, mail, and action availability vary by role and configuration. | The order save validates before saving. Leaving with unsaved changes can invoke the page's leave-page protection. ## Find and open the purchase job Open the saved purchase job to reach its purchase-order panel and current order state. Prerequisites - Know the saved purchase job you need to work on. - Sign in before opening the order panel. Steps 1. Open the saved purchase job. 2. If `Log in to Pams` appears, enter your details in **Email** and **Password**. 3. Select **Login**. 4. In the purchase-job workspace, open the purchase-order panel beneath the `PO` stage marker. ![The purchase-job route with the sign-in controls, stage labels, and item headers](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) **Result:** The purchase-job record is open at its purchase-order area. > **Note:** Sign in before opening the purchase-job route. ## Understand the purchase-order workspace The purchase-order workspace combines order information, item rows, state-dependent actions, and supporting tabs. The visible fields and item headers can vary with the page setup. ### Order information | Field | What to enter or check | |---|---| | **PO No.** | Enter the purchase-order number when your company configuration requires it. | | **Branch** | Review the branch shown for the purchase job. | | **Delivery Time** | Select the delivery-time unit when configured as mandatory. | | **Delivery Term** | Select the delivery term when configured as mandatory. | | **Forecasted Receiving Date** | Enter a date on or after the order date. | | **Payment Method** | Select a payment method when configured as mandatory. | | **Payment Period** | Select a payment period when configured as mandatory. | | **Status** | Review the order status. | | **Forecasted Logistics Costs** | Enter a non-negative amount when configured as mandatory. | | **Logistics Costs** | Enter a non-negative amount when configured as mandatory. | | **Rate to** | Enter a non-negative rate when the local-currency-rate window is open. | | **Order Activation Date** | Enter a date on or after the order date in the activation window. | | **Received On** | Enter a date no later than `Today` in a delivery-date window. | The workspace also shows the required record fields **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, and **Package Title**. The item area includes the headers `Item No.`, `Product`, `Category`, `Group`, `MRQ Qty.`, `MRQ type`, `Qty`, `Unit`, `Required Receiving Date`, `Job no.`, `MRQ`, `V.L.`, `Is limited V.L.`, and `Stage`. The workspace can also provide these order actions: | Action | Use | |---|---| | **Purchasing PO template** | Download the purchase-order template when printing is permitted. | | **Rate to** | Enter a non-negative local-currency rate when the rate window is open. | | **Payment Milestone** | Open payment-milestone work for an existing order. | The state-dependent actions are the controls that move the order through its work. They are available only when the order is saved, has no unsaved changes, the record is editable, and the current state meets the action's condition. Use these conditions to choose the appropriate action in the next section. ## Save the order and request approval When the order panel is open, complete its information and send it into the approval path. Prerequisites - The purchase job exists and the order panel is open. - Complete the fields your company configuration requires. - Include at least one order item. Steps 1. Complete the required order fields, including **Delivery Time**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, **Payment Period**, and the configured cost fields. 2. Select **Save**. 3. If the order is eligible for approval, select **Request Approval**. If the order has no item, the page can display `Order must have at least one item`. If a required order field is empty, it can display `Check PO mandatory field(s)`. **Result:** The order is saved, and the approval action is available according to the order's state and your role. ## Approve and submit the order award When the saved order is eligible for approval or award submission, choose the action that matches your role and the order state. Prerequisites - The order has an ID and no unsaved changes. - The job is after `Regretted Offer` and before `Deleted`. - The order state and your approval and mail permissions determine which option is available. Steps 1. Select the action that matches the state and permission shown on screen. | If… | Select… | |---|---| | The approval process is configured and you cannot approve the order | **Request Approval** | | The approval process is configured and you can approve the order | **Approved** | | The order is approved and mail permission is available | **Send order award to Sub-supplier** | | Mail permission is unavailable | **Consider PO award as submitted** | 2. If the approval request is awaiting a decision, select **Reject Approval Request** to reject it or **Cancel Approval Request** to withdraw it, according to your permission. The page can display `An error occurred while processing your request` when processing fails. **Result:** The order is approved, rejected, withdrawn, submitted to the sub-supplier, or marked as submitted according to the control you selected. ## Activate the order and record receipt When the order has reached activation or receipt work, use the action that matches its current state. Prerequisites - The order is in `Awaiting Activation` or `Consider As Awaiting Activation` for activation. - For receipt correction, the order is in `Delivered`. - The order is saved and has no unsaved changes. Steps 1. Select the action that matches the current state. | Current state | Select… | |---|---| | `Awaiting Activation` or `Consider As Awaiting Activation` | **Activate PO** | | `Delivered` | **Consider as not received** | 2. Complete the field for the selected action. | Selected action | Complete… | |---|---| | **Activate PO** | **Order Activation Date**, on or after the order date | | **Consider as not received** | **Received On**, no later than `Today` | 3. In the window for the selected action, select the button at the bottom of the window. The page can display `Order updated successfully. Undelivered. A draft invoice was deleted` after the undelivered correction. **Result:** The order is activated, or the receipt state is corrected with the date entered. ## Amend, correct, or close the order Use the action that matches the order state; these controls correct a state without treating a different state as if it were current. Prerequisites - The order is saved and has no unsaved changes. - The order state is visible in the purchase-order area. - You have permission to edit or change the order. Steps 1. Select one action from the table that matches the current state. | Current state or condition | Select… | |---|---| | Valid or considered awaiting activation | **Order amendment** | | Editing is allowed for an approved or activation state | **Enable Editing** | | The order is rejected | **Consider PO acceptance as not rejected** | | The order is cancelled | **Consider P.O. as not Cancelled** | | The order is valid or considered awaiting activation and acceptance must be rejected | **Rejected PO acceptance** | | The order is not cancelled, rejected, or in the completed-receipt state | **Cancel PO** | | A non-direct order is below Approved | **Back to Offer** | | The order is approved in an approval process | **Consider as not approved** | | The award is in a valid or considered-awaiting-activation state | **Consider PO award as not submitted** | 2. Complete the fields the selected correction window asks for, including **Regret Date**, **Comment**, **Amount**, or **Reject Date** when they appear. 3. In the correction window, select the button at the bottom of the window. The page can display `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` if an item deletion is attempted for either of those item states. **Result:** The order is amended, returned, rejected, cancelled, reopened for editing, or left in its current state after the selected correction. If the action produces a message, use the matching row in [When order work goes wrong](#when-order-work-goes-wrong). ## When order work goes wrong Use the message text in the first column to choose the corrective action. Messages owned by another purchase-job stage are listed with that stage so you can continue in the right task. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Check PO mandatory field(s)` | A configured order field is empty. | Complete the required order fields and select **Save** again. | | `Please insert at least one PO` | The page requires a purchase order. | Add the purchase order information before saving. | | `Order must have at least one item` | The order has no item. | Add an item before selecting **Save**. | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | A payment milestone has no action. | Complete each milestone action before saving. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Processing failed. | Check the order state and permissions, then retry the available action. | | `Items labeled as ‘Ready for Shipment’ or ‘Delivered’ cannot be deleted` | The item is in a protected state. | Do not use deletion as the correction route. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | A quantity is outside the accepted range. | Enter a positive quantity within the displayed limit. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | A numeric value is negative. | Enter zero or a positive value. | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | The tax rate is outside its accepted range. | Enter a rate from 0 through 100. | | `Required Offer Type` | The inquiry requires an offer type. | Continue in the procurement inquiry task. | | `Required Bid Due Date` | The inquiry requires a bid due date. | Continue in the procurement inquiry task. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | A list value contains forbidden characters. | Remove the unsupported characters in the owning list page. | | `You already have a contact with this name` | The contact name already exists. | Continue in the contact details page and use the existing contact or a different name. | | `Check RFQ mandatory field(s)` | An RFQ field is empty. | Continue in the purchase-job RFQ task. | | `Please insert at least one RFQ` | The RFQ requires an RFQ entry. | Continue in the purchase-job RFQ task. | | `Please insert at least one product` | A package requires a product. | Continue in package maintenance. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | A shared form has an empty required field. | Correct the required field in the owning stage panel. | | `Inquiry must have at least one item` | The inquiry has no item. | Continue in the procurement inquiry panel. | | `Offer must have at least one item` | The offer has no item. | Continue in the procurement offer panel. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | A package contains no products. | Continue in package maintenance. | | `Product package deleted from all inquiries` | A package deletion affected inquiries. | Continue in package maintenance. | | `Product package deleted from all offers` | A package deletion affected offers. | Continue in package maintenance. | | `Product package deleted from all orders` | A package deletion affected orders. | Continue in package maintenance. | | `Item(s) Regretted` | An item was moved to a regretted state. | Continue in the inquiry or offer item task. | | `Item(s) Cancelled` | An item was moved to a cancelled state. | Continue in the inquiry or offer item task. | | `Item(s) Rejected` | An item was moved to a rejected state. | Continue in the inquiry or offer item task. | | `Item(s) Reactivated` | An item was moved back to an active state. | Continue in the inquiry or offer item task. | | `Job reactivated successfully` | The job was reactivated. | Continue in the purchase-job record task. | | `Email sent to client. Added to emails list activity` | An email action completed and added an activity entry. | Continue in the purchase-job activity task. | | `Converted to inquiry successfully` | A conversion produced an inquiry. | Continue in the purchase-job RFQ task. | | `Converted to offer successfully` | A conversion produced an offer. | Continue in the purchase-job quotation task. | ### Out of scope messages The shared screen can show this message even though the corrective work belongs to another page. | Message | Owning page | |---|---| | `Your request was completed successfully` | File library | After resolving a message, return to the order action that matches the current state. ## What happens next When the purchase order reaches receipt work, the next operational activity belongs to warehouse receipt and fulfillment. For supporting information, use the purchase-job work lists or the page for comments, files, and history. | Continue with… | Use… | |---|---| | The quotation before the order | [Manage purchase job quotations](purchase-job-quotations.md) | | Physical receipt documentation | [Goods receipt notes](goods-receipt-notes.md) | | Warehouse handling after receipt | [Warehouse fulfillment flow](warehouse-fulfillment-flow.md) | | Operational follow-up | [Purchase job work lists](purchase-job-work-lists.md) | | Supporting files and history | [Comments, files, and history on a purchase job](purchase-job-comments-files-and-history.md) | **Result:** You know which purchase-job or warehouse task continues the work from the order's current state. # Comments, files, and history on a purchase job ## Comments, files, and history on a purchase job A purchase job is the record you keep while purchasing work moves from its request into supplier and order processing. After the record is saved, use its follow-up surfaces to keep supporting files with the job and review the job's recorded changes. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find a saved purchase job | [Find and open a saved purchase job](#find-and-open-a-saved-purchase-job) | | Keep a supporting file with the job | [Keep supporting files with the purchase job](#keep-supporting-files-with-the-purchase-job) | | Review changes made to the job | [Review Last Modifications](#review-last-modifications) | | Work on the main purchase-job record | [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) | | Maintain files beyond their link to a purchase job | [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files) | The saved record has the **Attachment** and **Last Modifications** tabs. The **Comments** tab is not part of the available follow-up surface. RFQ, quotation, and purchase-order work remain on their own purchase-job pages. ## Before you start You need a saved purchase job before the follow-up tabs can appear. The saved-record area also depends on subscription access. File actions depend on whether the attachment surface is read-only. Prerequisites | Have or know | Why it matters | |---|---| | A saved purchase job | The bottom tabs are shown only for a saved record. | | Access to the purchasing feature | The attachment and history surfaces require subscription access. | | Whether the record is editable | **Attach File** appears when the attachment surface is not read-only. | | The details you want to keep with the file | Have the file name, category, tags, and any accompanying note ready to enter or review. | The attachment list can be in an empty, loading, or error state. History rows appear when the record has user logs. These states determine what you can review after you select a tab. ## Find and open a saved purchase job The purchase-job list is where you locate an existing job before opening its saved record. Prerequisites - Know which saved purchase job you need to open. Steps 1. Open the purchase-job list. 2. Choose the list tab that matches the work you need to review: **All**, **RFQs**, **Quotations**, **POs**, or **Archived**. 3. Use **MRQs** or **Tickets** when those list entries are the starting point for your work. 4. Choose the list tool that matches what you need. | If you need to… | Choose | |---|---| | Reload the list | **Refresh** | | Adjust the list | **Table Layout** | | Open list settings | **Settings** | 5. Select the saved purchase job you want to review. ![Look at the purchase-job list tabs and its three toolbar buttons.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/967060a80526c8548b33763e688b87bd.png) **Result:** The saved purchase-job record opens, ready for you to select **Attachment** or **Last Modifications**. ## Keep supporting files with the purchase job The **Attachment** area keeps documents and their identifying details with the saved purchase job. A row can show **File name**, **Category**, **Tags**, **Size**, and **Modified**. Prerequisites - Open a saved purchase job. - Use an editable attachment surface when you need to add or change a file. Steps 1. Select **Attachment** on the saved purchase-job record. 2. Select **Attach File** to open the files library. 3. In the files library, choose the file or library item you need to associate with the job. 4. Enter the file's **File Name** when the upload form asks for it. 5. Choose a value in **Links** when you need to associate the upload with another record type. 6. Enter a **Comment** when the file needs an accompanying note. 7. Select **Category** in the attachment list to assign or edit the file category. 8. Use the file manager's **Open**, **Add/Remove tags**, **Rename**, or **Export** actions for the corresponding file-management task. 9. Select **unattach** when you need to remove the file's link to the purchase job. The attachment grid appears when at least one file is present and the list is not loading or in an error state. When no files are present, the attachment area shows its empty state. When loading fails, select **Try Again** to reload the attachment list. ![Look at the Attachment tab and the result of opening it.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/9ebec54220129fde0b5aa3226e0b6c2f.png) **Result:** The attachment area shows the files associated with the purchase job, or its empty or retry state when no file list is available. ## Review Last Modifications **Last Modifications** is the purchase job's chronological history of actions performed by users. Use it to review the available history entries and expand an edit entry when it contains changes. Prerequisites - Open a saved purchase job with **Last Modifications** available. Steps 1. Select **Last Modifications**. 2. Select **Refresh** to reload the history. 3. Use the **Filter by user** field to narrow the history by user. 4. Use the **Filter by field** field to narrow the history by field. 5. Select a **Registration** entry when you need to review its history row. 6. Select an edit row that has changes to expand its details. **Result:** The history area shows the available chronological entries and any expanded changes for the selected row. ## When a follow-up surface is unavailable The available follow-up choices depend on the saved record. Use **Attachment** for supporting files and **Last Modifications** for history. Discussion and some file actions are not available on these follow-up surfaces. Steps 1. Choose the alternative that matches what you need. | If you need to… | Use this option | |---|---| | Keep a file linked to the purchase job | Select **Attach File** to open the files library. | | Remove a file's purchase-job link | Select **unattach** when the attachment area is editable. | | Download a file | Open the files library from **Attach File**. | | Reload a failed attachment list | Select **Try Again**. | | Correct a file or folder name | Use only the characters described by `Just '_'‘-''.' And '&' Characters Accepted`. | | Recover from `404 Page Not Found` | Open the saved job from the purchase-job list. | A completed file request can display `Your request was completed successfully`. **Result:** You have the available follow-up option for your task and its next action. ## Continue after reviewing the purchase job File and history review does not move the purchase job to another purchasing stage. After reviewing the follow-up information, return to the broader [Purchase job record](doc:purchase-job-record) or continue file maintenance in [Libraries and files](doc:libraries-files). **Result:** You know whether to continue on the purchase-job record or in the files library. # Lost reasons ## Lost reasons at a glance A lost reason is a named choice available when a sales job reaches the Lost stage. Administrators maintain this list when the choices used to describe lost sales jobs need to be added, changed, or removed. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | See the choices currently available | [Find the Lost reasons list](#find-the-lost-reasons-list) | | Check the list and its fields | [Understand the list and entry form](#understand-the-list-and-entry-form) | | Add, update, remove, or export a choice | [Add, update, remove, or export a reason](#add-update-remove-or-export-a-reason) | | Resolve a validation or deletion problem | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Maintain regret choices | [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Maintain cancellation choices | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain order-cancellation choices | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | ## Before you start The Lost reasons page uses the shared configuration list, so subscription access, permissions, and company setup determine which maintenance controls you can use. Prerequisites - Have access to the Sales configuration area. - Know that the list is filtered for the Lost sales-job stage and reason type. The list is available when the subscription branch does not replace it with an upgrade surface. **New** appears when new-item creation is available; the edit and delete controls appear only when your permissions allow them. The page receives the Lost-stage and reason-type filters as part of its route configuration. > [!NOTE] > Work from the headers visible in your list because company setup can change which columns > appear. ## Find the Lost reasons list Review or maintain the choices used for lost sales jobs. Prerequisites - Have access to the Sales configuration area. Steps 1. Open the Sales configuration area. 2. Select **Lost Reasons**. 3. Confirm that the page heading is **Lost Reasons**. 4. Confirm that the list header is **Name**. 5. Confirm that the visible sibling tabs include **Regret Reasons**, **Cancellation Reasons**, and **Order Cancellation Reasons**. ![Confirm the Lost Reasons heading, Name list header, and sibling tabs before maintaining a choice.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0bb8c7c7dea4889788dc3320e8fcbc37.png) **Result:** The Lost reasons list is open, with the choices displayed under **Name**. ## Understand the list and entry form The list currently shows one column, **Name**, and the entry form shows **Name** with a required marker. Other fields are handled automatically and are not fields you enter: | Field | What you use it for | |---|---| | **Name** | Enter the wording that users choose for a lost sales job. | The shared toolbar also exposes icon-only **Refresh** and **Settings** buttons. Selecting **New** opens the New Lost Reason dialog. The dialog contains the required **Name** field and an **OK** button. ![Enter a name in the required Name field in the New Lost Reason dialog.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/fd7da3adcde2f4bac1f5980bee89c2e4.png) ## Add, update, remove, or export a reason Prerequisites - The Lost reasons list is open. - You know the wording that users must choose when recording a lost sales job. Steps 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a new choice | Select **New**. | | Change an existing choice | Select the row's edit action. | | Remove an existing choice | Select the row's delete control. | | Prepare the list for export | Select **Export** to open the export options. | 2. If you selected **New**, enter the choice in **Name**. 3. If you selected **New** or the row's edit action, select **OK**. 4. If you selected the row's delete control, read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 5. If the confirmation is displayed, select **Delete**. After adding a choice, the page reports `Data saved Successfully`. After updating a choice, it reports `Data updated Successfully`. After removing a choice, it reports `Data Deleted Successfully`. **Result:** The list remains open with the maintained choice, or the export options are open. ## Handle access and list variations The sibling reason lists are separate choices for related sales-job outcomes, while this page remains focused on Lost reasons. | If you need to… | Use this list | |---|---| | Record why a sales job was regretted | [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Record why a sales job was cancelled | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Record why an order was cancelled | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | The page can show different maintenance controls according to subscription and permissions. The list headers also depend on company setup; work from the headers visible on your screen. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message on screen to choose the next action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the filter, then retry the action. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the entry and review the saved data that uses it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Retry the delete action or ask an administrator with the required permission to perform it. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep at least one choice in the list. | ## Continue after maintaining lost reasons Lost reasons support the Lost stage of the sales-job lifecycle. After maintaining the choices, use the sales-job lifecycle page to follow how a sales job moves through its stages. Use the sibling lists when the outcome is regret or cancellation rather than loss. The maintenance action changes the choices available for the Lost outcome; the sales-job lifecycle remains the place to follow a job's stage. # Create a direct purchase order ## Create a direct purchase order A direct purchase order is an order you enter from the direct-order route rather than from the inquiry or offer stages. It belongs to the purchasing flow, where the page identifies the work with the **MRQ**, **PO**, and **Received** stage indicators. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Prepare the purchasing workspace | [Purchase job procurement chain](./purchase-jobs-procurement-chain) | | Enter the main information and product rows | [Enter the main information and products](#enter-the-main-information-and-products) | | Complete order-specific fields | [Complete the order details](#complete-the-order-details) | | Save the order | [Save the direct purchase order](#save-the-direct-purchase-order) | | Continue with approval, activation, receipt, or amendment | [Purchase job orders](./purchase-job-orders) | ![Check the direct-order header, stage indicators, and product grid before entering data.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/b2a36ffd473bf008313c6dc4cec81a7f.png) ## Before you start Prepare the information and access needed to enter the direct purchase order. | Prepare | Why it matters | |---|---| | The purchaser | **Purchaser** is required on the form. | | The product type | **Product Type** is required on the form. | | A package title | **Package Title** is required on the form. | | The products and quantities for the order | The product area starts with `No data` until product rows are available. | | An editable direct-order context | The main fields require the page and subscription conditions to allow the form. | The order panel has additional fields whose required status depends on your company configuration. Prepare the order information that applies to your work before you enter that panel. ## Open the direct purchase-order form Open the form to create a new direct purchase order. **Prerequisites** - You know the direct-order entry route. - You have the purchaser, product type, package title, and product information ready. **Steps** 1. Select **+ Direct P.O.**. 2. Confirm that the direct purchase-order form is open. **Result:** The direct purchase-order form is open. ## Understand the direct-order form The direct-order form combines header information, a product grid, stage indicators, and save controls on one page. The header contains **Branch**, **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, and **Package Title**. The required marker appears on **Purchaser**, **Product Type**, and **Package Title**. **Branch** is shown without a required marker. The product grid has these rendered columns: | Group | Columns | |---|---| | Product identity | **Category**, **Group** | | Requested quantity | **MRQ Qty.**, **MRQ type**, **Qty**, **Unit** | | Dates and references | **Required Receiving Date**, **Job no.**, **MRQ** | | Vendor-list and progress | **V.L.**, **Is limited V.L.**, **Stage** | The product area can show `No data`. The page also shows the **MRQ**, **PO**, and **Received** stage indicators, together with **Save** and **Save and Close**. ## Enter the main information and products Enter the header information first, then prepare the product rows that belong in the direct purchase order. **Prerequisites** - The direct purchase-order form is open. - You have the purchaser, product type, package title, and product information ready. **Steps** 1. In **Purchaser**, select the purchaser for the order. 2. In **Product Type**, select the product type for the order. 3. In **Package Title**, enter the title for the package. 4. Review **Branch**. 5. Review the **Products** area. 6. In the product grid, review **Unit** for each product row. 7. In the product grid, review **Stage** for each product row. The options are `UNVERIFIED`. **Result:** The header information is entered and the product area is ready for the order rows. ## Complete the order details The order details describe delivery, payment, status, costs, and item-level values for the order. The order panel is available only under its page, subscription, editability, order-stage, and saved-order conditions. | Field | Entry rule | |---|---| | **PO No.** | Complete it where your company configuration requires it. | | **Delivery Time** | Complete it where your company configuration requires it. | | **Delivery Term** | Complete it where your company configuration requires it. | | **Forecasted Receiving Date** | Enter a date that is not earlier than the order date. | | **Payment Method** | Complete it where your company configuration requires it. | | **Payment Period** | Complete it where your company configuration requires it. | | **Status** | Review the order status. The options are `UNVERIFIED`. | | **Forecasted Logistics Costs** | Enter a non-negative value. | | **Logistics Costs** | Enter a non-negative value. | | **Rate to** | Enter a non-negative rate when the local-currency-rate control is available. | The option values for **Delivery Time**, **Delivery Term**, **Payment Method**, **Payment Period**, **Status**, **Unit**, and **Stage** depend on the lists available when the relevant control is shown. The **Product Type** list also depends on the values available when the form is open. **Prerequisites** - The order panel is available for the direct-order state. - You know the delivery, payment, status, and cost information for the order. **Steps** 1. In **PO No.**, enter the purchase-order number when the field is required. 2. In **Delivery Time**, enter the delivery period and select its available time value. 3. In **Delivery Term**, select the available delivery term. 4. In **Forecasted Receiving Date**, enter a date on or after the order date. 5. In **Payment Method**, select the available payment method. 6. In **Payment Period**, enter the payment period and select its available time value. 7. In **Status**, review the available status. 8. In **Forecasted Logistics Costs**, enter a non-negative value. 9. In **Logistics Costs**, enter a non-negative value. 10. In **Rate to**, enter a non-negative rate when the control is available. **Result:** The available order details contain the delivery, payment, status, and cost values for the direct purchase order. ## Save the direct purchase order Use **Save** or **Save and Close** after entering the information required by the form. The page validates the order before saving. **Prerequisites** - The required header information is complete. - The available product and order details are complete. **Steps** 1. Choose how to submit the order. | If you want to… | Select | |---|---| | remain on the page | **Save** | | close the form | **Save and Close** | **Result:** The form validates the direct purchase order before the save operation continues. ## Resolve validation and error messages Use the message shown on the form to correct the related information, then return to **Save**. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Check PO mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required purchase-order fields. | | `Please insert at least one PO` | Add a purchase-order entry before saving. | | `Check mandatory field(s)` | Complete the required fields marked on the form. | | `Please insert at least one product` | Add a product to the product area. | | `Order must have at least one item` | Add at least one order item. | | `Please enter action for each milstone ` | Enter an action for every payment milestone. | | `Invalid input. The value must be greater than 0 and cannot exceed 999,999.00` | Enter a quantity greater than 0 and no greater than `999,999`. | | `Invalid input. Please enter a non-negative value` | Replace the value with zero or a positive value. | | `Invalid input. The tax rate must be between 0 and 100` | Enter a tax rate from 0 through 100. | | `An error occurred while processing your request` | Review the entered information and retry the action. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters and retry the action. | | `Package products cannot be empty` | Add a product to the package before saving. | **Result:** The form contains values that satisfy the validation message shown for the failed action. ## Continue with the saved purchase order A saved purchase order continues into the purchase-order workflow. Later work includes approval, activation, receipt, amendment, and other actions for an existing order. Select [Purchase job orders](./purchase-job-orders) for those state-dependent actions. **Result:** The order is ready for the next purchase-order workflow step. # Regret reasons ## Regret reasons at a glance A regret reason is a named explanation for a sales opportunity that is regretted before it continues through the sales flow. PAMS uses this list to name why the opportunity was regretted. The sales flow includes regretted sales stages alongside inquiry, offer, order, and delivered stages. A regret reason helps colleagues understand why an opportunity stopped before an offer was submitted. The regret-reasons list covers the **Name** field, available maintenance actions, the conditions that change those actions, and the messages associated with saving and deleting a reason. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Read the purpose and scope of regret reasons | [Regret reasons at a glance](#regret-reasons-at-a-glance) | | Reach the configuration list | [Find the regret reasons list](#find-the-regret-reasons-list) | | Add or change a reason | [Add or maintain a regret reason](#add-or-maintain-a-regret-reason) | | Understand the field and list actions | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Fix a validation or save problem | [When maintenance does not work](#when-maintenance-does-not-work) | | Review regretted sales records | [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs) | | Maintain lost reasons | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Maintain cancellation reasons | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Maintain order-cancellation reasons | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | ## Before you start Before maintaining the list, review existing values so that each name remains distinct and useful to the people reviewing sales outcomes. The list and its actions depend on the configuration access available to your account. **New** is shown only when new-item creation is allowed and the new-item control is not hidden. Row editing is available only when editing is allowed, and the delete menu is available only when deletion is allowed. ![Sign-in page visible before the configuration list](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/0e94131633c246360b3bd71c9ee420ec.png) The list's columns come from the configuration for this reference entity. Work from the headers and fields visible in your own list when you review or maintain a reason. Prerequisites - You can open the sales configuration area. - You know the reason name you want to add or change. - You have confirmed that the new, edit, or delete action is available before starting that task. ## Find the regret reasons list After checking your access, open the sales configuration list for names assigned to regretted sales opportunities. Prerequisites - You can open the configuration area. Steps 1. Select **Configuration**. 2. Select **Sales**. 3. Select **Regret Reasons**. 4. Use the neighbouring sales reference lists when you need a different sales reason list: | If you need… | Open | |---|---| | Reasons for lost sales work | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Reasons for sales cancellations | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Reasons for order cancellations | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | **Result:** You are on the sales regret reasons configuration list. ## Understand the list and form After opening the list, use the configured fields to review or maintain a selected reason and the configured columns to review the list. | Area | What you use it for | |---|---| | List | Review the configured regret-reason values. | | **Name** | Enter the text that identifies the regret reason. | | New-item form | Add a reason when **New** is available. | | Edit form | Change a selected reason with the edit control in the row's action column. | | Delete menu | Review the confirmation message for a selected reason. | | Export options | Choose a list export when export is available. | The **Name** field is a text box and is required. The list configuration shows **Name** as the visible data field. Paging, column headers, row filters, and header filters are disabled in this configuration. Only **Name** is visible in the form for this list. The other configured fields are hidden and non-editable. The **Name** field appears in the new or edit form when the selected reason and form configuration allow it. The action column contains controls for editing and deleting. To change a reason, select the edit control in the row's action column. To remove a reason, select the delete control in the row's action column, then review `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. Use **Save** to commit a new or edited reason, **Cancel** to leave the form without saving, and **Export** to open list export options. ## Add or maintain a regret reason After reviewing the list, add, change, remove, or export a regret reason. Prerequisites - You are on the regret reasons configuration list. - For a new value, **New** is available. - For a change, the edit control in the row's action column is available. - For removal, the delete control in the row's action column is available. Steps 1. Choose the maintenance action that matches your task: | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a new reason | **New** | | Change an existing reason | The edit control in the row's action column | | Remove an existing reason | The delete control in the row's action column | | Export the list | **Export** | 2. For a new or edited reason, enter the reason text in **Name**. 3. Select **Save** to validate and save the new or edited reason. 4. If the form does not pass validation, correct **Name** and select **Save** again. 5. Choose the additional action that matches your task: | If you need to… | Action | |---|---| | Review the deletion choice | Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`, then choose **Delete** or **Cancel**. | | Leave the form or confirmation dialog | Select **Cancel**. | | Open the export choices | Select **Export**. | 6. If you opened the export choices, select **Export** in the export dialog. **Result:** The selected form, confirmation menu, or export choices are the current surface. ## Handle access and setup variations If an action is unavailable after you review the list, check your account access and the configuration used for the reference list. | What you are trying to do | What to check on screen | |---|---| | Add a reason | Check whether **New** is available. | | Change a reason | Check whether the row's edit action is available. | | Delete a reason | Check whether the row's delete menu is available. | | Read the list | Work from the columns shown for your configuration. | | Export the list | Check whether **Export** is available. | The configured list can provide its own column set, so use the fields and headers that appear in your list rather than expecting every reference list to look the same. Use only the actions that appear for regret reasons. ## When maintenance does not work After checking the available action, use the message you see to decide what to check next. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Name is required` | **Name** has no value. | Enter a reason in **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The value contains characters rejected by the form. | Remove the rejected characters from **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Data saved Successfully` | A new reason was saved. | Return to the list and review the saved value. | | `Data updated Successfully` | An edited reason was saved. | Return to the list and review the updated value. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | A confirmation asks whether to remove the selected reason. | The confirmation menu provides **Delete** and **Cancel**. | If the list shows a different set of columns, work from the columns displayed for that reference list. ## What to do next After resolving a maintenance issue, use regret reasons in the sales flow as named explanations for regretted opportunities. When you need to review the sales records in that outcome, open [Missed, regretted and cancelled jobs](doc:missed-regretted-and-cancelled-jobs). When you need to maintain a neighbouring reason list, use [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons), [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons), or [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons). # Cancellation reasons ## Overview Cancellation reasons are reference values that explain why a sales record leaves the sales lifecycle as cancelled. Maintain them when your team needs a new value, a clearer name, or a value removed from the list used for cancelled sales work. Cancellation can occur at three points in the sales lifecycle: | Record point | What the cancellation reason supports | |---|---| | Potential | Explains why an early sales opportunity was cancelled. | | Offer | Explains why an offer was cancelled. | | Order | Explains why an order was cancelled. | Opening the **Cancellation Reasons** page loads the list for the **Cancelled** status. The list contains one visible **Name** column. | If you need to… | Go to… | |---|---| | Open and identify the list | [Find the cancellation-reason list](#find-the-cancellation-reason-list) | | Learn what appears on the page | [Understand the list and form](#understand-the-list-and-form) | | Add, edit, or delete a reason | [Maintain cancellation reasons](#maintain-cancellation-reasons) | | Search, filter, refresh, import, or export | [Search, filter, and use list tools](#search-filter-and-use-list-tools) | | Resolve an access or surface difference | [Handle access and surface variations](#handle-access-and-surface-variations) | | Resolve a message after an action | [When an action does not work](#when-an-action-does-not-work) | | Work with the sales lifecycle | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Open a related sales reference list | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons), [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons), or [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | ## Before you start Before you change a cancellation reason, have the name you want to use ready. The controls available to you depend on your access. | Before you start | Why it matters | |---|---| | Know the reason name | Saving requires a non-empty name. | | Have permission to create | **New** appears when your create access allows it. | | Have permission to edit | Selecting a row can open its edit form when your edit access allows it. | | Have permission to delete | The row delete action appears when your delete access allows it. | | Have permission to import or export | **Import** or **Export** appears in **Settings** when the matching access allows it. | Use only the actions that appear on your page. ## Find the cancellation-reason list The cancellation-reason list is the configuration sales list titled **Cancellation Reasons**. Use the title and the **Name** column to distinguish it from the related sales reason lists. **Prerequisites** - You have access to the configuration area. **Steps** 1. Open the configuration area's sales list for cancellation reasons. 2. Confirm that the page title is **Cancellation Reasons**. 3. Confirm that the list uses the **Name** column. 4. Confirm that the list displays five rows. ![Identify the Cancellation Reasons title and the Name list.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/5c2352843e75234cbe87dc6efa8111b6.png) **Result:** The **Cancellation Reasons** page is open with the **Name** list visible. ## Understand the list and form The list is a single-column reference list. **Name** identifies each row, while **Reason** is the field label used when you edit a row. The page also provides list tools above the rows. | Area | What you use there | |---|---| | List | **Name** identifies each cancellation reason. | | Edit form | **Reason** is the field for changing the reason name. | | List tools | **Refresh**, **Table Layout**, and **Settings** control the list view. | | Settings | **Filter Row** shows or hides the grid filter row. It starts disabled. | | Editing and deletion | Select a row to open its edit form when you have edit access. Use the delete control on that row when you have delete access. | The list does not show column headings or paging controls. The identifier is not shown, so work from the **Name** and **Reason** labels. Use the controls on each row to edit or delete a reason. ## Maintain cancellation reasons Use the procedure that matches the change you need. ### Add a cancellation reason Add a reason when the list needs a new explanation for cancelled sales work. **Prerequisites** - The **Cancellation Reasons** list is open. - **New** appears on the page. - You have the reason name ready. **Steps** 1. Select **New**. 2. In the new-reason dialog, enter a non-empty value in **Name**. ![Enter a cancellation reason in the required Name field.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/3530f5ff9987093f5d0c3dcbb3a18ef3.png) 3. Select **OK**. 4. Confirm `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The new reason is added to the list and the dialog closes. ### Edit a cancellation reason Edit a reason when its name no longer describes the cancellation clearly. **Prerequisites** - The **Cancellation Reasons** list is open. - You can select the row you need to change. - Edit access allows the edit action. **Steps** 1. Select the reason row. 2. In the edit form, change **Reason** to the required name. ![Review the Reason field in the edit form.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/d8baacb9357007e9af2f8b5d30232c78.png) 3. Select **Save**. 4. Confirm `Data saved Successfully`. **Result:** The changed reason appears in the list and the edit dialog closes. ### Delete a cancellation reason Delete a reason when the reference value is no longer needed. **Prerequisites** - The **Cancellation Reasons** list is open. - The row's delete action appears. **Steps** 1. Open the row's delete action. 2. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Select **Delete**. 4. Confirm `Data Deleted Successfully`. **Result:** The selected reason is removed and the list refreshes. ## Search, filter, and use list tools Use the list tools to locate a reason or prepare the list for review. **Keyword to Search** searches entered text; **Filter Row** provides a filter row; **Refresh** reloads the list. **Prerequisites** - The **Cancellation Reasons** list is open. **Steps** 1. Choose one list task: | If you need to… | Select or enter… | |---|---| | Search by text | Enter text in **Keyword to Search**. | | Show the grid filter row | Open **Settings**. | | Reload the list | Select **Refresh**. | | Open the list-layout choices | Select **Table Layout**. | 2. If you chose to show the grid filter row, select **Filter Row**. 3. If you entered a filter value, select **Refresh**. 4. If **Export** appears, open **Settings**. 5. If **Export** is available, choose one format: | If you need… | Choose… | |---|---| | An Excel file | **Export to Excel** | | A PDF file | **Export to PDF** | 6. If you selected an export format, select **Export** in the `Exporting List:` window. **Result:** The requested list task is complete, and the list remains ready for the next action. ## Handle access and surface variations Access determines which maintenance actions appear on the **Cancellation Reasons** page. The same configuration area also lists **Lost Reasons**, **Regret Reasons**, and **Order Cancellation Reasons**. Each list has its own reference values. | If you do not see… | Check… | |---|---| | **New** | Your create access for cancellation reasons. | | The edit control | Your edit access and the row you selected. | | The delete control | Your delete access. | | **Import** in **Settings** | Your import access. | | **Export** in **Settings** | Your export access. | When a reason row is selected, the edit form uses **Reason**. When you add a reason, the new dialog uses **Name**. Use the list title and **Name** column to remain on the **Cancellation Reasons** list when moving among the related sales lists. If an action produces a message, use the guidance in [When an action does not work](#when-an-action-does-not-work). ## When an action does not work Use the message on screen to choose the next action, then return to the list when the action is complete. | What you see | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Can't save empty item` | The reason has no name. | Enter a non-empty value in **Name** or **Reason**, then select **OK** or **Save**. | | `Are you sure you want to delete this item?` | The page is waiting for deletion confirmation. | Select **Delete** to continue. | | `Data saved Successfully` | The save completed. | Check the updated row in the list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | The deletion completed. | Check that the row has left the refreshed list. | | `Parsed server error text` | The save or delete request returned an error message. | Correct the entry or retry the action using the message shown. | | **Export to Excel** | Excel is the selected export format. | Continue with **Export** in the `Exporting List:` window. | | **Export to PDF** | PDF is the selected export format. | Continue with **Export** in the `Exporting List:` window. | | `Exporting List:` | The export format window is open. | Select **Export** after choosing a format. | ## Continue with related sales lists The sales reference lists provide named reasons for different outcomes. The cancellation list supports cancelled work at the potential, offer, and order points in the sales lifecycle. | If your next task concerns… | Open… | |---|---| | A cancelled potential, offer, or order | [Sales jobs lifecycle](doc:sales-jobs-lifecycle) | | Lost sales work | [Lost reasons](doc:configuration-sales-lost-reasons) | | Regretted sales work | [Regret reasons](doc:configuration-sales-regret-reasons) | | Cancelled orders using order-specific reasons | [Order cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-order-cancellation-reasons) | After adding or editing a reason, check the updated row and `Data saved Successfully`. After deleting one, check the confirmation, `Data Deleted Successfully`, and the refreshed list. After searching or filtering, check the matching rows. After exporting, check the format you selected. # Order cancellation reasons ## Order cancellation reasons An order cancellation reason is a named reference value that identifies why an order was cancelled. A reference list is a maintained list of named values. This list sits with the sales configuration lists for the cancelled-order stage. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Open the list | [Find the order cancellation reasons list](#find-the-order-cancellation-reasons-list) | | Understand the field | [Understand the list and entry form](#understand-the-list-and-entry-form) | | Add, change, or remove a reason | [Add, change, and remove a reason](#add-change-and-remove-a-reason) | | Resolve a message | [When maintenance does not succeed](#when-maintenance-does-not-succeed) | | Maintain the other cancellation-reasons list | [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons) | | Continue with order work | [Orders](doc:orders) | ## Before you start The order cancellation reasons list is a reference list, so prepare access to the sales configuration area before you maintain a value. **Prerequisites** | Before you start | What to expect | |---|---| | Sign in | The page is protected by signed-in access. | | Have the required subscription feature | The list and its configuration controls appear when the subscription includes the configured feature. | | Check the available actions | **New**, the row edit action, and the row delete action depend on the page configuration and available permissions. | When these conditions are in place, find the page headed **Order Cancellation Reasons**. ## Find the order cancellation reasons list The order cancellation reasons list is the sales configuration page whose heading reads **Order Cancellation Reasons**. **Prerequisites** - You are signed in. **Steps** 1. Open the order cancellation reasons page from the sales configuration area. ![Check that the Order Cancellation Reasons list and its Name column are visible.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/2781b139330c593a5b8e17ccdc6bbb31.png) **Result:** The **Order Cancellation Reasons** list opens with the **Name** column and the configured rows. ## Understand the list and entry form The list uses one reader-facing field: **Name**. It is the value you maintain for each order cancellation reason, and it appears as the visible list column and in the add/edit form. | Screen area | What you use | Rule | |---|---|---| | List | **Name** column | The list displays the configured reasons in rows. | | Add/edit form | **Name** | Enter a value before saving; the field is required. | | Other record details | No additional entry fields | The screen does not ask you to enter the hidden record attributes. | After identifying the **Name** field, continue to the maintenance procedure. ## Add, change, and remove a reason Maintaining this list means adding a new reason, changing an existing **Name**, removing a reason, or exporting the list. **Prerequisites** - You have opened the order cancellation reasons list. - You know the name that belongs in **Name**. **Steps** 1. Choose the action that matches your task. | If you need to… | Select | |---|---| | Add a reason | **New** | | Change a reason | The edit action for the selected row | | Remove a reason | The delete action for the selected row | | Export the list | **Export** | 2. Complete the selected action. | If you selected… | Complete the action | |---|---| | **New** or the edit action for the selected row | Enter the reason in **Name**, then select **Save**. | | The delete action for the selected row | Select **Delete** in the delete menu. | | The delete menu, but you decided to keep the row | Select **Cancel**. | **Result:** A new reason produces `Data saved Successfully`; an edited reason produces `Data updated Successfully`; a deleted reason produces `Data Deleted Successfully`; and an export starts from the list toolbar. ## Handle access and list variations The actions available on this list depend on the page's configuration and access state. Use the action that is visible for your task rather than looking for a hidden action. | What you see | What to do | |---|---| | The list is unavailable | Check that you are signed in and that the subscription includes the configured feature. | | **New** is not shown | Use the existing list actions available to you. | | The row edit action is not available | Use the list for review. | | The row delete action is not available | Use the list for review. | | You are removing the only remaining row | Keep at least one item; the page reports `Must have at least one item` instead of deleting the last item. | **Result:** You either continue with the action that is available or keep the existing list unchanged when a page condition prevents the requested action. ## When maintenance does not succeed Use the exact message on screen to choose the correction. | Message | What it means | What to do | |---|---|---| | `Name is required` | The **Name** field has no value. | Enter the reason in **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | The value contains a character rejected by the field rule. | Remove the rejected characters from **Name**, then select **Save**. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | The item is related to saved data. | Keep the item and use the related saved-data process instead of deleting this reference value. | | `Failed to Delete` | The delete operation did not complete. | Review the list and try the delete action again when the item is available for deletion. | | `Must have at least one item` | The list cannot be reduced below one item. | Keep one reason in the list. | The save and update success messages are `Data saved Successfully` and `Data updated Successfully`. The delete success message is `Data Deleted Successfully`. After correcting a message, return to [Add, change, and remove a reason](#add-change-and-remove-a-reason). ## Use the maintained reasons in the sales workflow After maintaining this reference list, continue with [Orders](doc:orders) for order work. If you need the separate sales list for non-order cancellation reasons, use [Cancellation reasons](doc:configuration-sales-cancellation-reasons). # Account types ## Account types at a glance An account type is a name you maintain for classifying accounts in PAMS. Use this page when the names available for account classification need to be added or removed. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the list and its available tools | [Find the Account types list](#find-the-account-types-list) | | Add a type name | [Add an account type](#add-an-account-type) | | Remove a type name | [Remove an account type](#remove-an-account-type) | | Continue to the records that use account types | [Accounts](doc:accounts) | | Create an account after its types are available | [Create an account](doc:create-account) | | Maintain another sales reference list | [Inquiry types](doc:configuration-sales-inquiry-types) | ## Before you start The Account types page is a reference list in **Configuration** under **General settings**. The list and its actions appear according to your company's subscription and your access rights. Before you start, check the following: | Check | What it controls | |---|---| | The required configuration feature is included | The Account types list is available. | | You have permission to add or delete | The corresponding action appears. | | Your list has loaded | The columns and rows available to you are visible. | The list headers come from your saved configuration, so use the headers that appear on your screen. No saved account record is required before you open the list. ## Find the Account types list Open the reference list and identify the tools available on your screen. Prerequisites - The Account types configuration is available to you. Steps 1. Select **Configuration** in the main menu. 2. Select **General settings**. 3. Select **Account types**. 4. Confirm that the page heading reads **Account types**. 5. Read the headers shown in the list. 6. Locate **New** in the page header. 7. Locate the icon with the title **Refresh**. ![Identify the Account types heading, list header, and page tools.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/a4421a1e71d138a915fe3d2708b11943.png) **Result:** The Account types list is open. The list shows a **Name** column and the page tools that your access allows. ## Understand the list and form The list displays account-type names. The form uses one field for the name, while the identifier and company fields are not part of the form you maintain. | Area | What you use it for | Rule | |---|---|---| | List | Review the account-type names | The headers shown depend on your configuration. | | New form | Enter the account-type name | **Name** is required in the page settings. | | Identifier and company data | Support the record behind the list | These fields are hidden and not editable here. | The **Name** field appears after you open the new form. It appears when the selected item exists and the configured field is visible in the form. The page opens with the list rather than an open form. Use the list headers and the **Name** field in the form as two separate views of the same reference data. ## Add an account type Maintain an account type by adding a new name. Prerequisites - You have permission to add an account type. - You have the account-type name you want to maintain. Steps 1. Select **New**. 2. In the form, enter the account-type name in **Name**. 3. Choose how to finish the form: | If you need to… | Select | Result | |---|---|---| | Save the new name | **OK** | The form submits the change. | | Leave the name unchanged | **Cancel** | The form closes without saving. | **Result:** A successful new entry displays `Data saved Successfully`, and the list refreshes. ## Remove an account type Remove a name that is no longer needed. Prerequisites - You have permission to delete the row. - You have identified the row from its **Name** value. Steps 1. Choose the deletion outcome that matches your task: | If you need to… | Steps and result | |---|---| | Remove the row | Select the available **Delete** control for the identified row. | 2. Read `Are you sure you want to delete this item?`. 3. Choose the outcome after the confirmation prompt: | If you need to… | Select | Result | |---|---|---| | Keep the row | **Cancel** | The row remains in the list. | | Remove the row | **Delete** | A successful deletion displays `Data Deleted Successfully`. If it is the last item, the page displays `Must have at least one item`. | **Result:** The row remains unchanged after you select **Cancel**, or the deletion outcome appears. ## When maintenance does not work Use the message you see to choose the corrective action rather than repeating the same action. | Message | What to do | |---|---| | `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | Remove the forbidden characters from the list filter text and apply the filter again. | | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | Keep the row and review the saved data that refers to it. | | `Failed to Delete` | Keep the row and retry the deletion after checking that the row is available for deletion. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep the remaining item; the list cannot be empty. | ## After maintaining account types After a successful maintenance action, continue using the refreshed list or move to the account records that use the classification. | Result on screen | Next action | |---|---| | `Data saved Successfully` | Continue working with the refreshed Account types list. | | `Data updated Successfully` | Review the updated name in the list. | | `Data Deleted Successfully` | Continue with the remaining names in the list. | | `Must have at least one item` | Keep the remaining account type and leave the list populated. | Account records use the account-type classification. Continue with [Accounts](doc:accounts) to work with those records, or use [Create an account](doc:create-account) to add one. # Order activation conditions ## Order activation conditions at a glance An order activation condition is a named requirement that can be used in the activation-conditions area of a sales order. Maintain the names on this page, then use them on the order where you track whether each condition has been applied, completed, and dated. | If you need to… | Go to | |---|---| | Find the list and recognise the page | [Find the Order activation conditions list](#find-the-order-activation-conditions-list) | | Understand the available field and list data | [Understand the list and fields](#understand-the-list-and-fields) | | Use a condition on an order | [Use the maintained conditions in sales orders](#use-the-maintained-conditions-in-sales-orders) | | Add, edit, delete, or export a condition | [Add and maintain a condition entry](#add-and-maintain-a-condition-entry) | | Resolve a blocked action or message | [Handle unavailable actions and messages](#handle-unavailable-actions-and-messages) | | Continue working with the order | [Continue with sales-order work](#continue-with-sales-order-work) | The order-side table names the condition and records **Applied**, **Completed**, and **Completed on**. A condition name maintained here is therefore the label you recognise when reviewing the order's activation requirements. ![Identify the Order activation conditions list and its Name column.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/23f5bfd136f67149e7ed73178a669acb.png) ## Before you start The Order activation conditions list is available through the configuration area. Access is guarded by the signed-in access check, and the list depends on the configuration subscription feature. **Prerequisites** - Sign in with access to the configuration area. - Have the condition name you want to maintain ready. - If the list is replaced by an upgrade surface, use the subscription row in [Handle unavailable actions and messages](#handle-unavailable-actions-and-messages). The available actions also depend on the page's permissions. The list requests permission for import and export, and the page controls determine whether **New**, edit, or delete actions are available. The **Name** field is required when you create or edit an entry. ## Find the Order activation conditions list Reach the reference list and recognise the correct sales configuration page. **Prerequisites** - Sign in with access to the configuration area. **Steps** 1. Open the configuration navigation. 2. Open the Sales settings list. 3. Select **Order activation conditions**. 4. Confirm that the selected **Order activation conditions** entry is shown in the navigation. 5. Confirm that the page title is **Order activation conditions**. The list is part of the sales configuration navigation alongside **Lost Reasons**, **Regret Reasons**, **Cancellation Reasons**, **Order Cancellation Reasons**, **Units**, **Delivery Terms**, **Payment Methods**, **Guarantee Types**, **Account Types**, **Offer Status**, **Order Status**, **Inquiry Status**, and **Activity Purpose**. Select one of those entries when your next task uses that reference list instead. ![Check the landed page title, sales settings navigation, and New control.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/c1c7a9eba0f49e5695136315f0aa142a.png) **Result:** The Order activation conditions list is open. **New**, **Refresh**, and **Settings** are visible on the page. ## Understand the list and fields The list uses one visible subject field: **Name**. Four rows were visible in the list, and the rows appear without column headings. | What you see or use | Details | |---|---| | **Name** | Text value; visible in the list and form; required when the form validates it; first form field. | | Other configuration values | Not displayed in the list. | The visible list column is **Name**. The list does not have a subject-specific tab; the sales configuration navigation provides the route to sibling reference lists. ## Use the maintained conditions in sales orders Use the order panel when the activation-conditions feature is included. The order-side area lets you insert the current condition names and track each one through application and completion. **Steps** 1. In the order panel, select **Order activation conditions**. 2. If the order has no conditions, select **Insert activation conditions**. 3. In the condition table, review the condition name in the condition column. 4. Select **Applied** for a condition when the requirement has been requested. 5. Select **Completed** after **Applied** is selected. 6. Enter or select **Completed on** after **Applied** and **Completed** are selected. The order-side controls follow these rules: | If you need to… | Use this order-side control | |---|---| | Mark the condition as requested | **Applied** (yes/no) | | Mark the requested condition complete | **Completed** (yes/no), after **Applied** is selected | | Record when completion occurred | **Completed on**, after **Applied** and **Completed** are selected | | Identify which condition you are reviewing | The condition-name column | The **Completed on** date is constrained by the order date and today. > **Note:** **Completed** remains unavailable until **Applied** is selected. **Completed on** remains > unavailable until both **Applied** and **Completed** are selected. **Result:** The order's activation-conditions area shows the maintained condition names and the available applied, completed, and completion-date controls. ## Add and maintain a condition entry Use this procedure to maintain the names that appear in the order-side condition table. **Prerequisites** - Open the Order activation conditions list. - Have the condition name ready for a new or changed entry. **Steps** 1. Select **New**. 2. In the new-item popup, enter the condition name in **Name**. 3. Activate **OK** to submit the entry. 4. For an existing entry, choose the required action. | If you need to… | Do this | |---|---| | Edit the entry | Select its row or row edit action. | | Leave a delete menu without removing the entry | Open the row delete menu. | | Remove an entry | Open the row delete menu. | 5. If you selected the edit option, change **Name**. 6. If you selected the edit option, activate **OK**. 7. If you selected the cancel option, select **Cancel**. 8. If you selected the delete option, select **Delete** when more than one row exists. 9. When export is available, select **Export**. The new-item popup shows **Name** with a required marker. The row edit action has no text label. Selecting a row opens its edit surface when editing is available. Deletion is blocked when the list contains only one item. The save operation validates the form before it calls the list service; a successful create adds the new row, and a successful edit updates the existing row. **Export** opens the export dialog when it is available. The dialog presents an export option and its **Export** action. ![Enter the required Name value in the new-item popup and review the OK control.](https://atloriaassets.blob.core.windows.net/assets/a438221c-c1af-407c-b9e6-a56c986db846/41ff700481743c08ad105adb4dde0502.png) **Result:** The condition list shows the maintained entry after a successful create or update, or the row remains in the list after **Cancel** closes the delete menu. ## Handle unavailable actions and messages The list can show a different surface when the subscription feature is not included, and individual actions depend on the page's configuration and permissions. | Situation | What appears or happens | |---|---| | The subscription excludes the configuration feature | The upgrade surface replaces the grid. | | New access is available | **New** is available when the new-button setting allows it. | | Edit access is available | The row edit action and row-click editing are available. | | Delete access is available | The row delete menu is available. | | Import or export access is available | The corresponding list action is available after its permission check. | | The list contains one item | The delete operation shows `Must have at least one item`. | When a required value is missing, the form displays `Name is required`. A shared required-field validation can display `This Field Is Required`. When a filter contains forbidden characters, the page displays `Forbidden characters detected. Please remove them and try again.` | After this action… | The page can display | |---|---| | Save a new entry | `Data saved Successfully` | | Update an existing entry | `Data updated Successfully` | | Delete an entry | `Data Deleted Successfully` | | Try to delete the last remaining item | `Must have at least one item` | | Delete an entry related to saved data | `Related to Saved data, Can't be deleted` | | Delete fails for another reason | `Failed to Delete` | ## Continue with sales-order work The maintained names continue into the activation-conditions area of the sales-order record. From there, use the order-side table to review **Applied**, **Completed**, the condition name, and **Completed on**. For the surrounding order work, continue to [Sales job record](doc:sales-job-record) or [Orders](doc:orders). For related setup, open [Order status](doc:configuration-sales-order-status), [Delivery terms](doc:configuration-sales-delivery-terms), or [Payment methods](doc:configuration-sales-payments-methods). The order-side use remains the next step after maintaining a condition name.